REESE LIBRARY UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. Received A < -cessions No. . ^ /Q & Shelf No. *m&-^.i88 SELECT TREATISES OF MARTIN LUTHER, THE ORIGINAL GERMAN, WITH '. ' PHILOLOGICAL NOTES, AND AN ESSAY ON GERMAN AND ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY. . SEARS AN DOVER: PUBLISHED BY ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDWELL. BOSTON : JOHN P. JEWETT AND COMPANY. NEW-YORK: M. H. NEWMAN AND co. 1846. A a. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by ALLEN, MORRILL, AND WARDWELL, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. PREFACE. THE volume here presented to the public, is designed for those who have already made a beginning in the study of the German language, and who wish to prosecute it with philo- logical accuracy. Helps of this kind in English are very scarce, if indeed they exist at all. Explanations that may be found in the common grammars or in the smaller diction- aries are not repeated here. Particular attention has been paid to the peculiar structure and idioms of the language, to the exact signification of difficult words, to synonymes, to the connection existing between etymology and usage, and, in short, to everything which should tend to remove from the mind of the student vague generalities in respect to the meaning of words and phrases. If the works of the German authors which are most in circulation, were provided with commentaries like the Greek and Roman classics, and the object of the present volume were to add one to the number, it might be objected to the plan of the work, that it embraces too much. But standing as it does alone, there is a demand that it should assume, as far as is practicable, the character of a manual of German philology, which may be used as a book of reference in read- ing other authors. With this object in view, the most idio- matic writer, the one who in great measure moulded the lan- guage to its present form, has been selected. Thus a text, of limited extent, has furnished occasion for ample commen- tary ; and such is the number of idiomatic expressions oc- curring in the author, and of others introduced in connection with them in the notes, that no small portion, it is believed, IV PREFACE. of the difficult idioms to be met with in the current popular literature may find an explanation by a reference to the In- dex of this volume. The synoptical view of German and English Etymologies is an addition to the plan of the work made at a late period, and containing a very few repetitions of what may be found in the Notes. It is hoped that the intrinsic merits of the pieces here se- lected will add to the interest of the work. With the excep- tion of the brief discourse on indulgences, which is neverthe- less important as giving us a view of Luther's early mode of thinking and style of composition, the selections are among the richest and most eloquent, not only of the author's works, but of the whole body of literature to which they belong. The address to the German nobility will render it conceiva- ble how he could so arouse the patriotic spirit of his country- men. His high-minded and irresistible appeal to the civil authorities on the subject of establishing and supporting pub- lic schools, will place him, at least, side by side with the ablest arid most philanthropic promoters of popular education at the present day. The specimens of practical commentary from his pen will furnish evidence of a religious character and of a degree of genius which some, in their ignorance, have felt disposed to deny him. B. S. Newton Centre, Oct. I. 1846. CONTENTS. Page. 1. Synoptical View of German and English words having the same etymology ...... vii 2. Sermon on Indulgences ...... 1 3. Exposition of the thirty-seventh Psalm . 20 4. Address to the German Nobility . . . .85 5. An Address in behalf of Public Schools . . .213 6. exposition of the fourteenth chapter of John . . 278 7. Fragment 361 CORRECTIONS. Page 5, line 2, read beitlt for ben* 6, note 2, strike out the period after feuter, 20, note 1, last line but one, read admitted for omitted. 21, note, line 8, read er for e$ 27, note, line 3, read gretfcit for grtcfcn. 29, line 4, read @(aitbcn for faltben. 31, notes, 1 and 2, for 6 and 7. 35, note 4, (>rf)CUtt)Cn is not in lne singular. See p. 56. n.3. 46, line 1, strike out the comma after mitffeiU 46, note 4, line 3, insert in at the beginning of the line. 52, line 7, read feilt for fctlt. 5^, last line but two, read cfyanbeit for 81, note 3, line 1, read has this for hast his. 117, line 2, read Urfallbg for Urfanb$* 199, note 3, read coJon, for semicolon. 289, note 3, line 2, read thine for their. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS HAVING THE SAME ETYMOLOGY. THE manner in which words substantially the same are represented in cognate languages, or in the different dialects of any one language, is, to a very great extent, conformed to fixed laws. An exact comparison of the English language with the entire family of the Teutonic dialects, with this end in view, would be of great service to the critical English scholar. In the present outline, nothing more is attempted than a mere sketch of the principal classes of words corres- ponding to each other in the modern English and the mod- ern German. Words that are so nearly the same as to be without organic changes, and those, which are either very dissimilar, or very irregular, are for the most part omitted, the chief object of the essay being to aid the me- mory of the student. It must not be supposed that the English is derived from the German, or the German from the English. The English is much the older form, resem- bling the old Saxon, the Gothic, and even the old high Ger- man, much more than it does the modern German. In those dialects, many words and forms of words common to them and to the English are found, which are not preserved in the modern German. It is to etymological analogies, rather than to derivations, that attention, in the following essay, is direct- ed. The classification is made according to the leading cha- Vlll SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF racteristic of the word. Other characteristics are explained in the remarks to which the figures, appended to the words, refer. 1. The vowel a in German frequently corresponds to an -sound in English ; and the vowel e, when short, corres- ponds in a few instances to . Staf, eel , even(ing) 16 , bench 1 ! t, heard 18 there 18 guest ^atlf, hemp22 and 17 ffar, clear t, knell meager l, meal neck 9?at>ef, needle ^atf, rest Saat, seed 18 , sheep 1 ? , shell f, sleep 23 and 17 steel tamm, stem ftdtt, stead 18 (tra$e, street 1 ^ bdt, deed 18 r weapon 17 , wield 18 @fpe, asp fern, far 21 feft, fast (firm) fet, flit $etrf), chalice 11 ?erd)e, lark 11 ^d^mevip, smart 23 and 15 fterben, starve 16 tern, star 21 heer, tar wasp NOTE. The word Abend is explained under No. 16. The word knell is much more restricted in its present signification than Kn all, which means any quick sound. Meager is now mostly used in a fig- urative sense, and the word lean corresponds more accurately to m a- ger. The termination en in Nacken is not an essential part of the word. Saat corresponds to seed in etymology, but not in significa- tion. S chale signifies any dish or vessel in the form of a shell. Wai ten is generally used of moral, and widd, of physical agency. Starve is used in a more specific sense than s t e r b e n, and corresponds nearly to the cognate word d a r b e n. GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. ix 2. In a certain class of words, and generally before the letters I and n, the vowel a in German corresponds to o in English. In a very few cases the vowel is o in German, and , or an a-sound in English. 2Ut, oldia fang, long bebaltcn, behold 18 9?afe, nose ramj, throng 18 fanft, soft 21 fatten, foidi 8 flatten, scold's (e)fang, song l)a(er, dollar* 8 $aafen, hook 2Gafo, batten, hold' 8 ,ftaffee, coffee 33orfe, fa(t, cold 18 borefyen, hearken 11 comb 24 rob, raw 19 ^ , load (gtVCb, straw 19 NOTE. Be h alien clears up the origin of our word beholden, (bound), which was such a puzzle to Dr. Campbell, and al?o of the word bcltohl (to see) i. e. to ho'd near, or before one's eyes. D rang means a press and trouble. See drSngen, No. 18. The prefix ge. is frequently depend- ent on usage alone, there heing no uniform rule for its insertion or omis- sion in certain derivative words. 3. In a few words, the vowel a long in German corres- ponds to i or ei in English. 9lcf)t, eight 11 9?ad)t, ,,ight" 25ram, brim nabc, nigh $rad)t, freight 11 @mt(jer, singer / might'- 1 @rf)(amm, slime^ , neighbor 1 1 (Strange, string 4. The vowel e in German, often corresponds to an i- sound in English, and t to an e-sound. The former is also represented by the diphthong ea in English. (T^, it" gelb, field fecfjtcn, figini' geben, give 16 SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF feben, live 16 ?eber r liver 16 fecfen, lick ^)ed), pitch 9?erf)t, right 11 (d)tt>efier, sister 23 dwepfe, snipe 23 and 13 fed) 3, six 'fpdben, spy ftecfen, stick jlreben, strive 16 tt>e(d), which 20 and 2l fdjmiereit, smear 23 fdjmtfeen, sweat 23 and ] 5 jTeben, seven 16 t^, seat 15 (gtrtd), streak" tief, deep 1 ? JPtrf)tt t q, weighty" and 25 ttnr, we 21 S3tber, beaver 16 ^Btcr, beer bid), thee 18 $iebcr, fever 16 fttffc, felt 15 frtfd), fresh glimmer, gleam (mica) gfunmen, gleam (Skied)?, Greek" ftifce, heat 15 , keel ', knee f me 8d)fitten, sled 18 NOTE. Pitch comes from the Anglo-Saxon pic, and these arc con- nected with the Latin pix. Spfthen is placed here on account of its analogy, the (I being equivalent to e, and the i to y. B li h r e n. See s p a h c n above. E r n s t is an abridged form from E r n c s t. t, break" babtCJt, bear , earth 18 earnest ejfen, eat 14 gebet, feather 18 bcbeit, heave 16 , hearth 18 , heart 15 flebeit, cleave 16 (ecfen, leak fcftnctl, lean fd)Creit, shear fprerfjClt, speak 21 and " ftcbfcn, steal tread 18 weave 16 r weather 5. The o-sound and the i-sound, (or in a few cases the - sound) are used for each other. 3301)110, bean gM, flea 23rob, bread gfottC, fleet ENGLISH AND GERMAN WORDS. XI , great" l, liear fo3, less 9?0tb, need 18 )br, ear >tf east easier , red' 8 t, swear 23 3 from, stream , death 18 t, dead 28orf)e, week 11 K>0b(, well iBoIfe, welkin )tt>5(f, twelve 15 r$, ore geben, go $rabe, crow 19 clover loam tfeben, loan i'ebre, lore mow 19 , more roe , road (of the sea) fden, sow 19 fdjeften, scold 18 t, sword 23 and 18 soul n>el)e ! woe ! s iBertb, worth 3ebe, toei 5 ieben, love 16 fd)teben, shove 10 fd)ie^en, shoot 14 ob, if 17 , stick NOTE. The Dutch word klewer is intermediate between clover and Klee. The derivation of if, from the imperative of the Anglo-Saxon verb gifan, is doubtless an error. Not only does that fail to explain the meaning of the word, but it leaves the cognate forms, in the Gothic ibai; in old German, ibu, ube and obe ; in old Frisian, jef; in Icelandic, cf; in low Saxon, of; and in German, ob, unexplained. As these are all connect- ed, no derivation can be satisfactory which does not explain them all. 6. The diphthong nil in German, corresponds to the diph- thong ea (or a long e-sound), to the vowels o and u, and sometimes to i, in English. eye batten, hew 19 beam &aufe, heap 17 braiten, brew 19 ^CUlpt, head 18 Xll SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF fallen, chew'i and 19 e, leaf 17 faitfcit, leap 1 ? Wail, pea(coek)!3 raiLfcen, reek 11 rfjailbe, sheaf 17 Scfyraube, screw 19 tailb, deaf 17 bait, dew' 9 ;raunt, dream 18 g, dreary is and 25 rob raub, rough room f, shovel' 7 ftauert, stow 19 au, tow 19 aube, dove 16 traucn, trow 19 S3 fait, bine baiiew, (en)dure Tallin, thumb 3 * 9Dtouf(efe(), mule 9D?aufbeere, mulberry faugen, suck frfjailber, shudder , bride 18 33railtia,am, bridegroom gaujl, fist <0aitt, fd)fau, sly NOTE. Auge, eye, is introduced here with a little license. As the u in German, when it is the last letter of a diphthong, often becomes w in English, the words, brew, hew, chew, screw, dew, stow, tow, and trow, may he regarded as coming under a modification of the rule, which can- not he more particularly specified here. R a u h, rough, is a little irreg- ular, and is mentioned here for the sake of convenience. The same may he said of R a u m, and b 1 a u. D a u e r n, will remind one of the old English word dare, and the Latin duro. Maul (esel) and mule, come from the Latin mulas, the animal that works at the mola, or mill. Groom in bridegroom, is gum in Anglo-Saxon. In the Gothic and An- glo-Saxon, (/iima means a man. Sty is substantially conformed to the rule, the y being equivalent to /. 7. The letter u in German, corresponds to an o-sound, mostly oo, o, and ou in English ; and o short in German, to u short, for the most part, in English. 5BeI)ltf, behoof SSritt, brood 18 2Mltme, bloom SSllbc, booby S5(Ut, blood 18 S3ud), book 1 * GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. xiii gfoth, flood^ $110, foot" gut, good 18 llf, hoof !, stool, etc. etc. , brother 18 , bond bosom , fox ford '8 gitlfen, foal glitter, fodder genug, enough $Ufy, COW'9 $ltpfer, copper 13 flitter, mother Blithe, rod '8 @rf)ltb/ shoe (Stlirm, storm tfntn, dois , wonder worm 3, wort'5 JU, tois 3imge, tongue's X5U, thou 18 @rilUb, ground ltnb, hound Jung, young SDfainb, mouth 21 and 18 rilllb, round , pound 13 , powder south 18 (ge)fllllb, sound (cf)ll(ter, shoulder 18 5Gimbe, wound buck , thunder , murder (er)mcrbern, murder 9icnne, nun nist summer , sunder , sun (Stoflf, stuff stouble , tun (cask) Storf, turf full , wool (wul) NOTE. Fallen, gen ug, Schuh, Puder, Stoppcl, and Wolle only approximate the rule. In thun and zu, we see the reason of the peculiar pronunciation of do and to. The final n (for en) in than, sondern and other verbs, being a mere ending 1 , is not taken into the account. The few instances in which i in English corresponds to u in German, are D u r s t, thirst ; G u r t h, girth ; Z u n d e r, tinder, and per- haps some others. 8. Ue in German, corresponds sometimes to /, sometimes to e, and sometimes, though rarely, to 0, in English. , thin18 fatten, fill XIV SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF fitnf, five* 1 fiibfen, fee] ^Urfl, first (prince) pfie, feet 14 itrtef, girdle 18 QtitU, green fnittten, knit gritffeu, greet 14 f itjfen, kiss ittfe, help 1 ? titgen, lie 12 Bitten, heed 18 9!)2ul)le, mill fitfW, keen 9Sftim$e, mint 15 fitg, sweet 14 (Sti'trf, stick itbet, evil 16 @itnbe, sin bliiben, blow 19 S5ritber, brethren 18 g(iil)en, glow 19 53itd)e, beech tyiipfen, hop 13 Mitten, bleed 18 fitbl, cool $itfte, coast NOTE. M u n z e, coin ; S t Q c k, pieca ; h t e n, guard; and k h n. 6oW, vary somewhat in their signification from the English words of the same etymology as now used. 9. The diphthong et in German, corresponds sometimes to an e-sound, sometimes to an o-sound, and less frequently to the vowel a in English. (23e)rett> ready 18 tt>etrf), weak 11 bleach 5Betett, wheat 20 tte, breadth 18 three 18 S5etn, bone gfctfrf), flesh betbe, bothi 8 fret, free btCtt, broad 18 heath and hea- Qnrf)C, oak 11 heal [then 18 (gib, oath 18 (etten, lead 18 ^tg^n/ own tnetlien, mean etn, one md)en, reach etjl:, ghost , sheath 18 ei$, goat 14 sweat 14 fyei% hol y 12 l, deal 18 ^etm, home GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XV betfer, hoarse 22 ffretcfyen, stroke 11 betg, hot 14 ei t q, dough 18 ffeiben, clothe 18 3 e ^ e / token 1 ^ and J1 ?Ctm, loam $tt>et, two 15 met I?, most Dteibe, row' 9 (Sin, an etfe, soap 17 dfl:ett, last e, spoke 11 ?eiter, ladder 18 stone 9D2eifter, master NOTE. F 1 e i s c h, meat ; m e i n e n, to be of opinion ; T h e i 1, part ; w e i c h, soft ; and Z e i c h e n, a s/V/, agree with their corresponding words hotter in etymology than in their present signification. 10. The diphthong oil in German, sometimes corresponds to an /-sound, or an e-sound in English. gear, fire greuntv fr end en, lighten (light) 11 flreuen, strew 19 nine fteiicm, steer fcf)CU r shy tt)eitr, dear 18 11. (5b in German, corresponds sometimes to gh in Eng- lish, and sometimes to k, and vice versa. In a few words cfc goes into dge, and g into k. g(ud)t, flight Jraefyt, freight 3 33rerf)Cn, break 4 (@C)lad)tcr, laughter 23iicr), book 7 rarf)en, laugh etcf), dike (etc^t, light , ?erd)e, lark 1 ?td)t, light madjen, make )t, might 3 5Ki(cf), milk t, night 3 (gtC^et, sickle r neighbor 3 Storcr), stork red)t, right 4 fpred)en r speak 21 t, slaughter ttjac^Ctt, wake t, foresight XVI SYNOPTICAL VIEW OP 93anf, bench i ffrerfeit, stretch , birch f itt)f, chill (and cooF) , chalk (lime) ftcfcn, choose , chafer , chamber 2 * SBritrfe, bridge** $dfe, cheese C^cfc, edge fallen, chew* 9 erfe, hedge (, churl 5Hltcfe, midgeS chin Dfatrfen, ridge 8 , crutch gtttf, finch fttanQ, clank , church flutgen, clink , chest Seeing, rank 12. ^5 final in German is frequently represented by y in English, or by i, if another letter or syllable be appended. SBetntgen, betray 9ent>e$en, Norway befttgen, belie 8 SWegen, rain etmg, any3 O^oggen, rye^ $efge, felly fagen, say ^(cge( r flail fcfyfognt, slay 23 fltegen, fly @ege(, sail 1 fruit (Stegef, seal hail (Stag^fegcf, stay-sail , honey (Stetge, stair 3 , 2l mgei,hill8 ZCLQ, dayis 2ager, lair and layer -Jftotttag, Monday (egen, lay (Sottntag, Sunday (ge)(egen, lain grettag, Friday (tcgen, lie ^iBerftag, work-day 9ftagt>, maid $&fttoQ, fast-day mant'g, many (@e)6urtb^tag r birth-day SRetgef, marU SWtttag, mid-day (noon) Tltegen, may t)0rmittag r fore-midday l, nail Dfteujafyr^tag, newyears-day GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XVH ), daily $Befl, way tt>ageit, weigh 3i e 3 c l/ tlle15 NOTE. F r u c h t, and weigh ( w 'A g c n ) arc slight variations from the rule. In theOdnglo- Saxon, the letter y performs the same office that it does in German, and corresponds to the same letters in English. 13. The letter p in German often has f appended to it. especially in words of foreign origin. ^flange, plant 15 ^pflaume, plum 6 ^flafter, plaster ^fojie, post pflitcfen, pluck ^>flocf r plug 7 9)fUl<}, plough 7 Wropf, f, apple wpfert, bop 8 $ampf, camp $ repf, crop $rampf, cramp $ltpfer, copper 7 opfern, offer (sacrifice) -])fab, path 18 f, pale (palus) pan , parish (paroisse) , pepper^ , pipe and fife , pillar fennig, pennyia NOTE. K a m p f means a battle rather than the fidd. , pound 7 f, rump (lampfen, stamp limpf, swamp j^opfen, stop tap 15 14. @, or g at the end of a word or syllable in German, corresponds to the t in English. 2(prtcofe, apricot efien, eat* beiffen, bite befier, better fca, that' 8 ba thati 8 f, throttle (thrush) 18 it 4 r fat, or vat foot 7 (ejbig, bit rte^, grit ritficn, greet 8 XV111 SYNOPTICAL YIEW OP bate 9D?6rfer, mortar hornet 4 Sftaficf, rattle kettle (SefynXtg, sweat 23 and 9 let 1 trafie, street^ ?03, lot fug, sweet 8 mejfett, rnete @pte$, spit ntitjlen, must $Bafier, water nettle tt>a3 what 2( > 15. T 7 initial in English, corresponds to $ in German ; and t final, generally to . In some cases, the t before is omit- ted. 3ahm, tame 23o!$, > n, f bl , toe 5 ^er^, heart 4 3eit, tide (time) gtfj, felt 4 3dm, ten ^t6?/ heat 4 jteren, (at)tire ^a^e r cat 3eid)en, tokens 5Diaf^, malt 3tnn, tin 5^itn^e r mint 8 / net JH, to? ajg, salt' ^olf, toll . fdjme^cit, smelt 23 3ltnber, tinder @rf)mil^, smut 23 * cbrert ' i tear 4 f e ^ en ' Set gerren, ) fit?en, sit gtt>angi(J, twenty 12 fcbmer^, smart 23 3n?et^, twig @fc(ge, stilts 4 3unge, tongue 7 ftrofeen, strut 7 wit NOTE. Z i c r c n, corresponds to the old English tire, and to the An- glo-Saxon tier. Z e i c h en, a sign, agrees only in etymology with token ; and so Zu g, the act of drawing, with tuy ; M U n z e, coin, with mint. S c h m u t z, Jttth, with smut ; and S c h m e r z, pain, with smart. GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XlX 16. The letter v in English, often corresponds to its cog- nate b in German. 2fbenb, even 1 probctt, prove 23iber r beaver 4 ^)robjl, provost ebeit, even 9^abe, raven $teber, fever @a(be, salve rab, grave frfwbeit, shave " , have @teb, sieve , heave ftebett, seven , harvest 1 liber, silver Ffebeit, cleave ftrebett, strive 4 $nabe, knave ailbe, dove6 Teben, live 4 itbef, evil 8 ?eber, liver 4 tt>ebett, weave 9tClbe, nave ^Btjfmiltf), bismuth f, navel NOTE. Abend is a participle from the verb a b e n, which is derived from a b. With Tag understood, it means the departing day. There can be but little doubt that even, which also has a participial form, evening, is of the same derivation, the letter d in A b e n d, being dropped. K n ab e, a boy, agrees with knave only in etymology, or in the obsolete significa- tion of the latter. Pr o b s t, or Pro p s t, is a conniption of the Latin, praepositiis. The English form is nearer to the original, than the Ger- man. W i s s m u t h is placed here, because v and w are often treated as the same letter in German. 17. The letters b and v are cognate with/; the former is also cognate with p, and this sometimes with f. f)Clfb, half dfen, haven $a(b, calf 9teffo nephew Iteb, lief Sdjaufft, shovel l, carbuncle eitfcf, devil 10 , proof $o(f, folk (gtab, staff - afe(, table SBorfe, purse wife XX SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF t, double (Stmfe, stripe crib ttef, deepis plappmt, blabb ^Baffeit, weapon 1 beadle 4 Hf, hemp , bolster fyelfen, help f, people fl r f?/ harp 9fcppe, rib Qaffen, gape (Stopped stubble ^t-Ctfen, gripe fcllffe, hip 8 5lflFe, ape fycffen, hope Offen, open (2rf)tffe, ship fcfyarf, sharp retf, ripe NOTE. W e i b, woman, has a different meaning from what wife has come to have. N e ffe is placed here with nephew, partly because the ph in the latter is equivalent to v (in old German nevo), and partly be- cause the English comes directly from the Anglo-Saxon nefa. Both Teufel and devil have a common Greek origin. Neither is derived from the other. So the words B 6 r s e, and purse, come from the Greek word (3vpaa. B o r s e has come to signify the exchanc/e. P e d e 1 1 and bead/e come from the Latin pedellus. P 6 b e 1, like people, and the French peuple, comes from populus. Greifen signifies to seize. 18. The letter d is cognate both with t, and with th, and the two last with each other. , elder Ott, God SSett, led i'trtef, girdle* tnetett, bid gitrten, gird 8 SBfatt, Made fyart, hard SSUtt, hlood $Ut, hood? SSofcen, bottom^ Bitten, heed 8 brctt, broad 5 fnetCU, knead 4 SSntt, hi'ood Wlittel, middle Cttef, idle (empty) rettCll, ride fitter, udder Dfatttg, radish 1 gutter, fodder? (gattef, saddle glettcn, glide v^C^atten, shade GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XXI Cite, side fettett, seldom22 jTebcflt, settle ^titter, cinders t, spade t, stead fa dance eitfH, devil 10 od)ter, daughter 11 tracjen, drag tret ben, drivei 6 treteit, tread 4 triltfen, drink trommel, drum 7 rcpf, drop'3 tt>dfen, wade U>art3, wards under 33ab, bath SBntber, brother? SBitbe, booth? @I)rifientl)Um, christen- thatch [dom , thanks bar, there* bareilt, therein 1 aunt, thumb 24 betn, thine benfen, think 4 benn, then (and than) berer, their btrf, thick btefe, these ut,q, thing thistle bod), though" >Crn, thorn brdll^Clt, throng brefeijen, thresh bret, three 9 bit, thou 7 X)ltr|l, thirst bitltlt, thin 8 (rbe, earth 4 geber, feather 4 fitrber, further J^Ctbe, heath and heathen ,V>erb, hearth 4 ?eber, leathei- 4 (teben, seethe (5 lib, south gflttb, flood 7 ?D2ett)e, mead 4 9?il!l)e, rod and rood 7 ba(, dale Abater, doli ar 2 t, dewi, 19 tbeitr, dear tbttn, do 7 5Bttttt)e, widow 0rt, forth ?atte, lath month , moth XX11 SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF tmtfetlb, thousand SSater, father ritmm, thrumb 34 ^Better, weather 4 NOTE. Blade does not commonly signify leaf, like B 1 a 1 1. B o d e n ground, soil, and bottom, is but rarely used in this last signification. E i t e 1, empty, has not the sense of idle. H u t corresponds to hood and fiat. R e t ti g is radic in Anglo-Saxon, radichio in Italian, and is deriv- ed from the Latin radix. S el ten has various forms in the different Teutonic dialects. T r a g e n goes into drag and draw. Compare the Latin traho. T r o m m e 1 takes the form of T r u m m c in low Saxon, and Tromme in Upper German. Wilrts, as a termination, not bearing the accent, corresponds exactly to the English termination wards in towards, backwards, etc. Thatch has a more limited signifi- cation than Dach, roof. The same is true of feather, as compared with F e d e r. H e i d e, a heath, i. e. a desert, and then a plant that grows there ; and finally, as a translation of paganus, an idolater living in the country or desert, a pagan, a heathen. Thaler is a coin which was first struck in a certain Thai, dale, ( J o a c h i m s - 1 h a 1, in Bohe- mia) . It is an abbreviation of Joachims-thaler . W i 1 1 w e is wi- dowo in the Gothic, and witawa in old German. 19. W, at the end of a word in English, stands in the place of fy, g, (or rf), or b) u and t) in German, and of j in the old dialects, which is omitted in the modern German. S5eKen, bellow ClU, sow blitben, blow (Sefyne, sinew 4 brauen, brew 1 jlauen, stow 2 , glow 8 jlreuen, strew , hew 1 @trot), straws l)0l)(, hollow Xa\\, tow faiten, chew 11 , l bau, dew* 8 $(aue, claw trauen, trow 2 fraben, crow 5 $ub, cow 8 (2Mafe) bafg, bellows 1 nwben, mows bte^en, bow , mallow 23o t (}ert, bow gnaw S3org, barrow 3 D^eibe, rows borgcn, borrow fden, sow 5 23utg, burrow (borough) GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. , elbow SSftorgen, morrow forfeit, follow fngcn, saw , furrow frf)tt>e(gen, swallow 23 , gallows (SOttje, sorrow \MflCborn, hawthorn^ tagCU, dawn 18 betltgen, hallow 3 <*(& tallow maw SBogel, fowl marrow NOTE. B e 1 1 e n means properly to bark. Our words bell and bull are cognate with it. In this word there is no trace of the letter j. Ho hi is also irregular. The w may come from the h transposed. Compare S e h n e. S a e n is sajan in Gothic. T r a u e n, to trust, old English trow Bah re, barrow, i. e. bier, perhaps belongs to this class of words. Hallow comes from Anglo-Saxon halyian for halir/an. Mag en properly means stomach. Sorge now means anxiety, care. From schwelgen comes S c h w a 1 g, the sicallow, or throat. 20. The letter h before w, wbich is of frequent occurrence in the old German dialects, and is retained and inserted after the w in English, is dropped in the modern German. 2Batf (ftfd)), whale ; old German hual n, wheat; Gothic hwaiteis , what ; Dutch wat ; Swedish Jivas if, while ; old Saxon huila >, whilom , whine ; Gothic guainon tt)Ctf5, white ; Gothic hveits ; old German huiz IDCltn, when ; old German huenne t, whose ; Gothic hvts ; old German hues , whet ; old German huezan ; A. S. hvettan 2Berft, wharf; Anglo-Saxon and Swedish hvarf ttnfpeni, whisper NOTE. It will be observed that though the h comes after the w in English, it is pronounced as if it preceded. XXIV SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 21. A liquid is frequently dropped in the English ; less frequently in the German. ty{$, as ; low German as , other ; Gothic anthar ; old Saxon athar and othar- , bee ; old German bine and bie btr, thee fetn, far ; old German verre and verren 1 fi'mf, five ; Gothic fimf Anglo-Saxon Jif8 Ifltr, me ; old Saxon mi , mouth ; Gothic munths ; Anglo-Saxon muth 7 , youth ; Anglo-SaxonjwgwrfA 7 HUH, now ; in eight dialects nu t, yester(day)25 , priest ; from presbyter ; Anglo-Saxon preost ^Pfortner, porter 13 ^ofinann, rosemary ; Lat. ros man's, or ros marinus recfytten, reckon fanft, softs fold), such ; Anglo-Saxon svilk 1 spur; old German sporo and spor* t/ star: old German sterro and sterna 1 , speak ; Anglo-Saxon sprecan and specan 11 %. burnt, tower ; old German turre ; Anglo-Saxon tor old Saxon us ), which ; Anglo-Saxon hvilc 4 VtJtt, we ; old Saxon we and wi ; Swedish vi 23i'U*be, burden SSrClUttgam, bridegroom 6 ?ateme, lantern r lynx myrtle pilgrim (Splitter, splinter stair 1 t, world ; old German wtrlt 5 GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XXV 22. The liquids are sometimes interchanged with each other ; and r is sometimes used for s, and is sometimes trans- posed. t, alum frtemt, freeze (A. S. frysan) t, bosom 5 <*[/ hare SSob'en, bottom 18 (tter) Keren, loose 5 S5ufen, bosom war, was , dagger* ), dirk 5 SBreitnen, burn fetter 14 SBltrfte, brush , child 1 ! SBorfte, bristle ? >rben, order SBrette, board 5 , 18 r, organ 1 brttte, third 18 purple bitrd), through^ 3e(t, tent 15 $nrd)t, fright^ t)ltnbert, hundred iron 9^0^, (h)orse ; old German hros and ors 23. @rf) in German, when it comes before I, m, n, or corresponds to s in English. @ct)taf, sleep 1 (Sofymtb, smithis fcf)lageit, slay 12 fd)mteren, smear (5cr)(etm, slime (Srf)mnfe, smt 15 fcfyfanf, slank @d)nee, snow 5 fcr)(au, sly 6 (Sefynepfe, snipe 13 fct)(etffen, slice (split) (Bcftnupfett, snuff i 3 fd)(imm, slim ar^, swart(hy) fofymecfen, smack 1 (Sdhtvebe, Swede fcf)met^en, smite 14 cfyroein, swine frf)nte^en, smelt 15 @rf)tt>etg, sweat 14 , smart 1 , 15 fcfywetten, swell c XXVI SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF @(f)tt>erf> sword 5 , 18 fcfynmtgeit, swing rfjroefter, sister 4 fd)tt>ten, sweat 4 fcfyttnmmeit, swim fcfyworen, swear U OTE. S c h generally corresponds to s h ; in a few cases, to s c, as in Schraube, screw ; S c h r i ft, siript. The words smack, smut, swart w swarthy, do not correspond exactly in sense with the German words. 24. Mb in English corresponds to tttttt or tit in German. aum, thumb 6 amm, lamb f, humble(bee) 9iltmmer, number comb 2 drummer, slumber chamber 11 tltmmeht, tumble , crumb 25. The letter g in German sometimes corresponds'to y in English. ($df)ttett, yawn dfef)t, yeast , wardrobe gdtten, yell yarn eftcrn, yesterday) APPENDIX. It will be useful to add here a few of the most common words of Latin origin which have become so far Germanized as not always to be recognized by the student. Stltrtfef, auriculus S5rttte, beryllus (chrystal) 2fcf)fe, axis 33iuf)3(baum), buxus ager iDec^ant. decanus , alumen ^ber r aper , angustia ^fl'tgr acetum S5afe(, baculus gabet, fabula , bursa (purse) gcilfe, falco f, breve (epistle) fcrffcb, falsus LATIN AND GERMAN WORDS. XX vii afcttt, Phasianus (bird ^labltlC, nomen of Phasis) *Pdrf)t, p..ctmn f, f 'iiestra ^))cbc( r pedellus (beadle) \ f hesternus ^P^rf)/ pix JOafm, calamus ^Peitbef, pendulum Johannis -WflH/ P av hodie W^/ palatium (Palatinate) orn, cornu ^tf/ pilum trren, erro ^Pforte, porta calvus ^)offl(, poculum camera ^llfDCr, pulvis I, cancelli ^Utlft, punctum ^ar(, Carolus D^flb, rota r, cathedra SWlltn, ruina ?, castanea frf)rciben, scribo caseus C^H^ef, scutella P, gula @cnf, sinapi calix jTcf)Cr r secnrus T, career tcgef, sigillum catena (Bptfgef/ speculum ^td)er, cicer (chick-pea) ^l)(be, syllaba p, claustrum i^afar, talaris (long gown) caput ^tafel, tabula , corpus ^cr^tC r tertia (pars)] corona fyrctt, thronus ?0r(becre), laurel tfrf), discus ?0ren^ r Laiirentius (Law- Ubr, hora rence) Ufllt, ulrnus 50^afe(, macula Ult^C, uncia, (ounce) mabtten, moneo 3Setf, Vitus (Saint V.) ntafen, moio vt>abr, verus mare iffitlbclttl, Guilielmus murus 3w^/ census p, monasterium 3^^0 circu ^ us (minster) 3^^^/ Cltnera >, mola(mill) XXV111 LATIN AND GERMAN WORDS. Words are very commonly adopted from the Latin with no other important change than the omission of the final syl- lable ; as, 2(bgofut, 2Jd)*)f, 3lbocat, 2fpparat, cabuc, @on* futat, Secret, gigur, frfoot, ran, ($typ$, 3Mog, Stfatitr, 9?er*>, Dfjtcw, ^ra'feft, ^rtmat, Duart, @enat, fractal, t)rann, Ufur, SSafaf, SSocaL See Gram. p. 56. When the final syllable of words ending in osus is omitted, the vowel o is commonly changed into 6 ; as, ^IntbtttO^, Ctt* rtoe, ,qener6$, ina,emo$, futmnod, ffanbalo^, tnberite. When the final syllable of words ending in ulus, a, um, or ola is dropped, the vowels, u, a and o in the penult are chang- ed into e, that is, the words all end in el in German ; as, Id, (SptfW, (Srempel, gtfler, QttanM, Snfel, 3ubef, itel, SWafcI, sDZantpd, ^atrtfel, SWtrafcI, SWu^fcI, Drafef, ^arttfef, Dtegel, (gpectafet, ^cmpel, SBelnfet, SSocabcL The hard sound of the letter c before those Latin terminations is preserved by changing the letter into k. When two syllables are dropped, entia goes into eit$ ; itius, a, um, into t ; and arius sometimes into ar and sometimes into dr ; as, Slccibcng, Slbolefccn^ SJppetcnj, 2Iubten^, X)if* feren^ ^le.qan^ (Smineng, rcrefcen|, (^.rperten^ grequeng, 3nf)cren$, Snfofcng, 3ftans (instance, objection urged), ?tceng, ^untjTccng, D?eeren^ ; propers, ^ulpts, ^crenj ; Sitfh'g, SWottg, SJcnar, @mtfar, S^otar, Seminar, Ofttfftcna'r, ecretd'r* Substantives ending in tas, gen. to^5, change that termina- tion into fdt in German ; as, ^OttttClf, gacitltd t r J^tnxatUtat, 3mmnnitdt, 3mpnnttat, 3ttbttr batf jet fo bleibcn lafifen, nnb nacfy ifyrer 28eife reben. 3nm anbern fagen ffe, 5 ber 5lb(ag nimmt nid)t fyin ben erjlen ober anbern t)etf, 6 ba^ i|^ bie D^ene ober 25eicf)te, fonbern 7 ben britten nefymtfdj bie enngtt)nnng. 1 DerBussedrei Theile. Der Basse is in the dative case, " assign to repentance three parts," i. e. divide it into three parts. 2 Nemlich, more commonly written namlich. Observe the use of the colon, which stands not onlj before quotations, but often before words in apposition. 3 Genugthuung, penance, properly satisfaction made by submit- ting to the penalties imposed by the laws of the church. 4 Schwerlich, like our word hardly, expresses, 1. difficulty, 2. a high degree of improbability. This latter is the more common sig- nification. " And although this division according to their view (theory), is scarcely or rather in no wise found (to be) grounded in the Holy Scriptures, nor in the ancient holy Christian teaching, still we wilt for the present let that remain so (let that pass) and speak after their manner." Oder aach gar nichts (for nicht), or even not at all. Tn order to perceive the force of au c h, also, cven t it will be necessary to regard' the phrase, not in the light of a contrast to the preceding word, but in that of a climax, " probably not (s c h w e r I i c h) or even not at all, or certainly not." 5 Sagen sie. When a principal sentence begins with anything which has the nature of an adverb, whether it be a proper adverb, an adverbial phrase or an adverbial conjunction, the nominative com- monly follows its verb. 6 AndernTheil. Ander frequently stands for z w e i t e r, like alter for secundus in Latin. Strictly speaking, it designates a thing differing from the one first named. " Secondly, they say indulgence does riot remit (nimmt nicht hin) the first or the second part, i. e. repentance or confession, but the third, viz. penance." i So ndern, but, is derived from the verb sondern, to sunder, to separate, and is therefore used only after negatives. Only in such SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 3 3ttm brtttcn, bte GJemigtbumtcj nn'rb wetter 1 getbetfet in brei bet(e, bag ttf, 23et:n, gaflcn, Slfaiefen, atfe, 2 ba 93e* ten, begretfe 3 attertct 4 $3erf ber See(cn etgen/ 5 ate fefen, cases could it have its natural antithetic force. Aber, but, is a mere adversative, meaning originally, again, but again, as we see in the word abermal, a second time. So in the word Aberglaube, it signifies faith of a secondary, counterfeit, or spurious character, that is, superstition. 1 We i t is of the same etymology as the English word wide, the t and the d being continually interchanged in the different Teutonic family of languages. The Germans use the word to represent dis- tance simply without reference to form, as it respects length and breadth. Hence weiter means farther. * A 1 so, in German, never corresponds to the English word also. The second particle in the compound, so, is the significant one, and the first, or all (equivalent to gan z) simply gives intensity to the parti- cle so, meaning altogether so. Out of the primary meaning so or thus, grows the derivative signification, consequently ; though in this sense, it never expresses logical necessity, like f o I g 1 i c h, but a looser con- nection of antecedent and consequent, which may be accidental. 3 Begreifen means first and literally to take hold of, to seize with the hand, as in Gen. 27: 21. Tritt he rzu, mei n Son n, das s ich dich begreife. Greifen is of the same origin as the English word gripe, p and /being often interchanged, and corresponds to the Latin prehendo. The second sense of b e g r e i fe n is to comprise, to comprehend, as in this place. The third is to apprehend. B e g r i f f, means a simple conception, or notion, or that which is expressed by a single word, and not by a sentence which would be Geda nke. 4 Allerlei. Lei was formerly a substantive signifying kind, and governed such genitives as aller, vieler, mane her, zwei- e r, but finafty coalesced with them, forming what are now regarded as adverbs, as, allerlei, vi elerle i, mancherlei, zweierlei, all sorts of, many sorts of, etc. 5 Der Seelen eigen. Eigen now governs the dative ; for- merly it governed also the genitive, as the Latin adjectives proprius, similis, etc. govern sometimes the dative and sometimes the genitive. " Prayer comprehends every kind of act peculiar to the mind." Der Seelen, is here probably the genitive singular governed by eigen. So Luther uses the word eigen elsewhere, as des romischen Stuhls eigen. Formerly feminine nouns were declined in the 4 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. btcfyten, 1 borcn @otte3 2Bort, prebtgen, febren imb bergfei* cfycn. 2 gaften begretft atferfet 2Gerf ber dafteumg gteifdje^, ate wacfyen, arbetten, fyart ^er, 3 $fetber 5l(mofen begvetft atterfet gute $Berfe ber ebe unb fyer^tgfeit gegen beit 3Rad)fleit* 3um merten ijl bet ifynen alien unbe$tt>etfelt> bag ber W)* singular number as well as in the plural. We find many remains of such declension in hereditary forms of expression, as, a u f E r d e n, instead ofaufder E r d e, on earth. 1 D i c h t e n originally signified to make, to produce, as may be seen in the works of the earliest German authors. At a later period, it came to be used only of the productions of the mind, 1. to meditate or think, in a general sense, 2. to compose works of imagination. Com- pare the Greek words TTOISU and Troiijaie. It is here used in the for- mer of these two significations (to meditate), now obsolete, except in such phrases as Die h ten und Tr achten, purposes and efforts. Its present prevailing signification is, to icrile poetry or romance. 2 D e r g 1 e i c h e n. In the early German, the word g 1 e i c h com- monly governed the genitive. Hence we have many compound words, formed by the coalescence of g 1 e i c h and the genitive of the word it governs. Dergleichen, for derer gleichen, is form- ed from the adjective g 1 e i c h and the relative pronoun d e r, which both in the genitive plural and in the feminine of the genitive singu- lar is derer. This form, therefore, was used, when the substantive to which it referred was either in the plural or in the singular of the feminine. When a masculine or neuter singular was referred to, dessgleichenfordessen gleichen was used. We find some- thing very similar in the Latin words tjusmodi and cujusmodi. This will be best illustrated by a few examples; as, dergleichen Thiere kenne ich nicht, / am unacquainted with animals of the kind. Sanftmuth, deren gleichen mir inderGe- schichte noch nicht bekannt i s t, a mildness the Like of which is not knoicn to me in history. Er ist einMann, dessglei- chen ich noch nicht gesehen habe, he is a man, the like of whom I have never seen. Dessgleichen, likewise, also, is a conjunction. Dergleichen is not so used. 3 Hart[es] La g'e r. Before neuter substantives, the nomina- tive and accusative ending of the adjective e s is often omitted, es* pecially in familiar language or where no particular stress is to be laid upon the adjective. SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 5 Tag l)imummt btefetbcn 28erfe ber eniigtfwiutg, fitr bie (Simbe fd)u(big ] $u tbun ober aufgfe&t >en fo 2 er btefek ben Sffierfe atte fotfte Inmteljmen, bltebe nid)t3 @ute3 mefyr ba, ba3 tt>ir tbmt mocfyten* Sum fiinftcn ijl bet mefen gewefeu ettte groge unb nod) iutbefd)(ojTene Dputtou, ob ber 5ib(ag and) nod) etn>a3 mebr fywnebme, bemt 3 fofd)e aufge(cgte gute 28erfe, nem(td), ob er and) bte ^eftt, wefdje bte gottlid)e eredjtigfett fitr bte (Simbe forbert, abnefyme. Sum fed)^ten, fag 4 id) tfyre Dptnton un^eworfen 5 auf 1 S c h u 1 d i g with its dependent words, fXirdie Sande zu thun, qualifies the substantive W e r k e. The sentence is abrupt. Regularly it would be, Werke der Genugthuung, welche fUrdieStlndeschuldigzu thun oder aufgesetzt s i n d, " Indulgences release one from those works of satisfaction which are due (schuldig zu thun) for sin, or wh eh are impo- sed (by the laws of the church)." Aufgelegt would now be used instead of a u f g e s e t z t. A 1 1 e, which occurs twice in this paragraph, is the only adjective that is declined, when placed after its substantive. 2 S o, if, as in old English. " For if it should release from all these works, nothing good (no good work) would remain which we might perform." In modern German, w e n n is used instead of s o, which has become obsolete. 3 D e n n, in the old writers is the common word after comparatives, for which a 1 s, than, is now employed, except in a few cases requi- red by euphony, as mehr denn alle, not a 1 s a 1 1 e. "With many there has been a great and still unsettled question, whether in- dulgences release from anything more than such good works imposed (by the church), whether it remove also the penalty which divine justice demands for sin." 4 L a s s, for lasse. Such omissions of the final e in the first person singular of the present, are frequent in the older language and in colloquial style.. An elision in German, on account of the vowel with which the following word begins is not required, nor even al- lowed, at present, except in familiar conversation and in poetry. In the very next line we meet with sage ich without any elision of the final e of the verb. * Unverworfen, not reprobated. Though this is a participle, 1* 6 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. biefwiafyt f ba3 fage id), bag man anS fettter (Scfyrift 2 6e# tt>abren fann, baS gotttiefye ererfjttgfett etwag ^3ein ober <$emtgtl)iwn i ( ( id) feiner i'utbe nid)t mefyr gebeitfem 3tem/ 2 atfo hat er felbfl atfe bic 3 abfofoirt, ^Jiaria ^ttagbalena, ben @id)tbntd)ia,ett, bie Qrfyebredjerin K. Unb mocfyte rcofyl genie 4 l)6ren, wer ba$ anberS 5 bewdfyreu fotf, iwattgefefyeu, 6 bag etltdje X)octore^ fo gebaucfyt l)at, 7 Niemand aufgesetz (or rather aufgelegt) wUrden. " With a determination henceforth to practise the abovementioned works (B e t e n, Fasten, A 1 m o s e n), though they should be im- posed by no one," i. e. though not required by the discipline of the church. 1 Sosprichter. Eris often so used by Luther, in quotations, in which the pronoun does not refer to any preceding word, but to the general idea, easily supplied in each instance, of God as the au- thor of the Scriptures. In the present c:i e, e r might, indeed, refer to the word Christi in the preceding sentence. But it is altogether improbable that Luther had that word in mind. 2 I te m, a Latin word much used by the old German authors, in the sense of likewise, also, in enumerating particulars. In its Angli- cised signification, where it stands for the particulars themselves (the several items}, it comes about as near to the original, as the word tan- dem does when applied to the mode of harnessing horses at length, in- stead of abreast. 3 A 1 1 e die, all these. As in Greek, so in German, that, which came to be a definite article, was originally a demonstrative pronoun. In the old writers, therefore, we must expect to meet with the de- monstrative use of the word more frequently than in later writers. In Luther's works, it is constantly occurring. 4 M6chte gerne, an abrupt expression for ich mochte gern. Luther often omits the personal pronouns in the nominative in this way. Gerne is not now used in elevated style. 6 Das anders, that otherwise, \. e. the contrary. 6 Unangesehen, dass, notwithstanding ; a n g e s e h e n, d a s s, considering that. Sometimes the genitive is used with the former, dessen unangesehen, no regard being paid to that. This mode of expression is now limited mostly to legal forms. Dessen un- geachtet is now in good use. 7 Gedaflcht hat. Dauchten, an impersonal verb, now, ac- cording to the grammarians, requiring the dative, according to usage 8 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 3nm ffebenten, ba$ ftnbet man wot)!, bag ott etlicfye nad) feiner (Seredjtigfeit ffrafet, obcr bnrd) ^ein bringet $u ber 9?en, n>te im 89. ^pfafm : o f e i n e $ i n b e r rc> e r* ben fit n big en, will id) mit ber Sftutfyen ibre (Sitnbe fyeim fndjen, ab e r bod) meine 5 arm* fyer^igfeit n i d) t Don i I) n e n wen ben. 5lber biefe jlefyet in Sftemanbeg ewalt 1 nad)$ntajfen, benn atfein ; ja er n>itf (Te nid)t (aflen, fonbern erfprid)t, er (Te anflegen* 3nnt arf)ten, berf)al6en 2 fo fann man berfelben gebitnften ^)ein feinen 9^amen geben, njctg and) 3 9ttemanb, tx>a^ fie ift, fo jTe biefe Strafe nid)t i(l, and) bie guten obgenannten erfe nid)t tjl. 3nm nennten fage id), oo bie d)rt(^id)e jtird)e nod) fyent befd]Ioffe nnb an^erffaret, ba$ ber 5i6Iag mebr benn bie IKerfe 4 ber cnngtbnnng binnebme ; fo mare e^ bennod) tanfenbmal befifer, ba|5 fein (5t)rijl:enmenfd) ben often governs the accusative ; and so it does in this passage. " It has so appeared to some doctors." 1 In Niemandes Gewalt nachzulassen. "In no one's power to remit, except God's alone (i. e. to remit this penalty stands or is in no one's power, etc.). Nay he will not let it go, but promises, he will inflict it." 2 Derhalben, therefore, is an obsolete form, for which d ess- fa alben is used. Hal ben originally governed the particle pre- fixed to it in the genitive ; at present it is treated as a single word. Desshalben so, thus therefore. Halber is now used instead of h a 1 b e n except in a few cases, mostly with a pronoun (as m e i n e t- halbe n) or where the substantive has the article. 3 A u c h, followed by a negative, means neither, or nor. Weiss auch Niemand, nor does any one know; auch die guten Werke nicht, nor the good woiks above mentioned. 4 Mehr denn die Werke, etc. " that indulgences release from (take away) more than the works of satisfaction," i. e. release one not only from the necessity of performing the works of penance im- posed by the church, but from suffering the penalty which God has affixed to sin. See paragraph fifth. SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 9 fete 1 ober begebrcte, fcnbcrn bag jTe Iteber bie $Gerfe tba'ten jtnb bie spent (itten. emt bcr 2lb(ag ntofjtS anbertf ift nod) mag roerben, 2 bcnn 9tod)tofiung ajiter $Berfe unb beilfamer 9>cm, bie man billtger fotfte errodljlen, benn tterfaflfen. 2Bte# weM etu'etje 3 ber neiten ^)rebiger $n>cier(et ^)ein erfnnben, Medicativas et Satisfactorias, bag tjl, etfafye ^}etU llf ($e* mtgtbmntg, etu'cfye $ur 23efiernna,. 5iber wit fyaben me^r gretbett ^u crad)tcn (Gtoit ?ob) 4 fc(d)e<5 unb begg(eid)ert ^Xanberet, benn (Te l)aben git erbicfyten ; benn atfe ^)etn, ja ott anflegt, ift befierltof) unb gntra'g(irf) bem 3um sebnten, ba^ tjl mrf)t3 gerebet, 5 bag ber ^)em unb 1 Losete. Etymologically, 1 6 s e n means to make 1 o s, loose or free. N *xt it signifies to redeem, or to purchase one's release with money, and then to purchase, or obtain. Ablass losen means to purchase or obtain indulgence, or release from ecclesiastical penalty. 2 Noch mag werden, nor may become, i. e. be made anything else than the remission, etc. Nachlassung guten Werke is not the omission of good works, on the part of the individual, but a relaxation of the law which requires them of penitents. 3 Wiewohl etliche, etc., though some of the modern preach- ers have invented (e r f u n d e n, with h a b e n understood) two kinds of penalty, medicativas et Satisfactorias, i.e. "some penalties (penal- ty) as a satisfaction, some as a correction." This sentence is properly only a clause belonging to the preceding. 4 Gott Lobb for Gott sey Lob, praise to God. G o 1 1 is da- tive. " But we have more liberty (thank God) to despise such non- sense (babblings) than they have to fabricate it ; for all penalties, nay even everything which God imposes is corrective and profitable." Besserlich is scarcely ever used now, and never, as here, in the sense of corrective. It me n , at present, improvable, corrigible. 5 Das its nichts geredet. This turn of expression is pecu- liarly German. The Germans often use a passive, where it could not be used in English. " That is nothing said," means, " such an assertion (as that which follows) amounts to nothing, or is idle talk." Nichts must be carefully distinguished from nicht, which could hardly be used and would give a very different sense, viz. " that has not been spoken" (sondern ausgeschrien, but screamed out). 10 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 2Berfe $u tnef (Tub, bag ber SWenfrf) ffe md)t mag tioftfcrw* gen, ber $itr$e fyalben 2 feute3 eben6, barum it)m 9totfy fei) ber 2lb(ag. ^ntworte icf), 3 bag ba3 fetncn nmb fyabe unb em (auter 4 ebtd)t ifh emt ott nnb bie fyetftge ^ircfye legen 9itemattb mefyr auf, 5 bemt tbm $u tragen mogltrf) iff, 1 Z u v i e 1 governs the genitives der Pein und Werke, " too much of penalty and of works for a man to perform." Instead of d a s s, present usage would require als dass; it would require nicht to be omitted, and mag to come after v ollb r i n ge n ; thus, als dass der Mensch sie vollbringen mag. For an ex- planation of the idiom, zu viel als dass (too much for a man to perform) see Gram. p. 378 infra. 2 H a 1 b e n always follows the genitive which it governs ; conse- quently derKUrze is governed by h a 1 b e n, and governs L e- bens, "on account of the. jrevity of his life." 3 Ihm Noth sey der Ablass, is, on account of darum, a grammatical or necessary inversion for der Ablass sey ihm Noth (necessary is indulgence, for indulgence is necessary}. Accord- ing to present usage, the inverted sentence would be given thus : se i ihm der Ablass Noth. But the words, Antworte ich, in the beginning of the next sentence, are inverted optionally, mere- ly for the sake of rhetorical effect. The verb is rendered emphatic by being placed before its nominative. 4 L a u t e r, when d j . lined, means pure, unmixed ; when not de- clined, it means, nothing but, equivalent to nichts als. L a u- tere Steine would mean pure stones, each one of which is free from foreign admixture. Lauter Steine, would mean nothing but stones. Lautere Weiber, neat , cleanly women ; 1 a u t e r W e i b e r, nothing but icomen, i.e. a company of w men without any men. E i t e 1, empty, mere, is used wi h a similar distinction when declined and undeclined. Eitele Menschen means, vain men ; eitel Menschen, nothing but men. Lauter Ge- dicht, or eite 1 Gedicht means, nothing but a fiction, which accidentally coincides nearly with a pure (unmixed, fiction, or a mere (empty) fiction. 5 Legen Niemand mehr auf. Auflegen, when it means, not to place one thing upon another (auflegen eine Sac he auf etwas), but to impose, in a metaphorical sen ;e, some obligation upon a person, as in the passage before us, requires the da- SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 11 ate and) <5t. e r b e n 3 e m a it b, 1 m e b r b e n it er mag tr a g c n. Unb eg (anget 2 mcfyt roemg $u ber (Sfynftenbeit 3 djmarf), bag man ifyr cfyulb gtefct, (Te lege mebr auf, 4 benn vwr tragcn fomien. 3um eilften, roenn gfetd) bte 23itge, tm getjHtcfyen 0?erf)t 5 izzje of the person (N i e m a n d). N i e m a n d is not declined gen- erally in the old writers except in the genitive. Modern writers are not uniform in respect to this, but more frequently form the dative and accusative by adding e in and e n to the nominative. 1 Dass Gott nicht lasst versucht werden Jemand, is a construction that would hardly be allowed at the present time. Not only does d a s s ordinarily requiie that the leading verb (lasst) be thrown to the end of the clause, but that the accusative (J e- m an d) stand immediately before the dependent verb (versucht werden) thus, dass Gott nicht Jemand versucht w e r d a n 1 a s s t, or for the sake of euphony, lasst versucht werden. 2 Es langet zu corresponds to the modern German e s g e- r e i ch t zu. The literal translation, it reaches to, does not give the sense. It is exactly of the same import as sum with the dativus commodi in Latin, est opprobrio, it is a disgrace, (es langet zur S ch m ac h). 3 Christenheit, properly means Christians collectively, Chris- tenth um, (etymologically the same as Christendom), means Chris- tianity. Our word Christendom, therefore, does? not correspond in signification with C h r i s t e n t h u m, as we should expect, but with Christenheit. The old writers, however, frequently use Chris- ten he i t in both senses. 4 Sie lege mehr auf. For this construction with the subjunc- tive (lege, of the same form with the indicative) instead of the in- version of the clause with dass and the use of the indicative, (dass sie mehr auflege), see Gram. p. 36!), med. 5 Im geistlichen Recht gesetzt, established in the ca- nonical laic. Gesetzt, from s e t z e n, means settled, established. This participle was anciently used substanti vely (das Gesetzt e) in the sense of law, lex. Subsequently the form G e s e t z, something settled, law, was adopted. Of the origin of this last word, we see a clear trace in the passage before us ; for a few lines below that which was gesetzt is refeired to, and called G e s e t z. 12 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gefetst, jet nod) gtenge, 1 bag fitr etne jegftrfje obfitnbe jte6en Sl)re SSufje anfgelegt roare ; fo mitgte bod) bte (Sbrtftenfyeit btefdben @efefee lafien, 2 unb nid)t setter auf* legen, benn jTe etnem jegftdjen git tragen nxiren : 3 Die! n>e* nt'ger nun (Te jet ntdjt jmb, 4 fott man acfyten, bag nid)t 1 Gienge, were current, icere in force, obsolete, for which gel- ten is now more in use. 2 L a s s e n, Let go, i. e. relax or suspend. See the use of the word in connection with nachlassen, near the close of the 17th para- graph. 3 EinemJeglichen zu tragen w a r e n. " than (they) are possible to be borne by each one." In explaining this idiom of the infinitive after the verb sey n, we must not suppose that there is an ellipsis of any such word as m 6 g 1 i c h (moglich zu tra- gen war en); for the infinitive itself, in such constructions, has nearly the nature of the Latin participle in dus (fertndae sint), ex- cept that the German expression conveys the idea of possibility and rarely that of necessity, which is implied in the Latin. Urbs capien- da est, means, " the city must be taken j" whereas die Stadt ist einzunehmen means " the city can be taken." In other respects, the constructions are similar. In sense, the infinitive (z u tragen) may be represented nearly by Latin adjectives in bills (tolcrabiles sini). See Gram. p. 258, infra. 4 Viel weniger nun siejetzt nicht sind, etc. W e- niger does not correspond with the rest of the sentence (which would seem to require mehr in its stead). There is probably an anacoluthon in the words soil man achten dass nicht mehr aufgelegt werde. Nun, as an adverb, means now. But as a conjunction, for which it is here used, it means now that, since, and is nearly of the same import as w e i 1. W o h 1, near the end of the paragraph, qualifies tragen, as the emphasis rests on it rendering it equivalent to gut. In the sense of e t w a it can- not receive the emphasis. The whole paragraph may be translated thus : " Even if the penance, laid down in the canonical law, were now in force, (viz.) that for every mortal offence seven years' penance, be imposed, still would the church (C hriste nhei t) be obliged to relax those laws, and impose no more than each one should be able to bear. Much less (should those laws be executed) now that they are not (in force) one should take care, that no more be imposed than each one can well bear." SERMOX ON INGULGENCES. 1 mebr mtftjclccjt mcrbc, bcmt jebermamt wob( trageu fann* Sum aroolftcn, man fa.qt rcobf, 1 bag ber timber mit ber iih'ifleu ^Vtir 3 ut'S gccjfcitcr eber $nm Slbfafj gcwctfct fott roerben ; aber e rctrb tt)ot)l mebr Swings 3 obne runb unb S3cwdbrmtfl a,efaa,t. 3um brci,$c bitten, e3 tft em arofter ^rrtlntnt, bap 3 ntetnc, cr woKe o e 3 ^ un f" r f c ^ nc ^"n^ c / 4 f ^ btefelbcn atfqcit umfonil: au^ tntfct)dl5(id)er nabc fceqeibet, bafitr begcbrcnb, benn btnfhrber n?ol I leben. 6 2)te 1 Man sagt wohl. An inspection of the various examples. found in most of these paragraphs will show that such adver- bial phrases at the beginning of a sentence as z u m z w 6 1 f- ten sometimes cause the principal verb to precede its nomina- tive (invert the clause) and sometimes they do not. This circum- stance suggests the limitation of the rule. Only when such adver- bial phrases at the beginning of a sentence are closely connected with, arid, as it were, incorporated into the clause does it cause an in- version. If the connection is very loose, which is ordinarily indicated by a comma, the natural order is observed. Whether the connection is to be regarded as close or not, will often depend on the mere feel- ing of the writer. Besides, the rule was less rigidly observed in Lu- ther's time than it is now. Wohl, is here used, as in paragraph 7th,, in a concessive sense (to be sure, indeed) like z w a r or f r e i 1 i c h, as is indicated by the adversative (a b e r) in the second clause. 2 Der ttbrigen Pein, that part of the penalty incurred,. which is not actually inflicted must be referred either to purgatory, or to indulgences, i. e. must either be suffered in purgatory or com- muted for the price of indulgences. 3 Mehr Dings. Indefinite adjectives, pronouns and numerals or adverbs of quantity govern the genitive. More of thi.ng, many a thing. So harsh an expression would not be tolerated in modern German. 4 Er wolle genug thun far seine Silnde. See p. 11,, Note 4. 5 So d o c h, whereas (since yet). 6 Hinfiirder wohl leben. For hinfttrder, see p. 6,, Note 5. The infinitive used substantively in German, corresponds very nearly to the present participle in English, " desiring nothing in re- turn (d a f Q r) but holy living. 1 " Wohl, here, is a pure adverb and a 2 14: SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. forbert roofyt ettt>a ? affo mag nnb fotf (Te and) baffcfbe nadjfajfen iwb nidjttf frfjtt>ereg nnb nntrd'a,lid)eg anflegem 3um mer^ebnten, 2lb(ag nnrb $notten itben in guten ^Berfen, ober nnfetbftdb jmb. enn forbert 9tiemanb $nm beffern, 3 fcnbern biilbet ober ihre Unt)ottfomment)eit, >amm fott man nicf)t tt)i^ ber ben 2lb(ag reben ; man fott aber and) 5tiemanb ba$it reben* 4 3nm fiinfte^nten, ie( (Tcfyerer nnb beflfer tl)dte ber, ber 5 synonyme of gut. The latter refers to that which is adapted io its end, and may be said of inanimate things ; the former means agreea- bly and must, always refer directly or indirectly to a sentient being. Wohl leben means living in a way that is agreeable to God. Jn like manner, it is distinguished from g e s a n d r well. G e- s u n d means healthy; w o h I means in an agreeable state^ either of health or of mind. 1 Die Christenheit fordert wohl etwas, " the (hon- or of) Christianity demands indeed something, (i. e. external discip- line ; but it should not be severe). Therefore it may, and even should, relax the same penalties, (whenever it is necessary), and im- pose nothing, etc." 2 Kecklich, boldly, courageously, obsolete in this sense. It sig- nifies the same as g e h 6 r i g, properly. " Who are not willing to exercise themselves properly in good works." Oder unleid- 1 i c h s i n d, "or who are impatient under evil." 3 Zum bessern, as to grammatical form, might be either an adjective in the comparative degree, or an infinitive used substan- tively. Here it is probably the latter. " Indulgences stimulate (re- quire) no one to improvement, but rather bear with, and make allow- ance for one's (their, men's) imperfection." .Zum bessern, means literally, to improve, or to be improved, which would be ex- pressed in Latin not by emendare, nor by emcndari, but by ad emen- dandum. Such is the force of the German infinitive when declined with the definite article, and governed by z u, as expressing end or design. * Niemand dazu reden, persuade no one to it. 5 D e r, d e r. D e r, w e r means any one who, whoever. D e r- SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 15 ranter m otte$ widen gate $u bem ebanbe @t. eber wae! fenft gcnannt wirb, 1 benn bag er 2(b(ag bafitr itebme. Dtim e3 fabr(td) 2 ifl, bag er fc(d)e abe urn 2lb* Tag rottten, nnb nid)t urn otte$ roitten gtebt Sum fedjgjetwten, mel bejfer tft bag 2Berf einem >iirf* tigen erjeigt, 3 benn baS 4 gum ebdnbe gegeben wtrb, awcfy me{ befl"er, benu ber Wag bafiir gegeben; 5 Denn (wie ge* fagt) ei^ tft bcff"er, em gntc^ $3erf getban, 6 benn mel nacf)^ geCoifcn. 3(b(ag aber ift 9Zarf)fa(Tng t>it guter 5Berfe, ober ift nki)^ nadigclaj^tu 3a, bag id) 7 end) red)t untcrwcife, fo -merit anf : T)n fotfft i?or alien IDingen (weber t. ^etruS cbaitbe nod) 5(b(ag angcfeben) 8 beinem armen 9tdd)ften geben r willfl bu 9 geben* 5Benn e$ aber bat)in fommt, bag 9iiemanb in Her tabt metyr ift, ber ^iKfe bebarf (bag, ob ctt jenige, welcber(a modern form of expression) means that particular person, who. D e r, d e r is intermediate and may be used in either sense. It occurs more frequently in the early than in the later writers. 1 Oder was sonst genannt wird, etc., " or whatever other object is named, than that he contribute to it by purchasing in- dulgences." D a f r does not here mean instead of that, but to that end. z F a h r 1 i c h and F a h r are obsolete forms for g e f a h r 1 i c h and Gefahr. 3 Erzeigt is a participle agreeing with We r k. 4 Das, was formerly employed in the sense of was, what, and so it is here. Ablass da far gegeben, indulgence (money) given for that purpose. B Ein gutes Werk gethan, a good work performed is bet- ter than many relaxed (excused). This use of participles is still common. 7 Ja, dass ich, etc. " indeed, in order that I may instruct you properly, observe." 8 Angesehen, being regarded. W i 1 1 s t d u, if thou deairest. 16 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ntmmer o,efd)eben foil), 1 bann fottft bit gebcit, fo bit nnflfL $n ben $ ird)en, 5ltfaren, (gcfymucf, $ ekf), bie in beiner (gtabt ftnb. Unb tt>enn bag tuiit and) nidjt mcbr 9totb ift, bairn attererJV 2 fo bit ttrittft, magft bit geben $n bem @ebaube 8t *peter$, cber anber n>o. 2fnd) fotfjl: bit benned) ba6 nid)t 3 nm 2(bfag nntten tbwu enn @t. q>au( fagt : iffi e r f e i n e n ^ a it ^ g e n o f f e n it t d) t m o b ( 1 1) u t, t ft f c t n ^ b r t jl, it n b a r Q e r b e n n e t n S) e t b e. Unb fyalt'3 bafitr fret, 4 wer btr an* ber3 fagt, ber fcerfi'tbret bid), ober fnd)t je 5 beine (See(e in beinem ^entel, nnb fitnbe er ^fennige barinne, ba3 ware ihm (ieber, benn atfe Seetcn. 80 fprid)fl: bit, fo 6 rtntrbe id) ntmmcrmebr ?lb(ag lofctt. 3(ntwcrte id), 7 ba^ babe id) fd)on cben gefagt, ba^ mein 5BiKe, S3egicrbe, ^ttte nnb 9?att) ijl, bap 9iieinanb Slbfag fofe. ?agt bie fauten ttnb fdjlafrigctt @t}rtjlen 3(b(ag lofen, gct)e bit fnr bid). 8 3nm ffebgebnten : Ser 2(b[ag ijl nid)t gebcten, aitd) nid)t 'Das, ob Gott will, nimmer geschehen soil, " which (need of aid), if it be the pleasure of God, ought never to take place." 2 Dann allererst, then for the first time, i. e. then and not tilt then. 3 Auchsollstdu dennoch. Auch, which cannot well be rendered in English, repeats and enforces what was said in para- graph 15th. Dennoch, however, refers to the concession just made. 4 Und halt's dafurfrei, "and hold the following opinion without hesitancy." Frei in the sense of unbedenklich. D a fa r, to this, for this, referring to the following clause. 5 J e and d a r i n n e, now provincial for j a and d a r i n. 6 So sprichst du, so. The first s o, thus, is not to be transla- lated ; the second means then. " Thou sayest, then I would never obtain indulgence." 7 Antworte ich, a lively form of expression for, i c h a n t- w o r t e. 8 Geheduftlr dich, "take your own course," i. e. follow your own convictions, do your own duty, and let others do as they please. SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 17 geratbcn, fonbcrn tton bcr inge 3<*W Me gu.qefaflen urtb crfanbt wcrben. arum tfl eg nidjt cut $Berf beg ebor* famtf, and) ntdjt &erbien|Hidt, fonbern em 5fa$$ug 2 beg e* borfamg. >arnm n>iett>ol)( man 9tiemanb roebren foH 3 ben ju lofen, fo foHte man bod) a He @t)rifhrn batten $tef)en, imb $u ben $Berfcn nnb *petneu, bte ba nacftgefaffen, reit^en unb HMhii 3nm ac^tjchnten : Db tie (Seelen ait^ bent gtgfener ge? gogen werben bnrcf) ben 2(bfag, wetg id) ntd)t r nnb t q(anbe ta^ aud) nod) ntdjt ; 4 wiewobl ba^ etlid)e nene ^octore^ fagen, aber i}1 tbnen nnmogftd) ju bewa'bren, 5 and) bat e$ 1 Von der Dinge Z a h 1, " of that class (number) of things." The article der belongs to D i n g e, not to Z a h 1. In all such constructions, (once so common in German, but now occurring only in certain phrases) of a genitive coming between a substantive and its preposition, since two successive articles would be harsh, and since the omission of that belonging to the genitive would often oc- casion obscurity, while the other substantive is rendered sufficiently definite by the genitive, the article of the genitive is commonly in- serted and that of the other substantive is always omitted. Com- pare zu der Christenheit Schmach, near the close of the 10th paragraph. 2 A u s z u g, going beyond, an excess. No German would use such an expression at the present day. 3 Man Niemand wehren soil, etc. " Although one ought to prohibit no one from obtaining it (indulgence), we ought to dissuade (z i e h e n, dmw^ attract} ail Christians from it, and stimu- late and strengthen them to those works and sufferings, which are re- laxed, i. e. from which one is dispensed by indulgences." N a c fa- gel a s se n (werden). 4 Und glaube das auch no c h n i c h t, " but 1 do not yet believe it." 6 Aber (es)ist ihnen unmoglich (es) zu bewahren. E s is omitted, in the first instance, according to a very prevailing usage with Luther, but contrary to modern usage ; in the second in- stance it is omitted to avoid repetition,(for it could not be used in the latter place and omitted in the former,) although it is inserted in the next clause. It might, indeed, stand thus : Aber (es) ist ihnen unmoglich (dies) zu bewahren. 18 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. t>ie ,tird)e nod) nid)t befdtfoflfen, Saturn ju mebrer frljcit 1 met bejfer ijl e$, ba bit fiir fie 2 fel&fl bittejl: unb imrfeft ; benn bieg tft benxibrter unb gen>i$ 3um nemt$e{)ntett : %n bfefen ^unften fyabe id) nidjt 3wetfel, nnb ftnb genitgfam 3 in bet (2d)rift gegri'mbet rum fofft ifyr and) fcinen S^etfel f)aben, unb lagt (Sd)o(a(ltco^ d)o(aftico^ fei)n ; (Te finb atlfammt nid)t ge^ ttug ntit i()ren Dpinionen, ba^ ffe eine ^)rebigt befeftigen fottten. 3nm ^t)an^tg|len : Db etltdhc 5 mid) nnn tt)cbl 6 einen ^et^ ,$er fd)e(ten / benen fofd)c ? iBabrt)eit fetjr fd)db(id) tpt im ^af# ten, 7 fo ad)te id) bod) fo(d) 1 @ep(erre 8 nid)t grog ; ffntentat 9 1 Mehrer Sicherheit. Mehr is sometimes declined, some- times not. Mehrer is the dative singular feminine, for which the irregular form mehrerer is more commonly used. See Gram, p. 129. 2 F il r s i e, for them, i. e. the souls in purgatory. S e 1 b s t does not belong to s i e, but to d u and b i 1 1 e s t. The sentiment here expressed should not surprise us. Luther had not yet written his Theses. 3 Und (sie) sind genugsam. 4 Und lasst Doctores, etc. " And let the scholastic doc- tors be scholastic, they are, all taken together, not sufficient by their opinions to confirm a discourse (are not enough with their opinions, rthat they should, etc)." 5 Etl iche. See p. 1, Note 3. W o h 1. See p. 12, Note 4. 6 Einen Ketzer schelten, scold me a heretic, i. e. reproach me as a heretic. After the word schelten the accusative is al- ways used without any such word as a 1 s. 7 Denen im K as ten, "to whom in the coffer," i. e. to whose coffers. "Solch'Geplerre. Solchesis written s o 1 c h some- times (more commonly before an adjective), for the sake of euphony. Before the article e i n, s o 1 c h' is the only form in use. G e p 1 a r r is now the settled orthography instead of Geplerre. 9 S i n t e m a 1, an obsolete word, for which w e i 1 is now em- ployed. SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 19 bac* mcfjt thmt bcnn 1 etticfye ftnftere efyirne, tie tie nic gerecfjen, bic cfyrifHiefre ?ehre nie <}c(cfcn, ifyre etgeneit ?ebrcr nic fccrfhinbcn, fonbcrn in ibrcn Iccfycricfycn nnb ^er^ rtjTcncn Dpinicn t)ic( nahc ^crtvcfcn. 2 X"cnn bcittcn jTe bie Dcrjtaubcn/ 1 fo miipten |Tc, bag fie ^liemanb (cttten (ciflern nub nnitbcmnuiben. X)ccf) ott gebe tt)nen nnb ben rccfyten inn, 3(men. 'Das nicht than denn, none do that except. An abrupt expression. Denn, than, except, is frequently used after N i c h t s, but rarely after nicht. Nicht denn, may be rendered by only. 8 Viel nahe verwesen (habe n). H a b e n must be sup- plied to all the participles, gerochen, gelesen, and v e r- s t a n d e n. V i e 1 is used in the obsolete sense, very, " have well nigh decayed (rotted) in their ragged and tattered opinions." 3 Denn hatten sie die verstanden, "for had they un- derstood them (those, i. e. the Bible, Christian doctrine and their teachers) they would have known that they ought to vilify no one, unheard and unvanquished." SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. EXPOSITION OF THE THIRTY-SEVENTH PSALM.1 37te ^Pfafat amb3, $u troften ^fejentgen, fo big jwb, 2 bag bte ott(ofen Uebete tfyun 3 unb bocf) fo 1 This exposition was first published in 1521, and addressed to Demarmen HaOflein (the little flock) Christi zu Wit- tenberg 1 , accompanied with an epistle of several pages. It was revised in 1526, and addressed in a similar way, An die Koni- gin Maria in Ungarn. A strict adherence to the chronologi- cal order, would require this to be the third piece of the Selections, as the next succeeding one was published in 1520. But that the more difficult pieces may not come first, except in the instance of the short discourse on Indulgences, a slight variation from the chron- ological arrangement is here omitted, as being by far the least of the two evils. 2 Zu trosten diejenigen, so ungeduldig sind. A Psalm, written " to console those who are impatient because (that) the wicked do evil, etc." 3 Uebels thun. Uebels is not here the neuter of the adjec- tive for Uebles, but is the substantive Uebel used in the gen- itive in a partitive sense, literally, to do of evil, like the old Eng- lish expressions, "pour out of thy Spirit," "give us of your oil." This word is etymologically the same as the English word evil, the b and v, being cognate letters which are most frequently exchanged for each other, as ; e b e n and even ; o b e r and over ; s i e b e n and seven ; leben and live; s t r e b e n and st rive ; heben and heave ; geben and give ; w e b e n and weave ; S i e b and sieve ; S i 1 b e r and silver ; S a 1 b e and salve ; Grab and grave ; schaben and shave ; N ab e 1 and navel. In. English, /"often occurs instead of c; or like the latter corresponds to the German 6, as ; Stab arid staff; Leben and life ; Weib and wife; D i e b and thief; selb and self; halb a.ndhalf; Kalb and calf. Thun most commonly signifies to do; but it has also a wider import, and is often to be rendered by to make, to put; as, einen Schuss, eine Reise, eine Mahlzeit, einen Trunk, to make (or take) a shot, journey, meal, to drink. Von m i r t h u n, to put away from me ; d i e Schue andieFQsse thun, to put on shoes. The most common idioms formed with this EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 21 fancjc miflcftraft in grcfjem (SHitrfe 1 bletbetu ($r$iirnc 2 bid) nicfyt itber ben SSofcn, fet) ntd)t neibtfd) itber btc ilebettfydter, iffiie gfctrf) 3 cjrctft $u unb trtflft ber 9) word, are, e s t h u t m i r w e h, it pains me, or, 1 am sorry for it. Esthut nichts, that is nothing, or, it is of no consequence, or does no harm. Es thut Noth, it is necessary. Uebel thun (das Bose.thun), to do icrong (different from Uebels thun). Einen in die Lehre thun, to put one to a trade, Es ist mir urn etwas zu thun, I feet an interest in something, Es ist mir darum zu thun,/ am interested or concerned in that, E r thut nur so, he only feigns it so. Es thut gelehrt, he affects to be learned. E r thut b 6 s e, he makes a show of anger. Z u w i s s e n thun (do to wit), to inform. Jemandem zu viel thun, to in- jure one. Etwas zu Liebe thun, to do a thing as a favor, or, in order to gratify one. Einem wohl thun, or gut thun, to gratify one (sometimes also, to benefit one). Ihr habt gut thun, or gut s a g e n, it is easy for you to do so, or to say so. Though Ihun and mac hen correspond in general to the English words do and make, the former referring more to the action itself than to the result of it, and the latter more to the result, or the thing produced, still, m a c h e n is often to be rendered by do, and thun as often by make. This last use of t h u n, to make, is either idiomatic or anti- quated ; in the old language it was common. So Otfried, Thie Steina duan (thun) zi brote, i. e. die Steine zu Brot m a c h e n. T h u e n, is duan (d u e n) in old German. Drop the ending e n, and d u, or do (Eng.) remains. 1 Gluck is a compound word, consisting of the prefix ge, and 1 Q c k, which corresponds to the English word, luck. In the old Ger- man the prefix is fully written, G e 1 ii c k. 2 ErzUrne. ZUrnen signifies to manifest anger, to be angry. ErzUrnen, to put into a state of anger, to make angry. S i c h e r- z r n e n, to fall into a passion, to become angry. 3 G 1 e i c h, formed from the word 1 e i c h, English like, and the prefix g e, means like or equal as an adjective. As an adverb of time, it means instantly, directly, that is, the two periods of time come so near together, or are so much alike as to leave little or no interval be- tween them. Compare continue in Latin. "How directly does the prophet seize upon and hit the thoughts of the heart in this tempta- tion, and remove entirely their cause !" 22 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ebanfen in btefer Sfafecfytitng 1 nnb fyebt atte Urfacfye 2 bet* fclben auf, unb fpriofyt $um (rften : > 9D?cnfd), bit bift $or* mg, fyafl aucf) Urfarfje, nne nurf) bitnfet 3 enn eg finb bofe SWenfdjen, tl)im Unred)t unb tncl Uebete unb gefyet tfynen bennod) roofyt ; 4 roag bie 9tatur adjtet, rebltdje 5 Ur* fadje beg 3wne$ fyter ^u fei)it 2I6er ntd)t a(fo, 1 Anfechtung, literally, a hostile attempt against one ; figura- tively, a temptation icith a malicious design, ft is the common word for temptation in a bad sense. Versuchung may be either temp- tation or trial. Anfechtungen never come from God ; V e r- suchungen sometimes come from him. As Fecht means a skirmish, rather than a general assault, Anfectung means an at- tempt against one that may be resisted. 2 Ursache, literally means original (u r) thing (S a c h e), and hence admirably designates a cause. 3 W i e m i c h d tt n k e t, as it seems to me. When the verb is used impersonally, the accusative is, according to the grammarians, properly used rather than the dative. But if it is a neuter verb and not used impersonally, the dative only can be employed ; as, sie dQnket mir schon, she appears to me beautiful. As a reflec- tive verb with the accusative of the person, it means, to think or ima- gine one's self something; as, du diinkest dich klug, you think yourself wise. 4 Thun Unrecht und gehet ihn-endennochwohl. The omission of the nominatives sie and e s, renders the represen- tation more vivid. * They are bad men, they do wrong and much harm, and yet it is well with them, what nature [uneanctified] con- siders to be a just cause of anger." Es sind bose Menschen means more commonly, " they are bad men;" es giebt bose Menschen always means, ''there are bad men," corresponding nearly to the French ce sont and il y a. Ue be Is is in the genitive and governed by v i e 1. See p. 13, Note 3. 6 Redliche, is a somewhat cifficult word to explain. Its an- cient and etymological meaning is, rational, reasonable, proper, from Rede, account. Hense r e d 1 i c h, that of which one can give a good account. So it was used in Luther's time. In modern German, it means, honorable, upright, honest. Hence one is called a redlicher Mann, when he is without intrigue and is faithful in his duties to others. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 23 lag G5nabe l unb tiicfyt S^atur Her regtcren, 2 brief) ben iinb ftttlc bid) 3 etne fteine 3ett, fa pe itbet tfyun, 4 fag illicit tt>ol)( cjcljen, 5 b,orc 6 mid}, etf foU btr nicfyt fefyaben* 7 So 8 1 Gnade, i.e. Ge-nade, is from nah(so in Latin, propitius, from prope, near). The termination de is euphonic as in Kunde from kennen, BUrde from bahren and Niemand for Nie- man. The word originally signified approach by descending; hence figuratively condescension. Die Sonne geht zu Gnade n, in the old German, means " the sun was going down, or approaching the horizon." Gnade, therefore comes to signify favor shown to an inferior, grace. 2 Regieren. Verbs of all conjugations from the Latin, French and other languages, are adopted into German by changing the ter- mination of the original into i r e n or i e r e n. The e after i in the last form simply shows that the latter is always long in this termi- nation. The accent is always on the penult. The word r e g i e r e n comes directly from the French regir, or from seme other similar modification of the Latin regere. 3 S t i 1 1 e d i c h. The adjective still in German, as in Eng- lish, is opposed, 1. to motion, 2. to noise. The verb, when applied to things, as the sea, the wind, means, to stop their motion; when applied to men, to stop their commotion, or to quiet thr.ir passions, as in this passage. It sometimes, though rarely, signifies to silence a man. Applied to an infant, it means, to nurse, to put to the breast. 4 Uebel thun. This adjective form (Q b e 1) denotes wrong doing in general; the substantive form (U e b e 1 s) implies injury done to any person or persons. U e b e 1 denotes properly whatever is disagreeable to our feelings, and is opposed to w o h 1. B 6 s e in- dicates something bad in itself, and is opposed to gut. 6 Lass i h n e n wohl gehen, allow it to be (go) well with them. Gehen is impersonal m all such constructions, with e s un- derstood. Hence W i e g e h t's i h n e n, how do you do ? how do things go with you f 6 Horen corresponds, in etymology, to hear, as schworen does to swear. 7 Schaden, to injure, is written scathan in Anglo Saxon, from which comes the English word to scathe, in a restricted sense. 8 So spricht denn der Mensch. An objector is suppo- sed here to say : " Yes, but when will this corne to an end?" 24: SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fprtofyt benn ber 9D?enfrf) : 3fl/ weim rmrb e3 benn cwffyo* ten ? $}er mag 1 bte a nge fyaften ? (r antwortet : ) e n n 2 n> t e bag ($ r a 3 werben ft e 6 a ( b a b a, e* fatten vt> e r b e n, unb rot e b a gritne $ r a u t n>crben ft e D e rtt> e I f e n. 3 @m ferne^ 4 GMetcfyntg ift ba3, fcfyrecfttrf) 5 ben 1 M a g corresponds to the English word may, as M a c h t does to might, m a c h t i g to mighty, and A 1 1 in a c h t i g to almighty. M 6 g e n is intermediate in signification between Konnen and w o 1 1 e n, and expresses power and will in a weaker manner than konnen does power, or wollen will. It implies ability with some degree of inclination to do a thing. That inclination may, or may not, be predominant. Sometimes the idea of power, sometimes that of inclination is the leading, if not the sole one, in the use of the word. Vermogen expresses merely ability. The participle g e m o c h t is not used with an infinitive dependent on it, but stands itself in the form of the infinitive but with a participial meaning ; as ich habe es nicht thun mogen (gemocht). 2 D e n n,/or, is etymologically the same as then ; d u the same as thou ; dein the same as thine; dies the same as this; diese the same as these. Abgehauen, cut off ; h a u e n, to hew, like k a u e n, to chew. 3 Verwelken, to wither. W e 1 k e n is preserved in the word icelk, in old English. " The sea novve ebbeth, and now it floweth. The lond now welketh, and now it groweth." Goicer. 4 Fein in German differs from the English wordjtne, inasmuch as it does not express mere prcttiness, but expresses the higher quali- ties of perfect accuracy, fitness and elegance as the result of nice per- ception. 6 Schrecklich. Schrecken, in old German, signifies to spring, to leap. Hence Heuschrecke means a grasshopper, as if it were Heuspringer. Then it means, to experience great mental excitement, commonly of tear ; to frighten one so as to make him leap or shriek. 6 Gleissner stands for gleichsner (from g 1 e i c h s e n, to imitate), one who pretends to be like another. Such was its ety- mology and use in the old German. In modern times, it has been connected with the verb gleissen, to shine, and made to mean one EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 25 unb trofHid) 1 ben ?eibcnben. $Bie feitt bcbt cr nnd cm$ itnfcrcm e|7d)te 2 unb fcfct nn$ or @ottetf cfid)te. SSor unfcrem ej7d)te grimet, btiibt unb mehrt (Td) bcr feigner anfe nnb bcbecft atte $Mt a,an$, bag fie a If em etrcag ( nen, wie bad grime rad bie (rbe bcrft 3 nnb ftymiicft. 2fber feor @otted 03cjTd)fe, wad fmb fie man fdjier 5 ntadjen fcff, nnb je fyobcr ba^ beflo ndber jTnb il)m bie (Senfen nnb ena,abcm : je fyofyer, n>eiter bie S3efen gri'men nnb oben beflo ndf>er ift i^r Unterliegen. ^Barnrn VDolltejl: bn benm pitmen, fo i^re 23o3f)eit nnb (M fo ein 7 fur$e$ who assumes shining qualities. It means nearly the same as H e u c h- le r, a hypocrite. The difference is this ; the H e u c h 1 e r seeks to please, and to win confidence and respect, the G 1 e i s s n e r seeks the admiration of others. 1 T r 6 s 1 1 i c h, consoling, has a peculiar shade of meaning which. is best explained by its etymology. T r 6 s t e n (from T r o s t, Eng- lish trust, in etymology) means to inspire confidence, and thus to con- sole in trouble. * Gesic h t, 1. the power of vision ; then the view itself, as in this passage ; 2. the countenance. The plural, Gesichter, means, faces; but the plural Gesichte, means visions, apparitions. " In our view, the multitude of hypocrites is verdant, flourishes and spreads and covers the whole world entirely, so that they alone seem to be anything, as the green grass covers and adorns the earth." 3 D e c k e n, to cover ; D a c h, a covering of a house, a roof (Sax- on thac, English thatch). Deck, the covering or deck of a vessel. Deckel, a lid or cover. So in English, to deck, to cover, especially- with ornamented dress. 4 H e u, kindred with the English word hay, means mown grass, from h a u e n, to cut. 5 S c h i e r, as an adverb, is nearly obsolete, and has two significa- tions, 1. soon, 2. nearly. As an adjective, it means, clear, pure, sheer. Luther employs it here as a modern writer would use s c h n e 1 1 or bald: " Hay, which one will soon make." 6 Wachst. Wachsenisthe same word as the English to> wax. Oben schweben, wave on high. 7 S o e i n, is now a colloquial expression for ein s o 1 c h e r. 26 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fen 1 ifl ? <5o fprtdfjfl bn benn : 2Ba3 foff id) bierceiP tfyun ? 2Boran foff id) mid) fyatten, bte bag fo(d)e gefdjefye ? anf ben fierrn unb tfyne bleibe im ? a n b e it n b n a ty r e bid) i m I a u* ben* a nimmt 5 er affe wt^ebntbigen ebanfen (jan$ bafyin 1 W e s e n is often used nearly in the sense of D i n g (which, by changing d into th, becomes thing). The difference may be shown thus : " Thou hast made all things (D i n g e) and by thy will have they received their being (We sen)." Dass Wesen eines D i n g e s is the essence, qualities or character of a thing. Wesen is an old infinitive, (equivalent to s e y n,) used as a substantive. 2 D i e w i e 1, [in] the [mean] while, obsolete for w a h r e n d de s- sen. a H6re zu is a compound verb. If z u were a preposition, it would require the dative case. Z u h 6 r e n, to listen to, also governs the dative. The expression appears to be elliptical, " give attention ! a great announcement !" Verheissen means, 1. to make a declar- ation to an inferior ; 2. to promise an inferior. Verheissung seems to be used here with a latitude of meaning corresponding to the first signification of the verb. Versprecliung, a promise, does not imply any difference of rank. The reason of this distinction lies in the nature of the word h e i s s e n, which is applied to a supe- rior giving directions to an inferior. 4 H of fen and hope are of the same etymology. The letters p and f correspond to each other, as is seen in the words, S c h i f f (skiff) and ship ; S t r e i f and stripe ; K 1 i p p e and cliff ; t i e f and deep ; r e i f and ripe ; s c h a r f and sharp, and many others. 5 N i m m t. N e h m e n, to take. The word e of the root was ori- ginally i, and of course, the letter i returns in what are termed the irregular forms of the verb. In Gothic it is niman, the ending an being, as usual, changed to en in later German. The old English has preserved the original form of the word. " For looking in their plate He nimmes away their coyne." Corbet. " And hath our sermon of her nomen" (Ger. g e n o m m e n). -Chaucer. N e h m e n signifies to take, in its widest and most general sense j EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 27 unb fe(3t baS cr$ $nr SKufye. 21(3 fottte er fageu : , fag bctne Uua,cbufb, unb fhtdje ober nritnfdje tfynen 6fe, e3 ftnb menfd)lid)e unb bofe ebanfen. (5ee bctnc offmmg auf ott, marte wa er barautf madden miff, gelje bit fitr bid), nnterfaffe wm Tacmanbd mitten, (Sutetf $u tfyun, mie bu ana.efana.eu baft, mo nnb rcefdjem bit magjl, nnb gieb nid)t &ifri nm 935fe$, fonbern utee wm 93ofeg. b bu aber and) bdd)tc(!, bu motfteft fltebeu unb an etnen anbern Drt 2 sicbcu, bag bu ifyrcr lo^ miirbefi unb Don tfyneu annehmen, to take what is at hand, or what is offered ; f a s s e n, to take, by embracing it on all sides (as a vessel contains a fluid), or on both sides (as we embrace a thing with both hands) ; g r i e f e n, to take by compressing or squeezing (gripe)- Einnehmen means to take in, to receive ; a u s n e h m e n, to take out, to except ; u n te r- n e h m e n, to undertake ; a b n e h m e n, to take away, to decrease ; zunehmen, to add, to increase ; a u f n e h m e n, to take up, to take in charge, or accept. 1 Setzt. Setzen, to make to sit, to place, is causative of s i t- z e n, to sit, as sen ken, to cause to sink, is of sin ken, to sink; and t r a n k e n, to cause to drink, of t r i n k e n, to drink ; and fa 1 1- e n, to fell, of fa 1 1 e n, to fall. The letters z and t are often exchan- ged for each other, as in s e t z e n and s i t z e n, English set and sit ; H e rz, English heart, (Dutch, harrt and hert} ; N e t z, net ; H i t ze, heat ; s c h w i t z e n, to sweat ; W i t z, wit. L ass deineUnge- d u 1 d, leave, give up your impatience, neither curse them nor wish them any ill. "Those are (see p. 22, Note 4) carnal and evil thoughts. Put your hope in God ; wait (and see) what he will bring out of it ; take your own proper course (do your duty). To do good, as you have begun, when and to whom you can, omit on account of no one (i. e. let no one hinder you)." 2 O r t signifies a place, and generally an inhabited place, large or small, and may comprehend under it Stadt, Schloss, Burg, F 1 e c k e n, and Dorf. Platz means an open space, or any unoc- cupied place which maybe used for any purpose. Fleck is any small space. But F le c k e n (sometimes meaning a spot or stain) is a village with corporate rights, and is thereby distinguished from D o i f, a hamlet, without such riglits. S t e 1 1 e, means a place where , 28 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fdmejl : and) mcfyt affc, 1 Mcifce tm anbe, bift, tt>erf)3(e ober rocmbfe 3 nm tfyretttnllen mcfyt beme a person or thing is placed, and hence often implies a certain order, as a particular office under the government, or particular passage in an author. 1 Nicht also is elliptical, thue or some such word being un- derstood. Also is never to be rendered by a/so, but by thus. A u c h, a/50, refers to what had been said in the preceding paragraph. Auch nichtis equivalent to neither, and the sentence may be translated thus : " But if you should think you would flee, and go to another place in order that you might be rid of them and get away from them, do it not (not so either). Remain, etc." 2 Wohne, Wohnung. The original meaning of wohne n seems to be, to remain. Tatian, in the ninth century says, " the branch will not bear fruit unless it wohne (remain) in the vine," and " the child Jesus woh nete (remained) in Jerusalem." Hence the secondary, but afterwards uniform meaning, to dwell in a place as one's home, to reside permanently. Wohnung, the verbal noun, signifies the dwelling, i. e. 1. the act of residence; 2. the place of resi- dence, which is more definitely expressed by W o h n s i t z. A u f e n t- h a 1 1, on the contrary, means, not a permanent residence at home, but a temporary residence from home. From w o h n e n, to remain, is derived gewohnen, to accustom ; because one becomes accustomed to a thing by remaining in connection with it ; G e w 6 h n u n g, the act of getting accustomed ; Gewohnheit, custom, usage ; and g e- w o h n 1 i c h, customarily, commonly, 3 W a n d 1 e. This word, as a neuter verb, signifies, to icalk about, back and forth, and is generally employed only in elevated style and is then applied to a person in easy circumstances walking for pleas- ure. A gentleman walking in his garden to view the plants, is said to wandeln, but not the gardener who goes about to take care of them. Then the word is applied to denote any slow progressive mo- tion, mostly in poetry ; and when used of the course of life, it is like the English word walk in its biblical use. So W a n d e 1 , manner of life. Handel und W a n d e 1, is an idiomatic expression, the two substantives conveying but one idea, meaning barter, trade. As an active verb, wan,deln meant, particularly in Luther's time, to change one place for another, or one thing for another. To express the idea of changing one thing into another, this word is now rarely used, verwandeln and u m wandeln being, in modern Ian- EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 29 nung ober anb, fonbern ndfyre bid) im (SHanben, treibe 1 bctnc Arbeit nub anbel 2 vtne ttorbin. $tnbern 3 ol>er & c * fd)dbigcn (te bid) unb geben btr Urfadje ju fliefyen, fo tag fafyren, Heibe im faitben unb $roeifle nidjt, @ott roirb bid) nidjt lafifen, tl)ite nw ba$ Seine, arbeite nnb ndfyre bid), unb lag il)n roaften. 4 u fotfjl: nid)t anffyoren, bid) $it ndfyren, ob (Te bid) an guage, employed for that purpose. W e c h s e 1 means to exchange one thing for another; andern and verandern, to change a thing by altering, or modifying it, the latter implying the greater change. 1 T r e i b e n (old German, d r i b a n) is the same word as the En- glish drive, the t corresponding to d, and the b to v. T r e i b e n, when applied to business, does not mean to drive, or press it, but sim- ply to practise it. T r i e b means, the act of driving, natural impulse (instinct) ; T r i f t (drift) is the act of being dricen, or the course of action ; also a drove, and the pasture to which cattle are driven. 2 Handel, formerly signified action of any sort. It now signifies 1. transaction, (ein schlimer Handei, a bad affair), especially a quarrel, or a lawsuit (Handel suchen, to pick a quarrel; einen Handel vor Gerichtbringen, to bring a suit before the court) ; 2. a contract, bargain, barter, trade. Handlung is now the common, word for action, in general. When it relates to trade, it means a large establishment, or mercantile house. The verb h a n- deln, once signified, fo handle, but now signifies to act, to treat, to trade. Mitjemandem fiber etwas handeln, is, to treat or bargain with one respecting a thing. Mit etwas handeln, means, to trade in a certain article : and handeln alone, means to trade. Von etwas handeln, is to treat of a subject, in writing or speak- ing. Handel, in this passage is used in its original sense, of activ- ity, business. " Carry on your labor and business as formerly." 3 Hindern, etc. "If they hinder or injure you, etc." So lass fahren, then let it go (disregard it). Thue das Deine, do your duty. 4 Wai ten, kindred with wield, signifies to control, to manage, and is used of one in authority. Hence v e r w al t e n, to administer, or perform the functions of an office. Schalten signifies, to give direction to a motion, and then to give direction, in general, and is used of one who actually has power, whether lawful or unlawful 3* 30 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. etttem (Stitcfe 1 fymbern ; ($ott, fo bit fyoffeft, ojebt e3 btr am anbern >rt, me er ^brafyam, 3faaf itnb 3ace6 tfyat, bte and) alfo fcerfuofyt ttwrbcm abebeute ? u |i 2 a m e r rn, b e r tt> t r b btr geben, n>a3 betn er$ ttntnfcfyt* >aS ifl : ?ag btcf) e3 md)t fcerbrtegen, 3 bag ott ffe fo la'gt wobffafyreit, 4 lag btr fotcfyen fetnen ^Bitten W a 1 1 e n is not limited to persons, but is said of things, as V e r- n u n f t, F r i e d e, etc. ; but s c h a 1 1 e n can be said only of per- sons, because they only can act arbitrarily. 1 StOckJe, signifies piece, and means here, as it does often, any- thing. "Though they hinder you in some particular (anything), God, if you hope in him, will give it (gives it) to you in another place." 2 Lust, pleasure, desire. So the English word, lust, originally meant desire. In the singular number, the German word is gener- ally used in a good sense (mit Lust h 6 r e n, to hear with pleasure ; ich habe "Lust zu essen, / have a desire to eat). It has a bad sense in the plural (Loste desFleisches, lusts of the fleyh), and sometimes in composition (as Wollust, voluptuousness; Flei- scheslust, carnal lust ; Lustdirne, woman of pleasure) . In most instances in composition, it indicates pleasure or amusement. From Lust is derived the verb Ittsten, to desire; and the same derivative form (i. e. the change of the vowel from u to U) is preserved in the English verb to List (the i in English corresponding to the tl of the German). Listless, in English, means without desire, without concern. LUstern, the frequentative form of the verb in German, means repeated or continued, and consequently strong desire. Ge- Ittsten means a strong desire, as a hankering for certain kinds of food, the prefix ge giving intensity to the simple word. 3 Verdriessen signifies literally to render one unhappy by giv- ing too much of a thing, or by protracting it too long ; then to occa- sion one chagrin by doing what is highly disagreeable to him, and this latter is the prevailing signification. So Verdruss, a few lines below, means, sorroio, chagrin, occasioned by another's fault, or by an unpleasant occurrence, as opposed to Lust and Wohlge- fallen. 4 Wohlfahren. Fahren, to go, or to travel, generally in a fatten, EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 31 1 fc fccrqcbt btr bie Unlufl itber bet GJottfofeu (JHikf, ja crliifte bid) brwncn, aid in bcm attcrbeften unb a.6ttltd)ctt ^Bitten, jTchc, fo baft bu btefe troftltdje 3ufaa.ung : 2 ,,@r carriage or vessel, as opposed to ge he n, to go on foot, and r e i te n to ride on horseback. Fahre wo hi, means literally, journey prosperously, and was originally said to one who was on the eve of taking a journey. F a h r e n was next applied to any pr< c s of busi- ness, as to go on ; and w o h 1 f a h r e n, to go on prosperously* So in English,/re signified originally logo; and farewell, go prosperously. The substantive fare is what one has in travelling.- How fares it with you; means, how does it go with you. Welfare, German W o h 1 far t, means a prosperous course of things. 6 Wohlgefallen. The root of this word is fall en, to fall, and, in those compound words formed from it, which signify some effect produced upon the mind, or upon something else, it conveys the incidental idea of suddenness. Something falls suddenly upon the mind as an unforeseen occurrence. A uffalle n, means to sur- prise by something strange falling upon one, (or, occurring to him) ; be i fallen, to fall in with one, to agree tcith him, or approve. In ge fall en, the prefix ge, which corresponds to the Latin con, giv- ing to substantives a collective sense (Gebirge, a chain of moun- tains) and to verbs, sometimes the idea of coherence (ge frie re n, to freeze together), sometimes that of intensity resulting from union (Gelasten as explained on p. 30, Note 2) ; and sometimes that of coincidence or fitness, as in gefal le n, to fall together so as to make the object agree with the inclination and so, to please. The verb Wohlgefallen, means accordingly, to please highly, but it is ob- solete, though the substantive Wohlgefallen is still a common word. 7 Zusagung, a promise, meant originally, the giving of one's icord in respect to (zu) a thing, an assurance in relation to something without a formal compact or pledge as in Versprechung. But its more common signification is the assenting to (z u) a request made, or compliance with a desire expressed or implied ; and it is hereby distinguished from Versprechung and Verhe issu ng. See p. 26, Note 3. Instead of Zusagung, modern writers employ Z us age. "Let it not vex you that God allows them to prosper so. Let this (such) his pleasure satisfy you, and then your sorrow over the prosperity of the wicked will pass away ; nay rejoice in it, as in the perfect and divine will, (and) behold there you have this consoling assurance." SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 32 rotrb btr geben OTeg, wa$ betn er$ begefyrt" 1 tt>ttf|l 2 bn mefyr baben ? Stebe mtr gu, bag bit anj^att beg 23erbritJTe3, fo bit on tfynen frf)opfe(t, 3 btefe ?uft nnb 28ot)I* gefatten in gottltdjcm 5Bttten itbejlt, fo werben ffe btr ntrfjt attetn fetnen dfjaben tl)itn, fonbern betn 5^er^ tt^trb and) *>otf grtebeng fet)n, nnb fro^icf) 4 marten btefer n betne 3Bege, nnb ^ojfc J Begehrt. Begehren differs from wQnschen, used a few lines above, in the following manner. W U n s c h e n, to icish, does not imply effort to obtain the object of desire. Begehren is stronger, and implies earnest and active desire. Gieren is the same with the additional idea of greediness. B e g i e r d e and G i e r differ in the same way, the latter being more sensual, and violent. 2 Wills t. Wollenis not, in German, a mere auxiliary, but a verb expressing positive desire. " What do you desire to have more." 3 Schopfest. Schopfen is kindred with scoop and signi- fies to take away a fluid with any vessel, a pitcher, spoon, bucket, etc. Then it means figuratively, to draw supplies or materials from any source. This must not be confounded with another word in the same form, sc h 6 p f e n, to create, mostly obsolete, schaffen having taken its place in that sense. But Schopfer, Schopfung, Geschopf, creator, creation, creature, are in common use. " On- ly see to it, that you have (exercise) this joy and pleasure in the di- vine will, instead of the vexation which you derive from them, then they will not only do you no harm, etc." 4 F r 6 h 1 i c h, kindred with frolic, comes from f r o h, joyful, with reference to the internal feeling ; whereas f r o h 1 i c h means joyous, with reference to the external manifestations of joy. Freudig, joyful, indicates a feeling of pleasure (Freude) arising from an agreeable object, for the attainment of which, if need be, we cheer- fully undergo labor and suffering. L u s t i g means sportive. 6 Be fie hi. Befehlen is here used in its original, but now obsolete sense, to surrender, to give up, to commend. Tatian, in the ninth century says, Bifililiit then uuingarten andern (befiehlt den Weingarten andern), he gives over the vineyard to oth- ers ; also, biviluhu minan geist in thino henti, which is given thus in EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 33 a it f H) n, e r w i r b e $ w o () I m a d) e it. 1 9itd)t bag bit mitfjtg gdjen fotftcjl, fonberu betuc SBeae, SBcrfe, Iffierte unb 3Banbe( fcejfrbl ott, fcfyre bid) an 2 iTe md)t, cmt ed mug md)t ott alfo befof)* ten wcrbcit, bag roir md)ttf than, fonbern roaS wir tfyun, ob c3 tton ben retjhtern tterfprcdjen, 3 tterfdjmcifyt, 4 Luther's translation, ich befehle meinenGeistindeine Hande. Be fe hi en now signifies, to command. Gebieten expresses the same with a stronger idea of compulsion. He is sen and vorschreiben, the one conveying orally, the other in writing an expression of one's will, rather imply than assert authority and compulsion. 1 W o h 1 m a c h e n, is here the same as gut m a c h e n. When gut is an adverb, gut machen means to do a thing well. When it is an adjective, the phrase means to render a thing good, i. e. to re- store or replace a thing, or to pacify a person. Wohl signifies, 1. agreeably, 2. well, 3. no doubt, indeed, nearly. See p. 13, Notes 6 and 1 end, and p. 12, Note 4 mid. In wohl machen, wohl without the emphasis means no doubt, surely. With the emphasis on it, as is probably the case here, it means, he will manage it right (do it well). W o h 1 1 h u n signifies both to do well, and to do good, and W o h 1- that is an act of beneficence. 2 Kehre dich an. Kehren, means to turn. S i c h z u e t- was kehren signifies to turn one's self to a thing, to give one's self up to it. Sich an etwas kehren, signifies to have regard to a thing, to hold it in special consideration. " Not that you are to be indolent, but commit your ways, works, words and walk to God ; do not regard them," i. e. opposers. 3 Versprochen. In the middle ages the particle v e r in v e r- sprechen, had its literal import, awaij,out of the way or wrong. The verb meant 1. to refuse, 2. to speak against one. In this latter sense Luther often uses it. Was wir thun, ob es. There is here a little irregularity in the construction, a licens? much more common in Luther's time than now, " what we do, whether it is spoken against, etc. one should not yield, etc.," for "whether what we do is spoken against, etc." 4 Verschmaht. This word signifies to despise a thing on ac- count of its insignificance, and thereby differs from verachten, to contemn a thing on account of its worthlessness or badness, the oppo- site of a c h te n, to respect. 34 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tert 1 ober tterfytnbert ttrirb fott man barnm ntcfyt ben nod) abfafjen, fonbern immer fortfahren nnb jTe lafien ifyren ?0?ntf)ttntfen 2 baben, ott bte acfye befefyfen, ber rcirb eg n>ol)( maefyen anf beiben (Settcn, roag recfyt tft Unb rotrb betne eredjtt.qfett fyerfcor* bringenrote bag tcfyt, nnb bein D?ecf)t n>te ben SWtttag. >teg i(l bte grogte (Serge ber ^OBetefyftnge, 3 bag ffe t)er# broken merben iiber bte ctKofen, bag tfyre 25o^t)ett fo frf)etnt unb tt>o()t gehalten tt)trb, Senn |Te forgen, i^re @ad)e werbe i)erbritcft 4 unb Derffnftert, n>et( jTe fe!)en ber SOBtberparte 5 ^Bittl)en fo l)orf) fafyren nnb oben fd)we6en. 1 Gelastert. Lastern, signified in early times, fo reproach one by exposing Ids faults. It now means to calumniate, or to impute what is false. So L a s t e r, from which it is derived, once meant reproach, disgrace ; but it now signifies, crime, scandalous vice. 2 Muthwillen, will, arbitrary choice or way. " Let them have their own will, or way." At the present day, the word is used only in a bad sense, wilful wickedness, wantonness. 3 W e i c h 1 i n g, here used of one who is yielding, i. e. faint-heart- td, or delicate and weak, not, as is commonly the case, of a voluptua- ry. Luther, in another passage speaks of the Weichlingen of his flock as distinguished from die S t a r k e n, the strong. " This is the greatest trouble of the faint-hearted, namely, that they are cha- grined on account of the wicked whose iniquity (and that their ini- quity) is so shining and so well sustained." S o r g e, in the early writers, means, sorrow, distress; in later authors, it means, anxiety, painful solicitude, and refers solely to something future. With Lu- ther both seem to be united. The misery of the faint-hearted grows out of the condition of the wicked, out of the circumstances that the wickedness of the latter triumphs, or that they triumph in their wickedness. 4 VerdrUckt. Verdrttcken, in Luther's time, signified to oppress, as unterdrOcken d es now. 5 W i d e r p a r t, opponent, is now little used ; G e g n e r is more common in that sense. The same remark is applicable to Ge gen- part. Der Widerparte is in the gen. pi. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 35 arnm troflct cr mtb fpridrt : ?ag fetw/ Itebe3 jttnb, bag fie bid), betne (sadjc mit $Be(fcn nnb ^Marea,cn ttcrbritcfcn itub tm 3(nfeben fcor ber SOBelt gar $n ntofyte 2 madjen itnb in gmftcrmg begraben, bag tbre (ad)e emporfdjtoebe unb Iend)te n>ie bie (Sonnc. S5cfteb(jl bit ott beaten ftanbef, heffejl nnb nxirfcft auf ibn, fo fei) cjettng, betn D?cci)t nnb erecf)tii]fctt wirb nicht tm ginjlcrn bletbcn, fie miif? l)eri)cr 3 nnb 3ft>ennann fo offentltcf) befannt werben al$ ber fyetfe 5Kittag r bag atte bt'e 4 gn (2cf)anben tt>erben, bte bid) tter* britcf t nnb Derbnnfeft l)aben. &$ ift nnr nm ba ^Barten jn tfjnn, 5 bag bu ott in fofrfjem SSornebmen bnrcfy betn Sitrncn, Unmnt(), SSerbrtegen ntefyt l)tnberfit IDarnm Der# mabnt er aber 6 etnmal : alte bent errn jlide 7 nnb fag i^n mit 1 Lass (es) seyn dich (und) deine Sache. Such ellip- ses are very common in Luther. 2 Zunichte. Nicht, like our word nought was once a sub- stantive, making N ichte in the dative. It is now an adverb ; and Nichts, indeclinable, is used as a substantive. Ihre Sache, their cause. 3 Sie muss hervor (leuchten, or kommen), it must shine or come forth. So, er konnte nicht vorbei (gehen), he could not pass by. Ich mussweg (gehe n), / must leave. Such omissions are very frequent in familiar discourse. 4 Alle die die, " all those who." See p. 14, Note 5. Zu Schanden werden, to be put to shame. Feminine nouns were anciently declined in the singular. Hence those phrases which have been handed down from early times, preserve the old forms of the cases. 6 sist nurum dasWartenzuthun, there is nothing to do but icait. U m, with z u t h u n, means to do with, to be con- cerned with. " That you do not hinder God in such a design (under- taking) by your anger, vexation and chagrin." 6 Aber, again, according to old usage, and the primary meaning of the word. 7 Halte dem Herrn still e. Stille h al te n with the dative of a person, literally, to hold still to one, means to be quiet in 36 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bir mad) en. ^r^itrne bid) nidjt i'tber ben 9ft a n n, bem eg vt>oM g e b e t nub t f) n t n a d) f e i* item 3fttfywt1leit. tfg fottte er fagen : @g nnfl bid) fcerbriegen, bag bit in redder (Saofye 1 ilngtitcf empfhtbejl: nnb eg 3enen in roofylgebet, nnb ttntt mrfjt, 2 n>ie bn gerne rootfteft, oit ten geben, nnb ftebeft beef), bag bem Ungered)ten 2Jtfeg narf) fetnem 50?nt{)it>tUen a,el)t, bag etn @prnd)VDort l)ieran^ ge* flofien ij^ : 3e grower (S^aff, je befler fitcf* 5Iber fet) wetfe, (tebe^ jttnb, tag birf) ba^ ntd)t bewegen, batte anf ott, beined er^en^ SBegterbe tvirb ami) fommen gar ^^ tjl aber nod) md)t 3eit x e^ mng beg (5d)a(fS 4 i?erge!)en nnb feme %tit fyaben, bt^ e^ fcoritber fommt* 3n^ beg 5 mngt bn eg ott befel)(en r in ifym bid) erlitften, feinen i/ie hands of one. Lass i h m m i t d i r m a c h e n, e< /ra you, i. e. as he pleases. Dem es wohl gehet und (der) t h u t, etc., with whom it is well, and who does. 1 In rechter Sache, in a just cause. Gerecht is more commonly used in this sense, and r e c h t in the sense of right, pro- per. 2 U n d (e s) will n i c h t, "It will vex you that you, in a good cause, feel misfortune, and that they prosper in iniquity (goes well with them in iniquity) ; and things (it) will not go on, as you would like, and yet you see that everything goes with the unjust man ac- cording to his will, so that a proverb, etc." 3 Garreichlich. Gar is nearly the same as g a n z, and they are often conjoined, ganz und gar, wholly and in every part. But gar is a little weaker than ganz, and is therefore often to be rendered by very. 4 DesSchalks. Schalk signified originally a servant, as in Gottschalk, a servant of God, M a r s h a 1 k (from M a r a h and M a h r e, horse), marshaU. In Luther's time it signified, a dis- sembler, a knave. In modern German, it means, in its milder sense, a roguish, artful, cunning man, and is even a gentler term than S c h e 1 m. Both indicate men who practise arts of deception. 5 Indess, 1. and literally, interca, meanwhile, in which sense i n- EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 37 UOittnt btr t qcfaflen fafiVit, mtf bafj 1 bu fcincn ^Bitten in bit itnb in bcincm getnbe nicl)t l)inberft> tone bte tlnm, bie nicfyt auf l)brcn $u ttwtben, pe Ijaben benn 2 tfyr tn<} 3 entwebcr mit bcm $epf fyiuburet) ober gu riimmern 4 gebradjt* d e s s e n is now more commonly used ; out of this signification has grown that of while (which was formerly expressed by i n d e s s e n d a s s, meanwhile that) ; 2. nevertheless, synonymous with d o c h and j e d oc h. 1 A u f d a s s, in order that, obsolete for dass. H i n d e r s t. See Grain, p. 317, (2), on this use of the indicative. 2 S i e h a b e n d e 11 n, is a peculiar idiom, like es sei denn, conveying the idea of an exception, unless. See Gram. p. 315. They have then, i. e. unless they have either carried their matter head- long through, or (brought it) to destruction. 3 Ding is the same word as thing. To show how the letters d, th, and t correspond to each other, we will present a few more sim- ilar examples. Thar, door; d a n n, thin ; Daum, thumb; den- ken, think; D i e b, thief; dick, thick; Distel, thistle; Dorn, thorn ; T o c h t e r, daughter ; d r e i, three ; dreschen, thresh ; Durst, thirst; Feder, feather; Leder, leather; Wort, word; Gott, God; V a t e r, father ; Bruder, brother; Nord, north. 4 TrUmmer n. Trammer is the plural of T r u m, now ob- solete. Still the singular is used in poetical and antique style. Voss, speaks of a Felstrum, fragment of a rock falling into the sea. Jean Paul, speaks of a broken watch-chain, and the T r u m, frag- ment. Compare the Greek -&pv/j,/j,a. In old German, it meant the end of a thing, as, de s meres drum, (trum), the end of the sea. Das schlachten nam ein drum, the battle took an end, i. e. ended. This same word is preserved in the English thrum, which retains the primitive signification, ends of something cut off, tangled threads cut off from cloth. The old German verb, drumon (tru- m e n) means to cut off. Hence the word T r m in e r has the wide signification of anything cut or broken ofF, as a piece of a Broken vessel, thread, rock, ruins, wreck, etc., while R u i n e n (Latin, rui- na from mere, to fall) is limited to a fallen structure, and things of that sort : Scheiter, scattered pieces of a wrecked vessel, the plu- ral of S c h e i t, a piece of wood, (hence scheitern, to go to pieces, to wreck) ; and Wrack, what remains of a ship after the 4 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. e ab t)om 3>rn nnb lag ben (SJrimm, 1 e r $ it r n e bid) n i d) t, bag b n and) ii b e f 1 t) u e ft. (siefye, n?ie fleiguj warnt er, bag nnr ja ntd)t 256fe3 mit 23ofem fcergeften, nod) ben SSofen fo(a,en 2 urn tfyreg fitcfeg mitten, n>te bte 9tatnr 511 tretben pflea,t. Unb tt>ag fytlft foldjer 3orn ? (r macfyt bie (Sadfye nid)t befler, ja fte nnr tiefer in ben @rf)tomnu Unb ob e^ fdjon anf ^ lerbefte genetfye, 3 bag bn oben lagejl: nnb gen>onneft, ()a|l bn gewonnen ? ^ott l)aft bn fcerfyinbert, bamit 5 fcine nabe nnb unfl t)er(oren, nnb ben bofen Uebelthatern btjl bn gteid) geworben, nnb tt>irfl gleid) mit tt)nen fcerberbcn, n>ie fcfgt : loose pieces are scattered away. Several late writers, as Voss, Gothe, Seume and many others, have used TrUmmer as a mascu- line singular, and formed from it a new and second plural, d i e Trammer n. 1 Zorn, Grimm. Zorn means anger, a fiery passion. Grimm means/z/ry. Hence one may say in Zornes Grimm, in the fury of passion. W u t h means rage, after the manner of the ocean. So w t h e n in the preceding paragraph. D ass d u auch tlbel t h u e s t, so as to do evil. 2 F o 1 g e n, is here used as it is sometimes in the old German, in the sense of v e r f o 1 g e n, to persecute. 3 Geriethe. Gerathen, means to turn out, as indicating an unforeseen result, to terminate in a certain way by chance. But it is more commonly used in the restricted sense, to turn out well, as das Getreide ist nicht gerathen, the grain, (crop) has not turned out well. Die Arbeit ist ihm gerathen, the work has turned out successfully to him. Ungerathene Kin- der, children that turn out poorly. 4 Oben lagest und gewonnest, " shouldst lie top and win." Gewinrien which makes the imperfect in gewann, has the imperfect subjunctive gewanne, for which there is another form g e w o n n e. There is here an allusion to wrestling. Unterliegen is still used to express the opposite of o b e n lie- gen which is obsolete. See both words in the first paragraph under verse 24. 6 D a m i t. "Thou hast hindered God [from delivering you, and] tliereby lost his grace and favor." EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 39 >enn bte 956 fen roerben anggerottet, bte 1 aber beS crrn {jarren, 2 tt>erbenba$2anb er ben. & httft 3 bid) nitty, bag bit ntd)t ancjefangen 4 fyafl ober t fet)eft. enn eg t(l ein fd)led)te 5 frete$ Urtfyeil : Uebef tfyut, gerei$t ober mtor 2(ngen in atter in attett efd)td)ten, met 1 auf ott rcartct, ber 6(ei6t, bag tteben tfym way." From this were derived the significations, straight, true, sim- ple. But the form s c h 1 i c h t is, in modern German, employed to designate those ideas, and s c h 1 e c h t has received another fig- urative signification. As what is level is lower than the eminences, s c h 1 e c h t came to signify low, and then worthless. So the Eng- lish verb slight signified originally, to level, to cast down ; and then to cast away and disregard. " They slighted and demolished all the works of that garrison." Clarendon. " The rogues slighted me into the river." Shakespeare. Schlimm differs from schlecht in this, that it means something positively bad or injurious, while the latter is negatively bad, or worthless. Schlimm signified ancient- ly, crooked, and hence out of form, or out of proper order. Ein schlimmer Hals, was a crooked neck ; schlimm schreib- e n, was to write, crookedly. But in modern usage this meaning is not common. Ein schlimmer Finger, means a bad or sore finger; ein schlimmer Hund, a vicious dog. In English, the word slim, means poor and bad. Barrow says, " That was a slim excuse." Webster seems to have inverted the propel order of the significations of this word. In Dutch, the word slim and in the Danish slcm are used in the sense of s c h 1 i m m in German, so that little doubt can remain of the origin of the English word. 1 A b e r w e r. " But he, who waits for God (looks to him for aid), remains (waits) for the evil-doer to perish by his side, whoever can but wait so long." Wer followed by der, like the Latin qui fol- lowed by is. " Wicked men are so very ripe, that, though no one drives them on, they cannot restrain themselves ; they, of their own accord, bring down calamity upon their o'vyn necks, so that they are destroyed in one's sight." Vertreiben, to drive away, and conse- quently, to drive forward. Anrichten, to prepare; and then to bring, or to occasion something evil, like anstiften. Zusehens, genitive of Z u s e h e n, the act of seeing, used adverbially and mean- ing, at the time of seeing, while one is seeing, visibly. In common life, zusehend and zusehends are so employed. "For ripe grass must become hay, and it shall even dry in itself [standing] on its stalk." N i e m a n d, on the next page, 7th line, is in the dative. A n must always be used, when that is to be pointed out in which anything takes place, "in murderers," etc. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 41 imtcrflcfje ber llebcltftater, mcr nut fo tange Barren fbnnte. Sic bofen gWenfdjen jmb fo gar reif, bag, 06 fie Sftfcmanb aertreibt, fo meant fie fid) felbft nidjt entfyalten, pe ndjten em mutbttrilKg Ungtitd an iiber tfjren al$, bag fie jufeften* &erti(gt roerbem Senn bag reife @ra3 mug eu rcerbeu uub fottte e$ an ihm fefbfl auf bent tamme fcerborrcm @S i|l em bofer 5Renfdj 9tiemanb fo unertrag(id) imb brief) af^ ffcf) felbft. 2)a^ fel)en ttrir an ben 5^orbern, ben/i)rannen unb (5^ ijl nocf) nm etn ^(eine^fo i(l ber (ofe nimmer, 2 fo tt)ir(l bu auf feiue (5td'tte 3 adjten, unb er wirb niefyt ba 1 Um ein Kleines, a short time. U m, about, not far from, is often used where we should expect exactness ; and, in such cases, is to be translated by at, when it refers to a point of time, and to be omitted altogether, when it refers to measure, either of time or of space ; as, u m v i e r U h r, at four o'clock. Um drei Jahre alter, titree years older. 2 N i m m e r. J e means at any time, distributively, and then all times collectively, ever. In the old Gothic form it was a i v, hence the English word ever}, from which e w i g is derived. J e with a negative particle prefixed, becomes n i e, and is just the opposite in signification. Compounded with m a 1 s (genitive of m a 1) it forms j e m a 1 s, and is a stronger expression of the idea at any time (ever of time, ever in the world); which, in the negative form, is n i e- m a 1 s. J e with m e r (old German for m e h r) forms i m m e r, evermore, and negatively, n i m m e r, never more. These last differ from the preceding, by relating to the future, and being properly lim- ited to it. N i m m e r m e h r, is a still stronger expression. But the word m e h r, in such cases, in denying something with reference to the future, does not imply its former existence, as the English ex- pression, no more, does, and should not be rendered by these words, but simply by never, or never in the icorld. 3 S t a 1 1 e, the place where anything stands, or abides. It is now used only in elevated style. S t a 1 1 (English stead) was formerly used in this sense, of which we see traces in such compounds and phrases as, W e r k s t a 1 1, work-place, work-shop ; Bett-statt, 4* SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. erffdrt, it>a3 brobeu 1 gefagt tft, bag (Te fi'ub tote ba$ fcfyuett abgebaiteu tt>irb, bamit jtitr wifere Unge* bulb gejtttft n>erbe, tt>ekfyeg flrf) fitrrfjtet, bie $ott(ofeu Met* fceit 311 tange, ?D?6rf)tefi aber fagen : 3a, id) fefye n>ol)(, bag tie Uugerecfyten gememtajid) fange bleibeu, and) mit (5^ren gum @rabe fcmmen ? 5(nttt>ort : 2)a^ gefofytefyt gewtgtirf) 2 barunt, bag ber an* tere ^t)ei( 3 pd) titd)t ttarf) biefem ^Pfa(m ge^aften 4 f)at, fon^ beru bte Sarfje mit 3^n, 5Butbeu, rimmen, ^(agen unb unb t>erborbiu at bedstead ; an m e i n e r S t a 1 1, zn mz/ p/ff ce ; s t a 1 1 m e i n e r, in my stead ; Statt haben, to take place ; Statt geben (or ob- solete Statt than), to grant a place; i. e. to yield, to permit; von Statten (dat. pi.) g e h e n, to prosper ; zu Statten k o m m e n, to be serviceable to one. 1 D rob en, compounded of d a (which becomes dar before a vowel) and o b e n. D a r, is frequently contracted into d r, as it easi- ly forms a syllable with the following vowel. 2 Gewisslich, is now nearly out of use, and g e w i s s is used adverbially in its stead. Inasmuch as all adjectives in German may, without change of termination, be used as adverbs, the adverbial ending 1 i c h is used less frequently than formerly. 3 T h e i 1, here used in the sense of party, properly signifies a part, that which goes to make up the whole. It is the same as the English word deal (Gothic Bail, Anglo-Saxon, dcel} ; which in old English signifies a part. So the verb to deal, originally signified, to divide, like the German theilen. A n t h e i 1, a part, signifies that part (T h e i 1) icliich falls to (an) one in distribution. 4 Sichnichtnach diesem Psalm gehalten, "has not held (or regulated) itself according to this Psalm." 5 Wathen, Grimmen, Klagen und Schreien, infin- itives used as substantives and having the force of participial nouns in English, " raging, venting fury, complaining, and crying out," more forcible than " rage, fury, complaints and cries." While schreien, signifies to utter loud cries, whether in intelligible words or not, r u f e n means to call by addressing one distinctly and intelligibly. Hence R u f, 1 . a call, 2. reputation, literally, what is spoken of one aloud, and what goes abroad. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 43 nianb 1 ba gcwefcn ift, ber feme (arf)e ott empfofyfett fyatte nub fctucg s lBtltcng gewartet, fo iff bag Urttyeil 2 beg nacf)^ flen Dorigcu 3 SSerfcg iiber beibe f)ette gcgangcn, imb jTnb t^erttfgt affcfammt, 4 bie ba Uebelg getban l)aben. ^Bcire aber etn ^l)et( $u @ott bcfc^rt, fo ware bocf) bag anbre $tbei( gcwiglid) imb eifenb a((ein :) imtergegangen, wie biefer fagt. 1 N i e m a n d, nobody, the opposite of j e m an d, somebody, is com- posed of /tie and man, and in old German is written Nieman. D or de is often so appended to a word to give it strength of utter- ance. N i e m a n d and j e m a n d have no plural, and are common- ly varied only in the genitive case (Niemands), though we often meet with Niemandem and Jemandem in the dative and Niemanden and Jemanden in the accusative. See p. 10, Note 5. 2 Urtheil means originally a judicial decision, and in the old German and Saxon is found under the forms of urdcii, oordel, and ordal, whence ordalium in modern Latin, and ordeal, the judicial de- cision of God, in English. Die sele in urteile setzen, in old German, means, to submit one's life to the judgment of God, to submit to the ordeal. Richardson, in his dictionary seems not to be aware of the early use of this word and its corresponding verb in the early Ger- man. The modern word for ordeal is Gottesurthiel, which is more definite. The derivative and common signification of the word Urtheil is any judgment formed by the understanding. An Ur- theil in this sense may exist in the mind without being expressed ; when it is expressed, it becomes a Satz, a sentence, or declaration. 3 Vorigen, preceding. The adjective ending ig is frequently joined to particles, converting them into adjectives, as v o r i g, o b i g, hiesig, dortig, and even etwaig, from vor, oben, hier, dort, and etwa, meaning the preceding, the above, belonging here, belonging there, that which may take place (or incidental). 4 Und sind vertilgt allesammt, die, etc., " and (those) who have done evil (evil-doers) are all destroyed together." This use of d i e for antecedent and relative, is not unlike the Biblical use of the word that, in such phrases, as " Other foundation can no man lay than that is laid." Da after this relative (d i e d a) is regarded as an expletive. 6 Allein, "certainly and speedily have perished alone." SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fefyen nnr jefet btefe 9>fafm3 (Jrempel 1 in ber nirfjr. enn em 3ea,ftd)er lagt ott fafyren bnrd) Ungebnlb itub nnterjlefyt fid), nut ^Hedjten ober gedjten 2 gu fdjitfcetu ^anrit ttnrb ott an foldjem SOBerfe tterbtnbert, biefer ^pfalm fcen iljm 5( b e r b t e @ t e n b e n 4 tt) e r b e n ba^ ?anb ben nnb ?u(l I>a6en in grofetn gricben* ^teg befldttgt aitd), tt>a^ brcben gefagt ift, tt)te bie red)ten bfctben narf) bem Serberbcn ber Uebe[tl)dter baf (Te en>tg anf (rben bfeiben, fonbern ba^ t!)re (Sacfye ^nbe nnb gncbcn 5 nut (Sfyren f ommt, and) anf @rben, vt)e(^ d)en grfeben ffe mft ?eiben nnb ebnlb nnb innerftcfyem grteben t^erbtent t^aben* 1 Dieses Psalms Exempel, would be regarded as a harsh construction in modern German. " An exemplification of this Psalm." 2 Mit Rechten oder Fechten, one of those alliterations in which the old German, particularly in legal phrases, abounds. "By contending at law, or by force." Infinitives used substantively. There is an old proverb, Rechten ist fechten; and another, Wer nicht kannfechten, gewinntnichtsim Rech- ten. 3 Welches. This old interrogative, was not used in early times as a relative. Jt occurred less frequently in Luther's time than now. It has properly the nature and sense of an adjective (which kind, qua- Zis), and must always be used after such words as s o 1 c h e r and others expressing quality. Solchem Werke, das, would be as much of a solecism, as such a work, which, in English. See a few lines below welchen Friederi, which kind of peace. 4 E 1 e n d, in old German, e 1 i 1 e n t i and a 1 i 1 a n t i (another land) meant originally an exile (one in a foreign land). Hence, wretched and (as an exile is a criminal) contemptible. Arm, poor, miserable does not imply the same degree of wretchedness, nor does it include the idea of contempt. 6 Zum Ende und Frieden, " their cause will come (comes) to its termination and to peace with honor." EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 45 ^cr ottfofe brofyet ben erect) ten, itnb b e t g e t f e i n e 3 # {) n c S u f a m m e n & * r t f) H* a3 tjt aber gu roft ben ^Betcfyltngen 1 unb (Scfywarf)* ajaubtcjcn gcfagt, bte ber ottlofen obcn niofyt leiben wok ten unb yerbriegt, 2 bag fie ott ntcfyt balb ftraft unb fo tt>ol)( ba$u a,et)cn Idgt. %d) nenne Impium etnen ottfofem >enu c3 Ijeijjt ei.qentftrf) 3 ^en, ber anf ott nid)t traut nocfy gfaubt, ber ait^ ibm fefbfH unb feinem freten ^Bitten narf) in ber S^atitr tcbt, ate benn fonber(irf) (Tnb bte feigner, bte elcbrtcn unb fd)einenben ^cth'gen, ate gu unferen fmb 9>ab(l, S3tfrf)5fe, ^faffcn, ^onrfje, 5 octore unb 1 Zu Trost den Weichlingen, "as a consolation to the faint-hearted." 2 Und verdriesst, " and (whom it) annoys that God does not immediately punish them, and, besides, (d a z u), allows it to go so well (with them)." 3 E i g e n 1 1 i c h, in its proper and strict sense. As applied to a word, it denotes proper and literal signification and is synonymous withursprttnglich. Uneigentlich, means figuratively. 4 Der aus ihm selbst, etc., " who, in a state of nature, lives for himself (draws his motivesyVom himself) and according to his own free will." 5 Pabst, Bischofe, P faff en, Monche. Pabst, in old German B a b s t, but in the modern orthography P a p s t, literally means father, and comes not from papa, but from papas, or pappas, a Latin word, borrowed from the Greek, and much used in the middle ages. This form of the word for father, in a religious sense, was undoubtedly chosen, because the other form was appropri- ated to another use, as will be seen under the word P f a f f. P a p s t is applied exclusively to the bishop of Rome. B i s c h o f is a cor- ruption of the word episcopus, and corresponds in signification. So vescovo in Italian, and eveque (evesque) in French. Pfaff, a clergyman, comes from papa, and was originally a title of honor ^iv- en to spiritual teachers. But the German word is not applied to the pope, nor even to bishops as such. It designates the ordinary secu- lar clergy, as distinguished from the regular clergy or monks on the one hand and from the laity (L a i e n) on the other. It was used in a good sense till about the time of the reformation, when it ceased 46 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gleidjeit SSoff, roekfye son 9tatw mitffcn, nrittfyen vtriber 1 ba$ fyetttge (t>ana,elium, rcne rotr fel)en, bag ffe aucfy tt>etbltrf) tfntm 5i6er roaS tyttfr (Te tyr Hfiutljen imb oben ? 2 ore, n>a3 ba 3 folgt, 2J fc e r b e r 5? e r r I a d) e t f e i n, 4 b e n at e r ft e ty t, bag fein aie f ur$ fte nnitfyen roerben, nnb ifyr nid)t feme tfh bag @ott tt)te ein 5Dfjcnfrf) (ad)e, fonbern bag e3 (acf)erlicf) i|l anjnfel)en in ber ^Baljrbeit, bag bie totfen 4 9J?enfef)cn fo fel)r tvittben nnb grog Ding Dornehmen, beffen 5 fie nid)t ein ^aar breit anSricfytcn mogen* feirf) at^ ein matic expressions, such as, g e d e n k e m e i n (m e i n e r), remem- ber me ; v e r g i s s m e i n (m e i n e r) n i c h t, forget me not. 1 Wie raochte, etc. This sentence is a little irregular in its construction. " How could a stronger consolation be given us (than this ; ) that the furious enemies of the righteous should apply all their power and malice (and) suppose with all seriousness that they are about to rend in pieces the righteous (i. e. those who believe in God) with their teeth, and (that) God holds them in such utter con- tempt, that he laughs at them, because he sees how soon their rage will be over, and that their day is not far distant." 2 M ein en, (low German m e e n e n, English mean} signifies, to hold an opinion without absolutely affirming its truth, to be of opin- ion. Wahnen, (English ween) to suppose, or to hold an opinion without good reason. Hence commonly, to imagine or suppose falsely. 3 Ernst, as an adjective, was formerly written ernest and means the same as the English adjective earnest. As a substantive, it means, earnestness, seriousness. 4 T o 1 1 e n. Toll, foolish, irrational, mad, conveys very nearly the same idea as w tt t h e n d, raging (see wOthende Feinde, a few lines above), and hence the propriety of saying that die t o 1- len Menschen wtlthen; but it comes still nearer to t o- b e n d, boisterous, ranting (see p. 46, Note 2) as it represents one out of his senses as it were, like an insane person. Hence T o 1 1- h a u s, mad-house, ein toller Hund, a mad dog. Rasend is raving, opposed to quiet, as toll is to rational. 5 D e s s e n, is governed by H a a r, " of which they cannot bring a hair in breadth (a hair's breadth) to pass." 48 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. lacfyerttcfyer 902amt tt>are, ber 1 einen langen (Spieg nnb fnr* gen e$en ncifyme, nnb woltte bie @onne fcom JQtmmel ber* abftedien, itnb jaud^te einmal 2 barauf, a($ fydtte er einen reb(id)cn Slid) getfyan* )ie ottlofen $teben ba3(5rf)tt>ert anS nnb fpannen 3 ifyren 23 o a. en, bag jte fallen ben ((enben nnb ^rmen, nnb fd) I ad) ten bie, fo anfrirf)ti(j gel) en tm 2Bea.e, 4 @dw>ert imb S3egen ^eigen 5 bier bie fcergtfteten bofen 1 Gleich als ein lacherlicher Mann ware (der) de r, " he who," etc. * E i n m a 1, like once in English, has two significations, the one definite when the accent is on e i n, the other indefinite when the accent is on m a 1, thus, 1 . one single time, as ich habe ihn nur einmal gesehen, 1 have seen him but once ; 2. at some indefinite time, past, present, or future, as, eswar einmal ein Mann, there was once a man. In this last sense it is often used for empha- sis merely and is not to be translated, or may be rendered by even, as, d e n k e d i r einmal! Only think ! (d i r an expletive), i c h kenne ihn nicht einmal, I do not even know him. " And then (einmal) should shout over it, as if he had given (itj a real thrust." 3 Spannen, means, to stretch, (or bend) any elastic body ; to stretch the fingers apart and to form a S p a n n e, span, from the end of the thumb to that of the little finger; (of animals) to stretch or prick up the ears ; to fasten into any instrument-or machine as a lathe by straining it tight ; to bind anything on with ropes or chains ; to harness a horse (a n s p a n n e n) by binding him close to the car- riage (das Gespann, a team so fastened ; der Gespann, a mate, as if harnessed with another used only in sport) ; also to fet- ter a horse ; to strain or pinch, of a garment or shoe ; and then figu- ratively to strain and overstrain in any way. 4 So a u f r i c h t i g g e h e n i m W e g e, in the Hebrew sense, " who walk uprightly in their ways." 5 H e i s s e n, to call, (governing two accusatives, Adam hiess s e i n W e i b Eva); to call for, to order a thing, which is a milder term than befehlen, gebieten (the accusative of the person with an infinitive, as Er hiess mich kornmen or the dative EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 49 3nno.cn, 1 bamit jTe (djtern, fdjmafyen, fcerfcfyren, tterf(aa.eu unb frf)dnbcn bie Sadjc bc3 eredjtcn, auf bag bie grom* men 2 in &a@, Serfcfgimg nnb gum obe baburd) fommcn unb ttertifa,t tucrbcn mod) ten. 2Kfo fprtdjt $f. 57 : ,,er SOfrnfdjenfinber 3ngcn (Tnb nnb ^pfcttc, nnb ibrc 3nna,e tft ein fdjarfeg ' bamit fyauen fie 4 nad) bent @ered)ten, 06 fie ifytt fallen mod)ten nnb frftfarfjten ; ba^ tft, nid)t attein tobten,- fonbern nad) tfyrcm ^nthwtllen in il)m n>iU)(cn unb fnbeln. (Jr nennt and) bte @ered)tenben eringeu unb Airmen, barunt bag fie or ber grogen bodjmut^igen @d)tt>ufft unb of the person and accusative of the thing ; as H 6 r e, w a s i c h dirheisse). As a neuter verb (and so it is here used), it has a passive signification (to be called), or a mere explanatory sense, as, das heisst, that is, that means, or is equivalent to. E s h e i s s t, means, it is said. 'Zungen. Zunge, tongue. Z often takes the place'of t in English ; as Z e h e, toe ; Z e h n, ten ; Z e i c h e n, old Saxon te- ken, English token ; Z i n n, tin ; Z i p f, tip ; Z o 1 1, toll ; Z w a n- zig, twenty; Zweig, twig; Zwei (old German zwo, fern, and z w e e n, masc , twain), two ; z w 6 1 f, twelve. 2 Die Frommen. Fromm is a word of very wide signi- fication, originally that which forwards one's designs, useful, profita- ble. This sense prevails in the verb f r o m m e n. Then, it meant excellent, valuable, good ; applied to a man's moral character, pious, religious; applied to God, benevolent, compassionate, and so applied also to others ; applied to animals, innocent, harmless ; e i n f r o ra- in e r Hund, a dog that does not bite ; e i n f r o m m e s P f e r d, a gentle horse, and so sometimes when applied to persons, particularly to children. 3 W a f f e n, old Saxon wapan, Anglo-Saxon wapen, English weap- on, any kind of armour whether offensive or defensive. 4 Damit hauen sie, etc., " with which they strike at the right- eous man that (if) they may strike him down and slay him, that is, not merely kill him, but roll the body (him) about and besmear it ac- cording to their pleasure." 50 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ber ottfofen fceracfytet unb germge jmb* rtcfyten (Te aug ? 2 6re : tl)r (Scfywert rotrb in tftr er$ gefyen unb t fy r 23 o 3 e u tt> t r b $ e r b r e d) e m 1 Sch waist and Blase n, swelling and puffing. The former is a substantive, and the latter an infinitive used substantively. Both, of course, are used here figuratively. Schwulst, literally, a swell- ing tumor for which the word Geschwulst is much more com- mon. Figuratively, it is applied to a swollen style of speaking and writing, and means, bombast, rant. B 1 a s e n means to blow, in the widest sense of this term ; in a restricted sense, it means to bloio with the mouth ; and figuratively, to puff and swell. 2 Richten sie aus. Richten means, to put straight, to put in order, to put right, from which a variety of other significations are derived. A u s r i c h t e n, is to carry a thing out properly to its end, and hence to accomplish. i n r i c h t e n, to bring a thing into its proper place or order, to arrange, to adjust. Anriehten, to ar- range or prepare a thing for something else, as food for the table, (mostly limited to such a use) ; to occasion (something evil). A u f- r i c h t e n, to erect, to build ; figuratively, to raise up, and comfort. E r r i c h t e n, to build up, to complete that which is angelegt, or has a foundation already laid ; figuratively, it is limited chiefly to establishing universities and forming leagues. Gardens, groves, nur- series for trees, ditches, pools, as also lower schools, factories, etc. are angelegt, (laid out) as they are on the surface of the ground or figuratively represented as low and inferior ; buildings, trees and anything raised up in establishing it, are errichtet. Convents, hospitals, poor-houses, monuments and the like are gestiftet. Entrichten, is to pay one's debts, taxes, etc., i. e. to do what is right towards (e n t) another in regard to payment. Hinrichten, to direct a thing to its place, to carry a criminal to execution, or to execute, to destroy. Verrichten, generally of mechanical labor, to do or perform; to carry a business forth (v e r, away, to its end) to its completion. Zurichten, to direct a thing or aim it towards (z u) its object ; to fit or prepare. This word is used in a much wider and looser sense and in more connections than anrichten. A b- richten, (in mechanical arts,) to prepare work, to fit it or make it ready by putting in order whatever is necessary ; also, to teach any thing mechanically to men or animals, in a much lower sense than un ter r ichten. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 51 I: ibre bofnt 2Borte mitffcn'fie roicbcr freffett/ nub en)io,(id) baran errcitrqen, bag ibr eroiffen im (5ter* ben bamit bnrd)fted)en eun'gltd) roirb a,epeinia,t. a$u ber S3ea,en 2 tt>irb $erbred)cn, bag Silted ijergeben^ 3 ift unb fie nid)t^ an^ricbtcn mtt alt ibrem ^ittben, benn bag fie il)nen felbfl footed llnajttrf s ur ^ teu fwtgftd), ba^ arme elenbe SSetf. 2)arum fed fid) tbred ^affcn^ unb ^d)dnben^ ^Jtie^ manb entfc^en, 4 c^ mug a(fo feijn, bag (Te it)nen felbj* ba S3ab in ber 6t(e tt>ol)[ bereiten, wietvobt bie 9tatur foldje fd)wcre ?ajlermorte ungern (eibet. od) ber @etft, ttad) biefem q3falm (jertdjtet, ladjet tl)rer mit ott unb jlei)t auf ibr 1 Fressen and es sen are thus distinguished by an old writer. Ein Wolf soil fressen, ein Mensch soil essen. Thus, f r e s s e n means to eat greedily or devour ; essen, to eat. So s a u- fen, to drink like a beast, trink en, to drink Like a man. "Their malicious words shall devour them, and forever torment (strangle) them in this (da ran) that their conscience, rilled with compunction (punctured) thereby, will be tormented forever. Besides (da zu, in addition to this} the bow shall be broken, so that all is in vain, and they effect nothing by all their rage but (d e n n, like als; nichts denn, nothing else than} that they prepare for themselves forever such wretchedness poor, miserable people ! Therefore should no one be terrified at their hate and abuse ; so it must be in order that they may prepare for themselves a bed (bath) in hell, although (human) nature bears unwillingly such severe reproaches. Yet the spirit (as opposed to the flesh, or nature) regulated by this psalm laughs at them as God does (with God) and looks at their end." 2 B o g e n, a bow, from b i e g e n, to bend, has a passive significa- tion, anything bent (corresponding to g e-b o g e n, bent}, and therein differs from the active forms, B i e g u n g, the act of lending, and B i e g e, the bend. It means, a bow, an arch, a crooked path, or a sheet of paper (from its being doubled together). 3 V e r g e b e n s, in vain ; literally, given away, given to no pur- pose, or falsely. 4 Entsetzen, as an active verb, to put one (s e t z e n) away or out of his place (e n t) ; as a reflective verb, to be put out of one's self. \. e. to be terrified or amazed in a very high degree. 52 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. @ (ft beffer 1 bag SOBcnigc beg ererf)ten, benn bag groge ut 2 ber ottfofen. )a3 tpt aucfy t)erbrteg(td) ber yiatwc, bag bte ($ctt(ofen retcfy jmb unb tfyrer mel 3 imb macfyttg : aber ber ererf)te tpt arm unb atfein, bat and) wentc), unb jTe ncfymen il)m ba* $u bag (Seine, 4 fyinbern it)U and) an ber 9cafyrung >arum troftet ber fyetttcje et|1: fein ItebeS $tnb uttb fjmcfyt : ?ag bid) e utrf)t t)erbrtegen, bag bu wenta,, (Te t)tel ^aben ; lag ffe f)ier retc^ unb fatt fei)n, e^ t(l bir beflfer, bag bu em tt>e* M\Q ^abejl mit ottc^ unfV 5 benn ob 6 bu groge aufen 1 Es ist besser, etc. When in a simple sentence a verb precedes its nominative, the expletive e s must come before the verb. "The little of the righteous is better than, etc." 2 D a s Gut, ordinarily means as it does here, an estate, property. The plural, die Gfiter, means generally, goods, possessions; but sometimes is applied to the possessions of the mind, or mental attainments. Das G u t e, is the abstract form, the good, as we say, the sublime, the beautiful. Gute, means goodness, kindness, although the latter is more perfectly expressed by Gtitigheit which is rarely used. So gut, good; and gtl tig, kind. 3 Reich sind und ihrer viel, etc. " are rich and many of them and powerful." 4 Und sie nehmen ihm das Seine, " and besides they take from him what he has." Ihm, from him. This idea (from) does not lie in the dative so much as it does in nehmen, to take away ; and " to take away with reference to him," (the dative merely shows the indirect object of the action) is the same in sense, as " to take away from him." The Germans cannot use sein substantive- ly for " his own," but must prefix the article and give it the form of the neuter adjective used as an abstract noun. 5 G u n s t, favor, comes from g 6 n n e n, to favor, to grant. St is a mere euphonic addition to the root. The vowel of the root is in such cases, ordinarily changed into u. This addition of st is lim- ited to those verbs whose roots end with a liquid. So K u n st from kennen; Brunst, from brennen; Runst, from r i n n e n ; S c h w u 1 s t from s c h w e 1 1 e n. 6 D e n n o b, etc. " than if you had great piles of goods, not only of one, but of many and of all the ungodly," etc. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 53 (fitter, mrf)t attcm eutctf, fcnbcrn Dicier unb atter ottlofen tydtteft mit otte3 Uugunft, rote fie Ijabem 2facf) l)6re, fitr em 1 Urtfyetf gel)t iibcr beine 3lrmutl) unb ifyren tfyum* )enn ber 2frm ber ottfofen rotrb brerf)en,aber ber 5? err credit bie e r e cf)* ten. er Sinn unb anb ffnb ber SInfyang 2 ber ottlofen, bag il)rer 3Ste(e ^ufammenl)attett, wnb baburrf) (Tub jte grog, mdrf)ttg unb flarf ; gteicfynne je^t be^ ^3abjle^ $rme pub bie ^ontge/ 3 gitrjlen/ 23ifd)6fe, etebrte, ?5fafen unb 1 Was fUr ein, what kind of. This phrase for describing the quality or character of a thing, is to be explained by a reference to the peculiar use of f r in German. In English, we say, " he holds a thing to be good ;" the Germans say, " he holds it for good." Hence Was f U r, means " what it is held to be," and hence " of what kind it is." 2 A n h a n g. Observe here the resemblance of several succes- sive words to the English. Arm, und, Hand, Anhang (Eng. hang,) Gottlos (godless). Han gen signifies to hang; Hang, declivity, and (then as derived from this) propensity. A b h a n g, precipice, is a still stronger term for declivity, and is much more fre- quently used than Hang. Anhang, appendix, and (as ap- plied to persons) adherents, party. V o r h a n g, something hung before, i. e. a curtain hung before a window, stage, etc. U m h a n g, a curtain hung around a bed, etc. A u s h a n g, something hung out for show, as show goods, Aushange-schild, a sign-board. 3 K 6 n i g e. The orthography of this word is various in the old German. Among other forms we find Kdnic, KUnc and King. So, Der edel king von franckenrieche by one of the Meistersingers. The word comes from K n n e, race, genealogy, i. e. noble race. This agrees well with what Tacitus says of the Germans, Reges ex nobilitate sumunt. Richardson on the word, king, is incorrect, or, at least, is at variance with the best Ger- man authorities. 4 Furst, is the superlative of f (1 r the old form of v o r, the foremost, the first, and hence, the leader, like the Latin princcps, and the English prince. 5* 54 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. auf rcekfye er ffd) ttertcigt 1 wib ott nicfyt ad)tet 2tffo fyat em jegtidjer ottlofe ben $aufeu, bie ett>alti* gen auf femer cite* emt D^eidjtfyum wtb ett>aft 2 fyat nod) me ober gar n>entg auf beS ered)teu Seite gejfottbetu 2l6er tt>a3 fyitft eS ? 3 raue ttur ott, eg mug 2We$ gerbrodjen werbert, barffH bid) barob nidjt eutfe^en nod) bid) fcerbriegen tafl*en, ott entfya'lt 5 bid), bu n>irp ttid)t t>er# ffufen, fein ^rm uub feine anb ift itber bit uub I)at bicf) fefl gefagt. )er$errfennt 6 bte ^tage ber grommen, mtb tfyr ^rbe tt>irb e tt> i g U c^ bleiben* 1 Verlasst. Verlassen signifies, to give up, or abandon, {las sen, to leave, ver^away). Sich verlassenauf, means to give one's self up (a u f) to something, i. e. to rely on it, or trust in it. 2 G e w a 1 1, from w a 1 1 e n, to control, means controling power which involves the idea of superiority, or ability to compel. Neith- er M a c h t, might, power, nor S t a r k e, strength, conveys this relative idea of power. S t a r k e has reference to physical energy as resulting from a vigorous body. Kraft refers to efficiency, or producing effect. A medicine may have S t a r k e, or be strong, and yet not have Kraft, or be effective. 3 Was h i 1 f t e s ? " What does it avail them ?" So, e s h i 1 f t n i c h t s, it avails nothing, it is of no use. See p. 39, Note 3. 4 D r f e n is rarely used in its original signification, to dare. W a g e n is used in its stead. It commonly means to have the pow- er or liberty to do a thing (may, can). Nicht dttrfen, implies that one is prevented by a want of permission, reason, or propriety (i.e. may not, must not, because it is not allowed, is not proper, or there is no good reason). Then it means furthermore, to need, though be- d U r f e n and brauchen are much more common in this sense. 5 Enthalt. Enthalten, as a reflective verb signifies to re- strain one's self. As an active verb, it means, to contain. In old Ger- man it also meant to aid, to uphold. So Luther uses it here, and in many passages in his version of the Scriptures. 6 K e n n e n and w i s s e n differ as connoitre and savoir do in French. The former means to know so as to distinguish or recognize, and approaches to erkennen in sense, to recognize. Thus : EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 55 ett erfcnnt tbre Zap, tbrc cfeontbett, 1 bag tft, bie* wctt fie tbm fret gfauben nub nidjt wiffen wottett, wcnn unb rote ibnen $u belfen fci), fo ntmmt ott ffd) tyrer an, 2 mtb ob ed Dor ben ottlofcn fdjeint, ate l)abe ott tfyrer ttergef* fen, fo tit e3 bod) nid)t atfo, ott roetg roobf, menu tbre 3ett ifr, tl>ncn s ^(fen. 5Cie aitd) ^Pfatrn 9 : ,,@ott ift ctn ^clfcr ju redder 3eit/' imb ^)f. 31 : /7 SWctnc 3ett jlel)t in beinen ^dnben." 2it^ wottte er fagen : @te (Tnb arm unb roenia,, 3 3ene finb reid) unb mdd)ttg ; aber (ag ,qd) ett / (Te njerben bennod) genug fyaben unb feine 3^tot^ (etben ott metg wot)!, tt>enn e^ Sett tfl, tbnen s ^Ifen unb $u Ich kenne ihn dem Namen nac h v on Gesicht, 7 know him (can distinguish him) by name by sight. W i s s e n can never be so used. Hence it is applied more to things than to persons. In fact so broad is the distinction that the Germans never treat them as synonyms. Observe the use of these three words in this and the following lines. 1 Gelegenheit means, literally, situation. From the local idea is derived that of situation in respect to circumstances, \. e. condi- tion, and finally, occasion. a So nimmt Gott sich ihrer an. "Since they volun- tarily trust in him, and do not desire to know when and how they are to be helped (it is to help them),/ie takes care of them." Anneh- m e n means to accept, to take what is offered, or is at hand. E i- nen Rath, eine Meinung annehmen, to accept, or adopt, advice, an opinion. Angennommen is sometimes equi- volent to verstellt, affected, pretended, assumed; and sometimes to g e s e t z t, taken for granted. Sich annehmen with the genitive, to take an interest in, to feel a concern for, literally to put one's self, or engage (sich n e h m e n) in (a n) something. For this wide use of the genitive, corresponding to all the relations express- ed by von, vor and an, see Gram. p. 326. 3 W e n i g, in the old German often written w e i n i g, comes from w e i n e n, to lament, and signifies in the oldest writers, la- mentable, deplorable ; then it came to signify weak and small, for which g e r i n g and k 1 e i n are now used ; and finally a small por- tion either of a mass or number, i. e. little, few. The connection here shows that w e n i g is used in its ancient sense ; for it is opposed to machtig as arm is to reich. 56 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ratfyen, ttekfyem (7e and) tranen, ofyne etgene m(fe unb D?atf) 311 fitcfyen* a$n nnrb ifyr (rbe fepn ewtg, nid)t atfein in jener $iMt, fonbern and) in biefer SCBeft* enn (Te tt>crben mitfien im# mer genng fyabem >b ffe n?of)( nidjt itberflnfffgen $or# ratl) 1 fyaben vine bte cttfofen ; @ott tpt i()r SSorratt) nnb ^ornboben, ^BetnfeKer nnb aft ifyre (^nt 2 X)arnm and) nicf)t 51 fen3 e ^/b in ber ^^enrnng roerben ffe g e n n t q ^ a b c n ^Benn ^riecj ober tbcnre 3^it fommt, fo merben bte 5llTe ^n ofyanben, bie i()ren Xrojl: anf ifyren ^ornboben nnb 1 UeberflUssigen Vorrath. Compare the etymology of these words with that of superfluous and provisions. 2 All ihre Gut, "and all their property." We should here expect a lies instead of all, for the termination es in modern German is properly omitted only when no particular stress is to be laid on the word. But all seems to be emphatic here. The old writers indulged in much greater freedom in such matters than those of later times. That license has descended to us in many forms of expression in which the word all occurs, for it is frequently unde- clined before a substantive, and declined when it comes after: as b e i all dem and bei dem alien, in ad this; derWein ist shon alle (i. e. all gone); and a few lines below die A lie, those all, or "all those, who have put their trust, etc." 3 Sie werden nicht zu Schanden, they are not disgraced. Schande means literally shame arising from improper exposure of the person, also from the marring or disfiguring of the body. This will best account for the use of the plural (which occurs only in the expressions zu Schanden, mil Schanden, both occurring in this and the following paragraph), each mutilation being regarded as a disgrace. The plural is often, as in the passage before us, used in the derivative and more common signification of disgrace. Wer- den zu Schenden to come to disgrace. S c h i m p f, originally sport, now signifies derision, reproach ; S c h m a c h, contumely, con- temptuous treatment. EXPOSITION OP PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 57 Iffictnfetfer obcr nt gcjlcftt fyaben ; benu e$ ift bafb frf)(mujcn unb unujebrarf)t. 1 So flebeit (Te beun iibel unb nut @d)flnbcn, bte jitter fo mutbtg unb flofj geroefeu fmb* 2lbcr btc ercduen, n>cU $ott tfyr rojt unb 2Sorratt) tjl, nuvjnt md)t ?(JMn fie tt>dren bie atterreicfyfte unb fojHtdjfte 5lue/' barinnen gemtg n>nd)fe, vote fte benn and) fmb, benn fie fyaben @te pnb bie golbene retcfye 5(uc tn ber 5Be(t ; ben* nod) mii (Ten fie nntergeben, ja ttergefyen, unb 2ltfe rcerben iDte ber D^aud), $Bo fhtb ft'e, bte JUDOV gewefen unb groge itt ge^abt ? (5$ tft ibrer Reiner tm @ebtirf)tmg : aber bie ererf)ten (Tub in gutem ebdd)tntffe nnb in atten (5bren, Itebe^ ^tnb, lag fTe retrf) fet)tt tt>te ffe welTen, anf^ Ghtbe, fo n>trft bn fi'nben, n>tc aKe^ il)r X^tng 3 etn mogen alle gemacht, Ae /ta^ toasted his paternal estate ; W e i n alle mac hen, to consume all the wine ; est 1st alle mit mir, it is all over with me (actum est de me), I am ruined; alle wer- d e n, to be consumed, " will be consumed or pass away as the smoke is consumed, or passes away." 1 Nahe, ner, is often employed in an idiomatic way. Thus einen etwas nahe legen, means, to bring a thing so closely home upon one that he will feel it. Nahe re den, means, to speak home upon one, to thrust him through with sharp words. Z u nahe treten, to infringe upon one's rights, to offend him by some im- propriety. Him ist zunahe geschehen, injustice is done him. Es geht mir nahe, it goes near my heart, it troubles or pains me. Zu nahe, in such idioms, is very similar in meaning to our phrase, too far, to carry a thing beyond what is proper. What is too far towards one, or too near to him, is of course, too sensitively felt, and becomes offensive. The sentence has the irregularity of a colloquial, pointed saying. " That is, indeed (j e for j a) speaking to the quick, and deciding with contempt, the great, the mighty, the rich nabobs !" That is, they are summarily disposed of. Jun- ker stands for junger Herr, a young nobleman, or a gentleman of rank, as J u ng fe r stands for junge Frau. s Ob sie gleich, etc. " Even though they were the richest and finest meadows, in which there should be a superabundant growth (as they really are, for they have abundance. They are the golden rich meadows in the world) still they must perish, nay vanish and pass away as the smoke." 3 Ding, designates whatever is, or exists, and is often equivalent EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 59 ift, barnm bag jtc (53otteS geinbe ffnb nnb ifym bte baffcn nub fcerfefa,en. a$u (ag bid) ba3 and) trojlen, bag cr ffc ncnnt etteS getnbe, fo bod) 2 bibber jTe niir betne $cinbc cjcnannt jmb, anf bag bn wiffeft, 3 roie jid) ott feiner atfo anmmmt, bag betne getnbe 4 feme geinbe fmb. to etwas. Sac he, is a species included under the genus Ding, excluding persons, whereas Ding includes them. Sac he must always be some object of human pursuit, occupation or interest. Ding, is subject to no such limitation. Esistnicht meine Sache (business not Ding, thing) dass ich Complimente m a c h e, it is not my business to make compliments. Eure Sache (cause, int erest, not D i n g) n i c h t allein, ich habe meine eig- ne auszufechten, / have to fight out not only your cause, but my own. P ersonen und Sache n, not Personen und Din- g e, which would make no contrast. Meine S a c h e n, my bag- gage, things pertaining to me, not meine Dinge, in this sense. Occurrences and a course of events are S a c h e n but not Dinge. On the contrary Gott ist der Schopfer aller Dinge (not Sache n). Dinge, not S a c h e n may be imaginary ; e r g e h t mit grossen Dingen (not S a c h e n) u m, he has wonder- ful projects in his head. Outer Dinge (not Sache) seyn, to be cheerful. When a definite object or person is called a thing by way of indefiniteness, Ding only is used. This is most frequent in speaking of young girls, as das Madchen ist einalber- n e s D i n g, the girl is a silly thing. In old German, Ding was also used in the sense of property, and so here by Luther. G e- genstand like our word object, always implies a subject or person, to perceive or contemplate it. 1 1 h m die S e i n e n. 1 h m, as in many other instances, the dative is not to be rendered. It is so remotely connected as the in- direct object of the verb as to be regarded as an expletive, although it is not strictly so. See Gram. p. 347. 2 So d o c h, whereas. 3 Aufdass du wissest, " in order that you may know that (how) God so interests himself in his own (s e i n e r for d e r S e i n- i ge n ?) that, etc." Ordinarily the subjunctive is employed in such dependent clauses as express design ; but when the clause is to be rendered particularly forcible, the indicative is used. 4 F e i n d (old German f i a n t and f e i e n t) was originally a 60 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. >er ottlofe borgt 1 uttb gafylt ntcfyt; ber erecfyte after ifl: barmfyer^tg iittb mitbe. 2 ift after em frojHtcfyer Unterfcfyteb ber etmitfyer, 3 bag ber ottlofeit fitter ntcfyt afteitt fcergcmajtrf) ffttb tmb em (nbe fyaftert, fonbern aurf) ftofe liter jmb itnb ttcr* present participle from f i a n, to hate, as Heiland (Heilant), Savior, was a participle from heilen (heilan, old German); Freund (old German, Friunt), a friend, from, frijon, to love- F e i n d, means a bitter, malignant enemy j and hence the word is often applied to Satan, which is the prevailing use of the same word, fiend in English. Widersacher, (originally, an adversary at law), now generally signifies one icho seeks to harm another. As g e g e n implies less opposition than wider, so G e g n e r means an opponent, who yet may be a friend. 1 Borgt. Borgen, leihen, and lehnen all have this remarkable peculiarity, that they signify both to lend and to borrow. This always perplexes a student till he observes that e i n e m e t- was borgen, leihen or lehnen, always means to lend some- thing to another, while etwas von jemand borgen, lei- hen, or lehnen always means to borrow something of some one. Observe, then, whether the dative of the person is used with or with- out the preposition v o n, and that will decide the meaning. B o r- g e n is used of moveable property, but not of landed estates. L e i- h e n and lehnen are used of both, and often means to rent or hire. These last two have the same signification, but leihen is the more dignified word and lehnen the more vulgar. This last sometimes means in good usage, to enfeoff. Borgen frequently means to buy (von e i n e m) or sell (e i n e m) goods on credit. 2 Milde, means the same as the English word mild, but has a secondary sense which the English word has not, viz., benevolent, be- neficent. Ein milder Geber, eine milde Gabe, a be- nevolent giver, a benevolent gift. Seine milde hand a u f- t h u n, to open his liberal hand. Milde Stiftungen, benevo- lent institutions. M i 1 d t h a t i g k e i t, liberality, benevolence. 3 Gem a the r. Gemuth means animus, sensus, feelings, dis- positions, as distinguished from Geist, Vernunft, mens, ratio. GemUther, here stands for characters, different dispositions of the righteous and the wicked. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY- bammftd), 1 barttm bag fie nur auf aufen flcfammelt init> utd)t ben urftia,en mtta,etl)cttt wcrben, tt>e(d)e nnbcr bte 9tatur ber emittber ijl. 2Jber ber ercdjtcn lit 2 bat utd)t affetn fetn (5nbe, ba? rum bag er G5ott traut unb fetn ut Don tbm wartet, fon^ bern ifl and) cm redjt nitt3(td) ut, ba^ 5Inbern mttgetl)et(t unb nid)t auf eincn j^aufen gefammett, 3 5Ufo f)at obue atten jeit(td)en SSorratb, unb gtebt and) 5lnbern betgt 4 etn red)t @ut a|t bu ntd)t me( r fo ifl e^ bod) unb uitfe(td). 5 ^ie otttofeu ^aben Dicf, aber un^ djriftltd) unb unniifeltd), er aber fagt: /,^cr ottfofe bor,qet/' ijl utd)t jit n, bag bte 9?etofyen Don ben 5D f Jeufd)en ut entfebneu, fonbern c$ tjt gefagt in einem leidjmg unb (Spriid)tt>ort : ^ ber ba Die! borgt 6 unb md)t be^a^t, barnad) 1 B6seGatersind undverdammlich, " are evil pos- sessions and damnable." Observe that^the adjective bose is de- clined because it precedes its substantive, whereas verdammlich is undeclined on account of its coming after its substantive, and being regarded as a mere predicate (die Gater sind verdamm- 1 i c h). N atur der Gemttther, which (i. e. to be hoarded up niggardly) is contrary to the nature of mind, or spiritual possessions. 2 Der Gerechten Gut, " the property of the righteous." 3 Mitgetheiltundnicht auf einen Haufen ge- s a m in e 1 1 (w i r d). 4 H e i s s t, is. See p. 48, Note 5. 5 So ist es dochgottlich u n d n (1 1 z 1 i c h, yet it (what you have) is godly and useful. "Gleich als (der) der da viel borgt. "As he who- borrows much and does not repay, strives (unconsciously) for this, (namely) that he shall not long remain in his possessions (i. e. en- dangers his property), just so all the rich and ungodly (i. e. all who are rich and ungodly) receive much from God, accumulate and bor- row from him, and yet do not repay him by giving (in that they give) to the poor, for which end it was given them. Therefore [this is the completion of the comparison] their estate will have a bad end and pass away as the smoke. That this is the meaning is proved (by the 6 62 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ftrebt, bag er ntdjt lange tm ute jt^en nntf ; atfo alfe 9?et* djen unb otttofen empfangen tnel tton ett, fatnmeht unb borgen fccn tfym, unb $at)fen ifyn bod) ntcfyt, bag (Te ben 2>itrf* tigen au^tfyetten, roo^t eg tfynen gegeben ttirb, egtt>egen ttnrb tfyr nt etn bofeg (5nbe neljmcn imb ivie ber D?aucf) i)ergel)en 25ag bteg bte ?0^einnng fei), beiDet^t, bag er fie gegen etnanber t)a'(t, ben ottfcfen nnb ben ered)ten ; ber &\e gtebt, ber 2(nbre nirf)t, unb empfangen bod) S3etbe ott Xsarum tft be3 ottlofen ^mpfangen t)ergftrf)en bent gen unb ntrf)t S5e^at)(en Slber be^ eredjten ut ifl nicfyt S5orgen nod) (^utb, fonbern fret fcon ott empfangen unb nit^(id) gebrand)t tt)m unb feinem ^a'c^^en* X)enn fetne efegneteu 1 erben ba6 ?anb, aber fetne 35erflud)ten roerbeu a ret @te^e ba, er nennt bte gottlofen D?etd)en otteg lebette 2 unb bte la ubtgen @otte ebenebctte, auf bag bid) circumstance, or proves the circumstance) that he (the sacred writer) hold,s them side by side (by way of comparison), the wic"ked and the righteous; the one gives, the other does not, and yet both receive from God." u Therefore the act of receiving on the part of the wicked, is com- pared to borrowing and not paying. But the property of the right- eous is neither borrowing nor debt, but (something) freely received from God and used advantageously for him (God) and one's (his) neighbor." 1 Seine Gesegneten. " His blessed," i. e. those blessed of him. S e g e n is a corruption of signum, a sign, and s e g n e n a corruption of signnre, to make a sign. When Christianity was in- troduced into Germany, these words, as designating the sign of the cross, were introduced with it. As the sign of the cross was made in benedictions, the sign itself came to stand for benediction. In the old German, the word is found in its original meaning, signum and vezillum. 2 Vermaledeien and m a 1 e d e i e n from the Latin male- EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 63 ja m'd)^ 1 t>erbricf;e, tied) bcuten @faubeu l)inberc tbr at unb beinc ?lrnutfl>. S l$a6 wiitft bit mefyr? 3ft bag mdit reftc3 cjcnug 3 $ur cbufb ? $aft bit ntd)t uberflitf* fig, 3 n>tc jTc baben, fo nrirjt bu bennod) genug l)aben unb ba$ tab beji&ciu 9ttd)t bag bit cm crr bet 2Bctt fct)cJV fonfccrn bit rotrjl (SJuteS gcnug babcn auf (5rben, unb tm ?anbe wobtien mtt gutcm grteben. ^enn ctt benebciet bid) ^eit(id) unb etwg* ltd), barum bag bu tbm traucfl, ob bu wol)( Don ben ott^ lofen ttmnalcbeit unb befd)dbigt n?trft. ^Biebernm, bfe gott* lofen D^etdjen, cb fTe jcl^t etne 3 e t f tog uberflitfjTg fyaben, fo werben pe bod) t>erberben unb nid)t tm ?anbe unb @utc bfetbcn, 5 pe roerben gen)ig(id) au^gefd)6pft unb etn dicere, and benedeien from bcnedicere, are antiquated words, for which ve r fl u c h e n and segnen are now commonly used. 1 N i c h t s, here used adverbially, in nothing, as a stronger ex- pression than nicht. Ihr grosses Gut und deineAr- m u t h, all put together as making out one condition of inequality, forms the nominative to verdriesse and h i n d e r e. " That their great riches and your poverty may not vex you nor hinder your faith." Trostes genug, enough of encouragement. 3 Hast du nicht Uberflussig, "aboundest thou not," i. e. if thou dost not abound. The substantive for property or riches is understood. 4 S e y e s t. The conjunctive is used particularly in all those de- pendent clauses, which, instead of positively asserting a thing, state it problematically, or as a mere supposition or conception of the mind. Trauest and beschadigt wirst, a few lines be- low, by being in the indicative, represent the subject, as a matter of fact, and not as a supposition. The conjunctive might have been used, but with a different shade of meaning. 6 Sitzen bleib en, to continue to sit, or to remain sitting. B 1 e i b e n and several other verbs take an infinitive where in Eng- lish a participle would be used. Liege n, sitzen, or stehen b 1 e i b e n, means to continue lying, sitting or standing, i. e. not to move, or not to rise. Wo sind wir stehen geblieben, 64 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 5lnberer brent cjefeist, baritm bag fie ott ttermalebett nnb ifynen ent^tebt feme nabe $ettlid) nnb ett)ia,(td)* o bte ered)ten finb, ba baben fie genng aitf @rben, nub btetben tin @nte fifsen, ^Btebernm, bte fen rnerben an^gemnr^elt, VDO jle ff^en in itterm wctfeit atte gitrftentliitnter, D^ei^e 1 nnb groge (fitter, bte tt>ir fet)en, 2 n?te jTe l)tn unb ^er fal)ren t>on etnent @e^ f(i)fed)te jum anberm , fo ^ajl: bu 3 ba3 Urt()et( nber bte ^ett(fd)en (fitter, ) befrf)(oflfen tft er ered)te mng genng l)a^ ben nnb ber Ungerecfyte Derberben, barnm bag ber create ott tranet nnb ber itter n>ol)( brancfyt ; ber ottlofe tranet ntrf)t nnb brandjet tl)rer ntd)t tt>ot)L (efen n>tr, bag ^brafyam nnb ?ot^ retd) vraren nnb where did toe stop? (where have we remained slopping?). Sitzen, to sit, means here, to be in possession of, (to sit in the enjoyment of). 1 R e i c h e, kingdoms. This word, and the adjective r e i c h, rich, come from the verb r e i c h e n, to extend. They refer to ex- tent of territory and of power. Reich was formerly applied to smaller governments as well as large, but is now limited to kingdoms, empires, etc. Frankreich means the kingdom of the Franks, or France ; O e s t e r r e i c h, the Eastern part of the empire ; K 6- n i g r e i c h, kingdom ; Kaiserreich, empire ; E r d r e i c h, the whole earth (the extent of the earth). Smaller territories are des- ignated by other words, as Herzogthum, Fttrstenthum, though Herzogreich was once in use. *Alle die wir sehen. This must not be translated " all the principalities, kingdoms, and great estates, which we see," etc. The sense would be complete, were the sentence to close with the word G Q te r. The irregularity, if it maybe called such, consists in saying, " which we see how they pass back and forth" instead of " which we see pass," etc. 3 Siehe, so hast du, etc. "Look now, and you have the decision in regard to temporal goods, which is included in few words (k U r z 1 i c h), viz." etc. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 65 (jornc bcbcrberftten 1 bte qMfgcr. Starum ob pe n>oM 2 fein cia.en anb nerf) SBorratt) ijatten, bcnncd) Mteben jTe tm ?anbe (Tlsen unb fatten (jemig. SBon ott roerben be$ Cannes Change ge* forbert, unb I) at ?upt an fetnem 2Berfe. 3 (5iet)e ba abermal rojh 9ftd)t alletn n>trft bit jetrttrfj ut geitug l)abcn, fonbcrn Eltted, tt>a^ bit tbuft, 4 betn gatt* ^e^ ?eben unb 3Banbcf r and) gegen bte ottlofcn, wtrb fd)feuntg fetjn unb fertgcbcn, barnm bag bu ott trauefl unb tt)m bfii) unb betne (Sad)e crgiebfl, in betnem ?ebeu tf)m gclaficn ftcl)c(l. 5 ^amit marf)(l bu, 6 bag cr efaKcn, ?ujl unb (jfctrf) cine 55cgterbe Ijat, beincu ^ffie^ unb $Banbe( ^u fi>rbcrn 2(&er bagegcn frd)t 7 nun, bag former gottgcfdtttger 5Beg nkfjt geforbert, ja Derljfnbert unb Dcrwcrfen it>trb Don ben otrtefcn. 2)a^ Derbrtegt benn bte 9Zatur : barum mug 1 Bekerbergten. Herberge is a place where a person travelling stops for a time, whether at the house of a friend, or at a monastery, or tavern or any other place. Hence the person may be received gratuitously as a guest, or he may pay his bills as at an inn. Wirthshaus is a general term, and very often means a small country tavern ; Gasthaus, a more respectable inn ; G a s t h o f , a spacious and more splendid hotel, especially for persons of rank. Beherbergen, means to receive a guest into one's house. 2 D a r u m, o b s i e w o h 1. " Therefore (because they were rich), though," etc. 3 Und(er, Gott) hat Lust an seinem (his own) Werke, (work, creature). 4 Alles was du thust, etc. " whatever you do, your whole course of life, even towards (in respect to) the wicked, will prosper and move on." 8 Und in deinem Leben ihm gelassen stehest, " and in thy life yieldest passively (remainest passive) to him." 6 Damit machst du, " thereby thou causest, that he have gratification, pleasure, and as it were a desire," etc. 7 Aber dagegen ficht, " but with that conflicts (the cir- cumstance) that." etc. 6* 66 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. man jTcfy bier trojte, bag unfer SGBefen 1 ott gefaftt imb fcon il)m geforbert ttnrb, nicfyt anfel)cn bie tnbernig unb SOBegmerfnng ber ott(ofen* ga'Ht er, fo n>irb er ntcfjt njeggemorfen, t> e n n ber err erfycUt i fy n 'b e i feiner a n b 3)a3 gallen 2 m5d)te fcerftanben roerben, bag ber erecf)te $im>ei(en fi'mbigt, aber ttrieber aitfjlebt, rate (Salomon fagt (5prud)tt>. 24 5(6er ba^ (aflen tt>tr je^t faf)ren unb bfetben anf ber 53ai)n, ba^ 5 a ^ en ^er l)etge fo t)te(, a(^ ob er ein^ mal nnterltege nnb bie ottfofen obHegen, al^ atrib r ba er Don @anl nnb 2lbfafom gejacjt mirb, nnb ^t)rtftnd, ba er arb Senn fo(rf)e^ gatten tt?df)rt ntrf)t (ange ; fdgt t^n ntrf)t liegen nnb n)eggett>orfen feijn, fonbern er^refft fetne anb, rict)tet ifyn wteber anf, bag er beftefyen 3 mug. X)amtt tr6|let ber etjl: unb antmortet ben l)etm(td)en 4 ($ebanfen, bie 3emanb baben morf)te unb bet-ifym fefbjl: fa^ gen : 3^/ irf) i)abe bennorf) 5 ettt>a gefeben, bag ber ererf)te 1 Unser Wesen, ourselves and every thing belonging to 5, (conduct). Tro s ten (und) nicht ansehen, "one must be encouraged and not regard the obstacles and rejection," etc. 2 Das Fallen, etc. " Falling might mean that, etc." "But we let that pass, and go upon the ground" " as if he may once (one day) be overcome, and the wicked conquer." See p. 38, Note 4. 3 Bestehen, to stand firm and unmoved. 4 Heimlichen. This word, derived from h e i m, home, was once used as h e i m i s h now is, to indicate what icas at home or what pertained to home. But its common meaning is secret, or con- cealed designedly, whereas g e h e i m means private, i. e. not pub- lic, in which the idea of secresy is not intended. Ein gehiemer Rath is a privy counsellor, who maybe known to the public ; but ein heimlicher Rath, would mean, a concealed counsellor. Science has its mysteries, Geheimnisse; but jugglers have their secrets, Heimlichkeiten. 6 Dennoch, from denn (in the old sense of dan n, then) and n o c h, still, means, still then, even then, still, and generally fol- EXPOSITION OP PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 67 bat mitfifen 1 imterliegcn, nnb ift feine (gacfye (jar in tic fd)cu flefatten uor ben ettfofen ? 3er$tt>etfelt babe* emt @ott ernnfofyt 3 il)it tet bcr anb unb fycbt iijn ttneber auf 3rf) bin jnna,ea,ett>efenunba(ta,ett>orbett, unb f)abe norf) nie gefefyen benererf)ten uerfaffen ober feinen (Sam en nacfy S3 robe g e b e it* 8tcbe, ba fct er jit mebrerer 4 irf)entng feine eigene lows some concession and introduces something apparently, but not really opposed to what preceded. D o c h, is a stronger adversative, and introduces an unexpected modification of a previous concession^ i. e. where a thing would naturally be inferred, from the concessive statement, d o c h intimates that the fact is at vaiiance with the inference. Ich habe dennochetwa gesehen, " (though all this may possibly be true) still (d e n n o c h, apparently irrecon- cilable with that) I have seen," etc. And a little below, "be it so, (that) he fall; but still (dennoch)he will not continue," etc. D o c h would be much stronger here, and would imply that the two things were not so easily reconcilable. Wie steht es um Di- dier? doch er sen la ft wohl lange schon, "how is it with Didier ? (withdrawing that supposition or concession, the writer says) but he is probably long since dead." 1 Hat mllssen, for hat gemusst, which would be harsh. 8 Er muss wieder auf(stehen). 'Erwischt. Wischen, signifies, to move or slip away hastily. Entwischen, to escape quickly. Erwischen, now but little used except in common life, means to seize quickly, and is synonymous with e r t a p p e n, to catch one or to fall upon him (a thief) as if by accident ; e r h a s c h e n, to catch one who is running away, or escaping ; e r g r e i f e n, to seize, or to get a secure hold of one ; and f a n g e n, means simply to catch. 4 Mehrerer. Mehr, more, is commonly used adverbially without the form either of comparison or declension. In the compa- rative form as an adjective it is either rnehrer, mehre, mehres, or mehrerer, mehrere, mehreres. Here it is in the lat- 68 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. Qrrfafyntng. Unb iflt and) tt>abr, bie tagttdje (Srfhljntttg cjiebt e3, unb mitjfeu befennen atte 9D?enfd)en, bag e6 alfo fei). ;Birb aber %e manb tterfajfett, ba$ er ba SSrob fudjen mug, fo tft e geitng, bag e3 tbm am Iaubeu gebrodjeu 1 bat ; bantm er and) rerfjt unb bitfia, ttertajfeu ift, 2Jber bieg 23rob fucfjcn 2 ober nad) 23reb get)en mug mart fo tterjM)en, bag er ntd)t fiunger (etbe ober ^unger^ j^erbe, 3 ob er tt>ol)( arm ifl unb weniQ ^n^or l)at (5r wirb gewtg* ltd) erna bret, ob er ajetd) utd)t^ Uebrtgc^ t)at bi^ anf bert anbern XaQ ; gtebt tt)m ^tner utd)t, fo ajebt it)m ber ^n^ bere, e mug feme 5Wal)rmig gett)tg(id) fommem 5Bteit>o^ bie funbtgeu, bie ifym nidjt gebeu nub l)elfen 2)eurt bcr arme ?a^aru^, ?nca 16, ob ibm ber reidje SWann uid)t^ gab, i|I er bennod) ernal)rt tt>orben, obwol)! e^ nut 2(rmutfy S^t e 0- 4 ^rmutl) uimmt ott uid)t Don fet^ uen ei(ia,eu ; aber er Idgt fTe uidjt uutergebeu uod) t)er# berbem ter form, dative feminine. Used substantively, it signifies more than one, i. e. several and loses its comparative force. See p. 18 Note 1. 1 Gebrochen. Es gebricht with a dative is nearly equi- valent to e s m a n g e 1 1, there is wanting to him, he fails in. 2 Diess Brod suchen. Observe the substantive use of JBrod suchen and nach Brod gehen. 3 Hungers sterbe. Several neuter verbs are accompanied by a genitive expressing the manner of the action ; as gehen sei- ner W e g e, to go (how ?) his own ways ; 1 e b e n d e r H o f f- n u n g, to live in the hope, to entertain the hope ; 1 e b e n d e s G 1 a u b e n s, to befitted with, or to have the belief; eines nattlr- lichen Todes sterben, to die a natural death ; v e r b 1 e i- chen eines Todes, to turn pale icith death, i. e. to die. So Hungers sterben, to die of hunger. 4 Zugieng. Zugehen, is used impersonally in the sense of, to take place, to happen, with some adverbial phrase, expressing the manner. " Although it was with poverty." Untergehen noch verderben, perish nor (even) be ruined. Verderben, to render unfit for use (either by being marred or destroyed). EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 69 d g U d) t|l er barmfyerjig unb leifyet, unb fein (5 a a me nnrb gefcgnet fei)iu 1a3 t|T Don bom babcnbcn 1 Ojemfyen gefagt, ob er atfo fei), 2 bap er $inbcr babe ; fo bcrfctbe fdjen an6tl)et(t, gicbt unb (ctbet tag(id), bennod) roirb er nnb fern $inb genng fya* ben. enn bie 23enebeinng ifl, bag (Te merben genng fya* ben bier nnb bcrt, 3 gar fetnen Mangel Iciben an ?eibe^ 9tabrnng nnb bcr 8ec(en ctf, ob eg tt>ol)t ^nwctlen ntrf)t it brig tfL 5i(fo babcn mir, 4 mte ott bie (anbigen ()anbe(t in $ette (idjer -)tabrnng nnb i^ren arfjen, bag tt)ir ja ffcf)er feijeit in betben (Stitcfen, er roerbe nn^ nid)t Derfaflfen nnb roerben bagn genng t)aben an ber 9tal)rnng. Unb alfo gel)t e6 anc^ gemigtid), fo n?ir gfanben nnb nn^ ber ott(ofen Utcf nid)t kjerbriegen nod) bewegen fafien* ^arnm it)tebert)o(t nnb fd)Hcgt er abermat nnb fprid)t : k)om SSofen nnb t^ne ($nteS, unb bteibe i m m e r b a r, 5 Wit fottte er fagen : ?ag ott forgen, t^ne nnr bn, tt?a$ gnt ift, nnb fag bid) nid)t bewcgen, S56fe^ jn tfynn, bfeibe nnr immerbar, n>ie bn bift, nnb (ag ge^en, ma$ ba ge^et fagt: , r $Berfet anf it)tt atte enre 1 Habenden, possessing property. Wohlhabend is gen- erally used in such cases. 2 Ob er also sey, "though he be such," that, i. e. though one who has children. " Though he distributes, gives and lends daily, still," etc. 3 Hier und dort, "in this world and in the other," to which the words, Leibes Nahrung and der Seelen Heil, refer. " Although at times nothing will be on hand," (a brig) 4 Also haben wir dass wir ja sicher seyen. " Thus, as God treats the righteous, etc., we have security (we have that we are secure)." Und [wir] we r den. 5 Jmmerdar, obsolete and poetic for i m m e r. 70 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. >enn er trcigt (Sorge itber itn^/' 1 Unb ^pfafm 55 : ,/^Birf affe bein 2Wiea,cn 2 anf ($ott, itnb er tt>irb bid) roofyl befcfyicfen 3 ober beforgen nnb ntdjt (affeit ennajid) 4 bewegen* e n n ber $ e r r f) a t b a 3 0? e rf) t He b, unb tterfdgt fetne freHigennicfyr, eroignd)tt>er* ben fte beroafyret: aber ber otttofen @a* men nn r b andgerottet X)arfft mcfyt forgen, 5 bag bein 9?ed)t nntergcfye, e^ iff nid)t mog(id)* emt G>ott l)at ba^ 9?erf)t lieb, barum er e^ erfyatten, nub bie erect)ten werben nid)t er ein 2fb<}ott 6 ware, ber itnrerf)t Heb fya'tte ober bent n fetnb ware, vtne bie gottlofen 5[Renfcf)ett, fo battefl bit Urfarf)e ^n forgen nnb bid) ju fitrd)ten 2(ber nnn 7 bit weigff, bag er ba3 D^ed)t (ieb l)at, n>a$ forgeff bn ? 2Bad fiirofyteft bit ? 5Ba^ s^ ei f e W bn ? Sttngftd), tttcfjt altein ^eit(id), n)erbcn feine ^eiligen er^aften nnb bie ottfofen mit ^inb nnb att bem 3^en 8 an^gerottet 1 Er trftgt Sorge Uber uns. " He takes care of us." Fdr commonly follows Sorge, care for; Sorge ober, care respecting or o/, is a little more general, but means nearly the same thing. 2 Anliegen, signifies, what lies upon the heart, anxiety, care^ wish. The verb a n 1 i e g e n means, to lie hard upon anything, to lie close upon the heart, to lie solicitovs. A n g e 1 e g e n, the participle, careful, anxious. Angelegentlich, earnestly, zealously. 3 Beschicken signifies 1 . to send to, 2. to arrange, 3. to take care of. It is here used in the last sense, of course. 4 Ewiglich, belongs to nicht, never. Connected with be- wegen, it would give a ludicrous sense. 5 (Du) darfst nicht sorgen. The ellipsis makes the ex- pression more pointed. 6 Abgott, a false god, viewed as a living being. Gotze, an image to be worshipped. Gotzenbild, a likeness of an Abgott or of a Gotze, but not an object of worship, as they are. Hence, figuratively an idolized person is called an Abgott; an idolized thing, a Gotze. 7 N u n, now since, now that. 8 Dem Ihren. Das Ihre is used as das 1 h r i g e is, EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 71 ie $ct(ujen atthicr 1 'bei^en ntefyt tic tm immcf pnb, sen weldicn bte Sofyrift felten rebet, fonbern gcmeimgftrf) 2 yon bcncn, bie auf (Arbeit (eben, bte ba gfanben in ott, unb buref) benfeCben QHaubcn (lotted @nabe unb etjl: fya* ben, batmen 3 (7e ijciiu] genanut roerben, n?ie wtr 5itte pnb, fo n?tr gtauben roafyrfyafttg. ^te @ered)ten erben ba^ 2an b, nnb bfei* ben ett)tgnii) brtnncn, 4 a^ tft, tt)ie broben gefagt tjI/.jTe fyaben genitg auf ^rben, bitrfen e3 tttrgenb^ benn 5 bet ^ott gcwarten, tt)o (Te wot)nen and signifies, what belongs to Mem, their property. Die Ihrigen means their relatives or friends. On all undeclined, see p. 56, Note 2. 1 A 1 1 h i e r. In general, a 1 1 prefixed to a word makes no other alteration in the signification than to give intensity to the word, and even that force is frequently no longer perceptible. 2 Gemeiniglich is generally employed in the sense of g e- w 6 h n 1 i c h, commonly, usually, though of much less frequent oc- currence than the latter. G e m e i n h i n is a more vulgar word of the same import. Gemeiniglich is sometimes used nearly as insgemein is, meaning in genera!, or collectively as opposed to in particular. There is an apparent absurdity in the use of the word in the case before us, as if the writer would say, " the word (d i e H e i 1 i g e n) commonly means in this passage (a 1 1 h i e r)." But the sentence takes a new turn after the words, von welchen die S c h r i f t, and g e m e i n i g 1 i c h, instead of referring to the main clause (allhier heissen n i c h t) refers to the word s e 1 1 e n in the relative clause. Thus : " The saints in this passage does not mean those which are in heaven, of whom the Scriptures seldom speak ; but they commonly speak (and so here) of those, etc." 3 Da von stands for von diesem,/rom this, whence. It be- ing alicays a neuter singular, it refers to several preceding words collectively, and these are all thrown together and viewed as one thing, or circumstance. D a v o n is therefore limited in its use to such cases. 4 Drinnen, droben. See p. 42, Note 1 . 6 Nirgends denn, nowhere except. N i r g e n d s refers in- definitely either to time or to place, nowhere, never. 72 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. in ber $Mt, 2>enn ott tdgt jTe nicfyt : Idgt er (Te abet 1 fo (Tub fie gewrifHtd) ungerecfyt unb gotttoS, ofyne tauben unb ranen in ott Unb atfo itf bag befofytoffen, bag nnr nur gut tbun unb bfeiben auf ber 23abn unb im anbe, lap fen it)n forgen nub tnacfyen. 9iim folgt, wa$ bie fei) be^ ererf)ten A barcb fo(rf)e^ $Befen jTd) er{)ebt il)m nub ben ottiofen* >er 5i}?unb be^ ererf)ten gel)et mtt < $Qei$* f^ett urn, unb feine Suttge rebet om e^ r i cfy t 3 X5aruber erfyebt ftct) ber ^aber, bte ottfofen woffen bie gbttltrfje $8ei^t)eit unb Dfccfyt nid)t ^t*en, t?erfolgcn men nnb Idflern e^ fur ^t)crl)eit unb Unrec^t, unb get)t felben 4 @d)dlfen eine $Beife n>ob( barob* 1 JLasst er sie aber, conditional, " Forsakes he them," i.e. if he forsakes them. 2 Was die Sache, etc. " Now follows, what the part (duty) of the righteous is, respecting which (da rob) such a difference (or difficulty) arises (such a thing or affair raises itself) between him and' the wicked." The word W e s e n often means difficulty, disturbance. Viel Wesens machen, to make muck trouble. Ein grosses Wesen in der Welt machen, to make a great stir in the icorld. It frequently gives a mere collective sense, meaning whatever pertains to a thing, its nature, character, arrangement, and the like. Das g e m e i n e Wesen, the Commonwealth. Das Staat s-w e- s e n, the state. Das Kirche n-w e s e n, the church, or the ec- clesiastical government. Das S t a d t-w e s e n, the city govern- ment. Das H a u s-w e s e n, household matters. Das Kriegs- w e s e n, military affairs, the war department. Das S c h u 1-w e- sen, the public schools, the department of education. 3 G e r i c h t, though commonly meaning judgment, court of jus- tice, and theologically, divine punishment, appears to be used here as the English word judgment often is in the Bible, to signify, equity, righteousness. The word R e c h t is substituted for it below. 4 Und geht denselben, etc., " and for a while it goes well with these wrong-doers, in the matter." EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 73 bcnn unb bcroegt natitrftef) 1 bic (^eredjtcn, unb roerben ba# burd) gereqt gum SBofcn unb 28tebert>era.eltcn ober llnge* bulb. Sarum febrt fie biefcr $falm jHtte batten unb tmmcr fortfafyren, tmmcr febrcn, bidden unb rcben 2 fofrfye 5Cet^l)ett unb 9?cd)t, Gtott bie (sadje befefylcn, Scne foffeit betgen, nwtbcn, 3 a ' bne f utrfrfjen, Idjlcrn, fc^fagcn, (5rf)tt)crt blogett/* S3o(jen fpannen, |Trf| bctufen unb fta'rfen 2C V wte gefagt tfL X)enn ott mirb e^ n>ol}[ madden, fo n>tr fein nur gewarten 4 unb tmmcr ciuf ber SBafyn bleiben, unb um ifyretttullen ntd)t aufl)oreu cber narfjfajfcn, itte$ gu tl)itn (S^ mug bocfy gu(c|jt ba^ Urtbctf btefe^ SSerfeg Mctbett unb funb ttne ber bcttc ^ittag, bag ber ($erecf)te babe recf)t unb ltd) gerebet, bie ottlofeu (Tnb barren unb Unred)t gevDefeu* >a3 cfe^ fetnc^ otte^ ift in fetnem Bergen, fetuc l^rttte 9(0 it en ttiefyt. Sarum rebet er recbt unb btcfytet $Bei^bett, bag otte^ efefe ntrf)t in bent SSudje, ntofyt in ben Dbren, nid)t auf ber 3M9 e / fonbern in fetnem er$en tpt. otte^ mag ^tcmanb rerf)t Derjleben, e^ fei) if)m benn im gen, 5 bag er e3 Iteb fyabe unb lebe barnadf), tfyut ber faube an ott >arum ob bie ottlofeu iriel 3Borte macf)en t)on ott unb fetnem efee, viity men ffofy ber @d)rtft ?el)rer unb Qrrfafyrne, 6 fo reben ffe bod) uimmer rerf)t nod) wei^Itd). 2>enn fte f)abeu e^ ntrf)t im 1 Nattirlich, of course, according to the general course of things. So this word should generally be translated. 2 Dichten und reden, think and speak. See p. 4, Note 1. 3 B lessen, to make naked or bare, and applied to a sword, fo draw it from its scabbard. 4 Seinnurgewarten. Seinan old genitive and govern- ed by ge w ar te n. See p. 46, Note 4. 8 Es sey ihm denn inHerzen, unless it is in his heart. 6 Erfahrne for Erfahrene, experienced, skilled, and as a substantive, adepts, " teachers of, and adepts in the Scriptures." 7 74 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. er$en ; barum tterfteben (Te fern m'cfyt/ e3 betrita,t (Te ber rfjetn, bag (Te bte 2Borte ber cfyrtft fitfyren, unb barob ttwtfyen unb tterfolgen bte ($5erecfyten 3tem, be3 erecfyten rttte fcfylitpfern 2 ntefyt, fonbern ge* fyen gettng fret etnfyer im guten ctt)i(fen, 3 barum bag er ber (Sacfye cjenng ift, unb mag mcfjt tterfi'tfyrt rcerben burcfy 9#enfcf)ena,efe unb 55et(ef)ren. 4 2lber bie ottlofen fallen unb fcfyfitpfern alle^eit f)irt unb l)er, l)aben feinen gctt>tjfen ^rttt, barum bag (Te otte^ efe^ auger bem laubeu 5 nidjt redf)t t)er|l:el)en Unb alfo fabren ffe l)in unb fyer, tt>te |Te ibr Xwnfel 6 fiibrt ober 50?enfrf)engefe lebrt, jet bteg, je^t jene^ ^OBerf, jet fel)rt man jTe fonjl, jet fo, 7 unb frf)litpfern bin, tt>o man (Te binfitbrt mft ber 9^afe, em ^Itn^ ber ben 5lnbern ^arum n>te (Te niofyt rerf)t Derfle^en, fo 1 Verstehen sie sein nicht. Verstehen does not commonly take a genitive after it (s e i n for seiner), and scarcely ever except when it is a reflective verb. " They do not understand it (the law). The show (of knowledge, from the circumstance) that they quote the words of Scripture, deceives them, and on that ac- count they rage and persecute the just." 2 SchlUpfern, now properly means to be slippery. In the sense of s c h 1 Q p f e n, to slide, it is at present not used. 3 Gewissen, conscience, is here used in its original and etymo- logical sense, of consciousness, or certain knowledge. This whole passage illustrates well the way in which the word Gewissen (certain knowledge) came to signify conscience. 4 Beilehren, collateral teaching, what is taught aside from the Scriptures. 5 Ausser dem Glauben, not in faith, i. e. in faith, or a state of faith, men can understand the law of God ; out of that state of faith, they cannot understand the law. 6 D Q n k e 1, from d u n k e n, notion, whim, different from D u n- k e 1, darkness, obscurity. 7 Jetzt lehrt man sie sonst, jetztso, etc. " One teaches them (they are taught) now otherwise, now so (now this way, now that), and they slide away wherever one leads them by the nose, a blind man (leading) the other (blind men). EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY^SEVEN. 75 wanbcfn fie and) nidjt red)t ; nod) 1 ttnttben fte urn fohfye tbre fd)liipfna,e ?efyre nnb ?eben, roiber tie getwffe ?ebre imb cben ber crcdjten, wotten je it)r mtcj attein befia* ttgen. er ottlofe ftefyt aufben ercdjten unb gebenf t ifyn gu tobten. <&$ tterbrtegt tint nnb fantt c3 ntd>t letben, bag man fetne ?et)te nnb ?eben ffraft, a(^ etn nnred)te^ nnb nntt>et$ltd)e3 2 KBefen. Sariim benft cr nirfjt mehr, benn tt)te 3 cr fetne @ad)e befe|lt,qe. SWun fann er 4 t>or bem ered)ten ntd)t/ roehfyer fetn Unred)t ntd)t nngejlraft la'gt ; barnm tretbt tt)n fetn falfdje^ ^Befen baf)in, bag er be @ered)ten (o^ merbe, tl)tt nmbnnge, bamtt fetn $Befen redjt unb ungeflraft bfetbe* 5Bte ber ^abjl: nnb bte (Setnen atte^ett unb nod) tt)un/ 5 vt)te rotr wol)( fel)en r bag fie @otte$ efe^e and) fd)ter ntd)t in ben SBitdjern baben, gefd)tt>etge benn tm ^er^en : nod) tt>o(* (en fie bte fei>n, bte ba $Bet3bett bid) ten unb red)t (e^ren, wittben nnb rafen baritber, rnie bie toKen ^nnbe ol)ne 5tuf* boren, 5(ber ber err (dgt i^n nid)t in fetn en 1 N o c h does not refer to n i c h t, (wo, nor) ; but begins a di- tinct clause and, of course, means, stilt. 2 Unweisliches, unwise ; an unusual word. W e i s 1 i c h, wisely, is common. 3 Nicht mehr denn wie, "of nothing but how he may es- tablish his cause" (no more than how). 4 Nun kann er, etc. " Now he cannot (establish his cause) in the presence of the righteous, who does not suffer his iniquity to go unrebuked. Therefore his false (and corrupt) character impels him to rid himself of the righteous man, etc." 5 (Gethanhaben)undnochthun. "As the pope and his adherents have always done, and still do ; as we see, (that) they have not the law of God even in their books, not to say in their hearts ; neither do they desire to be those who meditate and rightly teach wisdom ; they rage and rave about it, etc." 76 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. an ben, itnb tterbammt ibn nidjt, menner tternrtfyeift ttnrb, ott (dgt 1 ben eredjten n>ol)f in ifyre anb fommen ; er Id'gt ifyn aber nidjt brimten : jTe megen il)n ntdjt bd'mpfen, n>enn jTe ifyn ajeid) tobten, a$n fyifft ifyr Urtheit nid)t, ob jTe gfeid) riibmen, jTe tbnn e^ an @otteg ir aurf) ^n nnfern 3 e ^ eit X)er ^)ab|I 3 mit ben einen bammt ; nocf) l)i[ft jTe fein 3Serbammen, fein @rf)reien, fetn spta'rren, fein ^Bnt^en, fein ^toben, fcine 53ntle, fein S3(ei, fein iegel, fein S3ann, er ift fyen>orgebfieben atte^eit, ba fein ^tf(^of, feine UnmerjTtdt, fein ^onig, fein gitrjlt etn?a^ bawiber ^ermod^t, me(d)e^ nodf) nie t>on einem ^e^er gefyort i|l. X)er ein^ige tobte ^ann, ber nnfrf)ntbige 5tbe(, madjet ben (ebenbigen ^ain, ben ^abjl;, mit attem feinem 5lnl)ang git $efeern, 5lbtrunnigen, ?|}?6rbern, otte^ldjlerern, fcttten |Te (7c^ barob ^erreigen nnb berften* ^arre auf ben errn nnb nen $Beg, fo wirb er bid) erfyofyen, bag bu 1 Gott lasst, etc. "God does indeed suffer the righteous to come into their hands, but he does not leave (lass t) him there. They cannot extinguish him even though they kill him." 2 Gegenurtheil, an opposite decision, a reversal of the de- cision. 3 Der Pabst, etc. " The pope and his party condemned John Huss ; but no condemning sentence, no outcry, no howling, no rag- ing, no blustering, no bull, no lead, no seal, no excommunication avails them anything; he still (always) exists (is extant), because no bishop, no university, no king, no prince could prevail (effect any- thing) against him which was never known (heard of) in respect to a heretic. This simple man (though) dead, this innocent Abel makes the living Cain, the pope and all his followers, heretics, apostates, murderers, blasphemers, though they lacerate themselves and burst over it." EXPOSITION OP PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 77 ba$ 2anb erbeft, menu bte ottlofeu rottet roerben, roirft bit fefyem Sfbermat ermafynt er, auf ctt $u trauen unb t(ntn, barum bag 1 bte ungebrocfyene, ungefaffene, b(6be jtd) fdjmerlid) ergiebt, unb auf ott erroagt, bag fie )effen, ba$ fie nirgenbS fiebt nod) cmpjiubet, unb fid) fen a'ugere, wa$ (te ficf)ttid) empftnbet ?iun tjl and) genugfam gefagt, wte bte SBeff^ung be^ anbeg ju t)erfiel)en fei), nam(td) bag etn ered)ter b(etbt unb genua, l)at auf ^rben. X)a^u wo er $u wenfg t)at $ett* (id), t)at er be(lo mebr geift(id) ; n?ie (5^ri|lu^ (efyrt unb fprid)t : $Ber einerfei 2 t)er(dgt r ber fott e^ fyunbertfaftia, wie* ber baben auf biefer $Geft unb ba^u ba^ ett>ige ?ebeu $Biewol)P id) ntd)t wiberfecfyte, bag fe(d)e^ (^rbeubeff^en mod)te Derftonben werben nid)t t)on einem jegltcfyen ered)^ ten tnfcnberbeit, fonbern tton bem Ipaufen unb ber ($e* metne : obwcl)! t)ie(teid)t (tfid)c ^eit(id) t)erti(gt n?erben, bfeibt bennod) ^ule^t il)r atnen unb ?efyre obeu ; 4 wte bte (tifyrtften in ber 5Be(t geblieben ffnb uub bie eibeu tJergan^ gen, ob i^rer tt>ol)( 35tel[e t)on ben ^eiben ^eit(id) gemartert unb getitgt n)orben r n)ie ^)fa(m 112, and) fagt : ,,@eltg tft 1 Darum dass, etc. "Because (that) unsubdued, insubmis- sive weak nature reluctantly surrenders, and reflects upon God, that it may wait for that which it nowhere sees or feels, and abstain from that which it sensitively (visibly) feels," i. e. live in view of future spiritual blessings and disregard present evils. 2 i n e r 1 e i generally means, one and the same. Here it is used in its original, etymological sense as the antithesis of h u n d e r t f a 1- t i g, "He who forsakes one thing shall receive it back a hundred fold." 3 W i e w o h 1 o b w o h 1, d e n n o c h ; although although (re- peated in a slightly different form) is the protasis or first member of the sentence, and d e n n o c h corresponding to both, introduces the apodosis or second member. 4 B 1 e i b t o b e n is the opposite of unterliegen or un- t e r g e h e n. See p. 38, Note 4. 7* 78 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ter Wlann, ber ott fiircfotet nnb an feinen eboten fyat, fern amen ttnrb regieren anf (^rben, ttnb bag sfrfjledjt ber eredjten tt>irb ttermebrt tt>erben" 2C )od) tt>ie gefagt, i'tber ba We$ l bat efn 3<*gKd)er and) fitr fid) fefbfl genng, nnb ott giebt ifym and), tt>a3 er barf unb btttet : nnb tt>o er e^ ntcfyt giebt, ba ift gen)i^trf) ber ($5ererf)te fo tDtKtg^ bag er e3 ntrf)t t)aben n>ttt tton (^ott, nnb n>et)ret ott, 2 ba$ er e^ tym nid)t gebe ; fo gar ^tn^ ift er ntft ctt, bag er fyat nnb ntd)t l)at, tt>ie er nnr n)t(I toor <$ott, trie q)falm 145, fagt : ,,ott tl)itt ben ^Bitten berer, tie tt)n fnrd)ten, nnb erfycrt ibr bitten, nnb l)t(ft tbnen/' ^Dag er t)tcr fagt : n tt)tr|l: e^ feben, n>enn bte (5^ott(ofen an^gerottet voerben, t(l ntd)t Don etnem frf)(erf)ten (Sel)en 3 gefagt, fonbern narf) bent ebrancfye ber rf)rift betgt e^ fr anf X)entfrf) fagen : ba3 mottte id) gerne fe# ^en* fel)e einen otttofen mad)tig nnb ein^ elt, wie einen gritnenben ?orbeer^ bannu ^ter fe^t er bie anbre (^rfabrnng jn 4 einem ^rentpet nnb 3eid)en t)om ottfofen, IDroben bat er eine Qnfafyrnng 1 Ueber das Alles, beyond or noticithstanding all that. 2 We h ret Gott, hinders God, so that he may not give it, i. e. prays him to withhold it. So perfectly is he one with God, that he has, or fails to have, whatever he will from (before) God. (God gives or withholds whatever the worshipper in his presence, asks him to give or withhold). 3 Schlechten Sehen, simple, i. e. mere seeing, (See p. 39, Note 5), " but seeing according to one's desire," that is, be gratifi- ed with what you desire. H e i s s t e s (it, the word Sehen means or is equivalent to) S e h e n nach seinem Willen. 4 Die andere Erfahrung zu, etc. " Here he presents the opposite (other) experience as (z u) an example," etc. Z u is used to point out that to which a thing is destined, or what it is to be. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 79 gefagt tton bem eredjten, bag er nod) me ^einen 1 tterfaf* fen gefefyen babe. ier fagt er eine @rfal)rnng ttom SOBibertfyeit, 2 Don bent otttofen, n>ie ber ttergangen fet), nnb fpridjt : (r roar reid), ma'duig, grog, bag (Td) 3<*bermann fcor 3bm fitrcfytete nnb tt>a$ er fagte, tfyat (teg, ba$ war gefagt, getfyan, gelaf* fen. 3 enn etnen fbfcfjen bebentet ba$ fyebraifdje 2B6rtlein ,,2Iri$," 4 ba^ f)abe id) ^nt)or Derbentfcbt ^ntadjtig/' X)a^ bebentet and), roag er ba^n tbnt : ,,@r brnjlete ftd) nnb marb fitrbracfytu}, tf)at jTd) I^er^or, war etroag fonber(td) ijor Wen, madjte jTd) brett nnb bod), g(etd)tt)ie ein Eorbeerbanm or anbern ^8anmen attest gritnet nnb etwa^ fonberltd) prangt i)or 2I(Ien, fonber(td) t)or ben ^afymen S3anmen nnb artenbcinmen, ift and) nid)t ein fd)(ed)ter 33nfd) ober nie# briber S5anm, beg man and) marten nnb pflegen mng, tt>eld)e^ man ben ttnfben SSa'nmen nnb 3^bern nid)t tfyut." 5Iffo mng man anf bicfen gotttofen 3unfer and) fe^en nnb fpredjen : nabiger ^err, (ieber 3nnfer 1 Nie Keinen. Such double negatives are not uncommon in the older German. 2 Widertheil, opposite party. See p. 34, Note 5, Widerpart in a similar sense. 3 " What he said, did (or) omitted, that was said, done (or) omit- ted." No one contradicted or opposed him. 4 Ariz, "which (Hebrew word) I have above (zuvor, i. e. in the text) translated, machtig." It also signifies how he acts, viz. " He tossed up his head, was impetuous, rushed onward, signalized himself before others, branched out and grew up as a laurel-tree, is always verdant more than (vor) other trees, and decks itself preem- inently above (vor) all, particularly above the cultivated trees, and trees of the garden," is not a mere shrub or low tree, which one must attend and cultivate, (a labor) which one does not perform for the wild trees and cedars. Sich br listen, means literally, to raise one's breast, and hence to make a show of energy, and is used now only in this figurative sense of making a boastful display. F Q r- brachtig is a word entirely out of use, so far as we know, and probably means, breaking or pushing forward, for standing as it often does with Luther, for vor. 80 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. > a man ttoritbergieng, 1 ftefye b a mar er bafytn, tcf) fragte nacfy ibm, bawarberttir* genb gefnnben, old) ($rempe( 2 fyat )atnb an bent (sanl, 3 2fyitopf)el, 2(bfafon unb bergteicfyen tt)ot)( gefefyen, roelcfye macfytig roaren in ifyrem gottfofen SOBefen, nnb efye man jTcfy nmfat), tt?aren fte bafyin, bag man fragen nnb fagen mocfyte : 2Bo ffnb jte ^tn ? Sfl c^ ntrfjt n>at)r ? 3n nnfern Setten i|t ber ^)abfl 3n(tn^ and) em fo(d)er 50?ann gewefen, roelcf) ein 4 5(rtj nnb grantidjer &err war ba^ ? 3ft vc aber nirf)t tJerfrfjmnnben, elje man futyS Derfat) ? 3Bo if* er nnn ? 50Bo ift fetn ^ro^en nnb ^3radf)ten ? Sttfo fctten it>tr nnr ftitte fatten, (Te werben 5ltte alfo 5 ^erfc^wtnben, bte je^t it)ntt)en, nnb rooffen ben ^tmmel ^erfloren nnb $e(fen nmflogen* nn^ nnr ein n>enig 6 frf)tt>eigen nnb ttoritber ge^en, n>ir ben nnS frfjier nmfe^en nnb il)rer $einen fe^en, fo tt)ir nnr ott recf)t tranen* 1 Da man vorilbergieng, " as one passed by." A mistrans- lation; it should have been Er ging voriiber, " he passed away ; behold he was gone (dahin)." 2 Solch Exempel. Neuter substantives with Luther often take adjectives without the termination es (solches). 3 An dem Saul. Where we use the English word, in, literally and strictly, implying the idea of within or interior, or keeping before the mind the image of locality within something, the Germans also use the word i n. But where we use the word to signify where a thing takes effect, or takes place, pointing out specimens, materials or exter- nal marks in which (but not within which) a thing is done or realized, the Germans employ an. See Gram. p. 359. 4 Welch ein. Welch and solch are used instead of wel- cher and solcher, etc., when they take ein immediately after them. See p. 18, Note 8. Ariz, see p. 79, Note 4. 3 Also also. The first is a conjunction (therefore], the sec- ond an adverb (so). 6 Ein wenig, a little while. " Let us, for a little time, be si- lent and pass along." EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 81 33 e tt> a I) r c b t e ^rommtgfett 1 unb fcfjaue, n>a$ auf rid) tig ifh 25eun 3*(ef t ftitb tef* fctbige griebeu fyaben. a3 ifl fo knel gefagt, ate ^cmfa$ Xit. 2. (Set) nur red)t# fdjajfcn tm cinfdfttgcn (auben $u ott, uitb rcanbte auf* rtdjttg unb rebltd), barauf fiehe atfetn 2 unb rtdjte bid) barein, lag ottfofe ottlofe fepn, fiefye, fo ttrirfl bu $ulefct grtebe ^aben, unb n>trb btr tt>ol)( gei)en ne {)ebrdifd)e prac^e ()at bte 2frt, bag, two mir anf beutfrf) fagen : ^ ge^t thm wof)f, er gebabt jTrf) roobf, ed |Iel)t n>ol)( urn tbn x uub auf ?atemifc^ : Valere, bene habere, etc. bag fjetgt jTe : 3 grtebe [)aben 5((fo enef. 37. fpracf) Sacob ^u fetnem o^ne 3ofepF| : ,,(55e^e bin in @td)em ^u befncn SSritbern, unb (Te^e, ob i^nen grtebe unb bem SSie^e grtebe fet), unb fage mtr tt)te# ber," ba^ ifl: : ob etf t^nen aurf) tt>ol)f ge^e. iafyer fommt ber rug 4 tm GrDangefio, auf bebrdtfrfje 3Cetfe : Pax vobis, grtebe fet) eurf), roekfjeg wtr auf beutfrf) fagen : ott gebe cud) einen guten ZaQ, guten 5D?orgeu, guten Slbenb ! 3tem, im 5tbfrf)etben fagen nrir : e^abt eurf) n?oM, ^abt gute tagt e$ cud) vt>ob( ge()en ! 2>a$ f)eigt Pax 1 Bewahre die Frommigkeit, etc., " preserve piety and regard what is upright." An error in translation. It should be, " Observe the righteous man and behold the upright." 2 Darauf siehe allein, etc., " regard only that and regu- late (exercise) yourself in it ; let the wicked be wicked," etc. 3 Das heisst sie. " The Hebrew language hast his peculiar- ity, that where we say in German, es geht ihm wohl, etc. and in Latin valere, etc., that it (the Heb. language) calls, * having peace.' " Notice the use of the colon before examples, quotations, etc. 4 Daher kommt der Gruss, etc. Hence the salutation in the Gospel comes after the Hebrew manner, pax vobis, peace be with you, which we express in German by, " God grant you a good day, good morning, good evening." Also we say in parting, " fare you well, (may you) have a good night," " let it be well with you," that is, pax vobis. SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. menu bet ottfofe babin ift, fo gebt eg bem @ered)ten unb ($ttaubia,en tt>ob(, unb ift fyernad) ettel 1 gttebe* >ie Uebertreter aber werben *>erti(gt mit etna n be r, unb bte ottlofen tt> e r b e n )ag tfl bag $3tberfpie( : bfe eredjten Hetben, wtb ifynen wofyl ; bte ^btrimntgen gefyen nnter, unb gel^et tt)nen iibel ^ernad) unb ^ule^t* & mocfyten btefe ^n>et SSerfe and) tt>of)f t)erjlanben vt>erben k)on betber f)et(e 2 nad)getaiJenen ?e^ren, ^rben unb it# tern, bag bte 5^einung fei) : X)te @erect)ten, n>a^ fte gutter (Tcf) (aflen, ba^ beftefyt unb gebt tl)nen n)of)(, tt>te broben tm 26* 2Ser^ gefacjt tfl, bag be^ ered)ten $wb and) ^aben werben ; aber 2ftfeg, iua^ bte ottfofen ^tnter laflen, t)erfrf)n>tnbet unb fbmmt jufe^enb^ unter, tt)te 109. fagt : ,,@etn ebarfjtntg fott in etnem Kebe beg frf)terf)t^ Derttfgt werben/' a3 ffe^t ntan and) tagttc^ in ber ber eredjteu aber ifl t)on bem $errn, ber ift i^re tdrfe 3 in ber 3eit ber X)te Urfacfye ber Dorigen 4 $wei 3Serfe ift : benn ba ber ottfofen ijl t>on il)nen fetbjl:, unb il)re tarfe ijt itjre 1 E i t e 1, empty ; mere, pure. In the latter sense, it is not de- clined, " pure peace," " nothing but peace." Soeitel Brod es- s e n, " eat nothing but bread." It is now superseded in this sense by 1 a u t e r. See p. 10, Note 4. 2 Von beider Theile, etc.," of the doctrines, inheritance and property of both parties, left behind" (at their death). 3 D e r i s t i h r e S t a r k e, he is their strength. D e r cannot be a relative here, for it would invert the clause and throw the verb (i s t) to the end. 4 Die Ursache der vorigen, etc. (this verse) is the ground of the two preceding verses ; for, etc. EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SETEN. 83 etgene 9D?acf)t, (Te (Tnb grog, tnel, 1 reicf) unb mdcfytia., bitrfen ottc$ tdrfe unb eil nicfyt 2Iber bte crerf)ten, bie ifyr e(Td)t miiffen abfefyren t>on 2lUem, tt>a$ man (Tefyt unb fiifylt unb allein ott trauen, bte babeu fein $ett nod) vStdrfe, benn son ott, rcehfyer (Te and) nicfyt (dgt, unb tfyut, tt>te (Te thm gtauben unb trauen, a(^ btefer fofgenbe befrfjltegt unb fagt : Unb ber err n>trb tf^nen betflefyen unb mirb iTe erretten, unb roirb ffe t)on ben ottfofen erretten unb i^nen ^etfen; benn jie trauen auftt)U @iebe, jTefye, tt>erd)e etne retrfje 3f a 9 e / g,t*oger ^tojl unb uberflufjTge C^rmal)nung ift ba^, fo wtr nur trauen unb glauben. 3 um ^rjlen, ($ott l)i(ft i^nen, namffd) mitten in bem Ucbel, Idgt (Te nicfyt aKein brtnnen flecfen, ijl: bet tfynen, fldrft (Te unb entfyaft (Te. 2 Ueberbieg, nirf)t attein fyrtft er ibnen, fonbern errettet 3 (Te aucfv bag (Te fcmmen. 4 enn biefe^ l)ebrdifrf)e 5B6rtrein 5 l)eigt eta,ent(icf) bem Ungfitcf ent^ (aufen unb batten fommen* Unb bag e bie otttofen i>er^ briegen moefyte, 6 fo bri'trft er (Te mit Stamen au^ unb fprirfjt : ,,(r wirb (Te erretten tton ben ottfofen/' cb e^ tfynen n>ot)l 1 V i e 1, many. This adjective, being a predicate here, cannot be declined, and of* course could not be put in the plural number. 2 E n t a a 1 1 s i e. In old German enthalten signified, to sustain, to protect. See p. 54, Note 5. 3 Errettet. Rettenis to rescue one from danger or evil by a quick action, by seizing one and snatching him away. Erretten is the same, except that e r adds the idea of successful or complete deliverance. Erlosen, literally means to make one loose or free from something that holds him firmly, to free one by the exertion of power, or with effort ; to redeem. B e f re i e n, is to set one at liberty. 4 K o m m e n, for w e g k o in m e n. 5 " For this Hebrew word (i. e. the Hebrew word translated by erretten) signifies, properly, etc." 6 Und das es mochte, " and in order that it might." 84 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. leib fet), uitb fott ifyr ^Bittfyen 1 fie nid)t3 fyelfen, ttneroofyl fie meinen, ber ($ered)te fotfe ifynen nid)t entfaufen, er mitfle fcerttfgt 2 n>erbem Bum Written, nidjt atfeht errettet er fie, fonbern er fytfft ifynen and) fiirber immerbar, 3 bag fie fyinfort in feinem Un* (jtitcfe bletben, eg fomme, tt>enn e3 tt>itt : itnb ba3 {lfe3 ba^ rum, 4 bag jTe tym t)ertraut t)abeu 5t(fo fpricfyt er aud) ^)f 91 : /r !arum bag er mtr ttertraut, fo milt id) ibtt erretten itnb befd)trmen, 5 X)eun er erfenut meiuen ^ameu, er bat mid) augerufett, barum vt)itt id) ifyn erl)6reu 3d) witt 6ei ifym fepu iu feinem Uebef, unb will il)tt t)erau^reigeu unb nntt it)u su (^l)ren fefeeu, unb ifyn fittten mit ?dnge ber age itnb ibm offenbaren mein ^ctf/' ) ber fd)a'nbe(id)en Untreue, 50?tgtreuc 6 unb t^erbammten Ungtanben^, bag ttrir fotdjen reidjen, madjtigen, trojHirfjen 3nfagnngen (^otte^ nid)t gfauben, nnb ^appeln fo gar Ieid)t# 1 Soil ihr Wathen. These words are not connected to the foregoing clause, ob es ihnen wohl leid sey; neither the posi- tion, nor the meaning of soil would admit that. Soil, when it rep- resents what is said or thought by another, as it does here, means, must according to what is said or thought. Hence it is often rendered is said to be. " And (according to these words) their rage will not help them." The clause is connected by und to the words quoted, and is a paraphrase or explanation of those words. 2 Vertilgt. The word tilgen corresponds to the Latin word delere ; and vertilgen means to blot completely out, to destroy ut- terly. Vernichten, to annihilate, is often used differently, espe- cially in figurative language, as, es stehtjemand vernichtet da, one stands there annihilated, \. e. exposed in his nothingness, or made to feel his nothingness. 3 F U r d e r, further, afterwards ; i m m e r d a r, the same as i ra- ni er. See p. 69, Note 5. 4 Und das Alles darum, "and all this because." 5 Beschirmen, to cover with a shield, to defend. S chirm, a defence, a shield, a screen. Son n e nschirm, a parasol. Regen- s c h i r m, an umbrella. 6 Misstreue, for Misstrauen, mistrust, distrust. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 85 ltd) in flermgcn Sfaftogcn, fo wir nur bbfe 5D3orte tton ben ottfofcn l)orcm i(f ott> bag ttir etttmat red) ten faitben itberfommen/ ben nnr fefyen, bag er in alter djrift gcforbert n>erbe, 3(metu ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY.* (Sdjrift an ben cfyriftHcfyen 2fbef bentfcfyetr Nation; 23 o n beg cbriftficfyen Introductory Notice by Pfizer. [Unter biefem -tttef fdjrteb ?iit!)er in ber 3D?itte bc^ 1520 cine, bent cfyrijHicfyen 5(bel bentfd)er Via* t i o n geroibmete @d)rift, in ntancfyer S3e^iel)nng eine ber nnb merfwurbigjlen, fofern er barin euten 3Sor# mad)t gnr nmfaflenben Reformation ber ^ird)e, unb mefyr a(^ in anbern djriften ein $nfammenf)ancjenbe3, it* benbige^ ^Bitb fcon ben 5)Jig6rand)en in ber ^trcfyenDerfaf* fnng unb Dlegiernng cntwirft, recifyrenb bie Don i^m fonfl befampften ? e I) r e n l)ier mef)r ^nriirftreten, trie eg ancje* meffen war in S5etrad)t be^ ^nblifnm^, fiir tt>efrf)e$ er 1 Ueberkommen in the sense of b e k o m m e n. " God grant that we may one day obtain true faith which we see (that it is) re^ quired in all the Scriptures." * Of this eloquent production of Luther we can here present only a part, though the connection will be generally maintained. In or- der that the general plan and peculiar character of it may be better comprehended, we prefix, by way of analysis, a very interesting no- tice of it by Gustav Pfizer, omitting most of his quotations. The arti- cle from the pen of this elegant scholar, is taken from his life of Lu- ther, written in 1836. 8 86 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fdjrieb, 2(ber ?efyre nnb $trd)ett*ottte bocf) bnrct) ben Saienftanb feiner ^irrf)en belfen ; jmtemaf ber geiftlirfje @tanb, bem e btdtgcr gebit^rt, ifl cjan$ nnad)tfam n>orben 3d) bebenfe roofyl, bag mir 1 ^ ntd)t n?irb nnfcentnefen bteiben, at^ i>ermeffe idf) micfy gu ^orf) r bag id) tteracfyteter begebner 5D?enfd) fotd)e ^o!)e mtb grcge tanbe barf anreben, in fo trejftfcfyen nnb grogen adjen, al$ n>dre fonjl 9?temanb in ber $Mt, benn Softer ?ntfyer, ber ffd) be^ d)rt|l(id)en (>tanbe$ annel)men nnb fo gebe 3d) (afie meine mtr'3, mer ba mitt ; id) bin metteidjt meinem ott nnb ber 2BeIt nod) eine gfyorfyeit fd)nlbig ; bie ^abe id) mir jei^t fitr^ genommen, fo mir'3 gelingen mag, enblid) $u be^al)(en nnb and) einmat 5)ojfnarr ^n werben/' @o tt>ngte bie fyerrlidje, reid>e S^atnr biefe^ 9D?anneg and) bie i^m ernjleften Sfagele* gen^eiten mit einer ^eiteren ?anne ^n beljanbefn, aber fetbft nnter biefem @d)er^en fendjtet bie fromme emntfy ^ert)or X)enn fo l)eigt e^ meiter : , r 2(nd) bieroeit id) nic^t aKein ein 9tarr, fonbern and) ein gefd)tt)orner Softer ber beiltgen @d)rift, bin id) froft, bag ffd) mir bie (Megenfyeit giebt, meinem (^ib eben in berfeiben 9tarren^$Beife genng $u tl)nn 3c^ bitte, n>ottet mid) entfd)it(bigen bet ben ma'gig SSerfMn* bigen, benn ber nber l)od)t Serjlanbigen itnft nnb nabe rceig id) nid)t ^n t)erbienen ott (jelfe nn^, bag rcir nid)t nnfre, fonbern attein feine (5t)re fndjen* 5tmen/' ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 87 mandjen ptfen fyaben barren, rcekfje bie gitrften an tbrcn ofcn jur ur|tt>eil $u balten beltebten itnb bie n?ol)f oft fewcm ber 6flina,e an SSerflanb ttrid)cn, tbre cbieter wit frcimittbigcn $3abrl)etten bebient, roefdje few 6flwa, an3$nfpred)en fid) getrant fyatte ; ba modjtc ?nt()ern 1 Dorfd)tt>eben bet biefer Sufc^tift, bag er pc() fefbjl ratt ctnem ofnarren t)ergltd) 3(ber in ber cfyrift felbfl: l)at er fetne (Sacfye nirf)t mtt Derbedteu (Srf)er^en itnb be* luftttjettben (Spdffcn oefit()rt r fonbern mtt etnem (Srnft nnb enter ^OBitrbe, mit einer fd)onnng^(ofen 2(itfrtd)tta,fett nnb mit etnem nnt)er^e(ften efiU)f, bergejtatt, bag X>entfd)lanb etnen berebteren nnb eb(eren SSertreter nnb olntetfd)er fetner 3totl) nnb Sd)mad) r fewer SBebnrfntfie nnb 3Brinfcf)c ntdjt fya'tte ftnben mogen, a[^ btefen fitr fetne ^3erfon fo be# mittfytgen, aber tm Sertranen attf (?5ott fo flarfen nnb ge# frozen 93?6nd)* 5lber Dor Sittem ermabnet er, bte @ad)e ntdit mtt Sertranen anf cignc 5Q?ad)t, fonbern mtt @ott an* ^ngretfcn. ,,3ln^ bem rnnbe, for<]e td), fet) e^ Dor geiten fommen, bag bte tfyenren gitrpten, ^atfer riebrtd) ber erfle nnb ber anbere, nnb Dtel mel)r bentfd^er $atfer fo jammer* ltd) (Tnb Don ben ^pd bffen mtt gitgen getreten nnb Derbrncft, Dor tt>e(d)en ffofy bod) bte 5Be(t fitrd)tete* (Sic baben ffd) DteKctdjt Dertaffen anf it)re ^adjt, mel)r benn anf @ott, barnm l)aben fie mitffen fallen/' ,/^ret OJJanern ()aben bte D^omaniften urn (Td) gcjogcn/' X)iefe bret papierenen pattern retgt ?ntt)er mtt ffegretd)er SSerebfamfett, anf ba 3engntg ber (Sdjrtft nnb ber efrf)td)te fid) jlit^enb, jnfam* men* ^r ^etgt, in 33e$tebnna, anf ba^ erfte : nne atte (5l)rtften getflltd^en tanbe^ nnb ^3riejler fet>en, nnb few Unterfdjteb jwtfdjen etjl(td)en nnb ^Be(t(td)en fet), bcnn be^ 5(mt^ l)a(ber attetn ; barnm fommt bem etfHid)en fetn befonberer 3Sor^n t q ^n ; ntd)t grogere ^eilt^fett, ntd)t etane Snri^biftton, ntcf)t trafloffgfett ber meWtdjen Dbrtg* fett gegenitber, nod) fya'rtere S3eflrafnng be^ gegen SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. begangenen Unredjt$* (benfo ttirb tie flat-fief) wiberfegt, bie bem ^pabjl: tie 2fa$feaung ber t), ingen, benn jebcr (thrift, unb er eben fo gut ir* ren faun, roegfyalb em (Sonciltum itber ifym fleben mug, ba^ git berufen itirf)t iljm, fonbern S^bem, ber e^ Dermag, am fd)tcftirf)ftett bem ^atfer gebitl)re ?[}?{t frafticjen 3% e ^etrf)itete ?ut()er etnem ^u Ijattenben (5onci(tum bie ^aiiipt^ flegenftanbe fetner ^[)a'ttgfett i^cr, af^ ba (Tub : (wfcf)ran* fuug ber meftttdjen, arger(id)en q)rad)t uub offart be^ ^erabfefeung ber ^arbwale, bte etue ^}(age fiir it>et( thre Sotattonen aKe ^trcfyeugitter in 2)eutfd)(aub au^faugen* (^rmdgiguug beg pabfllidjen tyait$, 5lbfd)affuitg ber itrfprimgfirf) ^um ^itrfenfrieg er nen r narf^^er fd)anb(id) t>ergenbeten unb fcerfcfyfeuberten naten, be^ $8li$bvawfy$, bag ber 9)abft bte ^)friutben gebe, vr>te ber ^adtttmgefber, ber SStfofyofSeibe ivoburrf) ein fid) in ff(at)ifd)e 5(bl)augigfett Don D?om Derfe^e* erbltd)en ^frihtben, ber interne, ber iuw>urbia,en Don pectoralis reservatio, be^ proprius motus, ber Unio et incorporatio, be$ ^)frunbeul)anbe(g unb SSer^ fattf^ Don ^)ifpenfationen jeber ^(rt ; (fo(d)er ^anbel fei) fogar an gua^er in 3lug^burg itbertragen,) fo n>ie nod) an^ bere fd)dnb(id)e unb fcfyabltefye 5D^igbrdud)e unb ^)raftifen, mefd)e bie getl^tcjen D?bmer gegen bie Don il)nen Derad)teten, DoHen toden ^eutfdjen au^uben* 9 f tttn' j aber ratt) Shttfyer, att bem Unmefen mtt fofojenben 5{norbnnngen ein ^nnaten, bie migbraudjt werben, fotten Don atten gitrpteit, 5(beligen, (Stabten bem ^)abfl Demeigert merben, tt>ei( bie tt>elt(id)e @ett>alt fdjulbtg, bie Unfd)ulbigen ^n fd)ittj>ett ; in alien jenen romifdjen ^praftifen, it>oburd) ber ?efyen unb ^)frunben an pd) reigt, ben X5eutfd)en ent^ unb gremben, //groben unge(e[)rten ^fe(n unb 23uben ADDEESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 89 $u JKcm," juwenbet, fott ber rfjriftticfye $be( fid) tfym roiber* fefeen ; eg fotfe tterbotcn werben Cnnbohtng be$ ^afliumS unb ber SBejldtigung bet 23tfd)6fe son *tfom, bamtt ber ^abft t (Td) m'djt cine tmbiflta,* eroalt i'tber biefetben anmage unb in atfe @adjen eingreife, ba i^m bod) ttitr gebiit)re, gc, jfreittge gdtte gwifd)en ^)rtmaten unb fd)tid)ten nnb au^gnrid)ten ; tterboten fotte werben, tt)e(t(td)e (Sadjen nad) 9?om ^u ^tchen unb bie ,,@d)tnberei // ber Of* ftfalen ; atte ^rtejler fotteu ermacfyttgt fepn, fitr aKe (gu ben bie Slbfefatton ^u ertl)ei(en; bie unt)erfd)dmten fpritd)e be^ j)abfte anf ^uibipng cn citen fotten, a(^ freucl^aft, auft)6reu ; ebenfo bie tt?e(t(id)e fdjaft be3 ^)ab^, bie ^u feinem geijtticfyen 5lmt unb 53eruf uid)t ftimntc ; bie ^Battfabrten, bie 3ubeljafyre, bie S5ette^ ffojler, bie l)eihw<}en (^ine^ unb befletben Drben^ abge* tl)an r ^(oiler unb (Sttfte reformirt, bie etubbe fitr binbltd) er^drt, ben ^rteflern ber fdjriftnribrtge uub biid)c (56(ibat erlaffcn, bie ^abrtage, ^egdugniffe, feu n>enigflen^ Derminbert, ba^ jTunfofe ^ttterbift nid)t me^r Derlidngt, bie (Strafen be^ geift(id)en DfJed)^ 10 (tfen tief in bie (^rbe begrabeu it>erben ; man foKe attetu bie geier be^ cnntag^ unb meniger 5 e ff a 9 e be^aften, wei( bie tne* ten geiertage nur bem ?eib unb ber (Seele fdjaben, bie ga^ jlcu unb (^peifetterbote aufgeben, bie mttben ^apeKeu uub getbfirdjen, b 1), bie neuen 5Battfaf)rt^orte gerpren i)om ^)ab|l: uidjt mebr X)ifpenfationeu unb 3nbu(geu^eu faufeu, bte Setteforben, bie auf Soften ber fleigigen ?eute faur unb i\$* pig (ebten, eiufd)rdnfeu ober aufbebeu, bte gepifteten ?Q?ep feu eingefyett laflfeu, nid)t geflatteu, bag fitter me^r aB @ine spfritttbe ^abe, bie pdb^idjeu 5)tuntteu fcerjageu, ba man t)cn t()nen tticfytg aB SSofe^ (erne* 9[^au fcttte etlidje frcmme unb Derfldnbigc S5ifd)6fe unb ele^rte, bei ?eibe feinen ^arbinal ober ^e^ermeijter uad) S36^men frfn'cfett, urn bie emeinfc^aft n>teber f)er$ujWeu ; ber q)abjl fotte 8* 90 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ftd), urn ber <2eefen mitten, eine eit fang feiner )berfeit anfkrn itnb einen @r$bifd)of an3 ben SSofymen fetbft nxifyfen (affen ; man fottte fie nid)t gttwigen, bem enng be a? crament^ in beiberlei ejMt $n entfagen, u>etf e3 nid)t nn* nod) fe^erifd), 2fnd) bie Unwerjftdten bebiirfen ftarfen D^eformatton ; 5(rtjlotele^ foKte man nid)t tnel)r fo abgottifrf) mie bi^()er treiben, ba^ getfHic t)om erflen S3nd)|laben b{3 gnm (ei3ten Don rnnb ttfgen nnb ba^ tt>eft(irf)e D?ecf)t, ba^ and) etne 5Bi(bnig ge^ tDorben, bod) in SSerg(eid) mtt bem geijlfidjen nod) gnt nnb rebtid) fep, n>ei( e3 ^n weitlanftig gcmorben, befd)rdnfen, ba3 (Stnbinm ber {)ei(igen @d)rtft aber ttor 5Ittem treiben nnb fyegen, Sie ^(ojler fotten il)rer nrfpritngliefyen 35e(lim^ tnnng be^ Unterrid)t^ nnb ber @r$iebnng ^nrncfgegeben nnb (en ber 3d)t nnb @itt(id)feit tterben* 3lnd) anf romifdje $aifertl)nm fommt ?ntl)er jn fpred)en (ine unt)eift)oKe abe fei) ben or^ ben ; ,,e3 l)at nnn ber romtfdje @tnl)I 9?om eingenommen, ben bentfd)en ^tatfer i)eran^getrieben nnb mit ^iben t)er^ pflid)tet, nic^t immer gii D^om jn tt>ot)nen* (Soft $Komifd)er ^aifer fei;n nnb bennod) ^om nid)t innen l)aben ; bajn aft^ geit in'd ^pabfte nnb ber einen ?[^ntbtt>iften bangen nnb weben, ba mer ben Seamen ^aben nnb fie ba^> ?anb nnb bie (Stdbte. iiemit fd)tie^t ?nt()er feine 5Injetge geijHidjer aber and) bie weftfidjen mift er nid)t nngeritgt la (fen* tiotl) vt>dre r fd)reibt er, ein gemetn @ebot nnb 23ett>tftignng 2)entfd)er Station iDiber ben iiberfd)tt>engttd)en Ueberflng nnb ^oft ber $ feibnng, babnrd) fo Die( 5tbe( nnb retd)e tSolf Derarme, ^r rc>arnt t)or ammt nnb (Seibe nnb (Specerei nnb tmtd)erifd)em 3in^nel)inen nnb ttor bem ^an^ tef. 5(iid) 5 re iT e uni) @ufen fet) eingeriffen nnter ben 2)entfd)en, it>oran^ bie anbern Rafter fotgen ; biefem aftem ju flenern, erma^nct er bie Dbrigfeit iinb entfd)nlbigt $nm (sdjlng feine greimntf)igfeit mit bem >rang feine^ ADDKESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 91 enrijfeuS, ba ibm licber fci), tic $Bett gitrne mit ifym a(3 @ott. * (So fdjricb ?ntf)er $n ber 3 e ^/ wo er ben ttotfigen 35rnd) mit bcm tyabft unb bcr altcn $ird)e nod) nidjt fiir notfywen* bit] cradjtcte, n?o cr nocf) SSertranen ober ^offnuug fyatte auf bic 2D2ogfid)fcit einer bnrd)grctfenbcn Reformation* (r mocf)te e^ felbj^ mobt al)nen, bag btejentgen, meld)e er auf# forbcrtc, pcf) ^n btefem 3Berfe ^n Dereinigen, ntrf)t $tfe be^ retttDittig fepit tt>itrben ; er fonnte e^ ftd) fef6jl: fd)Vt>er(ic^ t)crbcrgcn, bag bcr ^abfl in eine fofd)e SSefdjranfnng feiner 9D?ad)t unb cwatt uimmcnuc^r untftgen witrbe : aber er fyatte ba^ (Scinicje gethan, er fyatte 3Sorfd)lage gemad)t, nid)t nnr bie irrf)e in it)rer (^ml)eit $n erl)a(ten, fonbern and) bie Don i()r getrennten 53obmen wteber mit ifyr an^^nfol)nen nnb gn Dcreinia.en, er bat bamit ge^ct^t, bag er nicfyt ^erretgen wotttc, fonbern fyeifen, RetigiojTtdt nnb ffttfid)er @rufl, 2Satcr(anb^(iebc nnb ticfe^ 3^ationa(gefnbr t)ereinigten ffd), foldie 5IBorte anf feine %m\Qc %n fcgen ; fein ^n t qe, anf ba^ j^odjfte gerid)tet, (ieg and) ba^ ^(eine, Unbebentenbere fei*= ner 5Infnterffamfett nid)t ent^efyen ; bie @t)te otte^ r bie ifyn befeette nnb entflammte, mad)te it)n nid)t g(eid)giiltig gegen bie @:f)rc feine^ 2SoIfy r bie fcfyamlofen (^rpreflfnngen, nnter n?e(d)en bie Nation ^erarmte, giengen bent 5D^ond)e, ber feine abe bcfag, an'^ er$ ; bie ^igbanbfnngen nnb ber ol)n r n>e(d)e groge 5taifer tton ben ^dbjten erbntbet, emporten ba3 @efitb( eine^ 5D2anne^, ber, feiner SSefdjeiben* Ijeit nngead)tet r foDieC od)(Tnn befag, bag er im Stamen nnb an^ ber @eele ber bentfd)en Nation ^nt)erffd)tnd) rebete, nnb fo rebete, bag biefe feiner 5Borte (Td) nid)t ^n fd)dmen emig, man fann ifym nid)t yorwerfen, er t)abe entfd)(anb in feine perfontidje 2(nge(egent)cit t)inein^ gict)cu nnb bnrd) Sfagflremmg ber (Saat ber geinbfd)aft ffd) (Sd)it6 nnb ^id)eri)cit Dcrfd)afen rcoKen ! Qa$ jTnb nid)t bie 2Bortc eine^ 5fjjanuc^ ber ffd) $n ycrftecfeu unb gu ber* 92 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gen tradjtet m fetger 2(ngft ; eg jmb bte befdjworenben, ge# roaltt'gen @pritrf)e etneg mddjttg ergrtflFenen, itber perfon* Itrfje Dfttcf jTdjten nnb $Bitnfd)e erfyabenen 30?anneg, bet ben 23ttnben bte 2wgen offhen, bte ?al)tnen aufruttefn, bte 9D?att* fyer^t'gen befenern ntodjte, unb ber nnr in bem ffaren 23e# n>ngtfei)n, bag bag &ocf)fte uf bem ptele ftanb, an bte (5f)re nnb bag spflid)ta,efitl)( enter grogen ebeln Nation ay* pettirte* 50?it btefer @d)rtft l)at ?nt^er jTrf) em 2)en!mal gepiftet, bag thn btttta, fd)it^en fottte or alien ^utftagen, bie t()m @rf)itlb geben : >entfrf)(anb ^erriflfen nnb ^ert^etlt $u ^aben ; wcnn Corner, fo batte e r @tnn bafi'tr, bag eg etntg, grog, mdd)ttg nnb fret fei> i)cn fcfyanbltctjem 3ocf)e ; bag feme SSorfcfyld'ge nnb D^dtbe ^eitgemctg nnb flng ivaren, ^a# ben and) btejemgen, n)eld)e (Td) t()m nid)t anfdjtogen, fritter ober fpater bnrd) bte fyat, bnrd) tbetfwetfe 5Infl)ebnng ber tton tl)m geritgten 5[^tgbrdnd)e / anerfannt ; bag bte bentfd)^ en gitrften, bag ber ^atfer fefbft ntd)t fetn 5Berf nnterjlit^ ten nnb gemetnfam Ijanbelten, war feme @d)it(b ntd)t,] nnb Sta'rfe 1 i)on ctt ^ttbor, 2 5ll(erbnrd)rand)# gnd'btgfte (tebe erren ! (g til ntd)t ang (anter 2Sor* 1 S t a r k e. A blessing appropriate to be invoked upon princes and nobles, especially in a military age. This word is undoubtedly taken from the Scriptures, in which God is often called the strength of his servants. 2 Z u v o r, first, a common form of official salutation, because it stands at the beginning of the address, and is designed to conciliate favor ; as, Meinen freundlichen Gruss und Dienste z u v o r ! first of ail, I present my friendly salutation and offer my service. 3 Allerdurchlauchtigste, most illustrious, a title given now to emperors and kings only. Durchlauchtig, is a literal, but awkward translation of the Latin title perillustris. A 1 1 e r, pre- fixed to superlatives to give them intensity, was originally a genitive plural governed by the superlative, the most illustrious of all. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN witt 1 nod) grcttd gefdjdjett, bag id) einiaer 2 mid) mttcrftanbcn, 3 or eucrn l)of)cn SOBitrbett 2Me 9iotl) nub 25cfd)tt?critna,, 4 bic attc @tanbe bcr fyeit, $ncr >cntfd)(anb brncft, nidjt attcin mid), fonbern Sebermamt bcrc>ca,et bat mefmat $u fdjreten nnb wtfe $u bccjefymt, fyat mid) and) je($t gqwungen $n fd)reien imb ru^ feu, ob 5 ott Semanb ben eifl (]cben n?ottte, fcine ,^anb $11 rctdjen bcr cfcnbcu Nation* &$ i|l eft burd) (5onci(ien 6 ctwatf Dorgewanbt, abcr burd) ctlidjcr 5Q2cnfd)en ?tft be()en^ bi t qtid) 7 Dcrbinbcrt nnb immer a'rger geworben ; wetcfyer nnb S3o^l)eit id) jet, ott I)c(fe tnir, ^n bnrd)(end)ten 8 1 V o r w i t z. In the old writers F U r w i t z often occurs, the particles vor and far being used indiscriminately. It means im- pertinent foricardness and rashness. 2 E i n i g, which now expresses unity ; as, G o 1 1 i s t e i n i g, God is one and indivisible, was formerly used in the sense of e i n- z i g, one alone. So here, and elsewhere, as in Mark 10:18; N i e- mand ist gut, denndereinigeGott, JVo one is good but God alone. 3 Unterstanden, with the auxiliary h a b e omitted, as it of- ten is. 4 Die Noth und Beschwerung. As these two words designate one and the same thing, the verbs agreeing with them are put in the singular. Zuvor Deutschland, especially Ger- many. B e w e g t hat is connected with drflckt by und un- derstood. This copulative conjunction is frequently omitted between verbs in German where it would be indispensable in English, 6 O b. Before this word, the English reader would expect some such expression as u m z u s e h e n ; but it is not necessary in Ger- man. 6 C o n c i 1 i e n, especially those of the 15th century, held at Pisa, Constance and Bale. 7 B e h e n d i g 1 i c h, dexterously. B e h e n d e stands for b e i der Hand. So vorhanden means at hand. Behendig- k e i t, dexterity, occurs below. 8 Durchleuchten, to clear up, governs Tttcke und Bos- he i t, and these govern w e 1 c h e r in the genitive plural. " Whose intrigues and wickedness i now intend, with God's help, to expose." 94 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gebenfe, auf bag ffe erfannt, 1 fyinfort ntrfjt ntebr fo fyinber* ltd) unb fcfya'bltcfy fetm morfjten. @5ott fyat un$ etn junge^ ebleg 23Iut $um anpt 2 gegeben, bamit Diet er$en $u grower guter offmma, emecfet ; 3 baneben 4 mitt prf)'$ piemen, ba3 Unfere ba$u $u tfyun, unb ber 3 e ^ Mb @nabe braucfyem 5 X)te Dtomanifhtt ^aben brei 50?auent mit grcger bigfeit itm jTd) ge^ogen, bamit pe ffrf) bi^^er befofyitiset, 6 bag ffe S^iemanb I)at mogen refornttren, baburrf) bie @f)rtftettf)eit greu(irf) gefatten ift. Bum erflett, wenn man {)at auf (Te gebrttngen mit Itrfjer ett>aft, ^aben jTe gefe^t unb gefagt : 7 SDBeltltrfje @e^ 1 rk an n t, a participle used adjectively with sie. Aufdass for d a s s or d a m i t, to the end that. 2 Einjunges Blut zum Haupt. Charles V. who had been recently elected zum H a u p t, for a head, or emperor. Zu is the proper word for expressing destination, or that which anything is de- signed or appointed to become. 3 [Und] damit viel Herzen e r we cket, "and thereby ex- cited many hearts to high and pleasing hopes." The predominant meaning of d a m i t in Luther's writings is thereicith, thereby, where- as, in modern German in order that, is as common a signification. This last idea Luther generally expressed by auf dass. 4 Daneben, etc. "In connection with that, it will be proper [for us] to contribute our part." Dazu thun, as an active verb, means to add ; as a neuter verb, it signifies, to be attentive or careful. 5 Brauchen, sometimes governs the genitive, and sometimes the accusative. With the former, it has a more elevated and antique air. " And to make a good use of the occasion and favor." 6 Damit sie sich bis her beschutzet [haben], "with which they have hitherto defended themselves, so that no one has been able to reform them ; and by this means (d a d u r c h) all Chris- tendom has sadly fallen." 7 Gesetzt und gesagt, "established (as a law) and proclaim- ed, that the civil power has no authority over them." And a few lines below, setzen sie dagegen, "they, on the contrary, lay it down as a law, that it belongs to none but the pope to interpret the Scriptures." See p. 11, Note 5. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 95 wait fyabc niefyt D?erf)t itber fie, fcnbcrn ttiebcrnm, getftKrfje fe*) nbcr bie roeltlicfye* 3um anbcrn, hat man fie mit ber bciftgen (Sdjrift rotten firafcn, fcfccn fie bagegen : (3 gebitfyre bte (Scfyrift 9tiemanb aud$u(e t qen, bemt bem ^pabfL Bum britten, brtiuet 1 man ifynen mit einem (Sonctfio, fo erbid)ten (Te, e$ mixje 9iiemanb ein @onci(inm bernfen bemt ber 9>abfh sdfo baben fie bret ^utl)en nn^ ^etmlicf) geftofyten, bag jTe mogen uttgcftraft feijn, unb (Tct) in ffrfjere biefer brei Saltern gefei^et, 2 atte S5itberet nnb treiben, me n>tr benn je^t fefyem Unb ob ffe fdjon ein ciltnm mit^ten mac^en, fyaben pe beef) baflctbe ^nt)cr matt gemacfyt bamit, ba^ 3 (Te bie gitrften ^nt)or mit (5iben pflidhten, jTe bleiben ^u fafien n)ie fie jTnb ; ba^t bem tjotte @ett)aft geben itber atte Drbnnng be^ (5onct(mm$ ; alfo, bag g(eict) Q\(i, e^ fepen i)te( ^oncilien, cber feine cilien, cbne bag ffe nn^ nnr mit ?art>en nnb betrii^en o gar grenlid) fiircljten |Te ber ant 4 t)cr einem 1 Drauet, from drauen, which is obsolete for d ro hen. 2 Sich gese tzt, placed themselves, connected with gestoh- len by und. Zu treiben is used in the sense of um zu trei- ben. "Thus have they secretly stolen from us three cudgels, that they might go unpunished, and put themselves under the sure defence of these three walls, in order to practise all kinds of mischief and in- iquity, as we now behold." 3 Damit, dass, " by this means (viz.) that they first bound the princes with an oath, to let them (the Romanists) remain as they are ; and besides (dazu), to give to the pope full power over the entire arrangement of the council, so that (also dass) it was indifferent whether there be (es seyen, there be, subjunctive) many councils or no councils, except that they deceive us with mere masks and mockfights." Ohne dass, in modern German, does not mean except, but without, and ohne dass sie uns betrttgen, would, at the present day, mean the same as ohne uns zu betrUgen, without deceiving us. 4 Der Haut, for their skin. Such an adverbial use of the geni- tive, limiting or qualifying the verb, is very common. 96 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. rerfjten frefen @onctlto, itnb ftaben bamtt 1 $ontge itnb gi'tr* ften fd)itd)tern gemacfyt, bag fie gfanfcen, e3 rcare nnber ott, fo man ifynen ntdjt gefyordjte iu alien folcfyen fdjatf* fyafttgen ItfKgen (Spitgntgen* 3?nn fyelfe nn ott, nnb gefce nn ber spofannen etne, 2 bamtt bte Oftanern 2tfrid)o wnrben nmgemorfen, bag vt)tr biefe jlrof)ernen nnb ^apternen Pattern and) nmblafen, nnb bte d)n|lltd)en ^Hnt^en, i'tnben $n prafen, 3 (o^ ntadjen, 4 be^ enfeB gift nnb XniQ an ben ag ^n brtngen, anf bag ttnr bnrd) trafe nn^ befiern, nnb fetne n(b it>teber erfan* gen 5Botten 5 bte erfte Matter am erflen angretfen,* 3nerft $eta,et er a(fo/ bag aKe @f)riften an bcm getftftdjen 1 Dam it, with that, more commonly indicates instrumentality; but it may also express mere concomitancy, as it does here. " Thus terribly are they frightened for their lives (skin) by (vor, before, in meio of) a really free council, and with this (fear in their hearts), they have intimidated kings and princes, so that the latter believe, that it would be an offence against God, if one should not obey them (the Papists) in all such mischievous hobgoblin tricks (trickish hobgob- lins)." SpUgnissen, is now a Thuringian provincialism, for which Luther sometimes uses GespOgniss, which is found in the glos- saries of the old German. It is derived from S p u k, by the addition of the termination niss, and a dialectical change of the k into g. 2 Der Pausaunen eine, " one of the trumpets^ with which the walls of Jericho were overthrown." U mb la se n, to bloicover, or down. 3 Zu strafen, depends on Rut hen, rods to punish sin. 4 Los mac hen, to pull away from, the hands of the Romanists who held them fast, to prevent their being used. * 5 [Wir] wollen. 6 Also, here in its secondary, or illative sense, there, therefore. * Instead of the theological discussions respecting " the three walls of the Romanists," which here ensue, we have preferred merely to preserve the connection by substituting an abridgement from Mar- heinecke, mostly in the words of Luther. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 97 28efen l Zbcil babeit unb bier fern Unterfefyeb fet),benn beg Slmtetf 2 balben aKeiit, bap wtr aUefamt 3 fwb $u gewetbet burcfj bte aufe, obrootjf nitty 3cbem flejtemet, 2(mt $n Dcrmaltcn. arnm, 5 fagt cr, fottte ein ^riefterflanb 6 nicf)t3 anbered fet)n in ber @briflenbeit, benn a(S etn maun ; roeil er am 2lmt ift, gefyet er ttor, roo 7 er aber a 1 Geistlichen We sen, spiritual or ministerial character. For the peculiar use of the word We sen, see p. 26, Note t. * Denn des Amtes, "no other difference than that of the office alone." So denn and als are often used after k e i n^ " no other than." 3 Allesamt, etymologically the same as altogether , meaning, however, all collectively. 4 Zu Priestern. See p. 94, Note 2, and Nohden's Gram. p. 338. This clause, in simple modern German, would be arranged thus: dass wir allesamt durch die Taufe zu Priestern geweihet (worden) sind, obwohl (es) nicht, etc. 8 Darum causes sollte to precede its nominative . Sagt pre- cedes e r when any words of a quotation precede. So in English the phrase, " says lie." 8 Priesterstand. The modem taste for minute accuracy in ex- pression would be offended with the incongruity, not felt at all in Luther's time, of representing "the priesthood to be nothing else irk Christianity than an officer." " Because he is in office, he takes the precedence (gehet er vor); but if he be deposed, he is a peasant and (or) citizen, as the other (the individual supposed, i. e. any other,. who is not a priest)." 7 W o> now nearly obsolete in the sense of w e n n, and which was originally an adverb of place (where) ; afterwards it was a conditional conjunction ((/). It expressed, at first, a local condition, in what place, or wherever a certain thing shall occur, equivalent to, if any- where it occur. Hence it expresses a condition more emphatically than wenn, if, which barely indicates a condition without any in- tensity of expression. S o (if) is sometimes used in the same sense as wo (a condition emphatically expressed) ; but this use is less fre- quent and has more of an antique air. W o f e r n, s o f e r n, and d a- fern (if), limit the condition to a certain measure or degree, to the extent that, so far as. They differ from wo in intensity as wo dif- fers from wenn. Falls (if), expresses more uncertainty as to the 9 98 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fet, ift er em Waiter nnb SSitrger, 1 nne ber anbere. Unb fo fyat and) meltliofye >6rta,fett, Don @ott etncjefet^et, thr Slmt, 2 bte SSofen $n ffrafen, bie grommen $n fdbnt^en ; fo foil man tfyr 2lmt laffen fret gefyen nnb nntterfyinbert 3 bnrofy ben gan^en harper ber @t)riftenbett, ittemanb angefefyen, 4 ffe treffe spabft, SMfcfyofe, 9>faffeit, SWonrfje, 37onncn ober tt>a er ifl 5 X)enn fo bag gemtg ware, 6 tt>eltltd)e ^n l)inbern r tvetl ffe geringer ifl nnter ben cf)rifllfd)en tern, benn ber q>rebtger nb 23etrf)tia,er 5lmt ober ber Itcfye tanb, fo follte man and) fytnbern ben SSanern nnb alien 5ettlfcf)en 5^anbn>erfern, bag ffe bem ^)ap| event, and differs from w e n n, as in case that, in English, differs from if. 1 Bauer, Barge r. The termination e r, indicates one who cul- tivates (bauen) the soil, or who lives in a castle (Burg) or town. See Gram. p. 70. 2 Ihr Amt, explained by the following words in apposition. " So also the civil government, appointed by God, has its office (viz.) to punish, etc." 3 Unverhindert is used adjeclively and connected by u n d to frei. 4 Niemand angesehen, (an obsolete expression) nominative absolute, " no one regarded," i. e. without respect of persons, " be it (fall it upon,) pope, bishops," etc. See p. 15, Note 8. 5 Was er ist differs from wer er ist, just as "whatever he be," differs from " whoever he be." Was refers not to one's indi- vidual character, but to his standing, or rank. 6 So das genug ware, " if that were (reason) sufficient for hindering the civil power, because among the Christian offices it is lower than the office of preachers and confessors, or than the priest- hood," etc. See p. 97, Note 7, on s o. Das refers to the clause, w e i 1 sie geringer ist, etc. Zu hindern is dependent on genug. 7 Hindern den Schneidern dass sie dem Papst keine Kleider machten, hinder tailors, etc. from making (hin- der them, so that they make no shoes, etc.). Hindern, which commonly governs the accusative, here governs the dative. W e li- re n is now used for h i n-d e r n, which is obsolete in this sense. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 99 25tfd)6fen, 9>rieflertt, TOndjen feine (grfjub, fer, Qrfien ut> rinfcn madjten, nod) 3^3 a,abem 2tffo mctn id), bicfe erfte 9>apicrmaner liege barnieber, (internal 1 eltltrf)c crrfrf)aft ifl ein SDtttgltefc roorben beg (5benfo nnberfecjet er and) ben anbern Stftfyutn, bag bie 6d)rift atfcin in ben anben beg ^papfteg fei), bag er nidjt trren fonne 2 in Slu^legung bcrfelben. $Bo ba^ ware, 3 n)dre bie betfige Sdjrift notl) ober nit^e ? ?aflet jte toerbrennen 4 nnb und begniigcn an 5 ben nngetefyrten gn D?om r bie ber fyctftge eijl inne ^at ; 6 menn id)'^ nid)t ge(efen batte, mcire mir^ 7 unglau6(td) getr^efen, bag ber 1 S internal, see p. 18, Note 9. The construction is antiquated for sintemal weltliche Herrschaft ein Mitglied des christlichen Korpers (ge) worden ist. *Sei irren konne. These verbs, sei and konne, arc put in the subjunctive because they relate not to a reality, but to a conceit or imagination, indicated by the word 1 r r t h u m, which they are employed to explain. 3 Wo das ware, wozu, if that were (so), for what, etc.? for Wenndassoware. See p. 97, Note 7. 4 Las set sie uns verbrennen, let us burn it. Sie refers to Schrift. 6 Uns begnttgen an, content ourselves with. For the use of an with the dative, as pointing out an agreeable object, see p. 80, Note 3. 6 Inne hat, " whom the Holy Ghost has in charge." Literally, to have within one's self, i. e. to have in one's power or at one's dispo- sal. It differs from b e s i t z e n, to possess, i. e. to have the ownership of, because one may have in his power, or at his control, (inne h a b e n), a hired house, and yet not possess it (b e s i t z e n). A com- mander-in-chief is the Inhaber (disposer) but not the Besitzer (owner) of his army. 7 W a r e mi r's, for w a r e e s m i r. " Had 1 not read it, it would have been incredible to me that Satan should, at Rome, have made such absurd pretences (have pretended such absurd things) and have found adherents, or a party." Vorwenden, almost precisely similar to pretend (prae and tendo) both in etymology and in signifi- 100 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fef fotfte gu D?om fofofye uno,efrf)tcfte >tna,e fcortoenben unb 5fnfyatta, ftnbem Sutler etgnet fyter etnem jeben ba 3?ed)t git, 1 tie fyetttge cfyrtft gu (efen unb bie fofcmecfen 2 unb gn urtfyeifcn, tt>a ba recfyt ober unrest im fauben fe*>, te bn'tte Waiter fdttt fcon fe(6ft urn, fo bte erften gwo 3 fallen, itdmKcf), bag ber 93abfl atfetn bag Dfccfyt fyabe, (Stan* gtttcn gn tterfammeftu 2}enn roa're ba^ tiid)t, fagt er, em jtnnatitr(id) SSornebmen, fo ein geuer in etner Stabt anf ajnge unb jebermann fottte jlitte (tefyn, lajfen fitr unb fiir 4 cation, always, when used in this secondary sense, conveys the idea of making a false pretence, while vorgeben has the same general meaning, except that there may be some truth in the pretence. E. g. To avoid an engagement, one may vorgeben a pressure of busi- ness (which may be the truth) or he may vorwenden a feigned illness. A n h a n g, appendix, i. e. something appended to a book or chapter of the same character with it, (and therein differing from Z u s a t z, which may be similar or dissimilar) but designedly separ- ated from it (and therein differing from Nachtrag, which is the addition of something omitted before, either from forgetfulness, or from ignorance). Applied to persons, Annan g means, a clique which a man gathers around him of persons of the same sentiments and feelings with himself. See p. 53, Note 2. 1 Eignet zu. Zueignen, means literally to give or to ac- cord to one something as his own. To dedicate (a book), to ascribe (an act) to one, are derived significations. 2 Schmecken, (like the Latin sapere), to taste ; then to feel, to experience, to perceive. This is particularly the biblical use of the word, as also of the English word taste, as " come taste and see," etc. " Luther concedes to every Christian the right to read the Scrip- tures and the power to perceive and to decide what (d a is an exple- tive) is right and wrong in (matters of) faith." 3 So die ersten z wo, if the first two. For s o, see p. 97, Note 7; for z w o as the intermediate form between z w e i and the English two, see p. 49, Note 1. N a m 1 i c h refers not to z w o, but to die dritte Mauer. Mauer, is derived from the Latin muius, though with a change of the gender, for the ground of which see Gram. p. 91. 4 FUr und fur. This is an old form of expression which orig- ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 101 bremtcn, n\id ba brcmten mag, atfetn baritm, bag fie mdjt bic 5S)2arf)t be$ SSitrgermeiftcrS fatten ober ba$ gener Icicfyt mof)t an be$ 23ura,ermeijler3 au3 anbitbe ?i 3ft wefyt cm jegtfdjcr 23ura,er frfnttbig, bie anbern git bewegett itnb $n berufen ? SGBictriel mel)r fott ba$ in ber tabt (5t)rt|it gcfrf)cben r fo ein geuer be er^ebet, c$ fei) an be^ ^apjic^ Regiment ober o e^ wottc* X)ag ffe aber tbre cwalt riifymen, bcr ffct) nirf)t ^temc 2 $u n?tberferf)tcn, tft gar ntcf)td gcrebt. @^ ill feine cwaft in bcr $ trd)e, benn nnr $nr SSejferung : barnm n?o ficfy ber ^abft 3 wottte bcr ercaft braiirfjcn, jn tt)et)rcn, ein fret @on$tttnm git madjen, bamit t)ert)inbert witrbe bic SScfferung ber $ird)e, fo fotten wir i^n nnb feine ewaft nirf)t anfe^en inated when far was equivalent to v o r, and means literally for- wards and forwards, i. e. ever onward, 1. in regard to space, 2. and more commonly, in regard to time, incessantly. " Stand still (and) let it burn on continually as far as it will (whatever may burn). 1 A n h a b e, obsolete for a n h o b e imperfect subjunctive from an he ben. See he ben in Gram. p. 420. For the signification of the word, see p. 39, Note 4. 2 Dersich[es]nicht zieme. " That they boast of a (their) power, which it is not becoming (sich nicht zieme) to resist, is saying (or amounts to) nothing at all;" literally " is nothing said." See p. 9, Note 5. 3 Darum wo sich der Papst. " Therefore if the pope should be disposed (w o 1 1 1 e) to make use of (s i c h [g e] b r a u- c h e n) power to prevent holding (zu machen) a free council, in order that the reformatiou of the church may (might) be hindered, we ought to disregard (both) him and his power ; and if he should come and thunder (in his bulls), we should look down upon it as up- on the work (undertaking) of a mad man, in reliance upon God (i n Gottes Zuversicht) put him, in turn, under the ban, and drive him away as well as we can (as one can)." According to good modern usage, brauchen signifies to need, and gebrauchen is employed in the sense of to use. Sich gebrauchen, to make use of, with the genitive, is now provincial. Such is the change which the language has undergone since Luther's time. 9* 102 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tt>o er fommen unb bonnern ttwrbe, foKte man ba3 ten, ate cmeS totfen 9D?enfrf)en SBornefymen, 1Mb iljn in teg 3utterjTd)t ttnebernm bannen nnb treiben, tt>ie man mag* )emt fctcf) cine fcermeffene ettatt ijl nicfytg ;* er bat jte and) nid)t imb wirb ba(b nut einem ^prud^e ber @rf)rift ittebergete^et ; benn spaufttS fagt 2 @or, 10, 8* ott l)at wtg en>a(t gegeben, ntd)t ^u tterberben, fonbern ^u beffern t)ie (Sritettett* $Ber n>ttt itber t)on in ben (SoncHien jit wcttcn tt>ir fe^en bie tiicfe, 2 bie man tnflia, 3 in ben @onciftett fottte ^anbeln, nnb bamit ^dbfle, (^arbinale, S3i^ frf)6fe nnb atfe elef)rten fottten billig ZCIQ nnb 9tacf)t t)en, 4 fo jTe (5t)rijlnm nnb feine ^irrfje lieb batten* 5Bo nicf)t tl)nn, bag ber anfe nnb ba^ ne, nnangefe^en il)t S3annen ober ein nnred)ter 23amt ift befler benn ^e!)en recfyte Intionen ; unb eine nnrecf)te 5(bfo(ntion arger benn recite S3cinne, ^arnnt (affet nnS anfwadjen, (iebe X^entfrfje, wnb ott me^r benn bie 5^enfd>en fitrcfyten, bag tt)ir nicf)t n>erben atter armen eefen, bie fo Haglicf) bnrrf) 1 N i c h t s, a nonentity. "Nor has he it ;" u n d (s i e) wird bald, etc. 2 S t c k e, the particulars. See p. 30, Note 1. 3 B i 1 1 i g, reasonably, is not to be connected with h a n d e 1 n, to act reasonably, which would give a false sense ; but it must be connected with sollte, ought reasonably, i. e. ought in justice. To neglect to do these things would be unreasonable. So also a few words below b i 1 1 i g indicates the reasonableness of the obligation expressed by sollten. 4 Damit umgehen, " with which popes, etc. ought in rea- son to concern themselves night and day, if they had any regard for Christ and his church." The subjunctive, hat ten, implies that they had no regard for Christ. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 103 ba fcfydnbltcfye, tcufeftfrfje Dfcgtment ber Darner serloren werbem 3um erften ijVtf grenltcf) imb erfef)recf(trf) an^ufefyen, 1 bag ber bcrtfe in ber Gbrtftenbeit, ber ffd) SMJH SStcartum, nnb o man bawiber 1 Anzusehen, is not here used in an active sense, governing the following clause, but that clause is in apposition with e s (in i s t's) and consequently in the nominative ; and erschrecklich anzusehen corresponds to the Latin horril/ile visu. * Sich rUhmet, ordinarily signifies to praise one's self, or to boast of, with the genitive of the thing of which he boasts. But originally the word meant to call one's self something, and so it is used here. Viele Menschen we r den fro mm gerU hmt, "ma- ny men are called pious." Prov. 20: 6. Comp. Prov. 16: 21. in Lu- ther's version. 3 Der allerheiligste, etc., "and while he allows (causes) himself to be called the most holy and most spiritual, he is a more worldly creature (being) than the world itself." Observe the use of the nominative (der allerheiligste) after nennen with sich which is in the accusative. So in closing a letter one says, Ich empfehle mich als Ihr gehorsamster (not Ihren ge- horsamsten) Diener. Titles as well as proper names are often used without the ordinary variations of declension. See analogous instances in Gram. p. 323, infra. Jn all other cases the accusative is used when in apposition with sich in reflective verbs. Weltli- cher for weltlicheres. For an explanation of the omission of the ending e s, which is so common in the writings of Luther, see p. 4, Note 3. Selber an indeclinable pronoun is nearly obsolete for selbst. 4 G 1 e i c h t sich das, "if that resembles, etc., it is a new (kind of) resemblance." 104 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. rebet ; matt ttntf aber and) mcfyt fyoren, nne nncfyrtjHtrf) imb ungottficf) ford)' 2Befen fet). 5d) fyalte aber, roenn er mtt Straiten beten fotfte t>or ott, er mitgte je fotcfye kronen ableaen ; btemetl 1 nnfer ott feine offal)rt mag leiben. 3>tnn fotfte fetn 5(mt ntrf)t3 anbereg'feiw, benn tagttrf) tt>et* nen unb beten fitr bte (^^nilen^ett, unb em ^rempeC atter 3um anbern, mo^u t|l ba^ 2Sotf nii^e 2 in ber S ba hetget bte ^arbtnate ? a$ tt>ttt irf) bir fagem unb Dentfd)(anb f)aben met retrfjer ^loffer, 4 ttfte, nnb ^)farreten ; bie bat man ntcfyt gemngt befler gen ftom ^u brtngen, benn bag man @arbtnate marf)e, 5 nnb ben# fefbtgen bte ^Bt^t^nmer, ^(oj^er, ^rdtatnren $u etgen gcibe, 6 nnb ctte^btenjl alfo gu SBoben jitege* X5arnm ffefjet man je|5t, bag 2Be(fd)(anb fafi witfle tft, ^loj^er t)erporet, 1 Die well originally meant while, during. See p. 26, Note 2. Afterwards, it came to signify as it does here, since, because, which is now provincial, and weil is now the common word for since, be- cause. 2 Wozu ist das Volk niitze das, "for what is that [class of] people useful (i. e. of what use are they) which are called car- dinals ?" 3 Welsch [land]. Welsch signifies what is foreign, particu- larly what is of Roman origin ; and hence more commonly it means Italian, but sometimes it means French* 4 Kloster in the genitive plural, governed byviel. Kloster comes from the Latin daustrum, a closed, or secluded place. Stif- ter, Lehen und Pfarren, religious foundations, ecclesiastical fiefs, and parishes. The two former are indefinite terms for which B i s t h U m e r and Pralaturen seem to be used a little below. 5 Denn dass man machte, " than that one should make," i. e. than to make. 6 Zu eigen gilbe, to give for their own. Zu, expressing des- tination, is to be variously translated by to, for, and as. All the grammatical relations are here fully and clearly expressed ; " that one should give to the same (the cardinals) the sees, etc., to be their ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 105 tftumcr acrjchret, 1 ^rdlaturen unb after $ird)en 3wfc gen SKom a.e$OQen, (Bta'bte ucrfaUeu, anb unb 2eute tterborben, ba fctu (Sjottegbicnfl nod) ^)rebia.t mefyr gefyet* 5Garnm ? Die $arbtna(e miiffcn bie (fitter babeiu $ein iirfe fyatte 2GcIfd)Ianb fo mogen fcerberben, unb otte^bienfi nieberle* gen. 9tim 2 2BeIfd?Ianb an3a.efoa,en iff, fommen fte in'$ eutfd)* lanb, I)e6en fein fduberltcf) 3 an : aber fe^en mv ^u, eutfrf)* faun foil balb bem SOBelfofyen gletcf) werben* $Btr Ijaben fefyon etltct)e (5arbincile, 5Ba^ bartnnen 4 bie D^omer fudjen, follen bie trnnfnen ^eutfdjen 5 nid)t tterfle^en, bi^ fie fein SButtljum, ^lofler, ^farrei, ?et)en, Better ober pfennig 6 1 Verstoret verzehret, participles for verstort and verzehrt and construed like w Q s t e ; " Therefore we see that It- aly is almost desolate, cloisters broken up, episcopal sees consumed, prebends and the revenues of all the churches carried to Rome, cities decayed, the country and people ruined, in which (d a in the sense of wo) there is no longer religious service nor preaching." 2 Nun. See p. 12, Note 4. 3 Sauberlich means, neatly, nicely, with finesse. " Now that Italy is drained, they come to Germany, and go to work with admi- rable finesse. But behold! Germany, in their view, (soil) is soon to become like Italy." Heben an, see p. 39, Note 4. Sehen wir zu, lo ! as an imperative is unusual. See Gram. p. 169, note. The common form would be, sehet nur zu. Soil, is said, or is thought, see Gram. p. 180, 3. So s o 1 1 e n a little below, expresses merely the mew or intention of the Romans. 4 Darinnen, therein, refers not to D e|u t s c h 1 a n d, but to C a r d i n a 1 e. " "What the Romans seek therein (in the appoint- ment of cardinals), the sottish Germans must not understand." 8 Die trunknen Deutsche n. Here used in the sense of the Italians, as a term of reproach, and we are sorry to add that the reproach was but too well merited. Hence the Italians despised the Germans as a sottish people. Luther often alludes to this sottishness and stupidity, and calls on his countrymen to wipe off the reproach. 6 P f e n n i g, often in old German and Upper German P f e n- n i n g formerly meant money, coin in general, and hence had vari- ous adjectives prefixed to it, which have at length come to be used 106 SELECTIONS FROM LtfTflER. mefyr babem er 2(nttd)riff mug bie (grfjcifee ber @rbe fye* ben/ nne eg t)erfunbia,et iff* (3 gebet bafyer, 2 man fd)du* met oben ab 3 fcon ben SBtetfynmern, $(6ffent nnb ?efyen ; unb wetf pe nod) ntd)t 2We3 bitrfen gar t>erfd)tt>enben, tt>te fte ben 38Mfd)en getfyan fyaben, frraucfyen fie bteroett 4 folxfye fyetftge 23ef)enbtgfeit, bag (Te $efyn ober $tt>an gitfammcn fcppetn, unb t?on einer jeglkfyen ein (Stnrf retgen, bag borf) etne (5nmma baran ^3robffei ^u 308itr$bnrg giebt tanfenb nfben, bte berg and) etwa^, 2D?atn$, ^rier unb ber mel)r ; 5 fo mcd)te alone as nouns ; thus gulden Pfennig, a gold Pfennig or Gul- den ; gross Pfennig, a large Pfennig or Groschen ; H a 1 1 e r, or Heller P f e n n i g, a Pfennig made at H a 1 1 in Suabia, or a Heller (or Halle r); Kreuzer Pfennig, a Pfennig with the stamp of the cross upon it (originally), or a Kreuzer equal now to four Pfennigs. A P f e n n i g is about 1-4 of a cent, and a Heller about 1-8 of a cent. 1 Die Schatze der Erde heben. He ben, to elevate, forms with various words peculiar idioms, most of which spring from the signification to take vp, to take away ; as, e i n e n S c h a t z h e- b e n, to dig up and carry away a treasure ;ein Kind aus der Taufe heben, to be godfather or godmother at baptism ; e i n e n aus dem Sattel heben, to supplant one ; G e 1 d S t e u e r n heben, to raise or receive money taxes ;eine Krankhei t e i n Hinderniss einen Zweifel heben, to remove a disease an obstacle a doubt ; einen Streit heben, fo terminate a quarrel. 2 Es gehet daher, hence it comes that. D a h e r often ex- presses the ground or cause from which anything proceeds or results. Daher kornmt es, dass is the common phrase, for, hence it comes that. 3 Man schaumet oben ab, "they skim off the cream." Abschaumen, means to take off the scum, or skim off the cream. 4 Brauchen sie dieweil, "meanwhile they exercise such holy skill that they unite ten or twenty benefices together [for one cardinal], and seize on an annual amount from each, so that a [good round] sum is raised [without exciting alarm]. 6 Und der mehr, and many others, literally, and of these more, ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 107 man ein taufenb ufben ober ^efyn 1 $nfanimen(>nn<}en, ba* nut cm (Sarbtnal jTcfy etnem reiofyen $ onige g(ctcf) balte $u SEBenn tt>ir nun ba$ gewonnen, 2 fo rcotfen tt>tr bretfng obcr tner^ig (Sarbtndle 3 anf etnen acj ntacfyen, nnb etnem gebcn ben 9D?it net) berg 4 311 23amberg, itnb ba 23i$tl)nnt $u SOBiirgbwrg baju, baran gefyangt 5 etlirfje retdje spfarreten, bt^ d e r being a demonstrative pronoun in the genitive plural, governed by m e h r. " The provostship of Wurceburg will furnish (furnishes) a thousand guldens ; that at Bamberg also something, (and so) May- ence, Triers and many others." 1 Zehn, i. e. zehn tausend. "One thousand guldens or ten," is a very peculiar idiom, found also in Dutch, for " about ten thousands guldens." D a m i t, with which sum. 8 Wenn wir nun das gewonnen (haben). So Lu- ther represents the Romans as saying to themselves. 3 Dreissig oder vierzig Cardinal e. This number of cardinals for Germany will not appear so extravagant and void of verisimilitude, if we recollect that in Italy, which Luther holds up as a specimen of what is to be expected in Germany, there were fourteen cardinal deacons, and fifty cardinal presbyters, connected with the different churches in the city of Rome, and seven cardinal bishops from adjacent Italian cities. The number of cardinals was variable till Sixtus V. in 1586, fixed them at seventy, corresponding to the number of the elders among the Israelites. Luther undoubt- edly had in mind the recent instance of arbitrary power by which Leo X. created thirty-one new cardinals in a single day. Hurter's Innocenz III. vol 3, p. 156. 4 M U n c h b e r g. " In it (Bamberg) is the cathedral of St. Ste- phen and St. James, together with the grand and rich Benedictine clois- ter of Mttnclibergj and the nunnery of St. Theodore." Busching's Geography. 6 Gehangt, a participle used absolutely with Pfarreien. " And give to one (of the cardinals) MQnchburg in Bamberg, and the bishopric of Wurceburg besides, several rich parishes being at- tached to it, till churches and cities are desolate" (their revenues go- ing to cardinals) ; and then say, we are the vicars of Christ, the shepherds of Christ's flock ; the senseless, sottish Germans must bear it." These last words represent the feelings, not of the Ro- 108 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bag $irrf)en iwb tabte rcnjle ffnb, unb barnacfy faa,en, n?ir fmb @f)rtjtt Sicarien, unb irten bet cfyafe (Sfyriffi ; bie totfen rotten )entfcfyen mitffen eg rcoM (eiben, 3cf) ratfye aber, bag man ber (arbina(e meniger macfye, 1 ober lajfe (7e 2 ben ^abft Don feinem nte nafyrem Sfyrer tt>dre i'tbrig genng an $tt>o(f, 3 Mb rin 3eber tyatte 4 be^ tanfenb ntben eingnfommen* 5Bte fommcn wiv en ba^n, bag n>ir folrf)e ^anberef, (Erf)n)tnberei 5 nn# frer liter, tton bent ^3ab|t leiben mitflen ? at ba^ $o# granfretrf) (Tcf)^ ermebret, 6 rcarnm (affen mtr un^ alfo Barren nnb dffen ? 7 $ n>dre 5^tle^ er^ tragtic^er, roenn ffe ba^ nt attetn nnS alfo abjlbblen ; bie $trrf)en t)ertt)it|!en ffe bamit, nnb beranben bie Srf)afe (5hrifli i^rer frommen irten, unb legen ben ienfi nnb SOBort otte^ nieber* Unb n>enn fcf)on fcin (5arbinal ware, mans, whom Luther had just introduced as speaking, but of Luther himself. 1 Der Cardinale weniger machen, make fewer cardi- nals. W e n i ge r, as an adverb of quantity, governs the genitive, der Cardinale. 8 S i e, is governed by n a h r e n, and den Papst by lass e- 3 Ihrer ware ttbrig genug an zwolf, " quite enough of them would be left with about twelve," i. e. about twelve of them would be amply sufficient. U e b r i g is used in the sense of u b e r- f 1 u s s i g when it qualifies genug, plenty enough. A n, when it relates to number, is indefinite and signifies about. 4 Und ein jeder hatte, etc., " and each one might have a thousand guldens to come in yearly," i. e. annual income. 5 Schinderei is a coarse word which would not now be used. It is connected to Rauberei by und understood. 6 S i c h's e r w e h r e t, the use of the accusative (e s in sic h's) with this verb is provincial. Sich erwehren is a reflective verb governing the genitive of the object. " If the kingdom of France has kept it off," etc. 7 Narren und affen means, to be treated as fools and apes. " All this would be more tolerable, if they plundered only property thus ; [but] they," etc. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 109 bte $trof)e nntrbe bemtocf) md)t Dcrfinfcn ; fo tbim |Te iDitdjttf, 1 ba3 $ur (Sbrtftcnbeit btenct, mtr @e(b unb aber* fadjen urn bte S3tetbihner unb ^rdtaturcu treibcn fie ; 2 bag and) roebl etn jegltdjcr SHduber tbun faint. 1 So thun sie nichts, "hut now they do nothing;" a peculiar use of the word s o. It may be regarded here as nearly equivalent to j e t z t. 2 Nur Geld und Hadersachen treiben sie," they only seek to get money and to excite litigation respecting benefices and fiefs." Treiben, in such connections, simply means to fol- low or practice. See p. 29, Note 1. All that Luther has here af- firmed might be proved by the testimony of Catholic writers, if this were the place for such demonstrations. To prevent the suspi- cion that the Reformer misrepresents the case (which would be very si'.ly in an address to those who certainly could not be misled by him) we will give a few brief specimens of the language held by the Cath- olics themselves on the subject. In 1359, the chancellor of the Pal- atinate said in a diet, " The Romans have always regarded Germany as their gold mine ; and what does the pope give in return but letters, bulls and words ?" Clemangis, in the same century, said, " Scarce- ly can a bishop be found, who, though he could give a demonstra- tion of his right clearer than the sun, has been able to obtain his ben- efice without a lawsuit." An account of the city of Salzburg, pub- lished in 1784, states that, " in 1388, the pope gave the archbishop permission to levy taxes on all the benefices of his province for re- building his cathedral and for redeeming his pawned palace and es- tates, provided half the sum collected should go to the apostolic treasu- ry." Clemangis says again, " Churches that were formerly rich and affluent bore for a long time the rapacity of Rome, but now that they are exhausted they cannot bear it longer." In 1367, says Wes- senberg, " single dignitaries of the church were found, who by spe- cial permission of the pope held more than twenty benefices." Ber- nard said, " A whole year passes away, in which those who have the care of souls, do not utter a word of religious instruction." Gerson said in the Council of Pisa, " Scarcely a benefice below the high pre- lacies is conferred, but that the pope confers it on one, a legate on another, and the ordinary on a third." He insisted on " the residence of the higher clergy, and the suppression of the commendams and of all the system of plunder practised by the Apostolic See." At the Council of Constance John Zachariah said, " that Socrates, who 10 110 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 3um brttten, menn man be$ *pabfh?$ of ] lieg ba$ bnn* berte beit bteiben, ttnb tbat ab neim nnb nenn^ia, bcife, er mare bennorf) grog a,enua,, 2Jntmort 311 geben in be GKan* 9inn aber t(l ein fefcbe^ ettwrm nnb e* in bem 5Kom, nnb attest (Id) pabfHfd) ri'tbmet, 3 bag gn 2?abt)fonien nid)t ein fofcfyeS $3efen gcmefen ifh (e> fmb ntefyr benn 3000 ^ab)T:?(d)reiber attein ; roer mitt bie an^ bern 5lmflcnfe ^d bfcn, ba ber Sfemter fo i)ie( (Tnb, 4 bag man fie faitm gd blen fann, weldje atte anf bie tifte nnb ?et)ne beutfct)e^ ?anbe^ marten, 5 mie ein 5Go(f anf bie (gofyafe* laughed when he saw great robbers hanging little thieves, would laugh still more, if he were here to see great thieves suspending the little ones from office." 1 Des Fapstes Hof 1 less, etc. H of is perhaps in the accu- sative, and das hunderteTheil, in apposition with it ; unless, Hof stands for H o f e s, for the sake of euphony. " Were one to let the pope's court remain the hundreth part [of it] and to do away ninety-nine parts, that (er, referring to Hof) would be large enough still to give responses (decisions) in matters of faith." 2 GewQrm und Geschwflrm, collectives from W urm and Schwarm, " such a nest of reptiles and such a swarming hive." For the formation of collectives from their primitives, see Gram. p. 73. 1. Jn the word Geschwurm, the letter 11 is employed in- stead of a for the sake of the alliteration. Indeed, there is no ne- cessity for forming a collective from Schwarm, as it is already a collective ; and this may be the reason why Luther elsewhere says GewOrm und Schwilrm, preserving the alliteration, but drop- ping the collective prefix ge. As the Grammars contain the rules for forming collectives, it is not to be expected that these forms should all be found in the lexicons. 3 Und A 1 1 e s s i c h p U p s 1 1 i c h r tl h in e t is to be regarded as parenthetical, and dass to be connected with soldi in the preced- ing clause. In referring indefinitely either to persons or things be- fore mentioned, the German employs the neuter singular. Thus A 1- les is to be translated as though it were alle, alt men, every body. S i c h r (1 h m e n, call themselves or boast of being. See p. 103, Note 2. 4 Da der Aemter so viel sind, " since there are so many offices." See p. 13, Note 3. 5 For the force of the word w a r t e n, see p. 39, Note 2. Instead ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. Ill 3d) adite, bag eutfd)faub jefct wett mebr nad) Dfam cu'ebt bent spa&jl, bcnu tun- Setten ben tfaifern. 3a eS meinen (r(td)e, bag jdbrftd) mebr bemt 300,000 (Mben 1 anS nttfd)(anb nad) Mom fommcn, fauter t>cra,eben3 nnb nm* fontf, bafnr 2 roir ntdjttf bcnn pott nnb gdjmarf) erfongen* Unb mtr Dcnintnbcrn mttf nod), bag gitrflen, ECbel, (Btabte, tifte, ?anb nnb ?eutc arm wcrbcn ; unr fottteu im$ er# wuubern, bag tvtr nod) git cficu baben. 3 ofdeutsches Landes, modern usage would admit, but per- haps not require deutschen Landes. That is, in the genitive singular of the masculine and neuter genders, the adjective termina- tion en is now much used instead of es. See Gram. p. 116. med. 1 Gulden, standing alone, without the word Gold (as Gold- gulden) generally means a silver coin, or the common gulden, worth from about two-thirds to three-fourths of a Thaler, according to the places where they were coined. A Gold-gulden was val- ued at about 2$ Thaler. 2 D a f r, for which. As da is often used by the old writers for wo, so is da f U r, for w o f U r. Present usage, however, does not allow such a license. They ought never to be employed in refer- ring to persons, and not commonly, to things of an individual or defi- nite character. So also we must say, Es war mein Vater mit w e 1 c h e m (not womit) ich ging. Thue nichts, womit (not mit welchem) Du Dir schaden konntes t. The pas- sage in the text is highly tautological " purely thrown away, and for nothing, for which we receive nothing but ridicule and reproach." We have endeavored to indicate in the translation, though at the sac- rifice of good English, the etymological difference between the words vergebens, and urnsonst. 3 Dasswir noch zu essen haben, "that we still have [anything] to eat." The idioms of the English and of the German, in this use of hate and haben with the infinitive, are very differ- ent. In English, the word have with a mere infinitive, expresses ne- cessity like must. But if an accusative intervene, as the v/ord any- thing in the example above, the verb to have, has, for the most part, its ordinary signification. In German, the rule is reversed in regard to the former, while, in regard to the latter, it is much as in English. Ich habe zu essen, means, " I have something to eat;" and Ich babe etwas zu essen, means, " I have a little of something to 112 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tett)etf ttnr benn fyier in bag recfyte (Spief 1 fomtnen, tt>of* len rnir em n>enig a fltlf batten, nnb nng fefyen fafien, 3 me bie entfd)en ntd)t fo gan$ grebe barren fmb, bag bte romifrfjen ^rafttfen 4 gar ntd)t nnffen nod) 3d) ffage fyier ntd)t, bag $n D?om otteg @ebot unb ftdjeg SRerfjt t>erad)tet i(l ; 5 benn fc roobl ftehet eg jefct md)t in ber ^hrijlenhett, fcnbertid) gn 9?om, bag n?tr t)on fokfyen I)ohen Dtngen ftagen mod)ten* 3d) ffage and) ntd)t, bag bag naturlidje cber tt)elt(id)e 9?ed)t nnb SSernnnft ntd)t^ gift ; e^ liegt nod) 2fffe$ tiefer im rnnbe. 3d) ffage, bag jTe thr etgen erbtd)teteg getjlftd)eg fted)t ntd)t ^aften, bag bod) an ifym fefbfl eine fantere t)rannet, ei^erei nnb geit# eat}" but, Ich habe etwas zu thun, means, "I must do something." 1 Spiel is often used figuratively for any business, action or af- fair of hazard. " Since we here come into the very action," i. e. have come to the main point. R e c h t, proper, real,. 2 W e n i g does not qualify still ("a little still") but e i n w e- n i g, here means, a little while. 3 Uns sehen lassen, cause ourselves to see, i. e. take occa- sion to see. 4 Praktiken. Praktik, from the modern Latin word, practica, means, in the singular, practice ; but in the plural (P r a k t i k e n), it means low tricks, or mean arts. Most of the smaller lexicons in use among us, are inaccurate on this word. 5 Gottes Gebot und christliches Recht verachtet i s t. A verb in the singlar with two connected nominatives, explain- ed p. 93, Note 4. So a few lines below Recht undVernunft gilt, and p. 110, line 2, istein solchGewOrm und Ge- s c h w (1 r in. See also p. 46, line 3. " I do not here complain that at Rome, the command of God and the Christian law is contemned, for things are not in so favorable a state in Christendom, especially at Rome, that we may complain in respect to things so elevated. Nor do I complain that natural or civil law and reason are of no ac- count ; everything is depressed to still lower depths (Rome is sunk- en below that too). 1 complain that they do not even observe their own pretended canonical law, which, however, is in itself, pure tyr- anny, avarice and luxury, rather than law" (right). ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 113 (tofce 9>raef)t tjf, mcbr beuu cin 9?erf)t a$ rcotten nrir feben* (3 babcn or Sctten 1 beutfcfye $aifer itnb prftett tier* twtltflct bent ^pabfte btc Slmwtcn auf atte ?eben beutfcfjer fatten em$uncbmcn,ba3 tftbtc fcalfte be$ 3tnfe3 be3 erjlett Sabred, auf cinem jcflftcbcn cben, te SSerttnfligung aber ijlatfo.qcfrf) ben, bag ber *pabft burd) fo(rf) cjrogeS @efb fottte fammcdt etnen (5d)ais, ^u flrcitcn triber bie ^tiirfen unb Un.qfautnqen, bte (ibriftcnbeit ^it fd)U^en, auf bag bent ntd)t ^u fefywer nnirbe, attetn ^u ftretten, fonbern bfe (ierfrf)aft aucf) etroad ba^u tl)d te. (So(d)er guten einfa fttgen 2 1 Vor Zeiten. Vordem, vor d i e se ra and v o r m al s, all agree in expressing indefinitely time prior to the present, without intimating whether it is near or remote. Vor Zeiten refers to a former period that is somewhat remote ; and vor Alters to one very remote, anciently. " In a former age, German emperors and princes allowed the pope to receive annats from all the fiefs [i. e. the larger benefices] of the German nation, that is, half the income of the first year from each fief [after passing into new hands]. But this permission (the permission so) was granted, that the pope might, by so ample a contribution, raise a fund for carrying on war against the Turks and infidels [and] defend Christendom, in order that it might not be too burdensome to the nobility to carry on the war alone, but that the priesthood might come to their aid." This last cir- cumstance requires that the word, L e h e n,fief, as so often elsewhere, should be restricted to ecclesiastical fiefs. Furthermore, the word A n n a te n relates only to ecclesiastical estates. The annats were ordinarily the entire income of a benefice. In this instance there was a special concordat between the pope and the Empire, restricting the contribution to half the income, if Luther's statement is correct. But we find no such concordat ; and as the annats varied according to the arbitrary rates of the pope and sometimes fell below the in- come of the year, Luther probably put them at the very lowest esti- mate, not aiming at strict accuracy in a matter so common and yet so variable. 2 E i n f a 1 1 i g e n A n d a c h t. An appeal to the pride of the German nobility. Their very piety and simplicity had been abused by the intriguing court of Rome. 10* 114 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 2frtbarf)t ber beutfcfyen Nation fyaben bte spabfte ba^u ge* braucfjt, bag jTe bidder mebr benn fyuubert %al)ve l fotrf) elb etngenommen, unb nun eaten fd)it(btgen unb serpflicfyteten 3ut3 nnb 9{uffa barauS gemacfyt, imb mcfyt attetn ntrf)t gefammeft, 2 fonbern baranf cjefftftet tnet (Stdnbe unb $em* ter 311 ^om, bte bamtt jd fyrftrfv ate au3 etnem (5rb$tng, $u fcefofbem SOBenn man nun nnber bte ^itrfen $u flretten tjorgtebt, fo fenben jTe 3 berau^ S5otfd)aft, elb ju fammeln, fyaben t)te^ ntaf and) 5lb(ag herauS gefct)tcft, eben mtt berfelben garbe 1 MehrdennhundertJahre. "In the year 1318, pope John XXII. published a constitution in which he reserved for himself one year's income of all the non-elective benefices, (of all those who are inferior to the bishops) pro necessitalibus ecdesiae Romanae." Planck. Long before that, each bishop, consecrated at Rome, paid for the ceremony his first year's income. At the time of the Coun- cil of Constance in 1417, these contributions had become so estab- lished by usage as to be claimed as regular taxes, which Planck af- firms had become necessary " to support the thousands of officials, reporters, assistants, commissaries, secretaries and copyists of the Roman court." The abuse continued, notwithstanding all the efforts of the councils of Constance and of Basle to the contrary. Planck's Gesellschaffcs-Verfassung, V. 572 793. 2 Nicht allein nichts gesammelt, etc., " not only have collected no fund [for the war against the Turks] but have used the money to found departments and offices at Rome, which are to be paid with it annually, as if from a perpetual tax." H a b e n is to be supplied after g e s t i f t e t and referred to the preceding participles, eingenommen, gemacht and gesammelt; and s i n d is to be supplied after zu besolden. Such omissions of the aux- iliary verb are mostly limited to subordinate clauses, and are rarely to be found in the principal sentence or clause. 3 So senden sie, etc. " They despatch messengers to col- lect money, and have often sent out indulgences, with just the same pretext of carrying on (to carry on) war against the Turks." S c h i c k e n, means merely to send away persons or things. Sen- den means to send persons for accomplishing some special object, and is therefore a word of more elevated character, and implies a more honorable office in the person sent. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 115 rotbcr tie itrfctt aU jtrcttcn, meinenb, bte totten &cittfof)ett fotten itncnMtd) tcbte Stccfnarren bteibcn, 1 nur immer e(b flcbcit, ibrcm unautffprerftfichen @ei$ gemtg tbim, ob roir flfetd) offentlid) febcn, baft webcr 3fortaten nod) 2(b(ap, elb, nod) afleS 5lnbere, cm ,v>ettcr itnberbtc Xiirfen, fonbent alk jumal in ben S-acf, bcm bcr 23eben ait$ ift, fomntt ; fttgett, , fcfjcn unb marfjcn mit un^ S3unbe, bet fie nid)t eirt brctt ,^u batten $ebenfen ; ba^ ntu barnad) ber ^eir^ (Sbrijli nnb (2t. ^etrt 5(tte^ t qetban baben. Stem, barnad) i(l a,etbcttt tt>orben ba^ 3abr 2 ^wtfdjen bent 1 Unendlich todte Stocknarrenbleiben, " forever remain senseless (lifeless), arrant fools, and always (nur gives in- tensity to i m m e r) give money, and satisfy their inexpressible ava- rice, although we clearly see, that neither annats, nor indulgence- money, nor collections [taken up by the B o t s c h a f t], nor any- thing else, a farthing of it, goes against the Turks, but it goes all of it together into that sack which has no bottom ; [they] lie, deceive, make laws and treaties, not a hair of which do they intend to observe. All that, consequently, the sacred name of Christ and St. Peter must have done." Stock gives intensity to the word to which it is pre- fixed, like our word stone, in stone-blind, etc. O e f f e n 1 1 i c h is used in its original signification, openly, before the eyes of all. The omis- sion of s i e before 1 (1 g e n is abrupt, and would not now be con- sidered as allowable. For an explanation of this use of s e t z e n see p. 11, Note 5 and p. 94, Note 7. D e r is in the genitive plural, for which d e r e r is now used, and is governed byHaar breit. See p. 47, Note 5. A lies near the end, agrees with das at the be- ginning of the clause. 2 Darnach ist getheilt worden das Jahr, etc. In the Vienna Concordat of 1448, it was agreed that besides all those benefices, which were reserved for the disposal of the pope, to be conferred according to his pleasure, he should have one half of the remainder, the other half to belong to the ordinary authorities. Those which became vacant in the even months of the year, namely, Janu- ary, March, etc., were to fall to the latter ; and those which became vacant in the odd months, February, April, etc., to fall to the pope. These were called the P ap s t-M o n ate, or menses -pa-pales. The pope sold these places to the highest bidder at public auction ! Eich- horn's Staats-und Rechtsgeschichte, Vol. III. p. 543. 116 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tyabft unb regterenben 53tfcf)efcn unb <2ttften, ba bet* jerf)3 Donate fyat im 3<*br, etnen um ben anbern, 1 $ Iett)cn bte el}en, bte in fetnem 9D?onat tterfatten, bamtt fafl atfe eben butein narf) 9?om rcerben ge^ogen, fonberlicfy bte atterbeflen ^fritnben unb Xngmtaten, Unb rcekfye 2 etnmal fo nad) D^om fatten, bte fcmmen bant ad) ntmmer VDteber l)e# ran3 r ob jTe btnfort nimmer in be$ ^)abjl:^ 5!}2onat Derfatten, bamtt ben (Sttften Kiel ju fnr$ gefd)tet)t, 3 nnb ift etne recfyte DfJanberet, 4 bie tl)r Dorgenommen bat, ntcfytg l)eran^ ^n laf fen, a^ babnrrf) nacfy gefommen tft, n>teber berau^reige. gitrflen unb 5lbe( fotten barauf fei)n, 5 bag ba^ ge# 1 Einen umden andern, " every other, or second one." D a m i t, whereby. 2 Und welch e, etc. " And such as once fall to Rome, these never come back (out) again, though they never afterwards become vacant in the pope's months." 3 Damit den Stiften viel zu kurz geschieht, "by which these institutions come short of their rights," i. e. are deprived of their rights. Literally " it comes far too short to the institutions, or religious establishments." The word kurz is often used in a peculiar way ; as, k u r z h a 1 1 e n, " to hold one by a short rope," or to allow him little freedom. Den kdrzeren ziehen, "to draw the shorter lot," or to be excelled or overcome. Z u kurz k o m m e n, "to come short of what is due," or to suffer injury or loss. Einen zu kurz geschehen, "to turn out to the in- jury of one." * 4 Und [es] ist eine rechteRauberei, etc., " and it is downright robbery, which has proposed to itself to let nothing escape. Therefore it has nearly reached its acme, and it is high time," etc. 1 h r is here used instead of s i c h, the personal pronoun feminine in the dative for the reflective pronoun. H e r a u s, out of its hands. U n d [e s] ist h o h e z e i t. 5 Darauf seyn, "be [intent] upon this," a form of expression not now in common use, and similar to darauf sehen, except that it is much stronger. U n d die [die]," and those who abuse their privilege, be deprived of it." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 117 ffobfnc &nt vflerbe rotcbcr gcgebeu, tie iebe fleftrafr, unb bie iluTo Ur(aub impbrandKit, Ur(anb3 beraubt werben. &alt nub gilt etf, fo 1 bcr 9>abfl be$ anbern aa,e3 fciner (r* nxibhuu] DJcgcl unb efefce madjtin fciner $au$(ei, 2 baburd) unfrc tifte 3 unb spfritnben geraubt voerben, ba er fein 9?ed)t bagu bat ; fo fell ed welmeljr (jelten, fo 4 ber $aifer @arl beg anbern a t a,e$ fciner Jtromutg 9Jege( unb @efee gci be, burd) fein ?el>en uub ^friinbe mel)r ua 1 Halt und gilt es, so, etc. " If it holds [good] and pass- es, that the pope on the second day after his election," etc. Halt is here explained by g i 1 1, as a synonyme. Tages seiner Er- wahl ung. These words illustrate the wide use of the old geni- tive, for which prepositions with their cases are now more commonly used. Tages is a noun in the genitive used adverbially, which is very common with those woids which designate time and manner. " The second day of his election" is a very loose expression for " the second day after (n a c h) his election." 2 In seiner Kanzelei. The K a n z e 1 e i or Cancellaria is one of the four departments or bureaus of the Roman court. The others are the Rota Romano. , or court of appeal, the Dataria for the distribution of favors, particularly offices, and the Poenitentiaria for absolutions. The Cancettaria was both a court of judicature and a kind of office of registry, where all official documents were prepared. The rules which the pope gave to this bureau for adjusting disputed claims were called Kanzeleiregeln. As they were special and temporary (being limited to the lifetime of the pope) they were not a part of the canonical law, and therefore were not of any bind- ing authority, except with the pope's secretaries or registrators. Eichhorn 111. "510. A good historical view of the subject will be found in Planck, V. 587, Note 14. 3 Dadurch unsre Stifle, etc., "whereby our religious foundations and benefices are plundered, as he has no right to do so (to it)," etc. This imposition was extensively practised by the popes after the time of John XXII. 4 So soil es vielmehr gel ten, so, " so should it much rather pass (be valid) that the Kmperor Charles V," etc. If the pope's authority be pleaded, on the one hand, for the abuse, let the empe- ror's be brought forward to confront it. 118 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. laffen 1 fommett bnrrf) bed qMbfte ^onat, unb waS bittern fommen ift, ttneber fret roerbe, unb tton bem romtfrfien ber erfofet, ba$u er Diecfyt l)at Don 3lmt$ roegen fetned l)at ber romtfcfye et'j* unb D?aubfhtb( 2 nkfyt tnogeu bte 3ett erwarten, bag bttrrf) ^}abjMD2onate atte ?eben bin*' em fa men, etned nad) bem anbertt, fonbent etlet narf) fetnem unfdtttgcn s JBanjl, bag er jTe ade aitf ^ ^itrjejle bittern retge, unb itber bte Hnnaten unb 5Bonate etnen fo(rf)en gunb erbarf)t r 3 bag bie ?eben unb ^friinbe nod) bretertei ^Betfe $u bcl)aftet werben : 1 Lassen, for zu lassen, (Gesetze, kein Lehen nach Rom kommen zu lassen) is in the infinitive and de- pendent on Gesetze. The form of the imperative is, by a change in the construction (anacoluthon), used in the second member (w e r- d e) which is connected to lassen by u n d, " gave rules and laws in all Germany to let no fief or benefice go any longer to Rome, on account of the pope's month, and let, what s Already gone thither, become free again, and be recovered from the Roman plunderer. To this he (the emperor) is entitled by virtue of his sovereignty (sword)." 2 Nun hat der romische G e i z-u n d Raubstuhl, etc. " Now the seat of avarice and plunder at Rome could not wait for the time that all the fiefs might come in one after another, through the pope's months, but, in compliance with his insatiable appetite (belly), he hurries on that he may in the shortest time bring them within his clutches," etc. Hat mogen for hat gemocht, has been able. See p. 24, Note 1, and Gram. p. 260, med. Er war- ten means, to tcait to the end, or till the time arrives % W a r t e n is to wait simply. Nach must not be translated as if it were followed by an accusative, which would give a ludicrous meaning here. 3 inen sole hen Fund e r d a c h t [h a t], " has invented such a device." Are the charges, made in this paragraph, false or malignant ? Let us hear the judgment of one of the most candid of historians. " In every misapplication which the popes now (13th, century) made of their power, money was the object. Every new operation which they performed was one of extortion, and every new act of oppression, was, on their part, a financial speculation. These oppressions were so intolerable, and the evils which grew out of ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 119 3um erilen, fo, bcr fo cine ^fritnbe bat, $n 9?om obcr aitf bcm SISe.qe jttrbt, 1 biefclbe wn cttng etgen bfetben beg ro* mifdicn (rauberifd)en) (gmbld, fottt' id) faa.cn, 2 nnb tt>oUen bemted) md)t dauber betpcn ; fo foldje Dtanberet 9itemanb je geboret nod) a,c(efcn bat. 3um Sfnbern, fo, bcr em ?eben bat 3 ober nberfontmt, ber bc3 ^abftetf obcr (Sarbtnctte efinbe ift, obcr, fo er $nfcor em ?ebcn bat, nnb barnad) 9)abfte obcr ^arbtna^ cfTnbe JDtrb. 9tnn wcr mag bc^ ^>ab^ nnb bcr @arbina(c ^ab(cn, 4 fo bcr *pabfi, wcnn cr nnr fpa^tcrcn ret t, bet them so crying, that no one could excuse them on the ground of the necessities of the court of Avignon." Planck, V. 574. 1 Z u Rom oder auf dem Wege stirbt. "In 1266, Clement IV. issued a decree in which he reserved for the chair of St Peter provisionem omnium beneficiorum apud Curiam vacantium, i. e. the right of presentation to all those places whose incumbents died at the court of Rome, or within two days' journey of it. This reservation was made at a time when multitudes were resorting to Rome on pilgrimages, and most frequently fell upon the richest bene- fices, for the holders of these most frequently visited Rome." Planck, V. 580. Eichhorn, II. 508. 'Romischen (rftuberischen) Stuhls, sollt' ich s a g e n. A play upon the word, " the r 6 m i s c h e n (or as I should say, rauberischen) Stuhl s." The genitive Stuhls is here governed by e i g e n, " always continue to be the pope's own (pe- culiar to the pope)." See p. 3, Note 5. U n d [s i e] w o 1 1 e n, etc., " and still they refuse to be called robbers, though no one ever heard or read of such robbers." 3 So der, einen Lehen hat, etc. [" It also belongs to the pope] if he has a fief, who belongs to the retinue of the pope or of his cardinals, or if he before held (holds) a fief, and afterwards becomes attached to the court of the pope or of his cardinals." In this paragraph, the first der is a demonstrative and the second a rel- ative pronoun. At the beginning of the preceding paragraph, the demonstrative which is nominative to stirbt, is omitted. 4 G e s i n d e z a h 1 e n. In the bull of Benedict XII. to which Luther here alludes, the pope himself kindly furnished a list of those who are to be regarded as Gesinde. He names the officiales, camerarios, vicecancellarios, notaries, auditores literaruin contradicta- 120 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ober tner taufenb 9D?anfrenter nm ftof) fyat, trc^ 1 atfen fern nnb ^onigetu )enn @l)rtfhtg itnb (t speter gtengen 311 $ng, auf bag ibre (5tattfya(ter beftomebr 311 pracfytcn intb gn prangen 2 fatten* Sftim fyat bet @et$ roeiter ftd) erfti't* get, 3 nnb fefyajfet, bag and) brangen 33iele ben Stamen fyaben, 4 pabjHtcfyen ejmbeS, tt>te $n 9tom, bag nnr in alien Drten bag bloge fcha(ft)afttge 5 IB6rt(etn r ^abpte efinbe, aKe ?e^ ^en an ben romtfdjen (tnb( bringen unb ett)ig(td) heften fott* @mb ba 5 ntd)t ^erbrteglic^e, tenflifrf)e giinbe ? Se* rum, auditores causarurn palatii apostolici, correctores et scriptores literarum apostolicarum, poenitentiarios, abbreviatores, commensales, capeilanos, et quoscunque alios legates, riuntios, rectores in terris ec- clesiae Romanae, sive thesaurios et collectores hactenus missos et in posterum mittendos ! Planck, V . 586 adds : "The number of the courtiers was countless, and most of them had several benefices apiece ; but to increase the number, the title of officiates and curial.es was conferred upon hundreds, who had no real connection with the court." 1 Trotz, generally signifies in spite of,notioithstanding. But it also means, assuming an equality icith, or even superiority over, and so here. Bei drei-oder vier tausend, a little above, means, " not far from three or four thousand." B e i used with ref- erence to numbers, is indefinite, and is nearly the same as a n, or g e g e n in the same connections. 2 Auf dass ihre Statthalter destomehr zu prachten und zu prangen, "in order that their vicars might, so much the more, have the means of making, or be able to make, a parade and show." The irony is skilfully applied. 3 ErklUget. The word e r k 1 Q g e n, which is not found in the dictionaries, must not be confounded with the frequentative erklO- ge 1 n, which means to invent by subtlety, and to refine in speculation. Er, prefixed to an adjective with the addition of the verbal termina- tion en, forms a derivative verb which means to come into that state expressed by the adjective. Thus k 1 u g, wise ; e r k 1 u g e n, to be- come wise, which by a change of the vowel becomes a causative verb, erklUgen, to make wise. S i c h e r k 1 it g e n, to render one's self wise, i. e. to become wise. See Gram. p. 249. 4. for the first change, and p. 49. 1. for the second. 4 Den Name n haben. See p. 119, Note 4, end. 5 Das, when used indefinitely, is indeclinable. See Gram. p. 303. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 121 ben roir jit, 1 f foil gRatnj, SHagbeburjj, alberflabt, gar fctn nacf) 9?om fommeu, unb batf @arbtna(at tl)eucr gemta, bc$ab(t werbctt. aruarf) wotteu ttnv atfc beutfrfje SMfrfjofe, @arbtna(e madden, bag nicfytS braugeu bteibc. Sum brittcn/ 2 n?o urn ciu d)en ein &abcr jTof) an.qefangcn, wefofyeg 3 id) acfyte, faft btc gememfte unb gefie @trafc 4 tfl, bte ^friutbe uad) 5Kom $u bringen* 1 Sehen wir zu, etc. " Let us see, or behold ! [the Romans are- supposed to say] ; then Mayence, Magdeburg, and Halberstadt shall be a good hall for Rome [the funds of these large sees being appro- priated to make a cardinal] and the cardinalate shall be paid for dearly enough. After that, we will make all the German bishops cardi- nals, so that nothing shall be left out of our hands." 8 Zum dritten, etc. " Thirdly [this takes place] if a contro- versy respecting an ecclesiastical fief has originated at Rome (which r I think, is well nigh the most common as well as the greatest calam- ity), in order to bring the livings to Rome." The first sentences of these three paragraphs, beginning with, zum ersten, zum an- d e r n and zum dritten, all taken together, are in apposition with the words dreierlei Weise, at the close of the preceding para- graph, and are an explanation of that expression. This will be ren- dered obvious by the following arrangement. Dass die Lehen und PfrQnde nach dreierlei Weise zu Rom behaftet sind; zum ersten, so, der so eine Pfrunde hat, etc. j zum andern, so der ein Lehen hat, etc.; zum dritten, wo u m ein Lehen, etc. , " that fiefs and prebends are attached to Rome in three ways ; viz. 1. If he who has such a prebend dies at Rome, or on the way, it must always belong to the Roman see. 2. If he who possesses or obtains a fief, belongs to the retinue of the pope or of the cardinals, or if he had one before, and afterwards becomes at- tached to the retinue of the pope or of the cardinals, [that also becomes the property of the Roman see]. 3. [The same is true], if a litigation respecting a fief commences at Rome," etc. 3 Angefangen [hat], welches, etc. Welches, referring to the preceding clause as an antecedent, introduces a parenthetical remark. 4 Grosseste Strafe. We cannot give a better comment upon these words than an abstract from Planck, V. 651, on the subject. " So far did the unnatural extension of the judicial functions of Rome 11 122 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tt>o fyter 1 fern aber ift, ftnbet man un^afyfige 33uben $u D^om, tie aber an$ ber @rbe cjraben, 2 unb $>frimben an* greifett, n?o iTe nnr rootfen, ba manner frcmme ^)riefter fcine q)frnnbe mug fcerlteren, ober nut einer (gumme @e(be3 ben aber abfanfen, cine S^tfang fofcfyeg eben 3 mtt aber* red)t ober Unreefyt 4 fcerbaftet, mng and) be$ romtfcfyen enrig eigen feint. <53 mare ntcfyt SOBnnber, bag ott go, that all other courts of judicature in the church were almost an- nihilated. Cases were taken in the first instance from the inferior courts, without any regard to the nature of the trial, even when one of the parties protested against it. Sometimes they were taken from. the lowest courts during trial, no regard being had to the interven- ing court of the metropolitan. And finally, instead of the proper and legal way of appointing judges from Rome, who should attend to tri- als on the spot where they originated, the pope removed the trial to Rome, where, to say nothing of the bribes which were necessary to any degree of success, the expenses of travel and court-fees were enormously augmented." Hence the council of Basle found it ne- cessary to decree, that no litigation originating at a distance exceed- ing a four day's journey from Rome, should, in the first instance, be tried there, but in the appropriate courts where the parties reside ; that all appeals should ascend in regular gradation from the lowest court to the highest ; and that in appeals to the highesl court, the pope should not remove the trial to Rome, but appoint a judge to hold a court in the place where the parties reside. This Council gave a melancholy description of the evils resulting from the abuses corn- plained of, which is quoted by Eichhorn, III. 522, Note a. 1 Hier, in Germany. 2 Die Hader aus der Erde graben, " who dig quarrels out of the earth, (i. e. who hatch up law-suits) and lay their greedy hands on prebends wherever (wo n u r) they wish, in which (d a in the sense of w o) many a pious priest must either lose his living or with a large sum of money purchase a respite from lawsuits for a time." See the words of Clamangis, p. 109, Note 2. 3 Solches Lehen, with which the participle verhaftet agrees, is nominative to rn u s s. 4 Haderrecht oder Unrecht. The word Unrecht is a play upon the latter part of the compound Haderrecht; "a court of justice, or rather of injustice." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 123 ttom ummc( Sdjmefel nub fyoflifcW $ener regnete, urtb 9?om in ben 5lbanwb tterfcnfte, 1 rote er tter Settcn Reborn itnb erncrra that. $Ba$ fctt 2 em ^abft in ber Gbritfcn* kit, wenn man fcincr Otewalt nid)t anberg brandjt, benn $u fo(d)cr &anpt*23o$t)eit, nnb er bicfetben fd)itet nnb banb* fyabet ? > ebie gitrften HH& erren, roie tange rootft tfyr ener ?anb nnb ?ente fclcfjen rcigenben $B5(fcn offnen itnb fret (a (fen ? ^a nun 3 fefrf)e ^raftifen nid)t gerntg n)ar, itnb bent eij bie 3 c tt stt (itnge warb, atte 53i^tbitnter btn^nreigen, ^at mctn (ieber ei^ bod) fo Die! erfnnben, bag bie S5i^tt)itmer nttt 9iamen anf en, nnb ntit bem @5rnnb nnb S3oben ^it D^om jmb. Unb bag atfo fein SBifcfoef mag beftdttgct werben, er fanfe benn ntit grcger @ummc elbe^ ba3 ^aKinm, nnb erpflid)te (tc^ nut greu(id)en (^iben ^n einem eigenen ^ned)t bem ^)abjl X)aber fommt e^, bag fein S5ifd)of roiber ben 1 Regnete versenkte, imperfect subjunctive, " should rain, should sink." 2 Soil, is often, as here, used in the sense of he 1 fen nfltzen, " What is the utility of a pope, if men make no other use of his pow- er than for such arch-iniquity, and he (himself) defends and prac- tises it ?" 3 Da nun, etc. "Now as these tricks were not sufficient, and as time became too long to avarice for seizing all the bishoprics, the dear creature (my dear avarice) found out all this (so much) namely, that the bishoprics were nominally foreign, but in truth and reality (in ground and soil) were at Rome ! and that thus no bishop could be confirmed, unless he purchase with a great sum the pallium and ob- ligate himself with horrible oaths to (be) an own servant to the pope." Luther does not introduce these usages in a chronological, but in a rhetorical order. This last practice is older than that of annats. War, after a plural nominative, is a little irregular, unless a noun in the singular be understood as a predicate. Hinzureissen is dependent on lange. Grund und Boden, being capable of a double sense can be but imperfectly rendered into English. For the idiom, er kaufe denn, see Gram. pp. 315, 362. For the peculiar use of zu, see Gram. p. 338. 1. and note. 124 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. barf fjanbefn* a3 fyaben 1 bie Corner and) gefndjt mit bem <5ibe, nnb (Tnb alfo bte atferretcfyften SBtetfyitmer in rfnrtb imb SSerberben gefommem 9Waut$, l)6re id), giebt 20,000 ntben ; ba jmb mir je Corner, 2 ate mid) biwft 3 @te fyaben e3 n>of)[ ttor Beiten gefet im getftttdjen bag spattinm umfottflt $n geben, be3 9)abft3 ejTnbe gern, ipaber minbern, ben Stiffen nnb 55ifrf)6fen ibre fyett laffen, 5lber ba^ tt^oKte nirf)t e(b tragen ; 5 bantm ijl bag S5(att ninqefe^rt, 6 nnb i(l ben S3tfd)6fen nnb tiften atte @emaft genommen, 7 (Tfeen tt)ie bie Sitfevn, baben mcber *Das haben. Das seems to refer to the preceding sentence on- ly, to the obligation of the bishop never to oppose the pope. Also, thus, refers not to the same, but more particularly to purchasing the pallium at great cost, so that the richest sees were ruined and ren- dered bankrupt. 2 Das sind mirje Romer, "that is a genuine specimen of the Romans," or " that is the way the Romans manage." On the use of das, as nominative to sind, see Gram. p. 303. On m i r as an expletive, see Gram. p. 348. Je was often emplojed by Luther for j a, which is now a provincialism. 3 Mich dank t. See p. 22, Note 3. 4 Gesetzt im geistlichen Recht, etc. See p. 11 , Note 5 . " They (the Romans, or rather the church) have indeed decided in the canonical law to give the pallium without charge, to reduce the number of the pope's dependents, to diminish litigation (at Rome by transferring it to the bishops and) to leave," etc. If this refers, as it probably does, to the concordat between the pope and the Council of Constance, the statement is a little exaggerated. To the decisions of the Council of Basle, which went much farther than those of the Council of Constance, the pope never gave his assent. 5 Geld tragen, 'to bear, bring forth or yield money,' a figurative expression, for which eintragen is now used, as applied to money. 6 1st das Blatt umgekehrt, the leaf is turned over, i. e. the tables are changed. Blatt in such idioms means, the case, fortune , things. "To turn over a new leaf conveys a different idea. Das Blatt hat sich gewendet, fortune has changed. 7 Den Bischofen genome n, " taken from the bishops." See p. 52, Note 4. S i t z e n, i. e. the bishops. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITT. v;" :,3 ^ 3(mt, 9Wacf)t nocfj 903erfe, fonbern reajeren atfe 1 ina.e auptbubcn gn 9?om, ami) fcf)tcr beg $itjter$ imb SImt 2 in aften ^ircfyen ; atte ftaber rcerben nacf) 5Kom gen, tl)ut Sebcrmann bnrrf) 9>abft$ ercaft, road er mitt* 23t3f)er baben rotr Dcrftanben, rote (Te nut ben ^Pfrihtben battbc(n r btc Derfatten unb fo wcrben* 3 9ftitn crfa'ttt 4 bent jarten e^ ^t wentg foS, barnm bt cr feme SSerficfyttgfet't er^efgt ami) in ben ?ehen, bte nocf) befeflen ffnb bnrrf) tbrer SSerwefer, bag btefefben and) 5 log feijn mitflen, ob ffe fdhon | |Tnb r nnb ba^ manrf)erfei $Beife, 3nm erften tanert er, mo fette ^rdbenben fTnb ober 1 Regieren alle, etc., "the great ones (Hauptbuben) at Rome control all things." In modern style it would be Es regi- ren alle, etc. So a few lines above, und (es) sind also die allerreichesten Bisthttmer. * Des KOsters Amt, " even the sacristan's and sexton's of- fice." T h u t J e d e r m a n n, " every one [at Rome] by the aid, or through the power of the pope, does what he pleases." 3 Die verfallen und loswerden. PfrQnden, or Le- hen verfallen, when the occupant by any neglect or violation of his trust, loses his title to them; they werden los, when in any way they become vacant, e. g. by the death of the occupant. The latter expression is more generic than the former. 4 Nun erfallt, etc, " now too few (too little, zu we nig) be- come vacant for gentle avarice (personified)." E r f a 1 1 e n as an ac- tive verb, means to cut anf, $n nte bem @oabjntor, barum, t>ag er bed spabfte efatbe tft, ober ($Mb barum gtebt, cber fonft mtt eatem romtfofyen $rof)ttbienft tterbtenet fyat* ^a jnufl berm abge^en 2 frete ^rtt>af)(ung bed dapitete, ober beg, ber bte ^)friinben I)at ^u yerlei^en, wtb We$ nur 3um aitbent, ftetgt em 5Borttem ^ommenben, 3 b, i, : 1 Durch einen Alten. "He lies in wait where there are fat prebends or bishoprics, possessed by (bessessen durch, a rare use of durch) an old incumbent, or an invalid, or even one of a pretended incompelency. A man who belongs to the retinue of the pope, or who has given him money, or done him some other service, is appointed coadjutor (colleague) where he is not needed, but is ap- pointed merely for his own benefit" (zu gute dem Coadjutor, for good to the coadjutor, literally). For a similar use of z u gute, see Gram. p. 334. 8 Da muss denn abgehen, etc. " These then must vanish, a free election (of the bishop) by the chapter, or the right of him (d e s s for d e s s e n) who has the prebend to bestow (i. e. the pa- fc tron) ; .and everything (goes) towards Rome." 3 Heisst einWortlein, etc. " There is a little word called commendam." The canonical law often stood in the way of the most advantageous sale of benefices. A rich person, not ordained and therefore not competent to hold a benefice, would often offer for a place, which he particularly desired, much more than others would give. So sometimes one of the secular clergy would particularly de- sire one which could lawfully be held only by one of the regular clergy and vice versa. To make sure of such advantageous bargains, the places were sold under the title of commendams, respecting which the canonical law said nothing by way of prohibition. By resorting to such evasions the pope could gratify a prince who wished a place for one of his young sons, (he might be but eight years of age), or a canon who wished to enjoy four or five incompatible incomes. What it was unlawful for one to hold as an actual incumbent, he could hold as a protector under the title of a commendam. The duties of the ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 127 wenn bcr ^abft etnem @arbtna( ober fonft fetner (Jinem, 1 em reidjeg, fette^ Softer obcr $ird)e beftel)(t $n bebalten, cjletrf) ate rcemt id) btr bnnbert ntben ju bebaften tbcite. 2 >ieg bctjH 3 bag Softer nidtf (jeben nod) tterleiben, aud) nid)t fcer* fterett, nod) ottegbienj1: abtl)itn, fonbern attein $n befyaften tijim ; nid)t bag cr eg bcwabren ober batten foil, fonbern bie prfonen auettreibctt, 4 bie (fitter nnb 3^nfen einne^men, nb irgenb cinen Sfyoftaten, i)er[anfenen ?Q26nd) t)tnetnfe^en, bcr fitnf ober fed)^ ulben be^ 3afyr3 nimmt, nnb (c^t be^ age3 in ber ^trd)e, crf attft ben ^)i(gern S^tdjen nnb S5i(b^ lein, bag roeber tngcn nod) ?cfen bafclbfl me^r gefd)ief)t S5cnn wo bag bieg ^lofter ^erftoren nnb ottegbtenft ab# tbun, fo mi'tjHe man ben ^abjl nennen einen SSerflorer ber ^brtftcn^ett nnb Slbtfyatcr otte^bien^* Xsenn er treibet eg fitrwa^r mddjtig. 2)ag ware etne ^arte @prad)e jtt D?om ; barnm tnng man eg nennen ein @ommenben ober S3efef)rnng, bag ^tojier ju bebatten. liefer Softer fann ber ^)abf^ ier ober mebr 5 in einem Sa^rc $u dommenben station would, in such cases, be scandalously performed, if perform- ed at all, by a cheap vicar. Thus everything sacred was made to yield to avarice. Planck, V. 621. 1 Oder sonst seiner Einem, "or to some other one of his dependents," literally, "or otherwise to one of his," a construc- tion that has ceased to be very common. *Zu behalten thate. Than is here used in the sense of put, commit. " As if 1 should commit to you a hundred guldens." A preposition as, a u f or in generally follows instead of a dative when the word is used in this sense. See p. 20, Note 3. 3 Diess heisst, etc., " this is not called giving, etc. (although it is so)." 4 Personen austreiben, monks, if it be a cloister, the per- sons belonging to a chapter, if it be a cathedral institute. G t e r und Zinsen, the property and income appropriated to the sup- port of such persons. 8 Deiser Kloster vier oder mehr, " four or more of these cloisters can the pope make into commendams in one year, in which (d a)," etc. 128 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ntacfyen, ba eine mefyr benu 6000 (Mben ($tnfommen Ijat 2tffo mefyrcn 1 jTe $n D?om otteSbtenfi, unb erfyaften bte Softer ; ba$ (ernet ftcfy in bentfcfyen anben and)* 3um brttten, jmb etltcfye 2 ?ef)en, bte jte fyet$en Incompati- bilia, bte narf) Drbmmg getftttcfyen OfccfytS mcfyt ntocjen mtt emanber befyalten roerbem 2tt3 ba jmb $tt>et ^Pfarren, $tt)ei 33t3tf)itmer itnb bergfetrfjem ter brevet ftd) y ber fjetttge romtfrf)e @titl)[ unb et^ alfo ait^ bent getjlltdjen 9?erf)t, bag 3 er tfytn ^)fojfen marf)t, bte fyetgen unio et incorporatio, 1 Also mehren, etc. * This is the way (thus, also) they pro- mote religious worship, etc. at Rome." Das lernet sich, "one learns that, or that is learned in Germany also." This reflective form for the passive, with a neuter nominative, is peculiar and limit- ed chiefly to colloquial style. 2 (E s) sind etliche, etc., "there are some ecclesiastical fiefs which they call," etc. Als da sind, such as. Da sind, cannot easily be translated without disturbing the sense in English. 3 Also aus dem dass, " winds its way (d r e h e t sich) in this manner (also) out of the canonical law (viz.), it (that it) makes glosses to the law, which glosses are (called) unio et incorporatio, i. e. (that) it incorporates many incompatabilia into one body so that one shall be member with another and thus (all) be regarded as one pre- bend. Thus they are never more (no longer) incompatabilia, and the difficulty with the canonical law is overcome (and help is brought to the canonical law), so that it is no longer binding except (d e n n) with those only, who do not purchase those glosses (i. e. buy the places under those names) of the pope and of his datarium (a sort of office or court). Of this sort (d e r A r t) is the unio, i.e. union, that it(der romische Stuhl und Geiz) couples many (of) such fiefs together, like a bundle of sticks, on account of which coupling they are all regarded as one fief. Thus one may find one courtier at Rome, who holds for himself twenty-two parishes, seven provost- ships and forty-four prebends besides, all which such a masterly gloss helps on, and maintains that it is not contrary to law. Now, what the cardinals and other prelates have, let each one consider for him- self. Thus must men drain the purses of (to) the Germans, and drive out their pruriency (sinful desires)." A device of the same character with the commendam is the unio or incorporatio, to evade the illegality of holding a plurality of benefices, or such as were in- ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 129 b. u : bag cr met incompatibilia in einanber (eibct, ba$ eineS be$ anbern OHtcb fct), unb alfo a.feiof) ate (ine spfrimbe (jeacfttet werbcn ; fo ftttb (Te ntmmer incompatibilia, unb ift bcm I>ctfu]cn ^cijHtcfyen 9?cof)t cjeMfen, bag e3 ntcfjt mebr btnbet, bcnn attcin bei benen, bte fefcfye (often bem ^pabfi itnb fctnem atarto nicijt abfanfem er 2lrt ift and) bte Unio, b. i. : 35eretnignng, bag cr fo(rf)er ?efye men foppclt, ate ein S5nnb $10^, urn wekfyeg Icn jTe alTe fitr ein ?el)en gebaften roerben, S((fo fnbet man mel)( einen ^onrtifanen gu D?om, ber fitr ftrf) alletn 22 ^far# ren, 7 ^rob|leien nnb 44 spfritnben bagn l)at ; tt)e(d)e^ atfeg l)i(ft fe(rf)e mei|ler(icf)e (ofle, nnb fya'ft, bag ntcf)t n>tber SKecfyt fei), 2Ba^ nnn ^arbtnale imb anbere q)ra'(aten t)a^ ben, bebenfe ein 3eber felbfl. @o fott mann ben X)entfrf)en ben 23entel ranmen nnb ^i^e( ijertreiben. 2(ber atte^, wa^ bi^l)er gefaget, 1 ift fafl alt nnb compatible with each other. As in the time of wars weak dioceses were united together to form one strong and prosperous one, so sev- eral might be united, and one of them be called the principal and that be conferred without any mention of the others in the document, the latter being enjoyed as a matter of course. Thus different and in- compatible kinds of benefices could be conferred upon a favorite in this way. They could be incorporated and that one could be called principal which it was lawful for the individual of a particular char- acter to hold ; and the others need not be mentioned by name ; their funds would find an easy passage to the place of destination. Child- ren, and any person, no matter what his character, could be accom- modated in this way, by giving them nominally a beneficium simplex, with trifling duties such as the observance of the canonical hours, or repeating the breviary, while the beneficium curatum, which required ordinary clerical duties, might be incorporated, and enjoyed without service in the name of the former. Planck, V. 627, 1 Was bisher gesaget (ist), "but all that has been said thus far, is well nigh old and has become common at Rome. One trick (thing) more has (Roman) avarice invented, which 1 hope (so that J hope it) will be the last, of which (I hope) it will die." D a- ran er erwurge, "of which it will choke to death." The evil is represented as a disease which produces strangulation. 130 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. lid) geworben $u D^om* 9?ocfy (5ineS fyat ber ei$ erbacfyr, bag trf) fyoffe, foil ba ?efete fetjn, baran er erttntra.e* er -^>a6fl f)at em eble$ giwblein/ ba fyeigt pectoralis reserva- tio, b, i. : feine3 ($emittl)3 Sorbefyalt, et proprius motus, unb etgener SDfritfynritte ber en>alt a gebet alfo $u : 2 $Benn (mer $u D?om 3 em el)en erlangt, ba t()m tt)trb ffg^ tttrt unb rebftcf)er SB3etfe jugefdfjrieben, ttne ba ber S3raud) i|l r fo fommt benn (^tner, ber (Mb brtnget, ober fonjl: er^ btenet ^at, ba tttd>t t)on $u fagen ijt, unb beget)ret bafielbtge ?e^eu t)on bent ^>abft r fo gtebt er e^ ifym unb nimmt e^ bem 5(nbern* (Spricfyt man benu, e^ fei) unrecfyt, fo mug ber alter beiftg fie SSater firf) entfcf)utbigen r bag er ntefyt fo oflfent^ lief) mit ewalt wtber D?ed)t gu l)anbe[n, gejlraft n?erbe, 4 unb fprtct)t : @r ^abe in feinem er$en 5 unb emitt!) bap 1 Fandlein, diminutive of F u n d, "a precious invention," (a noble little invention). Eigener Muthwille der Ge- w a 1 1, his own arbitrary power, (arbitrariness of power). 2 Das gehtalso zu, this takes place thus. Zugehen, signifies first, and in common life, to go quick, as g e h z u, hasten (or in the vulgar New-England dialect, " be spry"). 2, To close, to shut (and sometimes to end, to terminate) . 3. To proceed, to take place, (but only with reference to manner and generally impersonally), as, Wie geht es zu? How does it happen that ; how is it that ? Qui Jit ? in Latin. Es geht natttrlichzu, it takes place nat- urally. Est geht bunt zu, everything is topsy turvy. See p. 68, Note 4. 3 Wenn Einer zu Rom, etc. "When one obtains a fief (or prebend) at Rome, which is promised to him in writing (which is signed and written to him) in good faith (aufredlicher Weise) according to custom, there comes another person (Einer) who brings money, or otherwise has done some service that is not to be named (da n i c h t von, for d a v o n n i c h t, ' ; of which noth- ing is to be said") and desires the same prebend of the pope, and the latter gives it to him and takes it from the other." 4 Zu handeln, gestraft werde, "that he be not censured for acting (to act, or to have acted) so openly," etc. 5 Er habe in seinem Hertzen, etc., "he had, in his heart and mind, reserved that prebend for himself (ihm selbst vor~ ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 131 felbc cbcn ibm felbft unb feincr rotten Qkwalt fo cr tod) few ebtag gutter me barau gebacfyt tied) gefyoret fyat. Unb bat nun alfo em (Slofftetn 1 gefunben, bag er in eigcner ^erfon (iigen, tritgen, unb ^cbermann d'ffcn unb narrcn mag ; unb bad atted uutferfofyamt uub offcnt(td) ; unb rottf bcnuocf) bad aupt ber @brtftenl)ett fet)u r tafiet ftcf) mir 2 offentitrfjen Siigeu beu befen etft regtercm liefer ^utbwttte 3 unb (itgenbafte 3Sorbeba(t bed q3ab|ld marf)t nun $u 9^om cin fefrfjed 5i3cfen, bag 9ttemanb bat)on reben faun* a tjl cm ^aufcn, 4 SSerfaufeu, Staufrfjen, 9?aufrf)en, ?iigcn, rita,en, D^aubett, ^rad)t, ^itrerct, S3iiberet auf atterlet 3Betfe, otted titng, bag ni'c^t mbgltrf) tfi bem 5(ntic()rift Iafler(id)er ^u regteren. ^d tfl ntcf)td mtt SSenebtg, 5t(torf, 5i(fatr r 5 ge^ behalten) and for his plenary power, although (so doch) he never before, in all his life, thought of it, nor heard of it." 1 Glosslein, diminutive of Glosse. "And he has now so invented a fine little gloss, that he can," etc. The diminutive is both ironical and contemptuous. 2 Lasset sich mit, etc. "(and) allows the Evil Spirit with open falsehood to rule him." 3 Dieser Muthwille, etc. "Now (nun, differing widely from jetzt) this arbitrary will and pretended reservation of the pope [viewed as a nominative singular, because they are but two names of the same thing] creates such a disorder (W e s e n) at Rome that no one can describe it." Davon r e d e n, to speak of it, has a general sense ; but here the connection gives it a special meaning. 4 Da ist ein Kaufen, etc. " There is buying, selling, money-changing, bartering, carousing (making a tumult), lying, de- ceiving, robbing, stealing, extravagant parading, dissoluteness, kna- very of every sort [and], irreverence for God, so that it is not possi- ble for antichrist himself to reign more iniquitously." 5 Venedig, Altorf, Alkair, Venice, Altorf and Algiers, celebrated places of trade, where the love of gain is supposed to be stronger than moral principle. Altorf, a small town in the can- ton of Uri on the Reuss in Switzerland, was, on account of the transportation of goods through it from Germany to Italy, a place of much trade. The orthography Alkair for A 1 g i e r is no longer in use. That place was once a great slave market. 132 SELECTIONS FROM LTJTHEK. gen 1 biefen 3afyrmarft unb $anffyanbel $n 9?om r ofyne bag bort bod) SSermmft imb 3?ecf)t gefyatten roirb ; bier gefyet ed, ttne bcr eufel fe(6ft wilL Unb cw3 bent 9D?eere fliegt nnn in atfe $Mt gteiofye ngenb, clften ftdb folcfye ente nicfyt billig 2 furcfyten t>or ber Deformation nnb einem freien @on* cilio, nnb efye atte $onige nnb gitrjten in einanber l)dngen, 3 bag je ntcfyt bnrrf) it)re (^tnigfett em (5onci(tnm werbe ? SOBer mag leiben, bag fo(cf)e feine SSnberet 4 an ben ^tag font me ? ^at ber q)abfl 5 $n biefen atten ebetn ^anbetn em 1 G e gen, in comparison with. " There is nothing with Venice, Altorf and Algiers, (i. e. Venice, Altorf and Algiers, are nothing) in comparison with this market and trade, except, however, that there (ohne dass dort doch), reason and justice are regarded, (while) here everything goes as Satan will have it." Jahrrnarkt, literally means an annual fair, but by usage it is also employed to des- ignate the greater fairs which occur only in a few times in a year to distinguish them from the weekly markets. Hence figuratively it signifies, not an annual sale, but a great sale at Rome. 2 Sollten sich solche Leute nicht billig, etc. " Is it not natural that such men should stand in fear of a reforma- tion and a free council ?" Literally, " Should not such men reason- ably fear," etc. ? See p. 102, Note 3, on the word billig. 3 In einanderhangen, embroil, make kings and prin- ces seize and hold upon each other like tigers. The expression cor- responds in character to the English, " to set by the ears." Han- gen as an active verb is causative of h an gen, a neuter verb. In einander hangen would, applied to persons, mean to be at variance, while an einander hangen, would be, to be at- tacked to each other, to love each other. 4 Solche seine Buberei, " such knavery of his." The use of these two adjectives together is unusual. The word seine is not necessary after solche. 5 Zuietzthatder Fabst, etc. "Finally the pope has erected for all these honorable transactions, a proper market house." H a n d e 1 n is, as the change of the vowel would indicate, the plu- ral of H a n d e 1 n, an infinitive used substantively. E i g e n e s does not refer to P a b s t (" his own"), but to H a n d e 1 n. Die- ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 133 auftertrfjtet, b. i. : beg atarii 9?om. abm mitffen aK* bic fommen, bie biefer HBcife nad) urn 1 tfcben unb spfrimben banbefo, bcmfetben mug man 2 fotofje @Hoflfen unb ftanbtlneruna, abfaufen, unb 3Racf)t erlangen, folcfye aupt*23nberet $u treibcm ^ mar Dor Seiten it erf) anabia, $u 0?om, ba man bag $Ked)t ntugtc fau*- fen, ober mit e(b niebcrbritcfen ; aber jet ift ffe fo foj^ic^ geworbeu, bag iTe 9?temanb (dffet SSiiberet tretben, e^ mug mit Summen juor erfauft werbem a|l bit nun elb in biefem aufe, fo fannfl bu $u attert ben gefagten titcfen 3 fommen, nub uid)t attetn ben r fonbern atterlei ^Gucfyer 4 n>trb l)ier urn sen would according to present usage, be placed after alien, and n a c h a little below would more commonly be placed before d i e- se r We i s e. J U m, in trading, means/or, either the money for the article pur- chased or the article for the money. " To trade for fiefs and pre- bends." 2 Denselben muss man, etc. " Of this datarium one must (first) purchase such glosses (i. e. such as the commendam, unio, etc.) and obtain the authority (power) to practise such superlative kna- very. Formerly they were (it was, i. e. comparatively) gracious at Rome, when one had (merely) to purchase justice, or to oppress by bribes ; but now it has come to such a fine pitch, that it (Rome) al- lows no one to practise iniquity, unless it (the right) first be purcha- sed with a large sum of money." Here we see the natural explana- tion of the idiom, es sei denn, es muss den n, etc. " It allows no one to practise iniquity [freely, gratuitously] ; the right must first be purchased," i. e. it allows no one to practise except it purchase. A negation is followed by a hypothetical statement which. has the nature of a condition or exception. 3 S tu c k e, things, or priviliges. 4 Sondernallerlei Wucher, etc., " but all kinds of un- lawful gain are here made (become) honorable for money, as, e. g. stolen and plundered property is justified." [W i r d] gerecht- fertigt. There is no convenient English word for rendering "Wucher. Usury is too specific. The word shaving, as vulgarly 12 134 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. ate gefloMeneg, geraubte^ itt gerecfytferriget, ier ben tie elnfcbe anfgefyoben, fyter ttrirb ben $?onef)en fyett gegeben, au$ bent Drben git gefyen, fyter tft fret ber efye* liofye (Stanb ben etjHicfyen, fyter mogen nrenfinber efyeticfy tt>erben, atfe Unefyre nnb (Scfyanbe bier $u 3Bitrben fommen, after bofer abel nnb ^at 1 bter Skitter gefcf)tagen unb ebet tt)trb >ter mng jtti> ber ebeftrfje tanb (etben, ber in t)er^ fcotenem rab 2 ober fonft einen Mangel l)at O wefrf) etne (5cf)ti$eret 3 nnb (Sd)tnberet regieret ba, bag einen (Scfyein bat, bag afle getfl(irf)en efe^e barnm gefe^t, bag nur i)iel eibjlricfe mi'trben, baran6 fid) mitgte (ofen, n?er em ^()rijl feijn fctt* 3a bier vtnrb ber ^enfef ein 5^ei(i(]er nnb ein ott ba^n* $Ba^ immel nnb ^rbe ntcf)t used, often comes nearer to it. They are both comprehended under the German word. 1 Aller boser Tadel und Mai, etc., " every vicious de- fect and stain is here knighted and ennobled." The two senses of Tadel, 1. fault, censurableness, 2. the imputation of fault, censure, correspond to the two in which the English word blame is used. Mai, or M a a 1, in the sense of spot, stain (formerly M a h 1) is so written for the sake of distinction. It is of the same etymology as Mahl. 2 Der in verbotenem Grad [ist], etc., " here the con- jugal state which exists within the prohibited degree of relationship, or is defective for any other reason, must endure it. S i c h 1 e i- d e n, to endure one's self, i. e. to put up with one's condition, is an ob- solete expression. 3 OwelcheineSchatzerei. " Oh, what a tax-levying and fleecing (flaying) is there [two nominatives regarded as one], so that it has the appearance that all canonical laws are established for this end, that there might only be many pecuniary bonds, out of which he, who would be a Christian, must deliver himself! 1 ' G e- s e t z t [s i n d] . 4 Was Himmel und Erde nicht vermag, etc., " What heaven and earth cannot do, that can this house do. It is called compositiones ; compositiones, to be sure, or rather confusiones ! How poor a treasure is the toll on the Rhine compared to this sacred house !" ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 135 Dcrmao, bicg bang. $ betgen compositiones, frei(id) com- positiones, ja confusiones. ) Wcfd) cut fd)(ed)ter (5d)a ifi bcr 3otf am s 3Jbetn gegen biefeg betlige $au$. 9tiewanb fell ad)ten,' bag id) 311 &ie{ (age ; e$ ifl offent(td), bag jte felbft git D?om ntitflen befennen, or bie ^cctoren ber UntucrjTtdten, bie barum befotbet ffnb, ibrcr ^pflu^t nad), l)ieiineber eintrdd)tig(td) gefd)rieben unb gefdmeen l)abe 3^ wcnbe ba^ S5(att urn, 2 fo jtnbe(l @d t(l and) ba^ SSatete bal)tnten, 3 ba^ mng id) and) ge# ten. Sa nun ber unantfmegKdje ei^ 4 nod) nid)t genng an alien biefen Sdja'tsen, ba bitttg (Id) brei ma'cfytige 1 Niemand soil achten, etc., "No one should suppose that I am saying too much. It is all notorious (public) so that they themselves at Rome must confess that it is worse in character and degree (more abominable and more extensive) than can be told. I have not yet touched, nor will 1, the genuine (real, clear) sediment of personal corruptions ; I speak only of common, current matters, and yet I cannot find words to express them (reach them with words). Bfchops,the priesthood, and especially the teachers in the universities, who are paid for this purpose, should, in obedience to their duty, have cried and written against this with one consent." 2 Ja wende das Blatt urn. " Turn the tables, (i. e. look for the opposite) and you find it." These men have concealed or de- fended what they ought to have exposed. 3 Valete dahinten, " the farewell is still behind," or is still to corne. The Germans often call the last thing or the end of a thing, a Lebewohl. The Latin word valtte explains itself. The sense is, " There is still one thing remaining ; I must bring that for- ward also." 4 Da nun der unausmessliche Geiz, etc. " Since, now, the immeasurable avarice would not have enough with all these " 136 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. $6nige ftegen baran begnitgen, fyebt er nun an, folcfye feinc anbe( gu Derfe^en unt) $u tterfaufen bem gugger $u 2(ugg# burg, bag nun S5tet.l)iim unb 2el)en $u serleiben, taufrfjen, faufen, unb bte Itebe ^anbtt)iernug geiftticfyer liter treiben, cben auf ben recfyten Drt ifl gefommen, unb nun aug geifc lichen unb weWiohen (Sjiuern, eine anbtbierung geworben, 9un moefyte icf) gerne eine fo bofye $ernunft fyoren, bie erben* fen mbcfyte, n>a nun binfort gefofyeben forme burd) ben romi# fcfyen @et^, ba^ nicl)t ge(rf)el)en fep ; e^ n>are benn, bag ber Bugger feine be(be,unbnun einigen anbe[ and) 3^nianbt)er^ ober fcerfauft 3rf) nieine, e^ fei) an'3 (^nbe gefommen, jtnb bier fcfynlbig alien gleig ^orsuvrenben, 1 fokfyem treasures, with which (d a for w o) three powerful kings would have good reason to be satisfied (would reasonably let themselves be sat- isfied with it), it began now (n u n, in these circumstances, or there- fore), to transfer this (such) its trade and to sell [the privilege] to the house of Fugger in Augsburg, so that now conferring, bartering and purchasing sees and fiefs, and following the (darling) business of [dealing in] ecclesiastical property, have come to exactly the right place ; and now from ecclesiastical and secular property a regular business has arisen. Now I should like to hear of (so high) an inge- nuity which can invent what further can be effected by Roman ava- rice, which has not been effected ; unless it be (e s ware d e n n) that Fugger should transfer and sell to some one (to some third person) both of his (branches of business, the pope's and his own). I think, the matter has gone to its height, (is come to its end, i. e. caVbe carried no farther). U n a u s m e* 1 i c h e is not a common word, but it is easy to learn its import from its derivation. Ausrnessen, means to measure out. Ausmesslich (not used), that which can be measured out ; unausmesslich, that which is immeasurable. Fugger was a great banker, the Rothschild of that age. H a n d t h i- e r u ri g means, mech/tnicai employment, business, trade. Auf den rechten O r t, as the conferring of benefices had become a regu- lar matter of trade, it is just in character to let it out to a great bank- er. The only conceivable way in which the matter could be carried farther, was that Fugger should let out the business to others, who should sustain the relation of retailers to him as a wholesale dealer. 1 Vorzuwenden. The word vorwenden literally means, to turn or to bring forward, and hence to exhibit, to manifest. So it ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 137 Sammer unb 3cr(Kn-nng ber @briftenbeit $u roehrem [en wir 1 wtber bie itrfcn ftrettcn, fo laffet un3 bier anbe* ben, ba fie am atterdrgften 2 jutb. dna,en tt>ir bie Xnebe, unb fopfen bie dauber, warnm fotften wir fret (ajfen ben romifdjen @ct$, ber ber grofHe ieb unb D?dnber ift, ber auf @rben gefommen ift ober fommen mag ; unb ba 2ftleg in @briftt unb @t. q>eter$ betftgcn Stamen. $8er fann'^ bocfj jule^t teibeu cber fcfjwetqen ? <&$ ift ja geftobfen nub ge* raubet fafl 3(((e^ wa$ er bat, bad i|l je nicf)t anberd, 3 au^ alien iftorien bemabret tt)irb, (5d bat ja ber fofcf)e groge itter ntd)t gefauft, ba^ er Don fetnen Dfftcien mag aufbeben bet ^ebn bunbert tanfenb eter and) nid)t aufgeerbet, 5 fo bat e3 ibm and) Sterna nb gegeben nod) ge(ief)en ; fo ifl ed and) is used here and on p. 93, line 4. But, at present, it is employed on- ly in the figurative sense, to pretend. W e n d e n, old English, to wend. 1 W o 1 1 e n vr\r,ifwe wish. So a little below, hangen wir, if we hang. 2 Am a 1 1 e r a r g e s t e n, the worst of all. For this form of the superlative, see Gram. p. 126. A 1 1 e r, once a genitive governed by the superlative, has come to coalesce with it into one word. Com- pare p. 3, Note 4, and p. 92, Note 3. The Papists are here called the wor*st of Turks. 3 D a s i s t j e n i c h t a n d e r s, it is not otherwise, or it is in- deed so, is tautological. Welches, refers not simply to this ex- pression, but to the preceding words. " Nearly all that he has is stolen and plundered, it is exactly so which is proved by all his- tory." 4 Es hat ja der Pabst, etc. " The pope has not purchased such great wealth that he can raise a million ducats from his officers [of business and trade at Rome] in addition to the above-mentioned treasures and his lands." The meaning is, the pope can raise a mil- lion ducats, etc. but this ability or wealth has not come to him by purchase, but by stealth and plunder. G e k a u f t is emphatic. 5 Aufgeerbt, left by inheritance. A u f e r b e n is out of use at present, except as a provincial word. 12* 138 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. nidrt erfejfen 1 m?rf) erjdfyret &a$e bn mtr, tt>ofyer mag er fg baben ? Daran3 merfe, >aS (Te fncfyen nnb tneinen, 3t>enn jTe ?ea,aten berang fenben, (Mb $n fammeln tt)iber n 23effernng cfyriftlicfyen id) nun $n gering bin, foldjen greuKrfjen $Befeng 23effernng 3 btenj^tcb, tt>ttt id) bod) 1 Ersessen participle from ersitzen, "to obtain a right to a thing by long occupancy," which is the same in sense as e r j a h r- e n , to " acquire by prescription." 2 S t Q c k e . The extensive use of the word Stock, and the many idioms formed with it, render it necessary to explain its nature. It means 1 . literally, what sticks together, or adheres, or one solid mass ; as, etwasaus einem Stock e, machen,to make a thing out of one unbroken piece (of timber, etc.) In einem Stucke fort arbeiten (figuratively), to labor on without interruption, (in one piece). d piece, i. e a coherent mass, broken off from some- thing else. In this signification it corresponds exactly to the English word piece. 3. A solid mass, or a whole with respect to a settled or customary measure ; asaStOck Tuch, a piece of cloth contain- ing a certain number of yards ; ein Stock Garn, a certain number, (four or six) of skeins of yarn or thread ; ein Stock "W e i n, a pipe of wine ; ein Stock Salz, a certain measure of salt, varying in different places from three bushels to three fourths of a bushel. 4. Jin individual viewed as apart (piece) of a class or species, as a piece of money, of artillery. Zehn Stock BO- 'C h e r, ten books ; Zehn StOckVieh, ten head of cattle ; e i n StQckvon einem Mensch, a blustering or contemptible man, {applied to a human being, Stock is a word of contempt, as " a miserable thing of a man"). 5. A piece, as a work of art, especially of painting, poetry, music, etc., 6. A bad act, trick, especially in biblical usage. 7. A thing, a circumstance, a particular, a point, as indiesem Stock e, in this matter ; von freien StOcken, voluntarily, of his own accord ; grosse StOcke auf ihn h a 1 1 e n, to make much (great things) of him. 3 Zu solchen greulichen Wesens Besserung. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 139 ba$ 9tarrenfpicl binaitS ftngen, unb fagen, fo Diet mein (lanb fcermaa., wa$ rootyl gefcfyefyen modjte unb fottte tt>e(t(ki)cr ewalt obcr gemeinem @onci(io. Sum erflen, bag etn jeglicfyer gurft, 1 2(bef, (stcibte, in ifyren Untertbanen frifcf) an serbieten bie 2(nnaren nacf) Ofam $u geben, uub (Te gar abtbwt* eun ber 9>abft bat ben ^)act .qebrocfyen, unb cine Dtdnberei gemarfjt an3 ben Slnrtaten, ju cf)aben nnb @d)anben gemetner bentfrf)er 2 fatten, cu'cbt ffe fetnen greunben, Derfanft (Te fitr efb, nnb jfrftet Dfftcicn baranf ; barnm bat er ba ba^n t)er(eren nnb (Strafe fcerbient. (So i(l bie meltlicfye ema(t fd)ittbig gn fd)iien bie Unfrf)u(bigen, unb ^u roefyren ba^ Unred)t, tt)ie @t* ^>an(n3 Dlom* 13, Iet)ret. Sum anbern, bieweU ber ^>abfl mit feinem romifrf)en ^raftifen, 3 (5cmmenben, ^bjntorien, 9?efert>ation, Gratiis expectativis, ^ab^^onat, 3ttcorpcration r Union, This last word is governed by z u, and governs solchen greu- lichen Wesens. Although 1 am too insignificant to set forth particulars, (which would be) subservient (d i e n s 1 1 i c h) to the reformation of such an abominable state of things (affair, or concern), yet i will carry out (or sing out my merry Andrew song) my part as court fool, (alluding to his presumption in offering advice to the emperor, and to princes and nobles), and say what might and should, perhaps (wo hi), be done (take place) by the civil government or by a general council." 1 Dass ein jeglicher F Q r st, etc., "that every prince, the nobility and (the free) cities prohibit promptly (frisch an, briskly on, spiritedly) their subjects (among 01 in their subjects) from giving (to give) annats to Rome, and abolish them altogether" (gar). * Gemeiner deutscher, for allgemein. (Er) giebt sie. 3 R6mischen Praktiken, etc., "Roman tricks (viz)., com- mendams, adjutoria, (right to appoint coadjutors to bishops), reserva- tions (mental), expectancies (promise of a benefice, when it shall become vacant), papal months, pensions, palliums (purchased by archbishops), rules of the court or office (where such business was transacted, the datarium), and the like knavery." 140 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. Palliis, (5an$eIei*D?egefn unb bergteidjen SBitberet, alfe beutfdjen (2tifte ofwe ewaft 1 unb Diecfyt $u (7d) retgt, unb btefefben ju D?om gremben, bte ntd)t3 in beutfdjen ?anbeu bafiir tbun, giebt unb serfauft, bamtt er 2 bte Drbtnarten Jberaubt ibretf D?ed)teg, ntad)t aitg ben SBifdjofen nnr S^ifern unb Mgoen, unb a(fo mtber fetn eigen get^ltrfje^ 3?ecf)t, ^atnr unb 3Sernnnft t)anbe(t, bag $ufefct babiu fommen, bag bte ^pfrimben unb ?et)en nut greben unge(el)rten ^fetn unb SBuben $n $Kom, burd) (auter ($>et^ fcerfanft werben, frcmme unb gelebrte ?ente tbrer SSerbtenjlte unb ^imfl ntrf)t^ gentegen, baburd) ba^ arme SSotf beutfcfyer Nation ,quter ge# lebrter ^rcUaten mug mangeln unb Derberben ; fo fott l)ter ber cfybrtjHtofye Slbet pcf) gegen tt)n feen, a(^ n>tber etneu gemetnen geinb unb %wftwev ber (i^rtjtenbett, urn ber armen eefen Joett 3 mitten, bie burd) foldje ^!i)rannei Der* berben mitjfen ; fe^en, gebieten unb t)ercrbnen, bag l)tnfort fetu ?el)en mebr nad) D^om ge^ogen, feine^ ntebr bartn er^ langt werbe auf feinerret ^Beife, fonbern tt)teber i>on ber ti)rannifd)en ett>alt t)erau^rucft, braugen bet)a(ten, 4 unb 1 Ohne Gewalt, without lawful power. 2 Dam it e r, etc., "whereby he robs the ordinary or regular bishop of his right, makes the bishops mere ciphers and drones (O e 1- gotze, a lazy felloio, now a low word), and thus violates his own canonical law, (as well as) nature and reason, so that at last it has (they have) come to this, that prebends and fief's are, out of mere ava- rice, sold to coarse, ignorant asses and knaves at Rome, (and) pious and learned men derive no benefit from their merit and talents, whereby the unhappy people of Germany must do without learned prelates, and suffer (be ruined), therefore," etc. (so refers to die- weil der Papst, etc.). 3 H e i 1 instead of H e i 1 s in the genitive for the sake of eupho- ny. Luther often uses such a license. 4 Heraus(ge)rttckt, draussen behalten (werde), " be wrested again from its tyrannical power, and kept from it (out of Rome) and the rights and office of the ordinary bishops, to dis- pose, to the best of their power, of such benefices among the Ger- mans, be restored to them." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 141 ben Drbtnartcn tin* $?ed)t wtb 5(mt roieberftatten, fo(rf) ?e# fyen $u uerorbnen, anf'3 SBejte (te mba.en, in beutfdjer 9?a* tion. Unb tt>o eiu (Seurttfcm berauS fame, 1 bag bemfetben etn ernfter 93cfeM a,efd)ebe abjnfteben, ober in ben 9?t)ettt unb bad nadjfte 2Bafier git fprinaett, unb ben romifcfyen 25ann mtt Sterjef unb ^rtefen jnm fatten S3abe fitfyren, fo witrben jTe gu ftom merfen, ba^ bte ^eutfcf)en ntcfjt atte 3eit toll unb oU 2 fet>en r fenbern and) einmat (Sfynjlen geworben maren, a(^ bic 3 ben (gpott unb (Scf)marf) be^ betftgen 9^a^ men^ (^brtfti, unter roekfyen fo(rf)e SSitberei unb 8 ben flcfcfyebt, nicf)t mebr ju (etben gebenfen, ott unb te$ ^hre mel)r ad)ten benn bet ^Benfcfyen ett>a(t* 3nm brttten, bag em faifer(id)e^ ^efe^ au^gel^e, fetnett S5tfct)of^mante(, and) fetne SBefiattgung irgenb efner X^gni* taten 4 fortan and D^em ^u boten ; fonbern bag man bte >rbnung beg atterbettigjlen unb beritl)mte|ten Qmtdfti 9& cant wteber aufrid)tete, barfnuen gefe^t tfl, 5 bag etn S3tfd)of 1 Her a us kame, etc. "And if a courtier should come out here (from Rome), that (d ass, here as in the second paragraph, dependent on s a g e n in the first paragraph) a strict command be given to him to keep at a distance, or to leap into the Rhine or (and) the nearest river, and take the Roman bull of excommunication with seal and letters to a cold bath. Thus would they at Rome perceive." 2 Toll und voll. Voll, has reference to feasting and drink- ing, which tends to make one toll. Compare Vollerei. This fond- ness for alliteration is apparent in numerous phrases, transmitted from the earliest times. 3 A 1 s d i e, as who, \. e. as those who. 4 Irgend einer Dignitaten. Dignitaten, is either genitive singular after the old form, according to which feminine nouns were declined in the singular, or genitive plural, governed by einer," any one of the dignities." 6 Aufrichtete, darinnen (darin)gesetzt ist, " should be restored, or one should restore (imperfect subjunctive) in which it is established," etc. 142 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fotf befMtiget toerben fcon ben anbern $wei ndcfyfhm, cbcr tton bem (r$bifrf)of, 3unt merten, bag tterorbnet tt>erbe, bag feine ti>e[t(id)e (Sacfye gen D^om ge^ogen toerbe, fenbern biefelben atfe 1 bcr roeftlicfyen (&ewalt laflfen ; ttie fte felbft fc$en in ifyren geifb ftcfyen Dfccfyten, nnb bed) ntcfyt baffem enn beg ^)abft3 Slmt fotf fepn, bag er ber ^tterge(el)rtefte in ber (Bdjrift, unb tt)at)rl)aftig, 2 nicfyt mit ^amen, ber 5(Uerbei(igfte, regiere bie @arf)en r bie ben @Hanben nnb beilige^ &bm ber Qbrijten betreffen, bie ^rimaten nnb (r$bifrf)6fe ba^n l)a(ten, 3 nnb mit il)nen brinnen l)anbe(n nnb ^orge trajjen, n>ie (Et ^)anht^ 1. @or. 6 (el)ret, nnb l)artig(id) flrafet, 4 bag fie mit tt>e(t(icf)en Aachen nmgiengen* X^enn e^ bringet nnerlrtig* lichen (Sdjaben atten ?anben, bag $n D?om fcfd)e (Bad)en werben get)anbe(t r ba grcge ^ejlen aufgefyen, ba^n 5 biefelbi^ 1 Sondern(man solle) d i e s e 1 b e n (S ache) all e, etc., " but one should leave all these to the civil power, as they them- selves (the Romanists) lay it down in their canonical law, and yet do not observe it." 2 Und wahrhaftig, etc., "and in reality and not (merely) in name, the most holy (of all)." A Her heili gste (sei). 3 Dazu halten, and obligate them to do the same (hold them to it)." 4 Hartiglich strafe t, etc., "as Paul teaches and severely censures (them) that they," etc. Hartiglich, is obsolete, as used here for h a r t. In the sense of a little hard, the form h a r 1 1 i c h, is now used instead of hart i gl i ch. Strafen is no longer used in the sense of censuring, but tadeln is now the common word to express that idea. 5 Aufgehen, dazu, etc., " much money is consumed, and be- sides (d a z u) these judges (at Rome) are ignorant of the customs, laws and usages of (other) countries, so that they often force matters (causes) and bring them to (conform to) their laws and opinions, by which injustice must be done to the parties." Aufgehen, to ascend, comes to signify, as here, to consume, probably from the figure drawn from fire, in which the thing consumed, is said to ascend, or go up in flames or smoke. The other derivative significations of the word are easily traced out. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 143 gen Ditcher nirfjt nriffen bie itten, 9?erf)t itnb eroofynfyeit ber a'nber, bag mebrmaf bie adfyen jttringett unb narf) ihrcn DWrten unb Dpinienen, bamit ben ^p mng nnrecfyt gefrfjefyem abei ] mitgte man and) tterbieten in atten Stiffen bt'e grenlicfye (5d)inberei ber >fftcia(e, bag (Te nicfyt mefyr benn 2 be^ (anben^ (Saobe nnb gnter ttten (trf) amtebmen ; wa$ efb, nt nnb ?etb ober (5l)re anbetrtfft, ben weftftcfyen D?td>rcrn faflen* X^arum fott bie n)e(t(irf)e ewatt ba^ 23an* nen nnb !treiben 3 nirf)t geftatten, tt)o e^ ntd)t lauben ober antes eben anbetrifft* ei^(icf)e @en?a(t fott @nt re^ieren, roie ba^ bie SBerniinft Iel)ret ; aber tfl nirfjt elb noc^ leib(td) Sing/ fonbern fonben nnb gnte s iGerfe, 3nm fimften, bag feine 9f?efert)ation mebr gette, nnb fein ?eben mebr bebaftet roerbe gn S'tom, e^ fterbe ber e^ fei) Spaber barob, ober 'fei> eine^ @arbina(3 ober ejinbe, Unb bag man ftrenge i)erbiete nnb roefyre, bag fein (Jonrtifan anf irgenb ein ?el)en ^aber anfange, bie frommen v: prie|ler ^n citiren, tribnliren 6 nnb anfS 1 D ab e i, with this, or in connection with this. Der Official e. An O ffi c i a 1, is generally a substitute or vicar of the bishop in ju- dicial matters. 2 Das sie nicht mehr d e n n, etc., " that they meddle with (interest themselves in) nothing but matters of faith, and good morals." S a c h e, is the genitive without the article. Jt governs des Glaubens, and is itself like S i 1 1 e n governed by s i c h a n n e h m e n, for an explanation of which, see p. 55, Note 2, end. 3 Bannen und Treiben, excommunicating and banishing. 4 G e i s t li c h (e s) Gut, and 1 e i b 1 i c h (e s) Ding. See p. 4, Note 3. 6 Es sterbe der B e s i t z e r, etc., " whether the incumbent die (at Rome, or on the way), or a law-suit be commenced respecting it (the benefice, d a r o b) or (the incumbent) be attached to the reti- nue of a cardinal or of the pope." 6 Tribuliren, from the corrupt Latin, tribulare. Any foreign 144 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tirett tretben. Unb n>o barnm 1 an D?om em 23ann ober a.etjHtd)er B^ancj fame, bag man 2 ben fceradjte, ate menu em teb 3emanb in 23ann tfyate, barnm, bag man tlw ntdjt tt>ottte ftebfen fafien. 3nm ferf)3ten, bag and) abgetban roerben bte Casus re- servati, He befyaftenen gdtfe, bamtt md)t atfetn Diet elb Don ben Lenten gefdjnnben wirb, fonbent t)tel armer fen Don ben n)utt)erict)en Xt)rannen t>er|lrtcft nnb ^u nntrag(irf)em @cf)aben ibreg (anben^ 511 ott 3nm (Tebenten, bag ber romifdje (Stnbl bte Dfficta abtbne, ba^ emitrm nnb (^cfyronrm 3 jn 9^om tvenigere, anf bag be3 ^)abjl:^ efinbe moge Don beg ^abflg ei t qen nt 4 ernabret tt>erben, nnb (aflfe feinen of ntd)t atter ^onfgen ^>of mit 9>rangen nnb ^ojlen nbertreten: 5 angefefyen, 6 bag fold) SOBefen nid)t attetn nie gebienet bat ^nr (Earfje beg d)riftlid)en , fonbern ffe and) babnrd) Derl)inbert 7 am verb may be adopted into German by adding the ending i r e n to the root. See p. 23, Note 2. C o n t e n t i r e n, is formed in the same way^from the French verb contentcr, and is used as a substan- tive, as all infinitives may be. Auf's contentiren means, to their satisfaction, i. e. till they are satisfied. 1 Und wo darum, and if on that account. 2 Dass man, here, as so often elsewhere in this connection, re- ferring to what Luther says or advises, as implied in the first para- graph. See p. 141, Note 1. 3 Gewurm und SchwOrm, seep. 1JO, Note 2. " Abolish the offices (and) diminish the swarm (of dependents) at Rome." A u f d a s s, see p. 37, Note 1. 4 E i g e n G u t, is in the dative. When the e in the genitive termination of such substantives is omitted (Guts, for Gutes), it is omitted also in the dative (Gut for G u t e). Luther general- ly adopts this form. The adjective being prefixed to a neuter sub- stantive, is here, undeclined, (e i g e n for e i g e n e m). 6 Uebertreten obsolete, for b e r t r e ffe n. 6 Angesehen, considering, like angenomen, supposing. 7 Sie dadurch vehindert (hat), " but has thereby hin- dered them (s i e, the persons concerned) from study and prayer so that." /r tttcsf /^s (er# ben ; trie bad itntiicbttge, nngolcbrtc ^a^itel, Significasti, 2 i>on oigcncr on>alt 3 nnb grcpem Un^erftanb feiset. 3f^^ nidit genng, 4 bap ffc nn$ nt, ?eib nnb (geele befdimeren- ntit stolon ibrcn totten cfe^cn, 5 babnrd) ben laubcn go* fcfywa'cbt, bic (Sbrtftcnbcit tjcrberbet, fie nebmen benn and) 6 gefangcn btc forfeit, tbr 2(mt itnb 5Cerf : ba^u and) bte 1 Gezwungen (werden) ohne alles Recht, damit,, etc., " which the bishops are compelled to swear (take) to the pope without any right (or law requiring it) by which they are bound like servants." 2 Untttchtige, ungelehrte Kapitel, Significasti. Sig- nificasti means the chapter in the canonical law beginning with this word. T U c h t i g, meant originally, strong, able. Thence it sig- nified, that which has force and excellence. It often means useful, or Jit, but only in those cases in which strong and high qualities consti- tute the usefulness or fitness. Herein does it differ from t a u g 1 i c h, which means that which can be put to some particular use, which one can use. B e q u e m is convenient, and is used of things which can be easily and readily used. Geschickt, with reference toper- sons, means, skilful, an adept ; with reference to things, it means, adapted. 3 Eigener Gewalt, grammatically referring to Kapitel, must of course relate to the author of the chapter. Such freedoms of construction are of perpetual occurrence. 4 Ist's nicht genug, is not a conditional clause, but inter- rogative ; or possibly an emphatic assertion. 8 Vielen ihren tollen Gesetzen instead of ihren vielen. Jt is a harsh construction, but it gives great emphasis to the word vielen. 6 Sie nehmen denn auch, etc., " unless they take cap- tive." See Gram. pp. 362, 315. 13 146 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. ^ntteftttnr, bte t>or 3citen ber bentfcfyen gaffer gercefcn, nnb in granfretrf) nnb etftefyen $ omgreicfyen nocfy ber fmb. 1 aritber jTe nut ben $atfern 2 grogen $rieg nnb ber gefyabt, fo (ange, bt'3 ba$ pe mtt frecfyer @ett>att men unb befyatten baben btefyer ; gerabe ate mitgten bie )entfrf)en t>or atfen (Sfyrtften anf (rben beg q)abjl^ imb ro^ mtfrfjen Otnbl^ 6c!e(narren 3 feijn, tl)nn nnb fetben, vt>a^ fonfl 9fiiemanb (etben nerf) t^urt tt>ilL ^tcnjetl benn bteg tiicf eitel G5ctt)a(t 4 nnb D^dnberet i(l, $n ^inberniffen bi^ frf)6fltii)er orbentlirfjer ewaft, nnb ^n @cf)aben ber armen 1 Die der Kaiser gewesen (1st) und noch der K 6 n i g e s i n d, which was the emperors', and are now the kings', i. e. which belonged to the emperors, etc. The subject is here chang- ed from the singular to the plural. The genitive is sometimes used as a predicate, and approaches the nature of an adjective or adjec- tive pronoun (which was his or theirs). 2 DarUber sie mit den Kaiser n, etc. There is a little irregularity in the construction of this sentence, near the close. There is an incongruity in saying, " On account of that (the right of investitures) they have had severe wars and contests with the emper- ors until (so lange bis dass) they seized them with shame- less violence, and retained them up to this time. (And they have re- tained them, etc.)." 3 Gockelnarren. Gockel is written in old German g o- g e 1, and sometimes g i g e 1 (the root of our word giggle, respect- ing which Richardson has some strange fancies). As an adjective it means, jesting, icanton. Hence Gockelnarr, is a merry An- drew. 4 Dieweil denn diess Stack eitel Ge wait, etc., " since then, this thing is sheer violence and plundering," etc. On the force of e i t e 1, see p. 10, Note 4. T yrannei zu wehren, to restrain such tyranny. The verb wehren in the early writers sometimes governs the accusative as the direct object of the action. So it is found several times in Luther's version of the Scriptures. But according to modern usage, the dative is required by this verb. With this dative, however, there may be an accusative of the thing, as, einem etwas wehren, to hinder one in respect to anything, i. e. to restrain, hinder or prevent him from doing it. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 147 (Scetett, ttf bcr jtaifer nut foment Slbef fdjufbig, fofdje rannct ju webrcn itnb jit ftrafen. Sum ncuutcn, bap bcr ^abfl iiber ben gaffer feine watt babe, chnc bag 1 ev ibn anf bent 2l(tar falbe nnb frone, wic etn SBifdjcf eincn 5tiMuq frcnet ; nnb je ntd)t bte tenfef* tfdje effabrt l)tnfort jttgelafihi werbe, bag ber $atfer beg ffefrfti gupe fftffe, cbcr $n feinen gitgen (T^e, cber n>te man t, tbm ben (gtegreif bate, nnb ben 3anm fetne^ 9ttank , 2 wenn er anfjT^t $u retten ; nod) Dtefwentcjer bem nnb trcne Unterthamgfeit fcf)tt>ore, tt)ie bte ^a'^ bjle unijcrfrfjamt ocrnebmen ^n forbern, ate batten (Te 9f?erf)t bagu. (&$ \}t ba^ ^apitei Solite, bartnnen pdbptn'cfjc @e^ wait iiber faiferu'cbe ewalt ert)oben wtrb, ntrf)t etneg e^ lerd worth, 3 nnb 2ltfe, bte jTd) baranf gritnben ober baDor f iird)ton ; biewetf e$ ntd)t anber^ t()nt, benn bte betu'gett ottc^^orte ^wtnget nnb bringct t)cn tt)rem red)ten SSer^ ftanb, anf t^re etgene ^trd nme : wte id) ba^ ange^etget babe im ?atcin. ($$ tfl and) Idd)er(fd) nnb ftnbtfd), bag ber ^pabjl an^ fo(^ d)em tterbtenbeten, Derfet)rten rnnb pd) rnbmet tn fetnem decretal Pastoralis, or [09 be3 ^atfertbnm^ 4 etn orbentltd)er , fo e^ lebt'g j^imbe. 2Ber l)at e^ tbm gegeben ? at 1 S getban, ba er fagr, ?nc. 22. ,,Dte gitrften ber 1 Ohne das s, in the sense of ausgenommen, or ausser, obsolete. See p. 95, Note 3. 2 Maulpferd, obsolete for Maulthier or Maulesel. 3 Nicht eines Hellers werth, is not worth a Heller. Werth governs the genitive; but in modern style, the accusative often follows it, especially when a drjinitc number of anything is giv- en, as in this case. Und alle, die sich, etc., "and all (i.e. nor any of) those who act on its authority, or stand in fear of it ; in- asmuch as it does nothing but (not otherwise than that it) force God's holy words and press them away from their proper meaning to their own dreams." 4 Er sei des Kaiserthums, etc., " that he is the (a) proper heir of the Empire, should it become (stand) vacant." 148 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. etben (Tub erren ; tb/r aber fottt md)t fo fetm ? tf)m St. ^eter aufgeerbet ?* 9)ttd) Derbrtegt, bag roir fofdje wtDcrfdjdmte, grobe, totfe ?itgen mitfien im getjtttcfyen D?ed)t lefen unb lefyren, ba$u fitr d)rifllid)e ?d)re fyalten, fo e bod) teufeftfdje itgen ffnb, SOBcfdjer $trt 2 and) ifl tie unerborte Sitg^ de donatione Constantini. @^ mu cine bcfonbere Pa.qe Don ott gemefen fc^n, bag fo Dtete Derfldnbtge ?ente fid) baben laficn bereben, 3 fo(vl;e gitgcn aufgunebmcn, fo jTe bod) fo gar grob unb nnbcfyenb finb, bag mid) biinft, e^ fottte ein trnnfencr SBaner bel)cnber unb gcfdjtcfter Uigen fennen* ^ffiie fottte be|let)en bet etnem ^atfertbnm ^u regteren, bigen, 4 beten, jlubtren unb ber Airmen marten ? f$ attcrctgcntlid)Hc bent ^abjl s u ^ el ) et o mtt fo grogem ^rnjl: anfgetegt, bag er and) Derbot, jie follten ntd)t 6 ^orfe, ntd)t elb mit ffd) tragen ; ftntemat 1 Aufgeerbet, bequeathed. See p k 137, Note 5. Mich ve r- driesst, fores verdriesst mich. See Gram. p. 304. 2. 2 Welcher Art, of which sort, genitive as a predicate. Seep. 146, Note 1. The fiction of the donation of the empire to the pope by Constantine, was exposed by Laurentius Valla. 3 Haben lassen bereden, would according to present usage ordinarily stand thus, haben bereden lassen. Sollte kon- nen. If defective English verbs be employed in the translation of such words as konnen, (can) there is a difficulty in expressing the force of sollte. It will be perfectly easy, however, if, in all such cases, a regular English verb, or a circumlocution be substituted (for can) ; as " should be able." 4 Zu regieren, predigen, etc. " How would ruling, preach- ing, praying, studying and attending to the poor, consist with an em- pire ?" i. e how could he who had an empire under his care do all these things ? Zu regieren and the following infinitives are used substantively, and are nominative to sol 1 te. All those infinitives refer to the episcopal office. Regieren is perhaps to be under- stood of ecclesiastical rule. This seems to be required by the next sentence. 5 Welches Amt, viz. that of " ruling, preaching," etc. 6 Verbot, sie sollten nicht. This form of expression, like ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 149 ber faitm foMer 3lmt marten farm, ber einigeS 1 auS regi* crcn mat? ; imb ber abfl witt taifertbum regteren, baju f abjl Hetben. @$ babcn bie SBuben erbadjt, 2 tie imter beg spabjlS Xiamen flcnte erren rociren itbcr bie 5Mt, utib bag tterjtbrete romifcfje gfteid) burd) ben ^abjl imb Seamen (Shrift wieber aufridjten, rcie eg Berber geroefen ifh Sum $ebnten, ba |Td) 3 ber *pabft entfyalte, bte anb ait^ ber (Suppe jtebe, (Td) fetne^ ^ttte^ untertDtnbe beg i 9teapc( unb tctltan, @r t)at eben fo Diet all double negatives, is nearly out of use, and is now regarded as in- elegant. 1 E i n i g e s, in the sense of e i n z i g e s. See p. 93, Note 2. 2 Buben erdacht, devised, invented. " This has been invent- ed by the knaves (the knaves have invented it) who would gladly (g e r n e, familiar form for g e r n), under the name of the popes, be masters of the world, and, by the pope and the name of Christ, re- store the fallen Roman empire, as it was before." 3 Zumzehnten dass sich, etc. The genitive Konig- reichs is equally dependent onenthalte, Suppe and u n- t e r w i n d e. " Tenthly [in my view, it is necessary] that the pope relinquish (e n t h a 1 1 e) the kingdom of Naples and Sicily, that he keep his finger out of that pie (the pie of it), and that he assume (or venture to claim) no title to it. He has just as much right to it as I have [and no more], and yet he wishes to be its feudal lord. It is a robbery and violence as nearly all his other possessions are. There- fore the emperor should not allow him such a fief, and, in case it had been done, he should not permit it any longer; but direct him to the Scriptures and prayer-books to this end (viz.) that he let civil rulers govern territory and people especially those which (d i e) no one has given to him, and that he preach and pray." Die Hand aus d e r Suppe z i e h e, "to take his hand out of the porridge." G e- w a 1 1 is here employed with great license, for a possession seized by power. W a re, in the subjunctive, implies that the concession had never been made, thus : " and even if it had been done" (which is not the case). B i b e 1 n, is plural, after the analogy of the Greek and Latin, biblia, books. D a f U r. The following clause is in appo- sition with d a, for this, viz. for what he is going on to state. D ie [die], those which. 13* 150 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. baran ate id), will bennod) eben3berr baritber fet)m (3 ill ein 9?aub unb emaft, nne faft aKe mibere feme (fitter fu^b ; barum fottte tbm ber $aifer fo(d)e ?el)en uid)t ge* flatten, unb VDO eg gefdjefyen tt>dre, ntd)t mebr ttentnlligen ; fonbern ibm bie S3ibetn unb ebetbitd)er bafitr antigen, bag er meltltcfye &crren lafie anb unb ?eute regieren, fon* ber(id) bie tbm Ditemanb gegeben l)at ; unb er prebige unb bete. (Sofdje ^einuug 1 fottte and) gebaften roerben itber S5ono^ nien, 3wcla, SStncen^ D?aDen, unb ^(Ked wa$ ber 9>abjl in ber Shtconttaner 2 9D?arf, ^omanbtef, nub mebr ?dnber 28Mfd)(anbe0 3 mit ewaft eingcnommen, unb mit Unred)t befT^t, ba^u tviber atte ^ebote (5t)n|lt unb St ^anli (Td) brein menget. 3benn alfo fagt @t. ^aufu^ : r/ 5tiemanb n>tcfelt jTd) in bie toeftfirf)en efc^afte, ber c{6tt(id)er 1 Sole he Meinung sollte, etc. " The same opinion should be entertained respecting Bologna, Imola, Vicenza, Ravenna, and everything in the Mark of Ancona, in Romandiola and other coun- tries of Italy, which the pope has seized with violence, and holds with injustice, and moreover meddles with, contrary to all the commands of Christ and of St. Paul." 2 Anconitaner is an adjective. The proper adjective termina- tion for names of places is isch, as spanisch, preussisch. But frequently the substantive termination e r, indeclinable, is used adjectively for the sake of euphony, as die Berliner JahrbU- che r, the Berlin Annals ; die Leipziger Zeitung, the Leip- sic Times, or Gazette ; der Magdeburger Dom, the Magde- burg Cathedral. The cases, which are comparatively few, in which the termination e r is used adjectively, must be learned by usage. For example we must say Colnisches Wasser, Cologne water, and die Coiner Domkirche, the Cologne Cathedral. To all this there is some analogy in English in such terminations as ian and er in the words, the Bostonians, and the Vermonters ; the Philadelphi- ans and the New Yorkers. Romandiola was an Italian province on the Adriatic extending from the Mark of Ancona to the Po. 3 Und mehr Lander Welschlands. Mehr is used substantively and governs the genitive Lander, and is itself, like the two preceding substances, governed by i n. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 151 fdjaft ttjartcn foil." 9ttm foil ber ^ab|^ ba$ anpt imb bcr (rtfe fcijn m btefer Dttttcrfdjaft ; unb mcngct fid) meljr 1 in n>c(tlid)e (9cfd)aftc, benit fern aiftr nod) $omg : je fo mii f; to- man tbm berautf bclfcn, nnb femer Ofatterfdjaft roar* ten laffcn. (SlwjhtS and), beg tattbalter er fid) ritbmet, wotttc nod) me nut rocltltcfjcm Dfrgtment $u fcfjajfen fyaben, 3 fc gar, bag cr $n ctncm, bcr ein Urtl)etl Don il)m iiber fetnen 53rnber 6e t qebrte, fprad) : ,,^[Ber l)atmtd)btr ^n ctncm Dfad)* ter gcmarf)t ?" 3(ber ber ^)ab(t fdl)ret euiber 4 imbernfen, nntcrminbet fid) aller Stn.qc, rote etn ott, bt^ bag er felbft nid)t mehr metg, roaS (5l)rtiin^ fet), ^u beg tattbalter cr fid) anfanrft. 5 3nm cilften, bag ba^ gitge fitffen be3 q)ab|l^ and) ntd)t me[)r a,efd)cl)c, && ift em nndjrtjlltdje^, ja anttd)ri|T:ifd)e^ C^rempel, bag ein armer fimbfger ^enfd) tbm laflfet feme gitge fitffen 6 Don bent, ber fynnbertmal beffer tft benn er* efd)iebt e^ ber ewalt 7 $n @^rcn, waritm tbut e^ ber 1 Und (doch) menget sich mehr, etc , " and yet he in- termeddles in worldly business more than any emperor or king (no emperor nor king)." See p. 148, Note 6. 2 J e so m U s s t e, for j a, " now then one ought to help him out and let him attend to his (spiritual) warfare." 3 Zu schaffen haben mit, " to have (anything) to do with." Viel zu schaffen haben, "to have much to do." It does not mean to be obliged to do. See p. Ill, Note 3. 4 Faret einher, " plunges m, uncalled," etc. 8 A u f w i r ft. This word means literally to throw up, both in the sense of raising (a mound, a billow, scum, a wrinkle in cloth) and of turning up, out or open (a nose, lip, door with violence, a question, or doubt, by proposing it). With sich followed by zu or f U r, it means, to volunteer to be, to give one's self out for ; but when followed by wider, it means to revolt. 6 Ihm lasset seine Fdssekilssen. Ihm. as a dative, merely points out the person to whom the action is performed, and stands, as it often does in Luther, for sic h. 7 Geschieht es der Gewalt, "if it is done out of honor to the (imperial) power, why does not the pope do it to others out of 152 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ^Pabfi: and) mrfjt ben anbern, ber et(ia,fett $n fte gegen efnanber 1 @t)rifhtm unb ben rcnfd) feinen ^imgern bte gitge unb trorfnete fte ; nnb bte 3itna,er ttwfcfyen fte il)m nod) me* er $abft, ate bofyer benn (5brtfhi$, ferret ba3 nm, nnb friffet e$ eine gro$e nabe fetw, tl)m feme gitge $n fitfifen ; ber bod) ba^ btttig, 2 fo e^ 3emanb Don ifyrn beget)ret, mtt attem SSermbgen tt>e!)* ren fottte, wte @t* ^cwhig nnb SBarnaba^, bte (id) nid)t n>o((ten (ajjen ebren al^ ott, t)cn benen ^n ^tflra, fonbern fpradjen : //^OBtr (Tnb g(etd) ?D2enfd)en al^ 3 i^r/' 5Jber nn* fcrer (5d)metd)(er f)aben'^ fo fyod) gebradht, nnb 4 nn^ einen 5tbgott t qemad)t, bag ^iemanb ffd) fo fi'trdtfet or ott, 9^ie# tnanb ibn mtt fo(d)en eberben ebret, a(^ ben ^)abfl:* X)a^ fonnen (Te tt>ol)I (etben, aber gar ntcfyt, 5 fo be^ ^abjl^ $radj* honor to the holiness (of the pope)." This is obscure. Probably, the Papists gave such an explanation, referring to the example of Christ in washing the disciples' feet. 1 Halt(haltet)sie gegen einander, etc., " hold them, Christ and the pope, side by side (i. e. compare them). See p. 132, Note 1 . 2 Der doch das billig, etc., " who ought rather (yet) by good rights (billig), should any desire it of him, to resist it with all his might." 3 Gleich Menschen als. Gleich als, literally, like as. 4 So hoch gebracht und, " have brought it so high (have carried it so far) as to make, etc." S o does not correspond to d a s s in the next line, but by a peculiar idiom, to u n d. Thus in the col- loquial phrase, Seien Sie so gut und sagen sie mir, " be so good as to tell me." D a s s of itself, often means so that, and does so here. 6 Aber gar nicht, so, etc., " but (they could not endure it) at all, if the splendor of the pope should be abridged a hair's breadth. If now they were Christians, and held the honor of God dearer than their own, the pope would never be happy ; but should he perceive that the honor of God was trampled on, and his own exalted, he would allow no one to honor him until," etc. Niemand is here in the accusative, as the connection shows. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 153 ten cm ,v>aarbrctt witrbe abgebrecfyen. 9fBenn fte nun @brtfren roa'ren, nnb 0>ettctf (*bre (teber batten, benn ifyre etgcne, nwrbe ber spabft ntmmer frbfyltcf) werben ; wo er aber gcroabr rcurbe, bag lotted (l)re tteraefytet, itnb feme ei.qcuc erbabeu ware, nnirbe aucf) 9itemanb (affen tbn ebren, bis er i>ermerfte, bag ottc3 (t)re wieber erbaben, nnb grogcr bcnn feme (l)re nxrre. crfe(ben grogen argernrf)en ^effabrt 1 ift ancf) ba^ em bag(td)e^ 8tncf, bag ber spabftiljm ntd)t (a'gt begnit.qei^bag er retten ober fabren moge, fonbern ob er tt)ct)I ftarf unb gefunb tfi;, ffd) Don Oftenfrfjen, al^ em 5ibgott, mit uner{)6r^ ter ^>ract)t tragen Id fret. ?teber, wie retmet ffrf) 2 bod) fo(d)e lncifertfii)e ^offabrt mit @brtflo, ber ju guge unb al(e fefne 2JpojM ? 3Bo i(t em weWtcfy fen, ber fo meWuf) unb pra'rfjtig je gefafyren l)at, af^ ber fabret, ber em aupt fet)n tt)itt Sitter berer, bie wettlicfje ^)racf)t tterfdjmafyen unb flteben fotten, b. i. : ber (5t)riflen ? 3 9?uf)t bag und 4 ba^ faft fotf bewegen an ibm felbjl ; fonbern bag twr bitttg otteS Born fitrrfjten fotten, fo vtnr fofdjer 1 Derselben grossen argerlichen Hoffarht, etc. " Of the same (great) wicked arrogance is this a hateful piece, that he is not content (i h m for s i c h) with riding (that he can ride) on horseback or in a carriage, but though he is strong and healthy, he causes himself to be carried by (v o n) men," etc. R e i t e n is used only of riding on horses, mules, camels ; f a h r e n, only of being con- veyed in vehicles, ships, etc. G e h e n includes both these modes of conveyance, and also walking. Hence figuratively fahren means to move with velocity or vioience. 2 Lieber, wie reimet, etc. "Dear sir, how does such satanic pride comport with," etc. ? Und alle seine Apostel, "and (i. e. as well as) all his apostles," is irregular in its construction. 3 d. i. d e r C h r i.s t e n, in apposition with the genitive d e r e r. 4 Nicht dass uns, etc. "Not that this (d a s) should ; in itself, very much (fa s t) affect us." Fast in the sense of s e h r is obso- lete ; it is used now almost exclusively in the sense of b e i n a h e. Und unsern Verdruss nicht merken las sen, "and do not manifest (cause to be observed) our displeasure." 154 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. oflFa()rt fcfymeicfyeht, unb unfern 33erbrug uicfyt merfen (af* fen* (53 ijl genitg, bag ber ^pabjl: alfo tobet unb narret ; e ifi aber 511 mel, fo n>ir ba$ bittigeu unb ttergounen, )emt welcfyeg @brijleu*er$ mag ober foil 1 ba3 mit ?uft fefyen, bag ber ^afofi, wcnn er (Tefy n>iK (affen comnnmiciren, ftitfe jtfct, ate ein (SJnaben Sungfyerr, imb (affet ifym ba$ Sacrament Don einem fnieeubeu a.ebeua,ten (arbina( mit cinem golbeuen 9?obr reirfjen ; gerabe al^ n?are ba^ Sacrament ntd)t mitrbtg, bag etn ^>abjl, etn armer ber (Sitnber aitfflimbe, fetnem ott eine (5l)re tbcite ; fo bod) atte anbere (51)ri(len, bie Diet betltger pnb, benn ber ak (ert)et(tgfte SSater, ber ^abjl:, mit aller ^brerbietuttg baflelbe 1 Mag oder soil, etc., " may (can) or ought to view it with pleasure, that the pope, when he communes (causes himself to com- mune), sits still, like a gracious young lord, and causes the sacra- ment to be reached to him with a golden reed, by a kneeling, bow- ing cardinal, just (g e r a d e) as if the holy sacrament were not wor- thy that a pope, a poor, filthy sinner should rise up (and) do his God honor, whereas (so d o c h) all other Christians, who are much ho- lier than the most holy father, the pope, receive it (kneeling) with all respect ? What wonder would it be that (i. e. if) God should send judgment upon us all indiscriminately (a 1 1 e s a m m t), that (i. e. because) we suffer, etc." Notice the various uses of the word dass. See p. 144, Note 2. Rohr. J. Vogt has written an essay entitled, Historia fistulae eucharisticae, cujus ope svgi soiet e calice vinum bene- dictum, " by the aid of which the consecrated wine was sucked from the cup." This explains the word, Rohr, or fistula. See also Coleman's Ch. Antiquities, p. 329. The object of the instrument was to prevent the loss of a single drop of the sacred element. After the communion under only one form, which arose from the same super- stitious veneration, was introduced, there was no further use for the fistula, or tube. It was retained, however, in the mass in which the pope participated, and was of gold, as we here learn. Ehrer- b i e t u n g, act of reverence by kneeling. Nunc solus sacerdos cele- brans communicat starts, reliqui omnes genibus flexis de manu sacer- dotis communionem accipiunt Summus Pontifex, cum solemniter celebrat, sedens communicat. Bona, Rer, Liturg. quoted by Augus- ti, Archaeol. II. 768. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 155 empfamjcn ? SOBatf ware e$ ^Bunber, bag un$ ott atfe* fammt pfogctc, bag rotr folcfye Unebre otteS (eiben unb lebcu in imfern ^rafatcn, unb feldjer feiner fcerbammten $offal>rt mttf tbettyafttg macben, burd) itnfer obcr Sd)meid)cfn ? 2l(fo geljet ed ami), wcnn cr ba Sacrament in ber cefjTon umtragt : ibn mug man trageu ; aber ba^ ment (lebet or ihm mte ein ^anbet 1 $Bein^ auf bem ifof), , (5brif^u^ ,qi(t uicf)t^ 2 $u D^om ; ber ^abjl gtft'S fammt : unb wotten un^ bennorf) bringen unb bebrait* en, n>ir fotten fo[rf)e antirf)riftifcf)e ^abel biUigen, preifen unb ebren nnber ott unb atte rfjrifHicfye ?el)re ^elfe nun ott einem freieu SonciKo, bag e^ ben ^)abft (el)re, >ie er and) ein 9Renfd) fet), unb nid)t mel)r, benn G5ott, tt>ie er (id) 1 K a n d e 1, cw/>, provincial for K a n n e. 2 Ktlrzlich, Christus gilt nichts, etc. " In short, Christ passes for nothing, at Rome ; the pope passes for everything (taken together alles sammt, different from allesammt a few lines above); and yet (they, the Papists) wish to force us and threaten us (d r a a e n for d r o h e n), that we should approve (i. e. to force and drive us to approve) commend and honor such an un- christian abuse in opposition to God and all Christian doctrine." 3 Er sich unterstehetzu s e y n, as he undertakes or as- sumes to be. Sich u n t e r s t e h e n, to take upon one's self unneces- sarily, generally construed with the infinitive, is nearly the same as the expression, sich unterwinden. They both mean putting' one's self voluntarily under a burden or difficult icork. Sich un- terwinden, implies that the undertaking is too arduous for one's strength. Sich unterfangen, means the same, except that it expresses mere difficulty, without implying that the undertaking is either unnecessary, or too great. Sich getrauen, or sich t r a u e n, expresses the same general idea of undertaking a difficult work, with a shade of difference conveying the signification of per- sonal confidence, which, when carried to a dangerous extent, is ex- pressed by sich erkOhnen; and when carried to an immodest extent, is expressed by sich erdreisten. 156 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 3um smolften, bag man bie SDBatffafyrten gen D?om ab# tfydte, ober 9iiemanb t>on eigenem 23orttri ober $nbad)t tt>atfen liege, 1 er ttwrbe benn $m>or fcon feinem ^pfarrberrn, tabt ober Dberberrn erfannt, genngfame nnb reb(id)e Ur* fadje fyaben. a fage id) nid)t barnm, bag ^Battfafyrten bofe feijen ; fonbern bag fie $n biefer 3? it itbel geratben : 2 benn fie $n 9?om fein gnteg (grempel, fonbern eitet 5lerger^ nig feben, nnb ttne pe fetbjl: ein @pritd)tt)ort gemarf)t baben: 3e nat)er D^om, je arger dbrijlen ; bringen jTe mit fid) SSer* ad)tnng (55otte^ nnb (^5otte^ ebotetu 5D?an fagty wer ba^ erftemal gen D?om gel)et, ber jncfyet einen @d)alf ; jum an* bernmaf jtnbet er it)n ; $nm brittenmal bringt er ibn mit f)eran^. 3Iber (Te jmb nnn fo gefd)icft worben, bag (Te bie brei D^eifen anf einmaf an^rid)ten r nnb t)aben fitrrcabr nn^ fo(d)e (Stit(f(ein 3 an^ 9?om gebrad)t* ^ n>cire befler, D^om nie gefel)en nod) erfannt, Unb ob fd)on biefe @ad)e nid)t n>dre, fo ift bod) nod) ba 1 Wallen liesse, etc., " allow no one, from his own indis- crete curiosity or devotional feeling to perform a pilgrimage, unless he be first known, on the part of (v o n) his pastor, city or ruler, to have (nab en for z u h a b e n) a satisfactory and good reason." On the word r e d 1 i c h see p. 22, Note 5. W a 1 1 e n, is the same as w a n- dern, except that it has an elevated character, arising from the dig- nity of the object of pursuit, or the serious nature of the termination of the journey, or career. It seems also to have borrowed a shade of meaning from its application to the rolling waters of the ocean and the waving fields of grain, especially when multitudes are represen- ted as thronging to a place of special sanctity. It is hardly necessa- ry to add, that it relates to a journey made on foot. 2 Uebel gerathen, turn out badly, lead to evil consequences. See p. 38, Note 3. " For they see no good example at Rome, but mere scandal, and as they (the pilgrims) have it in their own prov- erb, ' the nearer Rome, the poorer Christians ;' they bring back with them contempt of God and of his word." " But they have become such adepts that they make all three journeys at once." 3 Stucklein, diminutive of S t a c k, " such a fine thing" (viz. as a S c h a 1 k) or " such ware." It is an expression of contempt. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 157 cine Dortrefflicfyere, 1 nemlirf) fete, bag bic ctnfcttttgcn frfjen babnrcf) ttcrfiifyrct rcerben in cincm fatfcfyen 38af)n unb gottliefyer cbetc. emt pe meincm, bap fol* ^Batten (ct> ein foftlid)' 2 gntc6 . 2Berf ; ba$ bod) nirf)t roabr ijt. &$ tji ein geringes gnteS 28erf, 311 mefyrmafen ein bofeS tterfnbrerifd)c$ fficrf ; benn ott bat e nid)t gebo* ten, (5r bat aber gebeten, bag ein 9ftann fcine^ unb $inber warte, nnb wa^ a bent ebeftd)en (Stanb biil)rt, babei feinem 3fiarf)ftcn bienen nnb belfcn, 9iim ge^ fd)iet)t e^ r bag einer gen 9?om wattet, Der^el)ret fi'mfotg, I)nnbert r mcbr ober wentger u(ben, ba$ ib 1 V or t r eff 1 ichere^ nemlich die. Vor trefFlich, and treff I ich, like our word precious, are often used ironically, or in a bad sense. Lessing says of Salrnasius : " He brings together, re- specting this passage, einen trefflichen Wirrwarr, pre- doits jumble." " And although this evil (this thing) did not exist, there is still another (n oc h ein, yet one or one more) of more mo- ment, namely, that simple-hearted men are thereby led away to a false notion and a perverse view of the divine commandments." 2 K6stlich gutes Werk. Kostlich is capable of being construed in three ways, in conjunction with the two following words. It might be an adverb qualifying gutes, "a particularly good work." But both the nature and the connection of the word geringes, in the corresponding part of the antithesis, show that it cannot be so used here. Again, it might be coordinate with gutes, and like this agree with Werk alone, as "a precious (and) good work." But then it ought properly to have the full form of declen- sion (kostliches) and be separated from gutes by a comma, though these rules are not always observed by German writers. See boses verfUhrisches Werk, below, where only one of the rules is observed. Thirdly, it is here used as an adjective qualifying gutes Werk taken together. The question here is, what kind of good work it is, or rather what its rank is among good works. It is not an exalted good work, but ein geringes gutes Werk, an inferior good work, and often an evil, seductive work. 3 Seines Weibes und Kinder warte, und [thue] was, etc. "that a man take care of his wife and children, and do- whatever belongs to a husband, and also (dabei, with that) serve and aid his neighbor." 14 158 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fobten bat, nnb tdflfet fern 5Betb nnb $tnb, ober je feutett 5Wad)(len babetme 9?otb (eiben ; unb meinet bed), ber tbo* rtcfyte 9D?enfd)/ er wotfe fofrfjen Ungefyorfam nnb SBeracfytnng gotttfcfycr ebote wit feinem etgenttntttgen ^Batten fcfymiuf en, fo e$ booty em fruiterer SSorwtfc eber enfete SSerfiibrung tit* )a baben nun bagn geboffen bte g.Vibfte mtt ibren fallen, erbicfyteten, ndrrifrf)en gofbenen %a\)m\, bamtt bag 3So(f er^ regt, 2 t>on (lotted eboten gertffen, nnb ^u tbrem etgenen i)erfiibtertfct)en SScrnebinen ge^ogen, nnb eben baffefbe an# gertc^tet, ba ffe fbttten Derboten baben* SJber e^ b at @e(b gctra.qen, nnb faffofye cmaft gejld'rft, barnm bat'3 miiffen 3 fortgeben, e^ fei) nnber ctt ober bcr Sceten ei(. (fd)en erfitf)rertfii)en tanben ber etnfd'tttgen an^^nrotten, 4 nnb nnebernm etnen recf)ten SSerjlanb 1 Der tborichte Mensch. These words are rendered em- phatic by coming after the verb. " And yet he thinks, foolish man, that he will garnish over such disobedience and contempt of God's commands with his self-willed pilgrimage; whereas it (the latter) is nothing but foolish presumption, or a temptation of the devil." 2 Damit das Volk erregte "[and] thereby stirred up the people, and drawn them away from the commands of God, and at- tached them to their own seductive scheme, and set up just what they ought to have prohibited." In respect to angerichtet, see p. 50\ Note 2, and p. 40, Note 1. 3 Hat's mClssen fortgehen. See p. 67, Note!. "There- fore was it necessary that it should go on, though it be contrary to God and to the interests of the soul." 4 Solchen Glauben auszurotten would be a little more perspicuous, if um were prefixed, thus ; Um sole hen, etc. "In order to root out this false, enticing faith of simple-hearted Christians, and to implant in its stead a just perception of good works, all pilgrimages should be put down ; for there is nothing good in them ; [there is] no command, no obedience ; but innumerable causes of sin and for contempt of God's command." The con- struction at the close of the sentence is changed from the genitive (der Sonden) to the dative with zu (zur Verachtung) to avoid the concurrence of three genitives differently governed, all coming after u n d (" and of the contempt of the command of God"). ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 159 flitter $Berfe aufjimcfyten, fofften atte $Batffal)rten nicber* cu'fegt rccrben ; benn c$ tft fein GJuteS nid)t bartnnen, fein <$)ebot, fein Webcrfam, fonbern nn$ablid)e Urfadjen ber Osimben, nnb (55otte3 OWot $ur 25crarf)tung. aber fom* men fo met Settler, bie bnrd) fcfcfag fallen imjd Wige 23it* bereten trctbcn, bie betteln obne 9totb (emeu 1 unb gcwofynen. X^a fommt her 2 frete3 ?eben nnb mebr ^flfltmer, bie id) jefet nid)t jablen untt. $Bcr nnn wcltte matten ober watten flefoben, fettte Dorbin fctnem -pfarrberrn cber )bert)errn bie Urfacbe anjcigen ; fanbe (IrfTg, 3 ba(5 er 1 d tbdte urn .quten ? iGerf^ milten, bag baflelbe elitbbe nnb 5Serf bnrd) ben ^pfarrberrn obcr Dberbcrrn nnr frifd) mit pgen getreten 'Die bettelri ohne Noth lernen. The construction, though somewhat harsh, is demanded by the sense. Die ohne Noth betteln lernen, which would be smoother and more flowing, would mean, " who unnecessarily learn to beg;" whereas the meaning of the author is, " who learn to beg unnecessarily." The rule is simple, where the governing infinitive (lernen) follows the one which it governs (betteln), or more briefly, when two con- nected infinitives close a sentence, no word should intervene. Be t- leln ohne Noth, therefore, is to be regarded as one word, and therein consists the abruptness-of the expression. 2 Dakommt her freies Leben, for daher kommt, etc. Freies Leben does not mean a free living, which would be expressed by ein freier Tisch, freie Kost, but it is equivalent to eine freie Betragung, a licentious life or de- portment. The difference between j e t z t and nun, is clearly perceptible as they appear at the close of this sentence and at the beginning of the next. 3 Fande sich's, das e r's t hate, etc. " if it is found that he does it for the sake of a good work (i. e. as a meritorious work), then [I advise] that this vow and work be trampled instantly under foot by the pastor or ruler, as a Satanic emissary, and [that the same individual] should teach him to apply (an z ule ge n) the money and labor, which would be required for the pilgrimage, to what God has commanded (God's command), and to a woik a thousand times better, that is, either to his own family, or to his poor neighbors." On the ex- pression den Seine n, compare p. 70, Note 8. Nachsten Ar- me n, literally means nearest poor , or the poor nearest to one's doors. 160 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. nnirbe, afc> em teitfetifcfyeg efpenft, nub ibm an^eigete, bag e(b unb bie Arbeit, fo itr 2BalIfabrt gel)5rt, an otteS ebot unb taufcnbmal befler 2Berf anjulegeit, b. i. : an ben etncn ober feiuen nacfyften SIrmen, 5Bo cr'3 aber aug SBor* tt>u) tba'te, ?anb unb (Etabte $u befeben, mag man ibm fei* iten ^Bitten (aflfen. 1 at er'3 abcr in ber ^ranfbeit ge(o* bet, bag man biefe(ben elitbbe tterbiete/ 2 t)erfprerf)e, unb bte otte^ ebcte bagegen empor bebe, bag er fytnfcrt ibm begniigen (ajfe an bem eliibbe in ber aufe gefrf)et)en, otted G^ebet ^u fyaften* Xod) mag man 3 ibn auf ba3 ma(, fetn ewijjen ii flitten, fcin ndrrifcf) cliibbe (afifen au^rirf)ten. 9tiemanb mU bie ricfytige gemeine trage gott^ liefer @ebote wanbeln ; 4 jebermann mad)t ibm fe(b|l neue 1 I h ra seinen Willen lassen, "leave his will to him;" whereas, in English, we say, " leave him to his will." Luther did not wish to abridge the personal freedom of the people, but to deliver them from superstition. 2 Dass man dieselben Gelubde verbiete, etc. Here, as in so many other places, there is an ellipsis before dass. u [I ad- vise] that one forbid and prohibit these vows, and bring up the com- mands in opposition to them ; that he (the person who made the vow) henceforth be satisfied with his baptismal vow to keep the command of God." Er cannot refer to man; for this latter, not being a sub- stantive, can never be referred to by a pronoun, but must always be itself repeated. Ihm begnttgen lassen is explained p. 135, Note 4. Ihm is frequently used for sich. See p. 151, Note 6. Geschehen is a participle agreeing with Gelubde, although such a construction would not now be used. " The vow which took place, or was made in baptism." 3 Doch mag man, etc. "Still one may, for this time, allow him, in order to quiet his conscience, to perform his foolish vow." A u s r i c h t e n, see p. 50, Note 2. 4 Wandeln, as a neuter verb, generally takes a preposition af- ter it to govern a substantive. But it may take an accusative of a similar signification. So in English, " to walk the street," etc. " No one will walk in the right, the common path of the divine com- mands ; every one makes to himself new ways and vows [beyond the one required in baptism] as though he had fulfilled all God's commands." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 161 5Bcflc ttnb (Mitbbe, ate batte er @otte$ ebote atte fcott* brad)t. antad) fommen nnr auf ben a,rc$en aufett, 1 bie ba ttiel (jcfoben unb bed) wenia, fatten. 3itrnet nid)t, lieben er* rcn, id) mcinc e$ roaf)r(id) out, ed itf bie bittcre unb fitge $8abrbeit, 2 uub tjl, bag man ja ntdjt mel)r 25ettelf(6fter bau* en laffe ; Wf ott, ibrer fmb frfjon $u fcief ; ja rootfte @ett, fie rociren, atte ab, obcr je auf swet ober brei Drte gcljaufct ! & fyat nid)t^ ute^ gett)an r e^ tfeut and) nim^ mermebr gut, irre laufcn auf bem ?aube. ^arum ift mein man fd)(age jebn, cber wie met ibrer 3 3iotb i|^ r auf 1 Den grossen Haufen. The reader must not infer from the plural pronoun (die), that Haufen is in the plural. Den Haufen might, indeed, be the dative plural; but auf after a verb of motion, requires the accusative, and therefore den Hau- fen must be in the accusative singular, and as it is a noun of multi- tude, the relative d i e can be used in the plural. " Next we come to the great multitude, who," etc. 2 Es ist die bittere und sQsse Wahrheit, equivalent in sense to, "unwelcome, but wholesome truth," The words bit- ter und sOss, or more frequently, bittersQss, is used to de- scribe a thing which is pleasant in one respect and unpleasant in an- other. In other instances, opposite qualities are, in a similar way, attributed to the same thing. Wahrlich, before gut, does not qualify that, but the verb. " Truly good," would not be expressed by these two words, but by w i r k 1 i c h gut. " My intention is certainly good ; it is unwelcome, but wholesome truth [that I am about to communicate ; and] it is this, that no more convents of men- dicant friars be built. God deliver us ; there are already by far too many of them (i h r Gen. for i h r e r). Would to God, that they were all abolished, or collected together in two or three places. Wan- dering about the country, has never done any good, and never will." [Irre la u fen, etc. is the nominative.] Ab might possibly be used here for abgethan; but more probably it is used without any ellipsis, in the sense of away, out of the way, 3 I h r e r is in the genitive, and governed by v i e 1, as it is by z u v i e 1 a few lines above. " Put ten, or as many of them as is neces- sary, into one great one (lump), and of them make one, which, being 14* 162 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ettten mtfen, itnb macfye (ine$ barau^, ba3 a,emta,fam forget, md)t bettefn biirfe, ) e$ ifl l)ter triefmefyr an^ufe* fyen, wa$ gememcm afen jur (Seligfett ttotb ift, 1 bcnn granctgcng, SommicuS, Stogufh'n ober je ein a,efet fyat, 2 befonberg tt>etf eg nicfyt geratfyen ift ihrer 2Demimdre benn, bag 4 pe t?o sufficiently provided for, will not need to beg." Versorget is a participle used adjectively. 1 Was gemeinem Haufen zurSeligkeit noth 1st. N o t h, necessary, is construed directly, not with a preposition, but with the dative ; consequently it is here immediately connected, not with zur Seligkeit, but with Haufen. The sense is al- ways given in English by making the noun in the dative, nomina- tive, and by rendering noth est by needs. " What the com- mon mass needs for its salvation, rather than (v i e 1 m e h r d e n n)." See p. 10, Note 3. 2 Gesetzt hat, see p. 11, Note 5, and Gerathen ist, seep. '38, Note 3. 3 Ueberhebe. When the accent is on the preposition, or first part of the compound, this word, as an active verb, signifies to raise a thing and put it over something else, e. g. to put a basket over, or on the other side of a wall. But when the accent is on the verb, or second part of the compound, the word means, to raise one above a thing (in the genitive), so as to deliver or release him from it; and that is the sense here. Asa reflective verb (sich Qberheben) it signifies, to exalt one's self in the sense of being proud, insolent or arrogant, with the genitive of that of which one is proud. Some- times it is used of too great physical effort, and means to strain one's self, or injure one's self by lifting too hard. The following may serve as examples of the two uses of the reflective verb. D a s s i c h mich nicht der hohen Offenbarung tlberhebe, ist mir gegeben ein Pfahl ins Fleisch, " that I might not be elated for, or proud of, the high revelation, a thorn in the flesh was given me." Es war mir zu schwer, ich habe mich da mil ttberhoben, "it was too heavy for me, I have strained myself with it." 4 Es ware denn, dass, except that, unless. Dass near the beginning of this sentence, depends on d arum ist mein Rath several lines above. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 163 3)farrern, entente ober )bria,fett ba^u bentfeu itnb ret ttMtrbeiu 3tf borf) 1 au3 foment ^)rebta.cn unb SSetefyteu mcf)t$ mel)r bcmt eitef ag itnb 9teib jnrifcfyeu ^Pfaffen itub 9D?6ncf)en, cjrogeS 2(era.ermg itnb frinbermg beg gemetneu JBotftf crnxufjfcn, bantt't eg uwrbta, nntrbe, itnb tt>ot)( tterbte* net anf$ttl)oren, btcroett fern maa 2 root)! gerathen roerbem &$ bat md)t cut mtgfeicfyeS 3(nfel)cn, 3 bag ber l)et(fge w ntffcf)e 8tul)( fcfd)e^ eer ntd)t umfcttj^ gemcl)ret l)at, aitf bag nid)t bte n)rte|^erfrf)aft itnb SBtStlntm (enter ^t)rannei itnfeibfa, chtmaf thm ^tt ftarf witrben, itnb etne Reformation anftengcn, bte mcfjt trag(td) fetner ^etftgfett tt)dre 3nm Dter^ebnten, tt)tr fel)en attd), ttrie bte gefatten, unb manner arme Waffe, mft $Bet6 unb itberraben, fern cwiflfeu befofywert, 4 ba borf) ^ttemanb tfyitt, n?o tt)nen ^u ^etfen tt>a're. 5 ?dgt^ ^abfl unb 1 [E s] i s t d o c h. See p. 17, Note 5, and p. 22, Note 4. 2 Dieweil sein mag, etc. " because one can get along well without it." Gerathen is the participial form from rat hen, which in old German is used, as it is here, in the sense of e n t b e h- r e n, to do without. It governs the genitive (sein for seiner, p. 46, Note 4). Mag gerathen werden, being impersonal and in the passive, cannot be translated literally into English. " It may well be deprived of it," would be the form of the expression, the first word being impersonal like there may be, and the last word (it) refer- ring to the subject of discourse, viz. solchem predigen, etc. 3 Es hat nicht ein ungleiches Ansehen. Ungleich here means corresponding to the person or character spoken of. " it is quite in character that," or " it has no unbecoming appearance that." 4 Wie die Priesterschaft ge fa lien [i s t], und [wie] mancher arme PfafFe, mit Weib und Kin- dern dberladen, (participle), sein Gewissen (accusative) beschwert, " how the priesthood is fallen, and how many a poor priest, burdened (morally) with wife and children, brings upon him- self remorse of conscience (burdens his conscience)." 5 Da doch Niemand zuthut wo ihnen zu helfen ware, " whereas no one puts his hand to the work, where it is pos- 164 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ba t qebet, tterberben, n>aS fcerbirbt, fo nntf trf) erretten mem ewriffen imb bag 9!)?aul fret cmftbun, 2 eg Derbriege 3 ^pabft, 23tfrf)6fe ober tt)en eg nritf, unb [age alfo: dbrtfH unb ber ;MpejM (mfeen 4 ehte je t q(trf)e etnert ^Pfarrberrri ober 23tfrf)of foil baben, n>te f Icirlirf) fofyreibet tt 1, ; unb berfelbe ^farrberr ntcfyt ge* brnngen 5 ot)ite em ebeftdjed 5Betb ^u (eben, fonbern mcge etne^ l)aben, mte ou lid)cr gcmctncr SDrbnung gefcl^t, 6 bag etner iiber t)iel ^crren regiere* X^a (Tub nun beruadwtafg, 6 ba fo tnef SSerforguug unb (Strette^ war ttuber bie ^eijcr, t)tel t)ct(tger $ater gewefen, bte |Td) frciwttttg bc3 el>c(td)cn (Btaube^ t)eqtel)en l)aben, 7 auf bap pe beflo bejjcr ftubtrteu, 8 unb berett waren auf atte 1 U n s tr'lflich. For the signification of its primitive, see p. 130, Note 4. 2 Welches, whose, obsolete. See p. 52, Note 1 . 3 Ein Bischofund PfarrherristEinDing. Pfarr- h e r r, is used in the sense of presbyter or elder. When the word e i'n, as an adjective, is emphatic, it is written with a capital letter, which is equivalent to writing the word in Italics in English ; as Ei n, one, 4 Hieronymus. The words of Jerome are : Idem est ergo pres* byter qui e.plscopus. Com. on Tit. 1. 6 Sondern sind von christlicher gemeiner Ord- nung gesetzt, "but they are created (established) by mere (g e- meiner, common) ecclesiastical authority (arrangement)." 6 Hernachmals, obsolete for hernach, which means imme- diatety after, whereas nachmals means afterwards, without the idea of immediate succession. Luther uses the word her nach- mals here in a general sense, when nachmals might be used, u Now, afterwards, when there was so much (of) persecution, and controversy with the heretics [in which the vanquished party were often banished], there were many holy fathers," etc, 7 Verziehen haben. Sich verzeihen, with the genitive, which is now nearly obsolete, means to surrender something valuable, and thereby differs from entsagen, to renounce anything whether it be good or evil. Sich verzeihen, like verzichten (auf), means also, to make a formal surrender of anything, and thereby differs from s i c h b e g e b e n, to give a thing up in fact, without saying anything about it. B Studirten, subjunctive, might study, 166 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. (Stunben $um obe unb gum (trett. a ift nun ber re* mtfdje tut)[ au$ etgenem grettel brem gefatten, 1 unb cm gcmem @ebet barau3 gemacfyt, fcerboten bcm 9)nefterftanb ebe(td) $u fetm ; ba bat tbnen ber eufef gebetgen/ 2 nne @t. spaufuS 1. im. 4. tterfimbtgt: ( tt>erben fommen ?ebrer, bte ^tenfe^^ebre brtngcn, nb Dcrbteten, eyelid) gu ttJerben" ic. Saburrf) letbcr fo t)te( 3ammer3 entflanben, 3 bag ntdjt gu er$a'()fen tjl, unb bat baburd) Urfarf) geben 4 ber gnerfjtfdjcn ^ttrd)e r prf) abgufonbern, unb uuenbltd)e 3>^ trad)t, itnbe, (Ed)aube unb ^lergerntg getnefyrt : n?te benn tbut attetf, n>a^ ber 5teufel anfci bet unb tretbet 50B (en roir nun t)te tbun ? 3d) ratbe, man mad)'^ 5 tt)teber fret unb (affe einem glt'djen fetne frete $Btttfitbr r ebelid) ober ntd)t ebeltd) gu ben. 2(ber ba mug gar tne( etn anber Regiment 6 nnb 1 Drein ge fa lien, Aa* intermeddled, or fallen in upon reck- lessly. Drein, or dare in, properly differs from d a r i n, as thereinto differs from therein. It implies motion into. Hence with many verbs, it conveys the idea of interruption, disturbance, inter- meddling without regard to consequences ; as, darein r e d e n, to interrupt, drein s c h 1 a g e n, to strike on, kit where it may. 2 Das hat ihnen der Teufel geheissen, " Satan commanded them that, instigated them to that." H e i s s e n, see p. 32, Note 5. 3 ntstanden (ist). "Thereby, alas! has so much (of) trouble arisen, that it cannot be told." Zu erzahlen ist, see p. 12, Note 3. 4 Geben for gegeben, " and has thereby given to the Greek church cause to separate and occasioned (multiplied) infinite dissen- sion, sin, scandal and offence, as does everything which Satan begins and prosecutes." A n f a h e n, obsolete for a n f a n g e n. 5 M a c h's, present subjunctive for m a c h e e s. See p. 5, Note 4. 6 Aberdamussgar viel ein ander Regiment, etc. " But then there must be (take place) a very widely different control and disposal of the property, and the entire canonical law must sink, and not many fiefs go to Rome. 1 fear that avarice has been a cause of the miserable unchaste chastity j whence it has come ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 167 mutg bcr iiter gcfebeben, imb baS gan$e getjHidje D?ecf>t $u SBoben gebcn nb nid)t met ?eben gen 9^ fommcn. 3d) beferge, bcr (35et$ fet) cine Urfarfje gewefcn ber efenben, im* fcufrfjcn $enfcf)bett ; barauS benn gefolget, bag 3ebermcum babe wctten 3>faff werben unb fein $tnb barauf ftubtren laffen : mcfjt ber 9ftetmtng, fenfrf) $u (eben, bag tt>oM ot)ne J>faffcnjlanb cjefcbeben fonnte ; fonbent (Td) mit jeitltc^er 9tabritn<] ebitc 3(rbett unb $Ritbe ^u erna'bren mtber bag ebet ottc^, @ett 3. ,,u foltft bein S3rob cflcn im @d)tt)cig bctneg 5(nge(Td)td/' l)aben ibm 1 etne ^ ar ^ e an 9 e ^ prtrf)cn, ate fottte ibr 5trbetten fetjn 23eten unb ?^effe Ijaften. 3* fafie btcr anjlcben ^abjl, 93ifrf)ofe, tifte, Wff^ unb ^6nrf)e, bte ott nicbt eingefe^t bat. ^aben fte tbnen felbjt 55itrben auf^elcgt, fo tragen jTe ffe aitdf). 3d) tt>ttt reben Don bent ^pfarrftanb, ben @ctt eutgefet^t b^it, ber etne emetnbe mit ^rebtgen unb (Sacramenten regteren mug, bet tbncn n)d)nen unb geit(tcf) ban^balten ; benfelben foKte burd) etn cfyrtftfabeg Concilium narf)ge(affen 2 voerben gret^ bett, ebeffcf) ^u tt>erben r ^u ttermetben efdbrltrf)fett unb [1st], has followed) that every body would become priest, and every body would put his son to study for it (the priest- hood), not with (of) the purpose of living chastely (which might take place without entering the priesthood)," etc. 1 H a b e n i h m, etc , " they have given it (i h m, i.e. das G e- b o t a gloss (color) as if their labor were to be praying and holding mass. I leave to themselves (I here let remain, or stand) bishops, convents, priests and monks, which God did not institute. If they have imposed upon themselves burdens, let them bear them. 1 will speak only of the ministry which God ordained, which is to guide a church with preaching and ordinances, live with them (the church), and maintain a household relation (i. e. live otherwise than in a con- vent)." 2 Nachgelassen, yielded back, restored, conceded. Liberty in this respect had been taken from the ministry by the papacy ; it should now be formally conceded or restored by a council. Zu wer- den is dependent on Freiheit. Zu vermeiden, is equiva- to u m z u v e r m e i d e n, in order to,avoid. 168 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. (gitnbe* Denn bteweif fie ott felbft mcfyt tterbnnben hat, fo fotf unb mag pe 9?iemanb tferbtnben, ob eg gletd) ein (5n* ge( Don tmmel ware, fcfywetge benn 1 ^3abft ; unb roag ba* gegen im getfHtohen D?erf)t gefefet, ftnb tauter gabefn unb 3um fecfy^efynten, eS mare aucfy 9totb, 2 bag bte Sabrtage, 23ega ngniffe, (Scctcnmejyen gar abgctban, ober je gar gcrin^ gert nritrben ; barum, bag 3 wtr ofentttrf) fel)en or 5ingen, bag ntd)t mehr benn ein pott barau3 gemorben ijl, bamtt ott bocfylirf) er^urnet rntrb, unb nur auf @efb, ^rejfen nnb @aufcn gertcfytet (Tub, $Qa$ fottte ctt fiir einem (befallen barin baben, n>enn bie etenben 3Sigt(ien unb 9D?efien fo jam? merlid) gefd)(appert werben, nod) ge(efen, nod) gcbetet ; nnb 1 Schweige denn, not to say. Schweige for geschwei- ge. Gott, and Niemand are in the nominative. 2 Es ware auch noth, etc. "It would also be needful, that the holy-days, processions, and mass for the dead, be abolished, or at least, (their number) greatly diminished." Instead of Jahrtag, the word Jahrstag is now used. It means any yearly festival, as Christmas, New-years, saints' days, etc. Begangniss, is now limited to funeral processions; it was formerly used of processions in general. 3 Darum dass, etc. " Because we openly see (right before our eyes) that only (nicht mehr denn) contempt comes from it (it is all turned into ridicule) with which God is highly displeased, and that (they) are appropriated only for gain, feasting and drinking. What kind of pleasure can God have in it, when vigils and mass, are neither read nor prayed, but slabbered out ; and even though offered in prayers, they are not performed on God's account, out of love to him, but for the sake of money, and on account of obligations entered into ? Vor Augen is tautological after offentlich. Gerichtet auf, directed to. Fre sse n differs widely from esse n. See p. 51, Note 1. So does s a u f e n differ in the same way from trinken. Schlappern, and the more common word schlappen (to lap, as a dog), of a kindred meaning, are also written schlabbern, and schlabben, in the former of which (schlabbern) we see the original of the English word slabber, with which it agrees precisely in signification. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 169 ob jTe fdnt flcbctct nwben, bcd^ nid)t urn @jotte3 Bitten freter ?tebc, fonbcrn urn bed e(bcd untfen nnb tterpfltdjte* ter (5d)it(b &otfbrad)t roerbem 9?im itf e3 bod) ntd)t moqficf), bag ott 1 etn $3erf cjcfaffe, obcr etwad bet tbm crfangc, ba3 nkfyt in freter ?iebe t qe* fdn'cbt. (go tft e$ je dmftftdv bag n>ir 2(lte3 abthun, cber je went(]er macfyen, wa^ 2 n>ir febcn in etnen TOgbranrf) fom^ men, nnb ott mehr eqiirnt benn Derfobnt. ($ ware mir liebcr, ja OJott ancjcncl)mer nnb t)ie( beffer, bag etn ^trd)e cber $fofter adc ibre jal)r(tcbcn ?Oie(Ten 3 nnb anf etnen ^anfen na bmen, nnb btelten etnen Xag, eine red)te 3St(^t(ten nnb 5!)(!effe mtt hcrg(id)em (5rnft, ?(nbad)t nnb @Hanben fitr a(fe tf>re ^Bebltbater, benn bap jTe t{)r tanfenb nnb tanfenb atte 3^hre einem 3^ben etne befcnbere btelten, obne fokfye 5Inbad)t nnb GJtanben, D licbcn @brtften, e^ (iegt nid)t an ie(, fonbern an wobl beten, 4 ja er ^erbammt 1 G o 1 1 is in the dative. 2 A 1 1 e s was, " abolish, or at least diminish everything which we see come to abuse, and (which) offends God," etc. 3 Alle ihrejahrliche Messen, etc. " put all their an- nual masses together (into one heap), and should hold, during one day, a genuine vigil and mass, etc. than that they should every year hold their thousands upon thousands (of masses and vigils), a sepa- rate one for each benefactor." Einen Tag, -during one day; e i n e s Tags, on a certain day. Eine rechte Vigilien. V i g i 1 i e n, is not here plural, but singular. The Thuringians still say eine f a m i 1 i e n, eine S c h u 1 e n, eine M h 1 e n, eine Kirchen, a family, a school, a mill, a church. The addi- tion of the letter n is peculiar, and now provincial. 4 Es liegt.Gottnicht an viel, sondern art wohl b e t e n, " God attaches importance not to praving much, but to pray- ing well. Liegt is here an impersonal verb ; Gott is the dative of the person, which is the logical subject, and viel beten, asa substantive, is the dative of the thing, governed by the preposition a n. The compound verb a n 1 i e g e n, in which the preposition is separable, has a similar signification and construction ; but the differ- ence in construction is this, that with the former (1 i e g e n) a sec- ond dative follows the preposition a n and is governed by it ; in the 15 170 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bie fangen mtb trielen ebete, tylattlj. 6. mtb faa,t, (Te werbett ttur mel)r ^)etn bamtt fcerbienen. Slber ber ei$, ber ott nicfyt fann trauen, riofytet fold) 28efen an, 1 fyat orge, er mitflfe unger$ flerbem 3um jtebengeljnten, man tnitfHe and) abtfymt ctftcfye ober trafett be3 getjHtcfyen ^erf)t3, fonber(irf) bag bift, 2 tt>elrf)e3 ot)tte atfen B^etfe! t>cr bofe etjl; erbact)t bat latter (a n 1 i e g e n), this is not the case. L i e g e n, in its literal sense, followed by an, is very simple, as Coin liegt am R h e i n, " Cologne lies on the Rhine." A n, after this verb, very often indicates a cause of something ; as, er liegt an einem F i e b e r, "he lies sick of a fever," i. e. the fever is the cause of his lying sick. Die Zogerung liegt an ihm, " the delay lies in him," i. e. lie is the cause of the delay. Es liegt daran, d a s s, " this is the reason that" (the reason lies in this). E s liegt v i e 1 (or w e n i g, or n i c h t s) d a r a n, " it is of great (or little, or no) consequence, or importance;" and es liegt ihm viel an dieser Sache (which is the construction to be illustrated), "this thing is very important to him," or "he attaches great im- portance to this thing." 1st gelegen is much used in the same way as liegt. See the lexicons on gelegen. Anliegen is construed thus: "Die Sacheliegt mir an, "the thing affects my heart, or is important to me." See p. 70, Note 2. 1 Richtet solch Wesen an, etc. "makes such work (produces such disorder) and fears, it will starve." A n r i c h t e n, see p. 40, Note 1, and p. 50, Note 2. Solch, p. 18, Note 8. We- sen, p. 72, Note 2. Hungers s terbe n, p. 68, Note 3. 2 Sonderlich das Interdikt, " especially the interdict." " The interdict is the ban of excommunication extended to whole kingdoms or provinces. If it be pronounced against a country and its inhabitants, no church bell is to be rung, no religious service held, no child baptized, no penitent to receive absolution, no person to re- ceive Christian burial, in short, the curse of God, as it were, was made to rest upon them." Neudecker, Lexikon der Kirchenger schichte, 1. 198. Hence the indignant language of Luther, "Is that not a Satanic work, to correct one sin by means of many arid greater sins ? It is a greater sin to close and lay down (neglect) the word of God and his service, than to murder twenty popes, at once, not to say than to detain a priest, or ecclesiastical property." S c h w e i- ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 171 3ft ba3 nid)t cm teufltfcfyeg $Bcrf, bap man cute (itnbe bef* fern wilt nut wcfcn unb a,rof?ercn (Eiinbcn ? ($ tpt ja a,ro* f?ere 8iinbc*baf? man (Dotted 9Bort nnb Uieitfl fcfywetget obcr mebcrfccjt, bcnn cb cincr gwongig ^Vibjle ha'tte ernntr* get auf cinntaf, a,efd)tt)eia,c bcnn cincn ^priefter, cber geifttid) ut bebalten. (3 ifl ber gotten na.enben cine, 1 bte im adftltduMt $>{ect)te gelernet werben ; bcnn ba^ get^(id)e Dlecf^t hctpt and) bariim ^cijKki), bag e^ femmt t)on bcm etjl, ntrf)t Don bcm betltgen cfft, fenbcrn on bcm bofcn S3ann 2 mitpte man nidjt cbcr brand)cn, bcnn wo bte wetfct gu brandjcn, b. t. : n>tbcr bie, fo ntd)t rcd)t glouben, obcr in eflFcnt(id)cn (Sititben leben, nid)t m gcit(id)c ut 5(bcr nnn i|t e3 umgcfe^rt, 3 gtobt, (ebt gen as an active verb, is now an archaism, verschweigen having taken its place in that sense. Schweige is frequently used by Luther in the sense ofgeschweige, not to say. N i e- derlegen, is here used in its literal sense, to lay or put down. It is more commonly used figuratively, to resign, Einen Priest. er, oder geistlich Gut behalten, refers to foreign princes, such as the kings of France and England, who often seized prelates, and ecclesiastical property in order to maintain their sover- eignty in their own dominions. 1 Esistder zarten Tugenden eine, "It (putting under the interdict) is one of the amiable virtues, which are learned in the canonical Jaw ; for it is called spiritual law because (d a r u m, d a s s) it comes from the spirit, not from the Holy Spirit, but from the evil spirit." For the construction of the genitive Tugen- den with eine, see p. 96, Note 2. 2 Den Bann. Luther here condemns what is called the great- er ban, or civil proscription, and pleads for a return to the primitive practice of excommunication from an individual church by the prop- er authorities, or the lesser ban. 3 A ber nun ist es umgekehrt, etc. " But now the rule is reversed. Every man believes and lives as he chooses. Precisely these fleece and disgrace other people most with their bans ; and all bans are now resorted to only for the sake of spoil (temporal goods), for which we have to thank no one but the holy code of injustice (ca- 172 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bermann, Hrie er ttntf ; eben bie am meijlen bie anbern eute fdjinben itnb fd^anben mtt SSannen, itnb atte 23anne jet mtr um^ $eit(irf)e ($htt gangfyaftig ft'nb, tt>ekf)e$ wir and) Dfaemanb benn bent beiltgen geifHidjen Unrcd)t $u banfeu baben, batten id) *>ort)tn im Sermon setter gefagt fyabe, ie anbern trafen 1 unb ^onen, vEnfpenfton, (arita't, 2 2(ggratwtton, 3 D^eaggra^atten, ^cf^option, ^Dcnnern, ^ermatebeten, ^Serbammen, unb n?a^ ber lent mebr jTnb, 4 fcttte m'an $ebn @tten ttef begraben in ber (rbe, bag and) thr 3?ame nnb ebad)tnig nixl)t mebr auf (Jrben ware. 2^cr bofe (Skift, 5 ber bnrd) ba^ geifi(id)e nonical law), of which I have spoken more at large in my Sermon (on the subject)." Eben die is very emphatic, and must be so read. Am in ei si en, the most. This form of the superlative is strictly relative, or makes a definite comparison. The other form, me is tens, is absolute and indefinite, mostly, for the most part. The same rule obtains with all the superlatives of these two forms. The other forms of the superlative, as meist and aufs beste, zum schonsten, im geringsten, belong to the absolute and indefinite class. In other words, while the superlative of adverbs formed with a m is definitely and strictly a degree of comparison, those ending in st and ens, or formed with aufs, zum and i m, are not so, but merely express a high degree of anything. G a n g- haftig is now out of use and gangbar has taken its place. D a n k e n is generally a neuter verb, but is sometimes active in the sense of v e r d a n k e n, and then takes an accusative. J Die andern Strafen, etc. "The other punishments and penalties (viz.), suspension," etc. 2 Irregularitat. "What sort of penalty is this? Is it de- priving persons of the privileges which belong to them as regulares, or members of a certain monastic order ? 3 Aggravation, jjggravatio est repetita et iterata excornmu- nicatio Du Cange, Glossarium. Reaggravation is a still further repetition. 4 Und was der Fandlein mehr sind, "and what- ever more (of) inventions there are." Mehr governs the genitive, der F u nd 1 e i n. See p. 13, Note 3. 5 Der bose Geist, etc. " The evil spirit who is let loose by ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 173 i(l [of? cjeworbcn, bat (cfd)e grcuttcfje pfoge unb 3ammer in batf bimmftfrfjc Dietd) bcr betltflcn (bviftenbett gebradjt, unb nid)t mcljr benn 8eelcn*3Serberbcn nnb inbern baburrf) $na,cnd)tet bag rool)f mag on tbncn tterftanben rcerben ba$ 2Bort GbrifH ?02attb. 23 : ,,$Bebe end) (sdjriftadefyrten, tfyr" babt end) 1 a,enommcn bte eroaft $u [efyren, nnb ,,fd)(ief3et $u ba$ $tmmc[retd) or ben 5Kcnfd)cn ; ibr gel)et ntd)t binctn, nnb webret bcnen, bie btnem geben/' gum acfjtjebnten, bag man atte gefte abtlja'te, nnb affcm ben ^onntaa, bebtefte. 5Bottte man aber je nnferer gran^ en- nnb ber grogen ^eiltgen geft fatten, bag jTe atte anf the canonical law, has introduced such horrible evil and wretched- ness into the heavenly kingdom of our sacred Christianity, and thereby effected nothing but the hindrance and ruin of souls," etc. H i n d e r n belongs to S e e 1 e n, in the same way that V e r d e r- b e n does. Though used substantively, they, in the character of verbs, govern the accusative, Seel en. On zurichten, see p. 50, Note 2, near the end. 1 E u c h must not here be taken for the ordinary dative after the verb n e h m e n, (indicating the person fiom whom a thing is taken p. 52, Note 4.), but as a kind of expletive indicating, as usual in such cases, the interest of the agent in what he is said to do. See Gram. p. 348. 2 Wollte man aber je unserer Frauen, etc. "But if men would hold the festival of the Virgin (of our Lady) or of the distinguished saints, (I advise) that they all be transferred (from week-days) to the Sabbath, or that service be held only in the morn- ings, leaving the remainder of the day for business. (The following are the) reasons ; for, since an abuse is now practised in drinking, amusements, idleness and all sorts of sin, we offend God more on these holy days than on others. And now they are entirely revers- ed, the holy days (so called) are not holy, and working-days are holy ; and with these numerous festival days, not only is no service either done to God or to his saints, but great dishonor. And yet certain senseless prelates think, that if they institute a festival to St. OtiliaandSt. Barbara, each one (doing so) according to his own blind devotion, they do a very good work ; whereas they would have done much better if they, out of honor to a saint, had turned a festival day 15* 174 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ben Sonntag rcnrben fcerlegt, ober nur be$ ?D2orgeng $nr 9fteffe gebaften, barnad) (teg ben gan^en ag $Berftag feint, Urfadje : >enn a(3 nnn ber 9D?tgbrand) mtt Sanfen, j& (en, 9Dtttgtggang nnb atferfct 8itnbe gefyet, fo eqitrnen nnr mefyr ott anf bte fyet(tgen age, benn anf bie anbenu Unb futb gan$ umgefefyrt, bag fyetttge age ntd)t t)et(tg, rJBerf* tage l)et(tg jTnb, nnb @ott r nod) fetnen ^eittgen, nid)t aKein , fein Stcnfl, fonbern groge Unel)re gefd)tel)t nut ben tneten ^eiltgen ^tagen. ^Btewof)! etftcbe tottc ^)rd(aten meinen, n>enn pe @t Dttlten, @t Sarbaren, nnb em 3eglict)er nacf) fetner blinben 2(nbarf)t etn 5 e l^ niadiet, babe gar etn g 5Berf gett)an r wo er em t)te( S5eflere^ tba te, vt>o er ^ einem >et(tgen, an^ etnem t)eittgen ng etnen ^Berftag ge^ macht, >a$n nimmt ber gemetne ^ann 1 $tt)et (etblirf)e (Sc^aben, iiber btefen getfHtrfjen @rf)aben, bag er an fetner Arbeit Der^ fattmet wtrb, ba$n mel)r i?er^et)ret benn fcnjl: ; ja and) fet^ nen etb fc()mad)t nnb nngefd)tdt marfjt, rote ttnr ba^ tag^ (id) fefyen, nnb bod) ^cfemanb ^n beflern gebenft. Unb l)ter fottte man ntd)t ad)ten, ob ber ^abjl bte ^ ^ etngefefet t)at r ober etne ^tfpenfatton 2 nnb Urtanb t)aben mitgte. 5Ba^ wtber ott ijl, 3 nnb ben 5i}?enfd)en fd)db(td) an ?etb nnb into a working-day." Frauen. Genitive singular. Feminine nouns were formerly declined in the singular 1 Dazu nimimt der gemeine Mann, etc. "Further- more, the common people sustain, besides this spiritual injury, two temporal losses, (the one) that they are interrupted in their labor, the other (or in addition to that) they expend more than they would otherwise." VersaQmen means properly to svffer a thing to pass aicay through delay, or negligence, to neglect. In the passive, it means, to be neglected, when used of a thing, and to be put behind- hand, or in arrears, to be hindered, when used of & person. 2 O d e r [~rn an] eine Dispensation, " whether the pope has instituted the festival, or whether one must obtain special per- mission to hold it." 3 Was wider Gott ist, etc. " What is opposed to God ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 175 (>ee(c, bat mefyt attcut cine jebe entente, SKatb ober fett $cn>aft abgntbmt nnb 511 roebren, olme SOBtficn unb fen be$ ^)abfte obcr SMfdjoftf ; ja tjl and) fd)it(bta, bet feiner @ee(e elujfcit, baffelbc gu webren, ob e3 a,(eid) ^abfi unb S3tfd)ofe md)t wotftcu, bte bod) bte Qjrfteu fottten fetnt, foUtyeg git wcbrcn. Sum uemtgelwten, bag bte rabe ober tteber 1 witrbeu gciiubcrt, in wefcfycu ber ebetid^e (gtanb wtrb tterboten, at^ ba (Tub ^ct)atterfd)aften, ber merte unb brttte rab, 2 bag tt>o ber ^abft gu Dfom bartu mag bifpenjTren itm'^ unb d)dub(td)cn yerfanft, 3 bag and) felbft etn jeber and injurious to man both in soul and body, every parish, common council or magistrate, has not only the power to abrogate and pre- vent, without the knowledge or will of the pope and the bishops, but is bound, upon (peril of) its salvation, to prevent it, notwithstanding the pope and bishops do not wish it, who ought, however, to be the first to prevent it." 1 Die Grade oder Gleider, in the canonical law, where the degrees of relationship within which marriages are lawful, are definitely pointed out. 2 Der vierte und dritte Grad. Vierte comes be- fore d r i t t e, because one would naturally begin with the most re- mote degree in abrogating the prohibitions. 3 Schandlichen verkauft, " sells (the privilege of un- lawful practices) to scandalous persons." So this singular expression must be translated, if there is no error in the text. But it is almost beyond a doubt, that by an error of the press, through the addition of the single letter , the word verkauft was made out of V e r- k a u f . Substitute this word, and everything is simple and easy. " That where the pope at Rome may in this matter dispense for money and for scandalous merchandise, that there also every pastor may dispense for nothing, and for the good of souls." Thus urn's Geld, in the first clause, corresponds to um sonst in the second; and [um] schandlichen Verkauf, in the first, to [u m] d e r S e e 1 e n S e 1 i g k e i t, in the second. Besides, this is supported by the use of the parallel expression, d u r c h s e i- nen schandlichen Jahrmarkt zu verkaufen, at the end of the paragraph, where Jahrmarkt is used in the sense 176 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. berr moge bifpenjTren, itmfonfl unb ber eefen (Seltgfetf. 3a ttottte @ott, bag 2ltfeg, n>ag man $u D?om mug faufen, unb ben (Mbftrtcf ba3 getjHtcfye efe lofen, 1 bag em jeber ^farrfyerr bafielbe ofyne (Mb mocfyte tl)itn nnb faflfen ; a(3 ba pub 2(blag, 9(Magbriefe, 2 23utterbrtefe, 3 9D?egbrtefe, 4 unb tt>a QjonfefjTonafta 5 ober 23itbereien mefyr jmb $u Diem, ba ba$ ar* me 3So(f rntt mtrb betregen unb um'^ @e(b gebrarf)t; 6 bemt fo ber g>abfl 5Karf)t f)at fetnen of V e r k a u f . On a subsequent page occurs the expression : Umsonst und [um] Gottes willen. 1 U n d den Geldstrick das geistliche Gesetz 1 6 s e n, " and loosen that money-shackle, the canonical law," for " obtain by loosening," etc. . Luther often calls the canonical law a Geldstrick, a money -fetter. 2 Ablassbrie f e, certificates of indulgence. 3 Butterbrie f e, signified, in the fifteenth century, written documents from the pope, in which permission was granted to eat butter during the church fasts. 4 Messbriefe is defined, in the lexicons, " bills of exchange available during a public mass or fair." But here it must mean " permission to hold mass," which was abused by the priests for ava- ricious purposes. 6 C onfe s s i o n a 1 i a, "writings which contain directions in regard to religious service." On the grammatical construction, see p. 106, Note 5, 6 U m's Geld.gebracht, " ruined in the purse." See u m- b r i n ge n, p. 57, Note 3. Urn's Leben br in gen means "to take away one's life." So Urn's Geld bringen would mean " to take away one's money ;" that is, " to deprive one of his money ;" and passive, " to be deprived of one's money." This word always implies that the privation or loss is undeserved. 7 Geistliches Netz. Observe the alliteration, and hence the play upon the word in the last syllable of Gesetz, like, " spiritual cords (re-cords I should say)." " For if the pope has power to sell his money-shackles and spiritual net (or law, I should say) for money (i. e. to dispense one from the obligation to keep it), cer- tainly a preacher has more power to tear it in pieces, and, for the honor of God, trample it under foot." For if there were a moral obli- gation to do what the canonical law prescribes, no dispensation from that obligation could be given for money. " If he has not power ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 177 (05cfd$ fclltc id) fagcn) $n tterfanfen m'$ (Mb, fyat ge* toifHid) ein ^pfarrbcrr mehnebr m>a(t biefetben $n reigen, nnb m otte$ widen mit giigen gn treten. at er aber ba* md)t (SJewalt, fc bat and) ber 9>abfl feine @ewa(t, bie* felbcn burd) feiuen fdjdnbtidjen 3al)rmarft $n fcerfaufen, ahin gcbcrct 1 and), bag bic gaflcn tt)itrbcn fret gefajfen etnem ^cbcrmann, nnb alterlet Speife frei gemad)t, tt)ie ba @ancjeluim giebet. Dcnn jTe felbft ^n D^om ber gaften fpctten, 2 (affen 3 nn^ bran^en )e(e frejfen, ba (Te ntd)t tf)re o man fytn \vitt, nnb entftefyt trimmer ettt>a3 nte bar Sum ^wan^igften, baf? bte nnfbcn &apeften unb gelbfir* cfyen 1 teitrben ju 23oben fccrftoret ; af$ ba ft'nb/ 2 ba bie neiten SOBatffafyrten bingefyen, 3Belgnad)t, ternbera,, -trier, ba$ rimtl)a(/ nnb jet D?ea,en3bnrg, unb ber ln$al)f met mefyr* D tt>ie frf)tt>ere elenbe D?erf)tnfd)aft werben bte S5ifd)6fe mitf^ fen geben, 3 bte fo(d)e^ ^enfe^^@efpenfl 4 ^ulaflfen, nnb nng bacn empfangen ? 5 @ie fodten bie ^rjlen fetjn felbe ^n n?el)ren ; fo meinen fte 6 e^ fei) gottftd) beittg work of man; (it is) what man has ordained, do what you will with it, and nothing good ever comes from it." 1 Die wilden Kapellen und Feldkirchen. "The chapels in the forests and in the open fields," places of superstitious resort. 2 Als da sind, " such as those, where (d a for w o) the new pilgrimages are made (whither they go, d a h i n g e h e n), namely, Welsnacht, Sternberg, Triers, Grimthal, and at present Ratisbon and many more (and of that multitude many more)." So Triers had its pretended relics long before the time of Ronge, and is now only sustaining its old character ! Grimthal, or Grimmenthal, a little south-east of Meiningen, and not very remote from Erfort, where Lu- ther had resided, was one of the most celebrated places of resort for the superstitious. A n z a h 1 always refers to an actual collection or assemblage of persons or things, and thus differs from Z a h 1, num- ber. 3 Werden mttssen geben. "Will be obliged to give." See p. 148, Note 3. 4 Teufels-Gespenst. Gespenst, ghost, is figuratively employed for any imaginary object of fear. Here it refers to the pre- tended relics or miracles of these places. 5 Und Genuss davon ernpfangen. " And make money out of it." The figurative signification of G e n u s s, corresponds very nearly with that of the Latin \vordfructus. 6 So meinen sie, etc. " they (seem to) think, that it is a re- ligious and sacred affair, and do not consider that Satan practises such things in order to strengthen avarice, to uphold false, factitious opinions, to undermine regular religious service (parish churches), to ftj ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN ^OBILITY. 179 fefyeit nid)t, baf? ber Xcufef fofcfyeS rretbt, ten (Mci$ $it fta'r* fen, falfdje erbtdjtete lauben aufridjten fdm>ad)en, aberncn unb urerei $n mefyren, nnnnfc nub Slrbeit tterlieren, nub nur bag arme SSoIf mit ber 9iafe nmfitbrciK fatten (Tc bie d)tift fo n>al)( gefefen, ate bad Dcrbammte getjttidje cfefct, (Te nnigten ben (Ead)en n)oh( $u ratheiL 2l6er n>a^ fott id) fagen ? @m 3eber gebenfet nur, n>ie er eine fohfye ^Battfa^rt 1 in feinem ^reie 2 aufrtd)te nnb erl)a(te r gar nid)t^ forgcnb, vine ba^ SSoIf red)t gfanbe nnb Iebe X^te D^egenten ftnb n>ie ba^ SSotf, ein SMinber fnt)ret multiply grog-shops and profligacy, to squander money and time (la- bor), and do nothing but lead at pleasure the poor people by the nose. Had they studied the Scriptures as much as they have the accursed ca- nonical law, they would have known how to manage the matter." Glauben is in the plural, which is not very common, and means convictions, opinions. Taberna, in Latin, means a booth or shop ; T a b e r n e, in German, means a small tavern or grog-sho]>. Tav- ern, is the same word, with the ordinary change of the b into v. See p. 20, Note 3. We may here remark that many German words are adopted in English by dropping the liquids Z, n, r ; thus, als be- comes as by dropping the /; uns becomes us by dropping the n; wir becomes (w i) ice by dropping the r; solch becomes (soch) such by dropping the /; welch (Anglo-Saxon huilc) becomes which by dropping the 1; ander, (Gothic a n t h a r, old Saxon othar), becomes other, in the same way, which Webster falsely derives from o d e r. (Or comes from o d e r, by a similar syncope.) So from spree hen comes speak ; from B i e n e, bee ; from G a n s (Low Saxon, G a u s) goose ; from I n s e 1, isle ; from sanft, soft; from S p o r n, spur; from Stern, star; from wtlnsch-en, wish. 1 K r e i s. The use of this word here, which properly designates one of the Circles into which Germany was formerly divided, shows that Luther had not bishops particularly in mind, but princes and civil rulers, including the archiepiscopal electors. 2 Wallfahrt, though governed by aufrichte and erhalte means the act of performing a pilgrimage, rather than the place of pilgrimage and whatever gives sanctity to it. See the next note but 180 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ben anbern. 3a, n>o bte -ilBatffabrten rtiofyt tt>offen ange* fyen, 1 bebt man bte etltgen an $n erbeben ; nt'cfyt ben et(t* gen $n Grbrett, bte tt>ofy( obne ifyre (Jrbebung genng geebret nntrben, fcnbern efa'nf nnb em @)elbbrtna,en auftnnd)ten )a belfen mm ^abft 2 nnb S5tfrf)6fe ba$n, bier rcgnet e$ 3lb* lag, ba bat man elbe3 genng ba$n ; aber tt>a ett gebe^ ten fyat, ba i\t 9fiiemanb forgfatttg, ba (a'nft Diiemanb nadb, ba fyat 9fttemanb e(b ba^n. 2frf) bag mir fo bttnb fi'nb, nnb bem ^enfet in fetnem efpenjlen ntd)t attetn fetnen i0httf)tt>tften (aflfen, fonbern and) jlarfen nnb mebren ! 3 3cf) mettte man ftefe bie (teben ^eiitgen mtt grteben, nnb ba^ arme SBoff nnDerfitbrt ^Betcfjer etft ^at bem ^abjl e^ tt>a(t gegeben, bte et(tg.en ^n erbeben ? 5Ber fagt ed tbm, ob fie betttg ober ntrf)t ^etftg jmb t Stnb fcnjt ntd)t 4 1 Angehen, to succeed, to prosper. " Nay, if pilgrimages will not succeed (will not go), then men begin to celebrate the memory of (elevate) saints, not in honor to the saints, etc., but to secure (or establish a u f r i c h t e n) concourses of people, and pecuniary ad- vantages." 2 Da helfen nun Pabst, etc. " To this the pope and bish- ops contribute their aid, and here indulgences come in showers ; and the people have money enough for this. But what God has com- manded, no one cares for this ; there is no flocking thither ; no one has money for this." When d a is separated from z u, it is often now in colloquial style in Thuringia repeated and prefixed, so that da dazu is equivalent to da z u (i. e. d a z u). So d a nach stands for d a r n a c h, thither, or towards that. 3 SUirken und mehren can grammatically govern noth- ing but M u t h w i 1 1 e n. 4 Sind sonst nicht, etc. " Are there not already (other- wise) sins enough in the world, that one must tempt God, interfere with his decision, and set forth the saints as idols of Mammon ?" L i e b e cannot be translated in such connections. Everything which relates to life, or supports it, or gives the least pleasure may be called 1 i e b, as d e r 1 i e b e G o 1 1, the beneficent God ; das liebe Brodt, (nourishing) bread ; d i e 1 i e b e S o n n e, the ge- nial sun ; d e r liebe R e g e n, the refreshing rain. It cannot be ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 181 ben genng auf @rbcn, man mug ott and) fcerfncfyen, in fein Urtbcil fallen, nnb bic Kcben d re ; fogar bat man getjHicfye i'tter $n 2Diigbrancf) nnb (3)ewtnn $ettticf)er itter ftererbnet, in biefer ara.jlen Ieten Beit, bag We$, wa$ @ott felber ift, mng bent bienen. ^Utd) fo btenet fekfyer SSortljett nnr $ ecten 1 unb ftoffafyrt, bag cine $irrf)e ber anbern nng(eid), ilrf) nnter etnanber fceracfyten nnb erfyeben ; fo beef) atte gott* lichen liter 3(Ken element nnb gletd) nnr ^nr ^intgfeit bie# nen fotten. Qa bat ber ^3abfl andf) ?u(l ba^n, bem letb ware, bag atte ^()rt|Ten ajetrf) nnb (5me^ waren* ^ter geboret ^er, 2 bag man abtl^nn fottte ober t)erarf)ten r ober je gemetn marf)en aKer ^trd)en gretl)eit, 3 SBntten, nnb ber ^abft tterfanft ^n 9^om anf fetnem ^d)tnb(etdf). 4 uses and to worldly gain (gain of worldly goods), in these worst and latest times, that whatever God himself is, must be subservient to avarice." 1 Sec ten, divisions. " And thus, such priviliges serve only to two ends, to divisions and to arrogance, so that one church being un- like the others, they exalt and depress each other (i. e. depress others and exalt themselves), whereas all spiritual blessings, being common and equal to all, should be subservient only to unity. The pope takes pleasure in this (abuse), to whom it would be a matter of re- gret, that all Christians should be equal and united." Sich unter- einander, cannnot easily be translated with the two following verbs, because sich is a reciprocal pronoun, with the first verb and a reflective with the second. " They reciprocally despise each other and exalt themselves." Each other, in English, is simply reciprocal, and themselves, simply reflective. It is a well known principle that, in German, reflective verbs, may be used as reciprocal. Sich has- sen may mean either, to hate themselves, or to hate each other. 2 Hier gehoret her, equivalent to, hierher gehoret. 3 Aller Kirchen Freiheit, is governed by the last verb, m a c h e n ; but, only the words Kirchen Freiheit, apart from the qualification, all er, is governed by ab thun and verachten, " that one should abolish the immunities of (particular) churches, or despise them, or make them common to (of) all." The next sentence explains the meaning of this. 4 Schindleich, a Thuringian word, for which Schindanger is more common, and sometimes Schindgrube (implying excava- ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 183 cnn fo er ^Btttcubcrg, 1 atte, SSenebt'g, nnb gutter feinem $om tterfauft ober gtebt 3nbu(te, 3>ritn(cgtcn, 2lblag, @nabe, SSorthctf, $?acuftdten, warum gtebt er e3 nid)t alien ,fttrd)en ingenmu ? 3ft er md)t fdjulbtg, alien dfyrtften $n tfyun umfouft unb otteg rottten 2 3(tte$, roa3 er ttermag, ja and) few Slut fur fie $u ttergtegen ? @o fage mtr, nxirum giebt er ober terfauft btefer ^irdje, unb ber anbent uicf^t ; cber mug baS ^erflud)te e(b m fewer ^ettigfett Stitgen fo etnen grogeu Uuterfd)teb marf)en uuter ben @l)riftcn, bie 3lffe g(etd)e ^aufe, SOBort, (aubc, (^brtftum, ott unb atte X)tuge baben ? t(I man un$ beun 3 alter Singe nut fe* t^enben 2utgen b(iub, unb mtt retner 3Sernunft tborid)t mad)^ en, bag wir fofrfjen @et$, Siiberei unb Spiege(fed)ten follen anbeten ? ^r tft etn trte, ja tt>o bn @e(b baft unb md)t Better, unb fd)dmen (Td) bennod) nfd)t fo(d)er Siiberet, mtt tion) is used, means a spot or place (1 e i c h) where dead animals are skinned or flayed. Figuratively, this low word, means a place where mean dishonesty, and shaving are practised. 1 Denn so er Wittenberg, etc. " For if he sells or grants to Wittenberg, Halle, Venice, and especially to his own Rome im- munities, privileges, indulgences, favors, advantages and powers (or permissions)," etc. These substantives are not here used to indicate so many things specifically different from each other ; they are syno- nymes, accumulated for rhetorical effect. 2 Umsonst und [umj Gottes willen. This is a clear in- stance, where und connects a genitive to the second part of a com- pound, or where um, is a part of a compound and yet holds the re- lation of a preposition to a following substantive. Contemplate sonst as a separate word, used substantively, and the construction will not appear so strange. 3 Will man uns denn, etc. "Would they, make us in all things blind, with our eyes open, and idiotic in the full use of our reason, in order that we should pay deference to such avarice, knave- ry, and mockfights ? He is a shepherd : yes ! so far as you have money, and no farther ; and yet they are not ashamed of such vil- lany, but lead us about at pleasure with their bulls of indulgence." Aller Dinge is a genitive, of an ad verbial character. 184 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tfyren SButten \\n$ l)in nnb fyer $n fitfyrem (S tft ifwen ititr itm ba3 *>erflitd)te elb 311 than/ unb fonft nirf)t ntebr. @o rathe id) ba, 2 fo fofdjetf 9fiarreutt)crf nid)t tt>irb ab* getfyan, bag ctn jeglidjer fremmer ^riflen^enfd) feine 2lngen anftbne, wtb laffe |7d) mit ben remifcfyen fatten, iegel unb ber leignerci nidjt irren, 3 bleibe bal)etm in fewer $ird)e, nnb (afle tfym fetne ^anfe, @Dan t qeIutm, @fan6e, GEfwfhnn nnb ott, ber an alien Derten gleicl) ift, ba^ SSejite fepn, 4 nnb ben ^abjl: bleiben etnen blinben ^iil)^ rer ber SSfinben* &$ fann btr n>eber @ncjel necl) ^)ab(l fo mcl geben, al^ btr ott in beine ^farret gicbt ; ja er Der# fithret 5 bid) Don ben gottlid)en aben, bie bit umfonft I) a ft anf feine aben, bie bn fanfen mngt, nnb giebt bir S5lei nm'^ olb, gell nm'^ gleifd), Sdjnnr nm ben S5ente(, nm -fcoma,, 5Bort nm'^ nt, ^nd)jlaben nm ben ift, mie bn Dor 5lugen ftebefl, nnb mittjl^ bennod) nidjt merfen. (^olljl: bn anf fcinem ^J)ergament nnb $Bad)^ gen ^ummcl fahren, fo wirb bir ber ^Bagen gar balb ^erbrecfyen, nnb bn in bie 6lle fallen, nicl)t in otte^ 1 1st urn zu thun. See p. 35, Note 5, and p. 20, Note 3, middle. 2 Das, this, the following, namely, " if such foolery be not done away, that each one," etc. 3 Lasse sich nicht irren, "not suffer himself to be misled." 4 Lasse ihm seine Taufe das Beste seyn, "and regard (1 a s s e s e y n, let it be) his baptism, etc. as the most impor- tant to him." 5 Ja er verfuhret, etc. " Nay, he seduces you away from God's gifts which are gratuitous, to his own which you must buy, and he gives you lead in exchange for gold, skin for flesh, purse- string for purse, wax for honey, words for goods, the letter for the spirit, as you see before your eyes, and yet will not notice. Should you (attempt to) ride to heaven on his parchments and wax, your chariot would soon go to pieces, and you fall into perdition, and that not in God's name." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 185 ?ag btr'S 1 nur cine amtffe 9*ea,e( feijn : $Ba$ bit fcom fanfcn mngt, ba$ iff nirf)t gut nocf) ttcn ott enu wad auc? <$ott t|l, bad wirb ntcfyt atfctn nmfonjt a,ea,eben, fonbcnt atfe 3Be(t wtrb barnm gefhaft unb serbammt, bag (Te e ittrfjt bat wottcn 2 umfbnft anfnebmen ; ate ba iff ba$ (Stoangelwm unb gctrttdje SOBerf. (go(d)e ^crfit!)rimg 3 ha* ben wtr tjerbtenet urn ott, bag wtr fern hciltgc^ 5Bort, bet $taufe nabc, i)erarf)tet fyaben, wte (St. ^auhtd fagt : ,,ott n>irb fenben etne fra'ftia,e Srrung attcn beneti, bie bte $&a\)r* bett ntcf)t {)aben aiifgcnommcn jit tbrer cligfctt, auf bag pc gtauben unb fotgcn ben Siujen nub fBubctefen, me ffe tDitrbtg jTnb, 3um etn nnb gwangigftcn. &$ iff wobl ber grogten etne, bag atte SSettetet abgetban tt>itrbe tn atfer e^ fotttc ja 9tiemanb nnter ben (ibriffen bettefn cjefyen ; e^ ware and) etne Icicfyte Drbnnng 4 barcb ^u marfjen, menu wtr ben 5Dtntf) nnb (rnft ba^u tbaten, namttd), bag etne jeajtcfye (Stabt tbre armen ?ente Derforgte, unb !etnen frem* ben Pettier ^nltege, (Te bfegen wte iTe wottten, e^ wa'ren ^Batbbritber ober 33etteforben* &$ fonnte je etne jegttrfje tabt bte tl)ren ernd()ren ; unb ob (Te ^u gertng ware, bag 1 Lass d i r's, etc. " Let this be an infallible rule for you." 2 Nicht hat wollen, teas not willing. See p. 148, Note 3. 3 Solche Verfuhrung, etc. " Such delusion have we de- served of (with) God, because we have contemned," etc. 4 Es ware auch ein leichte Ordnung, etc. " It would be an easy arrangement to be made (to make) respecting it, if we were to apply (suitable) courage and earnestness to the matter, viz. that every town provide for its own poor, and admit no beggars from abroad, be they who they may, whether eremites or mendicant friars. Every city could support its own (poor), or (and) if it were too small (1 would propose) that one direct the people in the adjacent villages to give to that object. If they must otherwise support many vagabonds and worthless fellows under the name of beggars, they might (in the way proposed) ascertain who are really needy and who are not." 16* 186 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. man aitf ben ttmftegettbcn )orfern and) ba3 SSoIf Dermal)* nete, ba$n $n geben, 9D?nffen ffe bod) fonjl fo tne( ?anb* lanfer unb bofe 23nben nnter be SSettete Xiamen ernafyren, fo fonnte man and) toiffen, roelxfye toafyrbaftta, arm rcaren ober ntdjt @o ntitfjte ba feint etn SSerroefer 1 ober SSormimb, ber alte tie ?Jrmen fennete nnb tt>a3 t[)nen notb mare, bent D^atb ober ^Pfarrberrn anfagte, ober n>te ba^ aitf ^ befte morfjte tterorbnet merbcn* &$ gefrfjtebt metne^ 5Irf)ten^ anf fetnem anbe( fo Dtef Q3itberet nnb rna^ ber mett^ Itd)en Dbrt^fett gebitbrt, 5(nffa6e nnb Scfya&img geben tt>trb, ttnb ber romtfdje (5tnf)t intt feiner 2Baare ranbet, nnb fie 1 SoraUssteda seyn ein Verweser, etc. "There would need to be a manager or overseer, who should know all the poor, and report to the city council or to the pastor, what they were in want of, or in whatever (other) way the matter might be best ar- ranged." 2 Leichtlich obsolete for 1 e i c h t, " all of which might ea- sily be put away." 3 Ich h a b's (I b e r 1 e g t, etc. " I have made the calculation (have reflected on it) ; the five or six orders of mendicant friars come, each one not less than six or seven times a year to one place, besides the common beggars, (papal) messengers and pilgrims, so that the account has been found to be (f u n d e n for g e f u n d e n) that (how) a city is fleeced about sixty times a year, besides what be- longs to the government (and) is given as imposts and taxes, and (besides what) the Roman see, with its wares (indulgences), plun- ders and squanders, so that it is to me one of the greatest of God's wonders, how we can still live and support ourselves." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 187 nnnitfcttd) fcer$ebren, bag mtr'$ ber arogten ottcg SBnnber etneg tft, rote nMr bod) bfetben ntogen nnb ernafyret rcerben* >ag aber erttdje metnen, eg nntrben nut ber ^Beife 1 bte 2lrmen md)t n>ol)l aerforgt unb md)t fo groge tfetnerne $an* fer unb Softer gcbant, and) nid)t fo retdjltd) ; ba3 gtattbe id) fa ft roobf. 3fl'$ bod) and) ntd)t notfy, 2Ber arm ttritt fcpn, fett ntd)t retd) fct)n ; void er aber retd) fet)n, fo grcif er mit bcr ^anb an ben ^pfhta, nnb fnd)'^ tym fetbfl au$ bcr Arbeit* @^ tft o e itg, bag jiemttd) bte 5(rmen t>er* forgt fet)n, babet ffe ntd)t ^ungcrd (lerben nod) erfrteren* & fitgt fid) ntd)t, bag etner auf ^ Slnbern Arbeit mitfjtg gefye, 2 retd) fet) nnb wobttcbe, bet eine$ 5(nbern Uebet (eben, 3 n>te je^t ber t>erfebrte ?07tgbrand) gefjt. X^enn @t ^3an(n^ fagt : ,,^Ber ntd)t arbettet, fott and) ntd)t cficn." ^ tft Sftiemanb ou ber 5(nbern itter $n (eben 4 Don o orbnet, benn aKetn ben prebtgenben nnb regterenben ftcrn (wtc @t ^anln^ 1. dor, 90 um tt)rer gctftKc^en *& warden mitder Weise, etc. " That some suppose, the poor would not in this (d e r, demonstrative) manner be so well provided for, and that such great stone buildings and cloisters would not be built, nor so richly (so many of them), that I (as well as they) believe very firmly. Nor is this necessary. He who wishes to be poor (chooses poverty, i. e. a monk) should not be rich. But if he wishes to be rich, let him take hold of the plough with his hand and seek (dig) it (riches) for himself out of the earth." 2 Aufs (a u f des) andern Arbeit milssig gehe, " live idly upon another's labors." 3 Bei eines Andern Uebel leben. Uebel leben, til-living is used substantively, and is governed by b e i and governs the genitive eines andern, of another. 4 Niemand von der Andern Gttter zu leben, is a substantive phrase, and nominative toistverordnet. " (For) no one to live on the property of another, (except priests who actu- ally preach and preside, etc.) is ordained of God." The construc- tion is very irregular. Wirker forArbeiter is now little used except in composition and applying to manufactures, as S t r u m p f- w i r k e r, and the like. 188 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bett, ttne aurf) ($()rtjlu3 fagt $u ben 2fyofMn : ,,&in jeajtcfyer SOBtrfer iff ftntrbta, feute3 ^ofyn^/' 3um mer unb ^wan^gften, eg ift fyofye 3^it, bag nnr aurf) etnmal ernjHtcf) unb mtt ^Bafyrfyett ber SBofymen (sacfye Dor* nefymen, ffe mtt unS unb un mtt tfynen 311 tteretnta,en, bag etnmal auffyoren 1 bte grciu(trf)en ^a'jlerungen, ag unb ?tetb auf fcetben @etten 3rf) vt)ttt metner borl)eit 2 narf) ber erfle mem utbitnfen t)or(egen, mtt 3Sorbet)a(t etne^ je* gluten Seflern SSerjlanbe^* 3um erflen mitffert n>tr wafyvlid) 3 bte 2Ba Wett befentten, unb unfer D^erf)tferttgen (aflfen, ben S5of)men nemftrf) bag 3o()anne^ ug unb teroni)tn ^oflnt^, nnber pa'bjKtrf), rfjriflltrf), ^atferltrf) etett unb @tb (Tub t)erbrannt, bamtt ttnber otte^ ebot gefc^ef)en, 4 unb bte 23ofymeu ^od) jtt S5ttterfeit tterurfacfyt (Tub* Unb n?ol)( pe fottten 5 t)ottfommen gemefeu fetjn, fo(rf) 1 A u f h 5 r e n, subjunctive. 2 Ich will meiner Thorheit, etc. " 1 will, according to my indiscretion, give my opinion, the first, with the reservation (to adopt) any better view (which others may present)." 3 W a h r 1 i c h, verity, qualifies, not bekennen, but m Q s- s e n. " "We must, indeed, confess the truth, and not undertake (and give up) our justification, (but) concede something to the Bohe- mians, namely, that," etc. 4 Damit wider Gottes Gebot geschehen, " and in that act (therewith) something was done (geschehen with i s t understood, and used impersonally) contrary to the command of God," i. e. and thereby we violated the law of God. 5 Und wiewohl sie sollten, etc. " And though they ought to have been faultless (and) to have endured such great injus- tice and such obedience to God on the part of our countrymen ; still, they were not under obligation to approve of it, and acknowledge it as done justly ; nay, they ought at this day lose body and life for it (d a r U b e r) sooner than (they ought) acknowledge that it is right to violate an imperial, papal, and Christian safe-conduct, and act faithlessly in contravention of it. Therefore, although the Bohemi- ans have been impatient (it is the impatience of the Bohemians), still ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 189 Unredjt mib otteg*Ungeborfam tton ben Unfcrn gelttten Ijabcn ; fo jutb jTe bod) ntdjt fdjnlbtg gewefen, foldjeg $n btk (tgen, unb ate red)t getban befennen : ja jTe follten nod) fyenttgetf imaged baritber lajfcn etb nnb ?eben, ebe fie be* fcnnen fotftcn, bag 9?ed)t fet), fatfer(td) pabftttd), djrtjHtd) e(ett $u brerf)en, treu(o^ bawtber l)flttt)eln. Saturn, tt>te* tt)ol)[ e^ ber 256l)mcn llngebulb ijl r fo ijl'^ bod) mefyr be^ ^)ab|t^ unb ber @cmen cf)it(b att 1 ber 3tnmer, att' ber Srrtbum nnb (Seelen^erberben, ba^ feit bemfetben (5onci(to erfofget ifl, 3d) n>t(I l)ter 3>banne$ ^ng 2(rttfel nid>t rid)ten, nod) fetnen 3frtl)inn Derfedjten, n^tewobl mem SSerjtanb nod) ntd)t^ 3^ng^^ fot tbm gefnnben bat, nnb id) mag'3 1 frob* ltd) g(anben, bag bte nid)t^ nte^ gertd)tet, nod) reb(td) Derbammt t)aben, bte bnrd) tbren tren(oden ^anbel d)rtjt(td) ($e(ett nnb otte^ ebot nbertreten, ofyne 3 we tf e f ntel)t t)om bofen et(l benn bom ^etftgen etfl: befeflfen gewefen ftnb. @^ n>trb 9ttemanb baran ^wetfefn, bag ber fyetfige (SJeiil: ntd)t miber otte^ ebot ^anbelt ; fo ift 3?temanb 2 fo nnwiffenb, bag etett nnb rene bredjen fei) vt>iber otteg ebot, ob fte g(etd) bent enfe( felbjl, gefd)tt>etge etnem Sit* fcer, n>are ^ngefagt So tjl and) offenbar, bag Sobanne^ ^ng nnb ben S36t)men fo(d)e^ (Mett ift ^ngefagt, nnb ntd)t all the wretchedness, all the errors and ruin of souls, which have fol- lowed since that council, are in a greater degree (ra e h r) the fault of the pope and of his party." 1 U n d i c h ma g's, etc., u and I would readily (cheerfully) be- lieve, that they have not judged well at all, nor honestly passed sen- tence of condemnation, who, through their faithless doings, have violated a Christian safe-conduct, and God's command, (and who) were, without doubt, more possessed of the evil spirit than of the Holy Spirit." 2 So ist Niemand, etc, " nor is any one so ignorant (as not to know) that violating safe-conduct and one's faith, is contrary to God's command, even though they were pledged to Satan himself, not to say a heretic." 190 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gefyatteri, fonbern bariiber 1 er tterbrennet 3rf) roitt ctitrf) Sofyanneg wg feinen jpettigen nod) 9D2artt)rer madjen, tt>ie etltdje SSofymen tbnn, ob id) gletd) befenne, bag ibm Unredjt gefdjefyen, unb fein 25nd) nnb et)re nnredjt fcerbammt ifh )enn otte$ @ertd)te finb fyeimlid) itnb erfdjrecftid), bie 3faemanb benn 2 er felbft allein ofenbaren unb au^brurfen wttt id) nur fagcn, er fci) etn ^efeer, 3 nne bofe er im^ mer morfjte fet)n, fo l>at man tl)n tntt Unred)t nnb n>tber ott t>erbrennet ; nnb foil bte SSoljmett nid)t brtngen, btlttgen, ober n>tr fommen fonpt nunmermefyr ^nr &$ mng nn3 4 bte 6jfentltd)e 3Bal)rl)ett etn^ macfyen, nnb ntd)t bie (Jtgenftnntgfett* <&$ l)ilft nid)t, 5 bag fie $n ber 3ett I)aben Dorgewenbet, bag etnem ^e^er fei) ntd)t $n fatten ba^ (^elett ; bag i\l eben fo t)te( gefagt, man foU otte^ e# bot ntd)t batten, anf bag man @otteg ebot l)a(te ^^ fyat fte ber ^enfel tod nnb tt)ortd)t gemad)^ bag fie nid)t baben gefel)en, it>a^ fie gerebet ober gettjan l)aben. @eleit fatten 6 I)at ott geboten, ba^ fottte man fatten, ob g(eid) bie 28e(t foWte nnterget)en r gefdjweige benn ein ^e^er (o^ n>erben @o fodte man bie ke^er mit (2d)riften, nid)t mit gener itbemnnben, wie bie a(ten SSater getfyan l)aben 2Benn eg 1 Sondern darQber er verbrennet (ist worden), but contrary to it (d a r U b e r, over it, across it) he was burnt." s Niemand, den n, no one except. Comp. p. 97, Note 2. 3 Er sei ein Ketzer, etc., "though he were a heretic, as bad as he could possibly be." 4 Es rnuss uns, etc. " The open truth, and not dogged per- tinacity, must unite us (the Germans and the Bohemians)." 5 Es hilft nicht, etc. " It is of no avail, that they then pre- tended that the safe-conduct is not to be held with a heretic. That is as much as saying (said), one must not keep the command of God (in one instance) in order that he may keep the command of God (in another)." 6 Geleit halten, a substantive phrase, in the accusative. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 191 ware, mtt gtncr Reiser $n itberttttnbcn, fo vtxiren tie fteitfer bte gcfebrtejlen Sectored auf (rben ; bitrften nrir a ud) md)t 2 mefyr fhtbtren, fonbent roekfyer ben anbern mtt ewa(t itberroanbe, mod)te tfyn tterbrennen. 3itm anbern, bag $atfer 3 itnb giirften fytnemfcfytrfen et* ltdje fromme tterjMnbige $8tfd)6fe nnb (Mefyrten, bet etb fetneu (Sarbtnal nod) pabfHtcfje SBotfdjaft, nod) $eermetjter ; benn bag 23otf tjt mel)r benn $n met nna,etet)tt in d)rtRltd)en @ad)en, unb fud)en and) ntd)t ber @ee(en ^et( : fonbent tt)te be ^3abft^ ^end)(er 3Kte tl)nn, thre etgene ewalt, 3^n^ en nnb Q?l)re. @te ftnb and) bie anpter gewefen biefe^ biefetbtgen efd)tcften 4 fotten 1 K a n s t, an art, an attainment. 2 Darften wir auch nicht, etc., " neither should we need to study any more, but whoever should overcome another with force, might burn him." 3 Dass Kaiser, etc. " (My proposal would be) that the empe- ror and princes send thither a certain number of pious and intelli- gent bishops, and learned men, but, for the life of you, no cardinal, nor papal delegate, nor inquisitor ; for these people are more than too ignorant in Christian affairs." 4 Geschickten, is not an adjective here, meaning skilful, but the participle of s c h i ck e n, used above, and means the persons sent, i. e. the messengers or delegates of the emperor and princes. " That these same persons thus sent, should ascertain of the Bohemians, how matters stand in regard to their faith, whether it would be pos- sible to unite all parties into one. Here ought the pope, out of regard to the souls of men, to lay aside, for a time, his supremacy, and, ac- cording to the decision of the most Christian council of Nice, to al- low the Bohemians to choose from among themselves an archbishop of Prague, whom the bishop of Olmutz in Moravia, or the bishop of Gran in Hungary, or the bishop of Gnesen in Poland, or the bishop of Magdeburg in Germany, might consecrate (confirm) ; it is suffi- cient if he is confirmed by one or two of these, as it was in Cypri- an's time. And the pope must not prevent such a course ; if he does so, he acts like a wolf and tyrant, and no one should follow him, but return his ban with another." All the bishops here mentioned by Luther, were archbishops. 192 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. erfnnbigen bet ben SBofymen, n>te eg um ifyren fanben be, ob eg mog(icf) n>dre, atte ifyre (secten in eine $n bringen. ner foil fid) ber ^>abfl um ber eefen nntten etne 3 e Wang feiner Dberfeit entdn$ern, nnb nad) bent (Btatnt beg after* djrifllidjften @oncilit Sfacdnt ben SSobmen gulaflen, einen (r$bifd)of$n^prag ang tbnen fetbjl ^u ertt?db(en, )t>errf)en bejMttge ber S3tfcf)of ^n Ddnit^ in ^dbren, ober ber S5tfrf)of $n ran in Ungarn, ober ber S3ifrf)of Don nefen in ^oten, ober ber S5ifrf)of jn 50?aa,bebura, in 2)entfrf)(anb ; ifi genna,, tt>enn er t)on biefer (5inem ober 3^ ee ^ beftdtiget vr>irb, tt>ie gn ben 3 e ^en t, dtjpriani gefd)al)* linb ber ^>abfl bat fofcfyed feine^ ^n tt>el)ren ; rcefyret er e^ aber, fo tbnt er a(^ ein 3Bo(f nnb ^t)rann, unb foil ifym niemanb folgen, nnb fein S5annen mit einem ^Biberbannen ^nritc! tretben* 3nm fitnfnnb^wanjigjten, bie Uni^erfitdten bebitrften and) tt>o^t einer gnten ftorfen 9?eformation, id) mug e^ fagen, e^ Derbriege n>en e^ mid 1 * 3ft bod) 2We3, 2 ma^ bag ^abjftbnm ^at eingefe^et nnb orbiniret, nnr gerid)tet anf itnbe nnb ^rrtfynm ^n met)ren, n>a^ finb bie Unitterfftdten, IDO fie nid)t anber^, benn bt^t)er, yerorbnet, benn, wie bag ^8nd) 50?ac* Cabdornm fagt r Gymnasia Ephesorum et Graecae gloriae, barinnen etn freieg ?eben gefnbret, wenig ber beifigen (Sdjrift nnb d)rifi:[td)er taube ge(et)ret nnrb, nnb aUcin ber btinbe t)eibnifd)e ^eijler ^ri(^ote(eg regieret and) weiter benn (5t)riflng ? ier tt>d're mtn ntein D^atb, bag bie 25ii* 1 Es verdriesse wen es will, let it off end whom it may . 2 1st doch AJles, etc. " If indeed everything (Is yet every- thing ?) which the papacy has introduced and established, tends only (is only arranged) to increase sin and error, what are the universi- ties (if not regulated otherwise than heretofore) but Gymnasia, etc., in which an unrestrained life is led, little of the Holy Scripture and of the Christian faith taught, and the blind heathen master Aristotle reigns alone, even more than Christ." G 1 a u b e, which is here in the genitive and governed by w e n i g, is used, as it frequently is in the old German, in the feminine gender. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 193 d)Cr 9lrt|letcfitf, Pliysicorum, Metaphysicae, de Anima, Ethi- corum, rochiie bttfbcr fur btc beftcn fjebaltcn, 1 a,an$ nnirben abgetban, mit atten anbcrn, btc yen natitrltd)en ^incjcn fid) ritbmcn, fe bed) nidjfg barinucn macj gcfebrct roerben, 3 tt>e* bcr yen natrirltdicn nod) t qetfHid)cn ma,en ; ba$u feme 3Remnng bibber -Tiicmanb ycrjtanbcn, nnb nut nnmtfeer 3lr# bett, (gtubircn nnb $eflen fe yic( ebfer 3 C ^ wb igeefeit itmfenjl bclabcn gcwcfcn jmb. 3d) barf ^ fagcn, ba^ cm Jtopfcr mcbr ^i'm(l bat bcr natitrfofycn ^tngcn, benn in be? nen ^itcbcrn ^cfd^rtebcn ftcbet* DaS mcd)tc id) <]erne (ctbcn, 3 bag 3(rt|lotelt(l SBitd)cr yen 1 Ftlr die besten gehalten (worden sind). 2 So doch nichts darinnen mag gelehret wer- d e n, " inasmuch as nothing may be learned from (in) them, either of natural or of spiritual things. Besides, no one has as yet under- stood his doctrines, and so much valuable time and (so many) minds have been needlessly burdened with useless labor, study and ex- pense (i. e. and much time and strength have been consumed to no purpose in useless, etc.). I may safely affirm that a potter has more knowledge (K it n s t for W i s s e n) than is found (stands) written in those books." 3 Das mochte ich gerne lei den, etc. " I would de- sire (would very willingly suffer) that Aristotle's books on log- ic, rhetoric, and poetry, should be retained (behalten with wtirden understood). Or, brought into another briefer (brief) form, they would be (have been) useful to exercise the youth in elo- quence and preaching (to speak well and to preach). But the (scho- lastic) comments and party contests (parties) ought to be abolished ; and as Cicero's rhetoric (is read) without comment and party-strife, so Aristotle's logic ought to be read (mUssten gelesen werden) in a simple (uniform) manner, without such bulky commentaries. But at present neither eloquence nor preaching is taught from it (one teaches neither, etc.), and nothing but disputes and .mumbling are made out of it. In connection with these (d a n e b e n) one should study (have) the Latin, Greek and Hebrew languages, mathematics and history, which (studies) 1 recommend to (the attention of) my superiors in knowledge, and which would suggest themselves, if one should seriously meditate a reformation (of the schools). And in- 17 194 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ber ogif, D^etorif, *)>oetif, bebaften, ober (Te in eine anbere fuqe germ gebradjt, nu(td) gewefen feiw nnirben, junge eute $u itben, tt>obl rebeu itnb prebigen ; aber bie Comment unb oecten mu|5ten abgetban, nub gleid) rote (tceromd Sfttyetorif, ol)tte Comment unb ecten, fo and) 2lrifttote(ig ogif, einformig, ofyne fe(d)e grogc Comment gelefcn werben, 5lber jefet lebret man tt>eber rcben nod) prebtgen barang, nnb tft gan^ etne }tfpntatton nnb 50^nberet barane^ gen>or^ ben, aneben bdtte man nun btc (gprad)en ?ateinifdj, rted)tfd) unb ^ebrdifd), bie Mathematicas, disciplinas, tf? torien, mefd)e^ id) befeble SScrfldnbigern, unb fid) fefbfl: roobf geben ttwrbe, fc man mit ^rnfl nad) einer Reformation trad)tete ; unb fitrnxifyr t)ie( baran getegen tjl. ^enn bier foil bie cfyrifHirfje Sugenb, unb unfer eble^ SSoffV bariunen bie (Sbriftenl)eit bleibet, gelefyret unb bereitet werben. X?ar^ urn id)'3 ad)te, bag fein pabjKidjer nod) ^aifer(id)cr 3Bcrf mbd)te gefd)eben r benn gute D^eformaticn ber UnitterjTttiten ; wieberum, fein teufelifdjered $3efen, bcnu unreformirte UniDerjTtdten, X)ie 2(er$te faffe id) ibre gacuftdten reformiren ; bie (len unb l)eofogen ne^me id) fur mid) unb fage $um bag eg gut tt>dre, ba^ geijHidje 9^ed)t, Don bent erften deed this is a matter of great importance. For here should the Christian youth of our noble nation, in which Christianity still has footing, be instructed and prepared (for their duties). Wherefore, I think no act more truly papal and imperial could be performed, than a thorough reform of the universities ; and on the- other hand, nothing more Satanic than universities unreformed. The physicians 1 leave to reform their (the medical) faculties ; the jurists and theo- logians I will take (in hand) for myself and say." Papstlicher and kai ser Ire he r, are in the comparative degree, without the terminations (papstlicheres, kaiserlicheres) as the substan- tive is neuter. See teuflicheres a line or two below. 1 Zum Ersten, etc., " first, that it would be well (that) the ca- nonical law should be expunged utterly (to the ground) from," etc. Dass after ware is omitted to avoid harshness. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 195 S3nd)tfaben, bid anf ben lefcten, untrbe $n rnnb anSgctilget, fcubcrltd) btc ecreta(en. &$ ift un$ itbrig genng 1 in ber SBibel gcfdmebcn, HMC twtr nnd in attcn ingen fatten fol* len ; fo fyinbert fold)e$ otnbtren nnr bie beilige <5d)rift, and) ba3 mcbrere l)eile nad) eitel ei$ nnb offaf)rt fdjmecft. Unb eb fdjcn mel @nteg barinnen ware, follte ed bennod) biflig nntcrgefyen, barnm, bag ber ^3a6|l: aKe gei^ Iid)e ^Hcd)tc in feined ^er^en^ ^ajlen 2 gefangen bat, bag binfert eitel nnnii^ed (Stnbtren nnb SSetrng barinnen ift. gctjllid)c^ ^ed)t, nid)t ba^ in ben 53itd)ern, fonbern in be3 ^pabjl^ nnb feiner (Sdjtneicftfer ?Q?ntbtt)ill ftel)et bit eine 6ad)C im geiftlid^en 5Ked)t, aegritnbet anf ^ llcrbefte, fo bat bcr ^>ab|l bariiber Scrinium pectoris, bar* narf) mug (Td) leufen attce D^ed^t nnb bie gan^e SOBelt. regicret baj]elbige Scrinium melmal ein ^Bnbe, nnb ber 1 Es 1st uns Obrig genug, etc., " there is quite enough writ- ten in the Bible (showing) how we should conduct ourselves in all things. There, such study only stands in the way of the Holy Scrip- tures ; and the greater part of it (canonical law) has the savor (lusts after) of avarice and pride." On Ubrig, see p. 108, Note 3. 2 In seines Herzens Kasten, etc., " holds it locked up in his own heart (fastened in the shrine of his heart), so that henceforth there is nothing in it (the canonical law) but useless study and de- ception. Now-a-days the canonical law is not that which is (stands) in the books, but what is in the arbitrary will of the pope and his flatterers. Though you have a cause, with the best support (founded in the best manner) in the canonical law, still the pope has a scrini- um pecloris respecting it, to which all law and the whole world mus conform. Now a knave, and even the devil himself often governs that scrinium, and yet it receives the praise (it causes itself to be praised) that the Holy Ghost governs it, i. e. it pretends to be gov- erned by the Holy Ghost. So they manage with the suffering people of Christ, impose on them many laws, observe none of them, and yet compel others to observe them, or to purchase a dispensation. Now since the pope and his adherents, have set aside even entire canoni- cal laws and do not regard them, and govern themselves everywhere only by their own arbitrary will, we should follow their example." 196 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fe( fefbfr, nnb fdgt fid) preifen, ber beiKqe eift reojere e$. @o gebet man urn mit bem armen $olf (SbrijH, fefct ibm inel Dfeobt, nnb bd(t feine^, $ttnna,t aubcre $n balfen, ober mtt elb git lofcn. ;iett>ei( benn ber ^Jabjl itnb bie (Beinen felbft a,an$e 9*^ lidje 9?ed)te aufgeboben, nid)t ad)tcn, nnb ftd) nnr nad) it)rem eujenett fj?utbtt>iileu batten itber aEe 5Bett, feUen wir ibnen fclgen, nnb bie 25itd)er and) crn?erfen. ^arntn fett^ ten wtr er t qcben^ barfnnen ftnbtren ? (Eo fonnen nnr and) mmmermeljr be^ -pabfid ^utbmittcn, we(d)e^ nun (jetft(fd)e^ geworben tfl, au^Iernen. (5t fo fall' e3 r ja baljtn in Stamen, ba^ in 1 ^ Xcnfe^ Stamen jTd) erbeben bat, nnb fep fetn Doctor Decretorum mebr anf Arbeit ; fonbern Doctores scrinii papalis, ba5 jTttb be ^)abft^ CUd)(er. fa(]t, ba fein fetnere^ n>eltlid)e^ $Ke t qiment irgenb fei), benn bei ben itrfen, bie bod) weber ^eift(id)e^ nod) roelt* Iid)e^ 5Ked)t l)aben, fonbern allein ibren Stlforan : fo mitffen wir befennen, bag nid)t fd)dnbtid)ere^ D^e e qiment ijl, benn bei mt$, bnrd) qeiftttdje^ nnb it)dt(id)e^ 9?ed)t, bag fein (^tanb mebr (jebet, natiirlidjer SSernnnft, gcfdjwetge ber fyettigen (5d)rift gemd'g* tt>elt(td)c ^Ked)t, biff ott, mie iff and) ba^ etne qeworben ! $Btett>ot)f e^ t)ie( beffer, fitnRlid)er r reb(td)er tjl, benn ba3 geijKtdje, an tt>e(d)em r itber ben 9ta* men/ 2 nid)t^ ute^ ift, fo i(l fein bod) and) rnel ju Dtel ge^ morben* gitrwabr, Dcrnihiftigc D^egenten 3 neben ber fyeili* 1 Ei so fall' es, etc. "Come, then, in God's name, let that which, in Satan's name has elevated itself, fall (dahin, away)." 2 Ueber den JNamen, etc., "in which there is nothing good beyond the name. Still it has become far too bulky." Sein, is genitive for seiner and is governed by z u v i e 1. Literally, " Yet if it has become much too much." See p. 46, Note 4. 3 FUrwahr, vernunftige Regenten, etc. " Indeed, sen- sible rulers would be quite competent with (the aid of) the Holy Scriptures. St. Paul says," etc. i. e. would be able to get along without laws. On U b r i g, see p. 108, Note 3. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 197 gen (Sdjrtfr, roaren iibrig red)t genng, me @t *panfo$ 1. . 6. fagt : ,,3fl 9iiemanb itntcr end), ber ba moge feineS (5ad)e ridjten, bap ibr ttor beibnifdjen erid)ten mitfifet babern ? (3 biinft mid) gleid), 1 bag anbred)t imb I'anbfttten ben $aifer(id)en gemeinen 3ted)ten werben fcor* ge^ogen, nnb bie $aifer(td)cn nur $nr ^otb gebraurfjt. Unb woffte ott, bag, nne ctn jeglirf)c^ ?anb fctne etgene 5Irt nb (35abcn bat, alfo and) mtt cigencn fur^cn Dfcofyten re# gtert mitrbcn, tt)te fie rcgieret jTnb gewefen, ebe fokfye 9?ed)te ffnb crfintben, nnb nod) obne fte mefe ?dnber recu'ert wer? ben. l^ie n?eit(anftigen nnb fern gefndjten Dfled)te (Tnb mtr S3efd)n>ernng ber ?ente unb mebr inbernig benn gbrbe? rung ber adjem X^od) id) bojfe, e3 fei) bie 8ad)e fd)on Don Unbent bejfer bebadjt nnb angefefyen, benn id)'^ mag anbringen. 2 9ftcine lieben X()eo(ogen baben ffd) anS ber 5D?nf)e nnb 3(rbeit gefcfct, faffen bie SBibefn mobt rnfyen nnb (efen Sen- tentias. 3 (So tt>ir benn 4 b^^tt ben 9tamen nnb ^titet, bag tt)ir ?ebrer ber ^. ^d)rift beigen, fottten vt)ir wabrlid) ge^wnn^ gen fetm, bem Sftamen nad) bie * (5d)rift nnb feine anbere 311 lebren. ^nn aber, fo Sententiae atten ^errfcften, ftnbet 1 Es dankt mich gleich, etc. " It seems to me that the laws and usages of the particular State, should be preferred to the imperial (which was a modification of the civil law)." Luther desired and who will deny his wisdom in this matter ? that each of the States included in the German empire, should be governed as far as possi- ble by laws which grew out of its own necessities, and that the Roman and imperial law be resorted to only when the former was in- sufficient." Gle ich, as, as though, cannot be translated here. 2 Denn ic h's rnag anbringen, " than I can present it." 3 Sententias, the books of the scholastic theologians or Sen- tentiarists, who quoted the sententiae of the Fathers, as authorities. 4 So wir denn, etc. " Since we have the name and title of being teachers (so that we are called teachers)," etc. 17* 198 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. man mebr fyeibnifdjen nnb menfdjtidjen ^itnfef, 1 bettn fyeittqe genrijfe ?efyren ber (Sdjrift in ben l)eofoa,em 2Bie tDotfen nnr il)m nnn tfynn ? 2 3d) roeig bier feinen anbern fftatb, benn etn bemittf)tgeg @ebet gn ott, bag ung berfelbe >octore3 gbeologia gebe, Doctored ber jhtnft, ber 3lr^net, ter 9?ed)te, ber (Bententien, mogen ber ^abjl, $aifer nnb UntDerfttaten macf)en ; aber fet) nur gemfg, 3 etnen doctor ter beitfgen @rf)rtft mirb btr -yitemanb mad)en r benn attetn t)er l)et(tcje et(l t)om nmme(, te (5hrt(lit^ fagt Sol). 6, : ,,<5te muffen atte Don ott fetber ge(el)ret feijn." 9tim fragt ber betlt t qe @etfl: ntcfyt narf) rotb, braun ^areten, 4 ober roaS be^ ^prangen^ tjl, 5 aurf) ntcf)t ob etner jnng ober alt, Sate ober 9>faff, 5D?oncf) ober weltlirf), Sungfraii ober efyettcf) fet). X)te S5itrf)er mi't^te man and) roemtjern, nnb erfefen bie fceften ; benn Dtel 55itdf)er macf)en ntc^t gele^rt, t)te( ?efen and) ntd)t ; 6 fonbern a,nt X)tng nnb oft lefen, nne n>entg fefn ipt, ba^ mad)t gelel)rt in ber (gd^rift, nnb fromm ba$n. 3a e^ fofften atter l)eifigen better @d)rift 7 nnr eine 3eitfang 1 DQnkel, from dunken, not to be confounded with Dun- kel. 2 Wie wollen wir ihtn nun thun? " How now shall we manage it (do to it, or in regard to it) ?" 3 Aber sey nur gewiss, " but be well assured." Nur, only assured, nothing but assured, i. e. well assured. 4 Fare t for Bare t, a cap. Thesis often used for If in Ger- man, especially in the south of Germany, and in the old writers. 3 Oder, was des Prangen's ist, "or what (anything that) pertains to show." 6 Viel Lesen auch nicht, etc., "nor does extensive read- ing, but valuable matter and frequent reading, however little of it (sein, genitive for seiner, referring to Ding) there may be, that makes one learned in the Scriptures and pious too." No mod- ern teacher on this subject has expressed more truth in fewer words. 7 V a t e r S c h r i f t, the writings of the Fathers. Luther seems to use the word S c h r i f t as a collective, with a plural verb. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 199 wcrben gefefeu, baburcf) in bie (Srfjrift $u fommen ; l fo fefen mir jTe nur, bag wtr bariu bfetbcn, imb nimmcr in bie 8dmft fommcn, bamtt roir gtekb benen (Tub, bie bie 2Bege# $eid)eu aufebeu, unb nxinbcht bcnnorfj ben 5Beg nimmer. ie Kebcit SSdter baben und motten in bie Sofyrift fitfyren, mit i brent Scfyreibcn, fo fiibren tt)ir nn^ bamit berau^ ; fo bocb allein @rf)rift nnfer 5iBeingd)itfen bie Dornebmjte nnb gemctnfle Section fei)n : bie bci(ige @rf)rift, 3 unb ben jungcn ^naben ba Unb wottte @ott, erne jebe (Stabt batte and) eine Srf)ii(e, bavin bed ageg bie 5SJJagb(ein eine tunbe bag @ancjelium borten, eg tt>are ju beutfd) ober lateinifd), gitrwabr bie @cf)u(cn, 5D?ann^ unb grauen^tojler, 4 (Tnb t>or 3^it^n barauf angefancjen, gar au (obfirfjer cf)rift(id)er 5D?cituntg, rote n>tr lefen k)on (St. Signed unb mefyr ^eitigen; ba ttwrben beittge Sungfrauen nub 5Q?drtt)rer, unb jlunb ganj n>ol)( 5 in ber @l)rijlenbeit ; aber nun ijl: nid)t mebr benn SScten unb iugeu baraud gewcrbeu* ottte uicfyt 1 DadurchindieSchrift zu kommen, etc., " to come thereby (i. e. to be introduced by them) to the Scriptures; but we read them (the writings of the Fathers) only to remain in them, and never to come to the Scriptures, whereby we resemble those who look at the guide-boards, and yet never follow the way (they point out)." 'Sodoch allein Schrift unser Weingarten ist, " whereas the Scriptures alone are our vineyard.' 3 :die heilige Schrift, the semicolon in German is some- times used very much like a dash in English, to give emphasis to a word. 4 Die Schulen, Mann- und Frauen-Kloster. " In ear- ly times schools, (i. e.) convents for males and those for females, be- gan with this object in view." 5 Und (es) stand ganz wohl, etc. "and it was very well with Christianity," i. e. the Christian church was in*a healthy condi- tion. 200 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. biflig ein jeber GStyripten^enfrf) 1 bei feinen newt unb $ebn* ten 3abren nnfifen bad gan$e fyetfige (Jttangeftnm, ba fein 9tame ttttb ?eben innen jtefyet ? 2 ?efyret bod) eine (Bpin# nerin 3 unb 9tdl)erin tfyre od)ter baffelbe anbn>erf in jnn* gen 2>al)ren ; aber nun wtffen bad (t>angelinm and) bte grogen ge(el)rten ^)ra'(aten nnb SBtfcfyofe fefbjl: ittc^t ) vr>te nng(etd) fasten tt)tr mtt bem armen jnngen an^ fen, ber nn3 befoblen tft, jn regtcren nnb nnterroetfen ? 4 Unb frf)Were JHecfynnng bafitr mug gegeben vt>erben, bag tt)tr ttjnen ba^ 5Bcrt otte$ ntd)t orfegen : gefrfjte^t tfynen, 5 tt)te 3erewta^ fagt : $ (ageL 2. : ^etne 5(ngen fmb t)or 5[Betnen mitbe geworben, mem (tngercetbe iji erfrf)tocfen, metne eber tft an^gefd)itttet auf bte Qrrbe, nm be^ SSer^ berben^ wttten ber ^crf)ter metne^ S5o(f^ r ba bte 3ungen nnb ^tnbfein tterberben, anf affen affen ber ganjen (Stabt (Ste fprad^en ^n tbren 5D7itttern : 5Bo tjl S5rob nnb $Betn ? Unb t>erfd)mad)ten a(^ bte Sermunbeten anf ben ber @tabt r nnb gaben ben etft anf tm (2d)oog tl)rer ter/' X;tefen etenben 3^wmer fe()en trtr ntd)t, 6 ttrie and) je^t bad jnnge -Soff mitten in ber ^brijlenl)eit tterfcfymarf)* tet nnb erbarm(id) t)erbirbt r ebrecfyen l)alben bed (^angc# (inmd, 7 bad man mtt ifynen immer treiben nnb itben fottte, 1 Christen-Mensch. Mensch, like homo in Latin, stands for a human being, and therefore may be applied to a person but nine or ten years old. Mann could not be so used. 8 Dasein Name innen steht, for darin sein Name steht. 3 Lehret doch eine Spinnerin, etc. is not a hypothetical clause, but a strong affirmation, as an antithesis to the latter clause. 4 Derunsbefohlenist, zuregieren und unterwei- sen, " which is committed to us to be governed and instructed (to govern and to instruct)." U n g le i c h, refers to what is done to the spinster and seamstress. 5 (Es) geschiet ihnen. 6 Seheii wir nic'ht, " we do not see," i.e. we shut our eyes to. 'Gebrechenhalben des Evangeliums, "on account ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 201 28tr fottteu auch, 1 wo bie (jobeu 6d)n(cu fleigig n)dren in bcr l)ct(u]cu (Sdjrifr, ntd)t bafyiu fdnrfcn ^ebermamt, roie jcfct a.efd)iebt, ba man niir fraget nad) bcr 9Sttena.e, unb cm 3eber unff efncn Doctor baben, fonbcrn atfein bie 2U(crgefdncftcften, in ben fleiuen Sdntlen t>or ttjobf er* $oa.en, bavitber ctn gitrft cbcr Ofatb eincr (stabt fo(t 2(d)t baben, unb nidit jufafien $u fenbcn, bcnn tt>obtgcfd)tcfte. $Bo aber btc bctltge @d)rift ntd)t rcgtcrt, ba ratbc id) fiir^ wabr 97iemanb bag cr fcin ^inb l)tntbuc (g^ mug crbcr^ ben 2l((c3, 2 ma^ uid)t cttc^ &$ort el)nc Untcrfag trcibct ; barum fcbcn wtr and), 3 n>a^ fitr SSolf wirb nub i(l in ben bobcn djiilcn ; ift ^icmaub^ 6d)it(b bcnn bc^ ^abftctf, SBtfcbofc unb ^rafatcn, bcncn fo(d) bc^ jungcn SSclfc^ 9ftu$cn bcfcl)(en tft. X^cnn bic l)obcn (B;d)u(eu fodtcn cr^icbcn ettcl bed)crfl:anbi(]e ?cntc in bcr @d)rift, bie ba tnocfyten 95i# fd)6fe unb ^farrfyerren merben, an bcr (Spi^c fteben 4 tt)ibcr of a deficiency of the Gospel." Halben does not govern E van- gel i urns, but always governs the noun which it follows Ge- brechen, in this instance. 1 W i r s o 1 1 1 e n a u c h, etc. " E ven if the Universities (that is the meaning ofhohen Schulen) were diligent in (the study of) the Scriptures, we ought not to send (indiscriminately) every one thither, as is now done, inasmuch as men are anxious only about numbers (the universities seek to be much frequented) and every man wishes to have (his son) a doctor but only the most promis- ing (who have been) previously well trained in the preparatory schools. Respecting this matter the ruler or council of a city should exercise a supervision and not permit (persons) to send (to the uni- versities) any but young men of talents." 2 Es muss verderben Alles. Allesisin the nomina- tive. 3 Darum sehen wir auch, etc. " for this reason do we see what sort of persons are formed (w i r d, become) and now exist (i s t)," i.e. do we see such persons as are now formed and as now exist in the universities. 4 Pfarrherrn werden (und) an der Spitze ste- he n, " become pastors and stand at the head (as leaders)," etc. 202 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bie $e|$er unb Zenftl unb alter 2Beft. 2Iber tt>o ftnbet man ba3 ? 3angigften, id) n>eig wobl, bag ber ro* mifcfye ^aufe nnrb orn>enben unb bod) aufbfafen, 1 ite ber l)abe ba^ beifige romtfdje D^etd) t)on bem grted)ifd)en geuommen, unb an bie Seutfdjcn gebrad)t,fiir me(d)e nub 3Bob(tl)at er btKig Untcrtljdnigfctt, X^anf unb Qbut?$ an ben eutfd)cn oerbtenet unb ertangt baben fott, ^egbalb fie t)tetteui)t atterlet t)ornebmen, jie git reform mtren, jTd) untenDtnben werben, in ben SOBinb ^u fd)(agen r unb ntrf)t^ la (fen anfeben, benn fo(d)e^ romifchen S5egabungen. 3(u^ biefem rnnbc fyaben (Te bibber d)en tbeuern ^taifer fo mutbmittig unb ubermiitbig erfo(gt unb gebrncft, bag jammer tjt e^ ^n fagen, 3 nnb mtt berfe^ ben S5et)enbigfett (Trf) felbj! ^u )berl)erren gemad)t r atfer tt)ertltd)er ewaft nnb )brigfeit, nnber ba^ l)ei(ige ^t)an^ geliitm, barum id) and) bat)on reben mug* (5$ ijl ot)ite Sweifet, bag red)te rbmifd)e 9?eid), baDon bie 1 Vorwenden und hoch aufblasen, pretend and trumpet aloud that (how)," etc. Vorwenden, see p. 99, Note 7. A u f b 1 a s e n, to make a proud display of a thing. See p. 99, Note 7. 2 Far welche Ehre, etc. " for which honor and benefit he deserves in reason, and should have received, submission, gratitude, and every favor from (he deserves, etc. in) the Germans. There- fore they will, perhaps, venture (s i c h u n t e r w i n d e n) to disre- gard (in den Wind zu schlagen) every kind of attempt to reform them, and allow one to regard nothing but the grant of such a Roman empire." Sich unterwinden, see p. 155, Note 3. In den Wind zu schlagen, (to give to the winds), to disre- gard, to despise. Begabungen. The plural may refer to the successive grants of the empire, made to the different emperors. 3 Dass Jammer istzu sagen, " that it is painful to speak of it." ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 203 @rf)rift bcr sprepbeten 9?um. 24. unb Mantel tterffwbtget baben, fangji gerftort tfl unb cut (5nbe bat, wie 93ataam 9(itm. 24. flar tterfi'tnbujet bat, ba er fpracfy : ,,fed roerben bte Sftbnrer fommen, unb bie Suben feerftbren, unb barnarf) roerben jTc and) nntergeben." Uub ba$ tft gefcfyeben 1 bitrrf) bte etag, fcnberltcf) aber, ba beg itrfen 9?etcb tjt ange^ gangcn, bet raufenb Sabren, unb tfl a(fo mtt ber 3^it abge# fallen ?((Ten unb 5tfrifa, barnarf) granfrctrf), (Spanten, ^u^ lefet 3Senebt t q aufgefommen, unb niofytS mebr ju 9?om geblte* ben Don ber Dortgen @en>alt. X)a nun ber ^>ab|l bte rtecfyen unb ben ^atfcr $u ^on^ jlanttnopel, ber erbltrf) rbmtfrf)er ^atfer war, ntrf)t med)te uad) fetnem 5D?ntlnt>ttten gtDtngen/ bat er em fold)e^ gitnb^ lein erbaefyt, tbn beffelben ;Keid)^ nnb 9iamen gu berauben, unb ben Deittfdjen, bte ^t ber 3^it j^rettbar unb gute^ @e^ ferret retcfy 2 n>aren, ^nguwenben, bamtt ffe beg romtfcfyen 1 Und das ist geschehen, etc. "And this took place through the Goths, and especially when the kingdom of the Mo- hammedans arose, about a thousand years ago, and thus in process of time Asia and Africa fell off, and afterwards France and Spain and finally Venice arose, and, at Rome nothing of its former power re- mained." TtJrken is used here in a wide and loose sense. Bei tausend Jahren qualifies geschehen. Angehen (ange- g a n g e n) is used here, as it often is elsewhere, in the sense of be- ginning. The position ofFrankreich und Spanien is am- biguous. But the construction is simple, and the sense better, to connect them with the following rather than with the preceding words. Z u Rom is not connected with b 1 e i b e n, but with nichts mehr; otherwise the dative without z u would be used. 2 Gutes Geschrei reich, " rich in good report," i. e. in very high repute. Geschrei was once used as Ruf now is, report, fame. See p. 42, Note 5, on both words. Geschre i is still used in the sense of report, but only of evil report. The extensive use of the word reich to express abundance, is apparent especially in such compounds as, geistreich, liebreich, fischreich, which in old German were written separately, with the first part in the geni- tive. Reich is now commonly construed with an, as reich an guten Werke, " rich in good works." 204 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ewaft unter (Td) brddjten, nnb tton ibren $u eben ajenge. Unb ift and) alfo gefdjefyen ; bem $aifer $u @onftantincpe( ifi e3 genommen, imb nn6 eutftf)en 2 ber 3>came unb Xitel befielben $na,efd)rieben, jmb banut be$ spabfteg $ned)te gcworben, nnb ijl nun ein anbereg romi* fd)e3 D^eirf), ba^ ber *pabjl l)at anf bie ^eutfdjen gebauet jene^, ba^ erfte, tft lancjjl:, trie gefagt, nntergcgangen* l)at nun 3 ber romtfd)e tnM, feinen ^ntbrnttfen, ) a ^ e tt atte^ett ber X)eutfd)en SinfdtHgfett mi^ brand) t,) 9^om cingcnommcn, ben bcutfdjcn ^atfer bcrau^ getrteben, nnb mit Ctben t)erpfltd)tet r nid)t in D?om gn wob? nen ott romifd)er $ aifer fepn, 4 nnb bennod) 9?om nid)t inne l)aben ; ba$u atte^eit in be^ ^)abjl:^ nnb ber Seinen 5D?ntbtt>i(Ien bangen nnb roeben, bag n?ir ben 9tamen baben, nnb fie ba^ ?anb nnb tdbte* Senn ffe albeit nnfere (Jtnfdltigfeit nu^brand)t l)aben, $n il)rent Uebermntt) nnb 1 Und von ihren Handen, etc. "and that (it) might pro- ceed from their hands as a fief." The word ihren, is used by neg- ligence for se i ner referring to Pabst. So sie in the preceding clause refers to the Romans, whereas, grammatically, it should refer also to Pabst. 2 Und uns Deutschen, etc. " and to us Germans the name and title of it is given (ascribed) and we are (w i r, understood) thereby made slaves of the pope ; and now there is another (or second) Roman empire, which the pope has built up upon the Ger- mans." 3 Also hat nun, etc. "Thus the apostolical chair has now its heart's desire (viz. it has) taken Rome," etc. 4 (Man) soil romischer Kaiser seyn, etc. "One is to be Roman emperor and yet not have Rome under his control ! Be- sides, always be dependent on and interwoven with the good pleasure of the pope and his friends, so that we have the name, and they the country and cities!" The preposition in instead of an with h a n g e n before M u t h w i 1 1 e n, gives a peculiar shade to the idea. It conveys the idea of an internal connection, approaching that ex- pressed by we ben, but does not imply any affection. See p. 132, Note 3. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 205 i)rannci, wtb beijlcn nnd 1 totfe Xcntfcfyc, bie fui) dflFen nnb narron laficn, unc fte wellen. .Vint webfon, ett tern crrn ift'd etn fteincd Xing Dietd) nub Auvjkntbnm bin nnb l)cr Jit roerfcn ; cr ift fo mtlfr berfelben,- ban cr $nn>cttcn cincm befcn 23nben etn $cmgreid) gicbt unb nimmt c& ctncm grommcn. 3i l ^t(en $ bitrcb 2>errdtbcrei bbfcr nntrciter 5Kenfd)en, ^utt?etlen burd) Arbeit, wte vr>tr ba^ Icfcn in bem ^enigrctd) ^crpen, rte^ d)en(anb nnb fa ft alien SKetdjcn. Unb XanicI 2. nnb 4. fagt : r ,(5r wobnct im ^immcf, ber iiber a((e- m$e berrfd)et, unb er allein ift e^, ber bie ^tontgreid)e tterfei$et, bin nnb l)er tt>irff, nnb madjt." Darum, n>ie 3Riemanb fann ba^ fitr ,qrog acbten, ba$ tbm etn Dteid) wtrb jngetbeifet, fenberiicfy fo er etn @brifi: ift : fo mogcn ttur Xentfd)en and) ntd)t fabren, 4 bag nn^ ein netted romifd)e0 D^eid) ift Senu e3 ijl Dor fetnen 5(ngen eine fcb(cd)te ^5abe r bie er ben 3ltfernntitd)tia.ften bad mebrmal 5 giebt, $3 fagt : ,,2(tfe bie anf (Jrben tvobnen, (wb Dor feinen aid bad 9tid)td t(l, 6 nnb er bat etr>a(t in atten D^eidjen ber ?U2enfd)en, jTe ^n geben, tt>e(d)em er n^itt/ 7 5Bien>ol)( nnn ber 9>abft, mtt (Sett>a(t unb Unredjt bad 1 Und heissen uns, etc. "and call us senseless Germans^ who suffer themselves to be treated as apes and fools, according to their pleasure." On a ffe n and narren, see p. 108, Note 7. 2 Mild derselben, "free or liberal in regard to them." i. e empire and principality. For this use of mild, see p. 60, Note 2. Derselben is in the genitive, which has a very wide and loose use in the German. See p. 117, Note 1. In old German we meet with such expressions as D a n k e s m i 1 d e, abundant in thanks. 3 Z u w e i 1 e n introduces a sentence, which is properly but a clause of the preceding. 4 Hochfahren, to lie proud (to soar high), is now used only in the participial form h o c h f a h r e n d, lofty, proud. 5 Das mehrmal, more frequently, not exactly equivalent to mehrmals, frequently. It is no now in use. 6 Das Nichts ist, " that which is nothing." 18 206 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. romtfrfje 9?dd), ober be ronrifdjen D?etd)g 9tamen, bat bem recfyten gaffer beraubet, unb im$ entfd)en $ngeu>enbet ; fo ijl es> bod) gett)t, ba @ott beg 9)abfte SSogfyett biertn bat gebrand^t, beutfdjer Nation em fohfyeg DTetd) $n geben, nnb nad) gatt ^ er ^ en ri>nufd)en D?etd)g, etn anbereg, bag je&t jlet)t, aitfturtrf)ten, Unb nneroof)! n>tr ber ^dbjte 1 55o^l)ett f)ierm ntrf)t Urfad)e geben, nod) tbre faffd)cn efitd)e nnb fcerftanben, baben n>tr bed) bnrrf) pabjHtcfye nnb ^c^alfbett, mtt imgabligem SSfiitDercjtef en, mtt Unterbritcfnng iinferer gretbett, mtt 3f^^ 2 nb D'fanb atter iinferer (fitter, fonberlid) ber ftfedpft nnb ^friutben, mtt 25n(ben nnertra\qlti)er ^ritgcrei nnb Sc^ma letber att^n tbener, be^abtet* $Btr baben be men, aber ber ^pabfl b^t nnfer nt, ^bre, ?etb r ?eben, @ee(e, nnb ^llle^ wa^ mtr baben. (go foil man bt'e ent* fcfyen ta'nfrf)en, 3 nnb mtt SEaufdjen ta'nfd)en. X)a^ baben bte ^)abfl:e gefnd)t/ bag (te gerne $atfer wa'ren gewefen, 1 Und wiewohl wir der Pabste, etc. "And though we did not wholly give (geben for gegeben, with haben un- derstood) cause (or occasion) to the wickedness of the popes, nor un- derstand their false attempt and designs." G e s u c h means properly seeking through request., visit, and undoubtedly here refers to the re- quest of the pope that the Franks would deliver Italy. 2 Zusatz, that which is added to a small income, to piece out a living; and hence any additional expense. 3 Deutschen tauschen, a play upon the words, and hence the repetition : " So must they humbug ihe Wyttembergers, and give them humbug upon humbug." 4 Das haben die Pabste gesucht, etc. "That did the popes attempt, because they would gladly have been emperors ; and because they could not accomplish this, they (nevertheless) set them- selves above the emperors." Das at the beginning of the sentence refers to the whole plan of the popes in respect to the Greek empire in Italy, and the sentence is explanatory of the words Gesuch undMeinungen, above. See also the last sentence of the next paragraph. The use of d ass in the sense of because, is not very common in modern German; in old German it is more common. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 207 unb ba jTc bail nirfjt baben mogen fd)trfen, fyaben ffc (Tcf) bod) itber bfc $aifcr gefet. benn burd) C5otte3 cfrfjicf imb bofer 9D?enfd)en ol)nc uuferc cfoulb, bad 3{etd) uns? gegeben tjr, rottf id} md)t ratben, baffelbe fabreu gu fafien, fonbern in ottcS $urd)t, fo (ange e$ . tt)m gefatft, rebKd) regteren. 2)enn tt)te , gefagt ift, ed (icgt ibm nfd)td baran, 2 wo em Sfteui) berfommt, cr it)t(C cd bcnitcd) 3 recjicrt babcn. aben ed btc ^Vibfic uureb(td) anbcrn genommen, fo babcn wtr cd bod) mofjt unrcb(id) c qen>onncn, @d tpt and burd) bodwttttgc 5Dicnfd)cn and ottcS Widen (jegcbcn, bcnfetben wir met)r anfebett, 4 benn ber 9>abfle falfdic ^cinung, bte fie barttt ge^ babt, felbft gaffer nnb mcbr benn gaffer ^u fei;n, unb un^ nur mtt bcm Dtamen a'ffcn unb fpotten* er ^6nt t q ,511 35abt>ron batte fern D?eid) and) ntft D^auben unb @en>a(t genommen, bennod) wottte ott baflfefbe regte^ ret baben burd) bte betttcjen gitrften, l^antef, Sfnania, 5lfa^ rfa, gjjjtfacL 2Sie(mebr raid er Don ben d)rt|l(td)en beutfdjeit ^itrjlen btefed ^Kefd) rec^teret t)aben, e^ babe e^ ber ^pabfi: geftobfen ober geraubt, ober tton ^eiten an 5 gemad)t ; eg Mogeu stands for gemocht. See p. ii4, Note 1. Se hie ken means to adjust, to make a thing succeed. 1 Gottes Geschick und boser Menschen Gesuch. This is an alliteration, bearing some little analogy to the English proverb, " Man appoints, God disappoints." 2 Es liegt ihm nichts daran. See p. 70, Note 2, and p. 169, Note 4. Wo ein Reich herkommt, forwoher ein Reich kommt. 3 Er will es dennoch, etc. " He would nevertheless have it governed (whatever be its origin)." 4 Denselben wir mehr a n s e h e n, " which (same) we re- gard more than," etc. After the words "false design of the popes," the clause, u which they had in it," is tautological. " To be themselves emperors and more than emperors," is dependent on M e i n u n g. 5 VonNeuen an, anew, from a new point of time onward. An, onward, is not needed here, and cannot so well qualify ma- c he n, as the idea of continued existence after it is made. 208 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ift Sftfe^ 1 otte Drbmmg, mltr barum baben geitwgt, eg()afb mag fid) ber ^>abft unb bte (Semen itiofyt rufjmen, bag ffe bcntfd)er Nation baben grog nte3 getban mtt $er* letben btefe$ romtfrfjen 9?etd)e^ 3um erften 2 barum, bag jTe ntd)t3 @nteg nnd gegonnet babcn, fouberu baben unfere Qnnfdlrtgfett barm mtgbrandjr, tbren Uebermutl), ituber ben recfyten romtfdjen ^atfer ^it donftanttnopef, ^u jla'rfen, bem ber ^abjl fc(d)e^ gcnommen bat, wtber ott unb D?ed)t, beg er feme ercaft batte, 3um anbern, bag ber ^abft babnrrf) ntrf)t nn^, fonbern t()in felbjl: baei $atfertbnm ^n^netgnen gefnrf)t bat, ibm $n nntermerfen 3 atte nnfere ewaft, gretbett, @nt, ?etb nnb eefe, nnb bnrrf) nn^ (wo e^ ott nid)t batte gewebret) alle ^Jctt, n>ie ba^ f(arlid) in fetnen Decretafen er felbjl er^a'blt, nnb mtt maudjen bofen Xitcfen an Dteten bentfd)en ^aifern erfnd)t bat 2tffo ffnb tt)tr 2)eittfd)en fyitbfd) bentfd) getebret ; ba n>tr t>ermemet ^erren ^n n^erben, ftnb n)tr ber atter(t|ligften $tpranuen $ned)te gemorben, baben ben 5y?a^ men, ttel nnb Happen be^ $atfertf)nm3 ; a ber ben 1 Es ist a lies, etc. " It is all of God's ordination ; it (which) took place before we had any knowledge of it." 2 Zum ersten, etc. " First they have not done us a favor, but have therein abused our simplicity in order to strengthen them- selves (their arrogance) against the rightful Roman emperor at Con- stantinople, from whom the pope took it (the empire) contrary to (the law of) God and to justice, when he had no power over it." D e s s genitive governed by G e w a 1 1. 3 I h rn zu u n te r w e rfe n,etc. 1 h m here, as above, for si c h. " To subject to himself our power, liberty, property, body and soul, and through us (if God had not prevented) all the world, as he him- self has clearly expressed it in his decretals, and has made the at- tempt with various wicked intrigues upon many German emperors. Thus we Germans are taught in fine German (i. e. as we Germans generally are, by being wheedled). While we expected to become masters, we have become the slaves of the most insidious of tyrants ; we have the name," etc. ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 209 @eroart, 9terf)t nub gretfyctt befielben bat bet ^abjl: ; fo frigt ber %\ibf?: ben $ern, fo fpiefen nnr mtt ben lebtgen @o belfc uitS ett, bcr fo(d) 9?etd), (rote gefagt) itn* burd) fifltge Styranncn l)at $ugeroorfen, unb $u regteren be* foblen, bag rotr ami) bem 9iamen, tte( unb Happen go(ge tlntn, 1 unb unfeve grctyett, crvetten, bte 9?6mer etntnaf (af^ fen fel)en r >a^ wtr burd) fie Don ott empfangen fyafcem D^itbmen fie fid), fie haben un^ etn ^atfertt)um ^ugewenbet : rool)(an, 2 fo fet) e^ affo, Tag ja fetjn, fo gebe ber ^>abfl ()er 9fiom unb Stfleg, ma^ er t)at om ^aifertf)nm, taffe unfer ?anb fret tton feinem unertraglid)en (Sd)d^en itnb @d)inben, gebe vineber unfere greiljett, ewalt, nt, (5t)re, ?eib unb (seefe, unb (aflfe 3 etn $atfertl)um fet)n x n>ie etnem ^aifer^ thum gebit^ret, auf bag fetnen s 2Borten unb SSorgeben ge^ nug gefdjefye, 5Bttt er aber ba^ mdjt tf)un, wa^ fpiegelftd)t 4 er benn mtt fetnen fa(fd)en erbtd)teten Morten unb efpitgnt'fen ? 3(1 fetn ntd)t genug gewefen, 5 burd) fo met fyunbert 3at)re r bte ebte Nation fo grob(td) mtt ber -ftafe umjufubren, ol)ne atte^ SUifboren ? @^ folget ntd)t, bag ber ^abft fottte itber ben $atfer fei)n, barum, bag er tfyn fronet ober mad)t )enn j. * Folge thun, o-ie effect to the name, title, and coat of arms. 2 W o h 1 a n, etc. " Very well ! so be it ; let it then take place ; let the pope surrender Rome and whatever of the empire he has," etc. 3 Und lasse, etc. "and let an empire exist, as becomes an empire, in order that his words and pretence be fulfilled." 4 Was spiegelficht, etc. " Why does he make a mock-fight with his false, hypocritical words and ghostly terrors ?" Spiegel- fichten, is not now used as a verb, but it occurs as an infinitive used substantively. On GespUgnissen, see p. 96, Note 1. 5 1st sein nicht genug gewesen? " Has there not been enough of it ?" Sein is in the genitive for seiner, and governed by genug. " In leading about (to lead about) for so many centuries, so savagely, the noble nation without intermission ?" 18* 210 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fcer ^Propfyet @t amnef fafbte nnb fronte ben $ontg (ganl wtb atnb, an3 gottlidjem SBefebt, unb roar bod) ifynen nn* tertian* Unb ber 93ropfyet 9tatl)an fatbete ben $6nta, (s won, roar barum ntdjt itber ifyn gefet* 3tem, @ tieg feiner $ned)te (Jtnen 1 fatben ben $6nig 3ef)u &on 3frael ; bennod) blieben jTe nnter ifym gefyorfam, Unb ift nod) nie 2 ^efd)eben in aKer 5Be(t r bag ber itber ben ^ontg roare, ber ifyn tt>eil)et ober fronet, benn atfein bnrd) ben etntgen ^ 9?nn fa'gt er jTd) felbft bret (Sarbindfe fronen ^nrn bie nnter tf)m pnb, nnb tflt bod) ntd)t befto roentger itber fie* SBarnm fottte er benn 3 ttnber fein eigene^ @rempe( nnb ak ler ^Belt nnb cfyrift Uebnng ber ?et)re ftd) itber tt>e(tftd)er en>a[t cbcr ^aifertf)nm erfyeben, aUein barnm, bag er ifyn fronet cber roet^et ? ($ ift genng, bag er itber tfyn tft in gett[id)en (Sacfyen, b i : in ^rebtgen, Se^ren, nnb ment retdjen, in roe(d)en and) ein jeber S5tfd)of nnb I)err itber ^ebermann iff ; gleid)tt>ie @t ^mbrojTn^ in bem tnb( 4 itber ben ^aifer ^l)eobo(Tn^, nnb ber ^ropfyet 9fia^ t()an itber amb, nnb (Samnel itber @auL arnm (agt 5 1 Liess seiner Knechte Einen, etc. " caused one of his servants to anoint," etc. Sie unter ihm, "they (the prophet and his servants) remained subject to him (Jehu)." 2 Und ist noch nie, etc. " And it never yet happened, in all the world, that he who consecrated or crowned a king, was supe- rior to him, except (d e n n after nie) through the pope alone." Einigen for einzigen. See p. 93, Note 2. 3 Warum sollte er denn, etc. " Why then should he, contrary to his own example and the practice of all the world and of the Scriptures, exempt himself (s i c h e r h e b e n) from the teach- ing [in the Scriptures] respecting the civil power (i.e. subjection to it) and the empire, merely because he crowns or anoints the empe- ror ?" Sich erheben governs the genitive, der Lehre. U e b e r is immediately connected with Lehre; sich inter- venes to avoid harshness. 4 1 n d e m s t u h 1, in the episcopal chair, or pulpit, was superior to the emperor Theodosius (i. e. would not admit him to the commu- nion after a bloody act)," etc. 9 b D a r u m 1 a s s t, etc. " Therefore let the German emperor be ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 211 ben bcntfd)en jtatfer redjt nnb fret $aifer fetm, nnb feme (&cwatt, nod) (5d)tt>ert, nirf)t nieberbriirfen, bnrd) fo(d) bfin* beg SSorgebcn pdbfHfdjer enct)(er, a(g fottten fte angge$o# gen, itbcr bag Sd)tt>crt regicren in alien ingen* )ag fet) biegmaf gemtg. enn tt>ag bet roettlidjen $e* tt>a(t nnb bem 21bef $n ttnm fe#, babe t genngfam gcfagt im ^itrf)fem i)on ben gnten ffe febcn and) nnb regieren, bag eg tt>cf)( beffer tangte, 1 Serf) ifl: fetn tylcidjcn, weftlicfjer nnb gctjHicfyer ^t^branrfje, lt)te tct) bafetbft ange^etgt babe. 3cf) arf)te and) roobl, 2 bag id) t)od) gefnngen ()abe, t)te( 2)iug tjorgegeben, bag nnmbgftd) n>irb angefeljen, ie( titrfe $n fd)arf angegrijfen. 3Bte fott id) ifym aber t^nn ? 3d) bin eg fdjntbig ^n fagen. ^onnte id), fo n>ottte id) and) alfo tl)itn. (g ift mir lieber, bie 2Be(t $itrnet mit mir r benn ott ; man wtrb mir je nid)t mebr benn bag Seben fonnen net)inen 3d) I)abe bigger metrnaf griebe angeboten meinen 3Biberfad)ern ; abcr, afg id) fel)e, ott ^at mid) bnrd) ffe gefnngen, bag 5S}Jan( immer weiter anftntfynn, nnb ibnen, a true and free emperor, and let neither his power nor his sword be trampled down through such blind pretences of the papal hypocrites, as if they should be made an exception (ausgezogen with w e r d e n understood) and should in all things rule over the sword, or civil power." Niederdrdcken has, perhaps, an accusative, J e m a n d, understood before it, " let no one put down his power," etc. Regieren is connected, by u n d understood, to a u s- gezogen werden. Dass es wohl besser taugte, etc. " that the state of things may be improved, (literally, that it might, perhaps, better be worth something). Still there is no comparison between (of) the civil and religious abuses." 2 Ich achte auch wohl, "1 am well aware that I have sung on a high key, and have brought forward many a thing which will be regarded as impossible (and 1 shall be considered as) having assailed many points too severely. But how ought I to act in re- gard to it ? I am bound to speak out. Jf it were in my power, it was my wish so to do (to represent the matter truly)." 212 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tt>ei( ffe nnmnfffg fmb, $n reben, beflen, fdjreien 1 unb fdjreien genng gebem 9S3oMan, id) rceig nod) em ?iebfein Don D^om unb Don ifynen ; jnrfet ifynen ba3 Dfyr, id) ttritt e ifynen and) ffngen, nnb bie 9toten anf'3 od)jle fttmmem SSerftefyeft bn mid) tt>o()(, fiebe3 D?om, roag id) meine ? 2(nd) babe id) mem (Sdjreiben Diehnat anf (rfettntni$ unb 35erl)6r erboten, ba3 We$ nid)t^ gel)o(fen* 2 2Biewo^ and) id) roeig, fo meine (sacfye red)t ift, bag ffe anf (5rben mng Derbammt nnb attein Don (5t)tijlo im imme( mnf? ge# red)tfertiget werben* 2;enn ba3 ift bie gange @d)rift r 3 bag ber (ifyriften nnb (5l)riftenl)eit @ad)e attein Don ott mng gerid)tet n^erben, i|! and) nod) nie eine Don 9D?enfrf)en anf Grrben gered)tfertigt, fonbern ifl alTgeit ber 5Biberpart ^u grog nnb ftorf gemefen* &$ tit and) meine attergrogte (gorge nnb gnrdjt bag meine (Sadje mod)te nnDerbammt bleiben, baran id) gemiglid) erfennet, bag ffe @ott ttod) nid)t gefatfe, 2)arnm (ag nnr frifd) einfyergefyen, e^ fet) ^)abfl r SBtfrfjofe, 9>fajf, 5^6nd) ober ete^rter ; ffe ffnb ba^ red)te 3So(f, bie ba fotten bie $Ba^rt)eit Derfofgen, wie ffe get^an fyaben* ott gebe nn^ 5ttten einen djriftticfyen (lanb, nnb fonberlid) bem cfyrifHicfyen 5Ibe( bentfdjer -Jtation, einen red)ten geift(id)en 5D7nt^, ber armen ^ird)e ba^ JSefte ju tfynn, 5tmen.* 3n Wittenberg im Sabre 1520* 1 Z u reden, bellen schrei e 4 n und schreien, are all dependent on genug geben, " compelled me to open my mouth wider and wider ; and, since they are restless, to give them enough to say, to bark and to cry and cry." 2 Das Alles (hat) nichts geholfen. "1 have often offer- ed my writings for examination and trial ; all that has done no good." 3 Denn das ist die ganze Schrift, "for this is the (teaching of the) whole Bible, that the cause of Christians and of Christianity must be vindicated by God alone ; never was one (cause, etc.) justified by men, but the opposition has always been the greater and stronger party." * Before taking leave of this piece, we must quote the following ob- servation from Marheineke : Wie diese Schrift den Feinden Luthers ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 218 AN ADDRESS TO THE MAGISTRATES AND COMMON COUNCILS OF ALL THE CITIES OF GERMANY IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. (scbrtft an bte 23iircjermetfter unb 9? at 1)3* fyerrn alter 6tabte Deutfcfy (aub3, baf$ fie cfyrtftltcfye cfyuleu aufrtcfjten unb fallen f o i I e it. $nno 1525** Ghtabe unb grtebe Don @ott unferm SSater uub eine willkommene Ursach zu neuer Listening war, so gereichte sie viel frommen GemUthern zu wahren Erbauung und Ergotzlichkeit. Sie war in jeder Rucksicht in Ton und Haltung, in Kraft urid Le- bendigkeit eine vvahrhafl teutsche Volksschrift zu nennen. Das rein- ste und edelste Interesse an dem Wohl des Volks und dem Heil der gemeirien Christenkeit sprach aus ihr und liess in gut gesinnten GemQthern keinen Misbrauch zu. Die scharfen, hellen, blilhenden Farben des Styls gaben ihr einen hohen Reiz. Was Tausende langst dunkel gefiihlt, oder sich zu sagen gefttrchtet batten, stand hier in kraftigen, grossen ZUgen gezeichnet, vor den Augeu der ganzen Welt. Auch war die Aufhahme derselben ihren gewichtvollen In- halte angemessen ; Schon ira September (it was written in June) waren viertausend Exemplare davon unter dem Volk verbreitet. 0?e- scldckte der teutschen Reformation. I. 162. * This truly philanthropic and patriotic address is given entire, with the exception of a few short polemic passages. The ablest Ger- man writer on education, says : In Luthers Schriften findet sich sehr vieles Uber Erziehung in Predigten, Bibelerklarungen, Briefen, Tischreden ; einzelne Sttlcke handeln nur von diesem Thema. Bald wendet er sich an den Aeltern, bald an die Obrigkeit, bald an den Lehrstand und redet alien aufs Eindringlichste zu, sich doch die Kinder auzunehmen, indem er ihnen Segen und Fluch vorlegt, Se- gen der guten, Fluch der bosen Kinderzucht. Zugleich giebt er die treflichsten Lehren, wie es mil der Zucht zu halten sey, was und wie die Kinder lernen sollen, etc. Wen sollte es nicht freuen, den grossen Mann auch als Reformator des deutschen Erziehungswesens kennen zu lernen ? Seine Ermahnungen gingen unzahligen Deut- 214 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. . gitrfidjtige, 1 roeife, Hebe erren, id) nun 2 roobl brei Sabre tterbamtet unb in bie 2td)t getban, batte fotfen fd)tt>eigen, n>o id) 9)2cnfd)en?ebot mebr, benn ott, gefcfyeuet l)citte ; ttn'e benn and) me( in beutfdjeu %an* bent, beibe grog unb flein, mein D?eben nnb (Sdjreiben, au3 berfetben @ad)e nod) immcr *>erfo(gen, unb met S3(ut barn* ber Dergiegen ; aber tt>et( 2 mtr ott ben tyi\mb aufget!)att fyat, unb mid) bei^en reben, ba$u fo frdftiglid) bei mtr fte* ^et, unb meine (2arf)e, obne meinen Wafy unb ^t^at, fo met fMrfer mad)t, unb roeiter andbreitet, fo t)iel fie mefyr toben, unb jTrf) g(eirf) jMet, al^ (ad)e unb fpotte er tbre3 Xoben^ tt)ie ber 2. ^pfafm fagt. 5tn tt>e(d)em aKein merfen mag, n>er nid)t tterftocft ifl, bag biefe @ad)e mug otfed eigeu fei)n, internal fid) bie 2frt gottlid)e^ $Bort^ unb $BerB l)ier ereignet, tt>e(d)e^ albeit benn am meijlen guntmmt, toenn man e^ auf ba^ >od)jite erfo(get unb bdmpfen >arum 2 n>i(( id) rebeu Oie ^faia^ fagt) unb ui schen zu Herzen, weckten schlafende Gewissen und starken made Hande ; seine Urtheile galten bei Fdrsten und Volkern wie Gottes Stimmen. Karl von Raumer, Geschichte der Padagogik. I. 137, and 189. 1 Fdrsichtige, prudent, for vorsichtige. See p. 6, Note 4. 2 Wiewohl ich nun Aber well Darum. Several im- perfect sentences occur here, which must be joined into one period in order to make out the sense. " Although I, having been put under the ban and outlawed for three years, should be obliged to keep si- lence, had I respected the command of man more than that of God (as many, indeed, both great and small, in the German territories, from that cause, assail incessantly what I have said and written, and shed much blood on that account), yet since God has opened my mouth, and bidden me to speak, and moreover stands by me so firm- ly, and, without any counsel or effort of mine, strengthens and ex- tends my cause the more, the more they rage, and acts as if he held their rage in derision and contempt, as the second Psalm, v. 4, says. (By which alone, one may perceive if he is not rendered obdurate, that this cause must be God's own. For here the peculiar manner of God's word and work appears, which always spreads most when ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 215 flcn, wdi 1 irf) icbc, big bag @l)rifH @ered)tia,feit auSbredje, mte cut ($(an$, unb feme bcttnxirtige 2 nabe tt>te etne 1'anipc ana,qiwbet rcerbc. Unb bttte cud) nun atte, meine lieben errn unb greunbe, n>ottet 3 bfefe mctne djrift unb Grrmabnuna, frcunb(td) anncbmen unb $u erjen fafiem enn id) fei) cjteid) 4 an mtr felber tt>ie id) fei), fo faun id) men most oppose it and seek to check it) ; therefore will I speak." etc. Hatte sollen. See p. 148, Note 3. V i e 1 as a neuter is more terse than viele would be. Aus derselben Sache, i.e. Ursache. Dardber refers to Re den and Schreiben. Mir den Mund, " the mouth to me," is the proper German idiom, for " my mouth." See p. 18, Note 7. Rath und That. See p. 44, Note 2. Sich gleich stellen als, "to place or demean one's self as if." An welchem. See p. 80, Note 3. Eigen is used after a genitive just as it is after a possessive pronoun, se i n eigen, for example. See p. 119, Note 2. Sich ereignet, oc- curs, is somewhat harsh as applied to Wort. The idea is : "the manner in which God ordinarily disseminates his word and carries on his work is obvious or takes place here." D e n n and w e n n, then and when, are still used with reference to time, though dann and w a n n are more commonly so used. Am meisten, most, is here clearly distinguished from m e i s t e n s, mostly, for the most part. See p. 171, Note 3, end. 1 Weil, while. This use of the word is obsolete. It now means, because. D i e w e i 1 underwent a similar change of signification. See p. 104, Note 1. 2 Heilwartige, saving, obsolete for h e i 1 b r i n g e n d. 8 Und [ich] bitte [dass Ihr] wollet. 4 Ich sei gleich, etc. " be I, in myself, as I may," or " though (gleich) J be as I may, in myself." The proper and literal mean- ing of the word gleich is like, equal. It is, indeed, identical with like, being compounded of 1 e i c h, and the prefix g e. When used with another particle of comparison, it is commonly to be translated, just, even. Then, as applied to time, it means equal in time, \. e. in- stantly, immediately. See p. 21, Note 3. From this last signification is derived that of yet, i. e. an immediate consequence, which is ex- pressed by the word itself, and an adversative relation to what pre- cedes, which it borrows of course, from the connection. In such cases, the word d o c h might be substituted for gleich, without affecting the sense. 216 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bocf) 1 ttor ott mtt recfytem crctfien ritfymen, bag id) bartn* tten ntrfjt bag 9ftetne 2 fttcfye, welofyeg mel befler moefyte mtt tttffcfrrcetgen iiberfommen ; 3 fonbertt mctne e3 fccm er* $en 4 treitftrf) mtt cud) itnb garment beutfcfyen anbe, bafym mtrf) @ott tterorbnet fyat, e3 gtaube 5 cber gtaube iticfyt, tt>er ba nrifl. Uub wilt eitre ?tebe 6 bag fret itnb getroft gugefagt 1 So kann ich doch, etc. Doch implies a concession to the prejudice of the reader. " For be 1, in myself, as I may (in the wrong on other subjects, if you choose), still I can," etc. 2 Das Meine, my owm, my oicn interest. Comp. p. 70, Note 8. When the possessive adjective pronouns are used substantively, which is indicated by their beginning, with a capital, the word e i- g e n cannot be added. Thus we could not say, m e i n E i g n e s, my own, instead of d a s Meine. But when they are used adjec- tively or as predicates, e i g e n can be added to give them empha- ses ; asmein eigenes Haus; dass sie sein eigen seyn soil ten, that they should be his own. Even to a genitive, eigen, may be added merely to give it emphasis, as G o 1 1 e s eigen, God's own. See p. 119, Note 2, end. 3 Ueberkommen as an active verb, in the sense of b e k o m- m e n though now obsolete, is frequently used by Luther. See Dan. 4: 33. Rom 9: 31, and 2 Pet. 1: 1, in his version. In the sense of, to fall upon, to overtake, to befall, it is no longer in common use. As a neuter verb, it means, to cross or pass over, to arrive, to come to hand. It is employed provincially in Upper Germany in the sense of, to agree, to make a contract. It is now beginning to be used of that which is handed down to us from antiquity, as writings, fragments, etc. 4 (Ich) meine es von Herzen. This profession of sin- cerity stands connected with the conviction that God had raised him up to be a benefactor to Germany dahin mich Gott ver- ordnet hat. 5 Es glaube, etc. " believe (it) or not, whoever will." E s is not in the accusative, governed by glaube, but an expletive, em- ployed merely because the nominative comes after its verb. See p. 52, Note 1. Glaube is in the subjunctive. 6 Und (ich) will eure Lie be (i.e. e u c h) das, etc. " And 1 desire to have this freely and confidently said and declared to you (or 1 wish you distinctly to understand this, namely), that, if," etc. Eure Liebe, is a pulpit phrase, used in addressing an au- ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 217 unb anie $ie bie uid)t febcn, wag ber 2Be(t prft gebenfet 3 enn ifl ciue erufte unb grogc (Ead)e, ba @l)rifto unb alter k)ie( anliecjt, bag 4 n>ir bem juugen 35ctfe t)elfcn uub ratbeu. dience, " your love" instead of " my dear hearers," (m e i n e G e 1 i e b t e) the abstract for the concrete. If the punctuation of the text is correct, it is necessary to regard the words as the indirect ob- ject of the following participles, and as being, from negligence, put in the accusative instead of the dative, so that the sense would be given by substituting euch. Angesagt, announced to, is a more formal and elevated expression than zugesagt, said to. This difference of meaning arises from the different nature and use of the two prepositions, a n and z u. These participles are not connected with h a b e n as their auxiliary, but they are used adjectively with das, which is governed by h a b e n. Comp. p. 15, Note 6. 1 Derohalben, therefore, is an obsolete word, used only in for- mal or solemn style. It is derived from h a 1 b e n, on account of, and d e r o (an old genitive plural of d e r,) these things. Deswegen is now used in both numbers in place of it. Compare derhalben p. 8, Note 2, and p. 4, Note 2. 2 (D a s s i h r) w o 1 1 e t. D e r Welt F tt r s t, "the prince of the world," or satan. In such constructions, the article (der) always belongs to the first of the two substantives, and is consequent- ly in the genitive. See p. 17, Note 1. 3 Gedenket. Gedenken was in the Middle Ages equiva- lent to d e n k e n, to think. But from the collective or frequenta- tive force of the particle ge, it came to signify, to have in mind, to keep in mind, to intend, as in this passage. Thence, the derivative signification, to show by some act, whether kind or unkind, that one kept in mind, or remembered something past, i. e. to requite a favor, or an injury. To these leading significations of the word it is easy to trace all those which are to be found in the lexicons. 4 Denn es ist dass, etc. E s refers to the clause intro- duced by d a s s. "It (namely, that we aid and counsel the young) 19 218 SELECTIONS FKOM LUTHER. )amtt tft bcitn and) img unb alien gebolfen 1 unb a,eratben. Unb benfet, bag fofdben, 2 jtttfen, betmltcfyen titcfifcfyen 2ht* ferfjtungen beg eufete vrntf mit bent gro$em cfyrijHirfjen Qrntjl geroefyret fei>n. 3 frebe errn, mug man ja'brlirf) 4 fo is a serious and important matter in which (d a) Christ and all the world are deeply concerned." Comp. p. 103, Note 1. 1 Damit ist uns geholfen. The German abounds much more than the English in the impersonal use of passive verbs, as does also the Latin. 2 S o 1 c h e n, refers to a description in a passage, which is omit- ted here. 3 Will gewehret seyn, "it is necessary to ward off." It is impossible to represent the structure of this highly idiomatic sen- tence by anything corresponding to it in English. Will geweh- ret seyn is impersonal, and governs the dative A n f e c h t u n- g e n. There are many idiomatic expressions formed, from the pe- culiar use of the word w o 1 1 e n. It expresses 1. a wish, as, Was willst du von mir? " What do you wish of me ?" or inclina- tion, as, E r will n i c h t d a r a n, "he has no inclination to do it;" Er wolle oder wolle nicht, nolens, volens ; E s will sie Niemand, " nobody will have her." 2. Intention, as, W a. s willerdamithaben? " What is he after ?" " What is he seeking for ?" Was wollen Sie damit sagen? "What do you mean by that?" 3. Assertion, or affirmation; as, Er will es selbst gehort haben. " He declares that he heard it himself," or belief, as, Das wollen jene gar nicht," They will not admit that." 4. On the point of doing something; as, Er wollte eben weggehen, " He was just on the point of go- ing away." Er will sterben, " He is at the point of death." 5. Demand, requisition, as, Der Krieg will viel Geld, " War requires much money." 6. Supposition, or concession for ar- gument's sake ;as, Ichwill mich einmal geirrt haben, " Suppose, then, that I am mistaken." 7. Contingency, or indiffer- ence; as, Dem s e i, wie ihm wolle, "be that as it may" (let it be in respect to that, as it will). 8. It is used pleonastically ; as, Das will vie! sagen, " That is much, or is important." Hundert Thaler wollen wenig sagen, "A hundred dollars are but little." 4 Muss man jahrlich, etc. " If we (one) must annually ex pend so much on rifles, roads, bridges, darns and many other similar ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 219 t>ic( wenben an 23nd)fen, 2Bege, (stege, famine unb ber* a,(etd)cn nn$abfta,e (Stitcfe tnebr, bamit cine (5tabt $eitltd)en grteben nnb (Pentad) 1 fyabe ; roarnm [elite man md)t mel* mchr bod) and) 2 fo triel roenben an bte bitrfttge arme 3u* genb, ba ntan cincn gcfrfjtcften 9D?amt ober $tt>ei 311 (Srfjnk meitfern Inelte. enn ott ber Httmadjtuje fyat fnrroafyr und entfd)en 3 things, etc., why should we not, etc. ?" W e n d e n signifies to turn, in general ; k e h r e n, to turn, more commonly in the specific sense of turning about, or assuming the opposite direction ; d r e- h e n, to turn around a centre or axis. Sich an jemanden w e n d e n means to apply to one, to come to him for something. DenRQcken w e n d e n, to go aicay from one, to turn from him and leave him. Geld aufetwas wenden, to expend money for a thing ; Geld an etwas wenden, to expend money on or for anything. F 1 i n t e is the ordinary word for gun, and B U c h s e, the name for a rifle. The former is so named from the flint used in striking fire ; the latter from the barrel of the gun, re- garded as a box. S t e g properly means any long and narrow piece of wood, which will explain several uses of the word in the mechani- cal arts. Next it signifies a plank or narrow bridge across a ditch, or river. It is sometimes used for S te i g, a path. Dergleichen, though used adverbially, is properly a genitive plural, governed by S tU eke. 1 G e m a c h, in the old German, means convenience, repose. Com- pare the adjective g e m a c h, and the compound, Ungemach. It now signifies an apartment for repose, or convenience, and hence is used mostly of palaces, or poetically when applied to ordinary rooms or apartments. Luther here uses it in its ancient signification, re,' pose, quiet. 2 V i e 1 m e h r doch auch. Such an exuberance of particles would hardly be admitted in English ; and yet they all have their force in German. Omitting them all, we should translate the pas- sage, " Why not apply as much ?" Auch, modifies the expression to even as much. Doch added, makes it, " Why not, however, ap- ply," etc.; and v i e 1 m e h r, " Why not, however, rather apply even as much/' etc. But this is tautological in English. 3 Uns Deutsche n. Deutsche n, coming after the pro- noun u ns, is of the new, or third declension. In themselves con 220 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. $ndbt(}ttd) bafyetm gefucfyet, unb em recf)te$ aiifgertrfjtet 2 a 3 fyabcn rotr jet bie femften, 4 cje* lebrteften, jungen cfetfen 5 imb Banner, mit pracfyen unb atter $iwft gqteret, welcfye fo tt>oM 9tnen fd)afen 6 fomttett, mo man iijv brancfyen wotfte, ba jnmje SSoff $ix sidered, these two words might be either in the dative or in the accu- sative. But he im sue hen, and its equivalent daheim s li- chen, govern the accusative. This verb was formerly used in an indifferent sense, to visit either with good or with evil. Here it is used in the former sense. But, at the present day, it is used only in the latter sense, as, " to visit with a rod." 1 Goldenes Jahr, a golden year, is here used indefinitely of time. 2 Aufgerichtet. Aufrichten signifies literally to raise, to erect, to build. See p. 5, Note 2. Applied to things of an imma- terial, or abstract nature, as a covenant, doctrine, etc., it means to establish, to bring into existence. See Ezek. 16: 60. Rom. 1: 5, and 2 Cor. 5: 19, in Luther's version. Also, to raise up, to support, to comfort. 3 D a is here an expletive. 4 D i e fe i n s te n. See p. 24, Note 4. 5 Gesellen is derived from sal, a hall, or in the old Ger- man houses, *' a large lower room, where persons ate, played and lept together." G e s e 1 1, therefore, meant originally an inmate ; and afterwards, an associate. Hence, Schlafgesell, a bed-fel- loic ; Spielgesell, a playmate ; Stubengesell, a room- mate ; Junggesell, a bachelor, an unmarried man (originally, as in this passage, a young gentleman)'. G e s e 1 1 s c h a f t, society. In early times, the word G e s e 1 1 was used in an honorable sense ; but now it is more commonly used in a low sense ; as, D i e b s g e- s e 1 1, an associate with thieves. In a restricted sense, it means a journeyman mechanic. Gefahrte, an associate, literally means a traveling companion ; and in its wider signification, it means, an associate in any enterprise. G e n o s s, from Geniessen, to en- joy, means an associate in something agreeable, though in many ap- plications of the word, the idea of enjoyment is nearly lost. 6 Nutzen schaffen does not mean to derive benefit to one's self, but to be useful to others. So w o h 1, so well, i. e. very well. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 221 febren. 1 Sffd nicfyt Dor 2lugen, 2 bag man jefct einen ben in brei Sabren $urirf)ten 3 fann, bag er in feinem fitnf* jebnren Sabre ober ad)tjel)nten Sal)** mefyr fann, 4 benn bidljcr alle fjobe <8cbnfen 5 nnb Softer gefonnt baben ? Sa, wad bat man gelernet in boben @rf)iilen nnb $lbftern ber, benn nnr 6 (Sfef, $(6fce nnb 23(ocfe rcerben ? mergta, Sabre bat enter gelernet, nnb bat nod) tt>eber ifcf) norf) bentfrf) gewngt. S<*) fcb^eige bad fd)dnb(i(f)e la* fierlidje ?eben, barinnen bie ebfe 7 Suge nb fo jammerlicf; Der^ borben iff, 1 Zu lehren, is depndent on Nutzen schaffen, "which could be so useful in teaching (to teach) the young, if one would em- ploy them." 8 Vor Augen, Jike ante oculos, in Latin, before one's eyes, ob- vious. A us den A u ge n, out of sight. In die Augen, in one's sight or observation. But an den Augen, refers to something as observable in the eye itself, physically. One may dis- cover another's emotion an den Augen, as the place where it is betrayed. This meaning grows out of the peculiar nature and use of the preposition, a n. See p. 80, Note 3. 3 Zurichten. See p. 50, Note 2, near the end. This word, which generally signifies to prepare, is sometimes employed in the sense of instructing or qualifying a person for a certain place or ser- vice. Isa. 43: 21, and Eph. 4: 12, in Luther's version. It is often used in a bad sense, like the vulgar English phrase, " to fix one out," j. e. to beat him severely, or to injure his person or appearance in any way. 4 K a nn is frequently used, as it is here, in the sense of knowing. See the lexicons. 5 Hohe Schulen signifies universities, as distinguished from gymnasia and other schools. High School, in English, has a very different import. 6 Was denn nur, what but. 7 Edle. Edel is generally, as here, used in a moral sense, noble, generous ; when applied to persons of rank, it includes both the higher and the lower nobility. A d e 1 i g, noble, designates the lower nobility, or those lower than a Graf and higher than a Bdrger. 19* 222 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 2Jber nun 1 nnS ott fo reicfyfirf) begnabet, 9 nnb fofcfyer $ente tie 9D?enge 3 gegeben bat, bie ba$ jnnge $otf fein Jeljren unb $teben mogen, wal)r(id) fo ift'3 9iotf), bag ttrir "bte ($nabe ($otte$ niefyt in Iffiinb fofytagen 4 nnb (affen tfyn Tttrfjt nmfonft anftopfen. @r ftebet or ber f)iir, tt>obl fo 5 rotr fbm auftbun ; er grttget im$, felig ber ibm tet SSerfeben n?tr e^, 6 bag er Doritber gel^et, wer tt)ttt tfyn ?aflet nn^ unfcrn Dortgen 3^ntmcr anfe^en nnb bte flerntg, bartnnen tt>tr gercefen (Tnb* 3rf) acf)te, bag lanb norf) nie fo tnel yon @otte^ 5Bort get)6ret babe, alS je^t, man fpitret je ntd)t^ in ber ^iftorie bafcon. ?aflen wir e^ 7 benn fo fytngefyen ol)ne ^anf nnb @bre, fo i(l^ ^n Jbeforgen, 8 mir vt>erben nod) grantidjer ginjlernig nnb 1 Nun. See p. 1^, Note 4. 2 Bejjnadet. Begnaden is an obsolete word, for which Tbegnadigen is now in common use. It means to show favor to. It is an active verb, as nearly all which have the prefix be, are, and, of course, u n s is in the accusative. This prefix not only con- verts neuter verbs into active verbs, but is used in forming verbs from substantives and adjectives, as in English. 3 Solcher Leute die Menge, an abundance of such peo- ple. Observe the peculiar use of the word Menge with the defi- nite article. Z i e h e n is frequently used by Luther where e r z i e- .h e n, to educate, would now be employed. 4 In Wind schlagen. See p. 202, Note 2. 5 Wohl uns, so, etc. " happy are we, if we open to him." ;S e 1 i g d e r, " happy is he who." 6 Versehen wir es, etc. " If we disregard it, so that he pass by, who will recall him (bring him back) ?" V e r s e h e n, to see wrong, means also, to overlook, to neglect ; and hence, as a substan- tive, it means an oversight, an error. 7 Lassen wir es, not here in the sense of 1 a s s e t u n s, as at is sometimes, but of wenn wix lassen. 8 So ist es zu besorgen, then it is to be feared. In such expressions, where the passive form of the verb is more commonly re- quired in English, the active form is employed in German. Thus, Er ist nirgends zu finden, "heis nowhere to be found j" ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 223 (etben. ?tcben eutftf)en/ faufet wetf ber 50?arft &or ber l)itrc ifl, fammfct cut, wetf e$ fefjetnet iinb gut ^Better ift, brauefyet @otte$ @nabe imb $Bort, roeil eg ba ijl, 2 )enn ba$ 3 fottt if)r roiflfen, otteg 2Bort nnb nabe tfl 4 em fafy* renber ^Mafcregcn, ber nicfyt roieber fomtnt, wo er etnmal gewefen ijh (r ift bei ben 3itben getvefen, aber l)tn i(l ^m, 5 jTc fyaben nun nid)td, g)au(u^ brarf)te iljn in rierf)en(anb, Inn t(l aucf) l)in ; nun l)aben (Te 6 ben ^i'trfen. 9tom unb ?atetmfof)(anb l)at tt)n and) gebabt, j)in tft l)tn ; (Te 6 fyaben nun ben ^)abjl. Unb tfyr ^eutfcfjen 7 bitrft ntrf)t benfen, er ist z u 1 o b e n, u he is to be praised." It is probably out of this use of the infinitive that the present participle, as a future pas- sive, sprung; as der zu lobende Schttler, "the praise- worthy scholar," the scholar that is to be commended; die zu f Q r c h t e n d e G e f a h r, " the danger that is to be feared." E s, in this passage, refers to the clause immediately following. For the omission of the conjunction d a s s, and the corresponding change of the construction, see p. 11, Note 4. 1 Lieben Deutsche n. Present usage would require 1 i e- be Deutschen, in the vocative plural. The addition of the n, is a Thuringian peculiarity. See p. 169, Note 3. 2 Weil es da ist, "while it is here at hand." Da, has a signification intermediate between hier and dort; that is, it points out a place not so near as hier, nor so remote as dort. Therefore, it may stand for either of those. 3 D a s, this, refers to the following clause. As d a s s is omit- ted in this clause, the latter is not inverted. Comp. p. 11, Note 4. 4 I s t with two nominatives. See p. 93, Note 4, and p. 112, Note 5. Fahrender Platzregen, a moving shower. P 1 a t z- r e g e n, a heavy Local shoicer, in opposition to Landregen, a wide-spread rain. 5 H i n ist h i n, literally, gone is gone, or lost is lost, i. e. what is lost is lost, or he is gone. 6 S i e refers to the inhabitants of Griechenland and Lateinischland. This latter word is antiquated, for which 1 1 a 1 i e n is now used. 7 Ihr Deutschen, ye Germans. The old or full form of de- clension is necessary to the adjective, whenever no declinable article, adjective, or pronoun precedes it, or when these are themselves im- 224 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bag tfyr ifytt enng fyaben werbet, benn ber Unbanf unb $e# racfjtung tt)irb tfyn nicfjt (aflfen bteiben, 1 Saturn gretfet $u 2 unb fyaltet $u, tt>er gretfen unb batten fann, faule foa'nbe mitfiTen em bofeg 3br fyaben. otteg ebot treibet burrf) 9#ofeg fo oft unb forbert, bie (Htern fotfen bie $tnber (efyren, bag 3 and) ber 78, 9)fafot fprtcfyt : ,,$8te fyat er fo fyorf) 4 unfern SBa'tern geboten, ben $mbern funb ^u t^un, unb $n le^ren ^tnbe^ ^inb/' Unb bag roeifet and) au^ 5 bag mcrte ebot otteg, ba er ber ((tern e^orfam ben ^tnbern fo fyocfy gebeut, 6 bag man and) burrfjg ertrf)t tobten fott ungefyorfame ^inber. Unb tt>arum leben ttnr ^tten anberg, benn bag ttrir beg jungen 2So(fg tt>arten, 7 (efyren unb auftteijen ? (^g ifl ntrf)t bag fid) bag totte SSotf 8 foKte felbj^ (efyren unb marten ; perfect in their declension. In all other cases, the new or imperfect form of declension may be used. Here Deutschen is preceded by the personal pronoun 1 h r, which clearly indicates the case, and hence the form Deutsche is not needed. See Gram. p. 118, 3. 1 Nicht lassen bleiben, "will not let it remain," will drive it away. In such expressions, lassen ordinarily stands at the end of the sentence. 2 Darum greifet zu, etc. " Therefore seize and hold, who- ever can." W e r, on account of its indefinite sense, whoever, is re- ferred to in the preceding imperatives, as though it were a plural. The reader will not fail to perceive the stirring eloquence of this 3 So oft das s, 50 often that. 4 H och, above what is ordinary, in a high degree, or earnestly. The word, in this sense, is now but little used. So h o c h, is not here a direct comparison, but indirect so earnestly (i. e. as he does). This idiom is common to the German and the English. 5 Weiset aus, a compound verb, ausweisen, to show, to prove. " And the fourth commandment of God shows this, where," etc. 6 G e b e u t, obsolete for g e b i e t e t. See Gram. p. 203 supra. 7 W a r t e n. See p. 39, Note 2. From the primary signification, to watch, is derived that of attending to, taking care of. 8 Das tolle Volk, that is, the giddy youth. W a r t e n does ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 225 urn hat jTe untf ott befoblen, 1 bte wtr alt nub erfafyren iwb, wa3 tbnen gut tft, unb n>irb gar fcfyrcere Dfacfynung, Don nutf fiir btcfelbcn ferbern. Saturn and) 9D?ofe$ bejtefylt eut. 32, unb fprtofjt : ,,$raa,e betnen Sater, bet ttnrb bir c fagen, bic 5l(tcn wcrben bir e3 geujen." $Biewol)( e3 (Siinbe unb cfyanbe tft, bag babtn 2 nut nn$ fommen ifl, bag n?ir aUercrft 3 ret^en unb nn^ reigen laficn not, like 1 e h r e n, govern s i c h, but it stands without its object, seiner or sein being understood. 1 Sie uns befohlen, etc. " has commended them to us, who are old and experienced as to what (or, who know what) is good for them." Die w i r, icho. See Gram. p. 157. 2 Dass dahin, etc. " that it has come to this with us, that we must now arouse (ourselves) and be aroused, to educate our children and youth, and to consider their interests ; whereas, nature itself should move us to this, and the example of the heathen variously in- struct us." Kommen for gekommen. 3 Allererst, (first of alt) not till now. See p. 16, Note 2. Erst stands connected with the old English erst, as e h e r does with ere. But the manner in which the words erst and a 1 le r- erst are sometimes used is very peculiar. "Erst, schon and n o c h, when they qualify the predicate itself, are all adverbs of time. Erst then indicates the priority of one act to another ; as, man soil erst den ken, dann sprechen, " one should first think, then speak." Schon means already. N o c h means still. But when these words do not qualify the predicate itself, but relate to some other word, erst expresses limitation, and is synony- mous with nicht frUher ornichtmehr; as, Eristerst gestern angekommen, "he did not arrive till yesterday;" Er ist erst zehn Jahr alt, "he is but ten years old." But schon, in such a use of it, means not later than, not less than ; while n o c h, if it relates to time, limits the duration of an occurrence ; as, Er wird noch heute kommen, "he will yet come to- day (not later)." Ich habe ihn noch gestern gesehen, " I saw him as late as yesterday." Where noch refers to quan- tity, it conveys the idea of a climax, like the English word still. Heyse's Schuigrammatik, p. 292. We add a few more examples of the use of e r s t, as it is difficult to explain it sufficiently by rules. Jetzt allererst bin ich gekommen, "1 have but just 226 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. foflen, unfere $mber unb junge6 SBoIf $u aiefyen, unb ifyr 23efte fcebenfen, fo bod) bafiefbe unS bte 9?atur fetbjl: fotfte treiben, unb and) ber etben (rempel un manntgfdk tig roetfem (3 tfl: fern wttternimftig bier, bag feiner Sungen utcfyt roartet itnb lefyret, n>a$ tfyuen gebitfyret; 1 ofyne ber @traug, 2 bafcou ott fagt tob 39* : ,,)ag er gegen feme 3uttgen fo Ijart ifl, a(^ tt)dren fie nicfjt fein, unb (dgt fetne (5ter auf ber @rbe Kcgcn*" 3 Unb n>a3 l)i(ft now come." Jetzt erst, "not till now." Er hat erst an- ge fan gen, "he has just begun (not before)." Erst jetzt merke i c h's, "I just begin to perceive it." Erst ttbers J a h r, " not till next year." Er ist erst aufder Ilinrei- se, "he has just started on a journey." In the passage before us, allererst conveys the idea that there has been negligence, " that we must now (in regard to that which ought to have been done long ago), after all that God and nature have taught, need, or begin, to arouse ourselves and to be aroused." Z i e h e n, in the sense of e r zi e h e n. 1 Gebuhret, belongs to them, in the sense of, " it is due to or from them." Gehoren, to belong, as a part does to the whole. Hence, " to be essentially, properly, or justly connected with." Z u- s t e h e n, to belong to, i. e. to be the proper part of, to be fitting to a voluntary agent. Dem Alter gebtthret Ehrerbeitung und es steht derJugend zu diese jenem zu wei- sen. 2 Ohne der Strauss, da Gott von, " Except the ostrich, of which," etc. Ohne, see p. 147, Note 1. Da von, see p. 130, Note 3. 3 Als waren sie nicht sein, und lasst seine Eier lie- gen. According to present usage, when the possessive adjective pronouns are used as a predicate, and the subject to which they be- long, is a substantive or a distinct and definite personal pronoun, they are not declined. See sein in the sentence above. But if they are not in direct agreement with the subject, but merely refer to it in an indefinite way, especially by the use of the indefinite pronoun e s, they are then declined; as, Wem gehoret der Hut die Feder das JBuch? Er sie es ist mein. Herees is a neuter pronoun referring to a neuter substantive. But let e s be used indefinitely referring to any one of the three genders, and then the ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 227 etf, 1 bag wir fen (I 2 atfeg fatten unb t^ci ten, imb roar en gfeicf) ettet j^dftgen, fo nrir batf nntcnt>eg6 (ajfen, barum ttnr afe (eben, namftcfy : be$ jnngen SSoIf^ pflegen. 3d) and), bag imter ben angerftcfyen itnben bie 5Beft t>or Don feiner 3 fo fyocf) befcfyweret ift, itnb fo granltcfye (Strafe tterbtenet, ate eben t>on btefer, bte ttn'r an ben $tnb# ern tbnn, bag ttrir jTe nirf)t ^tef)en* ) n>el)e bcr 5Belt tmmer nnb ett)ig(tdf) ^a werben ta^ ^tnber geboren nnb tt)acf)fen bet nnS baber, 4 nnb ift answer will be; es ist meiner meine meines. Bat the forms der meine, der meinige, etc. with the definite article, never agree with a substantive expressed or understood, but merely refer to one going before ; or they are used as substantives and are written with a capital ; es dein Bruder istmitdemmei- nigen ausgegangen; or Du hast das Deinige get h an, "you have done your part;" die Meinigen lassen sich Ihnen und den Ihrigen empfehlen, " my family (pa- rents, children, relations) send their respects to you and yours." 1 Und was hilft es, etc. " And of what avail will it be, that we should have and do everything else, and be like pure saints, if we neglect that for which we chiefly live, namely, to take charge of the young ?" Etwas unterwegen lassen, is the same as unterlassen, but is now a provincialism. Was h i 1 f t's ? is equivalent to, " What good will it do ?" 2 S o n s t and a n d e r s are both rendered by the word otherwise ; but they are very different words. A n d e r s means, in another manner. S o n s t means, aside from this, and hence, in other re- epects, or at another time. 3 Von keiner (Sunde). Hoch, highly, in a great degree. See p. 224, Note 4. " I consider, that among outward offences, the world is, in God's view, so heavily laden with none, and, for none deserves so severe punishment, as for this which we commit against children in that we do not educate them." How strong the author's convictions, and how just his views of the necessity of popular edu- cation ! 4 Wachsen daher, grow up. D a h e r, hence, in compo- sition with verbs has the accent on the second syllable (h e r) and conveys the idea of approach, hither, or motion from another place and towards us. Sometimes the idea of approach is nearly lost, and 228 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. leiber Sftiemanb, ber fief) be3 armen jnngen $ol?6 annefyme unb regiere, ba (a'fiet man e^ 1 gefyen, ttne e3 gefyet 3a fpricfyfl: bu, folcfyetf atte 2 ift ben @ltern gefagt, tt>a$ gefyet ba$ bie DfaitbSfyerrn nnb Dbrigfeit an ; tjl recfyt gere# bet, 3 ja, ttrie tt>enn bie extern aber fotcfyed nicfyt tfynn ? 5Ber fofl e$ benn tl)nn ? @ott e3 barnm nacf) bleiben, 4 unb bie along, without particular reference to the direction, expresses nearly the force of the word, when applied in its literal sense to motion, and up or off, when used figuratively ; as d a h e r f a h r e n, to drive along ; daherprangen, to show off. 1 E s is not here a personal pronoun referring definitely to V o 1 k, but it is used indefinitely and impersonally ; " and things are suffer- ed to go as they do." See p. 164, Note 1. 2 Solches alles, etc. " all that is said to parents ; what does that concern the members of the council, and the magistrates?" Rathsherr, in the time of Luther, meant, a senator, or a member of the city council. This council was originally a kind of senate, con- sisting ordinarily of about twenty or thirty persons, chosen from the higher or noble families. Not far from Luther's time, the wealthy classes of burghers had been admitted, and thus this senate sunk to the character of a common city council. The Bdrgermeister some- times one, and sometimes two in a city, was the head of this council, and chief magistrate, to whom the abstract term, Obrigkeit is often applied. Below this smaller council stood a larger council or popular assembly, whose concurrence was necessary on certain sub- jects of common interest. 3 1st recht geredet, etc. " That is all true (that is rightly said, namely, that parents are under obligation to educate their chil- dren) ; but how, if parents do not attend to it ? Who shall do it then?" J a, can be omitted in the translation, when there is an ad- versative particle, like aber or a 1 1 e i n, in the sentence. If there be no adversative particle, in such interrogative clauses after a con- cessive clause, j a itself must be regarded as an adversative, and translated by but. Literally, j a corresponds nearly to the word well, used concessively, as " Well, but how if parents do not attend to it." But it is redundant in English. 4 Nach bleiben, to remain unnoticed, to be passed by. But it is used in familiar phrase, and the corresponding English expression would be, " Shall we therefore let it alone ?" So the words, s o ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 229 $inber tterfdumct wcrben ? $Bo tt>itf jTcf) ba bic >brtgfeit unb D?atb entfdiufbtgcn, 1 bag il)nen fold)e3 nid)t fottte ge* bitbren ? ag etf won ben ((tern nicfyt gefdjiefyt, fyat man* djcrlei Urfadje : 2Utp$ Grrfte, jmb and) etlidje nicftt fo frcmm itnb reb(id), 2 baf; |Tc c$ tbdten, 3 eb jTe e3 g(cid) fonnten, fonbern, tt)te bie traiigcn bdrten ffe jTd) and) gegen ibre 3ungen, unb lafien e^ babet bfctben, 4 bag pc bte ^ter Don fid) gerccrfen unb gc^cugct baben, nid)t mel)r tbnn ffe bagu. 3^tnn biefe fotten bcnnod) nnter nn^ unb bet un$ (eben in ge^ metner @tabt te n>tU benn uun SSernunft unb fonber^ (id) d)rijt(id)e Siebe ba^ (eiben, bag fie mtgcjogen 6 aufwad)f^ en, unb ben anbern ^inbern ift unb efdjmeige 7 fetjn, mag's nachbleiben, "well, then, let it alone." Ve r sau- na e t, see p. 174, Note 1 . 1 Wo will sich da entschuldigen, etc. "How will the magistrates and council excuse themselves [and make it appear] that such a duty does not belong to them ?" Wo for w ie is now provincial. On will in the singular, see p. 93, Note 4. After entschuldigen, there is no ellipsis in German. But the word excuse, in English, cannot be immediately followed by such a phrase as, " that it should not." 2 From m und redlich. See p. 49, Note 2, and p. 22, Note 5. S o n d e r n, p. 2, Note 7. 3 D a s s s i e e s t h a t e n, as to do it, that they should do it. 4 Dabei b 1 e i b e n, " stop, or break off with this, viz. that," etc. D a m i t could not be used for d a b e i, in such connections. M i t d i e s e m would be an equally gross Anglicism. 5 Nun diese Kinder, etc. " Now these children must never- theless live in the same town among us and with us. How then can reason and, most of all, Christian charity suffer (this) that," etc. A free translation in order to give the sense more fully. 6 Ungezogen means, ill-bred ; unerzogen, uneducated, and sometimes, not yet grown up, not an adult. 7 G e s c h m e i s s e, the eggs of vermin. In its widest sense, it means whatever is cast forth from the body. Hence it means either filth, or the eggs or brood of icing ed-insects. It therefore often stands for tjermin, for which, however, the more modern word U n g e z i e- 30 230 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bamit itfet erne gan^e tabt fcerberbet, ttne e3 beitn %n (Sobom imb @omorra unb aba, unb etlicfyen mefyr tab* ten ergangen ift 2Jup3 Hnbere, 1 fo tjl ber grogte aufen ber ($(tern (eiber ! ungefrfn'cft ba^u, 2 unb nicfyt nriffen, tt>ie man Winter giefyen unb lebren fed* >enn (Te fetbjl 3 nicfytS gefernet baben, ofyne ben 23amf) fcerforgen ; unb geboren fonberftcfye ?eute ba^u, bte ^tnber n>ohl nub rerf)t (efyren unb ^te^en fodeu* 5(iif ^ ritte, cbgteirf) bte ^fteru gefd)icf t nw ten, unb n)cK? ten e gerne felbjl: tbun, fo l)aben pe i)cr 4 anberen efd)dfte unb ^aitgfyaltuna, n>eber %cit uorf) 9?anm ba^n, a(fo bag bte 9?otl) gwinget, gemetne 3urf)trnet(l:er fi'tr bte jttnber ^n bal^ ten <&$ modte benn etn %tQli(fye\: fi'tr ffrf) fetbfl: etnen ^tg^ enen batten, 5tber ba^ mi'trbe bem gemetn.en ^ann gu fd)wer, unb nntrbe abermal 5 manner fetner $nabe um 5(r^ mutb^ widen tterfaumet ^a^u jierben fo t)te(e Cittern, unb (aflfen ^Baifen ^tnter jTcfy, unb trie biefelben burrf) $or* mi'tnbe uerforget n>erben r ob im$ bie (5rfat)rung 6 ^u tt>entg f e r is more commonlj? employed. The latter is less expressive of loathsomeness than the former when both relate to vermin. Luther compares uneducated children to a nest of young vermin. 1 A u f's andere. " Jn the second place." See p. 2, Note 6. 2 Ungeschickt dazu, "unqualified for it." See p. 145, Note 2. N i c h t w i s s e n, would by present usage be required to stand thus ; wissen n i c h t. 3 Denn sie selbst, etc. " For they themselves have learn- ed nothing except to provide for their stomachs ; and a distinct class of persons are required for this purpose, who shall," etc. 4 Vor. On account of. This preposition often denotes a cause act- ing upon the subject or agent and obstructing his activity. See Gram. p. 356. " Still, on account of business and household affairs they have neither time nor space for it, so that necessity requires," etc. Es wollte denn, unless each one would. 5 Abermal, again, on the other hand. See p. 35, Note 6. 6 Ob uns die Erfahrung, etc. "even if experience did not sufficiently teach us (were not enough), this (circumstance, viz.) that God calls himself the father of the orphans, as of those who are neg- lected by every body else, should teach us." ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 231 ware, fotttc mt$ bag wcb( $eta.cn, bag (Td) ott felbft ber $Baifeu 3Satcr ncnuct, ate bcrer, bie t>on ^cbermann (bit ft Derfaffen (utb. 5lurf) (wb etftd)e, bte feme Winter fyaben, bic uebmen (id) and) bantm ntdjttf an. 1 rarum unit c$ bter bcm SKatb unb ber Dbrigfett gebitf)* ren, 2 bic affergrogefte Serge unb $$fetg ciuf ta(J junge 2Se(f gu baben. cnn n>ei( ber gan^en tabt ut, (bre, ?eib unb Scben tbncn $u trcuer anb befebfcn ift, 3 fo tt)dten (Te nid)t retdjltd) 4 Dor @ott nnb ber 5Bc(t, n>o (Te ber Stabt cbetben unb 53cfferinu} ntd)t fudjtcn mit attem SSermogeu XaQ unb- 9tad)t. 9iint [iegt etner Stabt ebetben mcfyt a^ Tetn bartn, bag man grcge Sd)d6e fammle^ fejle Saltern, frf)6ne JQaufer, Dtcfe ^itd)fen unb armfd)$eua,e ; 5 ja, wo beg m'el 6 tft, unb tode -barren baruber fommen/ ift fo tnel 1 N e h m e n s i c h a n. See p. 55, Note 2. 2 Gebuhren. See p. 226, Note 1. 3 Ihnen zu treuer Hand befohlen ist, " is committed to their trust." This is an idiomatic expression. The pronoun in the dative expresses the persons to whom, and z u the object for which, it was committed. Stadt is governed by the following substantives, all which, being regarded as constituting a whole, are construed with a verb in the singular number. 4 So thaten sie nicht reichlich, etc. " they would not do enougli (richly, sufficiently), i. e. they weuld be held recreant be- fore God and the world, if they should not seek," etc. 5 Harnisch (harness), " what is worn upon the body for pro- tecting it in battle." It includes everything below the helmet. Panzer, a coat of mail, is a part of a Harnisch, covering the body, bat not the limbs. KUrass, for which Luther and the older writers often use Krebs, is a breast-plate. Ha'rnischzeuge, means the various coverings worn as armor. 6 Dess viel, much of tliis. 7 Daruber kommen, come upon them, come in possession of them. DarQber itself means, about, concerning or for that; upon or during that ; over and above that ; and across ; and generally mod- ifies the verb to which it is prefixed by adding to it one or more ot these significations. Examples; daraber arbeiten, 1. to labor beyond (what is required). 2. to labor on a thing ; daraber bauen, 232 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. befto arger unb bejb orogerer (scfyabe berfelben (Stabt, fonbern ba3 tft einer Stabt bejW nnb aEerretcfyjW ben, &ett nub ,ftraft, bag ffe fo met 1 fetner, gefefyrter, ni'wfttger, et)rbarer, ftebTgefogetter 23itrger bat, bie fonnen barnad) roobl rfja&e, unb al(e3 ut fammcln, batten unb recbt braurfjen* 28eil benn erne (Stabt foil unb mug ?eute 2 babeu, unb atfentbalben ber grogte ebrecfye, Mangel unb $(age i(l, bag e^ an ?euten fet)(c, fo mug man ntct)t barren, bt^ jTe to build (active) upon a thing, or (neuter) during a time; darQber bie ten, to overbid, outbid ; darttber bringen, 1. to bring over or across. 2. to bring more (than is necessary); darQber gehen, 1. to pass or go over or across. 2. to go about a work. 3. to excel or surpass; dardber halten, I. to hold one thing over another. 2. to estimate highly. 3. to hold on to, to observe (a usage), to preserve, to cherish; daruber her gehen, 1. to go at or about a work. 2. to blame, to assail ; darUber hingehen, to pass over (ordinarily in silence) ; darQber h in in ache n, to run over a work hastily and lightly ; d a r U b e r h i n s e h e n, I. to look beyond a thing. 2. to over- look or neglect ; darUber machen, to do over and above ; d a r il- ber sich machen, like darOber gehen, or h-ergehen, to apply one's self to, to begin a work ; dartlber schreiben, 1. to superscribe. 2. to write about, or treat upon; daraber schwim- men, 1. to sicim at the top. 2. to swim across; daruber setzen, 1. to set or place one upon a thing or over a business. 2. to carry one across a place. 3. to prefer one to another ; darQber s e y n, 1. to ex- cel. 2. to be busied icith ; dardber weg seyn, 1. to be, or to have gone through a business or trouble. 2 not to need a thing, not to be troubled about it ; darQber komraen, 1. to rise above, to excel. 2. to go beyond, to rise (in price). 3. to fall upon, to happen to come to. 4. to begin, to take in hand, to take away. With these illustrations, it will not be difficult to make out any other similar combinations. " Where there is much of this, and reckless fools come into posses- sion of them (upon them), it is so much the worse." Viel ap- pears to be redundant. 1 Dass (sie) so viel, etc. " that it have many citizens who," etc. So merely gives intensity to viel. 2 Leute, (skilful) people. Gebreche for which das G e- brechen is now used. txr o ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 233 * felfyl n>arf)fen ; man nnrb fie and) webcr a\\$ (Efctnen bancn, nod) au$ &o($ fcfymfcctn ; fo rotrb @5ett md)t timber tbmt, fe fangc man ber (sadden bnrd) anbere feme bara,etbane (fitter .qeratbcn 1 fann* arum mitfien nnr ba$n tbnn, 2 unb 9J2ube nnb $ojl baran wcnben, ffe felbft 3 er^teben unb marf)cn. cnn tt>eo tft bte (gdjufo, bag eg jet in atten tabten fo biinnc (Tefyet 4 i?on gefd)icften Lenten, ol)ne ber >bria,fetf, bie ba^ junge SSoIf bat (ajfen aufwadifen, tDte ba$ ^ol^ im s IBa(be wddjfet, unb nkfyt ^ngefet)en, tt)te man eg (ebre nnb ^tebe ? arum if^ 5 eg ancf) fo nnorbent(td) ge^ 1 Gerathen. See p. 156, Note 2. "God will not perform a miracle, so long as men can attain their object (things) through his other benefits shown." At present the preposition zu generally fol- lows this verb, instead of the genitive. 2 Dazu thun. See p. 94, Note 4. Dazu, when prefixed to verbs, generally signifies, 1. to that. 2. in addition to that. 3. to that end. Eg. dazu brauchen means, 1. to need for that. 2. to apply to that object. 3. to use at the same time, or in addition to ; dazu e s s e n, 1. (neuter) to eat ichile doing something else. 2. (active) to eat one ar- ticle of food with, or in addition to another; dazu halten, 1. (ac- tive) to keep or employ a person for a certain object or business. 2. (re- flective), to hasten. 3. to follow, to belong to the sect or party of. Da- zu kaufen, 1 . to purchase in addition to. 2. to purchase for a spe- cific object ; dazu konimen, to come to, to fail upon, to happen ; e s kommt dazu dass, accedit quod or ut, add to this ; dazu g e- hen, 1. to go to. 2. (in music) to fall, or strike in with. Nearly all other instances of the use of this particle with verbs may be explain- ed after the analogy of these examples. 3 Selbst, belongs not to s i e, which is in the accusative, but to the subject of the verb, " to educate them and form them ourselves." 4 Dass es so dQnne siehet. "Whose fault is it that at present, in all the cities so few skilful people are seen (it looks so thin of skillful people) except of the magistrates, who have left the youth to grow up like wood in the forest, and have not taken notice how they are taught and educated ? Lehre and ziehe are in the sub- junctive, because they refer not to the view of the author which was definite, but to the ignorance and uncertainty of the magistrates. 5 Darum ist's, etc. "Therefore has it grown so irregularly 20* 234 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tt>arf)fen, bag $u fetncm 23an, fonbern intr etn nnniteg e* fyege, mtb mtr $m generwerf titcfyttg tfh (&$ mng beefy ttjeltftcfy Regiment bfctben* (5ott man benn 1 Sitlaffen, bag ette( 9fttt$en nnb $nebel reajeren, fo man eg n>obl beffern famt, tft je em rottbeg nntternimfttgeg men* @o fag man eben fo mefyr 2 erbem @o tft e^ anrf) etne nnmenfrf)rid)e S3o^l)ett, fo man ntcfyt n?etter benft ; benn at* fo : n>tr wotten jet regteren, wa^ gebet nn^ an, fine e be^ nen geben merbe, bte nacf) nn^ fommem 9fttrf)t itber fd)en, fonbern itber (Eane nnb JQitnbe fottten folrf)e ?ente gteren, bte ntcfyt met)r benn tt)ren 9^n^en nnb (5bre tm that it furnishes no timber (is good for no building), but is a useless hedge, and good only for fuel." 1 Soil man denn, etc. " If then we should permit that per- fect dolts and stocks should rule, when we can prevent it (make it better), it would be a barbarous and brutal undertaking." Ru Is for R u 1 p s, belching ; one that belches, a sottish fellow. 2 So lass man eben so mehr, etc. " Then let us rather make swine and wolves rulers, and set them over those who will not think how they are [to be] governed by men (i. e. under what rulers they shall live). It is a barbarous crime, if one thinks of nothing farther than this ; viz We will now reign ; what does it concern us how it shall be with those who come after us ?" Ge h e t an. Angehen, as an active verb, means 1. to address one's self to a thing or to a person to take hold of, to apply to. 2. (impersonally, for the most part), to concern, to relate to. As a neuter verb, it means, to begin, to go on, to succeed, or prosper. d enen gehen. See p. 23, Note 5. The word so at the beginning of these two sentences, may be rendered by thus, or then, or they may be omitted in the English. At the commencement of several of the clauses which occur here, it menns, if, and in one of them (die, so n i c h t d e n k e n) it is a rel- ative pronoun. This word, in its various uses, and with the vari- ous intonations which it receives in conversation (expressing, as- sent, surprise, doubt, etc.), has a great diversity of significations. It would of itself be no mean test of one's knowledge of German. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. mcnt fndjen. 90Benn man gtetd) ben fycdjjkn gfetg fitrmen* bet, 1 bag man citcf feme gefefyrtc, gefdjtrfte ?ente eqoge $u regiercn, e$ roi'trbe benned) 9Dtttl)e nnb (Serge genng fyaben, bag ed n?of)( jugiitge. 2 *[Bte fell cd bcnn $ugeben, tt>enn man ba gar md)t$ $utl)nt? 3 3a, fpridjft bn abermaf, 4 ob man g(eid) fottte nnb mitgte @d)ttfen fyaben ; n>a ifl un aber nii$e (atetntfdje, grie# chtfdje nnb ebra'ifofje S^ngcn nnb anbere frete $imfte g rcn ? $6nnten nnr bed) 5 wobl bentfd) bte S5ibe( nnb te^ 2Bort (ehren, bte nn^ genngfam tft ^nr eltgfett ? tt>ort : ja id) wetg (etber tt>obf, bag tt)ir X)entfd)en mitflen tmmer 33e(l:ien nnb totte tnere [epn nnb bfetben, 6 n?te nn3 benn bte nmltegenben ?dnber nenncn, nnb n>tr and) tt>ot)I tterbtenen. Wlidj wnnbert aber, n)arnm ttnr ntd)t and) etn^ mat 7 fagen : nxi3 foil 8 nn^ @etbe, ^IBetn, ewitr^e, nnb ber 1 Furwendet for vorwendet. See p. 1 36, Note 1 . E i t e 1, see p. 110, Note 4. 2 Z u g i n g e. See p. 130, Note 2. 3 Zuthut. See p. 163, Note 5. 4 Ja, sprichst du abermal. See p. 223, Note 3, and p. 230, Note 5. 6 K6nnten wir doch, etc. is not a direct question, but an affir- mation, with a point of interrogation, which is equivalent to the in- terrogation, " Should we not?" in English. " We could still teach the Bible and the word of God in German, which is enough for our salvation, [could we not?]." Such sentences are common in German. 6 Seyn und bleiben. These two words are very often coupled together in German for the sake of emphasis, though they express but one idea. 7 E i n m a 1. See p. 48, Note 2. 8 Soil en. See p. 123, Note 2. " Of what use to us are silk, wine, spices and [other] foreign articles, since we ourselves have wine, corn, wool, flax, wood and stone in the German States not on- ly an abundance of it for sustenance, but a choice and selection of it for embellishment and ornament." Die Fa lie is construed like die Menge. See p. 222, Note 3. When it is preceded by words expressing the material to which it refers, these words may be either n the genitive or in the accusative. The former is the more eleva- SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fremben mt^fdnbifcfyen ^Baaren, fo wtr borf) felbjl SQktn, $orn, 2Botfe, gfacfyg, ol$ iwb tetne in bentfcfyen ?dn# bent ntcfyt atfetn bte gitUe baben $nr 9ial)rnng, fonbern and) bte $itbr l tmb 3Ba^I'ju @bren wtb cfymncf ? ne $itnfte unb pracfyen, bte itng ofyne cfyaben, ja grogerer cfymnrf, 9titen, (l)re ttnb grommen (Tub, 2 betbe $ur fyetttgen djrift git fcerfiefyen ititb weftltrf) D^egtment gu fit^rcn, tt>otfen n>tr t)erarf)ten ; ttnb bte ait^lattbifcfyen ^Baaren, bte un^ weber itotl) tied) nit^c (Tttb, ba$u un^ fct)tttben bi^ attf ben ratl), ber woKen vt)tr ntdjt entratfyen ; !)etgen ba^ nt(i)t bitttg bentfrf)e barren nnb S3eftten ? 3war, 3 wenn fetn anberer 3Rnen an ben @prac()en ware, ted, the latter more colloquial ; as, Erodes und Weines die F U 1 1 e, "an abundance of bread and wine," orBrod und W e i n die F fl 1 1 e, " bread and wine [in] abundance." 1 K tt h r or K r, choice, election, is now most frequently found in compounds, as W i 1 1 k r, arbitrium, and Ktirfdrst, elec- tor, 2 Die uns ohne Schaden sind, etc. "which are harm- less, nay a greater ornament, benefit, honor and advantage [than are those things] both for the understanding of the Scriptures and for managing the civil government, we are disposed to despise ; and with foreign articles, which are neither necessary nor useful to us, [and which] besides strip us to the very back bone, with these we are un- willing to dispense. Does not that make us deserve the name of German dunces and brutes ?" O hne Schaden is used as a pred- icate after sind, much as the following nominatives are. Frora- m e n, see p. 49, Note 2.Z u r h e i 1 i g e n S c h r i f t, " for the Holy Scriptures, to understand them," i. e. for understanding the Scriptures and for managing the civil government. Grath or Grat, for which Riickgrat is now more common. Der is for d e r e r. H eissen das nicht billig deutsche Narren und B e s t i e n. On the use of d a s, see p. 11.0, Note 3, and Gram. p. 303. " Are not these reasonably called," etc. equivalent in sense to, " Do they not deserve to be called," or " Is that not being Ger- man fools and brutes." 3 Z w a r is compounded of z u w a h r, in truth, and is written separately in old German. Z w a r, f r e i 1 i c h and w o h 1 are used ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 237 foUte beef) tut* bag 1 btUig erfrcucn unb an$imbett, bag er 2 fb cine ebfe, feme abe otteg ift, bamit ung eutfd)en ott jelst fo rctcfyid), faft itber aUe ?anber, bcimfucfyet 3 unb be* flnabet. 9Hau (iebct md)t mef, 4 bag ber eufel btefelbeu batte tofien burd) bte bobeft <5d)u(en unb Softer auffom* men ; ja fie baben attest auf bag od)fte baroiber getobet, unb and) nod) tcbeu. 2^cnn ber ^eufet rod) ben SSrateu vt>ob( : wo bte prad)en ber^or famen, wiirbe fern 9?etrf) em gad) gewtnnen, bag er ntdjt wteber [etd)t fonnte ^tflopfeu* SKetC er mm niefyt bat mogen tt>et)ren r bag jTe beror famen, benfct er bod) fte nun atfo fd)tua( $u fatten, bag jte as concessive particles, meaning, indeed or to be sure, and are gener- ally followed by an adversative (doch, aber, etc.) in the next clause. They differ thus; Zwar, expresses certainty; freilich, unhesitating concession, or obviousness ; wohl, probability. 1 Das, like hoc in Latin, refers often to a following clause. See p. 223, Note 3. 2 E r refers grammatically to N u t z e n. In sense, it is more gen- eral. 3 H e i m s u c h e t. See p. 219, Note 3. B e g n a d e t. See p. 222, Note 2. 4 V i e 1, much, in many instances. The sense is ; " We do not find in many instances, that Satan allowed them (the languages) to flourish by means of the universities and cloisters ; nay more, they have always raged most violently against them, and do so still ; for Satan got the scent of it, that if the languages should come into vogue, his kingdom would have a hole made in it, which he could not easily stop up again. But as he could not prevent them from com- ing up, he intends, at least, to keep them within such narrow limits, that they will of themselves waste away and fall. In these, no wel- come guest has entered his house ; therefore, he desires to give him such dry picking, that he will not stay long. Very few, dear sirs, of our people perceive this mischievous trick of Satan." Roch den Bra ten is a phrase corresponding to the French, senlir de loin la fricassee, and the English, to smell a rat. Fach has here a peculiar meaning and is used in the sense of L o c h. W ehren dass. See p. 98, Note 7. U n s e r, of us, is governed by w e n i g. SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. tfynen fetbft ttneber fotfen ttergeben nnb fatten* (g ifl tfym ntdjt em fteber aft bamtt tng ang gefommen, barum tt>ttf er tt)n and) a(fo fpetfen, bag er ntdjt tange fotte bletben. )tefen bofen itcf beg enfelg fefyen imfer gar menig, Iteben Saturn, Iteben Sentfdjen, fafiet itn^ t)ter bte 5lugen auf^ t()itn, ott banfen fitr ba^ ebfe ^(eineb, unb fejl barauf balten, 1 bag eg img ntdjt tuteber entjogeit n>erbe, unb ber ^ettfei mofyt fetnen 50?ut^iCfen bitffe. X^enn bag fcmtett tt>tr ntd)t (eugnen, bag, nneroofyl bag (^ttangelutm atlein burrfj ben ()ei(tgen eijit tjl gef cmmen, nnb tdg(td) f 6mmt r fo ifi eg beef) bnrcf) ?OJttte( ber (spracfyen gefcmmen, nnb ^at and) babnrcfy gngenommen, mnf and) babnrefy bel)alten n>erben. Senn gteirf) alg ba 2 @ott bnrd) bte 2(po|M irottte in atte 2Ge(t bag (ttangeltnm (aflfen fommen, gab er bte 3nngen ba^n ; nnb fyatte and) ^nor bnrd) ber 9?6mer $Kegt^ ment bte grtedn'fd)e nnb (atetntfd)e (5prad)e fo tt>ett in atte ?anber anggebrettet, anf bag fetn @angeltnm je ba(b fern nnb tt>ett grnd)t bracfyte, 5Wfo t)at er je^t and) getfyan* 9^femanb l)at gewngt, roarnm ott bte @prad)en l)ert)or (teg fommen, 3 big bag man nnn affererft 4 ftebet, bag eg nm beg (Jt)ange(tt mtUen gefd)e{)en ipt, n>e(d)eg er bernad) bat tt)o(Ien 5 cjfenbaren, nnb babnrd) beg ^nbedjrtjlg D^egtment 1 Fest daraufhalten, hold on to it, take pains to preserve it , to cherish it. B s s e. This verb not only signifies to mend, to make good, to atone for, but also to satiate, to gratify ; and so here. 2 Gleich als da, immediately when. 3 Hervor liess kommen, instead of hervor kommen 1 ie ss. 4 -Allererst. See p. 225, Note 3. 6 Hat wollen. The verbs d Or fen, konnen, mo gen, mQsse n, sollen, wollen, lassen, as also he is sen, helfen, horen, sehen, and sometimes lehren and lernen, have this peculiarity that the infinitive is used in the place of the perfect parti- ciple (after an auxiliary) when another verb in the infinitive is de- pendent on them. See p. 24, Note 1, end. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 239 aufbccfcn itnb jerftoren. arnm bat er and) @ried)en(anb ben iirfcn gecjeben, auf bag bie ($ricd)en, tterjaa,et unb $er* fh-enet, 1 bte gried)ifd)e Sprad)e anSbradjten, unb em 2(n* fane; nntrbe, ami) anbere prad)en mit $n lernen. (go Keb nun ate nn3 bag (S&angeltum ift, fo fyart lafiet itnd iiber ben (gpradjen batten* 2 enn ott bat feme (sdmft nidjt umfonft attetn in bie $n>ei pradjen fdjretben lajfen, ba^ a(te Xejlamcnt ut bie ^brdifcf)e, bag D^ene in bie rtedjtfche. $Be(d)e mm ^5ott nicbt i)erad}tet, fonbern jn feinem $3ort ertvablet bat Dor alien anbern, fctten and) n?ir biefelbcn 3 ttor atten anbern ebren. Senn St. 9>cwfag rit^ met bai> fitr eine fonber(id)e (5bre nnb SSortbett ber ebra# ifd)en prad)e r bag ette3 ^IBort barinnen gegeben ift, ba er fprad) ^6m. 3 : ,,$3a$ t)at bie SBefcfynetbnncj 2Sertbei( ober ^n^en ? gafH Diet. 5(nf^ @rj^e, fo ffnb il)nen te^ D^ebe befobten." X)a^ ritbntet and) ber $om q)f. 147 : ,,(r t)erfunbiget fein $Bort 3afob, nnb feine e# bote nnb 9?ed)te 3f^pl @t bat feinem $o(f a(fo getban, nod) feine Offecfjte if)nen oflFenbaret." ^at)er and) bie ebra^ ifd)e @prad)e Ijctftg beiget. Unb @t. ^3an(n^ 9?om. 1. nen* net fte bie tyiiiQe (Sd)rift r obne 3^ e if e ^ tn beg beitigen a$ barinnen tterfaffet ijl. 5(Ifo mag 1 Verjaget und zerstreuet, participles used adjectively. " In order that the Greeks, driven away and dispersed, should carry the Greek language abroad, and that a beginning be made to learn other languages also at the same time (in i t)." 2 Hart ttberden Sprachen halten. Ueber etvvas ha Hen is the same in sense asaufetwas halten. Compare darauf halten p. 238, Note ], and darOber halten p. 231, Note 7. " So dear as the gospel is to us, so zealously let us cherish the languages." 3 Welche dieselben. "What languages (or such lan- guages as) God has not despised, but chosen for his word in prefer- ence to all others, these we also should honor more than all other lan- guages." See p. 44, Note 3. 4 Fast. See p. 153, Note 4. 240 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ancfy bie griecfyifrfje (Spracfye tt>of)( fyetfig fyeigen, bag 1 biefelbe ttor anbern ba^u ewa fylet ifl, bag bag nene eftament bar* innen gefcfyrieben twtrbe* Unb an berfelben, 2 a(3 an einem Srnmten, in anbere Spracfye bnrrf)3 ohnetfd)en ge# floflfen, unb (Te and) get)ei(iget fyat Unb (afiet nn bag gefagt fetm, 3 bag u>ir bag ^ange(iiim tticfyt wot)! n>erben erl)a(ten ol)ne bie (Spracfyem X)ie n ftnb bie cfyeibe, barinnen bieg 5SJJefler be3 ^eifte^ ie ftnb ber cfyretn, 4 barinnen man bieg $(cinob tragt* (Sie (Tnb ba^ @efa'g, barinnen man biefen ^ranf fafiet* ^ie jtnb bie ^emnot, 5 barinnen biefe peife (iegt, Unb rcie ba^ ^oangetinm felbfi ^eigt r jTe (Tnb bie ^lorbe, ba^ rinnen man biefe SSrobte, unb gifcfye nnb SSrocfen bet)a(t 3a tt>o tt)ir e^ t)erfel)en, 6 bag tt>ir (ba @ott or fet)) 7 bie (spracfyen fat)ren laflfen, fo rcerben tt)ir nicf)t attein ba^ (ttatta,elinm Derlieren, fonbern tt>irb anct) enb(id) bal)in ge^ 1 D a s s, because. 8 Und aus derselben, etc. " and from this language as from a fountain it (the New Testament) has flowed into other languages and sanctified them also." 3 Und lasset uns das gesagt seyn, " and let this be kept in mind ; literally, " and let this be said to us." But gesagt is not a passive with seyn, which would require gesagt worden seyn, but it is used adjectively. " Let this be regarded as said or settled." 4 S c h r e i n, (English shrine, Latin scrinium), a box, or casket, is more used in poetry than in prose. 5 Kemnot, or Kemnate, a store-house, so used only in the old German. It commonly means, a house, room, or chamber. 9 V e r s e h e n. See p. 222, Note 6. 7 Da Gott vor sey, which may God forbid. Da v o r for d a v o r. One is represented as hindering a thing by being before it. See p. 230, Note 4. Compare the word prevent. " Indeed, if we are so negligent as to let the languages go, (if. we neglect it, so that we let, etc.) which may God prevent then we shall not only lose the gospel, but it will finally turn out (or come to this) that," etc. D a- hin gerathen. See p. 38, Note 3. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 241 ratben, bag wir webcr ?ateimfd) nod) cutfd) red)t reben ober fdjveiben fomtcm eg (agt nnd 1 bad etcnbe grautidje Cnrcmpd $nr SBewetfung unb fanning nchmcn in ben t)o# fyen (Sdniten unb TOflcru, barimten man ntd)t attctn bad (angefium tterfernet, fcnbern and) fatetmfrfje unb bcntfd)c pradje fccrberbet fyat, bag bie etenben cnte fcfyier 311 lauter 23efHen geworben (Tub, weber bcntfd) nod) (atetnifd) red)t reben ober frfjretben fonnen, nnb betnal)e and) bte na* titr(id)e SSernnnft Dertoren fyafreu. Sarum haben c^ bte 5lpofle( and) fctbjl fur notl)tg an* gefeben, bag jTe bad nene ^ejlament tn bie grted)ifd)e <5prad)e fafifeten unb anbanben, obne 3tt > etfef, bag jTe e^ un^ bafefbjl (Td)er unb gen>ig Dcrwaljrten, rote in einer l)ei(i^ gen ?abe, Senn fie l)aben gefeben 2 atte ba^jentge, bad jn^ fiinftig war, nnb nun atfo ergangen ift ; n?o ed attein in bie $opfe gefaffet witrbe, nne mand)e wifbe, wit^e, Unorbnung nnb (SJcmeugc, fo mand)erfei Sinnen, Dimfel nnb ?et)ren jTd) crl)eben ttnirben in ber ^brtpteuljctt, we(d)en in feinem 3Gege ^n webren, nod) bie (infa'(tigen ^n fd)itfeen n>aren, mo ntd)t bad neue eftament gewig in (Sdjrift unb pracfye ge# faflet ware, X^arum ift ed gewig, wo nid)t bie bteiben, 3 ba mug $n(et bad (5t)angeltum untergef)en, 4 1 Dess lasst uns, etc. " Of this let us take as a proof and as a warning, the wretched and shocking example [presented] in the universities," etc. Lasst for las set. On z u, see p. 78, Note 4, and p. 104, Note 6. 2 Denn sie haben gesehen, etc. " For they all foresaw that which was then future, and which now has taken place accor- dingly ; namely, that as much wild and strange disorder and con- fusion so also various views, opinions and doctrines would spring up in Christendom, if it (divine revelation) were to be received mere- ly into the mind; which it would be impossible to prevent." 3 Wo nicht die Sprachen bleiben, etc. " Therefore it is certain that where the languages are not preserved (do not re- main) there the gospel must at length become extinct." By the lan- guages is meant the study of the languages. We might expect the word d a s s before w o ; but it is not necessary in German. 4 Untergehen, to sink, to go to the bottom, to perish. In order 21 242 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fyat aitcf) bennefen/ mtb rung* Sernt fobatb nacfy bcr 2lpojM 3 e ^, ba bfe (Spracfyett to distinguish this word from n i e d e r g e b e n, it will be necessary to form a precise idea of the difference between u n t e r and n i e- der. It is well known that unter has two significations, ex- pressed in Latin by sub and inter. With this last signification, inter ^ among, and sometimes between, we have here nothing to do. In the former signification, in which it bears a close analogy to the adverb u n t e n, below, beneath, it is properly the opposite of Q b e r. Thus, placed antithetically, the words would stand, Qber und unter, over and under, ober und nieder, upper and lower. Unter- g e h e n is therefore a much stronger expression than n i e d e r g e- he n. As applied to the sun, the former would imply that it is set- ting or passing below the horizon, whereas the latter would mean that it is declining, i. e. either approaching the horizon, or sinking below it. Any descent is expressed by niedergehen; but u n t e r g e- Ii e n means to descend so far as to be under something else. Unter is also used frequently in composition as the opposite of ober. Thus we have not only Oberdeutschland and N e i d e r- deutschland; Oberhessen and N iederhessen ; Ober- r h e i n and Niederrhein, Upper Germany and Lower Germany ; Up- per Hesse and Lower Hesse ; the Ujiper Rhine and the Lower Rhine ; but Oberitalien and Unteritalien; Oberagypten and Un- teragypten, Upper Italy and Under Italy; Upper Egypt apd Under Egypt. In those compound verbs in which either unter or nieder are used in nearly the same sense, such as niedertauchen and untertauchen; niederliegen and unterliegen, the latter, or those compounded with unter, are more elevated and dignified. Nieder is etymologically the same as the English word nether, and enters into the compounds beneath, underneath. 1 Das hat auch bewiesen, etc. " Experience has proved that, and still shows it; for immediately (s o b a 1 d) after the times of the apostles, when the languages (gift of tongues) ceased, the gos- pel, and the [true] faith, and Christianity itself (entire) declined more and more, until they entirely vanished under the pope; and since the time that the languages disappeared, not much that is special or good Cbesonders) has been seen in Christendom, but very many shock- ing abominations (very much shocking abomination) have found place." Sobald, does not necessarily imply any comparison, that is, it may signify not only as soon as, but immediately, directly. But ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 243 aufborten, nabm and) ba3 (Stoaugctium unb ber ($(aube unb gan$c (Sbriftenfyeit je mcl)r unb mcfyr ab, bte bag fte uuter bcm gMb(l gar fcerfuufeu ift, itnb ift, feit ber 3cit bie Spra* cben gefatfen {Tub, uirfjt me( befonberd in ber (t)rifienf)eit erfcbcn ; abcr gar ttiel grdufidjer rauc( au3 ummfieubeit ber (spradjeu gefcfyefyen. 2ttfo n>ieberum : J wetf je^t bie pracfycn hcrwor gcfommcu (Tub, briugen (Te etn fofdje^ ?tcf)t nut jTrf), unb tt)uu fc(d)e groge Dinge, bag fid) atte t)crwunbcrt, uub mug befeuncn, bag n?tr ba^ ^Daug fo fautcr uub rein babeu, fajl ate bte 2(pejM gebabt t)aben/ unb gauj in feine erfle Dteinigfeit gefommen t(l, unb gar vnel rctncr, benn e^ jur Seit @t* iercni)mi ober 2(ugu(Hut ge* wcfcn i(l. Unb umma, 2 ber bettige eijl ift fein 9tarr, 3 gebet aud) uid)t mit Ieirf)tferrigen uuuotbigen (Sad)en um ; ber 4 l)at bte 3prad)en fo uitBe uub uotl) gead)tet in ber @t)rt* flenbcit, bag er (Te oftmate t)om ^immet mit ftd) gebrad)t ^at. 2Berd)e^ un^ atfein fcttte genugfam bewegen, biefet^ so bald, written separately always implies some comparison. N a h m a b. See p. 26, Note 5. It indicates gradual decrease. Applied to one's declining health, it means to pine away, whereas a b f a 1 1 e n means that the flesh fails away more rapidly, and e i n- f a 1 1 e n that it falls in or leaves visible marks or cavities. E r s e- h e n is a participle, forming the perfect tense with i s t. B e s o n- d e r s is probably here used for Besonderes by a negligence in the orthography. On the word Christenheit, see p. 11, Note 3. 1 Also w i e d e r u m, " So on the contrary." See p. 3, Note 2. 2 S u m m a, or i n S u in m a, m a word. Adopted from the La- tin. 3 Der heilige Geist ist kein Narr. The argument is this : Since the Holy Ghost does no foolish or useless thing ; and yet has bestowed the gift of tongues, it is evidently our duty to cul- tivate a knowledge of the languages as a useful and Christian attain- ment.' 4 D e r, a demonstrative is more emphatic than e r in the next clause. The form of both may be given by the word, he, italicised in the former case and not in the latter. 244 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ben ntit Jfetg wtb Q?f)rcn $n fttcfyen, unb iricfyt $it tteracfyten, tt>eif cr 1 fie nun fetbjl; wteber anf (rben erwecfet 3a fprirf)ft bn : e fmb mete 2Sa'ter fettg (jemorben, ba* ben auef) gelebret obne praofyen. 2 a ifi wafyr. $3o rerfwefi bit aber ancf) bag f)in, 3 bag fie fo oft in ber rfjrift gefcl)(et fyaben ? $3ie off fetytt 6t. tm ^)fa(ter unb anbern SJu^fegMitgen, fo tt>oM ja and) afle, bte ol)nc bte pracfyen jTd) bie @d)nft l)aben imternwnben 4 an^^utegen ? 5 Unb ob fie g(eict) 6 1 W e i 1 e r, etc. The Holy Ghost or divine Providence, is here represented as having- prodnced the revival of learning. 2 Ohne Spr ache n belongs not only to haben g-elehrt but also to sind selig geworden. In such sentences the punctua- tion is different in the German from what it is in the English. Ja at the beginning of the sentence, is to be rendered nay but, or simply but. See p. 228, Note 3. The German j a and the English yea are the same word. 3 Wo rechnest du aber auch das bin, etc. "But to what (wo hin, wldtktr) do you ascribe this, namely, that they have so often mistaken the meaning of the Scriptures?" 4 Unterwunden. See p. 155, Note 3. 6 Auszulegen. Auslegen, in its literal sense, is equivalent to hinaus legen, to put out to show (as goods), to expose to view. Figuratively, it means to set forth a subject so that all its parts may be seen and understood. The leading idea is to bring from a state of concealment. Applied to language, it means to explain or interpret the sense of the words by unfolding the grammatical construction. Erklaren is originally the same as klar machen, and relates to what was before d u n k e 1, obscure ; and hence, to make clear by giving the reasons or grounds of a thing. Deuten, means to indi- cate, to point out, to intimate by a sign, a wink, nod, etc. Ausle- gen and d e u te n relate only to things as signs or symbols of some- thing else (words as signs of ideas, and prognostics as signs of events), whereas e r k 1 a r e n relates to things in themselves. Thus e i n e n Traum auslegen or deuten, is to interpret or tell the mean- ing of a dream ; but einen Traum erkla re n, is to explain the cause of the dream. Hence Sterne deuten is the office of an astrologer ; but Sterne erklaren is that of an astronomer. 6 Obsiegleich. Ob, in old German is nearly equivalent to ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 245 rcd)t flcrebct baben, fmb fie bod) ber (Bad)ett ntd)t gewig .qewcfen, ob bafjclbe 2 redjt an bcm Drte ftebe, ba ffc e$ bin beaten ? 2tt3, bag id) beg em (rempel jeicje, red)t ifl e3 flerebet, bag (SbriftaS etteg (Scbn ifL 9(bcr vt>ie fpcttifrf) fantet e3 in ben >bren ber $Btberfad)er, ba jte beg nwb fiibreten an3 bem 110, ^pfalm : Tecum principium in die virtutis tuae, fo bocf) bafetbft in ber ebrdtfd)en (Sprad)e nid)t^ von ber @ettl)eit gefitrieben Met. 5Benn man aber alfo mit nngcmiffen ritnbcn nnb gefyffprncfyen 3 ben ^Ian# ben fd)it6et, ifi e^ nid)t eine (Sdjmad) nnb @pott ber wenn. See p. 16, Note 1. But it now means whether. Conse- quently, obgleich, obwohl, ob auch, obschon, and ob- zwar have substantially the same signification as the simpler and easier forms, wenn gleich, wenn auch, wenn schon, and wenn zwar. Obgleich and wenn gleich are frequently separated by personal pronouns and other intervening words ; the others are less frequently separated. Ob auch is poetical ; and o b- 2 war is obsolete. The etymological differences of these words are not regarded by writers at the present day. They are that ob, as a concessive particle, expresses more of doubt than wenn, which jtre- sup poses the condition expressed. Gleich implies that the condi- may follow immediately or without hindrance, ; schon implies that it has already taken place ; wo hi implies the possibility of the condi- tion: zwar implies the certainty of it ; auch implies that the con- dition follows also, or follows as a consequence of something else. 1 Etwa properly means apparently or according to one's opinion. Hence its two leading significations,!, about, nearly, likeunge- fa.hr; that is, about or nearly so, if we may judge from appearances. ti. perhaps, perchance, like v i e 1 1 e i c h t ; that is, it may be so, judging from appearances. But Ungefahr, about, nearly, expresses mere indefiniteness , without reference to any uncertainty, arising from the grounds on which the judgment is formed ; and vielleicht means literally very easily (v i e 1 in old German means the same as se hr) ; and hence, very likely, perhaps. 2 Dasselbe, neuter singular, referring in an indefinite way to the plural Sac hen. " And though they said what was not far from the truth (nearly right), still they were not sure (of the things) whether it belonged to the place, where they intimated it." 3 FehlsprQchen, false proof-texts. 21* 246 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. (Ixbnjfan bet ben ^Biberfecfytern/ bte ber Spradie funbig jtnb? Unb roerben 2 nnr fyatejlamger tw Srtfyum, nnb fatten unfern fauben mit gntem Scfyetn fitr etnen SOBeg tft nun bfe (5rf)it(b, 3 bag unfer fanbe a(fo $n cftanfccn itnrb ? 9idm(id) : bag roir bte (gpracfyen ntcfyt ttriffen, nub ift fytcr feine nUfe, benn bte pracfyen nnjTen. SOBarb ntcfyt @t ^teronpmtt^ ge^roungen, ben ^falter t)en tteitem an^ bem (Jbratfd)en ^n tjerbctmetfc^en, nm beg wii* len/ bag, mo man nut ben 3ben an^ nnferm 5 ^falter l)an^ 1 Wider fechter, can easily be explained from its etymology. It differs from Widersacher, as antagonist in English differs from adversary. It means, literally one who fights against another. It is not now in common use. 2 Und [sie] werden, etc. " And they are only made the more obstinate in'their error," etc. 3 Wessistnun die Schuld, etc.? "What is the cause, that our faith is brought into such disgrace, or is so disgraced ? It is our ignorance of the languages ; and here there is no remedy but a knowledge of the languages." Literally, it would be, " Of what is it the fault, that our faith becomes so disgraced (to disgrace) ? Namely, or forsooth [the circumstance] that we do not know the lan- guages, and there is here no help than knowing the languages." W e s s the genitive of was is now mostly out of use except in such compounds as wesshalb and we ss we gen. Schuld is often employed where the word cause would be, in English ; but it differs widely from Ursach e, by being only an evil cause, and is hence often to be rendered by the word fault . Z u Schanden. See p. 56, Note 3. N a m 1 i c h is here used in the sense of, to be sure. Die Sprachen wissen is a substantive phrase. See p. 68, Note 2. 4 Um desswillen, because, on this account. This word differs from desswegen and desshalb, as Iva does from on. Strictly speaking, desswegen, because, denotes grounds or motives of ac- tion ; desshalb, because, indicates that in regard to which, in con- sideration of ichich, one arts ; u m desswillen, because, expresses personal intention, or it is used in the sense of desswegen. 6 Unserm, our, i. e. the Christian or Latin version of the Psalms then in use. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 247 bettc, 1 fpcttetcn iTe imfcr, 2 bag eg ntd)t atfo jKtnbe tm tfdKit, n?ie ctf bic Unfcru 3 fiibrten ? 9iim ftnb 4 a Her altcn SSviter 3to$(e tt)rcr 2htbad)f, wie bem S5er^ oben angcjetget : tecurn principiam, etc. >ag and) @t Sht^ltfttUit^ fetbjl: mug bcfcmteu, tt?te er fd)retbct de doctrina Christiana, bag einem djrtjHtdjen ?ebrcr, ber bte djrtft fotf au^legen, 9totb ffnb itber bie atetmfd)c, and) bie grted)tfd)e unb ebratfd)e prad)e ; c^ tft fonft unmi^ttd), bag er tttofyt attentl)a(beit anjlojTe, ja nod) 9totl) unb Arbeit ba ijl, ob einer bte d)en fd)on tt>obf fann* X^arum t|l e3 gar k)te( 5 em anber utg nm etnen ten ^)rebiger 6 bed lauben^, unb urn etnen 2ht3teger ber 1 Handelte. See p. 29, Note 2. 2 Spotteten sie unser. See p. 177, Note 2. Comp. p. 46, Note 4. 3 Die Unser n, our party, i.e. the Christians. Comp. p. 70, Note 8. 4 Nun sind, etc. " Now the interpretation of all the ancient fathers, who, without a knowledge of the languages, have treated of the Scriptures, (though they teach nothing heretical) is still of such a character that they very often employ uncertain, variable and un- timely expressions and grope like a blind man along the wall, so that they often fail of the right [sense of the] text, and shape it (make a waxen rose of it) to their pious fancy, so that even St. Augustine himself was obliged to confess that the Greek and Hebrew langua- ges are necessary over and above the Latin to a Christian teacher, who is to interpret the Bible. It is otherwise (i. e. without this aid) impossible that he should not everywhere stumble ; indeed, there is trouble and labor, even though one be well acquainted with the lan- guages." E inem noth sind die Sprachen. See p. 162 Note 1. 6 Gar viel, very much, or quite. 9 Um einen schlechten Prediger, etc., with a simple or SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. t, ober, ttne ed @t ^autu^ nennet : etttett @m fd)fed)ter ^rebtcjer 1 ({ft mafyr) bat fo Kiel Better (gpritcfye iwb erte brd) bofmetfofyen, bag er @brtftitm fcerfte* fyen, leftren unb fyetttgtirf) (eben urtb attbern prebigen fattm 2lbcr bte (Sofyrtft au^ufcgen, unb $u fyanbefn fiir fid) mere preacher of the gospel (faith) from what it is with an interpre- ter," etc. Literally, It is quite another (i. e. it is not the same) thing with a preacher and with (or, as with) an interpreter. On the word schlecht, see p. 39, Note 5, and p. 78, Note 3. Perhaps all the significations of um can be brought under the following heads, 1. circum, circa, circiter. 2. de. Here a few phrases. Ich rede wieesmirumsHerzist. "I speak my mind, (as it is in or respecting my heart)." Es sieht Ubel um inn aus, "He ap- pears to be in a bad way (either as to his health or as to his affairs). Literally, " it appears ill respecting him." Er thut sehr um seinen Freund, "He feels much for his friend." Comp. p. 20, Note 3, med. and p. 35, Note 5. Es ist um mich geschehen, de me actum est. Esist ein sonderbares Ding um die L e i b e, " There is something singular about love, or love is a strange thing." Sich um Einen verdient mac hen, " to gain one's favor by some service (to make one's self deserving of another)." 3. For, that is, n a c h when a certain end or object is sought; and fur 7 when there is reference to price in trade. See p. 133, Note 1. 4. As marking measure of time, space and degree, where it may be omitted in the translation, or rendered by the word by when it is a measure of excess. See p. 41, Note 1. 5. To ruin with kommen, bringen, etc. See p. 106, Note 6, and p. 57, Note 3. 6. Every other, or alternately. See p. 116, Note 1. 7. In order to with the in- finitive. 8. Right about, over, prostrate, as an adverb. 1 Ein schlec liter Prediger, etc. "An ordinary preacher, it is true, has so many clear passages and texts through interpreta- tion (in translations) that he can understand and teach Christ, lead a holy life, and preach to others." Where several words in the same regimen succeed without the conjunction und expressed, they all belong to one category ; but when u n d is inserted, as it is here after lehren and leben, it implies that the following words be- long to a new class. Hence the rule for the omission or insertion of this conjunction is very different in German from what it is respect- ing the word and, in English. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 249 bin, 1 unb gu jtrettcn rcibcr btc trrtgcn (tnfitbrer ber vgdjnft, iff cr $n (jcrt'nge, 2 batf Idffet fid) obne (Spradjen md)t tbmu 3 Diiiu niuf? man je in bcr (sfyrijteuljett fokfye spropfyeten ba* ben, bte bie (Sdmft tretben 4 unb au3(ea,en, unb and) $um trett tana,en, nnb i(l ntd)t gcnug am beiftqcn ?eben unb rcd)t (ebreiu avnm jmb bte pradjen ftrarfS unb alter tna.e yonnotben in ber @l)nftenbett, g(etd)tt)te bte ^3rcpt)e^ ten eber 2(n3lcger, eb e^ ajetd) ntd)t SftotI) ijl, nod) fewt mug, bap etn jcg(td)er @l)rift cber ^)rebtger etn fo(d)er ^>ro* pl)et fei), wic @t spaitfo* fagt 1. ^or. 12, 8, unb 9 V @pbef. 4,11. aber fommt e^, bag fett ber 2(pojM %eit bte @d)rift fo finfter i|I geblteben, unb ntra.enb3 n en?l IT e r 5 beftdnbtge 2lu^(e^ gnncjen baritber gefd)rteben jTnb. ^enn and) bte bet(ta,eu SSater (n?ie gefagt) oft gefet)(et, unb tt>et[ (Te ber pradjeu 1 Fur sich hin, from one's own view, independently. Comp. p. 16, Note 8. 2 G e r i n g means small with special reference to quality or value, and hence often means inferior, weak. Klein, small, relates strict- ly to dimensions, or size. 3 Lasst sich nicht thun, cannot be done. So the phrases, Das lasst sich horen, that may be listened to, i. e. is reasona- ble ; das lasst sich denken, that is conceivable. 4 Die die Schrift treiben, etc. "who study and interpret the Scriptures, and are competent to controversy ; nor is holy living and orthodoxy enough (for the defender of Christianity). Therefore the languages are strictly and altogether necessary to the Christian church, as are prophets, or interpreters, although it is not necessary nor indispensable that every Christian or preacher should be a proph- et." Tre i be n, see p. 29, Note 1, and p. 109, Note 2. Taugen, to be good, useful orfitfof. Compare t a u g 1 i c h, p 145, Note 2. 1st nicht genug, etc. literally, " there is not enough in holy liv- ing and correct teaching," meaning, that, " a pious life and orthodox teaching are not all that is requisite." A Her Dinge which is now out of use, differs from a ] 1 e r d i n g s only by being in the gen- itive plural instead of the genitive singular. See p. 183, Note 3. 5 Gewisse, like the English word certain, is used in the two senses of sure, and some. 250 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. unttnffenb geroefen, 1 fmb (Te gar felten 01113, ber fdbret fonft, ber fdl)ret fix @t S3ernbarb ift em 9Dianu t>on grogem etft gen>efen, bag irf) ibn fefyter 2 bitrfte itber atfe ?eybrer fe$en, bte beritfymt fmb, betbe aite itnb neue ; aber jTebe, nne er nut ber cfyriftfo oft (ttnewofyf getfiu'rf)) 3 fptelet, unb (Te auger bent recfyten inn fufyrt, X>ert)alben l)aben bte oplnftett t qefagt : bte @d)rtft fei) ftnfter, f)aben net, 4 otte ^figort fet) Don 5Irt fo fmfler, unb rebe feltfam. Stber jte fet)en utd)t, bag after Mangel an ben (Spracf)en Itegt, 5 fonfl 6 tt)dre ntrf)t^ (etd)ter^ je gerebet, benn otte^ 5Bort, roo mtr bte (5prad)en Derflimben* (tn Xnrh mug mtr n?ot)( jtnfler reben, tt)e(d)en bocf) em titrftfcfy peben 3^hren n>ol)f t>erntmmt, 7 bievt>et( trf) bte tttrf)t fenne* X^arum ift ba aurf) em totted 3Sornel)men geroefett, bag man bte @d)rtft bat wotten (ernen burd) ber SSdter 1 [Haben] oft gefehlet gewesen [sind]. "For even the holy fathers, as we have said, have often failed, and because they were not versed in the languages, they are very seldom agreed ; one goes this way, the other that." See on this last expression, p. 74, Note 7. 2 S c h i e r, almost. See p. 25, Note 5. 3 Geistlich, spiritually. 4 Haben gemeint, etc. " They have supposed that the word of God was (so) obscure in its nature, and speaks in (such) a singu- lar manner." 5 Dassaller Mangel an den Sprachen liegt, "that all the fault lies in the languages," i. e. ignorance of the languages is the cause. On this use of the preposition an, see p. 169, Note 4, med. 6 S o n s t, aside from this, referring to Mangel, renders the close of the sentence a little tautological. " But for this, nothing easier (simpler) could ever be spoken, than the word of God, if we understood the languages." 7 Vernimmt, perceives, is here used in the obsolete sense of understands. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 251 gen, unb met SBiidjer unb GHoffcn EefenJ 9ftan (elite fTrf) bafitr auf btc pradjcn begeben fyaben. 2 cnn bie tteben SBciter, tt>ei( (Te ofyne (spradjen gewefen (mb, baben (Te $un>ei(eu mit melen Morten an einem Sprud) gearbeitet, unb bemtod) nur faiim l)ienad) geabmet, y unb t)a(b geratben, I)a(b gefeblet (So laufefl bu bemfefbigen 4 nad) tnit meter 9ftitbe, nnb fonntefl bieroetf bnrcf) bte prad)en bemfelben mel bejfer felbjl ratten, benn ber, bent bu folgefh tt)te bie Sonne gegen bem (Scfjatten ijt, fo tfl bte gegen alter 3Sdter (oj|en 5Cet( benn nun ben @brtftett gebii^ret, bie beilige ^u iiben, ate il)r eigen einige^ 5 ^nd), unb eine <5itnbe unb 'Viel Bacher und Glossen Lesen is a substantive phrase, and Lesen itself governs vie! in the accusative. "Read- ing many books and glosses." Comp. p. 68, Note 2. 2 S i c h a u f begeben haben, to have given themselves to. S i c h b e g e b e n, to give ones self, to put ones self, which is no longer used in a metaphorical sense, may generally be translated by to go, to resort. With the prepositions auf, n a c h and i n it implies motion to, whereas with the genitive it indicates motion from, or the surrender of a thing. See p. 165, Note 7. 3 Hienach geahmet, approached it in resemblance. N a c h- a h m e n, for which hienach ahmen seems here to be used with a slight modification, properly signifies to imitate. On g e r a- then, seep. 38, Note 3. 4 Demselbigen, refers indefinitely to some one of the fathers ; and demselben, refers to Sprue h. Rathen with the da- tive, to arrive at, is unusual. " You pursue him (one of the fathers) with great trouble, and yet might, with the aid of the languages, yourself better reach your object, than he whom you pursue." 5 E i n i g e s in the sense of e i n z i g e s. See p. 93, Note 2, and p. 149, Note!. " Since, then, it is proper for Christians to use the Bible as their own [and] only book, and [since] it is a sin and shame that we do not know our own book, nor understand the language and word of God, it is the greater sin and shame that we do not learn the languages, especially as God is now both offering and giving us men and books and whatever else is serviceable to that end, and is even inciting us to it, and would gladly have his book [made] open." 252 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ift, bag nrir nnfer etgen 23nd) nid)t nnffen, nod) nnfer3 otte3 Spradje itnb $3ort nid)t fennen, fo ift c3 nod) me( mefyr i'wbe nnb djanbe, ba$ roir nid)t (Spra* d)en fernen, fonberfid), fo nn3 jet (Sott barbent, unb giebt ?ente unb SSitdjer, nnb atterlei n>a$ ba^n bienct, nnb im$ g(etrf) ba^it rei^et, nnb fetn S5nd) gerne vooltte oflfen t)abcn* D tt>te froh fottten bte (teben SSdter geroefen fei)n x wenn (Te fatten fo fonnen jnr ^eiltgen cfyrift fommen nnb bte (Spra^ cfjen (ernen, a(^ wtr fonnten. 3Bie t)aben fie mit groger 2D?nbe nnb ^(etg fanm bte S5rocfen erfanget, ba n>tr mtt fyafber, 1 ja fd)ter obne atte 3Irbett, ba^ gan^e S3rob gett)tn^ nen f ennten. ) tt>te fd)cinbet ibr gfetg nnfere gan(l)ett, ja, nrie b^tt n>trb ott and) ra'cfyen fofcf)en nnfern Unflctg nnb Unbanfbarfett, X)al)er 2 geboret an^ bag t ^anfn^ 1* ^or. 14. nntf, bag in ber (5brt|l:ent)ett foil ba ilrtl)et( fei)n i'tber atterlet ?el)re, bajn atter l^tnge Don 9t6tfyen tjl, bte (Spradjen $n ttjiflen* ^enn ber ^rebiger ober ebrer mag n>ol)l bte S3tbef bnrd) nnb bnrd) tefen, 3 note er mitt, er treffe ober febfe, tDenn D^iemanb ba ift, ber ba nrtbeife, ob er e3 red)t madje ober ntd)t @ott man benn nrtbeifen, fo mng ^nnjl 4 ber @prad)en ba fei>n, fonfi: ift e^ tterloren. ^arnm, obn)ot)t ber Ianbe nnb ba (5t)angennm bnrd) fd)te 1 H a 1 b e r is an adjective agreeing with Arbeit in the dative. " Whereas we with half or rather almost without any, labor, might obtain the whole loaf." 2 D a h e r, which commonly means hence, sometimes means hither or Acre, as in this passage. 3 L e s e n, here means the public reading and exposition of the Scriptures. " For the preacher or teacher may read [from the pulpit] the whole Bible (or, the Bible through and through) as he choses, right or wrong (hit or miss), unless there be some one to judge whether he does it correctly or not." 4 K u n s t. See p. 191, Note 1, and p. 193, Note 2. 5 Schlechte. The use of this word here, illustrates the con- nection between its two significations simple and bad or poor. The ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 253 obne gprarfuMt cjcprcctcjet wcrbcn, fo a.cfoct'6 tod) faul 1 nub fdnvad), wtb man nnrfc $ulct mitbe nnb ubcrbriifjig, nub fa'llct bod) 511 $3oben. 2lbcr wo bte gpradjcn finb, ba gefyet e3 fn'fd) nnb |larf,nnb nnrb btc Sdmft bnufyrieben, 2 nub ftubct ffd) ber toube immcr licit, bnrd) anbcre imb abcr anberc $3orte nub 3Bcrfe. <$ fell imS and) ntd)t trren, 3 baf; C^tlicbc fich be^ citfeS ritbincn, unb bte 2d)nft fleringe adjtcn. (^tltdie attdi, n>te btc S3ritber 3Sa(bcufc^, bte (5prarf)cn nidbt nitlpltd) acbtett. 3lber (tcber grcitnb, eijl bin, etft ber, 4 td) bin and) im (S3ei|l geroefett, unb babe aud) ctfter gefeben (wcnn 1 ^ je getten foK Don eicjencm gletfd) vitbmen) t?tel(etd)t mebr, benn ebcn btcfelbtgcn nod) tm 3^'^ febeu werben, wfe faft fie and) (Td) ritbmcn. Slurf) bat metn etjl jTd) etwa^ be# tuetfet, fo bed) tt)r efil tm 5Binfe( gar fhlle tfl, nnb ntd)t t)tel mel)r tbnt, benn fetnen D?nl)in aufmtrft. Sa^ tt>etg td> aber wcl)^ 5 n>te fajl ber @et|I atteg altetn tt)itt ^IBare ic^ word simple has two significations connected in the same way. See p. 39, Note 5. 1 So genet's doch faul, etc. "still it goes on sluggishly and feebly, and one finally becomes weary and sick at heart, and falls to the ground." 8 Durchtrieben, for durchgetrieben, carried through to the end as contrasted with " falling to the ground" before coming to the end. a Irren is sometimes, as here, used in an active signification, for which irre machen is commonly employed. 4 G e i s t h i n, G e i s t her, " the spirit here and the spirit there," i. e. what signifies the spirit ? It is all nothing. " I also have been in the spirit, and have seen peihaps more spirits (if it i ever allowable to boast of one's own flesh) than these same persons will see in a year, however much they boast. My spirit has also dis- played itself somewhat, while theirs is stock-still in its hiding-place and does little more than boast." A ufwerfen see, p. 151, Note 5. 6 Dass weiss ich aber wohl. Here Luther speaks more seriously of the spirit, referring to its ordinary influences, but still maintaining that spiritual influences without study, will not make 22 254 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bod) alien 23itfd)en $u feme geroefen, tt>o mir ntcfjt bie djen gefyotfen, itnb mid) ber djrift fTd)er nnb gewtg gemadjt fatten. 3d) fya te and) wot)l fonnen fromm fctjn, unb in ber ttflfe red)t prebigen ; aber ben ^>abft nnb bie epbtften ntit bem gan^en enbedjrifHfdjen Regiment nritrbe id) wot)( baben (ajfen feijn, wag pe jmb. er Xenfel ad)tet meinen nid)t fo fajl, a(g meine pradje nnb geber in ber enn niein ei(l nimmt ibm ntrfjtg, benn mid) attetn ; aber bie ^eitige (gd^rift nnb (5prad)en ntad)en ibm bie 2Bett $n enge, nnb tt)nt it)m (Befyaben in feinem 5Keid)e, o fann id) and) bie S5ritber 23a(benfeg barinnen gar nid)t (oben, bag fie bie @ rad)en erad)tcn. 25enn ob jTe g(eid) red)t (et)rten/ 2 fo miiffen ffe bod) gar oft beg red) ten erte$ febten, nnb and) nngeritjlet nnb nngefdn'cft bfeiben ^n fed)ten fitr ben fanben wtbcr ben 3n*tbt if)r X)ing fo ftnfter, 3 nnb anf eine eigene $Beife one a sound teacher. " But 1 know full well, how the spirit does al- most everything. Still I should have been out of reach of my object (too far from the bush) had not the languages come to my aid, and made me sure and certain respecting (of) the Scripture. I might also have been pious, and have preached the true faith in sentiment." 1 G e i s t here does not mean talent, but spiritual gift or influence. M eine Sprache und Feder in der Schrift, " my philology and my pen in connection with the Bible," i. e. his langua- ges or philology in studying the Bible and his pen in explaining and enforcing it. " For my spirit (i. e. the grace of God in me) takes nothing but myself away from him ; but the Holy Scriptures and the [knowledge of the] languages drive him out of the world (make the world too narrow or uncomfortable for him) and inflict an injury upon his kingdom." 2 Recht lehrten, taught no heresy. Though their doctrines were correct, they necessarily failed very often in applying the right proof-texts. 3 Dazu ist ihr Ding so finster, etc. "Besides, their views are so unenlightened, and are represented under such peculiar forms, not following the language of the Scriptures, that i fear they are not, or will not continue to be right." This sentence will hardly ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 255 ger bcr vsrfjrift Sffieife gu rcben, bag id} beforqe, eg fci) obcr ujcrbc nid)t tauter bletbcn. enn cd gar a,cfal)rttd) ifl, fcon otte$ (Saobcu aubcrtf rcbcn, obcr nut anbcrn Morten, bcim (Mott felbft braiutct. tfitrgltcfo, fa mca,eu bet tbnen fctbfl bcitig teben nub tebren; aber wet! jTe obne (spradjen btetben, wirb tbncn man.qctu nntficn, ba3 l alien anbern man^clr, nam(icf) : bag n mo^ett. 5Bctt fie abcr ba3 wob( fonntcn tbnn, unb nidjt tbnn mi.\a,cu \\c jufcfyen, 2 tt>tc c^ t>or GJott $1 ocrantwortcn 9tiui ba^ fei; gcfagt 3 i)on ^nijen unb 9^otb bcr unb d)rift(id)cn (Bdjnfen, fitr ba^ cjcifi(td)e ^Bcfcn unb $nr Sccien $ciL 9dre, imb fotften aftein ba$ $ettlid)e D?egiment anfeben nad) ber ^Beft, ob bafjHbe m'cfyt bebitrfte tnefmebr gnter <5d)n(en nnb getebrter ente, benn bag $etjHid)e? Demi bibber fid) beffelben bte optjtjlen fo gar nid)tt> fyaben angenommen, 1Mb bte @d)it(en fo gar anf ben getfHidien @tanb gerid)tef, bag gletd) eine @d)anbe gemefen tjl, fo em @e(ebrter ijl ebe(id) gemorben, unb l)at mi'tffcn boren fagen : fiebe, ber n>trb meWtd), unb mitt ntd)t getflfid) merben ; gerabe, a(^ it>are attdn fbr geijKfdjer 8tanb ott artgenebm, nnb ber n>e(ffid)e (mte fie ifyn nennen) gar be^ enfete nnb nn^ Wim (ft bt'er nid)t -Jtotf) ^u fagen, rote ba^ mettffdbe ment etne gottttcbe Drbnnng nnb (Stanb ift, bat>on id) fonfl tn'ef gefagt babe, ba id) bojfe, 1 e^ gweifett s Jtiemanb baran, fonbern ifi ^n banbetn, mie man feine gefd)irfte ?ente barein friege. Unb t)ier bieten nn^ 3 bie ^eiben einen grogen Xro^ eminent in reference to the present world, whether this do not re- quire good schools and learned men, even more than our spiritual in- terests do. For hitherto the sophists (Papists) have not taken the least interest in it (z e i 1 1 i c h Regiment), and have arranged the schools so exclusively for the priesthood that it has become a matter of reproach, if a learned man marries, and he has been obliged to hear it said, ' Behold, he has become a man of the world, and desires not the clerical state,' as though their priestly condition alone were acceptable to God, and the secular classes, as they are called, be- longed to Satan, and were unchristian. On sich desselben angenomrnen haben, see p. 55, Note 2. 1 Dass ich ho f e, " so that I hope, no one will doubt respect- ing it." 2 Kriege. This word signifies properly to catch wi'./t the hand. In the sense of b e k o m m e n, to obtain, as used here and often by Luther, it is now employed only in common life, among the unedu- cated. 3 Und hier bieten uns, etc. " And here the heathen offer us a challenge and put us to shame." On the peculiar use of the word T r o t z, see p. 120, Note 1. The force of the word must be ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 257 unb od):iud) an, trie t>cr fyitcn, fonber(id) bie Corner unb (s)ru'd)cn, gar utdjtS flcwufjt babeu, ob fefdjer @tanb @ott ober uidjt, uitb babcn bed) nut fo(d)cm' (rnjt unb btc jungen ftnabeu nnb SDJdbdjett tafien (ebren unb , bafr jTc baju (jefdjtcft nnirben, bag 1 id) mid) un# fcrcr CEbrijlcH fdjdmcn nuip, menu id) baran gebenfe, unb fenbcru'd) nnferer Dcutfrfjeit, bie rotr focjar (Btocfe unb ^l)tcrc f(nb, nnb facjen bnrfcn : ja, n>a^ fallen bie o ein 5 ur ^/ ^ err / manu, ober n>a^ regieren fe((, ge(e()rt nub gefd)ic!t ift, felbcn (Etanb d)ri|l(id) ^u fitbren. SGSenn nun g(eid) (n>te id) gefagt babe) feine eete mare, nub man ber (d)it(en unb Spradjen 0ar uid)t bebiirfte, um bev Sd^rift unb otte^ n>iKen, fo ware bod) 3 atfeitt biefe variously expressed in English, according to the connection. V o r Z e i t e n, see p. 113, Note 1 . Here vor Alters might also be used ; but that would modify the representation, though the idea would remain the same. 1 After solchem Ernst, the first dass refers to lehren und aufziehen, and the second (dass i c h in i c h, etc.) to solchem. " That, when I think of it, 1 am ashamed of Christians, and especially of our Germans, who are very blockheads and brutes, and can say, " pray, what is the use of schools, if one is not to be- come a priest ?" Wassollenis explained p. 123, Note 2. 2 Die wir doch wissen, "who, notwithstanding, know, or ought to know, how necessary and useful a thing it is, and so (or how) acceptable to God, if a prince, lord, counsellor, or whatever else that exercises authority, is instructed and skilled in discharging, in a Christian manner, the functions of the office." 3 So ware doch, etc. " still, for the establishment of the very best schools everywhere both for boys and girls, this, of itself, would be a sufficient reason, namely, that society (the world), even for the maintenance of civil order, needs accomplished and well-trained men and women." Genugsam "that which can or may be enough;" genug, "that which is enough," may frequently be 22* 258 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. Urfaefye (jemtcjfam, bte atterbeften (Srf)it(cn, betbe fur $naben unb ^.ibcben, an atten Drten aufjurtefyten, bag bte $Mt and) ibren n>elt(td)cn C^tanb augerltd) $u batten bed) bebarf feuter gefd)fcfter Banner unb grauen, bag bte Banner u>ob( fonnten recjieren ?anb unb ente, bie grauen n>of)( Steben unb batten fonnten au3, $inber unb ejTnbe, 9Run fotcbe Banner mitfifen au^ $naben merben, unb fc(d)e graueu mitffen au^ ?!}?dbd)en toerben ; bantm ift$ ^u tbun r t>a^ man ^naben unb 5Kdbrf)en ba^u redbt lebre unb aufgiebe. babe ui) oben gefagt: ber getnetne SQ2ann tlntt bter ju, faun eo and) ntd)t r nntf e^ aud) ntd)t, n>?tg and) tttd)t3 gitrllen unb errcn fellten e^ tbuu ; aber jTe f)abeu auf (Edjlttten 1 ^u fabren, ju trtnfen unb in ber SDfatmmcrei ^u (aufen, unb (Tnb betabeu 2 mit l)eb,eu rfjen efd)aften be^ ^e((er^, ber $itrf)e unb ber Unb ob e^ @t(td)e cjcrne tbdten, mi'tffen ffe bte 3Inberu fd)euen, bag jTe ntd)t fur barren- ober ^e^er gebatten wer^ ben. )arum vottt 3 e^ end), ftebe %itl)3berren, attetn in used for each other. The adjective termination s a m corresponds to the English ending able or ible. l Schlitten. This word, and the English words sled and sledge and the American word sleigh, all have one common origin, and are only different dialectical forms, derived, probably, from the old Sax- on and Anglo-Saxon word s 1 i d a n, to slide. The connection be- tween the words sled and sleigh is indicated in Low German where the same word is sometimes written Slede, and sometimes S 1 e e. 2 Und sind beladeri, " and are burdened with the high special (remarkable) duties (or employments) of the cellar, kitchen, and chamber (drinking, eating and sleeping). And though some would be glad to do it (would gladly do it), they must stand in fear of the rest, lest they should be held as fools or heretics." Scheuen, to fear, to be s c h e u, shy of. 3 Will, does not like wird with the infinitive, express mere fu- turity, but implies either that a person wills, or that circumstances demand, a thing to be. See p 32, Note 2. Euch allein in der Hand bleiben, " remain in your hands jalone." On this use of the dative (e u c h) see p. 18, Note 7, and Gram. p. 347 infra. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 259 ber A?.inb Mcifrcu ; il)r babt aurf) Sfautm imb gug 1 ba$u, bqJtT bnw Jvurfrcn uub perron, ^vi, fprtdjjl bit :~ cut 3cglid)er ma t q feme (sofyne unb 1 11. a u m u n d F u g. 11 a u m, like the English word space, is fre- quently used with reference to time. Fug, which may commonly be rendered by the word, right, properly means propriety, i. e. a thing which it is proper for one to do, and which he therefore, and in that sense, has a right to do. A light which is founded in the nature of things or in law is Rech t; a right which is derived from a special decision or decree is B e f u g n i s s. This last word comes from b e- fugen, to authorize, to empower. But Fug is derived from fU- gen, 1. to connect or join ; 2. to connect so as to put a thing in its fining or proper place. M i t F u ge in the old German is the same in sense as passe nd, fitting. " Therefore, respected members of the city councils, this business must be left in your hands. You have the leisure for it and the right to it, better than princes and lords." 2 Ja, sprichst du, etc. "But nay, say you. Each one may himself teach his sons and daughters, or discipline them. Reply. Yes, we see how it goes with teaching and training! And even if discipline is carried to the highest point, and succeeds (turns out) well, it amounts to no more than that, in some measure (e i n we- nig), a forced and respectable-mien is acquired (is there) ; in other respects (sonst) they nevertheless remain mere dunces, who can say nothing of this or that (or of one thing or of another), and are able neither to advise nor to aid any one. But if they should be taught and educated (if one should teach and educate them) in the schools or elsewhere, where there should be educated and well-bred instructors and instructresses, who should teach languages and other arts and history (histories) then they (the pupils) would learn the histories and maxims of all the world, how things went with this city, this kingdom, this prince, this man, this woman ; and thus they would be able in a very short time (short time immediately) to con- template (apprehend) for themselves, as in a mirror, the character (We sen), life, counsels, proposals, successes and failures of the whole world from the beginning. From this (daraus) they could adjust their views, and with piety regulate themselves in the course of the world (i. e. in life) ; and moreover (daz u) from the same his- tories become wise and prudent [as to] what is to be sought and what avoided in this (outward) life, and advise arid direct others ac- cordingly. But the training which it is proposed to give at home 260 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 6d)ter roobl felber (el)ren ober fte $ieben mtt tt>ort : 3ci man ftebet n>ol)f, n>ie j7d)'3 lebret unb Unb menu bic 3^t anptf l)od)fte getrieben roirb, unb gera'tb, fo fommt e3 nid)t rceiter, benn ba eiu roenig eine ettujqnwngene unb ebrbare eberbe ba ift ; fen ft bleibeu e^ g(cid)iDobl ettel ^ofgblocfe, bte mebcr btet^on nod) bacn mijfen $u fac)cn, 3tiemanb tt>eber ratl)cn nod) tyitfen fonnen* 5Bo man jTe aber lebrete, unb joge in (Eichitlen ober fonft. ba ge(el)rte unb gitdjttge ^etjler unb 90Jejflertmten ma'ren, tie ba pradjcn unb anbere ^iinfte unb ^tfloncn (ebreten, ba witrben jTe l)6ren bte efd)td)tcn unb (Spritd)e atler %&elt, n>ie e^ btefer tabt, biefem ^etd)e, biefem gitrjlen, btefem ?02anne, biefem ^Beibe gegangen ware ; unb fonntert affo in fur^er %cit gleid) ber gangen $Bett Don 2(nbeginn $Befen, ?eben, 5Katb unb 5infd)Iage, elingen unb Ungelin* gen fitr fict) fajfen, tt>ie in etnem Spiegel ; barautf jTe benn ibren Sinn fdjtrfen, unb j^d) in ber $Be(t ?auf rid)ten ten mit (^otte^fiird)t r ba^u wi^tg unb flug werben benfelben ^ijloricn, tt>a3 ^u fnd)en unb ^u meibeu n>are itt biefem a'nger(id)en eben, unb 5(nbern and) barnad) ratben unb regieren* X)ie $ud)t aber, bie man babeim obne fofdje ^d)ulen t)onumwit, bie tt>i(I un$ iteife madjen burd) etgene (rfabrung. @l)c ba^ gefd)iel)t, fo jwb imr bunbertmal without such schools, t/iat would [attempt to] make us wise by our own experience. [But] before that would take place, we should die a hundred times, and should have acted (done everything) all our lives long inconsiderately ; for our own experience would require much time." Ja is explained p. 5223, Note 3; Selber p. 103, Note 3, end. Sich's lehret und ziehet, literally, "how it teaches and trains itself," i. e. how teaching and training are performed. Compare p. 128, Note I, end. Ihren Sinn schicken, literally, " to fix or adjust their sense," means u to form their views," or to acquire practical principles. Z u in e i d e n ware, " is to be avoid- ed." Compare p. ] 2, Note 3. Geschiet and sind todt, the present for the future, is much more common in German than in English. See Gram. p. 308, (1). ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 261 tobt, unb babeit iinfcr Sefccnfang attetf unftcbacfytfg gebatt* belt: bcnn $u center (rfabrumj geborct met %cit. Iffietf bcnn batf inna,c ^elf mug [ecfen 1 unb fprhtgett, ober jc 2 etwaS 511 fefyaffeu baton, ba cd ?u(l tnncn bat, nnb tbm barm ntdit $u wcbrcn ijt, 3 c3 and) wd)t gut tt>are,bag man roclm'tc; war urn fctfte man bcnu Ujm ntdU fotdjc $urid)tcn, unb fohiic $unft ttortegen ? @tntema( je(5t twit @ottc^ nabe attc^ alfo jugeritfytet ijl, bag bic mtt ?uft unb (2ptc( (erneu fonnen, e^ fetjeu 1 L e c k e n, old German, to leap and run. In modern German it is entirely out of use in this sense. 2 J e, like the English word ever, (See p. 41, Note 2) has a vari- ety of derived significations which are difficult to be traced. Here, it is used nearly in the sense of d o c h. What is true always, or at any time (j e) is true in any case, or at least, or certainly ; and so the signification approaches to that of doc h. Inje zu Zeiten (always at times), it means (at intervals, z u Zeiten) without any entire, cessation. Hence the phrase, like je bisweilen, signifies, now and then. It is frequently used as a mere particle of affirmation, meaning indeed, truly, resembling w o h 1, or j a, and may be en- tirely omitted in English. What is said, p. 16, Note 5, and p. 151, Note 2, on the use of j e for j a may be explained in this way. The following, though somewhat obsolete, may serve as examples. Das heurige Gewachs istje so reich als das vorige, " this year's crop is (indeed) as plentiful as the last year's." Das ist je ein Wunder-ding, "That is truly a strange thing." Das ist je gewisslich wahr, " That is (indeed) certainly true." Wir mQssen je bekennen. " We must indeed con- fess." Compare the force of the word ever, in ichoever ; also in the word every, as illustrating derived but remote significations. 3 Ihm nicht zu wehren ist means, ei non resistendum est. Ist is impersonal ; zu wehren, to restrain, after ist (see p. 259, Note 2, near the end) governing the dative i h m, means " it is proper to restrain it," i. e. the youth. " Now since the young must leap and jump, or at least have something to do, because they desire it and ought not therein to be restrained, and it would not be \v'll to check them in everything, why should we not provide for them such schools and lay before them such knowledge ?" 262 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. rfjen ober anbere $i'mfte ober iftoriem Unb ift jc^t 1 nid)t mef)r bte 6tte unb ba3 gegfener itufcre (Sdnife, barinneit rcn'r gemartert ft'nb it6er ben Casualibus unb Temporalibus, ba vmr bod) mofytS, benn citel mcfyttf qelernet babcn bnrrf) fo me! 8tanpcn, 3^tern, Slngfl unb jammer. 9itmmt man beet) fo mel 3 e ^ unb sjftitbe, baf? man bte ^ttnber fpie* len anf Garten, jut a,cn nnb tan^en lebret ; warum ntmmt man nid)t and) fo mef 3 e it/ t>ag man jTe It-fen nnb anbere ^itnfte lebret, roetl jTe jitng nnb mnfftcj, flcfdiicft nnb Inftt'g bagn fTnb ? 3d) tebe fnr mid), roenn id) jlinber batte nnb t)ermod)te e^, jTe mit^ten mir nid)t adein bie Sprad)en nnb nftorten horen, fonbern and) fin.qen, nnb bie 93?njTf mtt ber cjan^en ^athematif lernen. Z^enn n?a^ ift bie 5t(Ie^, benn eitel $inberfptel, barinnen bie riedien ihre $inber t>or geiten er^ogen, babnrd) bod) ttwnber c^efcbicfte ?ente baran^ .qeworben, ^n atterlet l)ernad) tiid)tig ? 3a tine leib ijl mir'^ je^t, bag id) nicf)t mebr ^>oeten nnb ^ijiorien ge^ 7 Und ist jetzt, etc. " And our schools are now no longer a hell and purgatory, in which we are tortured over cases and tenses, in which, by the way, we learned nothing but mere nothing by so much flogging, trembling, anguish and wretchedness. If men take so much time and trouble to teach their children to play at cards, sing and dance, why should they not take as much time to teach (that they teach) them to read and other branches of knowledge, while they are young and have leisure, nre adapted to it and take pleasure in it? I speak for myself. If I had children [Luther was not yet married], and were able, I would have them learn (they must learn for me) not only languages and history, but singing and (in- strumental) music and the entire course of mathematics. For what is all this but mere children's play in which the Greeks in former ages trained their children, whereby wonderfully skilful people were made of them, afterwards capable of all sorts of things. How sorry I now am, that I did not read the poets and histories more, and that no one taught me those. Instead of these, I was obliged to read the devil's filth, the philosophers and sophists (ihe Aristotelian and scholastic philosophy) at great expense, labor and injury, so that 1 now have enough to do to unlearn it." ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS.. 263 fcfnt babe, nub micft nuof) biefclbcn 9?tcmanb a,cfd)ret bat. Unb babe bafitr mnjfen Icfen betf SteufefS rcrf 7 bie 'iMnfo* fopben uiib Sepbiften nut a,rof?en Soften, 2lrbett itnb (d)a* ben, baf; id) a,cmuj babe baran augjufegen. (o fpricfcfl bu : 3a, n>er fann feiner $tnber fo entbeb* rcn, 1 nnt) al(c 511 Sunfern $teben? 2 (Te mitfien tin joaufc ber 3irbcit vvartcn 3 2C, 5lntwort: 3ft^ 4 t)od) and) nicfyt meinc ^;inunc^ bag man fokfye (^rf)it(en anrtd)te 5 , wte pe bt^t)er gcwefcn iTitb, ba em ^nabe jn>.injtg ober breigtg %atyve bat itber bem X^enat 6 unb 5I(eranber 7 geternet, unb bennod) ^e(ernet. @5 tjl je^t cine anbere e(t, unb ge!)et 1 Entbehren, entrathen, missen and vermissen ail signify to be without something. Entrathen means this sim- ply, arid in the most general sense. Entbehren adds to that signification the idea of bearing, or suffering the want as an evil. These two words do not intimate whether that which is wanting was ever possessed or not. The other two words imply that there is a loss of what was once possessed ; and this loss when slightly felt or merely perceived, is expressed by m i s s e n ', and when keenly felt by vermissen. 2 Alle zu Junkern ziehen. If no regard were paid to the German idiom, this phrase might be supposed to mean, " lead or conduct them all to [other] young gentlemen." But on z u see p. 94, Note 2, and p. 104, Note 6 " bring them all up as gentlemen." On the etymology of J u n k e r, see p. 58, Note 1, end. 3 War ten, "see p. 224, Note 7. 4 I s t's for e s i s t, see p. 16, Note 7. 5 Anrichten, see p. 50, Note 2, near the beginning. 6 D o n a t. " Among the later Roman grammarians is to be men- tioned Aelius Donatus in particular, who lived at Rome as teacher of grammar about the year 250 of the Christian era, who introduced a new method and whose book was used in the schools for more than a thousand years.'' Schwartz, Geschichte der Erzie- hung, Vol. II. p. 200. 'Alexander. " But the Grammar of the Franciscan monk, Alexander of Brittany, who flourished about 1250, written in hex- ameter verse and in rhymes and called Doctrinale, had the most in- fluence and was most used in schools. The pupils were obliged to learn it by heart from beginning to end." Schwartz. II. 201. 264 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. anberd ^u 1 . ?DMrte sXfteinung 2 tft, bag, man bte $naben be6 age3 erne tintbe 3 cbcr $n>et lafle $u fokfyer (Bd)itle geben, wtb md)td beffo weniger bte anbere %eit tm &aitfe fd^ajfen, anbn>erfc fernen, nnb wogu man fie tyaben nrifl, bap betbe^ mit einanber gebe, n>eil ba3 SSolf jitng ifi, nnb gewarten fann. 23ringen fte bod) fonft n>obt jcbnmal fo i)te( 3 e tt S u mit ^en(d)en fdjtegen, 5Sat( fptefen, ?aufen nb D^ammeln* 5((fo fann ein ^IRagblein 4 ja fo t)iel geit b^ben, bag jTe 1 Und gehetanders zu, " and things go differently (now).'' See p. 130, Note 2. 2 M e i n u n g, opinion, sentiment. It corresponds exactly in sig- nification with the verb, m e i n e n, which see, p. 47, Note 2. 3 Des Tages eine Stundc, etc. This passage illustrates well the difference between the genitive and accusative when they designate time. Des Tages, signifies at some point, during some part, or within the day. Eine Stunde means, an hour long, or for an hour. " My view is that one send (1 a s s e g e li e n) boys to such a school one or two hours a day, and yet make them work (lasse scha fife n, the rest of the time, learn some employ- ment (manual exercise) and [do] whatever one shall wish, that both [study and labor] may be carried on together, while the children (folks) are young and can attend to them. They spend now (son st otherwise, i. e. not in school, or as they now are) ten times as much time in shooting with cross-bows, in playing ball, in running and tumbling about." S c h a ff e n, to do, properly governs e t w a s, which was omitted, in familiar style, as it is now in the South of Germany. Jt then corresponds to our word work, as familiarly used in common life. Und wozu man sie haben will, is elliptical, " and [attend] to whatever one will have them," or desires them. Gewarten when, as here, it means, "to at- tend to any business," requires the genitive ; which is understood, or to be supplied in this sentence. Compare w a r t e five or six lines below. The word also means, to expect, to wait for. B r i n- gen zu (zubringen) to pass, or spend time. Keulchen, a dart, or arrow, a diminutive of K e u 1 e, a club, is not in common use. 4 M a g d 1 e i n, girl, the obsolete diminutive of Magd. The modern word is M a d c h e n. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 265 bctf Taae cine Stnnbe $nr (grfntfe gcbe, 1 itnb bennod) t efdjaftS im ftaufe tvobf rcarte ; fte t>erfd)iaft 2 unb Dertanjt eS, unb ttcrfptelet bod) n>ob( mchr 3 e ^* @te f e ^ et a ^ e ^ n barau, 3 bag man ntd)t Shift nod) (rnft ba$n fyat/ ba$ jitnge SSoIf gu jteben, nod) ber $lMt $n beffen unb $u ratben mtt fcuten ?cutcu. er Teufef bat met ftcber enrobe 93(5cfe nnb wmiUse ^ente, bag c^ ben 9ttcnfd)en ja ntdjt fo tr>ol)( cjefye anf C^rben, iffielc^c 4 aber ber 2fa$bunb 5 barnnter waren, ber man (id) Derbojft 6 , bag e^ gefdncfre ?ente folten merben ^n ?ef)rertt nnb ?ebrertnnen, ^t q}rebtgern nnb anbern gct(lCui)cn ^em^ tern, bte foil man bcjio mel)r nnb (anger babet Caffen, ober felbjl gan^ ba^n Derorbnen, 3Bte mtr fefen Don ben l)ei(t* 1 Dass sie gehe, " that she may go," or, as we should say in English, " as to go." 2 Sie verschlaft, etc. "She sleeps it (the hour's time) away, and dances it away, and plays away (consumes in play) more time." On the force of the prefix, v e r, see Gram. p. 250, 1, and 2. 3 s fehlet allein daran, etc. "Herein alone lies the difficulty (fault) viz. that we have no desire nor solicitude to educate the young, nor to aid mankind (d e r Welt) and to benefit them with accomplished citizens." R a t h e n is often coupled with h e I- f e n and has a similar signification ; which comes from the idea of helping one out of difficulty by giving good counsel. 4 VV e 1 c h e, what persons, i.e. " such persons among them as would be a choice selection, etc." See p. 239, Note 3. s Ausbund literally means a specimen or pattern which shop- keepers put out (a u s) for show, and bind or fasten (b i n d e n) upon a frame. As such specimens are generally the best of t/ieir kind, the word has come to signify commonly a choice or selection. When ap- plied to anything bad, it means the worst of the kind. 6 Der man sich verhofft, " of whom one entertains the hope that they will become suitable persons for instructors and in- structresses, preachers and other clerical offices, these we ought to retain (leave) there so much the more, and the longer, or even direct them wholly to this employment," etc. D e r, for d ere r in the genitive plural, is governed by sich verhoft. The construction is obsolete. 266 SELECTIONS FKOM LUTHER. gen 9ftdrtt>rern, bie t. 2fgne nnb 9fgata imb ?ncian bit bergteidjen anfge^ogen fyaben ; bafyer ami) bie Softer nnb tifte gefommen jwb, aber mm gar in einen anbern bammten 23rand) tterfetyret Unb baS mitt and) woM fepn, bettn ber befdjorene anfe nimmt febr ab : fo ifi and) ber grogere ()eti nntitdjtig gn febren nnb $n regteren ; benn jTe fonnten nidjtS ob,ne beS 83aitd)$ pflegen, we(d)e^ man and) jTe aUetn gelebret bat @o mitjfen n>tr ja ?eute baben, bie un^ otte^ $Bert nnb (Sacramente reid)en, nnb (Seefen^ carter jutb im 2>olf, 5Bo wotten mir fie aber nebmen, fo man bie (Sdjnfen wergeben la$t, nnb nirfjt anbere d)tiftttd)ere aufrid)tet ? intemaf bie (Sd)it(en bibber gebaften, eb pe gletd) nid)t ttergiengen, bod) nid)t^ geben mogen, benn eitef t)er(orene r fd)vibltd)e 35erfnl)rer. iDarnm e^ t)cbe Sftotb ift/ 1 nid)t attetn ber jnngen ?ente bafben, fonbern and) beiber nnferer (Stanbe, geifl(td)en nnb tt>erttid)en, ^n erbalten, bag man in nnferer @ad)e mit ^rnll nnb in ber 3eit ba^n tbne r anf bag n>ir' nid)t binten nad), tt>enn tt)ir^ ^erfditmet baben, metteid)t mitffen faflfen, ob wir'^ benn gerne tbnn wottfen, nnb ttmfonfl ben Renting mit djaben beigen taffen ewiglid), @et)et an $nm t, tt)e(d)' einen grogen gfeig ber ^oni ^ierinnen gettyan bat, 2 n>te \jat er ffd) be^ jnngen 1 DarumeshoheNoth ist, etc. " Therefore there is an urgent necessity, not only on account of the youth, but in order to sustain both of our orders, the spiritual and the temporal, that men take hold of this our cause with earnestness and in season, lest after- wards, when we have neglected it, we should be obliged to omit it, though we would be glad then to attend to it, and should, to no pur- pose, forever cause remorse to gnaw us to our detriment. Z u e r- halten is used in the sense ofum zu erhalten. Hinten n a c h, means after a thing is done, or when it is too late. Hinten d r e i n is used in the same sense. R e u 1 i n g, for R e u e is en- tirely out of use. 2 Gethan hat, used* This word is often employed in connec- tions where neither to do, nor to make, could be employed in English. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 267 angenommen, 1 bag er untcr fetnen fomgfkfyett efd)dften and) cm 2Mtd) fur bad juu.qe Self gemacfyt fyat, bad ba a bctget Proverbiorum. Ultb (Sbrifhtd fclbjl, ttHC $teb,t cr bte jitno.cn $tnMetn $u j7d) ? $Gie fleigig beftebfet er (Te und, unb ritbmct and) bic (Sngef, bic ibrcr warten, 9)?atti). 18.; ba cr un^ angctgc, wtc cm ( qrc^cr ^tenfi 3 c^ tjl, menu man ba3 jungc 3Sc(f n>ob( jtcbct: wtcbcrum, tt)te grauttd) cr gurnet, fo ntvin (Tc anjert unb tjcrberbcu (affct, ^aritm, ttcbc ^ernt, (affct cud) ba^ $krf angclcgen 4 fci)n, ba^ ott fo f)od) 5 Don cud) forbcrt, ba eucr 2Jmt fd)itrbig ifl, bad ber Sugcnb fo 3ftotb tfl, unb bad tt>cbcr 5Qctt nod) etft entbcbrcu fvinn* UBir (Tub [eiber Tange genug in gtnftermg t)crfaufct unb Dcrborben, n>ir (Tnb allju langc gcnitg 6 beutfd)e SBejtten gcwefcn, ?a(]et nnd aucf) etnmaf bte SSeruuuft 6raud)cn, bag ($ott mcrfe bte ^anf bar# fctt feuter ittcr, 7 unb anbcre ?anbcr fcbcn, bag rt>ir and) 5Dienfcf)en unb ?cute ffnb, bte etmad SRufclirfjeS cntweber ibncn (ernen ober pe (e()rcn fonnten, bamit aud) burd) bie $Beft gebeffert mcrbe. 3^ I)ft6c bad ?Q2etne getban r id) mottte ben beutfd)en ?dnbern gerue gerat()ett unb gebok fen t)aben, 8 06 mid) g(etd) ^t(id)e baruber twerben tterad)ten, In such cases, it may be rendered by, to use^ to exercise, to etc. Compare p. 20, Note 3. 1 Sieh des jungen Volkes angenommen. See p. 55, Note 2. 8 D a s da. See p. 43, Note 4, end, and Gram. p. 157, infra. 3 Wie ein grosser Dienst. The German does not allow the article to follow the adjective except in exclamations, as in the English how great a service. 4 A n g e 1 e g e n. See p. 70, Note 2. * H o c h. See p. 152, Note 4. 6 Genug is redundant here. 7 Dankbarkeit seiner G Q t e r, " that God may observe [in us] gratitude for his mercies." 8 Gerathen und geholfen haben. See p. 265, Note 3. 268 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. itnb fokfyen tnten 9?atb in SOStnb fd)(agen/ nnb beffer roiffen ttjoflen, ba3 mug id) gcfefyeben (afien. 2 3d) roeig rcobf, bag e3 2(nbere fcnnten befifer angerid)tet baben, aber rcett fie fdweigen, ridjte td)'3 an3, fo gut al$ id)'3 faun, (3 tft je befier bagn gerebct, tt>ie nngefdncft e and) fet), benn alter Singe 3 bason gefd)tt)ie t qen. Unb bin ber ^ojfuimg, 4 @ott n?erbe je enrer @ttid)e ervDerfeu, bag rnetn treuer S)?atl) nid)t gar in Stfd)e fatte, unb voerben aufehen nid)t X"en, ber e^ gerebet, fonbern bie ad)e fe(bjl 5 bewegen, nub fid) beroegen 3um lei^ten 6 ift and) ba^ n)ol)I gn bebenfen atten benjeni^ gen, fo ?iebe nub ?ufl; haben, bag fokfye 8d)itlen nnb 8pra# d)en in bentfd)en ?cinbern aufgerid)tet unb erhaften werben, bag man gleig nnb Soften iiidjt fpare, gute ibereien nnb S5ud)erhanfer, fenbcrltd) in ben grcgen tabten, bie fo 1 I n W i n d s c h 1 a g e n. See p. 20'^, Note 2. 2 D a s s muss ich geschehen lassen, "to that I must submit." 3 A 1 1 e r D i n g e, wholly. See p. 249, Note 4. Geredet geschwiegen [zu haben]. 4 Bin der Ho ff n u n g, am of the hope, or entertain the hope. Compare p 68, Note 3. 5 Die Sache selbst, etc. " agitate the subject itself and be moved by it," a very peculiar form of expression. 6 Zum letzten, etc. " Finally this must be considered by all those who have a solicitude (love) and desire that such schools should be established and such languages preserved in the German states, that one should spare neither labor nor expense to procure good libraries, and buildings to contain them, especially in large cities, which can well afford it." 1st das zu bedenken al- ien denjenigen, is highly idiomatic. The dative points out the persons who ought to consider, as in the Latin, id omnibus con- siderandum est. 'Denn so das, etc. "For, if the gospel and knowledge of every kind are to be preserved (to remain), they must be embraced in and attached to books and writings." ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 269 uub atferict $un(l fell bfctbeu, mug e$ je in SBitcfyer unb (cd)rifteu Dcrfaflct unb angebunbeu fci;n ; wte bte 9>ropbe* ten unb 21pe(iel felbfl flctbait babcn, ate td) brcbcu gefagt babe. Unb batf nici)t attctn barum, bag btejenujen, fo fletftltd) unb wettlid) Dorfhbcn, foKen $u lefen 1 unb gu jrcn babeu : foubevu bag and) bte guten 23itd)er bebaltett unb uid)t tterloren werbeu, fammt bet ^unft itub Eprarfje, fo wir jci^t ou @Dtte^ nabe baben* ^terinneu tfl aud) @t. ^au(n^ fleigig gewcfcn, ba er tmotbeo bejtebtt : ,,(r fotte anbaltcn am ?efen/' unb and) befteltft : , r (5r felle ^)ergamcut, ba^ cr gu roaba gctaffeu, mit fid) brtucjeu. 3a, fo(d)ed 2 baben jirfj befltjfen atte ^6ntgreid)e, bte fonberttdjcg gen>cfen (Tub, unb juoor ba tfraeltttfd)e SSo(f f unter wetdjeu fofdjeS 5Berf 5Rofe aujteng, ber erfte, unb l)teg ba^ 23ud) beg efee3 m bte ?abe <$Dtte t)erwal)reu, uub tbat e^ unter bie >anb ber 2etteu, bag man bet beufek ben fotfte I)ofen 3tbfd)rtfteu, n>er e^ bebiirfe, alfc, bag er and) bent $6nta,e gebeut, er fotte Don ben Semten fofdje^ S5ud)e^ 3(bfd)rtft uebmen, X)ag man wol)( (Telnet, tt)te ott ba^ ?etttfd)e ^riejlertbum unter aubern ^efdiafteu aud) baju tterorbuet bat, bag (te ber SBitcfyer biiteu unb n>arten fotttem 9ftad)bem bat btefe ?tberet gemebret uub gebeflert 3ofua, baruad) (Samuel, X)at)ib, alomo, 3^f^jct^, itub fo 1 Sollen zu les en, etc. " should have something to read and to study." See p. Ill, Note 3, and p. 151, Note 3. 2 Solches is in the genitive. " All kingdoms which have been distinguished, have bestowed care upon this (such) ; and first of all the Israelites, among whom Moses was the first to begin such a work, and commanded [them] to preserve the book of the law in the ark of God, and put it under the care (hand) of the Levites, that from (by) them persons should procure (go and get) copies, whoever needed them. He even commands the king (so that he commands the king) to take of the Levites a copy of this book. Thus one may see (so that one may see) that (how that) God directed the Levitical priesthood, to this among other duties, namely that they should pre- serve, and give attention to the books. 23* 270 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fortan Diet mefyr $onige unb ^propbeten. afyer {ft gefom* men tie beiltge (Scfyrtft be3 atten Xeflament^, rcelcfye fenfl nimmermebr nxire gnfammengebracfyt 1 ober geblteben, n?o ott ntdjt batte fe(d)cn gletg barauf l)etgen baben. em (rempe( nad) 2 l)aben and) tie (gtifte unb Softer t>or S^itcn Stbereten angertdjtet, wiewobt mtt wentg gutcn S5itd)ern. Unb ma^ e^ fitr @d)aben gett)an t)at, bag man git ber 3 e ^t ntd)t barob gebalten bat, SBiieCjer unb gitte ?tbe^ reten gu oerfc^ajfen, ba man Q3itd)er unb ?eute genug bagtt tyatte, tfl man barnarf) n>ob( gemabr morben, bag letber mtt ber 3t bat)tn gefallen jtnb atte ^imjlc unb @prad)en, unb anjlatt recfytfdjaffenen SBi'tdjern bte tcKen, unnit^en, fd)tib* Ifd)en ^6nd)bltd)cr Catholicon, Florista, Graecista, Laby- rinthus, Dormi secure, nub bergfeidjen t)om Jteiifel etnge^ fiibret (Tnb, bag bamtt bie (atetnifdje (Sprad)e gu S3oben ifl gegangen, unb nirgenb^ fetne gefdjtcfte (Sdnile, nod) ?et)re, nod) ^iBetfe $u jlubiren tpt ubriggebiteben* Unb rote n>tr er^ 1 Zusammengebracht [werden], etc. "which would otherwise never have been collected, or have been preserved (re- mained) if God had not required (commanded) such diligence [in re- gard] to it.'' 2 Dem Exempel nach, etc. " After this example did the collegiate churches and convents formerly found libraries, although with few good books. And what harm it has done, than men were not at that time intent upon procuring books and good libraries, when there were books and persons enough for that purpose, was after- wards perceived, namely, that, in time, all the arts, and languages declined, and, instead of good books, the senseless, useless, and infect- ing books of the monks, the catholicon, Florista, Graecista, Laby- rinthus, Dormi secure, and the like were introduced by Satan, so that the Latin language was destroyed by them, and neither good schools, good instruction nor good modes of study remained." Darob (d a r ti b e r) h a 1 1 e n. See p. 239, Note 2. D ahin gefallen, fallen awny. On the use of d a h i n, see p. 80, Note 1. The mo- nastic productions here censured were miserable school books, lexi- cons, grammars, etc. with these quaint titles. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 271 fabrcn 1 unb cjcfeben baben, bag nut fo mel 5DJiU)e unb 2Jr* beit man bte Spradjen nub ^tun|l bennod) a,ar un&ottfom* men au$ etltd)en SBrorfen unb Stiicfcn after SMtrfjer auS bem Staitbe unb ten ^Burmcrn vweber berora.ebrad)t bat, uub nod) tiiajid) baran fucht unb arbettet, ajeidjune man in einer gerftorten Stabt in bcr $fd)e uadj ben Scfyafcen uub $(etnobteu grabct. Darin ift uu3 and) red)t te(eg femmen nut im$dl)(ujen fd)dblid)en 23itd)ern, bie un^ nnr tmmer better on ber S3tbe( fnbreten ; bagu bie ^eufe(^(art>en, btc 9!)26ncf)e unb ber obenfd)ulen efpenft, bte rotr mft un^ menfcf){icf)em $ut geftiftet, nnb t>te(e X^octoren, 9)rebtcato# ten, 5Kagi|1er, ^Pfajfen unb 9Q?ond)e, bag tft gro^e, grebe, fette (fe(, mttrotben unb brannen 53arettcn gefd)mitcft / rote bie (5ane mit einer golbnen Alette unb ^)erle ert)a(ten, unb auf ung fefbft gelaben baben r bie ung niofytg uteg (ebre^ ten, fonbern nur tmmer mel)r b(inber unb toller macfyten, unb bafitr att' unfer nt fra^en, unb fammetten nur beg )rerfg unb 5^i(leg tbrer unfla'tigen, giftigen 33itd)er atte Softer, ja a((e ^Btnfe( k>oK, baran graitlict) gu benfen i(l. 3fi'$ nki)t etn elenber jammer bigber geroefen, bag em ^nabe bat mitffcn 1 s^ a ^9 S^bre ober (anger jlubiren, af^ (ein, bag^ er fo me( bofeg ?ateinifcf) bat gelernt, bag er morf)te ^)faffe roerben unb ?D?ejJe (efen ? Unb roefcfyer ba# l)in gefommen ifi, ber tjl: fefig geroefen, feftg ift bie Gutter geroefen, bie etn fo(d)eg ^tnb getragen bat Unb ift bod) 2 addition of u m expresses repetition merely. For this force of u m, see p. 133, Note 1 . D es Drecks is governed by v o 1 1, and the whole phrase alle Kloster, ja alle Winkel voll, as the object of the verb sammelten expresses a measure or quantity. 1 Hat mtissen, has been obliged. See p. 148, Note 3. 2 Und ist doch, etc. "And yet he has continued to be a poor, ignorant man all his life long, who has been good for nothing either to cluck or to lay eggs. Z u m belongs not to E i e r (for d e in in z u in or z u d e in could not belong to a plural noun) but to legen. The article is used because the infinitive here assumes the nature of a substantive, egg-laying. See p. 14, Note 3. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS.. 273 em armer, ungcfcbrtcr 9ftcnfd) fern ?ebcnfang gebtteben, bet tt>cber gu gfucfen, lunt jum (*ier (egen getaugt bat <5old)e ?cbrer ttnb SHetfter babcn wir mitficn attentbafben baben, bie felbft nid)t3 gefomtt 1 unb ntdtfg <$ute$ nod) 9?ed)teg ba* ben mbgen lebrcn, ja and) bie $Beife nid)t gewii^t, n>te man bed) fcrncn nnb (cbren fottte. 5Ba^ ift bte 6d)itlb ? ^^ fhtb fctne anbere 5$ud)cr yorbanben gewefen, benn fofcf)e tclfe 5Koiui)^ nub ottte fo(d)en *JDftfl gan^ au^ftogen, unb mit red)tfd)ajfenen S5itd)ern meine ?iberet Derforgen, unb ge* Iet)rte ?eute baritber $u 5Katb nebmen* ^rftiid) fottte bie l) e ^tge (Sd)rtft beibe auf ?ateinifcf), rted)ifd), ^ebraifd) unb ^eutfd), unb ob jTe nod) 6 in met)r 1 G e k o n n t, known. See p. 221, Note 4. 8 Ei tel. See p. 10, Note 4. 3 Die sie lehreten. Grammatically, either die or sie might be the nominative ; but both usage and the sense require d i e to be the nominative. 4 D a s s, because. 8 Sententarien. Sententiarier (sententiarii) were those who wrote Sententiarien (sententiaria) on the Sentenzen (sententiae) of Peter Lombard us. 6 Und ob sie noch, etc. " and if it be still in other langua- 274 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ttnire, barinnen fewu Darnad) bie beften IVqcr imb bte Slelteften, beibe @rted)ifd}, ^ebratfd) nnb ?a* teintfd), tt>o id) jTe finben fonnte. arnad) fo(d)e 25itd)er, bte $n ben (Bprad)en $n (emeu btenen, 1 ate bte ^oeten unb Dratoren, ntd)t angefefyen/ 2 ob fie ^etben eber (Sbrtften wdren, grtedufd) ober (ateimfd). S)enn aud folrfjen mug man bte Grammatica (ernen. 2)arnad) fettten fei>n bte 23itd)er Don ben freten ^itnjien, unb fort ft t>on aKen anbern ^unftetu 3n(e^t and) 53itd)er ber 9ied)te nnb Slr^net, n)ievDol)( and) t)ter nnter ben (^ommenten etne gnte 5 JBab( notbt t q tft. 5!Kit nnter ben fcornetnnften aber fottten feim bte (5hront^ fen nnb xnfloncn, n>elrf)er(et (5prad)en man l)aben fonnte : 3 benn btefelben 4 tt)nnbernit^itd) futb, ber s JBe(t ?anf ^n er* fennen nnb ^n regteren, ja and) otte^ ^Gnnber nnb 58erfe ^n fet)en, ) mie mand)e feme efd)td)ten 5 unb (Bpritd)e fottte man je^t baben, bte in benrfd)en ^a'nbern gefd)ehen unb ergangen pnb^ beren mir jet^t gar fcinetf mtflfen, Qa$ mad)t : 6 ^Tttemanb ift ba gewefen, ber jTe befd)rteben, ober ob (Te fd)on 7 befdjrteben gewefen tra'ren, 9ttemanb bie ^it^ ges," is elliptical for, " and in other languages, if it existed in any other." *Die zu den Sprachen zu lernen dienen, a pe- culiar expression, " which serve for the languages to learri (them)." 2 Angesehen. See p. 15, Note 8, and p. 7, Note 6. 3 Welcherlei Sprachen man haben konnte for in welch erlei Sprachen man sie haben konnte. 4 Denn dieselben, etc. " for they are wonderfully useful for learning and regulating the course of the world." 8 Geschichten (not H i s t o r i e n) can be said to g e s c h e- h e n because the former properly indicates events (was g e s c h- i e t), wheieas the latter properly means the narratives of those events. 6 Das m a c h t. Das is in the accusative, and the following sentence is nominative to m a c h t. In a free translation, it would be, " The cause is that no one," etc. D er sie beschrieben [hat]. 7 Ob s c h o n, if. Literally it means although. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 275 eher bcbattcn bat ; barnm man aurf) Don nng entfcf)en mcfytg we if? in anbcrn lantern, nnb mitffen 1 in alter 58elt bic benffcfycn 53ejften beigen, bie nicfytg mehr fonnen, 2 bemt f rie.qen, frejfen nnb fanfen. 2tber tie @rierf)en nnb atetncr, ja and) bie ^cbraer, baben ibr ing 3 fo genan nnb fleigig befdmcbcn, bag, n>o ancf) ein $Betb eber ^tnb etn?a^ (Een* berltrf)e^ gethan ober c^crcbet bat, bag mng atte ^Oeft (efeit nnb wifien : btewetl jTnb rt>ir Sentfcf)e ned) immer ;Dentfof)e, nnb wodcn ^eittfche bleiben. $Bci( nn^ benn jefet @ott fo gnabtg{tcf) beratl)en l)at mit alter gitlle, beibe ber ^nnfl, getebrtcr ?ente nnb S5itd)er, fo tft'3 3 C ^/ ba$ wir ernten nnb emfofynetben bag 33ejl:e r bag n?ir fonnen, nnb d)d^e fammetn, bamit tt>ir etwag bebal^ ten anf bag 3wf"ftJ9 e ^ biefen golbnen Scibren, nnb nirf)t biefe reicbe @rnte Dcrfdumen. X^enn eg $n beforgen ijt, 4 nnb je^t fcbon wteber anfan,qt r bag man immer nene nnb anbere 53itd)er macfyt, ba eg ^nlefet bal)in fomme, bag buni) beg ^cnfetg $8erf bie gnten SBitdjer, fo jet bnrct) ben 2)rncf berorgebrad)t ffnb, wiebernm nnterbritcft n>erben, nnb bie lofen, beittofen ^8itd)er Don itnmtgen nnb tolten ^ingen wieber einreigen nnb alte 5Binfet fitlten. enn bamit gebet ber ^enfel gennglirf) nm, bag man ffct) tt>ieber# urn mit eitet (^atboticen, gtoriften, ^Coberni^en, 5 nnb bent 1 Und [w i r] mass en. 8 Die nichts mehr konnen, etc. " who know nothing but how to fight, eat and drink." On the words fressen and s a u fe n, see p. 51, Note 1. 3 D i n g. See p. 254, Note 3. 4 Denn es zu besorgen ist, etc. " For it is to be feared, and even now has begun again [to take place], that new and differ- ent books will not cease to be made, so that at least it will come to this, that through Satan's influence the good books which," etc. 5 Catholicen, Floristen, Modern isten, CathoticonSj Florista, Modernists. It would be amusing to see a list of all the fanciful names which the monks gave to the school-books which they wrote. 276 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. * unb opljtflen#TOfl traa,cn unb ntartern 1 mnjje, rote ttorfyin, unb immer (emeu, unb bod) im* mer md)t3 erfernen. 2 erot)a[ben bitte id) end), meine (ieben &errn, bag ifyr tt>otfet biefe meine rue unb gfeig bet end) (affen grudjt fdjajfem Unb ob (t(id)e tt>aren, 3 bte mid) $u geringe bafitr fyieften, bag |7e meineS 9?at^ fottten (eben, ober mid), at ben SSerbammten on ben t)rannen, t?erarf)ten : bie rootf* ten bod) ba^ anfet)en, bag id) md)t ba^ metne, fcnbern a(* letn bed gan^en betttfd)en ^anbe^ Utcf unb ^ei( fucfye. Unb ob id) fdjon ein 9iarr ware, unb trafe bod) etn>a$ uted, 4 follte ed je feiuem 5Beifen eine ^chanbe bitnfen, mir ^u fofgen* Unb ob id) gtetd) ein ^itrfe unb ^etbe n>are, fo 5 man bod) ffefyet, bag ntd)t mir baraud faun ber 9fiit^en fommen, fonbern ben (5()rijlen, fo 5 fotten jTe bod) bitfta, 6 met? 1 Sich mit tragen und martern, to busy and torture one's self with.. See the lexicons on the reflective verb s i c h tra- gen, when used of a person. Of a garment, it means to sit, to fit. 2 Erlernen. The prefix e r implies success, in the act express- ed by the verb. See Gram. p. 249. 2. " To be ever learning, and yet never acquire anything." 3 Und ob Etliche waren, etc. "And though there should be some, who regard me as so insignificant that they will not accept of my advice (hold me as too insignificant for this, namely, that they should take rny advice) or contemn me as one condemned by the tyrants, still let them (they should) consider this, that I am not seeking my own interest but merely that of all Germany." R a t h s is governed by 1 e b e n. Compare p. 68, Note 3. W o 1 1- t e n, imperfect subjunctive, they should be willing. G 1 U c k und H e i 1 are regarded as one and the same, and hence das m e i n e, in the singular, can agree with them. 4 Und trafe doch etwas Gutes, etc. " and should yet hit upon something good, no wise man should think it a disgrace to follow me. On d u n k e n, see p. 22, Note 3. The rule of the gram- marians there referred to is often disregarded, and so here. 6 S o, in the first instance is conditional (if) ; in the second, illa- tive and not to be translated. 6 B i 1 1 i g. See p. 102, Note 3. ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 277 itcn tcttft mdjt fceradjtem <&$ Ijcit wob( jemafd 1 em -ftarr beficr geratbcn, bcmi em ganger 9?atl) ber $wa,ctt, 9D?ofe imtfHc fid) tcn 3ctfyro (ebren lafiett. 2 ncmtt befebte id) 3 end) 2(tfe otteS itabe, ber ttotte cure er$en cmeidjcn imb ait$unbeit, bag (Te ffrf) ber armen, cfcnbcn, Dcrfaffencn 3nater r burd) 3@fum g^riflum, imfcrn ^eifanb, Slmcn. Saturn 3Gittenberg r SJnno 1524 1 J e m a 1 s properly signifies ever in the sense of at any time. It seems here to mean, at times, sometimes, 2 Sich von Jethro lehren lassen, "seek instruction from Jethro," (cause himself to be taught by Jethro). 3 Hiemit befehle ich, etc. " Herewith 1 commend you all to the grace of God. May he (who may) soften and kindle your hearts, that they may interest themselves in behalf of the poor, wretched, and abandoned youth, and with the blessing of God coun- sel and aid them on to a happy and Christian state of social order (government) in respect both to body and to soul, will all fulness and plenty to the praise and honor of God the Father through Jesus Christ our Saviour." Welche herzliche Seelsorgerliebe Luthers spricht aus dieser Schrift ! Wie vertritt er, als ein kraftiger Vormund, die Sache der Jugend bei den Eltern und Obrigkeiten ! wie die Sache der Gelehrsamkeit, besonders das Erlernen der Sprachen gegen rohe, eigennOtzige Philister einerseits, und gegen freres ignorantins an- drerseits ! Raumer, Geschichte der Padagogik I. 169. 24 278 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. rftf ww? EXPOSITION OF THE FOURTEENTH CHAPTER OF THE GOSPEL OF JOHN. 14 8 o r r e b e* 3n biefem unb $tt>ei)en fofgcnbcn (Sapitefa beg liflen @t* Sofyflttnig, fyaben tt>ir bie fcfyone ^prebigt beg (Sfyrijtt, melcfye er getfyan fyat nacf) bent fefcten 2fbenbmaf)(, ba er jefet an fern ?eiben treten unb fetne Hebe Sitnger fytn* ter i^m laffen fottte, jTe bamtt ^u trojlen 1 itnb $u jidrcfen, bet)be, wtber bie gegenwartfge ^raurtgfett itber fetnem 5lb? fefyetben, nnb tt)tber ba^ jufitnftt t qe etben, fo ffe itberfatten mitrbe t>om ^teufet, on ber 5Be(t unb tfyrem etgnen emif^ fen. Unb ijt fret)(tdf) btg bie befle unb troftlid)^e ^rebigt, fo ber t)ri|lu^ anf ^rben getfyan, unb @t 3ol)anne^ big 2 l)atber infonbert)eit ^u ^reifen ijl t)or anbern * Several paragraphs, not essential to the connection, have been omitted for the sake of brevity. The orthography has not been con- formed strictly to that of the preceding part of the work ; but, as Lu- ther himself was by no means uniform in this respect, it has been thought best, in order better to prepare one to read Luther and other old writers, to let the orthography, in the present piece, stand as it is in the edition from which we copy. The peculiarity consists mostly in using the vowel i single, when it is long, for the diphthong z'e, as, in diss instead of d ie ss; double consonants instead of single con- sonants, as in klopffen, instead of k lopfe n ; y for z, as in bey instead of b e i ; and ren and len in certain verbs instead of ern and eln, as in trauren instead of trau ern. 1 Sie damit zu trosten in the sense ofum sie damit zu trosten. "In order therewith to comfort and strengthen them both against," etc. 2 Diss for dieses, " on account of this piece." EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 279 geftjlcn, bag er fohije ^rebujt gefaffct, unb bet (Sfy $u rojl uarf) tl)m gcfaficn, 1 ate cineu @d)afc unb fo mit bcr $Be(t ut md)t $u be$at>(cn, 2 unb ja tmmer (Scfyabc nub beef) 511 bcf (ageit mare, too fefcfye ^rebtgt fotfte nnbefcfyrieben, unb wtr foldjcS <2d)afce3 beraubet bftebcn feptti 3 cnn c$ (tub bed) Ijterinn 4 bie aflerltebltrfjften, freunb* Iuf)jtcn ^rofhingcn nub fujfcfteit ^Bcrte be^ treiten, (teben $et(aubc^ (5t)rtjli, fo cr fctnen Itebcn 3ugeru f a(3 cr i>on ibncn fcf^etbct, gur ?ctK 5 gtbt r berg{etd)en nimmcr fcin ^cufrf) 6 auf (Jrben gcgcn fctnen Kebften nnb bej^en ben tt)un unb rcbcn faun* ag 7 man jTe!)ct, tt)te er 1 Gelassen [hat]. And so a little above, gethan [hat]. 2 So mit der Welt Gut nicht zu be z able n [ware], "which (so) it would not be possible to repay (nicht zu bezah- len ware) with [all] the goods of the world." 3 Beraubet [ge] blieben seyn [soil ten]. 4 Hierinn. According to present, usage, this word would end in a single n. Short unaccented monosyllabic terminations, particles, and auxiliaries double their final consonants only when they receive an accession, forming a new syllable, thus giving some degree of ac- cent to the former; as hierin, hierinnen; Fflrstin, Fttrs- tinnen; des, dessen; hat, hatte. There are a few excep- tions. See Gram. p. 80. * Zur Letize, as a, token of affection on parting. It is now pro- vincial. *' Dergleichen nimmer kein Mensch, " such as (the like of which) no man ever." See p. 4, Note 2, and p. 148, Note 6. 7 Dass, so that, \s dependent on the preceding assertion. "So that one perceives how he, from the pure, overflowing, indescribable love with which his heart burned towards them, cared for them, and took a heartier interest in them, than the greatest peril and distress of one's nearest friend can give him, so that over it he forgets his own sorrow and anguish (in order that he may support them with his consolation), of which, however, his heart was, at this hour, full (as he himself saj's to them : My soul is sorrowful even unto death) and was already in the sternest conflict with death and the devil." E i- nem zu Hertzen gehen is to go near one's heart. Instead of hoheste, hochste is now used. 280 SELECTIONS FROM L OTHER. eitel Cotter nnan3fprerf)(irf)cr iebe, bamit fein er gegen ifynen gebramtt, fitr fie forget, nnb ffct) i()rer annimmt, fyeri^ (icfyer, benn feinem 9D?enfcfyen feine nad)ften grennb 1)5* fyefte efafyr nnb Dtotfy mag $n fyvtyn getyen, bag er and) barob feine$ eigenen ?eib$ nnb 5hta.fi: Dergiffet, (bamit er unr fie burcf) fetnen 2!rojl: erbafte,) it>eld)er bed) auf btefe @tunbe few 5?eri,3 ott war, (n>ie er felbjl: ^it il)nen fagt : 9)?eme (Seefe ift betritbt big aitf ben ob,) unb bereit^ in bem fyofyejtett ^)ampf ftnnb ttriber ben 2!ob nnb ^enfef. Unb fyat affbie reid)Iicf) andrf)itttet atte ben bo^en, t)er^(irf)en ^rojl, fo bie gan^e (5t)riftent)eit ()at r nnb fo ein 5!}?enfd) in alien SWtfyen nnb ?eiben begetjren fotfte. 1 Unb er fprarf) $u fein en 3itngern: ^ner er^ erfrfjrecfe nicfjt ^)ier (Tc^ejl bn erjHirf^ttne ^er^lirf) nnb trenlirf) ber frennb* lidfje ^crr (5brt|tn^ (Trf) feiner lieben Siinger annimmt, nnb fitr fie forget, bag er ffe niofyt of)ne 2!rofl laffe, n>ei( e^ je^t an bem war, 1 bag er eben in berfelben 9?ad)t fottte on ibnen gefofyieben werben bnrd) fein bitter ?eiben nnb (tt)ie er if)nen bi^()er mannigfaltiglirf) ^nt)or gefagt nnb ffe attein l)inter il)m faffen in groffer efal)r, nnb (Scijrecfen. IDenn bi^ bafyer 2 waren fie atte^eit firf)er, getroft nnb obne gnrrf)t gemeft, 3 weil er felbft perfonlirf) bei) ifynen war, nnb jTe fa ben, wie er fid) fo gewaltiglirf) beweijete in bem SSoIcf mit sprebigen nnb ^Bnnbern, bag ffe atfe 5fnffel)en anf it)n 1 An dem war dass er sollte, "was on the point of (was at the point that he should separate,) being separated." An dem is often so used. 2 Bis da her, up to that point; bisher, hitherto. Daher, in the former expression, does not mean hence, but at that place, as it frequently does. 3 G e w e s t, obsolete for g e w e s e n. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 281 baben mngten, 1 nnb bie jpobcnpricfhr unb SDberften 2 fclbfl |7ef) miijjten fimijten, unb forfeit, wo (te ibn angrijfcn, 3 matte jtcf) ba$ ganfee 2>o(rf nnber fte erregen, arnm bie 2(pojM, ob pc root arme, gcrtngc 4 2cnte roaren, bocfj waren fie ol)ne (serge nnb gurcfyt, gtngen bafyin, ate 5 miigten (Td) efye bie anbevn ttor ifynen fiircfjten. X)enn pe bacfyten, vt>ei( btefer 9Kann (ebet, 6 fo l)at e^ fetne 3tfotfy, er fann ufcen nnb rcttcn 2C X)aber war ancf) @ fo etn 7 trefflui) fiil)ner 5Wann nnb nnerfcfyrecfener bag er (Trf) barbent 8 nnb Dermiflet, 9 mit ^l)ri(lo and) in ob 1 Dass sie alle Aufsehen auf ihn haben muss ten, " that they (das Volk) must all be amazed (have amazement) at him," or that he created a great sensation among them. 2 Obersten. Der Oberste, from ober, oeer, means the highest in authority, and varies in signification according to the class of individuals to whom it refers, as ruler, chief, captain, etc. O b r i g- k e i t (or O b e r k e i t) means the civil authorities, the magistracy, and admits of the distinction hochste Obrigkeit and Unter- O b r i g k e i t. 3 Angriffen, imperfect subjunctive. "If they should appre- hend him." 4 Geringe, iccaff, insignificant, See p. 249, Note 2. 5 Gingen dahin, als, etc. "went on, as if the othe-rs were sooner to stand in fear of them." 6 Weil uns dieser Mann lebet, " while this man (Christ) is alive with us (for us). U ns is dativus commodi. 7 So e i n. See p. 25, Note 7. 8 Darbeut, obsolete for darbietet. See Gram. p. 203, supra. 9 Vermisset. Sich vermessen, from m e s s e n, to mea- sure, and ve r, wrong, means to presume, promise or affirm too muck in consequence of over-estimating one's self. In the old writers and in common life, it means, to affirm with an oath, or solemnly ; and so here. " That he volunteered and solemnly averred that he would die with Christ, though all the others should deny him, and began to show it (his courage or the truth of what he said) with his action. When the Jews would apprehend Christ, he put himself at once on the defensive, and began to lay on with the sword, not intimidated (by the circumstance) that a great and armed multitude had come to 24* 282 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. $u (jebn, 06 ifyn gleid) bie cwbern alte tterfencjneten, unb ftng and) an, fetched mtt ber Xijat $1 bewetfen : ate bte Suben (^fyrtilum wotften fafyen, ftetft er fid) fobatb $ur ea,entt>ef)r, unb fdbet an, mtfc bent (sd)Werbt bretn $n fd)(aa,en, mige* fdjeuet, bag ber anfe grog unb nut 2Baffen (jeritftet $u ifynen fommen war* Unb itmma, 1 fo langc (Te (5^riftnm bei) jTd) fatten, bnrften fie jTrf) ntrf)t^ beforgen, wdren and) roof Dor jebermann fid)er bfieben* 9tint aber St)rt|tn^ it)nen Derfimbiget, bag er mng t)cn il)nen fdjetben, ^etgt nnb weijjaget er tfynen ^nt)or r bag e^ t^nen Die! anber$, benn bi^ bal)er, a,el)en n?erbe, nnb nnn ba^it fommen, bajl thr ^eri) mtt ^djrerfen nnb 3 a 9 e ye ^ fnd)t n>erbe. $Bie e^ benn gefd)ab, af3 2 er l)tnn>e t q mar, fo fd)dnb(td), jdmmer(td) nnb drger(td) t>in t qertd)tet ; ba entjtet t()iten ba(b ba3 ^erfe, bag fie (Td) 3 Dor gnrcfyt Derfd)(oflfen unb Derftecften, unb nirfjt l)erfitr burften* them." Fahen is obsolete for fan gen, and fahet an, for fangt an. Drein zu schlagen. See p. 166, Note ]. Un- gescheuet is formed from s c h e u, timid. Gescheut has come to have the secondary or derived signification, cautious, prudent, wise, and is often confounded with gescheit. With the prefix u n, the word sometimes, as here, has its original signification, fearless, though it more commonly means, heedless, impudent. Kommen stands for gekommen. 1 S u m m a, in a word. See p. 243, Note 2. " And, in a word, so long as they had Christ with them, they ought to fear nothing ; they would, no doubt have remained safe before any man." B lie ben for gebl i eben. 2 A Is. There is confusion in this sentence. Either als here performs improperly the two-fold office of introducing the apodosis (Nachsatz) to the preceding words, and, at the same time, of stand- ing at the beginning of the protasis (V o r d e r s a t z) to the clause beginning .with da entfiel (As it happened, when he went away. When he went away, etc. their hearts failed them), or, wie es denn geschah belongs to the preceding sentence, and al s should begin a new one. The latter is probably the case. 3 Dass sie sich, etc. " so that they shut themselves up, and EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 283 enn c3 war and) gar $u ein fdjrecftidjer, 1 fdjeuSttdjer gatt, bag ber ()rifht3, fo gimor gefitrcfytet unb fd)rccffid) war alien Dtatbctyerren unb ^ncjicrn $u Scriifafem, ber nnrb 3 pfotetid) fo fdjwad) unb fo gar Dertaffen, bag er fommt in bte j>anbc fcincr gcinbe, bie tt)n banbcfn auf atferargfte, unb be3 frfjanblkfyflen obc bal)in rid) ten. 3 a if! ntdjt mehr ber ^l)rt(lii^, ber bie obten anfcrwedfet/ bie ^anfer nnb SScrfanfer an^ bent ^cmpel fHeg, unb fo wunberte bag jTd) jebermann bafitr cntfc^ct ; fonbern fo fd)Wad) nnb t)e^ rad)t, al$ ber argejle, elenbejle 9ttenfd) anf ^rben, ben je^ bcrmann mit S u ff ejt &**? un ^ ^ e 5J((ergeringjlen it)n 5 an^ fpeijcn* X)a3 war ja weit nnb tief gefatfen 6 Don ber t)ort# gen l)err(id)en ejlatt, bag bie lie&en Simger, a[^ bie and) nod) fd)Wad) 7 im faitben, nnb fokfye ^3n|fe nid)t me()r er^ fal)ren i)atten r ntngten forgcn nnb $agen : D, wo wolten hid themselves, and did not dare come forth." Herfilr, for her- vor kommen. See p. 35, Note 3, and p. 6, Note 4. 1 Gar zu ein schrecklicher, " quite too frightful an occur- rence," is obsolete for ein gar zu schrecklicher. 2 Der wird, etc. Der is not needed here; it merely resumes the beginning of the clause der Christus." "That Christ, who was formerly so feared, and so terrible to all the elders (counsellors) and priests at Jerusalem, he becomes (instead of, " that he should be- come") all of a sudden so weak," etc. 3 Des schandlichsten Todes dahin richten. Dahin rich ten (to put out of tlie way) is nearly the same as hinrich- ten, to execute. See p. 50, Note 2 near the end, and p. 57, Note 1. Todes is a genitive of manner. See p. 68, Note 3. 4 Auferwecket (hat]. Wunderte for Wonder that, used in this sense, in the old German only. 5 Jhn, is not necessary, as without it, den is sufficient. 6 Das war ge fa lien, a peculiar German idiom, by which a preterite participle (that was far fallen) is used where we should use a present participle substantively. " That was falling far," i. e. was a great fall. See p. 9, Note 5. 7 Alsdienochschwach, "as those still weak," or those who are still weak. 284 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. writ nun bfetben ?* (r ift unfer Xwft unb rofe ber 2 tft nun bafytn, nnb fyaben ntemanb mefyr, ber un$ en ober betjftefyen fonnte ; jet jmb unfere geinbe flare? unb madjtta,, roir aber fdjroad) unb Dertafien Don after 2Be(t, jc* $Biber fofdje fitnfttge 2togji unb Sofyrecfen fommt er $n# Dor, ate em frommer, trener err, mit biefem roft unb SSermafynuna,, ba^ ffe benncd) 3 bktben fonnen unb ntd)t Der^ $agen, fcihet fofctje^ eben an Don bent, ba3 il)nen begegnen foflte unb mugte, bag, n?enn e3 alfo gcfd)e{)en n>urbe, jTe baran geba'd)ten, bag er^ il)nen $ui>or gefagt unb bagcgen Derma[}net fya'tte, unb fprtrf)t gum aKererjlen : (uer 5^er erftijrecfe ntd)t 2U3 fofftc er fagen : 3cfy tt>eig it)o[)(, 4 metne Heben 3unger, vt>te e^ end) gel)en tt>irb, n>enn id) Don end) fommcn unb end) attein (aj]en werbe, bag end) ettel @d)rec!en unb gnrcfyt n>trb uberfaKen, unb rcerbet fofd) an mir erfefyen, ba^ end) groj^e Urfad) ttnrb geben, gu 1 Wo wollen wir nun bleiben. "Where now shall we keep ourselves (remain)?" What shall we do with ourselves? With the word bleiben several idioms are formed besides those mentioned p. 63, Note 5. See the larger lexicons. 2 Der, as a demonstrative is more emphatic than er would be here, and is equivalent to he italicized in English. See p. 243, Note 4. U n d [wir] haben niemand. 3 Dass sie dennoch, etc. It may seem a little doubtful what the relation of this clause is to the preceding, whether dass is to be rendered, namely that, or to the end that. The latter is undoubtedly the right construction. 4 Ich wiess wohl, etc. " I know full well, my dear disciples, how it will be (go) with you, when I shall go away from you and leave you alone, viz. that nothing but (eitel) terror and fear will come (fall) upon you, and that you will behold in respect to me (not, in me} things that will give you great occasion to be alarmed, so that your heart might be shut up within you, and that you will not know what will become of you (where you shall keep yourselves). Solch Ding das, "such things as," or "things which." An mir, upon me, or relating to me externally (not to his character). See p. 80, Note 3. Zuschmelzen, means to solder, to seal, or close up by melting. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 285 $agen, bag cud) batf fterfc tm ?cib mod)t jttfdjnteffcett, nb uid)t nM|]eu ivcrber, vt>o iljr btetbcn fcttet. a$ fage id) cud) uub cbcn barum, bag ibr cud) uid)t fo balb lajfet ba$ gar ndjmcn, 1 foubcrn fci>b fedf, uub ritftet cud) ju bent unb roemt e$ baju fommt, fo beucft bicfcr mcfncr SSermabmmg, bag ibr barum uid)t fo ba(b t>cr^agt uub 3((fo mofftc cr ibucu gcrnc ba^ ^cr^ aufrid)tcn itnb er* , afd ber ba n>ob[ wugte, wo c^ ibncu Itcgen n?itrbc : 2 bag, ob pc ajctd) (gdjrccfen unb 5lngft fitfylcn witrbcu, ffd) bcuuod) fouutcn aufl)a(tcu unb bcflo (cid)tcr bawibcr bcfte* f>cn X)cuu c^ (icgt gar mc( baran, >ic ba^ cr geritflct fct) : ob Una,(M 3 unb (Sd)rccfcu ba^cr gcbct, bag man ben* nod) moge 2(ufcntl)a(t wtflcn, obcr jcmanb l)abe, ber ifym ein trojl(id) 3Bort einrebe ober crinnere ; fo ift e3 aEe^ befto Ieid)ter $u tragcn* ^arum t!)ut er tfynen biefe ^rebigt ^ Dor, bei)be, ba^ f ituftige @d)recfen anp^eigen, unb baneben 4 1 Euch das Hertz nehmen, " take away your courage." See p. 52, Note 4. " That you do not at once allow your courage to be taken away, but that you be bold, and arm yourselves for the con- flict; and when it comes (to it)," etc. 2 Wo es ihnen liegen wtlrde, " where the difficulty would lie with them." Wo is here used nearly in the sense of w or an. Compare es liegt gar viel daran, at the beginning of the next sentence, and p. 169, Note 4. 3 Ob UnglOck, etc. " [that] if calamity and terror come, one may still know where to find support, or have some one, who," etc. Though the English idiom requires the word, that, at the beginning of this sentence (before, z/), in the German, dass properly comes after the clause. A u f e n t h a 1 1 commonly signifies abode. But the word aufhalten in the preceding sentence, (for which Luther sometimes uses enthalten. See p. 83, Note 2,) and erhalten a little below, and furthermore the circumstance that the old writers use the verb aufenthalten in the sense of to sustain, to support, make the meaning evident here, as given in the translation. 4 Da neb en, "in connection with that," or, " at the same time." See p. 94, Note 4, and p. 193, Note 3, near the middle. 286 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gu troften, cmf bag (Te jtd) fyernad) berfelben erutnern unb bamft erfyatten fottten ; ttnewol biefe SErofhma, 1 gn ber Stunbe fobatb nid)t fyalf, nod) git $rdften fam, bi fo tang ber etttge @etft farm $ber gu ber &it, ate (Sfyriftn^ f)tn* roeg roar, ba roar eg gar aug itnb fetn er& nod) ^utt) inefyr bet) tbnen, bag ami) tfyrer feiner fitr enter ofyttmacfyttgen 5!Kagb fonttte |I:e()en ; ba rcaren atte fetn 2Bert itnb S[Bercf baf)tn, unb btefe3 ^rcjl^ gan^ nnb gar fcergefien* 5l(fo ^at er bigmaf feine fteben ilpofleltt Dermal)ttet nnb getrojlet, a(^ bie 2 and) be^ roft3 n)cl)( bebnrften* (5^ tft after ntd)t nm tljrentiDitten, fonbern nn$ 3 gefdjrie? 6en r bag tt)tr and) biefeg ^trofte^ (ernen gebrand)en anf ge^ genmartige nnb fitnftige ^otf), nnb bag etn jeg(tdf)er Qtyrift, wenn er getanft ifl, nnb (Td) ^at gn ^{)rijlo begeben, mag unb fott fid) 4 and) a(fo bretn fd)tcfen, unb gettrigltd) beg Der^ fe^en, bag tfym and) begegnen n>trb djrecfen unb SIngfl, bte tbnt ba^ erl3 b(6b unb t^ergagt madden, e3 fet) burc^ etne ober mandjerlei) einbfd)aft nnb 50Biberflanb X)enn em (5f)rt|l: f)at an^ ber 9CRaafie t)tel getnbe, 5 wo er 1 Wiewohl diese Trostung, etc. " although this consola- tion did not at the moment immediately aid, and take effect, until the Holy Spirit came ; but at the time that Christ was [taken] away, then all was over (out), and no heart nor courage was in them, so that none of them could stand before (f (1 r for v o r) a feeble maid ; all his (Christ's) words and works were away (out of mind), etc. A us as an adverb after i s t, war, etc. is used just like our word, 0er, in similar constructions. A 1 1 e, with Wort and W e r k as collectives. 2 A 1 s die, as those who. 3 Uns, is not governed by um will en, which requires the genitive, but the construction is changed to the dative, uns instead ofunsertwillen. " But it is written not on their account, but for us." 4 Mag und soil sich, etc. " he may and should accommodate himself to it, and confidently expect it that fear," etc. 5 Ausder Maasse viel Feinde, etc. " has surpassingly numerous enemies, if he will stand (abide) by his Lord; the world with the devil daily seeks his (body and) life, furthermore his own EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOTTRTEENTH. 287 be*) fetnem errn bfetbcn rotff, tie 2KMt famt bent eufel ftebt tfym ta'ajirf) uadf) ?etb intb ?eben, ba$u fcin eigen gfetfcfj intb SBermmft itnb GJenrifieit, fo tfyu ftet$ pfogt, bag tfym feiofytftii) cfyrecfeu unb 3 a 9 c N ttnberfd fyret, aucfy ttou fetttem ctgnen cren* arum, nrittft bit and) em (Sfyrtft feint, 1 ben 2(po|Mn unb atfcn etfigett gfetcfj, fo ritfte bid), unb roarte beg bag etnmat etn @titnb(ein fcmmen tt)trb, unb bein trejfen, bag bit erfrf)recfen unb $aa,en wtrff. X'enn f ill atten (5brt|len t>erfunbt(jet r auf bag ffe (ernen 2 ffcf) molten, unb furfc t()re (5ad)en a(fo ricfyten, vt>enn jte flesh, reason and conscience, which constantly tortures him, so that terror and fear easily invade him, even from his own heart." B 1 e i- b e n with b e i, in a figurative sense, often means to adhere to one, to stand by him. S t e h e n followed by n a c h, (different from nachstehen meaning to be inferior), signifies, to seek, like the .Latin pef.ere, generally in a hostile sense. L e i b, the body, i. e. to kill it. L e i c h 1 1 i c h, see p. 186, Note 2. 1 Willst du auch ein Christ seyn, etc. "If you will also be a Christian like the Apostles and all the saints, arm yourself, and assuredly expect (it) that an [evil] hour will come and pierce your heart so that you," etc. 2 Aufdass sie lernen, etc. " in order that they may learn [in their thoughts] to accustom themselves, and immediately so dis- pose their affairs (if they at present feel secure) and that they so ap- prehend and regard it as if (that) their state (it) will soon change, and that they may say to themselves (think) : ' let things continue as they are, just as long as it is God's will ; to-day, joyful and in good spirits, to-morrow sad ; to-day alive, to-morrow dead ; to-day in prosperity and security, to-morrow in all sorts of calamity,' and that they do not slumber (snore) ever on, as though there never were to be any calamity." Also in both instances relates to als dass. The latter indicates how it will be with Christians in fact, the former points out a corresponding feeling. In good English, we should vary the form of comparison and say ; " In order that they may regulate their plans, and adjust their affairs, and all their views and feelings as though they were certain that a change would take place." WOrde es, is impersonal, and refers to the idea of life, condition, etc. 288 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fidjer finb, bag fie e a(fo annefymeu unb anfefyeu, al$ bag e3 fid) balb anbern werbe, unb bencfen : e roafyre, vwe lange @ott mitt ; fyeut frofytid) itnb gute3 9Sftutf)$, morgen traurig ; fyeut lebenb, morgen tobt ; fyeut in lite! itnb (sidjerfyeit, morgen in after 3?otfy, nnb nid)t fo gar fur nnb fitr babin fdjnardjen, ate ttwrbe e3 feine -Jcotfy fyabem 2)a^ meig nnn (Sbriftng tDol)!, tt>enn n?ir wotten fein ben, an ber anfe, (Sacrament nnb (5i)ange[io l)a(ten, e ntd)t anber^ fepn fann, n>ir mitffen 1 ben !^enfe( gum getnb baben, ber nn^ obn Untertag gnfe^et mit alter feiner 5Qiad)t unb un^ nacf) ?eib unb eefe fteijet : nnb tt>o i()m ott nid)t roefyret/ 2 bag er bid) nicf)t fann in einem ^tage eriDitrgen, fo (agt er bod) nid)t ab mit atterfet) ?iflen unb gitcfen, bag er bir gum roenigftett beineu ^ntb nnb ^id)er# fyeit nel/me, unb gn Unruf)e unb granrigfeit, barnad) and) in anbere @efal)r unb 9tot^ bringe, $Bei( e^ benn alfo ge^en mug, bag roir mitflen bem eufef unter bie (gpiefle laujfen, 3 unb un$ i)on it)m plagen unb martern (aflfen ; fo 1 [A Is dass] wir mUssen. Such ellipses are not uncommon. 2 Undwoihm Gott wehret, etc. "and though (if) God hinders him from destroying you (so that he cannot destroy you) in a single day, still he (Satan) does not cease (leave off) from his de- vices and tricks, in order that he may, at least, take away your cour- age and security and bring you into disquiet," etc. N i c h t before wehret injures the sense as the construction now is. Undoubt- edly the writer unconsciously changed the construction, forgetting when he came to the close, how he commenced it. 3 Dem Teufel unter die Spiesse la u fen, etc. " expose ourselves to the darts of Satan (run under the darts to Sa- tan), and be vexed and tormented by him, still Christ, would hereby warn us against them and comfort us, in order that we may not yield to them, nor be greatly terrified nor easily let Satan capture us, that he may bring us into [a state of] melancholy and despondency." Uns von ihrn plagen lassen, literally, " suffer ourselves to be vexed by him." Uns vermahnet haben, " have us warned." This idiom is also found in English ; as, " 1 would have you," for "I wish you would." Uns dazu schicken, " ac- EXPOSITION OP JOHN FOURTEEN 1 : nntt mid (Sbrifhtd bao,c<]cn biemtt ttcrmabnct iii baben, bag unr mid ba,$n fii)icfcn fotten, nid)t fo fcl?r er* fdjrcrfen, nod) ten Xcufci fe (cid)t(id) mid cimicbmcM faffcM, bag cr uud iti (2dM>ermntb imb 2$cr$n>ciflima, brtm]e, armn fagt imd biefcn re|T: and) gefagt femi, 1 inib affb einbilben unt> fafien, baf? ttnr tint braitdjeii/ imb bamit itnd (Icircfcit fbnnen, VDCMM wir X'ritbfal imb 5lngft fiiblcM, afd borcten unr aldbcmt (5bri|lnm fo(d)c ^Bortc JM mid fageM : 5Bad tbiift bu ? UBifft bii banim 511 tobe crfdirccfeM inib ga# gen ? (Set) bod) (jctrofl inib faffe ctn 5^er ; 2 i(l barum ned) nid)t and, 3 ob bid) bcr ^citfct, bte Iffieft, obcr bctn ei^en e# iDiffen p(a f qt ititb fd)terft, imb mid) nid)t gegentt>drttg fiiblefl. 5Beigt bu nid)t, bag id) bird toMg st>or gefagt babe, imb ben ^rejl binter tntr o c f a iT e nr ^ bid) jlarcfcn imb crbafteit foil ? Siefye, alfo fottten n>ir lernen imb imd gcnjolmcn, biefe Strojhmg bed ^errn C^brifti s nii^e su mad)en burd) taajidje Uebimg, in alien nnfern 21nfed)timgen, bag tt>ir imd fo(d)ed nidjt (ieffen t)ergeb(id) gefagt imb gefcfyriebcn fet)n Unb and biefen imb berajeidjen SOBorten nnb 3Scrmat)nim# gen @t)rifH fotten n>ir aud) (ernen ben crrn ^brifinm red)t commodate ourselves, i. e. yield to it." Dass here refers to so. So s e h r and so leichtlich are used absolutely in the sense of very much and easily, and d a s s means in order that. 1 Lasst unsdiesenTrost auch gesagtseyn, "let this consolation be said to us," i. e. let us receive it. See p. 240, Note 3. Einbilden und fassen, " and let us so apprehend and understand it, that we can use it," etc. Lasst uns is used in two distinct senses here. . In the first clause the verb governs Trost, and uns is in the dative; in the second (und [1 a s s t uns] also einbilden), uns is in the accusative. " And let us so apprehend." 2 Fasse ein Hertz, "to take courage," " to pluck up cour- age." Compare the English word dishearten. 3 Ist darum noch nicht aus, etc. " All is not therefore over, even though the devil, the world and their own conscience distress and terrify thee, and thou dost not feel my presence (me present)." See p. 236, Note 1. 25 290 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fennen, bag tt>tr bejlo ber(td)ere, troftttdjere 3nt?erj7d)t ju ifym gennnnen mogen, itnb mebr anf fein ^Bort ad)ten, benn auf alle3, fo nn$ mag Dor 5(ngen, Dbren wib inne femmett. 2)enn fo id) ein (sbrijl: bin, 1 itnb mid) 311 ibm bafte, fo.tteig id) je, bag er mtt mir rebet 9iim bore id) ja hie itnb anbertt>o, bag aUe feme 2Gorte babtn gefyen, bag er mid) trofte, ja atte3, tt>a$ er rebet nnb tbut ober gebencfet, ettel freunblidje, trojHtofye 50orte nnb 5Bercfe itnb. arnm mng ba^ gen)tg feijn nnb ntd)t febten : 5Genn em 5D?enfd) tranert nnb ein 6Iobe3 erfd)rocfen er^ bat, ba^ mng nid)t Don ^brijlo femt, enn er ifl nid)t ber ber bie 5^er^en erfd)rec!et, ober traurt(j nnb mad)en witt. X^enn er ift eben ba,$n fomtnen, nnb bat getban, fid) and) barnm binanf gen i:tmmel gefe(3t, bag er ranrigfeit nnb ^rfjrecfen be^ .freren3 l)inweg nebme, nnb bafi'tr ein frob(td) ^erl^, ewtflfen nnb ebancfen gebe, nnb i)erbeigt and) barnm, feinen 3"gft > n nnb (5brtften ben ^eitigen eijl: jn fenben, nnb nennet ibn einen ^rojler, ba* bnrd) er fie flarcfen nnb erl)alten tt>t(r, nadjbem er (ciMid) Don il)nen geben mngte, 5Ber nnn ba^ fonnte (ernen nnb tt>obt in^ er^ faffen, ttne Sbnjlu^ mtt feincm ?07nnb rebet nnb jenget, bag e^ ifym ^nn>tber nnb (etb fei), roenn eine^ (5brtfi:en 5^er^ tranrtg ober erfofyrorfen t|T, ber ware mofyl bran, 2 nnb l)atte mebr 1 Denn so ich ein Christ bin, etc. " For if I am a Christian, and adhere to him, then I always know that he [in these words] speaks to me. Now I learn in this very passage and else- where that all his words tend to this, to comfort rue (that he comfort me) ; indeed all that he says and does or thinks are nothing but kind and consoling words and works." [Ge] komme n in line 14. 2 Der ware wo hi daran, he is (would be) in a good way, or is doing well, (in the matter, daran) or is well off, and has more than half conquered." Daran, in such cases, is indefinite, as in English, at it, in such familiar phrases as to go at it. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 291 bcnn bafb gcwonnen. cnn menu c fo u>ett femmt, 1 bag id) ben Acinb, fo mid) crfdjrcrfen unb betruben nrifl, fenne, unb n?cif?, woljer fofdje ebancfen nub (Jinfatte fommen, fo babe id) bercittf cincu feffcn X'rit unb ge(3, barauf id) grimbcn unb ftebcn faun, unb mid) fctn erwcljren, unb fa# gen : ad iff md)t meiu err l)rijlu3, fonbern @bri|K geinb, bcr (cibigc cnfeL 2 cnn cr betreugt and) roof bic frcmmcn v v>cr(scn bamtt, bag cr (Id) ttcrflellt (wic St. ^au^ Iu^ fa.qt, 2 C$or. 11, 14.) in ctncn ^ngct be^ ?id)t^, unb ffd) alfo bi(bct nub Dovgibt, afd fei) cr Sbrijlii^ felbfh (Jin ^brtjl abcr (cbct met and) atfo, 3 bag cr cutficrftd) t)iel ^cibcn unb 5(nfcd)tung l)at ; abcr bed) fann cr em gctrojt, froblid) ^>crl5 unb 93tutl) gu ctt baben r unb pd) bc^ aller^ beflcn git ihm ycrfeben* )arum faj]ct und fc(d)ed tt>ol)( ^ nen : c3 fcmme itbcr uny, n>a3 fitr Ungtitcf fommcn mag, spefrtfcnk, ^rieg, tbcure 3?it, 3(rmutb, 3Serfcfgmtg, fd)tt>cre ebancfen, fo ben $epf ntcbcrfd)fagcn unb ba^ ^cr^ flopf# fcnb unb gappcfnb mad)cn / bag 4 nnr bod) fo t)icl mijfcn unb 1 Dennwenn es so we it koramt, etc. " For, if so much progress has been made (it has gone so far) that 1 know the enemy who would terrify and distress me, and understand whence such thoughts and fancies come, I have already a firm footing and a rock," etc. Denn wenn, must not be confounded with dann wenn, then if or then trlien. On the difference between k e n n e n and w i s s e n, see p. 54, Note 6. E i n f a 1 1 means the act of fall- ing into, which when it relates to the territories of an enemy, means an invasion, or assault; when it relates to the mind, it means the thoughts that full accidentally or pop into the mind, ichims, conceits, fancies. M ich sein erwehren, ward him off. 2 InderleidigeTeufel, asinderliebe Gott is a peculiarity which distinguishes the German language from ours. We do not say, the roicked devil, and the dear God. Betreugt for betriegt. See p. 281, Note 8. 3 Lebetwohlauchalso. Wohl here softens the affir- mation. Not, " lives well also thus," but " lives commonly (or, prob- ably) in such a way that," etc. 4 D a s s refers to s o 1 c h e s, near the beginning of the sentence. 292 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fdifiejjen fonnen, bag folcfyctf md)t Don @brifto fet), unb fyit* ten nnd fitr bent enfe(, ber ftd) fann btlben nnb barfteften in Gibnfti eftaft nnb Seamen. a3 marc 1 met bie rcd)te tot ft eine$ (Ebriften, mer affo fonnte nnterfdietben im rcdjten ^ampf, ma3 (gbriftt eber be3 Xenfete (*mgeben fet) ? 2Jbcr, mie former e3 tft, bag ajanbet nicmanb, bcnn er ed crfafyrcn bat* 2 2)enn ber i^en^ fei fann fi'ct) fo fletben nnb fcfjmitcfen mit ^brfftt nnb $Sortcn, nnb fo bftbcn nnb ftetten, ba^ etner mol fenb (5i)be fd)mitre r e^ mare mabrbaftta, (5brtftn^ fe(bft, fo c^ bod) ber (r6fetnb nnb redbte @T$mtberrf)rift 3 tft, ^arnm Icrne 4 t)teran^, fo bn ein ($brifte btft, mer bid) mitt fefyrecfen nnb ba$ er^ bfobe mad)en, bag bn gemtg(icf) fon^ neft fc^Iteflfen, bag cr be ^enfel^ ^Bote ift. 2)cnn mo and) ^t) r i^i^ jemanb fdjrecfet ^nr SBw(|c nnb SBcfcbrimg t)om Ung(anben nnb fnnbltd)en ?eben, (mie er @t. ^>ait(um ttor ber SBcfcl)rttng, item @t ^auluS 5 on (5l)rifit megen bte gu ^ortntbo, item bte afater fdjrerfet,) fo mabret e^ bod) itid)t fange, X)enn er tbnt^ nid)t barnm, bag bn fottt trait* rig bteiben,, fonbern fitl)rct bid) ba(b beran^, nnb troftet bid) 1 Das ware, etc. " That would be a Christian's true knowl- edge when one (whoever) could, in the real conflict, distinguish be- tween the suggestions (what is the suggestion) of Christ and of Sa- tan." W e r has this indefinite meaning in itself and in consequence of subjunctive mode, which represents not real but supposed cases. This idiom frequently occurs in Luther's writings. 2 I)enn er [der] es erfahren ha t. U n d [s i c h] so bilden und stellen. 3 Ertzwiderchrist, arch-antichrist. Endechrist also occurs, e n d e standing for anti. 4 Darum lerne, etc. " Learn therefore from this, if you are a Christian, that whoever would terrify you, and make your heart fearful, you may certainly infer that he is Satan's messenger." D a s s before du gewisslich must, in the translation, be placed at the beginning of the preceding clause. See p. 285, Note 3. 5 1 1 e in St. P a u 1 u s, etc. " Also St. Paul, on Christ's ac- count terrified those at Corinth, and the Galatians. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 293 wtcbcr. ad tbnt ber cnfe( nid)t, fonbern fa'gt feinen 1 tollmen unb UnlniilfiTti.qcn tuT$aa,tn>erben, ober roo er anf$ lefcte in 8d)rccfcn unb Oliuift fatlt Owe benn $u(cfct foldjeu alien a,efd)iebt) : fo lagt cr ton barimt ftccfen, marfjt beffek ben fein Crnbe, trctbt unb britcft fo tyavt, bag er $tt>ctfefn mng, wo cr nidjt nricfcer bnrd) (Stynfhtm tct nrirb. , ba^ will Sf)rt(lu5 affbic febren, ba er fprid)t : Ghter erfd)recfc nidjt zc. 311^ fottte er fagcn : 3d) fter&e unb fabre ba^on au^ enern 3(ugen, unb faflc end) binter mtr in ber 5Belt, ba ibr mid) md)t febcn nod) l)6ren werbet, fonbern mitffct nnr feben, boren unb fi'tbfen atterlei) ^)lage unb Unajitcf, ba^ end) allcntl)albcn un'rb fdjrecfen unb angfl mad)en. 2 3lber tafH end) barum ba^ ^erfe uid)t matt uub fei t q macf^en, 3 fonbent l)aftet end) bagegen beg, 4 fo il)r on mir l)5ret r bag tf)r fottet getrojl unb gnten %R\itk$ fei)U ^enn id) tt>ill3 uid)t fci)it r ber 5 end) fdjrerfet uub betriibet, fonbern, mo ibr feld)c l)6ret ober fitl)let, fo fcfyliefiet bag e^ be3 ^enfel^ efpenfl: unb !^rnQ 6 jet). 1 Sondern Jjlsst keinen, etc. " but [ordinarily] causes no haughty or impenitent one to become discouraged, or if the latter at last falls into [a state of] fear and distress (as happens to all in the end), he leaves him there (lets him stay or stick there), makes no end to (of) it, pursues (urges) and presses him so hard," etc. 2 Angst machen. Angst with mac hen, seyn and w e r d e n is an indeclinable word, meaning, anxious, distressed. These verbs are, when so employed, followed by a dative. The word a n g s t, when not a substantive, is limited to these expressions. 3 A ber lasst euch, etc. " But do not therefore become faint hearted and timid (suffer one to make your heart faint and cowardly) but, on the contrary, rely on that which you have heard of me," etc. 4 Haltet euch dess, " hold yourselves or adhere to that." This verb is now always followed by a n with the accusative, instead of the genitive, as here. 6 Denn ich wills nicht seyn, der, etc. " For I would not be one to terrify and trouble you, (1 will not be it who, etc.)" 6 Gespenst und Trug, " grim visage and illusion." 25* 294 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. me (babe*) tt)r mtd) fottt fcnnen, af$ bte ofyafe ifyren red)* fen nrten,) fed alfo beiflcn : gi'trd)te bid) nid)t nnb er* fofyrtd: nid)f ! a3 ftnb 1 meine 2Borte nnb ebancfem bit ein anber3, fo Bereft bu nidjt meine Sttmme, ob gtetd) in mefnem 9?amen nnb ejMt bir Dorbilbet. Ztaritm fottt bit foldjcm ntd)t cjfauben, nod) fofgen* ( a n b e t t b r an & o 1 1, f o g ( a n b e t a n d) a n m t d). Sa fc^t cr Urfad)cn ber Dortgcn ^HBorte, bamtt 2 er ange* fangcn bat, ft'e $n crmabncn, f qetrojl; nnb unerfdjrccfen $n fetjn, ^?agt end) ntd)t erfdjrecfen (fprtd)t er), ned) ba^ $er fet t q mad)en, ob id) n>o( fetbftd) Don end) fomme nnb end) jlecfen (aflfe mttten nntcr ber $Qelt nnb ^enfet^ eroatt, l)ie end) britcfen nnb ffemmeu, nnb atte^ Unglitcf antegcn roerben ; fonbern jlebet ferf nnb Deft n>tber atte^, ba^ end) mag begegncn. ^enn ibr, a(^ ^hriften, fotlet ja ntd)t tran* ren nod) gagen, tt)eil ibr nid)t fei)b, 3 n>te bie, ttelcfye, fo fTe in ?eiben r Ungtitrf nnb 5Bibertt)artigfeit fommen, feinen rofl: nod) 3ut>erftd)t b^ben, a(^ ba ft'nb, bie ba nid)t glan* ben, nod) otte^ 5Bort nnflfen, fonbern il)ren ^roft anf $eit* Itdje Dinge fe^en nnb mit bem ^erfeen nnr an bent fyangen, ba^ ba gegenwartig unb ffd)fbar ift, nnb mo bafjclbe mcnbct, ba tt)?nbet and) ifyr ?D^ntb nnb 3i^f^ffd)t, X)arnm, n>enn ffd) ba^ &IM wanbelt in Unglitcf ; fo fatten fie ptofetid) ba=* 1 Das s i n d, these are. See Gi am. p. 348. Ein anderSjflm/ other. 2 D a m i t in the sense of w o m i t, with which. Comp. p. 305, Note 1 . 3 Weil ihr n i c h t sey d, etc. " because ye ate not like those, who, if they corne into suffering, misfortune and adversity, have no consolation or confidence, as is the case with those (as are those) who do not believe, who are not acquainted with the word of God, but put their trust (consolation) in temporal things, and in their hearts are attached only to what is present and visible, and if that fails (turns away), their spirits and confidence also fail." Vest, three lines above, for f e s t. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 295 luit, nub iUT,$aa,nt, ale? fa> cd attcd mtt tbnett au3. futb \*cure, bte fctncn 0)ott baben, unb ntd)t$ nnfien, nod) crfabren son fofotoem roft, berba bcfteben unb jTcgen fann mitten in 1 bodijter Dtotb unb Unajitrf, obgletd) atteg 3 C ^ lidje unb &erg&ngftd)e, fo man fid) jn ucvfeben unb $11 l)of* fen bat, aufberct. (old)e ?cute (fpridjt er,) fettct tbr nfd)t fh)it. ^enn ihr babt ja Gk>ttc^ 5Bert, baburd) ibr iftn babt fenncn (erncn 9 unb an tint aja'nbcn, X'arum fot^ let tbr end) fetn Sd)rccfcn iibcrwalttgcu nod) nberwwbett rajfcn, fonbcrn fcrf(td) unb mamtlich voiberftel)cn, unb euc^ eqcfgcn, at^ bic t)te( anbcrn, 3 cjcvrnffcru, bobcrn ^trojl: unb Trol) rcnjicn, benn a((e ^IGe(t bat, nub grower Sta'rcfe unb 5U2ad)t, barauf tbr cud) ^u Derlajfcu babt, benn ber 5Be(t itnb be3 Xeufcf^ cmalt nub ^ad)t tfl. ?aflfet anbere auf tbre ^eit(id)e (5)en?a(t unb litcf tro^cn unb pecfyen ; tbr abcr troftet end), 4 ban ibr ctnen ctt babt unb tbn fennet, unb tterfaffet end) barauf, ba^ er 6ei; end) tjl, unb end) bek fen fann, n?te er end) bnrd)3 ? IBort ^ugefagt t)at, unb gemtg^ ltd) nid)t fehfen ivtrb, obg(etd) al(e^ rotber end) tft, fonbern end) bcijfteben, befcfytrmen unb an^^etfenmtrb, btemetC tl)r nm fetnetrottten aKe^ (eibet, (S)(a'nbet tbr nun, unb tterfaffet end) anf ett, fo gfciubet 1 Mitten i n. In English the order is always reversed, in the miilst of, instead of middle in. 2 L e r n e n for g e 1 e r n t. See p. 238, Note 5. " By which you have learned to know him and to believe on him." 3 Als die viel andern, etc. " as those who have (know) very different (not " much other"), surer and higher consolation and assurance, than all the world has, and greater strength and power to rely on (on which you have to rely) than," etc. 4 Ihr aber trostet euch, etc. " but console ye yourselves that you have a God and that you know him, and rely (imperative) on it that he will be with you and help you, as he has promised you through his word, and certainly will not fail [to fulfil it] though everything be against you, but will stand by you, defend you and de- liver you, because you have suffered everything for his sake." 296 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER; and) an mid)* 3ft ener Iau6e recfyt, ba ibr cud) $n ott uteit tterfebet, 1 fo tterfebet endi bejjelben and) $n mtr ibr bei) ibm roft3 nnb ^itlfe fnd)et nnb genxirtet, bag geroartet and) Don mir ; id) will end) genng(id) nid)t fcblen, fo tt>eni t q at3 @ott fclbft abe id) end) bigfyer gebolfen, unb a (led bei) end) getban, tt>a3 il)t bebiirft fyabt, nnb mid) affo er$ei t qt, bei)be, mit $Borten nnb ^Bercfen, bag il)r end) mein babt bitrfen troftcn, 2 nnb fiibnlid) anf mid) Derfaflfen, unb id) end) nod) nie nid)t babe laflfen febten : fo wi(i id)S and) binfort tbnn, nnb end) nid)t (affen, ob id) g(eid) nid)t leiblid) bet) end) bleibe* 2)enn id) l)abe nod) biefetbige ^raft 3 unb s HJad)t, bei)be r on nnb mit @ott, bag id)g tbnn fann nnb tt>i(I ; allein, jweifett nnb ^agt nidjt, a(^ ba ttet il)r, bei;be, ctt nnb mid) Dcrforen, fonbern jtebet Deft im @(an^ ben, nnb (afiet enre 3i^^t*ftd)t ntcf)t jwden nod) fd)tt>ad)en, ob ihr gleid) fet)et mid) (eiben nnb fterben, nnb end) l)inter mir allein (affen. Unb n?ie ibr bibber bei) mir gefet)en nnb erfafyren babt (eiblid)en S3ei)jlanb nnb (d)n$ : a(fo glaubet nun and), ob ifyr3 g(cid) nid)t fcor 5lngen feben n>erbet, fo ibr meine ^nnger nnb red)te ^brijlen fet)b, mitjjet 1 Dass ihr euch zu Gott alles Guten versehet, " that you look confidently to God for every good thing, then look confidently to me for the same." Sich verse hen, with the genitive, means to expect a thing confidently; and with the addition of a dative of the person with z u, to look to one for a thing, or to ex- pect it of one. W as Trosts und Hulfe, what of consola- tion and aid. 2 Dass ihr euch mein habt ditrfen trosten, " that you have been able to comfort yourselves in me." Mein is in the genitive for meine r. Sich trosten which is now in common language followed by the preposition Q b e r, mit or i n, formerly governed a genitive in the same sense, to comfort one's self over, icith or in. N och nie nicht is obsolete for n o c h nie. 3 Denn ich habe noch dieselbige Kraft, etc. "For 1 have the same efficacy and power still from God and the same with him, (i. e. with his aid, or through him,) so that 1 have both the power and the will to do it, (both can and will do it). EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 297 ibr m'djt 1 immcrbar Mciben bangcn an bcm (scbcn unb $iiMcn d'ufferlidjeu rejl$, fonbcnt fortfabrcn unb bie mi|l ferncn, (n?c(d)e3 i]i bcr (Sbrijlen totft,) bag ibr nn# o aber ba^ nidjt ware, fo fagetd)eud)bod) / bag tc^ bingeb^/eud) btc (Sta'tte $u berciten. Unb ob id) fyingebe, mitt id) bod) n> i e b c r f o m m e n, u u b end) j u m i r u e fy* mcn r auf bag ibr fei)b, n>o id) biu;unbtt)o id) bin get) e, ba miffet ib^/ uub bett $Beg tt>ifl*^t i l)r and), (r troftet afbier fcine Kebeu 3nnger unb ^briften auf brei)er(ei) ^Betfe : ^ie erfre iff, bag jTe tvtffen foKen, bag bet) feinem SSater t)te( ^obnungen fi'tr (Te pnb ;Da^ feet er gegen anbere ^met)er(ct) 2 au3 cber 50cl)nungen ; aid fctttc er fagen : 8fttf (Jrben werbet t[)t utd)t i)ie( aufer, uod) gewtjje $Bobltuug b a ^ en * jJDenn ali)iw bat ber ^eufel fetn D^etd), fein aud unb Iffiobnuna,, ba er ^err t(l, uub 1 Musset ihr nicht, etc. " You must not always continue to cling to seeing and feeling outward consolation, but make progress and learn the art (and this is the Christians's art) of believing unhes- itatingly, that I have the ability and disposition to aid you, even when you can neither see it nor feel it, but see and feel just the con- trary, viz. are in suffering and distress. Still you always have the consolation, that you have God and myself, though everything else forsakes (renounces) you and flies from you." 2 Zweyerley. " This he represents in comparison with others in a two-fold manner," i. e . in saying this, he compares ttco kinds of houses or dwellings. The construction is harsh and not very clear. 298 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. fifcet in bent emen ; ] barum ttnrb er cud), tt>eif ifyr nriber ifyn unb fein D^eid) flreber, nid)t (ang atyier roofyneu imb fyaufen {affem 2lber fe*)b 2 beg unerfdjrocfen, (fprid)t GtyrifhtS,) e3 fott end) nid)t$ fd)aben ; fount il)t bier fetn au$ unb ung baben, unb end) ber eufel nut fcinen i)rannen ber Sfficlt jagt : fo fotft ifyr benncd) Otoumg geung l)abeu, ba tl)r bfetbeu fottt. 3 ^Gotten fi'e end) ntd)t (etben 4 ^t gent unb 9tad)barn, ober aucf) ^u aften, unb jTe bte attetn bel)a(ten : fo (ajjet pe bcbaften, unb vt)tffet, bag ifyr bennod) and) foKt SBot)mtitg> unb berer me I l)abeu, X;tg fott airier auf^ etnfa'lttgfte bte 2Bet)nung feijn, ebett mie er an etnem anbent Drt fprtd)t, 9ftattf). 13, 29 : ^ffier ba tterfa'gt ^ciufer, S3ritber ober @d)tt>efter, ober SSater, ober Gutter, ober 2Betb, ober ^tnb, ober Reefer, urn ctruiKen unb um be^ (Soangetii iDtttcu, ber tt>irb3 fdlttg empfal)eu in biefcr 3 e ^/ unb in ber gufunftigeu ba^ emige ?eben K V a(fo fei) and) l)ier bie Winnin man end) au eiuem 5>aufe t>erjagt, fo foUt it)r t)ie( .^a bafi'tr l)aben ; uimmt man end) einerfet), 5 fo fotTt il)r 1 Sitzetin dem Seine n. " He is in possession of his own," or what belongs to him. On this use of s i t z e n, see p. 63, last line and the note to it, and p. 64, lines 6 and 7. 2 Aber seyd dess unerschrocken, etc. " But be not afraid of that ; it shall do you no harm." Unerschrocken, here followed by the genitive, is now almost always followed by the preposition v o r. 3 Da ihr bleiben sollt, " to remain in," where you may remain. 4 Wollen sie euch nicht leiden, etc. " If they will not endure you as citizens and neighbors, or even as guests, but will have the world to themselves, let them have it, and be assured your- selves that you will still have a dwelling-place, and enough of them." 6 K i n e r 1 e y. See p. 77, Note 2. E m p f a h e n obsolete for e m p f a n g e n. "If they should not act so wickedly, and should not take so much away from you, still you shall have a hundred-fold and more [for what you shall have lost]." EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 299 fdftig wiebcr bagcgcn cmpfaljcn ; nnb fottentf fo bofe mcfyt madieu unb end) fo me( nid)t nefymcn, tbr fotfetg bunbcrt* mat fo gut tint) met beffer baben. abt tl)r3 bier ntdjt, fo frt'gt tbr6 genngfid) bort rcid)(td), 3>nn er fyat nod) fo groffen 2>orratb, bag cr cucr jeglidjem 1 faint geben bunbert SBobnungen fitr etne. arum mtr gefroft 2 unb frifd) babitt gefefct, n?a^ end) bte 5Be(t nefymen fann : bte be3 ?eben^ ftnb ie( setter, bcmt bte ^Bobnitn Db fie end) nun l)icr in Border unb cfangnig jlerfen, cber and) an^jagen, bad fagt end) nidit fiimmern, e^ ftnb ba'nfer, bte ber ^Bc(t ggel)6rcn ; il)r aber febet anf etn anber^/ n>o^ ranf tbr $n warteu ^abt, nub \va$ tl)t bort frtgen nub be^ fii:>cn foHet* 5t(fo ift btefer ert git Stroft cjerebt ben (Sfyrtften, bag fte ftd) nid)t trren (affen, ob ibneu bte $Be(t al(e ^)(age anfegt, unb nid)t alfein biefer 5Bot)nnng beraubt, fenberu al(e^ nimmt, n>a^ fie afbter baben, ut, @I)re, ?eben, nnb ix>trft fie in^ (^(enb, Slrmutb, 33Ioflfe, @d)anbe, d)mad) nnb ^ob ; fonberu bag fT e baa,ea,en fatten, 3 rr>a^ fie gegeu btefen gertu^ gen SSerrnft geminnen, mo fte jet einer 5Got)unng beranbet werben, bag (Te bafi'tr trie! beffere ^Bobnungen frtgeu foKeu, an bent Drt, ba^ ba beigt: 3n meine^ 1 Euer jegliche ra, tl to each one of you." 2 Darum nur getrost, etc. The preterite participle is often employed for the imperative. See Gram. p. 262 infra. " There- fore be firm and resign yourself (d a h i n g e s e t z t, bring your mind to it) cheerfully in respect to what the world can take from you. The mansions of life (heaven) are much more spacious than those of death (this world). Whether, now, they thrust you into dungeons and imprisonment, or banish you, let that not trouble you ; they are houses [those from which you are driven] which belong to the world. Look to something widely different, which you are to expect, and which, in another world (dor t), you shall acquire and retain." 3 Dagegen h alien, " that they compare with this (hold side by side with this) that which they obtain in return for this small loss if they are now robbed of a dwelling." See p. 152, Note 1. 300 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. SIBo ber ift 1 unb bteibet, ba mcrbe id) itnb ibr and) bteiben, (roie er bernad) fagen toirb,) bag ibr mrfjt tt>e(t(id)e itnb menfd)(id)e, fonbern l)immlifd), gottlidje $8obnungen unb ftdufer baben fottet ; bag ift, fitr cine unfldttge, er* gdngticfye, unjuijcre unb imitate ^Bobmtng, (bie il)r itnb atfe $Mt obne ba 2 ba(b (aflen mitffet,) cttet fd)ene, fyerr* Itd)e, toette, emtge, fi'd)cre unb gcvtnfle SOBobuungcu, bte end) ntd)t fonnen genommeu werben, unb ttor jcbermann frteb^ ltd) bebatten roerbet ^Der anbere ^rojl ijt, bag er tteite,r fprid)t : $30 ba^ ntd)t ware, 3 fo fage id) end) bcd) r bag id) bingefce, end) bie Statte ^u bereiten 2C. (Summa, ^Bobnungen foEt ibr gevDtgtid) l)aben ; unb ob ibrer nod) ntd)t genug maren, fo mitt id) il)rer genug fd)afen, bag, ob e3 ^u tt>enig mare, bag ibr bun* bert fitr eine frigt, reodte id) ibr bunbert taufenb unb nod) met)r fd)ajfen, bag ba fein 5D?anget nod) @ebrcd)en foil fei)it unb alter(ei) lOBofynungen, n>ie e^ euer ^er$ begefyren --fj 5ttfo rebet er mit ibnen aufg atlereinfdtttgfte unb c fam finblid), nad) ibren ebancfcn, (ttne man mug Or tige reu)en nnb locfen,) bamit er fte Don bemfelbigen t)inauf ^iebe, bag jTe fonnen einen ?Kutb unb roft fcf)opfen* 5(ber ba^ mare bie $unjl:, 4 n>er fo(d)e^ and) fonnte g(du* ben* XJenn eg iji ja mabr, bag etn jegttd)er (5t)ri(l, ber bag 1 W o d e r i s t, etc. " Where he (m e i n V a t e r) dwells, there will we (I, i. e. Christ and you, i. e. my disciples) dwell." 1st u 11 d b 1 e i b t, is and remains conveys an idea which is best ex- pressed in English, by continue to be. 2 Ohne das, aside from this. 3 Wo das nicht ware, "If that were not so (if there were no mansions ready) still I would say that 1 go to prepare places for you." So many of the old interpreters understood this passage. The English version is undoubtedly more correct. 4 Aber das ware Kunst, etc. "But that would be an attainment, if one Cor, whoever) could believe all this." See p. 292, Note 1, and p. 14, Note 5. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 301 $Bort bcfennen mill, cntwcbcr mit prebujen, ober, fcnft ttor ($5crid)t, bcr ftebet febr iibcf aiif Crrben, atfe Stnnbcn un* jTdjer unb in efaljr, bag man ilnt won lit, 2Beib nnb $inb jacje, ba bie anbcrn attctf wcttauf 1 babcn, im Saitfe unb gntem emad) (eben. 2(bcr, roenn tt>ir and) anfeben, UKiS un$ i>orbeba(tcn ift, nnb tt>oit rcir fcmmcn fotten, fett^ ten mtr ja frol)(id) barjn fci)n r nnb nn3 tcfmcbr jammcrn 2 Taffen bcr armcn, clenben $Bc(t Dcnn ma$ i(l^, ob pe nn^ mit ^nflffn trtt, nnb anf^ fyobejte nn^ pfaget nnb ^etb tfynt, tt)tr fonnen bed) ntcf)t^ tterlteren* SSerlieren it>tr aber, fo tterfiercn wir ben @arf, fo ttnr am a(fe tragcn, ba^ ijl ntcf)t mebr, benn bte it(fen ter(eren ; 3 inbcg bfcibt nn g[etrf)tt?ol ber (Scf)afe, bag ttnr beijbe, btefe^, fo tt)tr bier fafV fen, reid)(td) tt)ieber friegen, nnb ba^n Diet mel)r enncjer, gott(td)er itter. 3nm britten fpricfyt er : )b id) je$t Don end) gebe r (end) bie ^Bofynnna, ^n bereiten,) follt ibr nid)t erfd)recfen nod) tranren, bag ibr mid) nid)t f)abt ; fonbern fottt ben ^roft and) fyaben, t>ag id) end) nid)t tt)itt (aflen, fonbern tt?ieber $u end) fommen, nnb end) $n mir f)o(en jc v bag ibr meinetf ober 2(bfd)ieb^ nid)t fottt (5d)aben i)aben ; fonbern t, bag e^ end) $n gnte gefd)ebe, bag id) end) bie nnngen bei)m 3Sater bereite nnb bejlette, nnb bar$n and) ber jn end) fomnten, nnb fetbjl end) mit mir batyin bringen tt)itt, bag ibr bie SBofytuutgett einnel)met, nnb atfo bet) mir 1 Alles vollauf " all, in abundance." 2 Uns vielmehr jammer n, " and rather bewail the [con- dition of] the poor, miserable world." Literally, " cause ourselves to be distressed." Jammern in the first person may take b e r after it. In the second and third persons, it takes the accusative of the person. 3 Denn die Hillsen verloren, " than losing the husk." See p. 240, Note 3. 4 Dass ihr meines Ganges, etc. " that ye may not loose by my going or departure (have the loss of my going, etc.)." 26 302 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. Heibet, tt>o id) bin : affo, bag ibr bet)beg genn'g babt, tie SOBofynnngen im ummef nnb mid) in (5tt>igfett bet) end). ag jfttb bie bret) tiicfe, tie nng troften fotfen nnber enfef itnb SSMt, nb atfeg, n>ag nng 23ofeg mag nnber* fabren, bag mir einen fofdjen errn intb trenen $ettanb fyaben, ber bafyin gefabren itf, nnb im^ fdjon 9Bo^niwtg be^ rettet, nnb g(etrf)wo( be^ un^ fc^n itnb bieiben wiff, ^ t|T: aber nod) fcbr tjerborgen, nnb fdjctnet nid)t ; benn n>tr feben itnb fitt)Ien, bag bennod) bie SKMt nnb ^t>rannen i'tben ibren nnb greuel immerfort nnber ba^ (Jttangelutm nnb bie Stber barnm beiflfet er un$, an ibn t qlaben. 3((^ fottte er fagen : $Benn il)r nnr fonntet bie Heine ebnfb l)aben r nnb an meinent 5Bort bangen, jTe bod) nid)t t)inan^ jTngen, ob jTe jefet atte nod) Die! bofer ren ; benn e3 ifl fd)on befd)Ioffen, nnb bag urtbeit ijl ^u flarcf gegangen, (Te wirb bag @titnb(ein trejfen, bag fte fdjrecfen nnb ifynen fo bange nnb angjl mad)en mirb, bag (Te nirgenb merben ^n bfeiben tyafon. 5i(Iein iftg barnm ^n t^nn, bag ifyr bie 5tngen red)t anftbnt, nnb nid)t anfebet, n>ie eg ttor benfetbcn gebet nnb ftebet, fonbern, n>ag id) rebe itnb fage, bag id) end) ntd)t will (aflcn, nod) Don end) bfeiben, fonbern $n end) fommen nnb end) $n mir ne^men, a(fo, bag ic^ bet) end), nnb il)r bei) mir bkibet *c. 3nm t)ierten befd)(engt 2 er : (5g foil nid)t genng fei>n, bag if)r wifiet, bag id) bingefye, end) bie SOBoftnuncj $n berciten, nnb wieber ^n end) Fommen nnb bet) end) bleiben will, bag ifyr fet)b, n>o id) bin 2C V fonbern baritber bbt it)r and) ben 1 Sie werdens, etc. " they could (would) not carry it out (sing their song out), even if they were much worse than they now are ; for it is already decreed, and the decree too firmly made [for that]. The evil time will come upon them, which will terrify them and make them fearful and anxious, so that they will have no quiet abode (will nowhere have a place to stay in). This alone is to he attended to," etc. On Darum zu thun, see p. 20, Note 3. med. 2 Beschleusst, forbeschliesst. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 303 SBortbeif, bag ibr bercits* wifiet, roo id) bingefye, nnb roiffet and) ben $Bcg, a3 ifl nun ber 5Bea, fcined bctfigen ?cibcne>, baton er ibnen berets wel nnb oft gefagt batte, fonberfid) an bemfek bigen [etetcn 9lbenb ; unm>o( pe etf bod) tu'rfjt fcerftebett fonnten, nnb ifynen big 5Gort nod) bnnebett faffen mit ebancfen ; tfyr wtjjetd nnb fel)etd fefron atte^ Senn n?enn ibr mid) babt, (o babt ibr ott nnb atte^, nnb twcnn ibr mid) febet bingeben, fo febet it)r fd)on ben ifiBeg* 3d) roitt eud) feincn anbern $8ea, tt>eifen, nod) anbere ?OBeife fcorfd)[aa,ett, e^ ifl fd)on atte^ ba f attein, bag ener erfe nr jnfrieben fet), nnb fid) nid)t bafitr entfefee, ob end) bic $Mt fd)rcc!ct iinb bcfitmmert, bag tl)r in mir greube unb griebe l)abet K* 5, 6. (Spridjt ^u ibm Xt)ot^/ fcer ^ ^eigt 3n)iHing: err r wir tt)i(Ten nid)t, wo bn fyin* gel)ejt, unb wie fonnen tt)tr ben SOBeg tt>i(fen? 3efn^fprid)t ju tf)m:3d)bittber$Bea,, unb tie 5Bal)rt)eit, itnb ba^ eben* (5ie batten gel)6ret, 3 bie lieben 39^^ ba$ er woffte fytn* 1 Dass sie ihn, etc. " so that they soon ask him about it." But this is what was meant (so much as this was said) : ' Why should 1 use many words ? 1 wish not to make you flutter and fly all about with your speculations.' 2 Es ist schon alles da, etc. " Everything is contained in this (i. e. nothing else is necessary). Only let your heart be quiet (only that your heart may be quiet) and not be alarmed, though the world terrify and trouble you. Have (or seek) joy and peace in me." 3 Sie hatten gehoret, etc. " The beloved disciples had heard that he would go away and prepare dwellings for them ; and not only so (that), but that they themselves already knew the way, where he would go and stay, and [that] they also should follow him thither, that he could not [now] say much to them, and [that] they ought 304 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. geben, unb tbnen bie ^Bobnungen befMen ; imb ntd)t attetn ba, fonbern bag pe and) fefyon fetbft ben $3eg wiigten, roo er btngefyen unb Heibcn trwrbe, unb (Te tl)m ami) babtn fcf* gen fotften, bag er niofyt Diet prebtgen bitrftc, unb fie pcfy befto roemger befihnmern unb erfcfyrerfen fotften, bag er jet Don il)nen fcfyeiben initgte, arauf fafyet 1 @t boma3 an $u nmnbern, unb tft tl)in efrentl,euerttrf) gerebt, bag er fagt : fte wtjfcn, it>o er fyinrootte, unb nnffen bagu ben 5Beg, fo er il)uen bod) ntcfytd bat>on gefagt l)abe r tx>ot)in ober not (ought so much the less) to be troubled and alarmed at his leav- ing them now (that he must now part with them)." D i e 1 i e b e n J U n g e r, in apposition with s i e, is a forcible mode of expression. All the principal clauses, after the word g e h 6 r e t, are dependent on that word, as is indicated in the translation, whether the word d a s s is inserted or omitted. B estellen is a difficult word to explain, particularly if all its significations are to be referred to one radical signification. The objects to which it relates, however, give it this diversity of meanings. The word itself in its common, i. e. figurative sense, means, to put in its place. 1. To direct a person to his proper place (einen wohin bestellen). 2. To commis- sion a person with a certain business, or impose some duty on him (einen zu etwas bestellen). 3. To order (also, engage), direct (also, deliver) or prepare something (etwas bestellen). Consider therefore whether the object is a person (einen) or a thing (etwas), and then, whether there be also an indirect object, and whether that relates to a place (w o h i n) or to a thing or duty (z u etw as). The literal meaning of the word, to cover a place over, is obsolete. The third signification is very broad, and admits of a variety of modifications. Compare the miscellaneous examples in the larger lexicons. 1 Darauf fahet (fangt), etc. " Thereupon Thomas be- gins to wonder ; to him the remark appears strange (to him it is spoken strangely) when Christ says (that he says), ' they know whether he intends to go (h i n w o 1 1 e) and they know the way thither,' though (s o - d o c h) he has said nothing about (it) whither or what way (W e ge s, genitive of manner) he will go from them. Therefore he begins, in a gross, carnal manner (W e i s e, genitive), to inquire in his mind (d e n c k e n) after the road," etc. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 305 er on ibncn gcbcn wofftc, fdbet affo an $u bencfen, gvober, fletfd)lid)cr 3Bcife, nad) ber Straffe, barauf man leibftd) gebet obcr fabret son ciner (Btabt $ur anbent, unb nad) bcm $3cgc, baranf bie giifie treten. XJeflfelben, 1 fpre* d)cn |7e, nnffen nnr fcineg, mo obcr $u roehfyem fyor unb wo binaitg bit unlljh 5Cte fotttcn nnr benn 5Bcg miffen ? 5Uif btcfe grobc, flcifdi(td)e ^cbancfen antwortct nun @f)rt* (tu^ : 3d) met>nc eg alfo, 2 bag it)r ben 2Bea, miffct f bag ijt, it)r fennct ja ben, vx>e(d)cr bcr $Bccj ift, nemlid) mid) ; benn tfyr fel)et nub wiffet, bag id) bin @brifht3, ener err im ^ ^cttanb, nnb it)r metne Siutgcr, bie ihv 3 fo (ancje meine ^)re# bigt ,qet)ort unb meine $Bunbertt>erer biefe el)re ttnb ^unfi ift, and) ten red)ten (d)ii(ern @brifH, ba bewetfet tt>obl albier @t. bonta nnb bafb fyernad) @t. ^btttippn^, (rote rotr fyoren tt>erben,) roefdje ttor ben anbern atterroegen fyeran^fabren mtt tbrem Un&erffanbe, nnb lajfen ftd) tnercfen, bag fiie'norf) fetner ;){ebe roentg ober nicf)t^ Derjlel)en : fo fie bed) ben ^errn (Sfynfhtm fo lange geboret, nnb and) jet itber Xifrf)e boren, rote er ifynen faget on fetned SSater^ ^anfe, ba er rootte btngcl)en, nnb ibnen bie 2Bal)mui t q bereiten zc v (aflcn it)n ba btnter bent Xtfd)e fiipen, nnb fokfycg crprebigen ^u tbrem roft, fo flabbern jTe bten?ci( anberd roobin ntit e^ bancfen nnb ntacfyen tbnen etnen anbern 5Beg, nnb fd)etben <5l)rtftnm n?ett tton tbnen, Darnm riicfet er pe ^ernm, 2 bod) mtt feinen, frennbftofyen 1 Aber, wie gross, etc. " But how great and difficult this doctrine (and knowledge) is, even to the true disciples of Christ, (that) is shown by Thomas here (shows Thomas here) and soon after (as we shall hear) Philip, who always dash on before the rest with their foolishness, and show (and cause themselves to give indications, or to be observed) that, as yet, they understand little or nothing of his dis- course. Though they have so long heard Christ their Lord, and even now hear at table, as he speaks to them of his Father's house, to which he will go and prepare mansions for them, [still] they leave him sitting there by the table and giving them beforehand such in- struction for their [future] consolation, and meanwhile they fly off with their own thoughts, and strike out another track for themselves and separate themselves widely from Christ (Christ widely from themselves)." A llerwegen, everywhere^ is here used in the ob- solete sense of always, which word is of the same etymology. Hinter dem Tische sitzen is a form of expression which admirably intimates the disrespect which is here censured. The lat- ter part of this paragraph is highly idiomatic, and is easier felt than explained. An attempt is made to give the force of it in the transla- tion. 2 Darum racket er sie herum, etc. " Therefore he censures them (pulls or jerks them around), though with delicate and EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 307 Shorten, ate ein giitigcr &crr unb 9Jtetfter, fo bcr Scinen Unnn'iJenbeit unb ad)l)cit roobl faun fcerfeben unb gu gut tyalten, unb mill pc fdjledu a Hem an fid) fyejften MH& binben mit 9mgen, Cbrcn nnb &ercn, bag |Te nid)t rceiter fel)en nod) bcncfcn folleiu 211$ (elite er biermit fagen : bonta, boma, roo gaffe jl obcr bcncfeft bit bin ? 2Hfo mug man nid)t fpcculiren nnb flabbcrn ; tjterfyer anf mid) miiffet if)r fcbcn. 3br fennet unb wiffet ja mid) ; fo if)r nnn mid) fen net nnb fcljet, fo fennet nnb fcl)et ibr ben ? IBeg r nnb bto fet nid)t setter fnd)en nod) forgen. ^enn ibr mitflet 1 mid) nid)t alfo anfeben, wie bie $nt) ein neu ^bor anftebet, ober nne mid) bie unglcinbigen 3imger anfeben, n>ie id) Slngen, SOtoul nnb Dtafen babe, al^ ener einer ; fonbern miigt bie 2lngen lantern, bie )bren fegen, unb anbcr^ feben, b^ren, benrfen nnb Dcrflcljcn, benn nad) fleifd)lid)em (5inn unb Serjlanb. (Biebe, anf fold)e 3Beife will er l)ier fid) angefeben bciben, nid)t alfo, nne bie 3Ingen feben, bag er leiblid) mit ben gitf* fen k)or ibnen gel)e an einen anbern Drt, eine^ $Beg^, ben (Te nid)t wiffen, tt>o er binfabrt ober bleibt, unb pe alfo bi^ ter ibm laffe, bag (Te pd) fein nid)t^ mebr trbflen 2 fonnen ; gentle words, as a kind lord and master, who can overlook and leni- ently construe the ignorance and weakness of his dependents, and will fasten and bind them directly to himself alone, with their eyes, ears and hearts, that they should neither look nor think farther ; as if he would thereby say, ' Thomas, Thomas, whither are you gaping and wandering with your thoughts ! One must not speculate and fly about so. You must look hither at me.'" Rdcken is used here in the obsolete sense, equivalent to z i e h e n, or r e i s s e n. 1 D e n n i h r m (I s s e t, etc. " For you must not stare at me as a cow does at a new gate, or as my unbelieving followers do, to see what sort of eyes, mouth and nose I have, as one of you; but you must purge your eyes and clear out your ears, and see, hear, think and understand otherwise than after carnal sense and under- standing." 2 Sich sein-trosten, "console themselves in respect to him." S e i n genitive for seiner. See p. 2e(fe in aKen 9t6tben. >arnm fpricfyt er : $Ber mid) a(fo anjTebet, n>ie id) $nm SSater gel)e r ber f)at alfo t)ie( gefel)en, bag id) ben ob leibe nad) meine^ SSater^ ^Bitten, nnb bar? itad) ett)i,qlid) lebe nnb regiere, nnb alfo gel)e id) end) fcor nnb bred)e bie S3abn, bag ibr and) fettet nad)fo(gen a$ t^ne id) nnb fein anbrer, nnb mng e^ tl)nn, [on ft witrbet i()r nimmermebr ba^n Fcmmen* X)arnm, fo il)r fofd)e^ ttnffet, 1 fo wtflet il)r bei>be^, wo id) fyin will, nnb vtnflfet and) ben $Beg r bag id) bal)in fcmme, nnb il)r mir fofgen mitfiet, nem? lid), bag id)3 felbft bin, nnb ibr atfeg in mir l)abt, tt>a$ i^r bebitrfet, af^ ber fitr end) jlirbt, ben SSater tterfobnet, bie i'tnbc tilget, ben ob ijerfdjlinget, nnb atfo atte^ $n mir jiebe, bag ibr in mir aKe$ l)abt X)ieg beigt nun (5t)riftum mel anber^ anfefyen, benn if)n atte $Be(t aniTefyet, unb bie 3nnger fetbjl: $nt>or if)n anfaben, ^enn jefet (Tnb bie 5Ingen getantert burd) ben fauben, nnb ift gar eiije neue (^rfenntntg* @(eid) a(^ wenn 2 id) cine^ I Darum, so ihr solches wisset, etc. "Therefore if you know this, you know both where I intend going, and you know also the way (that 1 may go there and you must follow me), viz. that it is 1 myself, and you have everything you need, in me, as [in one] who dies, reconciles the Father, blots out sin, swallows death for you, and thus attract everything to myself, that in me ye may have everything." There is great freedom here in the use of paren- thetical observations. 2 Gleich als wenn, etc. " Just as if I should see a king's son captured and in wretchedness, in a gray coat or in pilgrim's cos- tume (form) [and should regard him] as a poor man, and not otherwise than as (for) a poor beggar, as my eyes direct me ; but if I hear that he is a king's son, then the gray coat, the staff and every such beg- garly appearance disappear so that I bow the knee before him and II u- i / * call him gracious lord, etc. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 309 @obn gcfangen nnb im @fenb febc, in cittern granen Dtocfc ebcr -pUqnnte* CMcjfaft, ate cincn armen SKann, unb niditd anber, bcnn fiir cincn 23ett(er, nrie mid) bte 9htgen HHMfen : ivcnn id) abcr here, ba|? cr cinetf $6nige$ (Sof)n ill:, fo fa'ttet fobalb ber grane 0?orf unb bet tab nnb atfe fbCcfce SBctrtcrgcjfaft au$ ben Stngen, bag id) bte $nie gegen tbm bcuge, nnb tl)n gncibi t qcn Syvm beiflfc, ob g(etrf) nod) fcinc gitlbcne ^ronc, ncd) 9}cajcjlat an tbm gefeben rotrb, Stffo, ba @t. ^bcma^ nnb bte Stnbcrn ^bnftnm feben l)in^ ter bcm $tifd)c (Tlscnb, ate nut fletfd)(td)en Slugcn, feben ffe nod) nid)t x wa^ er fiir etn SKann t(l !2J6er bernarf) frtgen ffc etn anber cjTdjt, nem(td), bag er fei) ber 5Beg, nnb bnrd) fctnen ob gum SSater t qcbc, nnb (babnrd), bag ffe an i^n ajanbcn,) fte and) babtn bnrd) tl)n gebrad)t n?erben ^arnm, n>cnn ba3 (Stitnbletn fommt,ba nnfer Xtym nnb 5Bercf anfboren mng r nnb tt>ir ntd)t (anger albte gn Heibett baben, nnb btefe ^tfpntatton 1 angebet : $Bo nebme id) nun cine 23rnenn man babin fommt, (fagc id),) fo fiebe bid) nnr nad) fetnem 3Beg nm, fo ba b^iffcu menfd)(td)e 5Bege nnb nnfcr etgen @nt, b^ifig ?eben ober 5Berrf ; fonbern lag fo(d)e^ 2 atte^ gngebecft fei)tt mit bent SSater Unfer, nnb britber gefprod)en : SSergib nn^ nnfre (Sd)n[b 2C V nnb bafte bid) attein gn biefem, ber ba fagt : 2$) bin ber 5Beg 20. Unb ftebe, bag bn big 5Bort atebenn bir nnb ticf eingebifbet babejl, nnb a(fo, ate tywteft bu gegcnwartig bir fagen, wte er bier $n ^tboma fagt : fndjefl: nnb gajfeft bn nad) anbern egen ? ^ieb^r, anf mid), mngt bn fel)en nnb bfeiben, nnb bir feinen anbern 1 Disputation, soliloquy. Wenn man dahin kommt, " when one comes to that," or when that time arrives. 2 Sondern lass solches, etc. "let all that be overspread with the Lord's Prayer, and over it (all your good works) let the words be spoken, * Forgive us our sins,' and cleave alone to this one, who says," etc. 310 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ebancfen (ajfen madjen, tt>ie bit tnogefi gen immef fom* men ; fonbern atte rein 1 ab nnb roeit ang bem cren ge# fet, nnb nid)t anber3 gebad)t, benn, roie id) bir fage : 3rf) bin ber $Beg, (giefye nnr, bag bit anf mid) treteji:, ba tjl, fyafte bid) mit Decent GHanben unb alter Butterfidjt beg >erf3en3 an mirf) ; id) tt>il( bie SSritcfe fewt nnb bid) itbertra* gen, bag bit fottt in einem ^ngenblicf an^ bem >tcbe nnb ber JpoHenangfl in jene^ ?eben fommcn* S)enn id) bin^, 2 ber ben 2Beg ober S5al)it felbft gepeflaftert, nnb fclbptgcgan^ gen nnb itbergefafyren bin, anf bag id) bid) nnb atte, fo an mir t)angen r btnitber bringe ; attein, bag bit bid) nnge^ei^ felt anf mid) fe^efl, frifd) auf mid) tvagefl, nnb getrojl nnb frob(id) bal)in fabrefl nnb fterbeft in meinem ^amen* @o witt er fyientit f^tne 3nger nnb @l)riften ba^n (len nnb bereiten, bag fiie immerbar geroarten be^ ^n jenem ?ebem 5(ifo fodte er fagen : &$ mirb nnn i)ief anber3 mit end) tverben, n>cit id) tton end) fd)eibe ^)er ob wirb 4 end) tcig(id) nnter Singen jloflfen, nnb werbet ade 1 Sondern alles rein, etc. " but [let] everything [be] put entirely away (rein ab) and far from your heart, and nothing else [be] thought than," etc. The participle for the imperative. See p. 297, Note 1. 2 Denn ich bins, " For it is I who have myself paved the way or path, and have myself gone and passed over it, in order that I may convey across thee and all who cleave to me. Only [be sure] that you surrender yourself unhesitatingly to me, that you cheerfully venture upon me, and that you go confidently and joyfully and die in my name." 3 Dass sie immerdar gewarten des Ganges, etc. " that they may be ever awaiting their passage to that other life." Gewarten like war ten, governs the genitive. See p. 224, Note 7. 4 Der Tod wird, etc. " Death will daily stare you in the face (rush upon your view) and you will needs expect every hour that men will torment you, murder you and hunt you from the world, so that you must go the way that 1 go out of this life. Therefore see to it, that you know then where first to set your foot, and find EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 311 tnnben wartcn mitflcn, bag man end) rcirb martern, gen nnb ang ber $Mt jagen, bag ibr and) mitffet ben geben, ben id) jefct gebe ang biefem ?ebem arnm febet $n, bag il)r afgbenn rcifiet, roobin il)r ben gng $nm erflen feen foUet, nnb ben 2Beg treffet, ber end) tragen fann, bag i(l, bag ibr ttefte an mtr banket, bag tbr ntd)t a(fo gappctt nnb $a n)te bte, fo tton mir ntd)td miffen unb tfyren D^etm fit^ren : 3d) fefce, nnb tt)etg nid)t, tt)ie (ana,. 3d) fterfce, nnb wetg m'djt, n?ann. 3d) fal)r, nnb n>etg ntd)t r n)ol)in. wunbert, bag id) frofyltd) bin. @o fottten bie fagen, bie biefe ?efyre nidjt motten {)oren, tied) ben 5Geg annet)men, nnb it)r ?eben(ana, ergeb(td) an*- bere 5Bege fndjcn. X)enn alfo fle^et 1 nnb mng be^ fd)en er, (fo e3 obne ^brifto if!,) bag e3 immerbar get nnb pampeft in fordjem ewigen S^eifel, (Sd)recfen nnb 3agen, wenn eg beg ebe gebencft, bag eg nid)t tt>eig, tt)o ang r rootfte gerne bem ^obe nnb ber gotten entflie^en, nnb weig bod) nid)t, wie, wie jTe felbjt mit biefem D^eim befennen. 5lber ein Shrift, a(g ber btefen 5Geg fennet, nnb fd)on an* gefangen ^at, baranf ^n gefyen, fott bag SSIat nmmenben 2 nnb frol)Iid) a(fo fagen : the way that can support you, i. e. that you cleave fast to me, and that you therefore do not struggle and shrink back with fear (z a- ge t), as those who know nothing of me, and say in their song," etc. 1 Denn also stehet, etc. " For so it is (stands) and must be with the heart (so is and must be the heart) of man, if it is with- out Christ, that it ever hangs and swings (dangles) in such doubt, terror and fear, when it thinks of death, that it knows no way out; it would gladly escape death and hell, and yet knows not how, as they themselves acknowledge in this stanza." P a m p e 1 n is pro- vincial for b a m m e 1 n, or rather for b a u m e 1 n which is a bet- ter word. Wo aus [zu kommen]. 2 Das Blatt umwenden. See p. 135, Note 2. Compare p. 124, Note 6. 312 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 3d) febe, unb tt>eig, n>ie fang, 3d) fterbe, unb roeig wobf, rote unb nxinn* (nem(id) atfe age unb (Stmtben ttor ber SOBelt.) 3d) fabr, unb roeig, ott ?ob ! tt>of)in, 20?id) nwnbert, bag id) traurig bin* enn ein (Ifyrijl: foil ja 1 fciner arfjen getoig fetm, unb tt>etl er @bnftum bat, fo bat er$ atteS, bag er bittig foft afte tunben in (Bprungen ge^en ; abcr foldje^ atteS nad) bem eijl: unb @Hauben in dbriftc, bamit er angefangcn t)at, auf biefem 5Gege $u ^eben* 2)enn uad) bcm g(eifd) unb Ieib(id)en giibfen ijl: e3 nod) ^u t qebedt unb gar uerborgem X)enn, wie gefagt, menfd)Iid)e SScrnunft unb (Sinne fonnen nid)t^ roeniger i>erfteben nod) bcgreiflFen, bcnn bag big fottte ein $Beg feijn, ba iTe nid)t^ ffebet ncd) fitbtet, baran (Te jTd) fyaften fenne, fonbcru fd)fed)t itber unb auffcr it)r gubten unb SSerfleben (Td) fo bfog babin begcben unb wagcn, a(^ in etne grojfe 5Bi(bnig ober n>eite^ Wleev, ba jTe feinen S(ufcn^ tfyalt bei) (Td) felbjl finbet, arum mug bier ber (aube fet)u, ber ba^ 5Bort ergreijfe unb (Td) baran fyalten fonne, itnb gctrojl: auf benn 5Wann babin fabre, obg(eid) ber a(te 5(bam baritber ^u fd)eitern 1 Denn ein Christ soil ja, etc. " For a Christian should be sure of his case, and, since he possesses Christ he possesses every- thing, so that he should, by good rights (b i 1 1 i g) go leaping [with joy] every hour. But all this [should be done] according to the spirit and the faith in Christ with which he began to walk in this way. For according to the flesh and natural feeling it is still covered and quite concealed. For, as I said, human reason and sense can understand anything sooner (nothing less) than that this should be a way where it can neither see nor feel anything to which it can cleave, but [must] yield itself up and venture above and beyond feeling and knowledge, as if into a great desert or wide ocean, where it finds no dwelling-place (by itself). Therefore there must be a faith which will seize the promise (word) and be able to hold on to it, and confi- dently commit all (go away) to Christ (the man), though the old Adam meanwhile goes to wreck." EXPOSITON OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 313 and) ibr, Oitt (Sbriflnd bier faa.cn,) tt>cnn if/r mid) bnrd) ben GManben crgriffen babr, fo fc*)b iljr auf bem red)* ten $Se(je, ber end) gcttng ift nnb nid)t tterfiibret 51ber fel)et atlein 511, bag ibr baranf Mcibct nnb fortfafyret ; bemt ed roirb end) gar manrf)cr(ct) 2diftog nnb ^inbernig begca,* nen, bcpbe, $nr red)tcn nnb lincfen (scite* arnm mitgt tfyr gernjl fcpn, 1 bag ibr fccft an mir ^altet, nnb end) md)t3 taffct anfed)ten, wa^ end) a,ranfamed ober fd)rcc!(id)e^ k)or 3(it(]en fommt, fo-end) t>cn mir n>itt abfd)rccfen ober mit fd)onem vSd)ein ^nr Seite andreiijcn nnb (crfen witt, nnb ttJtffen, bag fehfyeS atted eitct ?i'tgen nnb S3etrnette 5^eer, and bent ind emige ?eben, and ber $Mt nnb Jienfeld $Keid) 3Sater bringen* ^arttm tt)iK id) nid)t attein fetbfl ber fcnbern anch bie 5Bal)rl)ett nnb bad ?eben fei)n nnb beiffen* (Stefye, alfo ijerjle^e id) biefcn (Sprnd) anfd einfa(tigf!e, bag ed immer bfeibe anf einerlet) ?07ey)nnng fcon bem einigen ^brij^o, bag er fydffe ber 5Beg, 2 nm bed 5(nfana,d ftillen ; bie 5Babrbcit, t?on tvegen bed s Dittte!d nnb gortfabrend, nnb and) bad ?eben, ben wegen bed (5nbed. enn er mng bcc^ affed feijn, ber SJnfaitg, 507ittet nnb @nbc nnferer (SeHgfeit : bag man tfyu gum erften tetn fege nnb bie anbern nnb 'Darummdsst ihr gerUst[et] seyn, etc. "Therefore you must be armed, that you may cleave fast to me, and let nothing that appears (vor Augen kommt) cruel or fearful, which would frighten you away from me, or [which] would draw you aside and allure you with an attractive appearance, tempt you, and be assured that all this is nothing but Satan's lies and deception, by which he would lead you (leads you) to destruction." 2 Dass er heisse der Weg, etc. " that he is called the way, on account of the beginning; the truth, because of the middle and progress; and the life, because of the end. For he must be every- thing, the beginning, middle and end of our salvation, so that one must make him the foundation stone, lay the others, the intermediate ones upon it, and then crown it with the vaulted summit or roof." 27 . '" 314 SELECTIONS FROM LTJTHEK. mittlern barauf fee, unb and) ba3 en>of6e ober ad) bar* auf fd)lieffe. ($r ifl, beijbe, bie erfle, mittet unb (ei^te @tufe an ber better gen $imme(, 1. 9#of. 28, 12. enn burd) il)it mufifcn tt>tr anfaben, fortfafyren unb fyinburd) jum eben fommen. 9Hemanb fommt $um SSater, benn burd) mid), >a nimmt er bie bre^ titcfe auf emeu anfen, nnb fap afte3 in Sm^, bentet nut imtterblitmten, ffaren Morten, er meijne, imb tt)cgtt er (Td) alfo genennet !)a6e : ben 2Bea,, S[8ahrt)eit unb ?eben, nem(td) affo unb bajn, 1 bag man $iim 25ater fomme. (Summa, (W)i(( er fagcn,) id) aKein aUetf ; felt jemanb ^um SSater fommen, fo mug attein burd) mid) 9efd)et)en r Slnfancj, ?D?ittel nnb HBa^ ill after $ um 35ater femmen ? 9td) benn, wie nun oft gefagt, au^ bem !^obe in3 ?e6en, au^ ber (gitnbe unb 35erbammnig ^ur llnfd)utb unb gromnrigfetf, au^ bem S^wmer unb ^edpeteib ^ur en>igen grenbe unb it fommen, @e(d)e^ (facjt er,) 2 nel)me ft in niemanb , anf anbere ^Betfe ba^n 511 fommen, benn buvd) mid) id) bin affein ber 3[Bec;, bie $3at)rl)eit unb ba^ fyetgt ja f(ar unb beut(id) genng gerebt, rein fd)Io(fen unb gewaltigtid) niebergelegt atfe ?et)re fcom bienfl ber 5Gercfc unb eigener cred)tigfeit, unb fd)rcd)t fccr* uetnt unb Derfagt a((en anbern ^roft unb SScrtrawen, ba^ burd) man ttcrme^net, gen joimmct ^u fommen. ^enn e^ l)eigt fur : 9tiemanb, niemanb fommt $um 35ater, benn burd) mid) ; ei5 ifl fein anber d)iif nod) Ueberfahrt. 1 Nemlich also und dazu, " namely thus, and to this end." 2 Sole lies (sagt er), etc. " This (such), says he, let no one attempt to arrive at (take before or upon him to come to it) in any other manner than through rne. For I alone am the way, the truth and the life. This is speaking plainly and distinctly enough ; [it is] excluding and putting down with a strong hand all doctrine of the merit of works and of our own righteousness, and directly deny- ing and prohibiting any other consolation or confidence through EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 315 7- 28 e u it H) r m i d) f e n it e t e t, f o f e n n c t e t i fyr attcf) inctnen SSatcr, nnb son nun an fcnttet i f) r 1 1) n nub b a b t i b n a. e f c b e n. uc maofjet bcr 5xrr (SbrijhtS aberntaf ctne itcttc ^arabcl nnb tterberftc a3 nnb wo er fet> ? enn, twewot cr bcntftd) gemtg batmen ,qercbt nnb fid) crftdret ^at, rcic cr fct) bcr $Bcg, bic $Babrbcit nnb ba^ ?cbcn ic., bamit, ba^ cr fdgt: ,,9ttcmanb fommt gum SSatcr r ct)ne bnrd) mid)/' fo ftnb bed) btc licbcn 3ngcr nod) nnocrftdnbig, f)6# ren bicfe 5Bortc a(tc : $3c,g, $Bat)rl)cit, ?cbcn, gum 35atcr font men ic v fo gar mtt (antcr SSerttunft nnb ^cifd)ftd)cm tint, bag fie fid) ttidjt f'onnen brctn ridden, ^arnnt (aft er fte frcnnblid) antanffcn, 1 nnb wirft tlmcn etncn ,^to in fccn ^Beg, baran ffc fid) ftojfen foHcn, nnb tjcrnrfad)t ten, wetter $u fracjcn. Saturn fdfyet cr alfo an : 5Bcnn tf)r tnid) fennctct ? Bennett fie benn nnn ^brijlum nid)t^ fo ffc tfyn which many fancy that they are going (to go) to heaven." See p. 283, Note 6. 1 Darum lasst er sie freundlich anlaufen, etc. *' Therefore ke kindly lets them trip, and throws a stumbling-block in tbe way, against which they should dash and be induced to inquire farther." Einen anlaufen lassen is now used only in a fig- urative sense, to treat one as he deserves, to treat one coldly. But originally, it meant, to make oue run against something and stumble, and that was considered as treating a wrong-headed man as he de- served. This signification is very obvious from several passages in Luther's version of the Scriptures, as Ps. 27: 2. " If the wicked, mine enemies come upon me they must stumble (mtissen sie anlau-- fen) and fall." Ezek. 3: 20. " If a righteous man turn from his righteousness and' do evil, 1 will lay a stumbling-block before him (so werde ich ihn lassen anlaufen), so that he shall die." See also Rom. 1 1 : 1 1 , and on the substanti ve Anlaufen, stumbling, see Rom. 9: 32 and 33. Nearly all the significations of the verb can be derived from the literal one laufen, to run, an, a gainst, upon or up. Thus this otherwise difficult word is made to appear quite simple. 316 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. i>or ifyncn gegennxirtig fefyen unb fyoren, nnb fo (ange nut ifym nmfyer ge^ogen finb ? a3 ifts aber, bad id) ge* fagt fyabe, bag : dfmftum fennen, beigt fyier nid)t, nad) bem 2lngej7d)t nnb (n>ie @t ^Jaitlud fagt,) fletfdjtid) ifyn fennen, fonbern mijfen, mofitr er $u fatten, n>a^ n>tr an ifym l)aben jtnb it)te wir fein braudjeu foden, 2)enn ba tjl: in (Summa fetne SWeijniincj, bag cd atte^ baran liege, unb attetn ba^ fott ber @l)riflen ^unjt feijn, bag toir i[)n red)t fennen ler^ nen unb au^mal)tcn 2 cn alien ebantfen, 5Befen, ?ebren nnb ?eben, nnb mag man ttornefymen fan it, nnb affo an ibm attein bangen nttt bem fanben, nnb Don gan^em ^er^en fagen : 3d) rcetg nid)td nnb n>itt nicfytd n>ij]en in gottlid)en (Sad)en, ol)ne allein t)on meinem crrn dbriflo ; ber folt^ aKetn atteg fe^n, ma^ meine eKgfeit betrift nnb $n>ifd)en ott nnb mir ^n banbeln ifl. 3 Unb ob id) mol mandjerlet) 5lnfed)tnng nnb Sffiiberftanb {)abe Dom ^enfef, 30Be(t nnb meinem eigenen cwtffen, ba$n ben ^!cb mng britber fei* ben, 4 nod) mitt id) babei bleiberr, leben nnb fterben* a$ Derjldnbiger nnb fd)drfer r benn bie anbern, bcrani? mit bcr boben 5 ra 3 c / t^wtt fid) aUe^eit bie bobcflcn, iDeifejIen ?ente Diet nnb bod) bcfiimmert, flei# gig gcfudjt nnb geforfdjet babcn ; tt>a(? bod) ott fei), nnb n>ie man ott crfcnncn nnb erfangen mocje r aber nie feiner at trejfcn f onncn, nnb and) unmogftd) ijit ber 3Satr nnb menfd)^ Iid)er SBcrunnft ^n treffen, une g>l)t(ippug feCbft l)ie genget nnb $eia.et,bag,ttMett>o( er ^brijlnm geboret ttom SSaterprebi^ cjen nnb fagen,bod) beffefben nod) nie ntdjtd 1 itberatt tterffan* ben tyabe, ober nod) tterjlclje. X)a^ mad)t, bag er^ nod) mit SScrnunft fajjen nnb bnrd) etgene ebanfen ertangen tt)id &arum, obwol)( ^tjrtftu^ i()it aKein anf fein 3Bort tt>eifet nnb an (Td) bangen mitt, 2 nnb fagt, er fenne ibn bcreit^ nnb ing me and, through me, the Father." See p. 48, Note 5, and p. 283, Note 6. 1 Doch desselben noch nie nichts, etc. " stili he never understood anything (nichts) at all (fiber all) of it (dessel- ben." 2 Undan sich hangen will, etc. "and wishes to attach him to himself, and says that he (Philip) already knows him (Christ) and has seen him, still there is yet no cleaving to him, but (Philip) freely acknowledges what is passing in his mind (how he has it in his heart)," etc. Hangen, as causative of h a n g e n is an active verb. See p. 132, Note 3. H af te t e s, is impersonal, but refers, of course, to Philip. 27* 318 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. babe ifytt gcfcben, bod) !)afftet e<3 nod) nid)t bet) ibm, fonbern befennet fret) $u, une er im ^er^en Ijat, nnb fpridjt : 2hi) ^etge nn3 bed) ben Sater, fo gnitget nn3. 2l(fo fotfte er fa* gen : >u fagefl: nn3 mot t>om $ater, ttne n?ir itjn fennen ; bab id) if)n bod) trann rncin Stebtaa, 1 me a,efel)en, nnb nntgte nid)t3 licber^ $u mihtf^en, benn bag id) ntod)te fo feltg fepn, nnb etnmal il)n fef)en ?Kfo Idgt jtrf) ber (iebe ^pof^el !)oren, bag er nod) tft etn roancfenber, nnbefla'nbtger Idnbtger, g(eid)Wte bie anbern alfe, unctvol pe ntrfjt fo beran^fabren. X)enn er glanbet and) an ott nnb bat met yon ibm ge^oret 3inn er aber fyoret (5bri|1nm fagen : 28enn tbr mid) fennet, fo fennet ibr ben SSater, nnb jet fennet tt)r t^n, ba3 ift i^m gar eine frembe, nnt)erftanbige @prad)e, (So tt>eit fommt er 2 mit 1 Traun mein Lebtag. Traun, certainly, from trauen, to rely -upon it, is obsolete. Mein Lebtag, all my life, is, in mod- ern German, always in the plural, meine Lebtage. Probably mein Lebtag is not designed as a singular, which would hardly make sense, but is an abbreviation, as is common in familiar lan- guage, of the plural form. " Yet I have certainly never seen him in all my life, and 1 could wish nothing more fondly than that I might be so happy as once (one day) to see him." Und wQste nichts liebers zu wttnschen, literally, " and I should know nothing more agreeable to wish or to be wished." Liebers for Lieberes is used in the sense ofAngenehmeres, as the positive Liebes, something agreeable, is used for Angenehmes. Such adjectives when appended to nichts, etwas alles, we nig, viel, etc. are, in modern German, generally written with a capital, as nichts Gutes, nothing good ; nichts Neues, nothing new. 2 So we it kommt er, etc. " Thus far does he wander away (da von, from the true meaning of Christ's words) ; he lets Christ set there and talk by the table (i. e. leaves him there talking), as Thomas did (see above v. 5), [and] is utterly unable (can directly not) to cleave to Christ, who is talking with him, but, notwithstand- ing that, sallies out one side with his own thoughts, and flies up into the clouds, ' O that we might but see him, as he sets above among the angels.'" Desselben with ungeachtet is used as des- sen is. See p. 7, Note 6. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 319 fcutcit Ok'banofcu bat>on, IcifH brifhtm ba ftfccit nnb rcben, ajcidmne 2t. bema$ brobcn (35. 5.) and) tl)itt, fann fd)(ed)ttf md)t bafftcn an bcm @brijlo, fo nut tbm rebct ; fonbcnt, bcjfcfbcu nn t qcaduct, fpatjicrct cr bepfeit an mit ctgcueu ebaucfctt, unb flabbcrt l)inauf in bie 3Bokfen : 2(d), bag wtr ibn bod) febcn mb'd)tcn, rcne er broben ft^et nntcr ben (Sucjcfa ! 2(ber ba^ chcn unb Bennett mupt bit ntd)t a(fo a,rob nnb f(ctfd)(id> i)crftchcn, baf;, rccr (Sbriftnm (Tcbet, (n)te bte $nb ctn !tl)or anjTebct,) bag bcr ben 25atcr alfo mtt 2(na,en febe, n>ie er (jcjlaft 1 t|T, foubcrn nad) be^> et^ nnb kin* bcno @cffd)t, nnb bed? wafyrbaftta, a(fo, it>ie bte 5Borte ben* ten. Sou (I baben tfyn and) gejeben nnb gcfennct @atpf)a, ^pifatn^, 5>crebcd nnb fall ba3 cjanl^e 3itbtfd)e SSol'cf, nnb bod) webcr fbn nod) ben -Satcr erfennct. l^enn ob jTe tt>ofy( bte ^>erfon (5briflt fel)en nnb fennen : bod) feben (Te nod) ntd)t, tpte ber SSater in ^brij^o, nnb ^brijln^ in tfym, nnb bei;bcr ein Joer^, inn nnb ICBitte, ja, and) ein einig, nn^er* trenntid), gotttid) $0efen iji. (Siebe, a(fo rcitf er bicntit ^bifippitm nnb bie anbertt Stpoftet ^uritcf siebcn, ate bie 2 bin nnb fyer rcancfen nnb flab* bent mit ebanrfen, nnb fo meit fommen ttom (anben, bag ffe nid)t nriffcn, wo nnb wie fte ott fnd)cn ober ftnben fof* fen, ob jic wol (Sbriftnm Dor ibrer Dtafe feben. 50o gaffejl: bit bin, fprid)t er, nnb n>a3 flabberjl bit nnb fa breft mit ($e* bancfen, mie ein imjMt DnccfjTlber ? 5Bie fpricfyjl bn nod), id) fott bir ben SSater ^etgen ? 3d) meijnete, bn fennetejt ibn febr mobL ^oreft bn nid)t, tt>er mid) ffel)et, ber ftet)et ben 3Sater 2C. S5a^ ijl, mtttt bn wijTen, mte bn mit ott bran fei)fl, 3 nnb mie er gegen bid) gcfinnet fei), ober itber 1 Gestaltfor gestaltet, "how he is formed," or of what form he is. 2 A Is die, "as [those] who." 3 Wie du mit Gott dran seyst, " how you are off (d ran, or da ran, on it) with God," or how you stand with him. 320 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. turf) o,cbenie id) mid) gegcn bir cr^eige nnb l)6rcn (afl*en, fo triflFji bu t qen?ig(id) ben SSater, unb baft ibn red)t gcfefyen nnb crfannt, tt>ie man it)it fel)en nnb fennen fott. enn an biefer ^erfou ($l)ri)li ftefyeft bit, bag cr niemanb faiter anffcfyet, nod) nnfrennblid) t)anbeft, ober fdjrerfet unb Don (Td) jacjt, fonbern jebermann, 6ei)be, mit SKorten nnb eberben anp frennb(id)fte $n (td) lodet nnb rei^et, eqeiget ftd) nid)t anberd, benn ate cm Wiener, ber, jebermann gerne l)etfen n>it( : alfo and), bag er (Td) urn beinetvmden la'gt &eui$ fd)[agen, unb fein ^Bhtt mi(bigfid) ttcrg (Tel)efi: bit mit Slngen ; ba$u !)6rejl: bit mit Dfyren ni r benn ettel folc^e frennb(id)e r fitjje, troft( erfd)recfe nid)t 2C ^ommt ^n mir atfe, bie it)r mitl)fe(ig nnb befaben fei)b, 5D?attl), 11, 28 $8er an mid) t, foK nid)t Derloren n>erben, fonbern ba^ ercige ?ebeu * 3, 16, unb n>a$ fo(d)er @pritc{)e mebr ffnb, 3 fannfl bit t qemig(id) fd)Iiefen, bag er bir nui)t feinb ifr, fon^ bern atte nabe unb $8of)ftbat er^etgen n>itt X)a bteibe 1 Denn sole lies wissen. Solches can grammatically be either an accusative governed by wissen, as den Vater is by k e n n e n, or it can be used adjectively agreeing with wissen as a substantive, " to know such," or " such knowledge." The latter is much the simpler construction. 2 Eigen Hertz must be connected with nicht daruni. " Consult not thine own heart about it, nor thy reason and thoughts, nor any Moses or other teacher." 3 Solcher Sprttche mehr sind. See p. 106, Note 5. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 321 be*) unb ()a(tc ttcil bran, bencfe unb ffebe uidjt setter, unb laf; bid) nid)t$ irren, 1 ivaS bir anbcrS tterfomntt. 28ie bit nun Gbrtjhim bereft nnb fTefycft, alfo fyoreft bii nnb (tefycft .qennftftd) auct > ^ cn Stater j7d) gegcn bit cr$eia,eu* cim bie SOortc, fo id) $u cud) rebe, fpridjt er balb bemad), (25. 10.) jTnb nid)t ntetn, fonbcrn metneS SSaterd, bag tt>er ben (5cbn flebct unb gfaubct an thn, l)abe ba^ ett)tge ?cben 2C., 3of). 6, 39. 40. ^Bcr nun fe(d)c^ nut bent (aubett faflet, ber faun ja ntd)t bencfen, bag ott mit ibm ^itrue, cbcr ilw i^on jTd) (loficn unb ycrbammen tt>otte. X)enu e^ i)l ja t)ter fetn ^Bort nod) 3 e ^) c tt ctnt^cr Ungnabc, fouberu cttc( freunb(tcf)c, t)o(bfe(tge ^JBorte unb liebltd)er, freunbttcfyer tynblitf, unb umma, ettef SSrunfi unb &iut ltd)er r Dateru'djer, 10. (55 (an be fl bu nid)t, bag id) im SSatct unb ber 35ater in ntir ill? >ie90Borte,bie id) rebe, bie rebe id) nirfjt t)ou ntir felbfh X)er SSater aber, ber in ntir roofynet, ber tf)ut bie 2Berrfe. X;a^ t(l alte^ bafyin gerebet, bag er biefen auptartia^ ba mag 1 I r r e n, in the sense ofirre machen. See p. 253, Note 3. 2 Einblaue, beat into, from b laden, to beat black and blue. It is now no longer an elevated word. " That is all said to this end, that he might impress and beat in this leading principle, as I have said, that men should learn to put away from their eyes and from their hearts whatever may be taught and preached even in the law of Moses, and much more [what proceeds] from human reason and from one's own thoughts, when it relates to this that one is to have to do with God and ascertain his will. He must be established in this one point, namely that he can bring before him [the image of] this Jesus Christ, and let nothing tempt him to the contrary or lead him astray, whether it be called doing and living right or wrong, holiness or sin." 322 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. gefefyrct nub geprebiget roerben, and) im efe^ 9)iojT3, Diet* mefyr an menfd)ficbem $erftanbe unb eigcncn ebancfen, tt>emt eg ba$n fommt, bag bev 9D2cnfd) (Td) mtt @ott befitm* mern felt nub feinen ^Bitten erfunbigcn ttntf, unb altctn bag eintge (Stitcf faffe, bag er ibm fonne btefeu 3ffuwi @f)nfhtm furtntben, unb nfd)t^ lajfe bagcgcn anferfjtcu nedf) irren, e^ f)etj]e mol)( cbcr itbcl get()an unb gctcbt, ^eiligfett ober bic ^itnpt, bauon @t. Softcinne^ a(^ etn btger 1 ^t)angett|l in btefem ^titcfe, unb t ^autu^ Dor an# bern (efyren, bag jTe fo c(l in cinanber btnbcn unb l)ejften (Shrtjlum unb ben SSater : anf bag man Icrne, Don ott gn benrfen, bcnn in ^t)rtflo, unb fo ba(b ir l)6ren 3>tamen nennen, ober Don fetncm ^IBtllen, SOBcrrfcn. ober Ungnabe fagen, bag n>tr nirfjt barnarf) rtc^tcn, me e^ in unferm ert3en ifi, ober einige^ ^enfd)en $Bei^# I)eit baDon bifputiret, ober and) ba3 @efe^ Dorgibt ; fonbcrn attein in btefen (S^riflnm un^ nncfefn unb ^itllen, unb anber$ rotten fel)en nod) ^oren, benn, it)ie er fid) get a(^ etn lieb(id)e^ $inb(ein an ber Gutter 5lrmen unb 5rf)oo3, item, a(^ ein treuer etfanb an bent (5reu^ fein SBfut fur un^ mifbtgtid) Dergeugt, item, tt>ie er wiber auf* jlebet, ben ^eufel unb 6tte unter jTd) irirft unb ben ob mtt gitffen trit, unb bir fokfyeS, beyjbe, fclbfl unb burd) feine 5(poftel Derfiinbtget unb fd)encfct, bamit er genugfam $eua,et, bag er fetnen 3^n nod) llngnabe gcgen bir bat, fonbern aEe^> bir ^u it(fe unb roft tbut, wa$ er tbnn fott unb tl)un fann, fo bu e attein n)ittt aja'nben unb annebmen* 3a, fprtd)jl bu, ba3 febe unb bore id) n>oM, vt>cr tveig aber, mo eg ott and) alfo mtt mir met)ttet ? 9Jntn>ort : a i)itte bid) fur ; 3 benu bag beigt (S^riftnm unb ott QC* 1 AusbUndiger, most excellent, an obsolete word. See p. 265, Note 5. 2 Da hate dich far [vor], etc. " Beware of that j for that is dividing and separating Christ and God." EXPOSITION OF JOHN FO1 _ tbetfet nnb getrennet. (SHcidnine spljifippud afMer tl/nt, ber ba (Sbrijhim laf.t fabrcn, nnb ott eben im tmmc( fnd)t, nnb bcncfct : 3d) bore n>e(, bag GSfyrifhtS mit mir rcbet ; n>te wcig id) aber, n>ad @5ott breben im tmmef itber mid) gebencfet ebcr befd)(offen bat ? 983 a ift ba^ anber^, beitn ein Uitijfaube itub Ijcimlidjc 3Scr(cugiumg Dotted, bag it)n Sbrijlii^ bicrmit ftrafen mug, auf bag cr tl)it Den foldjcm fd)a'nMid)cn 5Bal)n reijfe, iwb fprid)t : ^[jifippe, n?a^ fott ba^ fei;!!, 1 bag bit ben 35atcr nnb mid) Don ctnanbcr rciflfejl', ffctterpt I)inanf in bie $3o(cfcn mit cbancfeit, nnb (apt mid) bier t>er t qe6end mit btr veben ? ^ercfl bit nidjt, wa^ id) btr facjc, bag, n?cr mid) (Tcftct, ber jTefyet ben 3Satcr fclbft, nnb (jta'nbcfi: ntd)t, bag id) im SSater nnb bcr SBater in mir ift ; item : te liQorte, bie id) rebe, jTnb nid)t mctne, fonbcrn be^ SSaterS SOBorte ? Qci$ (Tnb tt>ef freunbfidje, aber bed) ern^ fie Sffiorte be^ errn. X^cnn er n>iff^ ntd)t Icibcn, bag man a(fe Dcrgebfid) nnb nncjcnng fytn nnb f)er gaffe nnb urn* l)cr flabbere ; fenbern roilf nn^ gan^ nnb gar an ffd) nnb an fein 50ert gebnnben tjaben, bag man ett nirgenb, benn in it)in, fncfye. , bad ift 2 big fdjene cfprcid) nnb ^rcbigt anf bie bed 5(peftc(d ^Mnttppt, bamit i b m nicf)t attetn geant^ tt)ortet, fenbern atter 50?enfd)cn fliegenben ebancfen, ba^ mit jTe jTd) untcrfle^en, ott ^u ergrctffen, alfe, bag btr nnb atter :Kk(t biermit bnrd) ^briflum gefagt fci) : 50ad mad)# efl bit, bag bit n>t((|l: ett anberd fnd)cn / benn in mir ; eber 1 Was soil das seyn, etc. "what does this mean, that you rend the Father and me asunder, and clamber up into the clouds in your thoughts, and leave me here talking with you to no purpose ?" 2 Siehe, das ist, etc. " Behold, such (that) is this fine dia- logue and discourse on the question of the apostle Philip, with which a reply is made not only to him but to the towering thoughts of all men with which they presume to comprehend God, so that herewith it is said by Christ to you and to all the world." Geantwortet [ist] is impersonal, like gesagt sey below. Seep. 155, Note 3. 324 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. anber 5Gort wtb $Bertf, beitn bie id) rebe itttb fofyaffe, fefyen unb fyoren ? SOBeigt bit nid)t, bag id) im SSater unb ber SSater in mir ift K* ? >arnad) fyorejl: bit mid) in (5t ^aufo, spaulum in ito ober anbern 9>rebigern, unb alfo fort in atten, fo big $Bort prebtgen, bag e afteS @in ^ucfyeu 1 ift in bem ^errn @(mf!o 2Bo ^}anln^ i|^, ba bin id) ; n>o irf) bin, ba ift ^>an(n^ unb alle ^}rebiger 3U(e^ in ^t)rijlo bnrrf) unb bnrrf) ; (5l)rijin^ aber in unb mit bem SSater ; unb wieberum, ^t)ri|lu^ in atfen, ber SSater aber in @fynfhx 5Ba^ fragefl bu benncrf), fpriofyt er, au^ ber uner|^anbigen SBernunft, wo bod) ber 35ater fci) ? 5t(fo fott fein ^^rtflt uid)t 2 frageu* ?ag bie anbern Uucfyriffan, 3nben, ^i'trcfen, ^cj^er, 5Wond)e unb opbijlen alfo for^ fd)eu unb fud^en ; bu aber fyitte bid), bag bu nid)t auger mir fafyrejh X)enn at(o jttitcft bu uid)t ott, fonbern ben leibijs gen eufe(, wefdhcr, wie gefa t qt ift, fann uid)t bie ?eute an* ber3 betritgeu, er mug ber $iajeftat SWatnen an feine ?ugeu fd)mieren 11, laubet mir, bag id) im $ater bin, uubber2Satertumiri|l:;wo uid)t, fo bet mir bod) um ber ffiercfe wiUen. if)r uid)t glauben, fprid)t er, um meiner wi((en, bag ott in mir wot)ne unb fet>, unb id) in i)m : fo g(dubet^ bod) um ber 2Bertfe widen, fo ibr Dor 5(ugen fef)et, uub fein 9D?enfd) leugnen fann, bag e$ nid)t menfd)(id)e, foubern, gott(id)e SKercfe finb, unb parcf genug beweifen unb s e ^9 e ^/ ^ rt ? w to m ^ r Ult ^ burd) mid) rebe unb wircfe* ftnb nun bie 508ercfe unb $Bunber, bie er Dor atfer er$eia,t ^at, ba er bie 23Iinben fel)enb, bie ^taubeu ^o# renb, aftertet) ^rancfe gefunb, 3 bie eufe( aut^etrieben unb 1 K a chen, ca/cc, used here to indicate "one and the same thing." 2 Kein nicht, a double for a single negative. 3 Gesund [gemacht], EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 325 bte obten anfcrwcrfet hat, aUein mit bent 50crt, fimb nid)t adein gbtKidie UBerrfe, fonbcrn and) oft bcm Safer, baf? man nidrt aHein ben (anben baranS fd)6pffen, (bay! cr in tfbrtjlo nnb (SbrifluS in tbm ift,) fon* bent and) ben rofl fafjVn fann ber fcatcrltrfjeit ?iebe unb nabc gcgen und. ^enn wo er nft t)cifte ju pitmen, Derbammcn, jirafen nnb pta^cn, witvbe er nicht bnrd) dhriftum (Bnnbe unb bie (2trafc berfe(bi t qen wegitcbmen an bem gen, 3(ndfai)t(]cn nnb anbcrn, bte om !tcnfe( befejfcn nnb gepta.qef warcn 20. Sfcm, we er ?ufl batte jitm Xobe, wiirbe er nidjt bie ebfen anferwcrfen nnb tebenbig macfteit. 97nn aber bat er feld)e^ in Sbrtflo getban nnb nnd ge^eiget, bag wir tbn (ernen rcd)t anfel^en nnb erfennen, al$ einen btgcn Safer, ber nn^ gerne betfen nnb fe(ig mad)en Unb jwar beweifet er^ and) tag(id) an atten feinen fo er in ber ganfeen 5Be(t tbnt, bag er feine (5rcaturcn erbaft, nnb atfer elt fo Diet ^BoMtbaten tbnt, nnb fcine (fitter reid)tid) an^fd)iittet, obne, wo 2 er au$ 9iotb nnb nm ber grommen widen ftrafen nnb ben S5ofen fteuren mng, ^odi regterct er a(fo, bag wir and) feibltd) albeit mebr fei^ iter naben unb ^Bobttbaten fel)en, benn 3^t*n nnb Strafe* 2>cnn r wo einer francf, btinb, tanb, gid)tbritd)ig, aup^fg ijl, ba jtnb bagegeit bnnbcrt tanfenb gcfnnb ; nnb ob em am ?etbe cinen $ebi bat, fo ift bagegen ber gan^e ), fo nod) ?eib unb @eele fyar, eitel otte^ itte 12. 28 a b r H d), w a t) r ( t d), id) f a g e e tt d), w e r an mtd) g (an ber, ber wtrb bte $Berag fie be fitr 3^tifeen nnb grommen 1 baben (often fiir ben geriugen leibftdjen SKangel : nem(id), bag er ifynen mef berrfid)cre SCBobmmgen bereiten will, unb bod) bet) ibnen fetw, bag er fie and) babin brtnge, 2 ba er tjl, babin pe fonfl nid)t fommen fonnten, item, bag jTe fd)on ben 28ea, witgten nnb ben SSater fcnneten ; al* fo, bag er mm bag an3cjerid)tet, barnm er bei) it)nen gen^c^ fen tt>ar, nnb nid)t mebr jTe bnrfte Iel)ren, obne bag er3 ttnn ottbringe nnb ibnen belfe, babin ffe fommen fotten* 3nbem fel^et er nun ba^ and), bamit fTe bejlo mebr rojl^ baben nnb fpitren, bag jTe t qar feinen 5}tan(]e( nod) Scbaben feine^ 2Ibfd)ieb^ baben, fonbern t>iel reid)(td)er nnb berr* Iid)er, bemt bi^l)er, begnabet merben : nem(id), bag ffe ba* bnrd) fohfyeg itberfommen, 3 bag iTe eben biefelben 3Bercfe tftun follen, fo er getban bat, nnb ba^u groflfere, benn er leiblid) bei) ifynen getban bcit, ober nod) tbnn n>erbe. Unb n>ie er jefet gefagt bat, bag er fohfye 3Bercfe tl)ite, babnrd) ffe fotfen gtauben, bag ber SSater in tbm nnb er im SSater fei) : alfo fitbret erg bie berab 4 nnb fagt, bag ffe and) fotfen 1 Was des for Nutzen und From men, "what kind of (was f ii r) use and advantage from it (d e s, of it) they should have," etc. 2 Dass er sie auch dahin bring e, etc.. "that he bring them to that place where he is, whither they could not otherwise come ; also, that they have now ascertained the way and known the Father; likewise that, he has now accomplished that for which (d ar- um) he was with them, and could not [consistently] teach them any more without doing the work itself (es) and giving them the aid [by which] they should come thither." 3 Sole lies tiberkommen, "come into possession of such [power]." 4 Also fQhret ers hie herab, etc. " thus he brings it down EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 327 fefcftc SGBercf e than, babci) man fpiiren vr>crbe, bag and) fie in (Sbrijlo nnb C5brtftng in ibnen fct), tine er bernad) wetter faa.cn tinrb. enu er bicrmit anjeigt, roag er in ibnen nnb bnrdj fie tfynn nnb angridjtcn will in bcr @l)riflenl)eit, wie n>ir boron wcrbcn. 28ag fett man aber bagu fagen, bag er nicht allein tton ben 2Jpofte(n fo(d)cd reber, fonbern ton atten, bie an ifytt glditbcn ? Unb wa^ moa,c bai? fhr ^IBerrfe fct)n, bie ba follen proffer fei;n f benn be^ ^ernt (5t)rijl:i ? $8a3 fann groffcr^ gciicnnet werben, benn ebte (ebenbig mact)en, bie (beefen au^ be^ !^enfe(^ nnb beg obe ewa(t ertofen unb bag cunge ?eben gcben ? (Sinb bag ntd)t attein feine cicjcne ^Bercfe, fo er bnrcf) feine gottfute ^raft nnb 5Diad)t an nng tt)nt ? 2Ber faim bentt fagcn bap tt)ir (often grof? fere tbnn ? ier lag irf) mir gcfaffcn ben gemeinen 3Ser|!anb biefe^ prnc^g, we eg benn nicfyt fann anberg fet>n; bag eg bar# urn grojfere 3Bercfe getf)an beiffe bnrcfy feine (5t)riften^ bag tie 2(pojM nnb ^briften voeiter fommen nut ibren ^Bercfen, benn er fommen ijl, unb mel)r jn @f)rijto bringen, benn er leiblirf) anf @rben getban bat ^enit er bat 1 nnr einen fteinen 5Bincfe( or jTcf) cjenommen, ba er geprebigt unb ge# tDitnbert bat, ba^n eine Heine 3 e ^* ^ e SC^oftcC aber unb ibre 9tarf)fommen (Tnb burc^ bie gan^e $Be(t fommcn, unb bat gemdbret, 2 fo fange bie (ibriftenbeit gejlanbeu ift : affo, bag eg @l)rifhtg nnr perfontic^ angcfangen bat, aber burd) to [this further]^ipplication." That is, the works performed by them, will not only prove, by the fulfilment of his promise, that he is in the Father, but also that they are in him. 1 Denn er hat, etc. "For he entered upon a small district (corner) only, in which he preached and wrought miracles, and that for a short time." W u n d e r n, see p. 283, Note 4. * [Ge]kommen, und [es] hat gewahret " went into all the world and it, i. e. their work, has been going on as long as Chris- tianity has existed. 7 ' 328 SELECTIONS FROM L OTHER. tie SlpojM tmb fofgenben $>rebiger bat miifien immcr meiter an^gebreitet merten bi an ben Sitngjkn Stag. 5Ufo ijte tt>abr, bag bie tibriften groflfere SGBercfe, ba3 t|l, mebr unb n>citer tljun, benn @l)rijtu$ felbjl ; bed) [tub c6 einer(ei) unb eben biefefbigcn $Gcrrfc. enn bamit, bag cr fpricfyt : 5Bcr an mid) gla'nbct, bet tt)irb grojfere ^Berrfe tl)un, fcerneinet er nid)t, bag fetdje $3ercfe biirct) fcine ^"raft mitffen ,qcfrf)e# ben, unb an^ ibm, a(^ bem ^auptc r berfltcflen ; fonbern getget fclbjl, bci)be, l)ier, ba er fprtcf)t: ,,5Bcr an mtci) gfa'ubct", unb in fefgenben Morten : I^enn trf) get)e ^um 25ater ; item 25. 14 : 2Ba3 il)r bitten tt>erbet, ba^ n?il( irf) tt)im 2C V bag 1 fo(d)e nid)t gefcfyc^en, benn allein i>cn bcnen, fo burcf) ben (auben an ibm bancjen, unb er feine $raft in i^nen n)irc!et unb burd) fte beweifet. 2)a^ fage id), bag man biefen ert befto bag 2 i)erftebe, n?ie bnrd) bie Cibriften obne Unterfag bie attergrojTejlen ^Bercfe gefd)tl)en in ber SOBeft, ^^ ft? >^^ ntd)t an^tfeben (Tub, nod) erfannt iDerben, bepbe, im gct(l(id)cn unb and) im Ieib(id)en UBefen unb Regiment, ate nemlid) : 3wftonmg ber @ee(en, 55efel)ritng ber 1 Sondern zeiget selbst beide, hier und in fol- genden Worten dass. Beide refers to hier and to i n f o 1- genden Worten, "but he even intimates both here when he says, ' He who believe th on me,' and in the following words, etc. that such things do not take place except with those who," etc. 2 Bass, good, well, an obsolete word in the positive degree from which the comparative besser (basser) is formed. In Luther's time, it was commonly used as a comparative, belter. " This I say in order that one may the better understand the text, how that, though they are not obvious (to be seen) nor perceived, the very greatest works are effected in the world through Christians continu- ally both in spiritual and in secular matters arid government, as, for example, the overthrow of Satan's kingdom, the redemption of souls, the conversion of men (hearts), the triumph' and maintenance of peace in countries and among nations, aid, protection and deliverance in all kinds of calamity and distress." This translation is given as the easiest way of explaining the construction. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 329 ftcrfcen, ieg unb (*rbaftung bc$ griebcnS bet) ?anbcn unb teuton, ii(fc, 6rf)itfe unb DMtnng in atterlet) ^Magcn itnb 9iotbem ofebeg attcS fprid)t er, fotf burd) bte @briften ge# fdjehen, u?et( jic an Gbrifrum gfauben unb attcg on tl)m, alo bcm anpt, benjebct, ja, and) bnrd) etucn jegfidjen m# fonberbeit, bag er morftfe fagcn : X'ie 5Bcrcfe, bte id) tl)ue, bte tbue ein jcglid)er ^brtjl-, fo bente getanft ift. 3Gct( wtr benn fo(d)cn Sd)a^ babcn, fo M'en wir atte^, itnb ftnb frevren itber atle ^errcn. tgettfer finb n?tr auf @rbcn, n>te @brifhtd and) fc(bj^ gcwefl tfl, abet ttcr @ott, 1 finb wir itberfd)iittet mit atten litern : bag bte $Mtgea,en itn^ elcnb nub bfcg ij^, unb ol)ne un$ and) ibre itter ntd)t be batten fann, id) aber r n>enn id) fterbe, babe id) bod) fofdje iirer, bie nttr btetben foKen ; benn id) t)abe ben ^errtt ^brtjlum fefbji, fo broben tm jStmtncC jT^et, bu aber ntngt at^bcnn nacfet unb bfog bauon fd)etben unb md)t einert ben mit nebmeit, unb bort and) aUe^ uten beranbt ob bn cj(etd) etn madjttger ^onig n>are(I, unb atter l)attc(l. Slber ein (5brt|T: foil feiner itter nid)t em binter ibm laflen ; benn er fyat bereit^ fetnen broben tm fyimmel in nnb nttt @l)rijl:o, vr>ie @t* pbcf. 2, 6 V fagt, bag wtr fd)on burd) ibn gefe^t (Tnb in ba bintm{ifd)e 5Befen. 3^^t ift e^ mof ntd)t ojfen^ bar ; aber am 3nngftett age ^t?irb atte 5Be(t mitffen fel)en, wa$ ber arme ?ajaru^ r ber Dor be3 9?eid)en ^bitre nid)t bie S3rofamtcin batte, fo tton fetnem Xifd)e fi'elen, fitr Dieidj* tbum unb ett>ige ^errfidjfett baben VDirb im ^immel, ba ber 1 Aber vor Gott, etc. " but before God we are overwhelmed with all good things (possessions) ; so that the world in comparison with us (see p. 151, Note 1.) is miserable and destitute (bare. See 2 Chron. 28: 19), and without our aid (us) cannot hold its posses- sions, whereas I, if I die, have such goods as (or goods which) must remain with me." 2 Harlein diminutive of H a ar, like Brosamlein a little be- low, from B r o s a m, a crumb, from an old verb b r o s e n, to break. 28* 330 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. rcidje ^Banfi; famt alter nngtanbigen 2Be(t nnrb in cttnger (Slut (iegen unb brennen, nc. 16, 19. flf. 9tiw, tt>a$ ill fcenn bie Urfadje, roanim bie OSfyrijten [often eben fo groffcre SBercfe tbun, benn er fefbfl: ? $cine an* bere, 1 fpridit cr, ebne biefe : enn id) gebe gum 2Sater. SBie reimet ffd) bed) ba ? 3ft ber 9Q?ann trnncfen, eber rebet im ranm ? Stbcr ba^ tfte, ba^ id) gefagt babe, bag it>tr fo(d)e 5Gercfe nid)t tl)itn t?on nn^ fctber* Sag aber bie @l)rtjlenl)etf fo orojfe 5D3errfe tbitt bnrd) bie gani^e ^Be(t, bie er anf Arbeit nnr in bent ftctnen 25odf(ein getban, ba^ fommt bat)cr, witi er fagen, bag id) gum SSatcr gebe, nnb mein 5Heid) eimtefyme, ba^ ijl, burd) mein ?etfcen, (Eterben unb 3(iifcrfi:ebcn itberwinbe id) ben Xenfe(, ^tob, S(etfd) nnb 2Mnt, ? iBe(t nnb alle^, tt>a3 brinnen ifi:, nnb fefee mid) binanf gnr 9^ed)ten be^ -Sater^, bag id) gett)attig(id) regiere nnb mir allc^ nntertban mad)e, unb fonne fagen gum ^obe, Q5imbe, ^tenfef, $Be(t unb aKem, ba3 ba bofe ift : >a liege mir gnu gitflfen nnb fej) nimmer ^ob, Sitnbe, enfel nnb 66fe %Qcit, mie bn gewefen bi|l, 13, 14. Unb ma^ ifyr bitten werbetiumei^ u e m 3ft a m e n, b a $ tt> i (I i d) t b n n, a n f b a g b e r tSater gee^ret merbe in bent (^ol)n. 3Ba^ i b r bitten tt> e r b e t in m c i n e m 91 a m e n, b a $ id) tf)un. $eiget mit biefen nnb fofgenben SOBorten, n?ad ba fei) 2 1 Keine andere, etc. "No pther, says he, but this, ' For 1 go to my Father.' But what sense is there in that (how does that agree) ? Is the man intoxicated, or is he dreaming ? But that is what 1 have said, that we do not perform such works of ourselves. But that the church performs such great works in all the world, which he [while] on earth performed only among a small nation, comes from this (he wishes to say)," etc. 2 Was da sey, etc. " what is the proper office and work of Chris- tians, and how necessary the same is in the church." EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 331 ber (5!>rtftvu eijientlid) 3(mt uub $Gcrcf, unb rote notl) bta,c in bcr (Slmftenl)ctt fey, batten bcr *)>ropl)et 3ad)artad 12,10. fa.qf, baf? (Sbriftnd fell andajcfien unb geben ben (Mcift, bcr ba bdfjf ctn cift bcr nabcn unb bed cberd* cnn btcfe jroci) 6tiufe fell er andrid)tcn unb fctjajfen in alien (Shriftcn : crftltd), baf? ibr crfc tterffd)ert unb genrig fci;, bap fte etnem gnabtgcn ett babcn ; jum anbern, bag fie and) fenncn anbcrn belfen burd) bad ebet X)ad evfte Stiicf mad)ct, bajj pc nut ott ttcrfol)nct werbeit, unb fitr jtrf) ailed habcn, wad fie bcbiirfen. SSScnn fie bad fyaben, fellen fie barnad) and) otter wcrben 1 unb bcr SfiMt lanbe bnrch bad cbct, unb alfo burd) ben @etft ber ben fclbjl ettcd ^tnbcr werben, barnad) aid ottcd er gwtfdjen tbm unb bcm 5iad)fl:en banbeln unb anbcrn bte* ueu unb fjclfen, bap ffc and) ba^u fommcn mt\qen jDenn wenn etn (Shrift aufa'bet, (5()riftum ^u fennen aid feinen errn unb .^eilanb, burd) weldjcn er ift erlefet and bcm !t!ebe unb in feme crrfd)aft 2 unb @rbe qcbradjt, fo >t>trb fctn 5^er(3 gar burd^ottert, ba cr gerne wellte jeber* maun and) baju ()clfcn X^cnn cr bat feme l)6l)ere grcube, benn an biefem d)a^, bag er (Sljrtftnm crfennet. Sarum fabret er beraud, lebret unb ttermabnct bte anbern, rul)mct uub bcfennct baflelbtge tter jebcrmann, bittet unb fenfjjct, bag ffc and) medjten gu foldjer nabc fcmmen. \id ift 1 Gotter werden, etc. " become gods and saviors of the world through prayer, and thus by the spirit of grace become themselves children of God, and then as children of God mediate between him and their neighbor, and serve and aid others so that they may come to the same state (dazu)." 2 Und in seine Herrschaft, etc. "and is introduced into his (the Christian's) dominion and inheritance, his heart is pervaded with divinity, so that [like God] he would gladly help every one [to come] to the same." D u r c h go tte r n, formed after the analogy ofvergdttern, admirably expresses the apostolic idea of our "be- ing made partakers of the divine nature" by the infusion of the divine Spirit as a pervading element of our character. 332 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. em uuru fnger etjl in ber l)6()efi;ea ^itfte, 1 bad t|l tit (Dotted @aabe aab grtebe, bag cr atd)t faun [tide nod) mitgig fewt, feabera ianaerbar bantad) rtaget aab fhrebet mit allea $ra'ften, aid ber aflein baraat lebt, bag er (lotted Q?bre aab ?ob tt>etter aater bie ?eutc brtacje, bag aabere felcfyen, etft ber aabea and) eatpfabea, aab bard) beafcfbtgen aarf) tt)m hcffeu beten. Senn tt>o ber C^etjl: ber @aabea tft, ber mad^et, bag rntr aad) fonnen aab biirfea, ja mitflfen aufal)ea, ^a betea* eta red)t ^brtjKid) ebet 2 fott aab mag atfo gefyett beta aabea^eijl:, ber ba facjet : 3^) bcibe gefebt, n>te id) faun, fo bttte id), ba tt>oKe|l: ja utdjt mein ?ebea aab ^baa aafel)ea, foabera betae ^3aratberi3tgfett aab ate, bard) @brifhna Dcrl)ctjfea, aab am berfelbea wtHea attr ge^ bea, mad id) bttte* 5i(fo, bag man in beta ebet ta reciter ber^(td)er Deatatb Doa aad fetbft fade, aab atteta baacje an ber SSerbetflfitag ber aabe, mtt yefteat aScrtrauen, bag er erl)5rea, n)ie er $a betea befol)(ea aab (rl)6raaa, bat fe^et er aad) felbfi: beatltd) ba^a big ^Bortfeta : i a at e t a e m 9t a m e tt, git Tebrea, bag obne ben kwbea feta red)t ebet gefd)ebea faaa, aab aaffer (5bri(lo atemaab Dcrmao, cincn S5ad)ftabea ^a betea, bad Dor ott gette aab 2t(fo terae bier, bag tt>tr bard) bea erra dbrtfhtm alletn 1 In der hohesten (hochsten) Ruhe, etc. "in the great- est repose, i. e. i-n the grace and peace of God, so that," etc. 2 Aber ein recht christlicher Gebet, etc. "But a truly Christian prayer should and must thus proceed from the spirit of grace, which says : * I have lived, as 1 could ; but I pray that thou wouldest not look upon my life and works, but upon thy mercy and kindness, promised in Christ, and on account of these grant me what I request." Soil und muss is an idiomatic phrase not unlike ist und bleibt, and handeln und wandeln. In English, the word must renders the word should unnecessary. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 333 luben tic ,$u>ei) Sti'tcf : (fyube uub (S'rbonuifl be3 ebcttf, b.T? unr crftlidj tftnbcr ettetf roerbcn, bamtt wir tfyn fon* ncn anrujfen, nub barnad) and) fur itn$ unb anberc evlan* gen, uxi3 roir bebiirfen. anuu, tt>c cin (Sbrtft til, ba ift ci.qcutftd) ber cilia,e 05cijr, bcr ba m'djtd aubertf tlntt, benn tmmcrbar bctct. X^cnn eb cr (jfctd) ittd)t tmmerbar ben ?Diitub rc(]ct r ebcr Ti3erte mad^ct, bcmtod) gebct unb fd)fcigt bvti> >>erB, (jfcid>n?te bic ^uUnibcni nub bag & er ^ m ?ctbe, ehne Untcrlaf? mtt fo(d)cm (Scufjcn : 2(d) (teber SSater, bag boc() X^ciu Ouiutc cjcbctlt.qet wcrbc, 'I^ctu DJeirf) fomme, X^ein 5Gi(tc gcfdjcbc bci; uui? uub jcbcnnauu jc. Unb barnad) 1 bic -l>iiffc eber 2(nfcd)tung unb 9ictb barter britcfen unb tret* ben, barnad) <}cbet fold) (5euf$cu uub S3ttten bejlo (ia'rcfer, and) munbltd) : bag man fctnen Sbrtilcn faun ftnben ofyn bcten, fo tt>ent(], af^ ctnen (ebenbtgeu 5Dicufd)cn cbne beu tyi\[$, n>e(d)er jlcbet utmmcr ftt(r, rcget unb fd)(aget uumer* bar fitr jTd), ob g(eid) ber 9fteufd) fd)tdft ober anber^ tt)ut, bag er fein ntd)t gett>al)r nnrb, 2 SJuf bag ber SSatergee^rettverbeiubem (5 o fyit, t)etgt nun, ber 3Sater merbe gee[)ret in bem (Sofyn ? anber3, benn bag ber 3Sater alfc erfannt unb fitr ben gefyaften mcrbe, ber ba fet) ein gndbiger, barmber^iger 2Sa* tcr, ber ba uid)t mtt un^ gurnet, nod) $ur gotten iierbam* men will, fonbern bie (Eunbe ttercu'bt, uub atte fetne nabe fdjcncfet, um feineg (5obue^ (brifH wiKeu, tt)ie g gcfagt tjl. X)ag ijl bie red)te (5bre, bamtt ret n?;rb. Scnn bal)er ertt>ad)fet im erfee trauen, ba3 c^ ^u ibm 3ffud)t bat, uub il)n faun troillid) 1 Und darnach, etc. "And (according) as assaults (blows) or temptation and trial (distress) press and urge us the harder, so (ac- cordingly) go forth such sighs," etc. 2 Dasser sein(seiner)nichtgevvahr wird, "so that he is not aware of it." 334 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. anrnffen in alien 9t6tl)en, item fitr feine @nabe nnb that bancfet, feitten ^amen nnb $3ort ttor jcbcrmann befen* net nub funb rnadjet, n>eld)e ftnb bie red)tcn otte^bienfte, fo il)m gcfatten unb baburd) er gepretfet tt)trb. (Boldje aber fomten nid)t gefd)el)en, ofyne allein, tt>ie er fagt, in bent obne, bag ift, n>o (Sfyrifhtg alfo erfannt nnb gegldnbt n>irb, n>ie gefagt ifl, bag n>tr bnrd) tint lenten, ott fefeen nnb feine @nabe nnb Ddterlid) erip erfenncn, nnb n)ij|en, n?a^ n>ir in feincm 9?amen bitten uou ott r getDt^lid) gcnxifyret fet)tt nnb empfal)en fotten* 15, ?iebet tl)t mid), fo fyaltet metne 50Borte id) mitt nid)t ein 5D?ofe^ fei)n, ber end) trcibe nnb mit ^rd'ncn 1 nnb (Sdjrccfen, fcnbcrn gebe end) fcld)c ebote, n>eld)e ihr mol)l obne ebieten fonnet nnb roerbet l)alten, fo il)r mid) anberS lieb l)abt. X'enn tt>o ba^ nid)t tjl, ba i[l bod) ttergebentf, bag id) end) Diel gebieten rnottte ; benn e^ bleibet bod) nngel)alten* arnm fet)et nnr baranf; 3Bottt ifyr mein ebot ^alten, bag tfyr mid) lieb babt r nnb bebencfet, n>a^ id) end) gctl)an fyabe, bag il)r mid) billig fottt (ieben, al^ ber id) mein ?eib nnb ?eben fitr end) fee nnb mein S5(nt fitr end) ttergiefie ; fo tbnt3 bod) um meinetvritten, nnb bleibt nntcr einanbcr einig nnb frcnnblicl), bag tl)r ^ gleid) an mir l)a(tet mit enerer ^rcbigt, nnb einer ben an^ bent bnrd) bte iebe trage, nnb ntdjt ^rennung nnb gotten anrtcl)tet Denn id) l)abe e^ and) reblid) nnb mol)l Derbies net ; e3 tt>trb mir ja ber^ltd) fatter nnb fojlet mid) mein ?eib nnb ?eben, bag id) end) etiofe. 3d) rcerfe mid) felbjl: nnter ben ob nnb in be^ ^enfel^ D?ad)en, bag id) bie Sitnbc nnb !ob Don end) nelnne, bie otte nnb be^ ewaft jerjlore, nnb fcf)cnrfe end) ben immel nnb wa$ id) fyabe, nnb mill end) gerne git gnt halten, ob ibr nn* terwcilen irret nnb fel)fet, ober and) groblicl) fattet, fdni>ad) 1 Drauen. See p. 95, Note 1. Anders, otherwise, is often better omitted in the translation. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 335 nnb (jebrcrf)(td> fct)b, aftctn, bag ibr cud) ttnebcr an mid) baltrt unb in bic Vicbc trctct, nnb nntcr cinanbcr einer bcm aubcrn and) wa.ebe, unc id) and) a,ea,en end) tfyne, anf bag bie ?iebe nntcr end) md)t $utrennet tverbc. 16. Unb id) wttt ben Sater bitten. cun id) witt nid)t mi'tgia, jTljcn broben im imme(, nnb cncr cnjeflfen, fonbcrn nid)t^ anbcr^ tbnn, benn cncr (icbcr spdefter nnb ^itrfer fctjn, ben 35atcr fhr end) bitten nnb flchcn, baO cr end) ben cifia,en G^cifl: t qebe, bcr end) in atten 9i6tbcn trojlcn, ftdvcfcn nnb crbatten (ell, bag it)r in meiner ?icbc bletbct, nnb a(tc^ friM)Itd) crtragcn fennet, wa^ end) um metnettt)i((cn mibcrfabret. Unb er fott end)einenanbern Crofter ge^ ben, bag er bet) end) bleibe ett>iglid) 5(ffo fa' bet er nun an gn prebigen on bent ^eitigcn ei|l r fo ber (5t)riftenbeit fcttte gegebcn werben, nnb babnrd) 1 jTe fottte erbaftcn wcrbcn bi^ an ben 3ungflen ^ a 9 unb tjl bier fonbcrftd) ,511 mcrcfen, trie ber err ^brijin^ fo frcnnb? lid) unb trcjttid) rcbet fiir atte arme, betritbte ^er^en nnb furd)tfamc / btobc ewtflfen, nnb nn^ tfiQct, n>ie roir ben ei# ligen eift red)t erfenncn nnb feine^ rojl:3 empftnben fetten* X)enn t)ier ift bcfc^fcflen, bag er wili ben $ater bitten, nnb alfo bitten, bag er un$ nicbt fo(f fd)recfen, ncd) in bie c((e ftojfen, fonbcrn bag er fofl einen anbern Crofter gcben, nnb etncn fofd^cn Xrofter, ber ba en>ig(id) bet) nn^ fet), nnb nid)t bet) ung tbite, benn obn llnterfag nn^ (idrcfe nnb trofte* 3^nn ifl fein B^f^ ^ a g te ^ ^errn ^brijli ebet gen)ig(id) crborct ift, unb ber $ater a((c^ tl)nt, tt>a^ cr tljn btttet ; um mug e^ nid)t otte^ $3t((en nnb ?0?et)nung fetjn, un$ tvilt fd)recfen nnb betritben. enn C^brijln^ tbnt e$ ja uid)t, n>ic er, bet;be, mit $6orten nnb ^Bercfen al(entl)arben 1 Dadurch in the sense of w o d u r c h j through which. 336 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ; bcr SSafcr tbnt c$ and) md)t, af3 ber mit (Sbrifto ein er& unb ^Bitten hat ; bcr fteiti.qe cijl: and) nidjt, benn er tft 1 unb fott fyetflfen, tt>ic ifyn (5l)rifhi3 a(l)ier nennet unb mabfct, cm Crofter* -ftim tterflcbct jcbcrmann, wa$ ba fyetgt big $3crt : Strofl unb refier, bag man mrfjt fantt bafnr pd) fdjeucn obcr furrftfcn, fonbcrn cbcn ba^ i(l, ba^ ein cfcnb, betritbt erfe am allcrbed)(len begebret. 17, Sen etflberSBa&rfjeit. 9^td)t affetn ijl: bcr i^ctL etft cut ^roRcr, bcr bic (5f)rtftcn trobig nnb mittbtg madict wtber allcrlci) Sdjredfen, fonbcrn i(l ba^n and) ein @cift ber ^Babrbett, ba<5 ijl, ein roabrbaftt* ger, gewifler etjl, bcr nid)t trcugt 2 nod) febtcn Idgt. Scnn big gcboret and) bagn, bag ftc fed nnb imerfcfyrocfen werben* Scitn e^ mng nid)t fcpn ein fc(d)er tnmmcr (Einn, Snrft 3 unb !^refe, ate ba tfl ber teKen ^rtcg^lcute unb 3DagebaIfc, bic freubig babin trctcn gegcn bie Sdjwertcr, Spiefjc nnb S5itd)fen. Sa^ ift and) root cine JreKbtgfeit, abcr ein faffrfj* er ^treft unb $trct?, bcnn er Derldgt jTd) entweber anf etgenc ^raft, cber auf citete ^bre nnb 9?ubm, arum ift wo( ba ein ciji, abcr bed) nid)t ein rcdjtcr ba^rljaftfger e(d)cnbie 5Beft nid)t faun empfa^eu; b e n n (T e jT e 1) e t i b u n i d) t unb f e n n e t i I) n u i d) t. geboret and) jnr ^rojlung ber @fyriftettbeit, n>enn (Te jTd) umfeben 4 in bie wcite ^cft, n>ei( ibr t 1 Denn er 1st, etc. " for he is, and deserves (ought) to be called, (as Christ here terms and represents him), a comforter." 2 Treugt, obsolete for triegt or trOgt, for which betrQgt is now used. 3 Durst, not thirst, but daring, from dttrfen in the old sense of wage n. T u in m e r for d u m m e r. 4 Denn wenn sie sich umsehen, etc. "For where they look about them in the wide world (because there are very many of EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 337 met pub, bte itnfcrc ?ebrc fcerad)tcn, lament nub fccr unb nid)t fd)led)te, gcrtiuje Scute, fcnbcrn attermetjl bte jpodjtterficmbt.qften, clcl)rtejtcu, ewaltigfteu, unb and), bte ba wottcn bte g-rcmmjlcn unb ctfu]ilcn fa;n, bad jlbflfet em fd)ttxid)a,fautnq .^crls t?or bctt $epf, bag c$ anfafyet $u benrfen : otfteu bcnn fo groffe Scute alf^umal irreit, unb atteg fa(fd) nub ttcrbammt fepn, road pe tl)un unb fageu, fefcen unb fd)(teffen ? cmnber |M(et er l)icmtt ba ilrtbetf biirr uub f(ar, bag n>tr beg fottcn gewtg feijn, bag ed ntd)t anber^ a,ebet nod) gcben faun, unb fdjlcnfl, bag jTe e^ ntd)t fiutnen toerjle^cn, nod) ^t marten obcr ju boffen fei), bag ber grefie ^aufe, vt)e(d)e (Tub bte rogten, ^betjlen, 33epen, unb ber redjte ^crn ber ^IBett, foKten bte ^Bal)rt)etten t)aben 5Ufo fiel)et (5t)rtjlud in btefer ^)rebt t qt tmmer bet)fett^ auf it (the world) who despise, reproach and oppose our teaching and [are] not simple, insignificant people, but the most intelligent, learned and powerful, and those, too, who would pass for die most pious and holy), that strikes down (strikes in the head) one who (a heart which) is weak in faith, so that he begins to think, ' Is it likely (so 11 ten) that such great persons should all err, and everything that they do and say, decide and conclude upon, is false and damnable ? Against this he gives hereby the plain (dry) and clear decision, that we must be certain of this, that it is not, and cannot be otherwise, and con- cludes that they [men of the world] cannot understand, nor is it to be expected or hoped, that the great mass, who are the greatest, no- blest and best [of mankind], and the very cream (kernel) of the world should possess the truth." " Thus Christ, in this discourse, glances at those who would frighten his little flock, and make them timid and fearful, so that they should fall into doubts and think [within themselves and solilo- quize thus] ; Shouldst thou alone be wise, prudent and holy, and so many excellent persons be and know nothing ? What can I do alone, or with so few ; [how can I] endure persecution and suffer myself to be condemned and given over to Satan by so many distinguished and excellent people ?' ' Take courage, says he, you must be pre- pared (gerQst, for gerdstet, armed) for that, and not let it tempt you, but be assured, that you have the spirit of truth, of which the Others, who persecute you, are not worthy,' " etc. 29 0#8 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. bie, fo fein f(eine$ 5Sanflein moffen erfcfyrecfen, Mobe nnb i?er$agt madjen, bag fie fotfen gwetfcht unb benefen : otk tefl: bit aftein n>eife, ffag unb fyettig fepn, itnb fo met trejf* fiofyer Petite afte nid)te fetw nod) nnffen ? 3Ba$ foff id) ak (em ober mit fo vpenigen madjen nnb $erfefgnng (eiben, ntib mid) faflfen Don fo me( ^o^en, treffh'etd)e^ bte anbern, fo bid) t)erfofgen r nid)t n?ertl) fep, ja it)n nid)t fonnen fel)en nod) fennen, n?enn fie nod) Diet t qe* (ebrtere, weifere nnb Cohere ?ente n)dren, nnb bag bent fynn nnb 50efcn foil gelten nnb red)t ftn;n nnb Meiben or ott, nnb ibre^ bagegen t)erbammt fei;n, 5l^o bentct erS nun felbft, fo er fprid)t : {)tt; bennerb!eibet bet> end) unb tt>irb in end) fet>n, Bot)er fennen nnb l)aben jle ben ^ct'Iigen eifl, bag er ifynen bleibet ? ^tfein bal)er, tt)ie gefaget tft, ba fie an bteiben fyangen bnrd) ben (anben, fein $Bort (ieb unb n>ertl) baben, arnm, n>a^ ft'e tl)uu, leiben nnb leben, ba^ i|l atte^ be i^eiligen eijle^ ^i)itn nnb 3Bercf, nnb red)t unb tt>ol)l gelebr, getban nnb gelitten, unb if! 1 Und heisst, etc. " and consists in (or is) right and well liv- ing, doing and suffering, and is purely a precious thing before God. One will at the same time (da bey) perceive, says he, if it is done (goes) in my name, and relates to me, that the name of Christ creates the difficulty (dispute) and that the game has respect to (arises re- specting) him, as (thank God) we now see acts of violence (Grei- f e n) pass before our eyes. Therefore we have consolation, though we are poor, frail persons, and sinners besides. Although, in respect to our lives, we might, in comparison with them make our boast, and they have in reality as gross faults (things) attached to them, as they accuse us of, so that they might well come to a pause with us. But EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 339 eitct foft(id) Tim] ber @ott. a3 ttnrb man babet) erfen* itcu, (fprtd)t er,) fo etf in mcinem 9iamen a,el)et, unb nm mtd) $n tbitn itf, ba$ bcr 9iame (SbrtfH ben aber madje, unb bail 6pie( fid) iiber ibm erbebc, n>tc (@ott ?ob!) mir jet$t feben flmjfen m* 2Ina.cn gebcn ; bal)cr ttnr and) baben ben vojt, oO anr wef armc gcbrcd)(td)c ?ente pnb, nnb iinbcr ba$n. SOSicwot mir be^ ?cbcti^ bafben and) n)o( c^cgcn nnfcre Jctnbc ritlnnen fcnncn, nnb fTe ja fo grobe (Stitcfe auf tlwen (jabcn, af^ fTe nn^ (d)n(b gebcn, bag (Te wot mi\a.en nut nni? g(etd) anfhebcn* Siber, mci( e^ urn be^ Sperm (^)n'jli anffen ^n thnn tfi, bag n)ir ben prebtgen nnb !)od) beben, fo wottcn mir babet) bteiben nnb fieljen ttnber atte ^Belt, nnb (Te (often nn^ ben D^n()m lafien, and) obne il)i*en Dand, bag unfer ei|^ ber etjl ber 5Bal)rbett fe^ unb moKen^ baranf mtt tl)tteu au^fedjten unb nnfere $opjfe an tbre fe^en* X)enn nnfer ^err bat and) (5ta^I unb @ifen im ^opf unb 9Karcf in gdnften nnb S5einen, bag er fann aud^eften, it)ie cr bereitd an t)ie(en getban t)at, bte ben ^opf an tl)m abge* (anffen nnb ^nbrodjen b^ben unb nod) ^nbredjen fotten, aber ben nnfern un^ubrod)en lafien* because it concerns Christ our Lord that we proclaim and exalt him, we will abide by our cause (stand by) and face all the world, and they must yield to us the credit (no thanks to them) that our spirit is the spirit of truth, and we will fight it out with them, and beat our heads against theirs. For our Lord has a head of steel and iron, and nerve (marrow) in his hands and legs, so that he can stand it through, as he has already done towards many who have lost their heads in running against him (run off their heads against him) and broken them, but have left ours unbroken." On um zu thun, which occurs twice in this passage, see p. 20, Note 3 med. and p. 35, Note 5. On gelebt, gethan und gelitten, see p. 283, Note 6. G re i ff e n, or g r e i fe n is an infinitive used substantively, the art of seizing. The closing sentences are in the old German warlike and feudal spirit, so forcibly expressed in the word Faust-recht, club-lato. 340 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 18. 3d) it> iff end) uidjt SKSdtjfen 1 taflfen, id) f o m m e $ u e n cf). &$ fdjeinet ivot alfo, 2 b e *) b e, uad) bcr 2Bctt 2(rf)ten unb itad) unfcrm eicjenen gufylen, a!3 fct) big ^duflein ber GEfyrtjIen armc, uertaffenc $3di)fen, bet)be, Don @ott unb (5[)rifto, unb babe unfer ttera,eflfen, roeit cr ba letbet, bag jTe gefdjlert unb a,efd)dnbet, Derbammt, t>erfclget unb ermerbet it>erben, unb jebermann^ gugtud) (Tub, ba^u ou bem eu* fe( im ^er^cn immerbar erfofyrecft, betritbt unb gep(a t qet iDerben, bag jTe tt>ob( unb rcd)t 5Bdy;fen, mogeu l)etjlfeu t)or alien anbcrn 5Ba9fen unb DcrlajTenen 0?enfd)en auf (5rbcu r Don n>e(c^en bie 8>d)rift fagt, bag fid) ctt berfetben mug felbft anne()men, af^ fonfl on jebcrmanu iJerkffeu, 27, 10 V unb eiu 35ater berfdben ffd) uenneu (agt, 68, 6. 2(6er id) it>i(( cud) md)t alfo t)er(afi*en, n?te e3 fid) anjTebet unb fitl)(et, 3 (fprtcfyt ^brtjlu^,) fonberu it)itt cud) ben roj?er geben, ber end) feldjen 5Wutt) tuad)e, bag il)r beg gewig fe|)b, bag if)r meine red)te (Ibrijlen unb bte redjte ^)trc^e fei)b. X)agu it)tl( id) fel&pt gewigfid) bet) euc^ feijn unb bfeiben mit meinem (Sd)n$ unb Dberl)anb, fo id) it>o( jefet teib(id) unb fid)tbarlid) i)cn end) gebe, bag il)r ntiifict fet)n, be^ Steufef^ unb ber lEBdt SSo^beit unb fo mad)tig 4 fott bie $Beft uid)t 1 W a y s e n, or W a i s e n. 2 Es scheint wol also, etc. " It seems indeed both ac- cording to the view of the w~rld and according to our own feelings, as if this handful of Christians were poor, forsaken orphans, [forsak- en] both of God and of Christ, and [as if] he had forgotten us," etc. 3 Wie es sich ansiehet und fa h let, is explained by the first clause in the paragraph. The verbs are both impersonal, " as it appears and is felt." 4 A b e r so m a c h t i g, etc. " But so powerful [as you or oth- ers imagine] shall the world not be, nor so much mischief shall Satan make; so prudent shall all the learned and wise not be; but my baptism and preaching about me shall continue and be carried on," etc. EXPOSITON OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 341 ber cufcl fo bofe madjeu ; fo ffug fotten atte ten uub $3cifcn md)t fet;n : eg fott beunod) meine aufe uub 9)rebia.t Don mir bleiben unb getriebcn roerbeu, unb mew &citia,cr ctft in cud) reajeren unb tmrcfcn, ob eg im* ntcrbar aucjefcrfjtcu wirb, uub and) be*; cud) fcfbfl fd)tt>ad)* (id) 19. (5$ t(t nod) urn ctn fleiueS, fo tDtrb mid) tie $B e [ t u i d) t m e ^ r f e 1) c n, i h r a b c r f o tf t mid) fel)eu; benu id) (ebe, unb il)r fottt au^ t e b e n, (T fdhret immer fort, ber liebc err ^()rtflit6, mit frcuttb* Iid)cn / tro|ltid)cu ^IBorfcu, bag er |Tc bcrcite uub gefd)icft mad)c, (Td) iu il)rem ^riibfaf, raurcit uub ?cibeu fein ^u trofteu, 1 uub auf il)it eiueu 9ftittl) ju fd)6p(fen miber aKe^, bag fie auftd)tct X>arum fprid)t er nun : ($ fott batb auge{)en, 2 unb tjl nod) urn eiue 9tad)t ^u t^uu, fo tt>irb mid) bie 5Be(t utdjt mel)r fe()cu. 5(f^ fottte er fageu : <$$ iji fo bofe, 3 gifftig 25ing urn bie $Qclt, bag, mer feiu ropt uub eit auf bie ?eute n)itt fcfeeu, ber ift fd)on ^erforeu. ^euu id) f)ab^ t)er# fud)t uub erfa()reu. 3d) biu fommeu, i!)r gu t)e(fen, unb fyabe atte^ get^an, wag id) an ihr tbun fottte : fo roitf fte mid) uid)t (eibcu, uub beg 33aterg 3 c n ^ un ^ ^ e ^ ^PtKgcrt ^eifteg ^rebigt unb $Bercf n?eber annel)men, nod) ttnffen, fonbern fd)(ed)tg beg eufe(g fepu unb bfeiben* XJarum mitt id) and) ifyr aug ben Sfugcn 4 ge^en, bag fie 1 Sein zu trosten, " to comfort themselves in him." See p. 307, Note 2. 2 Es soil bald angehen, etc. " This should soon begin, and there is but one night first (and one night is still concerned)." 3 Es ist so bose, etc. " The world is so malicious and deadly." Literally, " It is so malicious and poisonous with the world." See p. 247, Note 6. 4 Ihr aus den Augen, out of its sight, " out of the eyes to it, or of it." 29* 342 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. mid) nid)t feben fott, unb bod) alfo madden, bag fte mid) mug auf (Arbeit (eiben unb faffen recu'eren, enn ob id) mot mid) crenfeigen taffe unb biefem eben abjterbe, mitt id) bod) baburd) in ein auber unfterb(id) ?eben gefyen unb fommen, barinnc id) cmtg reajeren merbe ; atebenn fott erft mcin D^eid) red)t angeben* enn meit id) 1 a(fo gebe fterb(id) ttor ibren 5(ua,en, fo tft fein 3(ufl)oren beg oben unb ^Bnten^ tt)iber mid), vootten unb fonnen mid) ntcfyt (ebenbig fel)en nod) leibcn, bi^ jTe mid) ^um ^obe bradjt baben. Stbev id) tt)itti5 6a(b ein ^nbe maiden, bag fie an mir tl)un, tva$ fie rcotten, nub mid) nid)t mehr, fef)en, mie (Te begd)reu, unb bod) eben, bamit bas^ attSricfyten, bag (Te mid) o{)ne ibren Dane! 2 in me? ine err(id)!ett unb D^egiment bringen, tt)etd)eg (Te miiffen (eiben, unb fott eg niemanb wel)ren. ^((fo ifl big 3 jit l)ol)em !^ro^ ,qerebet ber fd)anb(id)en, bofeu $Be(t, fo @brijltum unb fein f iBort ycrfotgef, al ber il)r utd)t mitt bie (fyre tbun r bag (Te ifyn mel)r fottte feljen prebigen ober 3Bunber tl)un ; unb n>ei( fte il)tt nitty motten bet) ibnen leiben, mitt er ifynen and) meit n ciut 3 au ^ ^ en 5l t qcn fommen* 5t(fo baben mir bie rrofHidje Ser^eijfnng benen @f)rifteu gegeben, fo ba gefd)rec?t merben burd) ben ^tob nub atterfei) Ung(ncf, bag fte founen troen miber ben 2!eufe( unb bie $Mt, unb fagen : 5Benn bit mid) tobtefc fo tobtejl bu mid) uid)t, fonbern fyttfeft mir ^um ?eben ; begrabjl: bit mid), fo reiffefl bit mid) au3 ber 5(fd)e unb tanbe gen ^immeL Unb urnma : bein 3ont unb ^oben ift eitel nabe unb mlfe ; benn bit gibjl mir nur Urfad)e unb ben 2lnfana., bag 1 Denn well i c h, etc. "For because I am (go, or go and come) in a mortal state before their eyes, there is no cessation," etc. 2 Ohne ihren Da nek. See p. 338, Note 1 . 3 Also ist diss, etc. " Thus this is said by way of defiance to the shameless, wicked world, which persecule3 Christ and his word, as [of] one who will not do it the honor to allow it to see (that it should see) him longer preach and work miracles." EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 343 mid) (5l)rifht$ $um ?cbcu bringct ; tme cr Ijtcr fprid)t : 3d) ebe, nub ihr follt Icbcn. 3a, (fprid)t glcifd) uub 83Iut,) id) mug g(eid)tt>ol ben $opf bcrbalten? 1 3a, ba$ fdjabct bir mrfjtd (fpricfyt @t)rifht3); jtc Ijabcn mid) and) gecreufciget^erwutget ttnb in$ @rab gefcgt ; abet, rote fie mid) im @rabe nnb ob gcbattcn baben, fo fctten fie eud) and) bavtnnen ba(ten. ^cnn c^ beiflt imb foU Ijetfien : 5Bte id) Iebe,fo fottti^r and) (cbcn ; baS fott mtr n?eber ^teiifel nod) ob mebren. Diefe 3Bortc mug etn thrift (ernen faffcn nnb feinen (5()rtftum a(fo fenncn in feinen tre(Htd)cn SSerbeiffnngen, eb tbm ber 2!ob 2 ben @ttd) bent mtt fcinem (Spie^, nnb ber enfe( feinen ^6ttenrad)en gcgen ifym anffperret, bag er nid)t bafitr erfcfyrecfe, fonbern fonne bem Xenfef wieber ben ^rolp bteten bnrd) ben lanben anf biefe $Bcrte : Sffictgt bn and), tt>ie bn ben crrn (5brijlnm and) gefref* fen bail nnb bod) baft ntuffen it)iebergeben, ja er bid) tt>ie^ ber gefrefifen bat ; a(fo fo(I|l: bn mid) and) nngefreffen lafc fen, n>ei( id) in ibm bfeibe nnb urn fewctnritteit lebe nnb leibe. Db man mid) briiber 3 an^ ber $3ett jaget nnb nnter bie (rben fd)arret, ba^ (affe id) gefcfyefyen ; aber barnm wift id) nid)t im ^tobe bletben, fonbern mtt mei^ ncm jScrrn (5bri)lo (eben, n>ie id) glanbe nnb n>eig, bag cr (ebt* (5^ ift aber nnb bteibt mot eine l)o()e ^mtfl/ fokfye^ faf# fen nnb glaubcn, bie il)ncn fd)tvcr mirb nnb mand)en l)ar^ 1 Den Kopf herhalten, " lay the head on the block," or yield to execution. " Must I not" is to be appended in English to such affirmatives with the interrogation point. See p. 235, Note 5. 2 O b i h in d e r Tod, etc. " though death offer him a thrust with his dart, and Satan yawn at him with fiendish fury." Be ut is obsolete for b i e t e t. 3 Ob man mich drtlber, etc. " If man will on this ac- count (on account of my religion) hunt me from the world and lay (scrape) me under the ground," etc. 34:4 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ten $ampf foftet, uub bcnnod) trimmer gmtg getentet fann werben urn unferd g(etfd)ee> unb 23(nte3 mitten, meldjeg md)t faun be$ (Sd)recen3 unb 3 a 3 e ^^ *>or bcm obe ofyn femt, 1 )od) mug e 2 angefangcn feim, unb ber roft ge* fajfet merbcm 2)emt wo mir ben ntdjt fatten, fo fonnte itiemanb bei) bcm Gh>attgeiio jlefyen unb befyarren, roeit ber eufe[ fo morblid) femb tjl, unb bie $Mt fo gufe^et, unb atteutfyalben fo s3 e ^<"/ ^6 ^nt elenbcr, Dcradjter 2)tng tfi auf (rben, benn em ^l)rt|?, X)arum nuijfen n>tr bagegen einen ^oftern, flarcfern unb benn aKc itr 2!ro^ uub 202Iu bemfetbtgen ^age n>erbet i^r er^ fennen, bag id) im SSater bin, unb t()r in mtr, unb tc^ in end). SOBenn e^ ba^u fommt, 3 (mitt er fagen,) bag if)r mid) wer# bet fe^en, au^ bent @rabe unb ^obe mteber auferjranben, unb l)inauf gum 3Sater gen mnmel faf)ren,, uub it)t folcfye^ on mtr prebtgen werbet : fo merbet i^r burd) ben et(ta,en @et|l unb euere eia,ene (5rfaf)rung inne tt>erben unb erf en* nen, bag id) tin SSater bin, unb and) il)r in mir unb it?teber* urn id) in end), unb affo mir mtt einanber @in ^udjen femt 1 O h n [o h n e] s e y n, obsolete to be icitkout, governs the geni- tive like entbehren. 2 Doch muss es, etc. " Still we must make a beginning and acquire confidence. For if we had not this, no one could stand by the gospel and hold out ; because the devil is so mortally hostile to us, and the world so cruelly assails us, and on every hand things go in such a way that nothing on earth is more wretched and despised than a Christian. Therefore, we must against all this have a confi- dence, higher, and stronger and more sure than all the insolence (de- fiance) and power of the world." 3 Wenn es dazu kommt, etc. "When it comes to this that," is a circumlocution like, " when it comes to pass that." The sense is the same as " When ye shall see me," etc. E i n K u- c h e n, all one. See p. 324, Note 1. E i t e 1. See p. 10, Note 4. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 345 rocrbcu : affo, bag c$ did ?ebcn fct), baburd) ibr in mir fe# bet, .qfeidttine id) im 2>ater unb ber 2>ater in mir lebet emt id) fete tm 2$ater, unb fo(d)c3 ^ebentf, bag id) in eige* ner "pcrfcu ben ob cnuitrgt, 1 bag il)r mitgt fagcn, ba$ attetit @>ett $ugebi>rct. \ivnad) 2 and) nxrbet ibr fagcn, bag id) in cud) bin* cmt ane mid) ber SSater aufcrwecfct, unb id) ben ob ge# frcflcn babe : atfo VDiU id) in end) and) bett ob freflfen, bag ibr bnrd) ben fanbcn an mid) bei^ obcg erren fet)n fotlt, unb nid)t fiird)ten bie ^Beft, ^enfel nod) 6Ke unb atte ibren ro$, bag ibr miififet a^bann fageu : (So(d)e ^raft f)abc id) $ut)er 3 in mir nid)t gebabt ; benn id) mitgte fcwct, al^ bie anbern, unter be3 $tcufc(^ ewalt, be^ ^tobe^ d)rec?en unb 5D^ad)t bleiben, 3(ber jet t) a ^ e ^ e ^ nen anbern s U?utb, ben mir Sl)rtjlu^ gibt burd) feineu eift, ba^ ran id) fpitre, 4 bag er bet) unb in mir tft, bag id) faun atte ber $Be(t, be3 ^tobe^ unb ^tenfe^ (5d)recfen uub ^rauett Derad)ten, unb bagcgen frobfid) unb freubig trc^en auf met* uen erru, ber brcbeu bet) bem SSater (ebt unb regieret. 21* 50Ber meine ebote fyat uub ber i(l^ r ber mid) Hebe t $Ber micfyaberlte* bet, ber wirb Don metttem SSater getiebet n? e r b e n, unb td)tt>erbe il)u Hebe n, uub mid) ifym cffeubaren. (5r bat |Te getrcjlct mit bem bobeu Sireft, bag (Te fotten in ifym nb er in it)nen fetw, n>e(d)e^ tjl ba^ ^auptjlitcf ber CEbriftfid)en ?ebre, baraud mir fohben SSerftanb baben, 5 bag 1 ErwUrgt [ha be]. "That 1 have in my own person de- stroyed death so that," etc. 2 D a r n a c h, in a similar manner, or accordingly. 3 Z u v o r, before receiving the Holy Ghost. 4 Daran ich spOre, " by which [courage] 1 perceive (trace) that," etc. For the force of a n in d a r a n, see p. 80, Note 3. 5 Daraus wir solchenVerstandhaben, " from which we learn," from which we have this understanding, viz. 346 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. mir nidjt in, nod) bnrd) nn3 feCbfl geredu nnb fetig merben, fcnbern in @f)rifto unb bnrd) GEbrifhtm, ber fitr mtg alle3 an3a,erid)tet, ba3 efcls erfitttct, (Simbe, ob nub enfe( nberwnnben l)at. >a3 merbet iljr fyaben (fpricfyt cr,) an mir, nnb barnad) mitt id) and) in end) gcpreifet merben, unb merbettf m it (fen befennen nnb prebigen in ber SEBeft* $ liegt aber aKe^ baran, ob bit fo(d)e^ ] bet) bir fitt)fe|l nnb ftubeft, (mie er broben, 3S. 15, and) cjefagt t)at,) bag bit biefen SDfomn Heb babejl. Senn mo i()r foki)e^ tt>al)r^ ^aftig gtdnbet, fo n>irb and) bie ?tebe ba fetnt, nnb merbet fitl)fen ener ^er affo gejlnnet : o i?ie( {)at St)ri|ln^, ntein lieber err, fitr mid) gctl)an, ben SSater ntir i)erfobnet, fein 23fnt fnr mid) tergo(fen, mit meinem ^obe gefampft nnb t()n itbentnmben, nnb atte^, n>a^ er ijat, mir gefchenc!t ; fottte id) benn il)n nid)t wiebernm lieben, bancfen nnb (oben, bie^ jien nnb cl)ren mit ?eib nnb ut ? SGBottte id) bod) et)e tt)itnfd)en r bag id) fein s D^enfd) geboren mare* 25arum (fagt er) gel)6ret gnm red)tfd)a(fenen bag er mid) Don eren lieb ^abe ; fonjl roirb er^ 2 (id) nid)t tfynm X)a er^ mng attein an ifym !)angen, nnb nid)t^ anber^ lieben nod) fitrd)ten 3ff aber bie ?iebe ba, fo fann (Te nid)t rnf)en nod) feijren ; 3 1 S o 1 c h e s, viz. an assurance that Christ has done all this for you. " Everything depends on this, whether, as he said above v. 15, you feel and experience this (i. e. have this confidence and trust) within you, so that this man becomes (is) dear to you." 2 Sonst wird er, etc. " Otherwise he will certainly not do it," viz. obey and trust. 3 F e y r e n. The word written fully would be feyeren. The e in one of the last two syllables is always dropped. In the old language either of them was dropped ; in modern German, the latter is always dropped and the former always retained. This rule applies to all verbs that have e r or el before the termination e n, or to ex- press it still more clearly, those verbs which have the derivative end- ings ern and e 1 n. Feiern or feyern, means, as a regular verb, to have a holy-day, to cease from toil. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 347 fie fa bret berauei, prebigct unb lebrct jebermann, t qerne ben Gbrifhim jebermann 1 in3 ftcrfe pflan^en, unb alle ju il)m bringen, roa.qt unb Idgt britber, 2 rcatf jTe foil unb fann. @old)e ?iebe roollte cr gerne in fte treiben burd) folcfye fycrfelidje 2Borte ; barum fyridjt cr : 3Gol)lan, id) lajfe cud) biefe ete, 3 bag it)r babt in ntir alTe^, n?a^ it)r begebret, 3Scrgetntng bcr Sihtbc, ben ^tmmcl, be^ SSater^ 5?ulb unb nabe ; altetu fel)et ju, bag ifyr feki)e^ recf)t gla'ubet, fo werbet if)r mtrf) tt>ol)( lieb l)abcn unb batten id) end) gefagt babe. fottcu aber bie mteberum fyabcn, fo fo(d)e ?tebe ibm l)aben, ober, n>a^ t qcnic(fcn JTe berfelben ? 4 Da^ id) ibnen (fprid)t er) wieberum tbnn : n>er alfo [)erau^ ret, nub (Td) eqeigt a(3 einen red)ten C^brifteu, ber VDtrb Don ntcincm SSater geltebet tt>crbeu, unb id) will ibn lieben unb mid) ifym offenbaren, 2Benn etn (5t)ri|l: angefangen hat, unb nun in d^rijlo iff, ajaubet unb lebt in iljm, unb nun ibn lieb bat, fa'bet an $u prebtcjen, befennen unb t()un, voa^ ein ^brifi: urn feineg ^errn tt)illen tl)un foil : fo greiffet il)it ber eufef an unb itberfdllet ibu mit foldjem olc!enbrud), innrr>enbi t q burcfy Slngjl: unb ^urd)t, an^menbig burd) allerlei) efabr unb Unglitcf, bag er feinen Xrofl fitl)let, unb lagt ffcl) anfe^en unb fitblen, 5 al^ fep ott broben im ^immel, nirfjt bei) un^ r unb l)abe unfer t)ergej|en X)enn er tterbtrget fid) fo gar, 1 J e d e r m a n n, is in the dative, " every man's heart." 2 Wagt und lasst drOber, etc. " It ventures and suffers (permits) for that purpose (for it) whatever it ought, or can." 3 Leizte. See p. 279, Note 5. 4 Was geniessen sie derselben, etc. " What benefit do they derive from it (what do they enjoy of it) ? I will reciprocate the act (love them in turn). He who goes forth and shows himself a true Christian, will be loved of my Father," etc. 5 Undlasstsichansehen urid fuhlen, "and he looks on and feels as if," etc. Literally, " allows himself to look at it and feel." 348 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. alg fet) e anS tnit imS 1 nnb mir feine iilfe mebr tton ibm baben : bag, mo er (Td) nidjt ergefgte, nnb lieflfe feine ?iebe fpitrcn, fo mitrben mir fcerffncfen nnb t>er$meifeln, 2lber lagt end) ba3 nid)t ba3 er & nefymen. 2 enn e3 tfl: nid)t alfo, n)te ibr fithfet nnb end) bitncfet ; benn id) babe nod) anbere nnb mefyr ^iiffe, bte erfte, anbere nnb britte ba^n, 3 nnb nntf end) ben ^itdten batten, 4 bag ifyr in ber -ftotb, barinnen it)r bencfet, tbt tyabt mid) Derforen, ntd)t fottt tter* finrfen, fonbern tt)iK^ mad)en, bag bie 3fnfed)tnna,, (gd)recfen nnb 3ftotb bennod) end) in mir foil 5 laffen Meiben nnb n?ie^ bernm rnid) in end), ob ibrtf rvol nid)t fo eben fitfylet gu ber tnnbe, menn ber enfel noiitet, (5r foil end) aber bod) nid)t freflfen, fonbern foil nnr eine SSerfnefynng fe^n, ob 6 tl)r red)t glanbet nnb liebet %a, id) mill fommen, nnb mid) fo offenbaren, bag ibr in ber 2lnfed)tnng fpitrct bie berl^lid)e ?iebe r fo bet)be, mein SSater nnb id), $u end) baben* 22, @ p r i d) t j n i 1) m 3 n b a 3, n i d) t ber 3 f d) a* riotfy: err, ma^ tfl^ benn, bag bit nng millfl bid) offenbaren, nnb nid)t ber 5Selt? ijl faft bie grage, al^ follte er fagen : (gollen benn allein fet)n, gelef)rt, flna., ^eilig nnb felig ? 1 Als sey es aus mit uns, " as if it were all over with us." See p. 286, Note 1. 2 Euch das Hertz nehmen. See p. 285, Note 1 . 3 Die erste, andere und dritte dazu, "a first, sec- ond and third besides," i. e. 1 have more than one expedient; I can resort to another, a second and a third. 4 Euch den Rttcken halten, " support, protect or aid you." This comes from one's putting his shoulders under another and holding him up. 5 Dennoch euch in mir soil, etc. " shall still leave you remaining (to remain) in me, and me, in turn, in you," or shall still let you remain, etc. 6 Versuchung seyn, ob, "a temptation or trial, [to show] whether, etc. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 349 bie $Mt ba$n fagcn ? Soften bemt fo met hecfujelefyrter, trcffltd)cr, bct(i,qcr Ventc, ^riejler, -]M)arifd'er, nnb ber befte $mt be$ ijanfcc" 2>olrftf, wcfdjcd bed) ottc SBofcf unb fo wet trcfflicfyer 1 ^Infehnt haben, bcnn wir nrme (er, al^nmal nidittf unb wcrbamntt fcj;n? 31? a 3 jntb gc t qcn thnen, bcnn a(^ fantcr nid)t^ ? SoUtcfl bit m'cfyt bctt l)ol)cn ?euren bid) offcnbarcn, bci) bcncn bay ^icgtmcnt, e* wait, ^hrc, nnb ba^n .qreflc ,v>ci(ic{fcit unb otte^btenfl tfl, unb ba ee 2 ^n hoffcu ware, baf? c^ wen fatten pcbcn wcrbe ? fodtcn wtr clcubcn ^cnte audrtd)tcn ? -IBer will n obcr jufattcn ? 3 3Btr werbcn ber d {ft cbcn btc gra,qc, baran ffd) ncrf) aKe ^ICeft t, Uncjctchrt, ^ci(i(]e nnb (Bitnber, fi?a^ ifl ed bettn (fprfd)t bie -Ji>e(t) urn 4 bfefe nene ^rebtgt? 3d) febe ba uid)t^ fonbcrtidjc^ ; iwbd bod) citcl t>erad)tcte ?ente, lanfene S5ubcn nnb ^ctte(t?o(cf, fo an bicfcv ^cbre SOBcnn jTcbcjl; bn, bag t qrc(fc ^crrcn, ^ouigc, fd)5ffe, ctw.ig baDon batten ? Da^ ifl ba^ mcnt nnb bie flarcfftc Urfad), warnm nnfcr utd)t fott rcd)t fet)n : 5Benn c^ wabr ware, fo ba'tte e^ ott wo( anbern ?cutcu ofcnbaret* $[?arnm fottenS bie I)ol)en dnpter nfd)t wijfen, bie ba fonnen unb fotten bie 1 TrefFlicher is here in the comparative degree undeclined, whereas two or three lines above, it is in the positive and genitive plural. " Shall then so many (of) very learned, excellent and holy persons, priests and Pharisees, and the very flower of the whole peo- ple, which is even called God's people, and [who] have so much bet- ter standing than we poor beggars, all at once become (be) nothing and be condemned ? What are we compared with them but mere nothing ?" 2 Und da es, etc. " and where it was to be expected that it would all go on well ?" 3 Z u f a 1 1 e n, which generally means to full to one, here means, to take ones part, to join one's party. 4 W a s i s t e s u m. See p. 247, Note 6. 30 350 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. reojeren unb reformiren ? ie follteng tl)im, fo mocfyte eg t>on flatten gebcu. 23, 24. 3efu3 antroortete unb fprad) $u i b m : UB c r m i d) I i e b e t, t> e r n> i r t) m e t n 555 o r t fatten, nnb mein 25 a t e r tvirb t b n ( i e b e n, u n b m t r n> e r b c n $ n i b m f o m m e n unb $B o b? it 11 n g bet) 1 1) m m a d) e n. 515 e r a b e r m t rf) n i cf) t H e b e t, b e r 1) a 1 1 m e i n e 3B o r t e n t d) t ieber 3uba^ (mttt er figen), btcfe (Sache tjl alfo bag man ntd)t mn^ fra.qen ; ob ^ontg, t tai)fer, ober ^erobe^, getcbrt nnb u '.qelebrt fct), fonbern ob fei) ? X^a^ tfl trie Slntmcrt auf bte grage. 3n biefer btcjt unb Regiment, ba^ id) mil anfaben foil nur g(eid) ten, 2 n>a$ in ber 5Belt ill, ciner tt>ie ber anbere, id) mill fei* nen an^fonbern, nod) an^mablem 3 feet 5Bclt Regiment miiffen mol fold)e Unrerfd)icbe fci>n ber ^)erfonen nnb (Etan^ be : ein ^ned)t fann nid)t crr fci)it, ber ,^err mng nicbt ^ncd)t, ber (Bd)ii(er nicbt 9ttciflcr fepn, nnb alfo fort ; aber bamit babe id) mdirS ^n thun, nnb gel^et tnid) nt'ditd an. 3d) aber vm'U ein fold) Regiment anrid)ten, barinne n>tr alle follen gleid) geltcn. (Jin ^ont t q, ber bent geboren nnb cin 5^err ifl iiber t>ict ?anb nnb ?ente, ber foil eben forrol frie^ d)en in ntetue i^aufe nnb jT b mir ergcben, al^ ein armer Settler, unb wtebernm foil biefer eben fomol ba^ (5ana,eli* urn tyoveii prebigen, ober bie (Sacramente einpfaben unb felig werben, al^ jener. 3llfo will er bie ente attgnmal 1 Also gethan, so constituted, or so managed. S o n d e r n ob ichs s e y, " but whether it is I [that am concerned in it]. 2 Soil mir gleich g e 1 t e n, etc " it will be to me in- different what there is in the world [as opposed to my kingdom] one person as well as another [one will pass for no more than the other] ; 1 will separate and sift out more," i. e. my religion is destined for all indiscriminately, and favors no particular classes, as the world does. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FODRTEENTH. 351 intb bitten $ncften branS maefcen, 1 bag etf cin aubcr n fcp, bcnn tie 5\>elr, fubrcf, we (die mug ba3 3bre and) babeu uub bebalteu, uub bviftu3 la'gt and) .qcben unb bleiben ; aber er if* uicbt barnm ba, bag er fold) 2Be(treid), fouberu cin $Simnfefretd) anndjte. >arum anrroortet er alfo bem 2(poffrl 3bci : &$ ttnrb nid)t baran licgen, 2 wa^ bte UBelt ijl, fonbern barauf ftebete, bag id) bir cjefvi,qt babe, id) u>ede midi bir oflfenbaren unb benen, fo mid) licb, baben ; nid>t, ber einc bret)fad)e giUbene (5roite cbcr fdjarlacfen n?ecf traqt, uid)t, wer ebel, mad)tig, ftarcf, reid), cjelcbrt, roetfe, fht.q unb beilij; beigt, fonbern, tt>er mid) tieb bat, @ctt <] e ^/ :j ^^ beiffe ^I6ni ( q, ^urjl:, ^>abft, S5ifd)ejf r ^ricfter, Doctor, ?aj)e, 5)err ober ^ued)t, f(ein ober <]rog ; in meincm DMdj foU aller fo(d)cr Unterfd)tcb anfboren. Unb mein SSater wtrb i I) n Ueben. ^)a^ i(l^, ba^ wir nun oft geboret baben, bag @britfu3 mit bobem (ei^ immer un^ binauf geucf)t ^nm SSater, wt^ ber bte (eibi^en ebancfen, 4 fo C^briftum om 3Sater fdietben uub bem ^er^en einbitben : >b id) n?o( an dxlyrijhim ^ n>er n>?ig aber, ob mir ber 35iter (jnabig til ? X^arum er ung immer in be^ 5>ater^ .^erls fubreu, bag wtr forgen nod) furd)ten fotlen, fo roir aitein ibn Keb babeu, unb roett au^ bem ^er^eu wcrfen unb reijfeu alien %&cn uub 1 Gleich und Einen Kuchen draus machen, "make them alike, and make one batch out of the en." See p. 324, Note 1. 2 Es wird nicht daran liege n, etc. " ft will not de- pend on what the world is, but it rests upon this [principle, viz.] that 1 have said to you (or, as I have said to you)," etc. 3 Gott gebe, Godgrant, i.e. " whether, in the providence of God, it be king," etc. 4 Wider die leidigen Gedancken, etc. " against the wicked thoughts which separate Christ fr )tn the Father, and frame in the heart [the question] though I believe," etc. 852 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. Unb fytebei) (fprtcfyt er wetter) foil e3 ntd)t bfctben, 1 bag id) nnb ber SSater tl)n Iteb baben, ber ba mtd) Itebet, fon* tern, tt>i r n> o 1 1 e n u i I) m f o m m e n it n b Iffi o b it* 1 u n g bet) t h in m a d) c n jc. : bag er nid)t alletn foil p# cfter femt Dor bcm $ufimftia,en 3>ni, enfel, ob, 6lle unb allem Unglitcf, fonbcnt foil and) l)ter anf rbcn nn^ bei) t'fym wohnenb babcn, nnb rotten 2 tciglid) fetne ctjle, ja nnb tfd)a,enoj]en 24 e r in t d) a b e r n i d) t ( t e b e t, b e r b a 1 1 meine $Borte nicfyt. ter baft bn furi.3 bie $Belt ab t qemal)let nnb befd)rteben/ it>a^ it)rer 5lrt t(l, nnb vt>ag t>on it)r gn fyalten ift, nemltd)' bag jTe (Sbnftiun nid)t fann nod) will lieb l)aben, nod) feine ilBorte fyalten. 24. U n b b a ^ 5B o r t, b a ^ tl)r ^oret, tftntdjt mein, fonbern bc^ SSater^, ber mid) gefanbt I) at 5Bte fann bod) ber 5Q?ann alfo reben ? arte ^nt)or 3 l)at er gefagt : 3Ber metn $Bort l)at nnb !)dlt :c v nnb jet fprtdjt er : ?0?eine ^IBorte ftnb ntd)t metn, fonbern meuteg SSater^* SB]te jTnb e^ benn gitgletd) fetne nnb ntd)t fetne HBorte ? ^^ tjl aber tmmer, bag 4 er ffd) fletgiget, ber *Hiebey soli e a nicht bleiben, "it shall not stop with this." a U n d [w i r] w o 1 1 e n. 3 H a r t e z a v o r, just before. Compare the phrase, hard by. 4 Es 1st aber immer dass, "It is always the case that he takes pains (or, he always takes pains) to speak in such a manner (in the mariner) that he may draw us to himself, and when he has drawn us to himself, then he flies (passes instantly) to the Father, so that when we hear him speak, we learn immediately to say [to our- selves], ' The Father says that to me through Christ ;' and [learn hence] to derive comfort, joy and love to him, so that [he can say] there is no other word of God to me or respecting me in heaven , EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 353 $Geife $u rebcn, bag cr un$ crlKui) $n fid) bringe, unb fo tt>ir gn ibm gebradjt finfe, barnadi flugS jum 2?ater jeudjt, bag, tDcnn tt>ir t'bn boren reben, a(3ba(b lerncn fagen : a3 re* tet bcr SSater bnrd) bicfen (Slmftitm $u mir ! unb ben rojr, grcnbe unb 2iebe gcgcn ibm fdibpfen, bag fein anber IBSert ju mir cber on mir im .s>tmmc( iiT, nnb and) bic fein anbere boren, bcnn bail ^hriiln^ nut mir rebet. l^ ajeid) fo t^icl, 1 ba0 cr fagt : 5Bcr mcin 5Bcrt fyalt, nnb : ^ie ^IBorte, fo id) rebc, fmb nid)t mcin, fonbcnt tc^ SSatcr^. IDenn jic gebcn nid)t tton mir, nnb id) bin nid)t bcr 3(nfana, bc^ ^Bort^ ; fonbcnt bcr SSater bat mir^ 6efol)(cn nnb midi gcbcijjcn, ba nicmanb fott gwcifcfn obcr fagcn : %a f (5briftn^ prcbi^ct wo( fiiffc unb fcin, wcr tt>cig abcr, wag bcr SSatcr brobcn fagt ? (5r troflct mid) n)o( r tag cr mid) (tcb l)abc, nnb jTd) mir ojfcnbarcn nnb bet) mir tt>o()ncn miK :c, 3<*/ wcnn cd gcwig ware ? 5Cenn id)^ om SSatcr fclbtf bortc, om immc( bcrab 9tcin (fprid)t er), beg barffl bit ntd)t, 2 nnb VDitrbcfi: Dcrgcb(id) barnad) gaffcn, fonbcnt fottil: beg a,eroig fci>n, bag ber 3Satcr im im* mcl fein anbcr 3Bort rebct, bcnn bad bit and mcincnt 50?nnbc bore ft, a(fo, bag eg wabrbaftig nid)t mcin, fonbern bc^ SSater^ Ifficrt i(i nnb fyeifiet 23,26, o (rf) e ^ babe id) g n end) g c r c b t, t e i I id) bet) end) geroefen bin. 2(ber ber Crofter, ber 5^cilige (^eifl, wefdjen mein SSater fenb# en n>irb in meinem Stamen, ber felbige nnrbtf end) a tt e I e t) r e n, nnb end) ertnnernatted beg, bag id) end) gefagt t)abe, even the angels hear no other than what (das for was) Christ speaks to (with) me." 1 Darum ists gleich so viel, etc. " So much is implied when he says, * lie who keeps my word,' and, ' The words,' " etc. 2 Dess darfst du nicht. " That you do not need." D e s s gewiss, " sure of this." 30* 354 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. (r ettet jnm 23efd)fng, bag er ttntf anfjleben itnb batton gefyen gn feinem eibcn ; bcnn big bat er atfeg nod) itber lifd) gerebt 3d) babe end) met nte$ gefagt, fprid)t er, euti) $u troften itnb gu jlarcfen, bag ibr follet nnseqagt femt ttnb end) nidjt betriiben meineS 2lbfrf)eiben^. 97un ba^ jtnb fofd)e D?ebe unb SDBort, bie iljr it)ot mtt ben Dljren boret, tt>et[ id) gcgcnwdrttg bin ; aber (Te pnb end) nod) $u l)cd), ttnb werbetS bed) ntd)t yerjleben, wenn ibr mid) fcbet t>on end) genommen, ba wtrb^ ba(b an^ mtb ucrgeflen fet)n, id) jefct end) fagc unb trojle. pentad) aber, n>enn ba men tt>irb ber Crofter, ben id) end) tterbeijfen l)abe, ber end) fein fcbren, bag ibr wobl t)er(lel)et nnb end) beg attetf erinnern fonnet, tt>a^ id) end) gefagt babe, onjl miirbe td)^ umfonfl gerebt t)aben, nnb ibr atfeg tjergeflen, a^ be* nen e^ jc^t nid)t gn ^er!jen g^b^t, nnb nid)t fonnen begreif* fen. Senn ibr fetjb nod) gu fdjwad) t)on g(eifd) nnb 93fut, faj]et nid)t^ met)r baon r benn bag ibr^ mtt Dfyren boret ; barnm mng ber ,s)eilige @eift fommen, ber e end) in britcfe nnb metfe bnrd) (^rfabrnng, bag ifyr t)erftebet r id) gemei)rtet, unb ben Xrojl empfa^et nnb fufyfet, fo ic^ eud) gegeben t)abe, 27. ^5en grieben laffe id) end), meinen grieben gebe id) end); nidjt gebe id) end), tt>ie bie 2Qe(t gibt ^Da^ ifl nun ein febr trofl(id) unb (ieb(id) ?e^ewort, bag er il)nen (agt mdjt Sta'bte unb (Sdjfoffer, nod) tfber nnb ofb, fonbern ben ^i^^^t, ate ben bod)ften Sd)a^ im Abim* me( nnb C^rben, bag jTe fein Sd)recfen nod) 2!ranren fotten Don ibm t)aben, fonbern red)ten fd)5nen/ gen>itnfd)ten griebe im eren. X>enn fo mi, a(^ an mir ift, (fprid)t er,) fottt il)r ntd)t^ anber^ bciben, benn eitet griebe nnb grcnbe. 5enn a(fo babe id) end) geprebiget, unb bin mit end) atfo umgcgangen, bag tl)r gefe^en unb erfannt l)abt, bag id) end) EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 355 mcm > a * ter cud) nut attcu $uabeu induct. ad tft baOefte, fo id) cud) (ajjcn uub gcbcu famt. enn batf ifl ber t)6d)fte griebc, wnttt batf jocrfe $itfriebcn til, tt>ie ntan fagt : er* fccntffrcnbe t|l itbcr al(c grcube, uub tmcbcrum: $erc(etb ilt ubcr aKc^ ^ctb. Crtf ift utd)t^ mit ber jltubcr^ uub ^tarrcufrcube Don fd)6ucn ^(etbent, eCbjdblcn, 50ob(nft, uub ^itbcrct) ; bcun btcfelbigc grcubc wabrct etttcu 3(ugcnb(icf, uub bletbet bod) ba3 Jocrl) ungcwtg uub iu Uufriebeu cbcr (Sorgcu* Xcuit e$ fauu md)t facjen, ba^ e^ emeu gnabtgen ott l)abc, l)at tmmcr ctu bcfed cwijTcn, ober fyat ctue fatfdje ^offnung, bte bod) jweifeft : ba^ e^ bod) tmntcr btetbct in Uufrtcbe nub Unruhc, om ^tcufel gctricbcat, ob fie eg g(etd) je^t nidjt fii()(eu in tbrer toffeu SBBeltfretibe, fo ftnbet (Td)^ bod), tt>enn ba^ (gtiiubfein fommt, bag ber Unfriebe augebct, Samm babt tt)r ja ntd)t^ ntel)r ^u flagen, id) taffe end) ben trejf* (td)eu, bol)cn (2d)a^, bag t(>v fount baben em gut, fcfu, frtebftd) ^erl) gegen ott uub mtr ; benn id) (aflfe end) bie uub g;renubfd)aft metue^ S5ater^ nub meine, 1 n>ie if)r anber^ an mir gefet)en nub get)6ret ^abt, beun (ieb^ lid)e, freuub(id)e 5Borte nnb 5Bercfe, nub biefelbige nid)t mem, fouberu be^ 3Sater^ fiub ; barnm babt ibr atte^, tt>a$ ibr toon mtr begebren ntogct, ob id) g(eid) i)on end) gefye, nnb it)r mid) nid)t mebr fet)et. 28. (5ner >er erfdjrecfe nid)t nnb fitrd)^ te ffd) nidjt 3br l)abt gel) 6 ret, bag id) end) gefagtf)abe:3d)gd) e bin nnb fomme tt)ie^ ber $n end). Sa befd)fcugt er ebeir, roie er erft(td) biefe ^rebigt ange# fangen l)at, nnb antt fagcn : 5Bet( id) nun Don end) fd)eiben 1 Meine, etc. " my (as you have seen in me and heard no other than) affectionate and friendly words and works." This is harsh, and hardly bears a literal translation. 356 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. mug, nub nidjt faun anberg fejm, benn bag ibr urn meinet* mitten mitjiet in bcr SOBelt Unfriebcn fyaben, bag end) ber enfel mtt feinem 2lnl)ang fyaffet, t>erfo(get nnb ptagt : fo ritftet end) bagn, bag il)r barnm nidjt erfdjrecfet nod) tter# gagt, fonbern getrojl: nnb guteg 9#ntl)g fetjb, tt>ie id) end) anfd'ng(id) nnb bigfyer Dermafynet fyabe bnrd) mand)er(et) trojttidje nnb ^errltd)e SSerbetgima,, nnb fo ml (Stitde er* ^et)(et, bie end) bitTig follen frol)Iid) nnb unuergagt madjen, bag it)r be^ gertngcn 5^ange(^ (bag id) (eiblid) t)on end) gefye, item, bag il)r mitflet in ber SOBelt angerlid) ?eiben fya* ben,) n>ol)f nnb itberreid)(id) ergo^et werbet. ?agt end) nnr bag nid)t erfd)recfen, ob ibr feben rcerbet mid) fo fd)anb(id) nnb jdmmeriid) gecrcn^iget, nnb it)t tterfhrenet nnb in gro^ gem ((enb nnb 3cimmer fet)it merbet Dor ber $Mt nnb enr^ em gitfyteit nad) ; e^ fott nicf)t fo bofe fetjn, ate jTd)3 (agt anfeben* Senn folefyer angerlid^et 3ntmer nnb ^Betriib^ nig, Serfolgnng nnb ^)(agen, fott nidjt emig md^rcn, nod) ftet^ bleiben ; benn id) n)itt ttneber ^n end) fommen nnb end) erfrenen, bepbe, (eiblic^ nnb geifttid). 28, 29, ^attet it)r mid) (icb, fo mitrbet tf)r end) frenen, bag id) gefagt I) a be, id) gefye gnm Sater; benn ber 3Sater ifl groger, benn i d^ U n b it u n babe i d) ^ end) g e f a g t, e I) e benn eg gefd)ie()t, aitfbag, n>enn eg nun gefrfjefyen tvirb, bag tfyr gldnbet* X)ag ifi and) ein tro|l(id)er 3 u f^^ 3B^^ wottt ifyr end) befimtmern meineg ^Beggebeng ? 3fyr fottt end) frenen. enn n>o get)e id) bin ? 9iid)t in bie bern gum Satcr, in bag berrlidje, crt)tge 5Heid), nnb tfyne eg end) gn gnte, bag id) and) end) gnr ^erlid)feit bringe. ^ar^ urn, VDO id) nid)t n?eggeben wollte, fo fottt it)r mid) bagn bak ten unb treiben, unb end) bagn frenen nnb gnter inge fet>n, bag id)g nnr batb tt)d'te. EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 357 ($d tjl aber cben a(fo gcrcbt, a(d iintcr tenon, bie nngernc von cwauber fdjctten, aid, SSater, Gutter unb $inb, 9)?amt itnb wjetb 20 ?Ud ba enter gum anbern fagte, ben er um bed (oangclii vwllcn ttcrlaffen tnitgte : Sieber (Eobn ober SSater, 9Kann cber 58eib, id) bcitte bid) met gerne bet) mtr hter ; aber bit bijt (]ctattft itnb bcntffen $n Iffiotan, fvinn ey nicfyt anbcrd fet)tt, fo fabre bin tn 9iamett ; fcnnen ti>ir un^ bier utd)t utebr feben, fo unr mid in jcnem ?cbcn. 3(ber, mcr fann fc(d)e^ tbun ? )ie fonnen^ wof, bie ibre ^tnber ober ^rennbe baflen, aber wd)t bie, fo ffd) nntcrcinanber (t'ebctn Unb ^war befennet er bier fefbjl:, bag er ntrf)t a.ewe t)on tbnen fd)cibet, nnb jte and) nid)t (]erne Don ibnt, unb mitflen jTd) bodi nntereinanber (ajjen. ^antm rebet er, $feid) tt)ie ein SSater git fcinen ^inbern : 3d) Tafie end) wot nid)t gerne ; aber tt>ei( e^ fei;n mug, fo gebet end) gnfrieben, nnb troftet end) beg, bag tt)r vmfiet, ^>o id) binfabre, ^enn id) fomme ttid)t in $tob, nod) gnr ^otte, fonbern in meine SSater^ d)oo^ nnb D^cid), bag id) end) and) babin bringe, ba il)r foltt tt)oM fet;n* Sarnm foKet it)r end) ja freuen meine^ @ebeni? X)enn e3 ifl nid)t ein fold) (Ecfyeiben, bag id) ert)ig Don end) bfeiben fottte, fonbern, betjbe, ener unb mem Seftetf, tt>tc er bernad) tm 16, dapitef, 7. and) fa t qt : ^ tfl end) gut, bag id) i)on end) gebe. X)enn e^ ifl end) bod) eine gennffe, cwige grenbe, ^err(id)feit nnb mad)tig D^eid) bejMet, bagu ibr fcnft utdjt fommen fonntet. |l^, bag er fpridjt :3cf)gel)egn , gum 2>ater geben, beigt nid)td anber^, benn and fern |lerbtid)en ?eben, (barinne id) l)abe bent SSater nnb end) gebtenct, gemebrieget nnter alien ^enfd)en,) bad ijl, and bent 3ammcrt()a( nnb efangnig gegangen, in bad berr(id)e, l)imm(td)e 3d)(og nnb eroige, gott(id)e $Bobnitng, ba id) re^ giercn werbe gnr 5Ked)ten bed 35aterd, nnb ein err fei>n itbcr atfed, wad im timmc( nnb anf (^rben ijl, >e(d)ed id) 358 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. nidjt fann tbnn in biefem ientfbanfe unb fned)tfid)en 2Be* fen ; id) mng $nttor meinen >ienji: angricbten, unb mem eben baran feem 2>arnm ift nid)t beffer, bemt je el)e je beffer batten gegangen, bag id) gecren(3iget toerbe, nnb bar* narf) DerHa'ret, bamit ber et(ta,e etft gefanbt, nnb htnb tt>erbe, bag id) mid) gnt* D?ed)ten be3 2Sater3 gefet nnb mein Dteid) eingenommen fyabe* Da^ foKte ener ^troft nnb grenbe fepn, nnb foKet^, be^be, mir nnb eudh gcrne cjonnen, tt>enn ihr^ Dcrffitnbct nnb mid) ttollfommttd) (ieb ^attet, n)ie i^r ()ernad) (ernen werbet 25enn id) end) barnm jefet fof^ rf)e3 ^nt)or fage, bag thr^ fycrnad) atfo erfahret nnb feibfl innen merbct, bag e^ bie SOBaftrfjett ift, nnb id)^ trenlid) nnb mit end) gemeijnet fyabe* fc$t cr nun Urfadje, nnb fprid)t : X)enn ber 35 a* t er i (I a, r 6 f f e r, b e n n i d) 3lt^ wotttc er fagen : Da^ [off and) ein proffer ^roft fet)tt, bag id) fomme in ba3 groflfe SHeid) meine^ SSater^, ba id) n>erbe regieren, gleid) bem 23a* ter, in ewiger errfd)aft ^^ etd)e^ er jet nid)t fann thnn nad) nnb in fetnem fned)tlid)en 3Jmte, tt>ei( er gefanbt mar in ben >ienft nnb Semntt), barinne er pd) aKer feiner gottficfyen ^err(id)feit geanflert, (trie (2t spank ug, ^)l)tfipp. 2. 7, fagt,) nnb eine^ jlned)te^ e|la(t an (Td) genommen : bag er bemfelben nad) nid)t attein ffeiner ift, benn ber SSater, fonbern and) genicbriget nnter atten 5ften* fd)en* Saturn moKte fid)^ ntd)t reimen, bag er jTd) feiner err(td)feit annebme, ebe nnb $nt>or er foW) fneii)t(id) 5tmt an3gerid)tet batte* 5((fo i|I^ Don fetnem gegennxirttgen Slmte, fo er jet anf (Jrben fii^rete, red)t gerebet : i'er 2Sater i|l groffer, benn id), it>eif id) jet ein ^ned)t bin ; aber, n>enn id) wteber bort()in fcmme, 511 meinem 3Sater, ba EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 359 roerbe id) proffer tm'rben, item fid) fo grog, afg ber $ater iff, bag i|l, id) wcrbe in glcidjer ewaft nnb 2D2ajejMt mit ifym berrfdjen. (5 old) eg fyabe id) end) gefagt, (fprirfjt er,) efyc, benn eg gefdjiebt, an f bag, n>enn eg nun gefdjefyen n>irb, bag ibr gfanbct. a mewtet er nidjt alf ein big (e^te (Stitcf, fonbent, n>a^ cr burd) bad gan^ (5aptte( gcrcbet hat, a(^, bag er nnft it)iien bte SEBohnnng berctten, item, bag ber Xrcfter fell ^t ihnen f om^ men, wnb @r famt bem 25ater tDteber git ihnen fornmen ttnlL X)a^ fa^e id) end) wot jefcunb ; r aber ihr Derftehctd je^t jtidjt. ^Dod) fage td)$ end) barnm, bag, n>cnn e^ nnn fo gefd)ieht, bag ifyr al^benn gnritcfe bencfet : 2 Siehe, bat er nn^ atteS gnorgefagt, ba er t)on unS (c^eiben te ; ba finb n>ir w>ie bte (Stocfe gcfcflen. bctritbt nnb fdjrorfen, nnb babcn nid)td batten fcerftanben* 9ftitn aber ben nnb gretffen tr>tr, tt>ad er gemetwet hat 2C, bet it)r benn gtdnben, (fprtd)t er,) cb ibr wcf mid) ntd)t mebr febet, famt ber ganfeeu (5t)riftent)eit bi^ an ben ften 30, 31 3 d) roerbe fort mebrnid)tt)ie(mit end) reben; benn eg font mt ber gitrjl biefer 2Be(t, nnb at nid)tg an mir, 5(ber, anf bag bte $8 eft erfenne, bag id) ben -Sater (ie# be, nnb a(fo tt)tte, mtc mir ber QSater gebo^ ten bat: flefyetanf, nnb (agtnngtton^in* nen gel) en, ie 3eit ift bter, bag id) batton mng, 3 nnb big tft bie fe^te ^>rebigt, bie id) tbne. X;enn ber Xenfel fommt, nnb gend)t bat)er mtt 3uba nnb feinem 5^anfen, unb vr>t(l an mid) nnb 1 J e t z u n d obsolete for j e t z t. 2 ZurUcke dencket, " call to mind [and say]." 3 Daeon muss, " must [go] away." 360 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. (Seine 1 an^ridjtem 3d) mug ifym fyerfyaftcn, nnb tft bofe unb $ornia., cr mewtet, mid) $n freffen ; aber e6 fott ibm fo geratben, bag e ibm foil bcu 23and) jureiffen. >enn cr bat fein D?ed)t nod) djulb an mir, id) babe eg nid)t tterbienet, nnb bod) au$ bofcm, gifftigem ag mid) an* greiffet nnb vtwrget ; er foil e$ be^ablen. ranet 2 a(fo bent enfe( l)eim(id) mit fcfyeelen ^(ngen, fid) fclbft gn fta'rcfen n?iber feinen bittern 3^nt r nnb bie 3nncjer gu tri?(lcn (nne* pe e^ nod) nid)t t)erfteben), 2(1^ foKte er fagen : fomm b e ^r u ^ Derfuc^e, tt>a^ bit fanft, frig nnb ttntrge, n>ie bn ttin% 3lber bn fcHfl an bem 55ig(ein 3 gu fatten nnb $n fd)ltngen l)aben, bag bit bason emnrgen mngt. 3d) witi bir nneber an^ bcm 53and)e reiflfen, bag bn mngt mid) nnb tn'e( mebr, bie bn gefreffcn baft, tt)ieber (af^ fen. Unb bag id) fofd)e^ (eibe, tbne id) nid)t barnm, at^ tt>are id) bem Xenfel nid)t flare! a,enna,, ben id) oft an$ge* forfeit nnb sertrieben babe, fonbern barnm, bag e^ foil fnnb werben in ber $Qeit, bag id) mcinem SSater gcl)orfam bin, nnb bag man an mir febe nnb erfabre bc^ 2Sater$ $Bt^ (en, bag id) end) bnrd) mein SBIut nnb ob crtofen fctt. 9lffo triplet nnb ermabnet er pd) ferbjl: nnber ben (eibtgen $!enfeL X^enn e gebet ibm nun nntcr bie 2(na,en, nnb be^ ginnet ba3 5per^ jn trcffen, bag cr fo gar jammerlid) foil tterlajfnt femt, gelaflert nnb aup fd)anbtid}fte gebanbett werben ; aber c3 fd)abet nid)t. ?ag nnr bcrgcfyen, weil ed bcr SSater nnfl, bag ber Xenfel foil nberawnben nnb ge# fd)wad)t n?erben, nid)t bnrd) 5D?ad)t nnb ^raft nnb berrltcfye ^Bnnbertbat, mie ^ni)or bnrd) mid) gefdjebcn ijr, fonbern bnrd) (S)eborfam nnb IDemutb, in ber bodjften o5d)tt>ad)beit / (5renJ,3 nnb ob : bag id) mid) nntcr ibm rcerfe nnb mein 1 A n in i c h u n d das Seine, "do his work on me." 2 D r a u e t. "He thus threatens Satan slily with leering eyes," etc. 3 An dem Bisslein, etc. " But you shall have in the mor- sel something to chew." Biss, bit. Bisslein is a diminutive of this. COMMENT ON PSALM 118 : 1. 361 unb 9)?ad)t fabrcu laffe, fiber eben baburd) a lie fein 9?ed)t unb s l)?ad)t tbm roicbcr abfd)lage unb genmtne, bag er ami) an end) fetn JWedjt unb 902acfjt babe, weil er mid) ofync alle (Brfntlb angreijfet unb ermorbet, unb atebenn fcor mtr mug rceidjen unb flteben, fo tt>eit bte 28eft ill, burch fetne eigene d)it(b i?ernrtbci(t unb tterbammt* X)a^ fed af^ benn in alter $5e(t geprebtget unb offenbar werben, bag id) fohfyed getban bcibe, mdjt au^ Unfraft ober Dbnmad)^ fon# bern au^ (55eborfam bet^ 23attr3, ben ^teufel a(fo jtt itber* n>inben, bag baburd) fetue (bre, bei)be, feiner gottlidjen @nabe unb utc gc t qen un^ r unb feiner alfma'cfytigen e^ tt)a(t tt)tber ben eufe(, gepreifet unb ait^gebrcitet, unb bie @f)riftcn baburd) getrojlet unb geftardfet, unb affo be^ unb gar ^rjloret werbe. Slmen. COMMENT ON PSALM 118, V. 1. >anfet bent ^errn, bettn er tft freuub(id> unb feinc @itte wafyret emtglid)* liefer 3Ser^ iff eine gemetne X;anffagung fitr atte SOBol)^ t^at, fo ett ber err er^etgt atter 5BeIt ta'g(id) ofyne Unter? lag, in atten ingen, beibe guten unb bofeu 9D?enfd)em ba^ ijl b?r bdtigen ^}rcp()fteu $Beife, n>enn fie ott in berlid)en ^ingeu leben unb banfen wollen,^ fangeu ffe Ijorf) an unb bolen e3 weit, foben il)n ^uglctd) ingemeiu, in alien feinen ^[Bunbern unb ^Bobltfyatem Sllfo b l ' e / wit btefer fonberlicf) @ott (obt urn bie tyvftfte ^Bo^ltbat, ber er^etget, na'mlid) um ^^rtflitm unb feiu D^eid) ber nabe, ber 2Belt t)er()eigen unb je^t er^eiget, fangt er an mit gemeinem ?obe unb fprid)t : anfet bem erru : benn er ip ja bod) ein l)eqlid)er r gndbiger, frommer, giittger ott, " 362 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ber immer itnb immer tt>ol)ftbnt nnb eine ($itte itber bie ait? bere mit anfen itber nng au$fd)itttet. enn bit mngt biefe 28orte : ^frennbfid)" itnb ,/feine i'ttc", nicfyt fo fait itnb rot) lefen, nod) baritberfyin lanfen, tt>ie bie 9?onnen ben ^falter Icfen, ober trie bie (Sfyorfyerren nnb @borfd)it(er fokfye feine SOBorte Mocfen nnb benlen in tl)ren ^ircfyen, fcnbern benfcn, ba^ e^ (ebenbige, tren(irf)e nnb reidje 5Bcrte jmb, bie 5(Ke^ nnb StKc^ faflen nnb ein^ bitben, ndmltrf) bag ($ott frennb(irf) ifl, nid)t tt>ie e in^enfrf), fcnbern ber t>on rnnb feine^ ipeqcn^ geneigt nnb gnnjlig i(l, immer ^n fyelfen nnb wob^nt^nn, nnb nidbt gerne ^itrnt nocf) |lraft, er miigte ed benn 1 tl^nn, nnb tt>erbe itberl)an^t ba^n gegwwngctt nnb gebntngen burrf) nnablagtirfje, nnbng? fertile nnb t)erfl:oc!te S3o^t)ett ber ^enfdjen, ba$, wo er ^itr? nen mng nnb jtrafen, ba fonnte ein 9D?enfcf) nid)t fo lange Barren, fonbern flrafte l)itnberttanfenbmal el)er nnb fyarter, benn er tbitt* Unb foldje frennb(td)e nnb gncibige wtft bemeidt er ftber atte ?0?aagen reid)(id) nnb gemaltigtid), mit feiner tdg(id)en nnb ett)igen @itte ; n>ie er bier fprid)t : (Seine @itte tt)d bret ewigtid), ba$ tft : ot)ne unterlag tbnt er nn^ immer ba^ S3efte, fdjaflFt nn^ ?eib nnb <5ee(e, bebittet nn^ Xag nnb 9carf)t, erbd(t nn^ obne Unterfag bei'm ?eben, la$t (Sonne nnb ?02cnb nn^ fdjetnen, nnb ben imme(, gener, ?nft nnb $Bafler nn3 bienen, an^ ber @rbe $3ein, ^crn r gntter, e, ^(eiber r of$ nnb atte 3ftotbbnrft tt>ac^fen, giebt nnb ilber, an^ nnb cf r 5Beib nnb ^inb, SSiefy, , S^W e / Snmma, vt>er fann e^ 5(((e^ er^d t)fen ? Unb bieg Sttte^ bie giiKe 2 nnb nberfdjnxhtgtid) atte 3l)re, atte age, atte tunben, atte 5(ngenb{icfe + )enn vr>er fann al* Tein bie itte red)nen, bag er Qrtnem giebt nnb erbdtt ein gefuubed 5tnge ober anb ? 5Benn n>ir franf ffnb ober 1 Er mtlsste es denn thun, " unless he is obliged to do it." 2 Die Fa lie. See p. 235, Note 8. COMMENT ON PSALM 118 : 1. 363 beren @ine$ entbebrcn mitjfen, fo ficbt man atfcrcrjl, fiir cine 3Bob(tbat itf, ci .qcfnnbetf 3(na,c, cine gcfnnbe n qeqen einen qcfunben eib ? 5Ba^ ift a((er $3c nnb ut gcqcn etnen aa,, ben nn^ bie (icbe (Sonne tag(td) mad)t ? ^Benn bie (gonnc einen Xaq nid)t fd)iene, wer tvottte nid)t tobt feiw ? Dber wa^ bittfe ibn atte fein nt nnb errfdjaft ? ^llBa^ ware atter HBetn nnb 5^alt)affer in atfer 5Be(t, wcnn wir fottten einen aa, 5Gaffer^ mangefn ? $Ga3 waren atte bitbfd)cn @rf)toffer, anfer, am ben, ^pnrpur, qolbene ^ctten nnb (Jbefqefteine, atter @d)innc! nnb .jooffart, wenn ttnr etne^ SSaternnfcr^ bie Snft (ana, 1 entbebren fottten* @o(d)e (fitter otter ffnb bie grogten nnb affen?erad)tet* ften, nnb barnm, ba^ fte gemetne ffnb, banfet ott 9tie* manb barnm, nebmen fie unb brand)en berfetbigen ta t qlid) immer fo babin, at^ mngte c^ fo fetw, nnb wir batten a.an$ ^ed)t bajn, nnb bitrften ott ntcfyt etnmal bafiir banfen* ^abrcn bieweil jn, baben bad er$c[eib jn tbnn, forgen, babern, fh-eiten, ringen nnb wittben, nm itbria, etb ober nt, nm (bre nnb ^Bcffnfl, nnb (Snmma nm ba3, we(d)e^ foldben obgenanntcn ittern nid>t ba^ 5Daffer reid)en fonnte, nnb nn^ anf a3 madjt bcr feibige ettfcf, ber uttd nidjt gonnen mag, bag wir otteS itte unb ber reidjen tdgftcfyen SPBobftbat brau* djen nod) erfcnneu fomtten, ttn'r tt>dren alf$u feh'g. te^e, nun fage bit, mte Did ffnb n>ob( eute anf @rbcn, bte btefen 23er3 Derfleben ? SOBaljr tfl e$, fctn S3nbe ijl: fo bofe, menn er in ber irrf)e fofd)cn SSer^ ftngt ober fonji bort, er Icipt fid) bi'tnfen, er Derftel)e ibn itberan^ n>obl unb babe fbn nun bt anf ben SBoben au^gefcffen, ber bod) fern gan$e$ ?eben lang nie baran gebad)t nod) gebanft bat fitr bte SKifd), bte er&on fefner Gutter gcfogen bat, gefrfjroetge benn fitr alle bte @itte otte^, bie tbm @ott fein ?eben fo un$al)ftrf) unb nnfdgttd) er^eigt bat, bag er atte tnnben aKetn feiner Unbanfbarfett balben mebr (Si'tnbe getban t)at, benn ?aub unb ra im 5Ba(be tjl, wo ott ein 5Bud)erer mare, unb tt>otfte genaue D^edjnung for# bent. )arum follte biefcr 9Ser^ bittig einem jeglidien 5i^enfd)en tagltd), ja a((e 2(itgenbtirfe im 5)er^en unb 9ttunbe fei)n, fo oft er age, trdnfe, fdbe, borte, rod)e, gienge, jli'inbe, ober tt)te, wo, tt>enn er feiner @(teber, eibe$, @ut^ ober einiger ^re^ atnr brand)t, banttt er baran bdd)te, bag wo tbm ott nid)t fo(d)e^ gu brand)en gdbe nnb wiber ben ^ettfet erl)ie(te, fo mitgte er wob( entbebren, unb batteben ffd) ermabnte unb gewofynte ^u einem frobltd)en ^er^en unb htfHgen (auben gegen ott mit X)anffagnng fitr fofd)e feine tagtidje itte unb fagen : $BoMan, bu bifl bod) ja ein freunblidjer, gittiger @ott, ber bu ewiglid) (ba^ i]i : tmnter nnb immer, obne Un*= terlag) mtr llnwitrbigem unb Unbanfbarem fo reidblidje itte unb 3Bol)(tt)at er^eigeft ; ?ob unb Sanf mitflfefl; bit baben, Unb ba^ btent and) ba^u, bag man bantit (Trf) trojlen faun COMMENT ON PSALM 118 : 1. 365 in alTcm UnfalL enu tt>ir (Tub fohfyc 3^^^^9 C lini) f wetdjc s Jjtdrh)rcr, ftvnn und nur ciu $ein webe tlntt ober ctu fleined SMdttcrfein anjfdbrr, fc fonncn tt>ir immc( unb (rbe ttottfdjrcien mit tflagcn nub ir ten bagegcu anfebeu bie grogen un^dbtigen ittcr, bie nod) i)orl)anbcn jTnb, unb tt>a^ e^ tverben fottte, tro er feine @itte gar Don un3 menben unb uebmen rootfte. Iffiie ber frcmme tbat, ba er fprad) : ,,>aben mir uted empfangen >errn, marnm n>o((teu ttnr ba^ Uebet nid)t leibeu ?" , berfelbe fonnte bieg fd)6ne (5onfitemini unb biefen gar fein jwgeu unb fprad) : SSie e3 ott gefattt, fc gebe e3, bed Jperru ?tame fei) gcfobet x. @r fdttt nid)t ak (ein auf bad itebef, n>ie mir ^uppenbeiligen tbun ; fonbern bebcUt t)or 5(ugen atte iite unb ^Sabrbett bed i^errn, trojl^ et pd) bamit unb iiberwinbet bad S3cfe mit cbu(b 3((fo fo((en wir and) atte unfer Ungtiid ntd)t anberd aufe^ ben nod) annebmen, benn aid ^iinbete und ott bamit ein ?id)t an, babei n)ir feine (5)itte unb $]ofy(tbat, in anbcrn uu^ $a'b(tgen titcfen fcbcn unb crfennen mcdjten, bag n>ir und biinfen liegen, ed mare fold) gcringed Uebel ciu ^ropflein 1 Veitstanzen und pestilenzen, "act like one with St. Vitus's Dance, or in the pestilence. 1 ' 2 Cowards, jacks. 31* 366 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ^Bajfertf in em groge Better, ober em gitnfOin in em gro* ge$ ^Baflfer gefatten, bamtt ber 2Ser3 mtS befannt nnb lieb* lid) mitrbe : ,,)anfet bem errn, benn er ifl ja bod) freunb* fid) nnb feine @itte mdfyret emiglid)/' umma, mir fonnen gegen ott fetn grogere^ nod) beffe* re3 SOBerf tl)im, nod) ebleren otte^bienfl: er^eigen, benn ibm banfen, mie er fe(bft fagt, $>f. 50. : ,,Da anfopfer i|l meine @t)rc ober ottegbienji, nnb baffelbe ij^ ber 2Beg ba^n, bag id) mein >ei( fef)en laflc/' @o(d)e^ Dpfer ge* fdttt it)m itber atte Dpfer, tifte, ^(ojler nnb wa$ ba feint mag, mte er fagt 'Pfahn 59. : ,,3d) mitt ben Stamen Toben mit meinem ?iebe, nnb mitt ibn fyorf) el)ren mit X)a^ mirb bcm errn bejfer gefatten a(^ ein Barren, ber Corner nnb ^fatten l)at/' 5Bteberum, g(eid)mie ott toben unb banfbar fet)n ber t)6d)jle otte^bienjl: ijl, beibe t)ier anf @rben unb bort ernig^ (id) ; alfo ijl and) Unbanfbarfeit ba^ atterfd)dnbttd)jl:e unb bie t)od)|l:e Unefyre @otte^, me(d)e^ bod) bie $Mt Dott, Dott ift, bi^ an ben ^immel t)inan. 5tber ott ift fo cin gitfiger err, mie biefer 25er^ fingt, bag er urn folrfjer Unbanfbarfeit mitten bennod) ntd)t abtdgt nod) anfbort mor= jutbnn, fonbern, mie er l)ier fagt, feine itte md'bret emig^ tid, (dgt immer fi'tr nnb fur feine ottne anfget)en, beibe itber nte nnb S36fe, nnb (dgt regnen beibe itber Danfbare nnb Unbanfbare, 5D^attl). 5. iebt S5nben mot)l fo met (fitter, ^linber, emalt al^ ben ^eiligcn, nnb Diet me^r, befyntet Dor ^rteg, ^peflilen^, ^benrnng unb atten ^)(agen be^ $teufef^* a3 ift nnb hetgt eine gottltdje i'tte, bie nm feiner 25o6l)eit mitten abfdgt ober mitbe mirb. (m ?0tenfd) Dermag fold)e i'tte ntd)t. XJenn Unbanfbarfeit faun fein 9D?enfd) (eiben, nnb pub 23iefe bari'tber rafenb, tott nnb un* ffnnig gemorben, mie bie ^iftorien Don ^tmon fd)retben @g tji menfd)(id)er ^tatnr gu fdjmer, SOBob(tt)n unb eitet bafiir empfaben* INDEX TO THE NOTES. The first figures refer to the page, the second to the notes. A. A b e r, page 2, note 7 p. 35, n. 6. Compare p. 230, n. 5. A bf alien, p. 242, n. 1 end. Abgott, p. 70, n. 6. A b h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. A b 1 a s s b r i e f e, p. 176, n. 2. Abnehmen,p. 26, n. 5 p. 242, A b r i c h t e n, p. 50, n.2. [n.l end. A b s c h il u m e n, p. 106, n. 3. Adelig, p. 221, n. 7. Adjectives not declined in the neut. p. 4, n. 3 p. 80, n. 2 p. 103, n. 3 not declined if a predicate, p, 61, n. 1 ending in e r, p. 150, n.2 two or more, p. 157, n. 2. A e f f e n, p. 108, n. 7 p.205, n. 1. Aggravatio, p. 172, n. 3. Alexander, p. 263, n. 7. Alkair, p. 131, n. 5. A 1 1, in composition, p. 71, n. 1. A lie, how declined and used, p. 5, n. 1 p. 56, n. 2 p. 57, n. 5 p. 70, n. 8. A 1 1 e r ii r g e r s t e n, p. 137, n. 2. A Her Dinge, p. 183, n. 3 p. 26-<, n. 3 p. 249, n. 4. A 1 1 e r d u r c h 1 a u c h t i g s t e, p. 92, n. 3. [n. 3. Allererst, p. 16, n. 2 p. 225, A 11 e r lei, p. 3, n 4. Alle r wege n, p. 306, n. 1. A llesammt, p. 97, n. 3. Allhier, p. 71, n. 1. Alliterations, p. 44, n. 2. Als da sind, p. 128, n. 2 p. 178, n. 2. Als die, p. 286, n.2 p.283,n.7. Also, p. 3, n. 2 p. 28, n. 1 p. 96, n. 6. Am ersten, p. 1, n. 2. A n, p. 40, n. 1, end p. 80, n. 3 p. 99, n. 5 p. 132, n. 3 p. 204, n. 4. Anbrechen, p. 39, n 4. Anbringen, p. 197, n. 2. A n d e r, p. 2, n. 6. Anders, p. 7, n. 5 p. 334. n. 1. Distinguished from sonst, p. 227, n. 2. A n f a h e n for a n f a n g e n, p. 166, n. 4. A n f a n g e n, p. 39, n. 4. A n f e c h t u n g, p. 22, n. 1. A n g e h e n, p. 234, n. 2 p. 180, n. 1 p. 203, n. 1. A n g e 1 e g t, p. 50, n. 2. A ngelege n, p. 70, n. 2. A n gesehen, p. 15, n. 8 p. 98, n. 4 p. 144, n. 6 dass, p. 7, n. 6. Angst mac hen, seyn, wer- den, p. 293, n. 2. A n h a n g, p. 53, n.2 p. 99, n. 7, end. A n h e b e n, p. 39, n. 4. A n h Qb e for an ho be, p. 101, n. 1. A n laufen, p. 315, n. 1. A n 1 i e g e n, p. 70, n. 2 p. 169, n. 4. A n n e h in e n, p. 26, n. 5. s i c h annehmen, p. 55, n. 2 p. 267, n. 1 p. 231, n. 1 p. 255, n. 4 end. A e n d e r n, p. 28, n. 3. Ann at en, p. 113, n. 1 end. 368 INDEX TO NOTES. A n r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 p. 40, n. 1. A n s e h e n, p. 103, n. 1. A n s p a n n e n, p. 48, n. 3. A nth ei 1, p. 42, n. 3. Arm, poor, p. 44, n. 4. Arrangement of words, p. 2, n. 5 p. 10, n. 1 and 3 p. 11, n. 1 p. 13, n.l p. 97, n. 4 and 5 p. 99, n. 1 p. 145, n. 5 p. 148, n. 3. Article of one substantive govern- ed by another in the genitive, p. 17, n. 1. A u, or A u e, p. 57, n. 4. A u c h, p. 2, n. 4 with a nega- tive, p. 8, n. 3 p. 28, n. 1 p. 16, n. 3. A u f d a s s, p. 37, n. 1 p. 59, n. 3 p. 94, n. 1. Aufdiessmal, p. 6, n.l. A u f e n t h a 1 1, p. 28, n. 2 p. 285, n. 3. [n. 1. A u f e r b e n, p. 137, n. 5 p. 148, Auffallen, p. 31, n. 1. A u f g e h e n, p. 142, n. 5. A ufgese t z t, p. 5, n. 1. A u f 1 e g e n, p. 10, n. 5. Aufmachen, d. 164, n. 2. A u f n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5. Aufrichten, p. 50, n. 2 p. 220, n. 2. A uf se he n, p. 281, n. 1. Auf [stehen],p.67,n.2. Comp. p. 35, n. 3. Aufthun, p. 164, n. 2. Aufwerfen, p. 151, n. 5 p. 253, n. 4. Augen, vor, aus den, in die, an d e n, p. 221, n. 2. Aus, over, p. 286, n. 1 end p. i 289, n. 3. A u s b u n d, p. 265, n. 5. Ausbttndiger, p. 322, n. 1 . Ausgezogen, p. 210, n. 5 end. A us hang, p. 53, n. 2. A usle gen, p. 244, n. 5. A u s m a h 1 e n, p. 316, n. 2. A u s n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5. Ausrichten, p. 50, n. 2. Ausser, p. 74, n. 5. Auszug, p. 17, n. 2. Auxiliary verbs omitted, p. 19, n. 2 p. 61, n. 3 p. 93, n. 3 p. 94, n. 6 p. 114, n. 2. B. Bann, p. 171, n. 2. B a n n e n, p. 143, n. 3. Bass, b e s s e r, p. 328, n. 2. Befehlen, p. 32, n. 5. Befreien, p. 83, n. 3. Befugniss, p. 259. n. 1. Begangniss, p. 168. n. 2. (S i c h)b e g e b e n, p. 165, n. 7 p. 251, n. 2. B e g e h r e n, p. 32, n. 1. Begier d e, p. 32, n. 1. B e g i n n e n, p. 39, n. 4. Begnaden, p. 222, n. 2 p. 237, n. 3. BegnUgen lassen, p. 135, n. 4 p. 160, n. 2. [3, n. 3. B e g r e i f e n and B e g r i ff, p. Behende, behendiglich, B e h e n d i g k e i t, p. 93, n. 7. Beherbergen, p. 65, n. 1. Bei, p. 120, n. J. Beifallen, p. 31, n. 1. B e i 1 e h r e n, p. 74, n. 4. B e n e d e i e n, p. 62, n. 2. B e q u e m, p. 145, n. 2. B e s c h i c k e n, p. 70, n. 3. Beschirmen, p. 84, n. 5. B e s i t z e n and B e s i t z e r, p. 99, n. 6. B e s s e r 1 i c h, p. 9, n. 4. B e s s e r n, in the inf. with z u m, p. 14, n. 3. B e s t e h e n, p. 66, n. 3. B e s t e 1 1 e n, p. 303, n. 3 end. (I h in das) b e s t e s e y n, p. 184, n. 4. [4. B e y s e i t e g e t h a n, p. 305, n. B i b e 1 n, pi. p. 149, n. 3. Biege and B i e g u n g, p. 51, Billi'g, p. 102, n. 3. Bis da her, p. 280, n. 2. B i s c h o f, p. 45, n. 5. B i tter s U s s, p. 161, n. 2. B las e n, p. 50, n. 1. B 1 a 1 1 u m k e h r e n, p. 124, n. 6 w e n d e n, p. 1 35, n. 2. INDEX TO NOTES. 369 B 1 e i b e n, peculiai use of, p. 63, n. 5 p. 284, n. 1. d ab e i b 1 e i b e n, p. 229, n. 4 p. 286, n. 5 p. 298, n. 3. fS e y n u n d) b 1 e i b e n, p.235, n. 6. B 1 6 ss e n, p. 73, n. 3. B o ge n, p. 51, n. 2. B o r g c n, p. 60, n. 1. (den) Braten riechen, p. 237, n. 4. Brauchen, with gen. p. 94, n. 5 for gebrauchen, p. 101, n. 3 p. 106, n. 4. B r o s a m 1 e i n, p. 329, n. 2. Bra s ten, p. 79, n. 4. Bachse, p. 218, n. 4 end. Btlrgermeister, p. 228, n. 2. B u 1 1 e r b r i e f e, p. 176, n. 3. C. Cardinals, number of, p. 107, n. 3. Causative verbs, p. 27, n. 1. Catholic testimonies, p. 109, n. 2. Christenheit and Chris- ten thum, p. 11, n. 3. Colon, when used, p. 2, n. 2 p. 81, n. 3 p. 199, n. 3. C o m m e n d e n, p. 126, n. 3. Confessionalien, p. 176, n. 5. D. Da as an expletive, p. 43, n. 4 p. 46, n. 3. for w o, p. 105, n. 1 distinguished from d o r t, p. 223, n. 2. Da nicht von, for davon nicht, p. 130, n. 3. D a, d a r, d r, p. 42, n. 1. D a c h, p. 25, n. 3. D a b e i, p. 157, n. 3 p. 143, n. 1. Dadurch for wodurch, p. 335, n. 1. [3. Dagegen halten, p. 299, n. Dafe r n, p. 97, n. 7. D a f Q r, p. 13, n. 6 p. 15, n. 1 and 5 p. 16, n. 4. [3 end. D a h e i m s u c h e n, p. 219, n. D a h e r, p. 106, n. 2 p. 227, n. 4. hither , /tere, p. 252, n. 2. bis daher, p. 280, n. 2. Daher wachsen, p. 227, n. 4. i D a h i n, p. 80, n. 1 g e h e n, p. 281, n. 5 fallen, p. 270, n. 2 r ichte n, p 283, n. 3. D a m i t, p. 94, n. 3 p. 38, n. 5 p. 65, n. 6 p. 96, n. 1 for w o- m i t, p. 294, n. 2. D a n e b e n, p. 94, n. 4 p. 193, n. 3 p. 285, n. 4. D a n k e n, for Verdanken, p. 171 , n. 3 end. Daran, p. 129, n. 1 W o h 1 d a r a n, p. 290, n. 2. Daran 1 i e g e n, p. 207, n. 2. Daraufseyn, p. 116, n. 5. D a r a u f h al t e n, p. 238, n. 1. Darbeut for darbietet, p. 281 , n. 8. D a r e i n, or d r e i n fallen, reden schlagen, p. 166, n. 1. [n. 5. D a r i n n e for d a r i n, p. 16. D a r n a c h, p. 345, n. 2. Darob for dar fiber, p. 72, n. 2. D a r b e r, p. 188, n. 5 p. 190, n. 1 p. 231, n. 7. Dartlber arbeiten, ba li- en, bieten, bringen, g e- hen, halten, hergehen, hingehen, koramen, etc. p. 231, n. 7. Darum d a ss, p. 77, n. 1. Das, referring to what follows, p. 184, n. 2 p. 237, n. 1 for w a s, p. 255, n. 1 p. 15, n. 4. D a s s, place of in certain instan- ces, p. 285, n. 3 p. 292, n. 4. Das s i n d, p. 294, n. 1 p. 124, n. 2. Dative, p. 35, n. 7 after ne fa- in e n, p. 52, n. 4 p. 124, n. 7 p. 173, n. 2 Expletive, p. 59, n. 1 p. 124, n. 2. D a u c h t e n, p. 7, n. 7. D a v o n, p. 71, n. 3. D a z u, p. 45, n. 2 p. 233, n. 2. Dazu brauchen, essen, halten, haufen, k o ra- in e n, g e h e n, t h u n, p. 233, n. 2. Dazu than, p. 94, n. 4. 370 INDEX TO NOTES. D e c k e n, D e c k, D e c k el, p. 25, n. 3. D e i n, genitive for d e i n e r, p. 46, n. 4. (A n) d e m d a s s, p. 280, n. 1. D e n n, then, p. 214, n. 2 end for a 1 s, than, p. 5, n. 3 p. 8, n. 4 after n i c h t, p. 19, n. 1 after k e i n, p. 97, n. 2 ex- cept, after es sei, sie h a- b e n, etc., p. 37, n. 2 p. 73, n. 5. D e n n o c h, p. 66, n. 5 p. 16, n. 3. D e r, for d e r e r, p. 4, n. 2 p. 106, n. 5 p. 115, n. 1 end d e r, he, more emphatic than e r, p. 243, n. 4 p. 284, n. 2 d e r (with d e r understood), ke,who, p. 39, n. 1 p. 43, n. 4 p. 48, n. 1 p. 61, n. 6 d e r d e r dis- tinguished from der wer, and derjenige welcher, p. 14, n. 5 p. 35, n. 4. D e r g 1 e i c h e n, p. 4, n. 2. Derhalben, p. 8, n. 2. D e- r o h a 1 b e n, p. 217, n. 1. Derjenige welcher, p. 14, n. 5. D e s s, for d e s s e n, p. 4, n. 2 p. 126, n. 2. D e s s g 1 e i c h e n, p. 4, n. 2. Desshalb, p. 246, n. 4. D e s s v i e 1, p. 231, n. 6. Com- pare p. 241, n. 1. Desselben ungeachtet, p. 318, n. 2. Desswegen, p. 217, n. 1 p. 246, n. 4. D e u t e n, p. 244, n. 5. (A 1 1 e r) D i n g e, p. 183, n. 3. D i c h t e n, p. 4. n. 1 p. 73, n. 2 Dichten und T r a c h- t e n, p. 4, n. 1. D i e, those, p. 7, n. 3 p. 19, n. 3. D i e s s m a 1, p. 6, n. 1. D i e w e i 1, p. 26, n. 2 p. 104, n. l_p. 106, n. 4. D i n g, p. 58, n. 3 p. 26, n. 1 p. 254, n. 3 p. 275, n. 3. D o c h, p. 66, n. 5. Dorf, p. 27, n. 2. D o r t, distinguished from d a, p. 223, n. 2. D r a u e n, for d r o h e n, p. 95, n. 1 p. 155, n . 3. Dran seyn, p. 319, n. 3. D r i n n e n, p. 71, n. 4. D r ob e n, p. 42, n. 1. D (i n k e 1, p.74, n. 6. D u n k el, p. 254, n. 3. D a ri k e n, p. 22, n. 3. Dunne s i e h e n, p. 233, n. 4. Durch, p. 126, n. 1. D u r c h g 6 1 1 e m, p. 331, n. 2. Durchlauchtig, p. 92, n. 3. Durchtreiben, p. 253, n. 2. D ttrfen, p. 54, n. 4. Durst, daring, p. 336, n. 3. Duster, p. 254, n. 3. E. E, final omitted, p. 5, n. 4 p. 6, n. 3. E b e n, p. 171, n. 3 med. E d e 1, p. 221, n. 7. E h e r, p. 57, n. 2. E i g e n with the genitive, p. 3, n. 5 p. 119, n. 2 with m e i n, sein,etc. p, 216, n.2. Comp. p. 214, n. 2 end. E i g e n 1 1 i c h, properly, literal- ly, p. 45, n. 3. E i n, when an adjective, p. 16o, n. 3 when it goes before an adjective, p. 267, n. 3. Ein urn den andern,p. 116, n. 1. E i n b 1 a u e n, p. 321 , n. 2. Ein bilden, p. 289, n. 1. E infall, p. 291, n. 1. E i n f a 1 1 e n, p. 242, n. 1 end. E i n i g, for e i n z i g, p. 93, n. 2 p. 149, n. 1 p. 210, n. 2 p. 251, n. 5. Einerlei, p. 77, n.2. Com- pare, p. 3, n. 4. E i n mal, p. 48, n. 2. Einnehmen, p. 26, n. 5. Einrichten, p. 50, n. 2. Einsetzen, p. 164, n. 4. Eitel, p. 10, n. 4 p. 82, n. 1. Elen d, p. 44, n. 4. Ellipsis of verbs, p. 35, n. 3. INDEX TO NOTES. 371 E m p fa h on, for e m p f a n g- j e n, p. 298, n. 5. E n d e c h r i s t, p. 202, n. 3. Entbchren, p. 263, n. 1 . E n t h a 1 1 e n, p. 54, n. 5 p. 83, n. 2. En t rath en, p. 263, n. 1. E n t r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2. E n t s a g e n, p. 165, n. 7. Entscbuldigen dass, p. 229, n. 1. E n s e tze n, p. 51, n. 4. E n t w i s c h e n, p. 67, n. 3. E r, he, indefinite use of, p. 7, n. 1 termination, 98, n. 1 adjec- tive termination, p. 150, n. 2. Erdreich, p. 64, n. 1. E r d r e i s t e n, p. 155, n. 3. Erfahrene, p. 73, n. 6. Er fall en, p. 125, n. 4. E rgreifen, p. 67, n. 3. (Sich) e r he ben, p. 210, n. 3. Erjahren, p. 138, n. 1. E r k 1 a r e n, p. 244, n. 5. E r k 1 tl g e n, p. 120, n. 3. (Sich) e r k U n e n, p. 155, n. 3. Erlernen,p. 276, n. 2. E r 1 6 s e n, p. 83, n. 3. See 1 o- s e n. E r n s t, p. 47, n. 3. Erre tte n, p. 83, n. 3. Errichten,p. 50, n. 2. Ersetzen and ersessen, p. 138, n. 1. Erst, or a 1 1 e r e r s t, p. 16, n. 2 p. 225, n. 3. Z u m e r s t e n, amersten, fors erste, p. 1, n. 2. E rtappen, p. 67, n. 3. Erwarten, p. 1 18, n. 2. Erwehren, p. 108, n. 6. E r wischen, p. 67, n. 3. E r wii rgen, p. 129, n. 1. E r z men, p. 21, n. 2. Ertzwiderchrist, p. 292, n. 3. E s, with a nominative after its verb, or as an expletive, p. 52, n. 1 omitted, p. 17, n. 5 p. 35, n. 1 p. 36, n. 2 p. 101, n. 2 p. 116, n. 4. Es si nd, es giebt, p. 22, n. 4 p. 27, n. 1. Es sey denn, p. 37, n. 2 p. 73, n. 5 p. 133, n. 2. Essen, p. 51, n. 1. Z u e s s e n h ab e n, p. Ill, n. 3. Etlic he, p. 1,n. 3. E t w a, p. 245, n. 1. E t w a i g, p. 43, n. 3. F. Fa hen, for fan gen, p. 281, n. 9 med. F a h r e n, p. 30, n. 4 p. 153, n. 1 e i n h e r, p. 151, n. 4. F a h r 1 i c h and F a h r, p. 15, n. 2. Fallen, causative of fa 1 1 e n, p. 27, n. 1. Falls, p. 97, n. 7. F as se n, p. 26, n. 5. Fast, p. 153, n. 4. Fa ul, p. 253, n. 1. Fehlspruch, p. 245, n. 3. Fein, p. 24, n.4. Feind, p. 59, n. 4. Feldkirchen, P .178,n. 1. Feminine nouns declined in the singular, p. 3, n. 5 p. 141, n. 4 p. 173, n. 2 end. F e y r e n, p. 346, n. 3. F i n s t e r, p. 254, n. 3. F 1 e c k and F 1 e c k e n, p. 27, n.2. Flinte, p. 218, n.4 end. Folge thun, p. 209, n. 1. F o 1 g e n, to persecute, p. 38, n. 2. Foreign verbs, how formed, p. 23, n. 2. F r e i, p. 16, n. 4. Freies Leben, p. 159, n. 2. Frei lich, p. 236, n. 3. F re s s e n, p. 51, n. 1. [n.4. F r e u d i g and F r e u d e, p. 32, F r e u n d, p. 59, n. 4. Frisch, p. 139, n. 1. Froh, p. 32, n.4. F r 6 h 1 i c h, p. 32, n. 4. F r o m m, p. 49, n. 2. F u g, p. 259, n. 1. (die) F Q 1 1 e, like die M e n ge, p. 235, n. 8. . Fundlein, p. 130, n. 1. Fur for v o r, p. 6, n. 4. F a r u n d f a r, p. 100, n. 4. 372 INDEX TO NOTES. FQr s i c h h i n, p. 249, n. 1. Furs erste, p. 1, n. 2. FQrbrachti g, p. 79, n. 4. F Q r d e r, or f 6 r d e r, p. 6, n. 5 p. 84, n. 3. Far sat z, for Vorsatz, p. 6, n. 4. Fttrsichtige, p. 214, n. 1. F r s t, p. 53, n. 4. Farwendet, p. 235, n. 1. G. Gar, p. 36, n. 3 p. 139, n. 1. Gasthaus and G a s t h o f, p. 65, n. 1. Ge, omitted, p. 166, n. 4 p. 140, n. 4. Geb en, for ge geben, p. 166, n. 4. Gebieten, p. 32, n. 5. G e b r e c h e, p. 232, n. 2. G e b r e c h e n, p. 68, n. 1. Gebuhren, p. 226, n. 1 . Gedenken, p. 217, n. 3. Gefahrte, p. 220, n. 5. Gef alien, p. 31, n. 1. dass war ge fa lien, p. 283, n. 6. Gegen, p. 46, n. I in compari- son with, p. 132, n. 1 p. 152, n. ]. G e g e n p a r t, G e g n e r, p. 34, n. 5. G e g n e r, p. 59, n. 4 p. 34, n. 5. Gegenurtheil, p. 76, n. 2. G e h e i m and G e h e i m n i s s, p. 66, n. 4. G e h e n, p. 153, n. 1 for ge 1- teri, p. 12, n. 1. Gene f U r d i c h, p. 16, n. 8. G e h t, impersonal, p. 23, n. 5. Geistlicher, p. 45, n. 5. G e 1 a s s e n, p. 65, n. 5. Geldstrich, p. 176, n.l. G e 1 e g e n h e i t, p. 55, n. 1. G e 1 s t e n, p. 30, n. 2. Gemach, p. 219, n. 1. , Ge me in h i n, p. 71, n. 2. G e m e i n i g 1 i c h, p. 71, n. 2. G e m t h, p. 60, n. 3 p. 61, n.l. Genitive governed by indefinite adjectives, etc. p. 13, n. 3 p. 22, n. 4 p. 63, n. 2. before its governing noun, p. 17, n. 1 p. 44, n. 1 p. 61, n. 2 p. 138, n. 3 p. 143, n. 2. of man- ner, p. 68, n. 3 p. 117, n. 1 p. 268, n. 4. as predicate, p. 146, n. 1 p. 148, n. 2 p. J 53, n. 1. without the ending s or es, p. 140, n. 3 p. 110, n. ] ? of feminines, p. 3, n. 5 p. 141, n. 4 p. 173, n. 2 end. governed bybra.uchen, p. 94, n. 5 g e d e n k e n, p.46, n. 4 g e n u g, p. 108, n. 3 gewarten, p. 264, n. 3 end e i n, p. 96, n. 2 p. 127, n. 1 p. 171, n.l m ehr, p. 13, n. 3 p. 106, n. 5 p. 150, n. 3 p.127, n. 5. 1 a c h e n, p. 46, n. 4. s e y n, p. 198, n. 5. s p o 1 1 e n, p. 177, n. 2 p. 247, n. 2 t r 6- s t e n, p. 296, n. 2 p. 307, n. 2. v ergessen, p. 46, n. 4. verstehen, p. 74, n. 1. w e- n i g e r, p. 108, n. 1. w e r t h, p. 147, n. 3. G e n o s s, p. 220, n. 5. Genugsam, p. 257, n. 3. G e n u g t h u u n g, p. 2, n. 3. G e p 1 a r r, for G e p 1 e r r e, p. 18, n. 8. Ge r a t h e n, p. 38, n. 3 p. 156, n. 2 p. 233, n. 1 p. 240, n. 7. G e r i c h t, p. 72, n. 3. G e r i n g, p. 55, n. 3 p. 249, n. 2 p. 281, n. 4. G e r n e, p. 7, n. 4 p. 193, n. 3. G e r U s t, for g e r U s t e t, p. 313, n. 1. (S i c h) g e t r a u e n, p. 155, n. 3. G e s a g t s e y n, p. 240, n. 3 p. 289, n. 1. Gescheut, p. 281, n. 9. Geschichte, p. 274, n. 5. G e s c h i c k, p. 207, n. ] . Geschickt, p. 145, n. 2. Geschmeisse, p. 229, n. 7. Geschopf, p. 32, n. 3. Geschrei, p. 203, n. 2. Gesegneten, see segen. G e s e 1 1 and its compounds, p. 220, n. 5. Gese tz, p. 11, n. 5. Gesichte and Gesichter, p. 25, n. 2. INDEX TO NOTES. 373 G e s i n d e, p. 119, n. 4. G e s p a n, p. 48, n. 3. Gespenst, p. 178, n. 4 u n d T r u g, p. 293, n. 6. GespUgniss, p. 96, n. 1 p. 209, n. 4. G e s t a 1 1, for G e s t a 1 1 e t, p. 319, n. 1. G e s u c h, p. 206, n. 1. G e s u n d, distinguished from w o h 1, p. 13, n. 6. G e t h a n, p. 15, n. 6. G e t r o s t, participle for the im- perative, p. 299, n. 2. G e w a 1 1, p. 54, n. 2. Gewarten, p. 264, n. 3 end. Gewest for gewesen, p. 280, n. 3. G e w i s s, p. 249, n. 5. G e w i s s e n, p. 74, n. 3. G e w i s s 1 i c h, p. 42, n. 2. Gewohnen, Gewohnung, Gewohnheit, gewo'hn- 1 i c h, p. 28, n. 2. Gewtlrm und Geschwd rm, p. 110, n. 2 p. 144, n. 3. (E s) g i e b t, e s s i n d, p. 22, n. 4. G i e r and g i e r e n, p. 32, n. 1 . G 1 a u b e n, plural, p. 178, n. 6 p. 192, n. 2. G 1 e i c h, p. 21, n. 3 p. 215, n. 4_p. 197, n. 1 gleich a Is, p. 152, n. 3 g 1 e i c h a 1 s da, p. 238, n. 2. Gle i ssner, p. 24, n. 6. G16 ssle i n, p. 131, n. 1. Gl Ock, p. 21, n. 1. G n a d e, p. 23, n. 1 . Gockelnarr, Gochel, G o- g e 1, G i g e 1, p. 146, n. 3. G o 1 1 g e b e, p. 351 , n. 3. G o 1 1 L o b, p. 9, n. 4. Gott vor sey, 240, n. 7. G 6 t z e, p. 70, n. 6. G 6 1 1 z e n b i 1 d, p. 70, n. 6. G r a t h or G r a t, p. 236, n. 2. G r e i f e n, p. 26, n. 5. See B e- g re i fe n. Grimm, p. 38, n. 1. Groschen, p. 105, n. 6. Grund und Boden, p. 123, n. 3 end. 32 G u 1 d e n, p. 105, n. 6 p. Ill, n. G u n s t, p. 52, n. 5. Gut distinguished from w o h 1, p. 13, n. 6 p. 33, n. 1. (das) Gut, and die Gate r, p. 52, n. 2 p. 61, n. 1 and 2. Gut t h u n, p. 20, n. 3. (Z u) gute with a dative, p. 126, n. 1. (Das) G Q t e, p. 52, n. 2. Gate, gUtig and G a t i g- k e i t, p. 52, n. 2. H. Haar breit, with gen. p. 47, n. 5. H a a r 1 e i n, p. 329, n. 2. H a b e n, as an auxiliary omitted, p. 9, n. 3 with certain partici- ples, p. 288, n. 3. Haben gut thun, or sagen, p. 20, n. 3. Haben z u with an infin., and with or without an ace., p. Ill, n. 3 p. 151, n. 3 p. 269, n. 2. Habendfor wohlhabend, p. 69, n. 1. H a d e r and Haderrecht, p. 122, n. 2 and 4. H a 1 b e n and h a 1 b e r, p. 8, n. 2 p. 10, n.2 p. 200, n. 7. H a 1 1 e n, p. 16, n. 4 p. 117, n. 1. (U e b e r or a u f e t w a s) h a 1- t e n, p. 239, n. 2. Haltetauch dess, p. 293, n. 4. (E u c h in d e r) H a n d, p. 258, n. 3. (Z u t r e u r) H a n d, p. 231, n.3. Handel, p. 29, n.2. Handel und Wandel, p 28, n. 3. H a n d e 1 n, p. 29, n. 2. H a n d 1 u n g, p. 29, n. 2. H a n g, p. 53, n. 2. Han gen in and an, p. 132, n. 3. Harnisch and Har nisc fa- ze u ge, p. 231, n. 5. Har ren, p. 39, n.2. Harte zuvor, p. 352, n. 3. Hartiglich, p. 142, n. 4. 374 INDEX TO NOTES. Hauptbuben, p. 125, n. 1. H a u s w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. H a u t, p. 95, n. 4. H e b e n in various phrases, p. 106, n. 1. He i 1 an d, p. 59, n. 4. H e i 1 w a r t i g e, p. 215, n. 2. H e i m 1 i c h, p. 66, n. 4. H e i m 1 i c h k e i t, p. 66, n. 4. Heimsuchen, p. 219, n. 3 (p. 237, n. 3). H e i s s e n, p. 26, n. 3 p. 32, n. 5 p. 48, n. 5 p. 61, n. 4. H e i s s e n for g e h e i s s t, p. 238, n. 5. H e 1 f e n, to be of use, p. 39, n. 3, p. 54, n. 3 p. 190, n. 5 p. 227, H e 1 f e n for ge ho If en, p. 238, n. 5. H e 1 1 e r, p. 105, n. 6. H e r a b f a h r e n, p. 326, n. 4. Herberge, p. 65, n. 1. Her far for hervor, p. 282, n. 3. Herhalten, p. 343, n. 1 . Hernachrnals, p. 165, n. 6. Hervor (k o m m e n), p. 35,n.3. (Euch das) Hertz neh- m e n, p. 285, n. 1. (E i n) H e r t z f a s s e n, p. 289, n. 2. (Z u) Hertzengehen,p. 279, n. 7 end. Herumziehen, p. 316, n. 1. H e u, p. 25, n. 4. H e u c h 1 e r, p. 24, n. 6, end. Hienach a h m e n, p. 251, n.2. H i n 1st h i n, p. 223, n. 5. Hin her (Geist h i n, Geist her), p. 253, n. 4. HinfOrder, p. 6, n. 5 arid p. 13, n. 6. H i n d e r n, p. 98, n. 7. H i n r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 p. 57, n. 1. H i n t e n n a c h, p. 266, n. 1. H i n w o 1 1 e n, p. 304, n. 1. H o c h, p. 224, n. 4 (h o h e), p. 266, n. 1 p. 267, n. 5 p. 227, n. 3 p. 152, n. 4. H o c h f a h r e n, p. 205, n. 4. H o f, ace. ? or gen. ? p. 110, ri. 1. H o f fe n, p. 26, n. 4. (bin) d e r Ho f f n u n g, p. 268, n.4. Hohe Schulen, p. 201, n. 1 p. 221, n. 5. H 6 r e n, p. 23, n. 6. H 6 r t e n for g e h 6 r t, p. 238, n. 5. Hungers sterben, p. 68, n.3. 1. 1 g, termination appended to par- ticles, p. 43, n. 3. Ihm for sich, p. 151, n. 6 p. 208, n. 3. I hr, for i hr e r, p. 161, n. 2. das Ihrrige, die I h r i g e n, p. 70, n. 8. 1 m me r, p. 41, n. 2. Immerdar, p. 69, n. 5 p. 84, n.3. Indefinite pronouns, adjectives, etc. p. 110, n. 3 p. Ill, n. 2 p. 137, n.3 p. 181, n.2. 1 n d e s s, p. 36, n. 5. Infinitive after s e y n, p. 12, n. 3, p. 222, n. 8 p. 268, n. 6 p.275, n. 4 p. 259, n. 2 end used sub- stantively, p. 13, n. 6, and with the def. article, p. 14, n. 3 p. 103, n. 1. Infinitive of foreign verbs, p. 23, n.2. Infinitives, as participial nouns, p. 42, n. 5 p. 44, n. 2 p. 68, n. 2 p. 148, n. 4 p. 161, n. 2 187, n. 3 p. 272, n. 2. Infinitive form for the participial, p. 238, n. 5. 1 n h a b e r, p. 99, n. 6. Inne h a be n, p. 99, n. 6. 1 n s g e m e i n, p. 71 , n. 2. Interrogation point with an af- firmation, p. 235, n. 5. Inversion of a clause, p. 13, n. 1 p. 15, n. 7. I r e n, infinitive termination, p. 23, n. 2 p. 143, n. 6. I r g e n d e i n e r, p. 1, n. 3. Irregularitat, p. 172, n. 2. Irrenforirre machen, p. 253, n. 3. INDEX TO NOTES. 375 1st und bleibt, p. 300, n. 1 p. 235, n. 6. Item, p. 7, n. 2. J. J a, p. 228, n. 3. J a h r, time indefinitely, p. 220, D.i. J a h r t a g, p. 168, n. 2. J a m m e r n, p. 301 , n. 2. Je, p. 41, n. 2 p. 261, n. 2. J e, provincial for J a, p. 16, n. 5 p. 151, n. 2. J e in a 1 s, p. 41, n. 2 p. 277, n. 1. J e m a n d, p. 43, n. 1. Jetzund, p. 359, n. 1. J un g fe r, p. 58, n. 1. J u n k e r, p. 58, n. 1. Z u J u n- kern ziehen, p. 263, n. 2. K. K a n d e 1, p. 155, n. 1. K a n z e 1 e i, p. 117, n. 2. Kecklich, p. 14, n. 2. K e h r e n, p. 33, n. 2 p. 218, n. 4. Kemnot, or Kemnate, p. 240, n. 5. K e n n e n, p. 54, n. 6. K e u 1 c h e n, p. 264, n. 3, end. K i r c h e n w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. Klein, p. 249, n. 2. Kloster, p. 104, n. 4. K 6 n i g, p. 53, n. 3. K 6 n n e n, to know, p. 221 , n. 4 p. 273, n. 1 p. 275, n. 2. K 6 n- n e n for g e k o n n t, p. 238, n 5. Kraft, p. 54, n. 2. Krebs, p. 231, n. 5. K r i e g e n, p. 256, n. 2. Kreuzer, p. 105, n. 6. Kuchen, p. 324, n. 1 p. 351 n. 1. Kunst, p. 191, n. 1 p. 193, n. 2 (p. 252, n. 4) p. 292, n. 1 p 300, n. 4. K u r z, various phrases formec with it, p. 1 16, n. 3. Kurzlich, p. 64, n. 3. Kuhr or K U r and its com pounds, p. 236, n. 1. K Or ass, p. 231, n. 5. L. Lange n, p. 11, n. 2. asse sich irren, p. 184, n. 3. as sen, for nachlassen, p. 12, n. 2 for gelassen,p.238, n. 5. a s s e n w i r, and 1 a s s e t u n s, p. 222, n. 7. asst sich nicht thun, p, 249, n. 3. h 6 r e n, p. 249, n. 3. denken, p. 249, n. 3. aster, p. 34, n. 1. aste r n, p. 34, n. 1. Lateinischland, p. 223, n. 6. Lauter, p. 10, n. 4. Leben der Hoffnu ng, p. 68, n. 3. Lebtag, p. 318, 1. L e c k e n, to leap, p. 261, n. 1. Le he n, p. 113, n. 1. Lehne n, p. 60, n. 1. Lehren and le men, for ge- 1 e h r t and g e 1 e r n t, p. 238, n. 5 (p. 295, n. 2). (S i c h) 1 e h r e n, p. 259, n. 2 end. (bei) Leib, p. 191, n. 3. L e i c h 1 1 i c h, p. 186, n. 2. (sich) leiden, p. 134, n. 2. (gern) leiden, p. 193, n. 3. Leidige, p. 291, n. 2. Lei he n, p. 60, n. 1. (sich) lernen, p. 128, n. 1. Comp. p. 259, n. 2 end. L e t z e, p. 279, n. 5. Liebe, adj. p. 180, n. 4. Lie- ben for lie be, p. 223, n. 1. (Eure) Liebe, p. 216, n. 6. Liebe rs, p. 318, n. 1. Liege n, oben, unter, p. 38, n. 4. L i e g e n with a n, p. 169, n. 4 with wo, p. 285, n. 2. Liquids, I, n, r, dropped in Eng., p. 178, n. 6 med. Los we r den, p. 125, n. 3. L 6 sen, p. 9, n. 1. Lust, las ten, luster n, L u s t d i r n e, p. 30, n. 2. L u s t i g, p. 32, n. 4. M. M a c h e n, p. 20, n. 3 end. 376 INDEX TO NOTES. M a c h t, p. 54, n. 2. Mag und soil, p. 286, n. 4. M a g d 1 e i n, p. 264, n. 4. Mai, p. 134, n. 1. M a 1 e d e i e n, p. 62, n. 2. M a n c h e r 1 e i, p. 3, n. 4. M a r s h a 1 k, p. 36, n. 4. M a u e r, p. 100, n. 3. M a u 1 p f e r d, p. 147, n. 2. M e h r with a gen. p. 13, n. 3 p. 106, n. 5. M e h r e r and mehrerer, p. 18, n. 1 p. 67, n. 4. (das) m e h r m a 1, p. 205, n. 5. M e i n, gen. for m e i ne r, p. 46, n. 4. M e i n e n, p. 47, n. 2. M e i n u n g, p. 264, n. 2. M e i s t e n s and am meisten, p. 171, n. 3 p. 214, n. 2 end. (die) Menge, p. 222, n. 3. Cornp. p. 235, n. 8. Mensc h, p. 200, n. 1. M e s s b r i e f e, p. 176, n. 4. M i 1 d e, p. 60, n. 2. free, with gen. p. 205, n. 2. M i r, d a s s i n d m i r, p. 124, n. 2. M i s s e n, p. 263, n. 1. M i s s t r e u e, p. 84, n. 6. Mitten i n, p. 295, n. I. M 6 g e n, use of, p. 24, n. 1 for g e m o c h t, do. p. 1 18, n. 2 p. 238, n. 5. M 6 c h t e g e r n e, p. 7, n. 4. M 6 n c h, p. 45, n. 5 end. M u t h w i 1 1 e, p. 34, n. 2. M U s s e n for gemust (comp. m 6 ge n), p. 67, n. 1. N. Nach bleiben, p. 228, n. 4. N a c h 1 a s s e n, p. 8, n. 1 p. 167 n. 2. N a c h 1 a s s u n g, p. 9, n. 2. Nachtrag, p. 99, n. 7 end. Nahe, p. 58, n. 1. N a r r e n, p. 1 08, n. 7 p. 205,n.l. N a t Q r 1 i c h, p. 73, n. 1. Negatives, double, p. 148, n. 6 p. 151, n. 1. N e h m e n and its compounds, p. 26, n. 5. N e h m e n, with the dative, p, 52, n. 4 (p. 173, n.l). (Von) n e u e n an, p. 207, n. 5. Neuter pronouns, etc. indefinite, p. 110, n. 3. N i c h t as a noun, p. 35, n. 2. N i c h t mehr denn, p. 75, n. 3. N i c h t s for n i c h t, p. 2, n. 4 p. 9, n. 5 p. 63, n. 1. Nichts geredet, p. 9, n. 6 p. 101, n. 2. Nie, p. 41, n. 2. Nieder, niedergehe n,N ie- derdeutschland, Nie- derhessen, Niederr hein, niederlegen, nieder- t a u c h e n, p. 241, n. 4. Nie K e i n e n, p. 79, n. 1. N i e m al s, p. 41, n. 2. N i e m a n d, p. 8, n. 1 p. 10, n . 5_p. 43, n . 1. N i m m e r, p. 41, n. 2. N i m m e r m e h r, p. 41, n. 2. Nirgends denn, p. 71, n. 5. N o c h, p. 225, n. 3. Nominative after its verb, p. 52, n. 1. Nominative pi. with a verb sing., p. 93, n. 4 p. 112, n. 5. Nominative for the accusative, p. 103, n. 3. Nominative omitted, p. 17, n. 5 p. 18, n. 3 p. 22, n. 4 p. 65, n. 3 p. 69, n. 4 p. 70, n. 5 p. 96, n. 5. N o t h, how construed, p. 162, n. l_p. 247, n . 4. Nun, as a conj. p. 12, n. 4 p. 70, n. 7 p. 131, n. 3. N u r, p. 198, n. 3. O. Ob, p. 16, n. 1 p. 244, n. 6. O b, for o b e n in composition, p. 6, n. 6. O b e n b 1 e i b e n, p. 77, n. 4. Oben liege n, p. 38, n. 4. Comp. p. 77, n. 4. Ob a u c h, p. 244, n. 6. O b e r k e i t, p. 281, n. 2. Oberste, p. 281, n. 2. O b g 1 e i c h, p. 244, n. 6. INDEX TO NOTES. 377 Obschon, p. 244, n. 6. O b r i g k e i t, p. 228, n. 2 p. 281, n. 2. O b w o h i, p. 244, n. 6. Oefnen, p. 164, n. 2. Oe Igo tze, p 140, n. 2. Oesterreich, p. 64, n. 1. Official, p. 143, n. 1. O h n e, p, 226, n. 3. O h n e d a s s, p. 95, n. 3 p. 147, n. 1. Ohne ihren Dank, p. 342, n. 2. Ohne seyn, p. 344, n. 1. Ordeal, p. 43, n.2. O r t, p. 27, n. 2. Orthography, p. 278, note* p. 279, n. 4. P. P a b s t for P a p s t, p. 45, n. 5. P am p e 1 n, p. 311, n. 1. P a n z e r, p. 231, n. 5. Paps t-M o n a t e, p. 115, n. 2, P a r e t for B a r e t, p. 198, n 4. Participle, peculiar use of, p. 15, n. 6 p. 98, n. 3. Participle with an auxiliary verb omitted, p. 19, n. 2 p. 61, n. 3. See Auxiliary. Participle used absolutely, p. 107, n. 5 p. 15, n. 8 p. 98, n. 4. Participle, past, where we use the present, p. 240, n. 3 p. 255, n. 3 p. 283, n. 6. Participle past for the imperative, p. 255, n. 3 p. 299, n. 2 p. 310, n. 1. Particles, compound, separated, p. 182, n. 2 abundant use of, p. 219, n.2. Passive verbs impersonal, p. 218, n. ]. P f for /?, p. 45, n. 5 end. P fa d, p. 45, n. 5 end. P fa if, p. 45, n. 5. P f a r r h e r r, p. 45, n. 5. Pf a u, p. 45, n. 5 end. P f e n n i g, p. 105, n. 6. P f e r s c h e, p. 45, n. 5 end. P 1 a t z, p. 27, n. 2. Platzregen, p. 223, n. 4, 32* Play upon words, p. 110, n. 2 p. n<>, n.2. Position of words, p, 2, n. 5 p. 10, n. 1 and 3 p. 11, n. 1 p. 13, D.I. P r a k t i k, p, 112, n. 4 p. 139, n. 3, Pred i ger, p. 45, n. 5. the fi 2 end. Present for the future, p. 259, n. Pronouns, possessive adjective, when declined, p. 226, n. 3. R. R a se n d, p. 47, n, 4. Rath u n d That, p. 214, n. 2 med. R a t h e n with h e 1 f e n, p, 265, n. 3 p. 267, n. 8. R a t h e n with the dative, p. 251, n. 4. R a t h s h e r r, p. 228, n. 2. R a u m, p. 259, n. 1. R e c h t for g e r e c h t, p. 36, n. 1. Rechtgeschehen, p. 271, n,2. Recht, p, 259, n. 1. Reciprocal pronoun, p. 182, n, 1. Re den (geredet), p. 9, n. 5 p. 14, n. 4, R e d 1 i c h, p. 22, n, 5. Reflective verbs used reciprocally, p. 182, n. 1. Regieren, of ecclesiastical rule, p. 148, n. 4. R e i c h, substantive in composi- tion, p. 64, n. 1. Reich, adj. p. 203, n. 2. Re i ten, p. 153, n. 1. R e 1 1 e n, p. 83, n. 3. R i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 d a h i n r i c h t e n, p. 283, n. 3. Riechen, den Braten, p. 237, n. 4. R u f, p. 42, n. 5. Rufen, p. 42, n. 5. Hols, p. 234, n. 1. R u i n e n, p. 37, n. 4. Racken herum, p. 306, n. 2. (den) Racken h a 1 1 e n, p. 348, n. 4. 378 (s i c h) R U h m e n, p. 103, n. 2 p. 1.10, n. 3. S. S a c h e, p. 58, n. 3. S a t z, p. 43, n. 2 end. S a u f e n, p. 51, n. 1. Sauberlich, p. 105, n. 3. Sch a den, p. 23, n. 7. S c h a ff e n, p. 32, n. 3 p. 220, n. 6 to work, p. 264, n. 3 med. Sch a Ik, p. 36, n. 4. Schal te n, p. 29, n. 4. S c h a n d e, p. 56, n. 3 p. 35, n. 4. Schatz, he ben, p. 106, n. 1. S c h e i t e r and S c h e i t, p. 37, n. 4. S c h e 1 m, p. 36, n. 4. Sche He n, p. 18, n. 6. S c h e u e n, p. 258, n. 2 end. S c h i c k e n, p. 114, n. 3 p. 206, n. 4 end. S inn schicken, p. 259, n. 2 end. d a z u schicken, p. 288, n. 3. S c h i e r, p. 25, n. 5. Schindleich, Schindun- g e r, Schindgrube, p. 182, n. 4. S c h i m p f, p. 56, n. 3. S c h i r m and its compounds, p. 84, n. 5. Schlappern and s c h 1 a b- b e r n, p. 168, n. 3. S c h 1 e c h t, p 39, n. 5 p. 78, n. 3 (p. 247, n. 6) p. 252, n. 5. Schlicht, p. 39, n. 5. S c h 1 i m m, p. 39, n. 5. Seal i tten, p. 258, n. 1. S c h 6 p f e n, p. 32, n. 3. Schopferand Schopfung, p. 32, n. 3. Schla pfern, p. 74, n. 2. S c h m a c h, p. 56, n. 3. S c h m e c k e n, p. J 00, n. 2. S c h o n, p. 225, n. 3. S c h r e c k 1 i c h, p. 24, n. 5. S c hr e i e n, p. 42, n. 5. Schrein, p. 240, n. 4. S c h r i f t, passage of Scripture, p. 6, n. 2. Schuld, p. 246, n. 3. INDEX TO NOTES. S c h u 1 w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. Sch weige denn, p. 168, n. 1. S c h w e r 1 i c h, p. 2. n. 4. Schwulst, p. 50, n. 1. Segen, p. 62, n. 1. Segnen, p. 62, n. 1. Sehen, for gesehen, p. 238, n. 5. Sehen las sen, p. 112, n. 3. Sehen wir zu, p. 105, n. 3 p. 121, n. 1. S e i n, gen. for s e i n e r, p. 46, n. 4 p. 73, n, 4 p. 163, n. 2 p. 196, n. 2 p. 209, n. 5. Selber, p. 103, n. Send. Sen den, p. 114, n. 3. Sententiarien, p. 273, n. 4. Se t ze n, n. 11, n. 5 p. 94, n. 7 p. 124, n. 4. Setzen, causative of sitzen, p. 27, n. 1. (H o c h) s i n g e n, p. 211, 11. 2. S internal, p. 18, n. 9 p. 99, n. 1. S i t z e n, to be in possession of, p. 63, n. 5 p. 298, n. 1. Sled, p. 258, n. 1. Sleigh, p. 258, n. 1. So bald, p. 242, n. 1. So doc h, p. 13, n. 5 p. 59, n. 2. Soein for ein solcher, p. 25, n. 7. So u n d, 50 as, p. 152, n. 4. So fern, p. 97, n. 7. S o 1 c h for s o 1 c h e s, p. 18, n. 8 p. 80, n. 4. Soil u nd m u s s, p. 332, n. 2. S o 1 1 e n, p. 84, n. 1 p. 105, n. 3 how to be translated, p. 148, n.3. S o 1 1 e n, in the sense of h e 1- fe n, p. 123, n. 2 (p. 257, n. 1). Sollen for geso'llt, p. 238, n. 5. S o n de r n, p. 2, n. 7. S o n s t, p. 15, n. 1 p. 74, n. 7 distinguished from a n d e r s, p. 227, n. 2. [n. 1. S o n s t s o, p. 74, n. 7 p. 250, S o r g e, p. 34, n. 3. S o r g e a b e r and f u r, p. 70, n. 1. INDEX TO NOTES. 379 S p a n n e, p. 48, n. 3. S p a n n e n, p. 48, n. 3. Spiegelfechten, p. 209, n. 4. Spiel, p. 112, n. 1. (Unter die) Spiesse lauf- e n, p. 288, n. 3. Spitze, p. 201, n. 4. S p g n i s s, p. 96, n. 1. Starke, p. 54, n. 2 p. 92, n. 1. S t a 1 1, its various uses, p. 41,n.3. s w e s e n, p Statte, p. 41, n. 3. Ste, p. 218, n. 4 end. S t a a t s w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. tte, g, p. Stehen nach, different from nachstehen, p. 286, n. 5 end. (g 1 e i c h) s t e 1 1 e n a 1 s, p. 214, n. 2, near the end. S t e r b e n, with the genitive, p. 68, n. 3. Stiften, p. 50, n. 2. Still and s t i 1 1 e n, p. 23, n. 3. Stille halt en, p. 35, n. 7. Stock, in composition, p. 115, n. 1. S t r a f e n, p. 130, n. 4 p. 75, n. 4 p. 142, n. 4. S t U c k e, p. 138, n. 2 p. 30, n. 1 p. 102, n. 2. S tq c klei n, p. 156, n. 3. Subjunctive, p. 11, n. 4 and p. 13, n. 4 p. 59, n. 3 p. 63, n. 4 p. 99, n. 2. S u m m a, p. 243, n. 2 p. 282, n. Superlative degree with adverbs, p. 171, n. 3 end. Suppe, Hand aus der Suppe ziehen, p. 149, n. 3. T. T a b e r n e, p. 178, n. 6, mid. Tad el, p. 134, n. 1. (e i n e n) Tag, and e i n e s Tags, p. 169, n. 3 d e s T a- ges, p. 264, n. 3. T a u g e n, p. 249, n. 4. Tau glich, p. 145, n. 2. Tausend oder zehn,p. 107, n. 1. Theil, n. 42, n. 3. Thun, various uses of, p. 20, n. 3 p. 127, n. 2 p. 266, n. 2. (zu) Thun haben, p. Ill, n. 3. Thuringian dialect, p. 169, n. 3 p. 180, n. 2. T o b e n, p. 46, n. 2 p. 47, n. 4. Toll, p. 47, n. 4. toll und voll, p. 141, n. 2. (d e s) T o d e s, p. 283, n. 3 p. 68, n. 3. Tragen for eintragen, p 124, n. 5. (Sich) tragen mit, p. 276, n. 1. Tr a n ke n, causative of trink- e n, p. 27, n. 1. (s i c h) t r a u e n, p. 155, n. 3. Traun, p. 318, n. 1. Trefflich, p. 157, n. 1. T r i b u 1 i r e n, p. 143, n. 6. T r i e b, p. 29, n. 1. T r e i b e n, p. 29, n. 1 p. 109, n. 2. Tr ift, p. 29, n. 1. T r i n k e n, p. 51, n. 1. T r o t z, p. 120, n. 1 p. 256, n. 3. T r 6 s t e n, with the gen. p. 295, n. 4. Trostlich, p. 25, n. 1. T r m m e r n, p. 37, n. 4. T Q c h t i g, p. 145, n. 2. U. Uebels thun, different from a b e 1 thun, p. 20, n. 3 p. 23, n. 4. U e b e r h e 1 b e n, p. 162, n. 3. Ueberkoramen, p. 216, n. 3. U e b e r t r e t e n, p. 144, n. 5. U e b r i g g e n u g, p. 108, n. 3. U m, of time and place, p. 41, n. 1 p. 116, n. 1 of exchange, p. 133, n. 1 p. 175, n. 3. U m, double use of, p. 183, n. 2. (Sich) um Einen Ver- di e n t m a c h e n, p. 247, n. 6. U m d e s s w i 1 1 e n, p. 246, n. 4. (Thut sehr) um seinen F r e u n d, p. 247, n. 6. U m dieLiebe, ein sonder- bares Ding, p. 247, n. 6. Uebel um ihn,p. 247, n. 6. 380 INDEX TO NOTES. Um raich geschehen, p. p. 247, n. 6. [35, n. 5. U m z u t h u n, p. 20, n. 3 p. Umbringen, p. 57, n. 1 p. 176, n. 6. U m g e h e n, p. 102, n. 4. U ra h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. Umherziehen, 316, n. 1. Umbringen, p. 57, n. 3 p. 176, n. 6. U m s H e r t z, p. 247, n. 6. U n a n g e s e h e n, p. 7, n. 6. Unausmesslich, p. 135, n. 4. U n d, when omitted, p. 66, n. 1 p. 93, n. 4 how differing from and, p. 248, n. 1 . Uneigentlich, p. 45, n. 3. Unerschrocken, with the gen., p. 298, n. 2. U n g e f a h r, p. 245, n. 1 . U n g e r a t h e n, p. 38, n. 3. Ungescheuet, p. 281, n. 9. Ungeschickt d a z u, p. 230, n. 2. U n g e z i e f e r, p. 229, n. 7. Ungezogen and u n e r z o- gen, p. 229, n. 6. Ungleich, p. 163, n. 3. Unter, unterge hen, Unter- italien, Unteragypten, unterliegen, untertau- chen, p. 241, n. 4. (sich) Unter fan gen, p. 155, n. 3. Unterliegen, p. 38, n. 4. Unternehmen, p. 26, n. 5. sich unter nehmen, p. 155, n. 3. Unterrichten, p. 50, n. 2. (sich) U n t e r s t e h e n, p. 155, n. 3. [n. 1. Unterwegen lassen,p. 227, (sich) Unter winden, p. 155, n. 3 (p. 244, n. 4). Untflchtig, p. 145, n. 2. U n v e r w o r f e n, p. 5, n. 5. U n w e i s 1 i c h, p. 75, n. 2. U r s a c h e, p. 22, n. 2. Urtheil, p. 43, n. 2. V. Valete, p. 135, n. 3. Ver achten, p. 33, n. 4. Verandern, p. 28, n. 3. Verb auxiliary, see Auxiliary. Verbs, causative, p. 27, n. 1. Verderben, p. 68, n. 4. Verdriessen and Verdruss, p. 30, n. 3. Verdrtlcken, p. 34, n. 4. Ver fallen, p. 125, n. 3. Vergebens, p. 51, n. 3. Verheissen and Verheis- s u n g, p. 26, n. 3 p. 31 , n. 2. (S i c h) v e r h o ffe n, p. 265, n. 6. Verl as sen, p. 54, n. 1. V e r m a 1 e d e i e n, p. 62, n. 2. Vermessen, p. 281, n. 9. Ver mi ssen, p. 263, n. 1. Vermogen, p. 24, n. 1. Vernehmen, p. 250, n. 7. Vernichten, p. 84, n. 2. Verrichten, p. 50, n. 2. Versaumen, p. 174, n. 1. V e r s c h m a h e n, p. 33, n. 4. Versehen, p. 222, n. 6 (p. 240, n . 6) sich versehen, p. 296, n. 1. Verzichten, p. 165, n. 7. Versprechung, p. 26, n. 3 p. 31, n. 2 to revile, p. 33, n. Versuchung, p. 22, n. 1. Vertilgen, p. 84, n. 2. Ver tre ibe n, p. 40, n. 1. Ver wait en, p. 29, n. 4. V e r w a n d e 1 n, p. 28, n. 3. V e r w e 1 k e n, p. 24, n. 3. Verzeihen, p. 165, n. 7. V i e 1, governing the gen. p. 10, n. 1 p. 52, n. 3 p. 110, n. 4. VielWesensmachen, p. 72, n. 2. V i e 1 e n, position (5f, p. 145, n. 5. V i e 1 1 e i c h t, p. 245, n. 1. Vielerlei, p. 3, n. 4. Viel for sehr, p. 19, n. 2. V i g i 1 i e n, fern. sing. p. 169, n. 3. Voll, p. 141. n. 2. Vollauf, p.'301, n. 1. Von Statten gehen, p. 41, n. 3. V o r, on account of, p. 230, n. 4. V o r and fa r, p. 6, n. 4. INDEX TO NOTES. 381 Vor A Here, p. 113, n. 1. Vor Zei ten, p. 113, n. 1. Vor diesein, p. 113, n. 1. V o r b e i (g e h e n), p. 35, n. 3. Vordem, p. 113, n. 1. Vorgeben, p. 99, n. 7. V o r h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. Vorschreiben, p. 32, n. 5. Vortrefflich, p. 157, n. 1 . V o r ra al s, p. 113, n. 1. Vorwenden, p. 99, n. 7 p. 136, n. 1. Examples, p. 93 line 9_p. 47, line 3. Vor witz, p. 93, n. 1, W. W a c h s e n, p. 25, n. 7. Waif en, p. 49, n. 3. Was, p. 98, n. 5. Was s o n s t, p. 15, n. 1. W alien, p. 156, n. 1. Wai ten, p. 29, n. 4. W a n d e 1 n and W a n d e 1, p. p. 28, n. 3. Wandern, p. 156, n. 1. W a r t e n, p. 39, n. 2 p. 224, n. W a h n e n, p. 47, n. 2. Was far e i n, p. 53, n. 1. W e c h s e 1, p. 28, n. 3. W e g (g e h e n), p. 35, n. 3. W e h r e n, p. 98, n. 7 p. 146, n. 4 p. 218, n. 3 (p. 237, n. 4). Ihm zu w e h r e n, p. 261, n. 3. W e i c h 1 i n g, p. 34, n. 3. Weil, p. 104, n. 1 p. 215, n. 1. We it, p. 3, n. 1. W e 1 c h x for w e 1 c h e r, p. 80, n. 4. Welcher, p. 44, n. 3. Welsch, p. 104, n. 3. W e n d e n, p. 136, n. 1 p. 218, n. 4. W e ni g, p. 55, n. 3. W e n i g e r, with the gen. p. 108, n. 1. Wenn, p. 97, n. 7. Wenn auch, p. 244, n. 6. Wenn g 1 e i c h, p. 244, n. 6. Wenn s c h o n, p. 244, n. 6. Wenn zwar, p. 244, n. 6. W er, p. 40, n. 1 p. 98, n. 5 in- definite whoever, p. 224, n. 2 p. 292, n. 1. W e r, distinguished from d e r and w e 1 c h e r, p. 14, n. 5. Werkstatt, p. 41, n. 3. Wesen, p. 26, n.1 p.66,n. 1 (difficulty) p. 72, n. S p. 97, n. 1 . - in composition, p. 72, n.2. Wess ist die Schuld, p. 246, n. 3. W ider, p. 46, n. 1. Wider fechter, p. 246, n. 1. W i d e r p a r t, p. 34, n. 5. Widersacher, p. 59, n. 4 p. 246, n. 1. W i d e r t h i e 1, p. 79, n. 2. W i e d e r u m, p. 271, n. 2 end p. 243, n. 1. . Wilde Kapellen,p.l78,n.l. W i ese, p. 57, n. 4. K (In) Wind" schlagen, p. 202, n. 2 (p. 222, n. 4) p. 268, n. 1. Wirker, p. 187, n. 4. Wirthshaus, p. 65, n. 1. W i s c h e n, p. 67, n. 3. W is sen, p. 54, n. 6. W o, if, p. 97, n. 7 p. 99, n. 3 p. 101, n. 3 for w i e, p. 229, n. 1. W o h i n, p. 244, n. 3 w o h i- n a u s, p. 305, n. 1. W o f e r n, p. 97, n. 7. Wo hi, like gut, p. 12, n. 4 distinguished from g u t, p. 13, n. 6 p. 33, n. 1. concessive, p. 13, n. 1. Wohlfahren, Wohlfahrt, p. 30, n. 4. Wohlgefallen,p.31,n. 1. Wohlthat, p. 33, n. 1. Wohnen, Wohnung and Wohnsitz, p. 28, r.2. W o 1 1 e n, p. 32, n. 2 p. 218, n. 3 p. 258, n. 3. for ge- wolt, p. 238, n. 5. Wollust, p. 30, n.2. Wrack, p. 37, n. 4. Wucher, p. 133, n. 4. i Wundern, p. 283, n. 4 382 INDEX TO NOTES. Wtinschen, p. 32, n. 1. Wu th, p. 38, n. 1. W (i t h e n, p. 46, n. 2 p. 47, n.4. Z. Ziehen for e rzi ehen, p.225, n. 3 end. Zorn, p. 38, n. 1. Zu, pointing out destination, p. 78, n. 4 p. 94, n. 2 p. 97, n. 4 p. 104, n. 6. Z u for u m z u, with the infini- tive, p. 95, n. 2. Zu nichte, p. 35, n. 2. Zu Statten kommen, p. 41, n. 3. Zubringen, p. 264, n. 3 end. Z u e i g n e n, p. 100, n. 1. Zuf alien, p. 349, n. 3. Zugehen, p. 68, n. 4 p. 130, n. 2 (p. 235, n. 2) p. 264, n. 1. Zuhoren, p. 26, n. 3. Zum ersten, p. 1, n. 2. Z u r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 p. 221, n. 3. Z U men, p. 21, n. 2. Zusagung, Z usage, p. 31, n. 2. Z u s a t z, p. 99, n. 7 end p. 206, n. 2. Zuschmelzen, p. 284, n. 4 end. Zusehens and zusehends, p. 40, n. 1. Zuthun, p. 163, n. 5 (p. 235, n. 3). Z u v o r, p. 92, n. 2 p. 93, n. 4. Z w a r, p. 236, n. 3. Z w e i e r 1 e i, p. 3, n. 4. Zwo and Zwei, p. 100, n. 3 p. 49, n. 1. END. 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 76%r'62KC KEC'D LD MAK Zl I9toi !6Apr'63Jfc ..'."*. v ^- ~C'D LD ' AP/ 2 1963 rUffl^ --* ? ' ; M i Jr I RfcXTD DD MAR 30'64 -2 PN LD 21A-50m-8,'61 (C1795slO)476B General Library University of California Berkeley UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY